JP2023105139A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing an interest in a game.SOLUTION: There is provided displacement means displaceable to a first position in which game balls can enter second ball entry means and a second position in which game balls cannot easily enter the second ball entry means. The displacement means is displaced from the second position to the first position on the basis of satisfaction of a first condition in a specific game state occurring on the basis that a result of determination by determination means is a specific determination result, and the displacement means is displaced from the first position to the second position on the basis of satisfaction of a second condition in a situation in which the displacement means is positioned in the first position by first displacement control. When game balls enter first ball entry means, a predetermined game value is granted to a player. A first mode based on execution of determination, a second mode based on occurrence of a specific game state, and a third mode based on predetermined entry of game balls into the second ball entry means can at least occur. Accordingly, an interest in a game can be enhanced.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine represented by a pachinko machine.

Some gaming machines, such as pachinko machines, aim to increase the interest of the player in the game by suggesting to the player that the lottery result is winning according to the contents of the variable performance that is executed. be.

JP-A-2006-345901

In the gaming machines as described above, there is a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of enhancing the interest of a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine of the present invention comprises shooting means capable of shooting a game ball into a game area, first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entering means is established, and the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means can be stored. storage means, and determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination by the determination means is A means capable of generating a specific game state based on a specific determination result, and a game ball fired by the shooting means can be entered, and is different from the first ball entering means. A second ball entering means, a first position for allowing a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a game ball entering the second ball entering means from the first position. a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means to the second position.

Then, the displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and the displacement means moves to the first position by the first displacement control. It is configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in the situation in which the vehicle is positioned.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player at least when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and At least a first mode based on the execution of the determination, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific gaming state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means occur. configured to be able to

According to the gaming machine of the present invention, the shooting means capable of shooting the game ball to the game area, the first ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and the first ball entering means Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the entry of a game ball is established; Storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means; determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied, and the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. Means capable of generating a specific game state based on what happened, and second ball entering means different from the first ball entering means, wherein the game ball launched by the launching means can be entered. a first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means; and a second position that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first position. a displacement means capable of being displaced between two positions; a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and the displacement means positioned at the first position. to the second position; and displacement control means capable of executing at least:

Then, the displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and the displacement means moves to the first position by the first displacement control. It is configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in the situation in which the vehicle is positioned.

Further, the gaming machine of the present invention is configured such that a predetermined value is given to the player at least when a game ball enters the first ball entering means, and It is configured such that at least a first mode based on the execution of the determination can occur.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is constructed so that at least the second mode can occur based on the occurrence of the specific game state.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is constructed so that at least the third mode based on a predetermined ball entering the second ball entering means can occur.

Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a front perspective view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. (a) and (b) are front perspective views of a variable winning device. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a base plate, a variable winning device, a collection gutter, and a sorting device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the base plate, the variable winning device, the collecting gutter and the sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is an exploded front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a receiving member and a sorting device. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; FIG. 16 is a sectional view of the variable winning device and the sorting device taken along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. 15; It is a front view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16; FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; (a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, (b) is a schematic diagram showing the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter and the jackpot type in the special symbol and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter and the winning in the normal symbol. It is the figure which showed time-measurement change of the operation|movement pattern of the opening-and-closing board of the variable winning device of the 1st round in each jackpot classification, and the operation|movement pattern of the slide displacement member of a sorting device. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the operating unit; It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit showing an example of the operation of the operation unit. Fig. 3 is a front perspective view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear perspective view of the first operating unit; 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the first motion unit; FIG. FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit; It is a front view of the 1st operation|movement unit in a production|presentation standby state. It is a back view of the 1st operation|movement unit in a production|presentation standby state. FIG. 41 is a side view of the first operation unit viewed in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 40; FIG. 11 is a front view of the first action unit in an intermediate effect state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first action unit in an intermediate rendering state; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 11 is a rear view of the first operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a displacement amount and a displacement angle of a supported member accompanying rotational displacement of a rotational member; 4(a) and 4(b) are schematic diagrams showing the magnitude relationship of the amount of displacement on the driven side of the supported member when the rotating member rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity. FIG. FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing changes in angles accompanying rotation of a rotating member; FIG. 4 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case and the second operation unit; FIG. 4 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case and the second operation unit; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. be. (a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame taken along the LIVa-LIVa line in FIG. 30, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit and the center frame taken along the LIVb-LIVb line in FIG. be. It is an exploded front perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. It is an exploded back perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (a) and (b) are front views of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a linear motion plate member, and a shaft rotation member. 57(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the vertically reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a); FIG. 3B is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate, the upside-down reversing member, the intermediate arm member, the linear motion plate member, and the shaft rotating member taken along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. (a) to (c) are front views of the production device. FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; FIG. 11 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operating unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are rear views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. (a) and (b) are front views of an outer rotary member and an intermediate arm member. 4 is a timing chart showing, in chronological order, an example of an arrangement of an elevating arm member, a drive mode of a drive motor, and an output of a detection sensor; FIG. 29 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28; (a) to (d) are schematic front views of action units for schematically explaining an example of a combined action of each action unit in chronological order. (a) to (d) are schematic front views of action units for schematically explaining an example of a combined action of each action unit in chronological order. It is a front perspective view of a sorting device. It is a front view of a variable winning device and a sorting device. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device and the sorting device as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16; FIG. 74 is a cross-sectional view of the variable prize winning device and the sorting device along line LXXV-LXXV of FIG. 73; FIG. 76 is a cross-sectional view of the middle member, slide displacement member, lower member and detection sensor of the sorting device taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. 75; (a) to (d) are front perspective views of an intermediate member of the sorting device. FIG. 4A is a top view of the intermediate member, the state switching device, the slide displacement member, and the lower member; (a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 79, and (c) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member, the slide displacement member, and the lower member taken along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc of FIG. 78. FIG. (a) and (b) are side views of a slide displacement member and a ball riding on the upper surface of the ball guide. (a) is a front view of the rotating member, (b) is a rear view of the rotating member, and (c) is a side view of the rotating member as viewed in the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 81(a). is. FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; FIG. 4 is a front view of the first operating unit; Fig. 10 is a rear view of the first operating unit; (a) and (b) are rear views of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. (a) and (b) are rear views of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the elongated guide hole, the dish-shaped lid, the detection sensor, and the extension of the transmission gear cam; It is a front perspective view of a first decorative rotary member and a second decorative rotary member. (a) and (b) are front schematic views schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhang decorative portion. (a) and (b) are front schematic views schematically showing a guide slot, a rectangular box portion, and an overhang decorative portion. It is a front schematic diagram which shows a guidance long hole, a rectangular-shaped box part, and an overhang decoration part typically. FIG. 86 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit taken along line XCIII-XCIII of FIG. 85; FIG. 11 is a front view of the second operation unit in an extended state; FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second operating unit along line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94; FIG. 4 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member and a shaft rotating member; FIG. 4 is a front view of a transmission device holding plate, an upside down member, an intermediate arm member, a direct acting plate member and a shaft rotating member; It is a front perspective view of the up-and-down reversal effect device. (a) is a front perspective view of an intermediate arm member, and (b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of the third motion unit, schematically showing displacements of the metal rod and the intermediate arm member; It is a front schematic diagram of a 3rd operation|movement unit. FIG. 4 is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member; (a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member, and (b) is a front view of the outer rotating member and the intermediate arm member. FIG. 11 is a front view of a third operating unit; FIG. 11 is a front view of a third operating unit; FIG. 106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105; FIG. 105 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit taken along line CVII-CVII in FIG. 104; FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the second embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVI-XVI of FIG. 15; (a) and (b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device in the third embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVII-XVII in FIG. (a) and (b) schematically shows the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path configuration part in the fourth embodiment, the variable probability detection sensor, the normal detection sensor, and the slide displacement member. It is a top view. (a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path constituting portion, the variable probability detection sensor, the normal detection sensor and the slide displacement member along the CXIa-CXIa line in FIG. ) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path constituting portion, the variable probability detection sensor, the normal detection sensor and the slide displacement member along the line CXIb-CXIb. (a) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device in the fifth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device in the sixth embodiment along the line corresponding to line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15; It is a front perspective view of the sorting device in 7th Embodiment. FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device taken along line CXV-CXV of FIG. 114; It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide long hole and rotation member in 8th Embodiment. It is a front schematic diagram which shows typically the relationship between the guide long hole and rotation member in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the first control example. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect during the jackpot executed during the jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect during the jackpot executed during the jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect during the jackpot executed during the jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the winning rate UP zone effect executed after the end of the jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the winning rate UP zone effect executed after the end of the jackpot game. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a battle mode effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a battle mode effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a battle mode effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of a battle mode effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an operation effect. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an operation effect. (a) to (e) are diagrams showing the flow of effects after a big win to a big win game. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the flow of effects after a big win to a big win game. (a) to (d) are diagrams showing the flow of the effect mode of the operation effect. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the first control example. FIG. 4 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the first control example; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, (b) is a first per random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the first win type selection table set in the ROM of the main control device in the first control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a second winning random number table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example, and (b) is the main controller in the first control example. is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the variation pattern selection table set in the ROM, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing the specified contents of the normal table in the first control example. (a) to (e) are diagrams schematically showing defined contents of various data tables included in a variation pattern selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing defined contents of a variation pattern scenario selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the first control example; It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of RAM of the main-control apparatus in the 1st control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; be. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a win rate selection table set in the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in a first control example; FIG. (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image. (a) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surface A, and (b) is an explanatory diagram for explaining the rear surfaces BD. FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the first control example; FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation process performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. It is the flowchart which showed the special design fluctuation|variation start processing performed by MPU in the main-control apparatus in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a starting prize-winning process executed by an MPU in a main controller in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing prefetching processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the first control example. 4 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 4 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in the main controller in the first control example; 7 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the jackpot control processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 1st example of control. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. 10 is a flow chart showing a pressing effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing round effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; 9 is a flow chart showing effect mode changing processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting process during hitting performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. It is the flowchart which showed the prize ball related processing which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing additional effect mode setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing battle variation display setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the time reduction production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 1st control example. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing a win rate UP zone effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing an effect setting process after the first time, which is executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the first control example; FIG. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing final winning percentage determination processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing battle effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 4 is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example 10 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing ending command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (b) is a flowchart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flow chart showing error command processing performed. 8 is a flow chart showing a number addition related command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing display setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 9 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a) is a flowchart showing a transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 10 is a flowchart showing resident image transfer setting processing; 10 is a flowchart showing normal image transfer setting processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; 8 is a flowchart showing drawing processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the first control example; (a), (b) is a diagram showing an example of the display mode of the effect during the jackpot executed during the jackpot game in the second control example. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the second control example; be. It is the figure which showed typically the defined content of the additional effect|presentation selection table set to ROM of the sound lamp control apparatus in the 2nd control example. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation timer update process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in a 2nd control example. 10 is a flow chart showing additional effect mode setting processing 2 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the second control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect during the jackpot executed during the jackpot game in the third control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of the display mode of the effect during the jackpot executed during the jackpot game in the third control example. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the third control example; It is the flowchart which showed the production|presentation setting process 3 during hitting performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 3rd control example. 13 is a flow chart showing round effect setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; 13 is a flow chart showing additional effect mode setting processing 3 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the third control example; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an effect that is executed during the winning rate UP zone in the fourth control example. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an effect that is executed during the winning rate UP zone in the fourth control example; FIG. 12 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing repeated hit effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 4 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fourth control example; FIG. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an effect executed during the battle mode in the fifth control example. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of an effect executed during the battle mode in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation control in the 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a block diagram showing a configuration of a RAM of the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing command determination 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing confirmation processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is the flowchart which showed the time reduction production|presentation setting process 5 performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing display point setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a count-related command process 5 executed by the MPU in the display control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an effect executed during the battle mode in another example of the fifth control example; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an effect executed during the battle mode in another example of the fifth control example; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an effect executed during the battle mode in another example of the fifth control example; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display mode of an effect executed during the battle mode in another example of the fifth control example; It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in Embodiment A1. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a V winning device in the A1 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing a V winning device in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a movable guide member in the A1 embodiment; (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode that does not result in a pseudo run displayed by the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation|variation aspect which does not become a pseudo run displayed with the 3rd design display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the variation|variation aspect of the pseudo-run 1 displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st Embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of variation of button effects during pseudo-continuous development displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation|variation aspect of the button production|presentation at the time of pseudo|simulated continuous development displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. (a) and (b) are diagrams showing an example of a variation mode when the V-attacker opens immediately after the symbols displayed on the third symbol display device in the A1 embodiment are stopped. It is the figure which showed an example of the variation|variation aspect at the time of V attacker releasing immediately after the symbol stop displayed by the 3rd symbol display apparatus in 1st A1 embodiment. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of various counters in the A1 embodiment; (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a ROM of a main control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a RAM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first per random number table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is a special symbol 1 random number table in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the defined content, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the defined content of the special symbol 2 random number table in the A1 embodiment, (d) in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal design random number table. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the first hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, (b) is a special figure 1 jackpot type in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the selection table, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a small hit type selection table set in the ROM of the main controller in the A1 embodiment, (b) is a special figure 1 small hit type in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the selection table, (c) is a diagram schematically showing the stipulated content of the special figure 2 small hit type selection table in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of a variation pattern table set in the ROM of the main control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is the normal variation pattern table definition content in the A1 embodiment It is a diagram schematically showing the. 10 is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of a time saving variation pattern table in the A1 embodiment. FIG. , It is a diagram illustrating each winning type and the operation content of the winning game in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the jackpot scenario table in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing the defined contents of the small winning scenario table in the A1 embodiment. and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot scenario a in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a winning scenario a in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a winning scenario b in the A1 embodiment. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the winning scenario c in 1st Embodiment. 3(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM of the audio ramp control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is the block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM of the audio ramp control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. . It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the game flow in 1st Embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing when the small hit V passes in the A1 embodiment. (a) ~ (i) is a timing chart showing a small hit V non-passing time in the A1 embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing when the jackpot V passes in the A1 embodiment. (a) to (i) are timing charts showing when the jackpot V does not pass in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 11 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a display control device in Embodiment A1; (a) to (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a power-on image in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a display data table in the A1 embodiment; FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table in the A1 embodiment; FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a drawing list in the A1 embodiment; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small hit start setting process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the starting prize-winning process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the prefetching process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows through gate passage processing which is performed by MPU in main control unit in the A1st embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows V passage processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing performed by MPU in main control unit in a 1st embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a jackpot control process performed by MPU in the main controller in 1st A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows specific jackpot control processing performed by MPU in a main control device in a 1st embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the jackpot ending control processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning control process executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a flow chart showing a small winning ending control process executed by the MPU in the main controller in the A1 embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the A1 embodiment; 10 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a win-related process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the A1 embodiment; It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring / effect|presentation process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing boot processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment; (a) is a flowchart showing a command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment 4 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing; 10 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment 8 is a flowchart showing stop type command processing; (a) is a flowchart showing rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, and (b) is a flow chart executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. 10C is a flow chart showing error command processing that is executed by an MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment; FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot start command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing round number command processing; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing a jackpot end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment It is a flow chart showing small hit start command processing. (a) is a flowchart showing a small winning end command process executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment, (b) is executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment 4 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage command processing. 13 is a flow chart showing V effect command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device in the A1 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A2 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the sorting apparatus in 2nd Embodiment. (a) to (d) are diagrams schematically showing the inside of a sorting device B700 in the A2 embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A3 embodiment. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the croon member in 3rd embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the A4 embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the flow-path unit in 4th embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. (a) and (b) are the figures which showed an example of the display mode of the roulette chance displayed with the 3rd pattern display apparatus in 4th Embodiment. It is the block diagram which showed the structure of RAM of the main-control apparatus in 4th A embodiment. (a) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when the small winning V is passed in the A4 embodiment, and (b) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when the big winning V is passed in the A4 embodiment. is. (a) is a timing chart showing the roulette display timing when the small winning V is not passed in the A4 embodiment, and (b) is a roulette display timing when the big winning V is not passed in the A4 embodiment. It is a timing chart. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 2 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the A4th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the condition apparatus determination process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th embodiment. It is a diagram showing a V winning device in the A5th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific big-hit control processing 3 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th A5 embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the specific jackpot control processing 4 performed by MPU in the main controller in 5th Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a fifth control example; It is a transition diagram schematically showing the transition of the game state of the pachinko machine in the fifth control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the effect mode of a series of effects in the fifth control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts showing the game content and the effect mode of the final variable effect in the fifth control example. (a) is a diagram schematically showing the display content displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (b) is displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of normal figure fluctuation production|presentation. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode in which the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed in the main display area of the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a view in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the screen per normal figure displayed on a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of special 2 winning during special 1 fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the production|presentation (challenge game) during special 2 fluctuation|variation displayed on a 3rd pattern display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode when a small hit is won with the special 2 variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of winning a big win during the small win displayed on a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when a special 2 prize is won during a special 1 non-fluctuation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation mode at the time of winning small hit by special 2 fluctuation|variation displayed on the 3rd pattern display apparatus in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time point of 1 second from the start of the game per normal pattern displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a fifth control example. It is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode when the ball does not enter the second winning hole during the normal figure winning game displayed on the third symbol display device in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode at the time of 3 seconds from the start of the small winning game displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect when a ball|ball does not win a prize in V winning a prize mouth during the small hit game displayed on a 3rd design display device. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (b) is an effect displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time saving state displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the third symbol display device in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the time saving final fluctuation|variation displayed. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode of the first half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) is the third symbol in the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect of the latter half production|presentation of the time saving final variation displayed on a display apparatus. (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode showing the effect result of the second half effect of the time saving final variation displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, and (b) is a view of the fifth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time-saving final fluctuation production|presentation displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in . (a) is a diagram showing an example of the production mode at the time of special 2 hit after the end of the time saving displayed on the third symbol display device in the fifth control example, (b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode in the fifth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the result display mode of the time-saving final fluctuation|variation production|presentation displayed on a 3 design display apparatus. It is the figure which showed an example of the production|presentation aspect which shows the completion|finish of a time saving state displayed on the 3rd design display apparatus in the 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an overview of various counters in the fifth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the fifth control example; (b) is a part of the contents of the RAM of the main controller in the fifth control example; It is the schematic diagram which showed the part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the first winning random number 5 table in the fifth control example, (b) schematically shows the contents of the special symbol 1 random number 5 table in the fifth control example (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special symbol 2 random number 5 table in the fifth control example, (d) schematically shows a random number 5 table per normal symbol It is a schematic diagram. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example, (b) is a schematic diagram of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table in the fifth control example (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table in the fifth control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the type selection 5 table per normal pattern in the fifth control example, (b) is the release of electric accessories based on the type per normal pattern and the game state It is the figure which showed the content of operation|movement. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a small hit type selection 5 table in the fifth control example, (b) schematically shows a special figure 1 small per type selection 5 table in the fifth control example It is a schematic diagram shown, (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a special figure 2 small per type selection 5 table in the fifth control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table in the 5th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern 5 table in the fifth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the normal variation pattern 5 table in the fifth control example. be. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a time-saving variation pattern 5 table, which is a part of the variation pattern selection table in the fifth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram showing a variation pattern selection 5 table in the fifth control example, and (b) schematically shows a time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table in the fifth control example It is a schematic diagram. 14 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart showing a special symbol variation start process 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. It is a flow chart which shows time saving update processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the example of the 5th control. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit start setting process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 5th control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing start winning process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing prefetching process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing through gate passage processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows normal figure prefetching processing performed by MPU in the main control unit in the 5th example of control. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V entrance passage processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing V passing processing 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a start-up process executed by an MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in the main control unit in the fifth control example; FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a jackpot control process 5 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the small winning control process 5 performed by MPU in the main controller in the 5th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 5 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing winning state determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 5 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot related command process performed by MPU in a sound lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. (a) is a flowchart showing a small hit-related command process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example, (b) is by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example It is a flow chart showing a normal small winning process to be executed. It is a flow chart which shows a series of effect small winning process executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing a variable effect setting process executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the effect setting processing for normal figure executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example. It is a flowchart which shows the production|presentation setting processing for time reduction performed by MPU in an audio|voice lamp control apparatus in a 5th control example. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a winning variation effect setting process executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 5 executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a series of effect update processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. (a) is a flowchart showing update processing during game per normal figure executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example, (b) is a flow chart in the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example It is a flow chart which shows update processing during a small hit game performed by MPU. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing final variation effect update processing executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the fifth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing a game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of an effect mode during the time saving final variation in the sixth control example, (b) is an effect during the support time displayed on the third symbol display device in the sixth control example It is the figure which showed an example of the aspect. FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of a ROM of the main controller in the sixth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the type selection 6 table per normal pattern in the sixth control example, (b) is an electric role based on the type and game state per normal pattern in the sixth control example It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of opening operation|movement of an object. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 6 table in the sixth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal figure fluctuation pattern table in the sixth control example, (b) schematically shows a normal figure fluctuation pattern table for time saving A in the sixth control example It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram which showed typically the normal figure fluctuation pattern for time saving B in the 6th control example. It is a flow chart showing normal symbol variation processing 6 executed by the MPU in the main control device in the sixth control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a normal figure effect setting process 6 executed by the MPU in the main controller in the sixth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example; It is an enlarged view schematically enlarging the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. It is an enlarged view schematically enlarging the right side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) and (b) are timing charts schematically showing the flow of presentation of the pachinko machine in the seventh control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing part of the contents of the ROM of the main controller in the seventh control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the seventh control example. It is the schematic diagram which showed a part typically. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a normal variation pattern 7 table in the seventh control example. be. It is the schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 7 table in the 7th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing stop command processing 7 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing a variable display setting process 7 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing set effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the normal figure set production|presentation setting process performed by MPU in the sound lamp control apparatus in the 7th control example. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing effect update processing 7 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the seventh control example; FIG. It is the figure which showed the setting method of the series production|presentation in the 7th control example. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the content of the normal map scenario table in the 8th control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow in which scenario 2 per normal figure is set as a series of production scenarios in the eighth control example. It is the timing chart which showed the flow which scenario 4 per normal figure is set as a series production scenario in the 8th control example. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a series of effect determination processing executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing win-related command processing 8 executed by an MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. It is a flow chart which shows per normal figure related command processing which is performed by MPU in an audio lamp control device in the 8th example of control. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a variation effect setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing constant monitoring effect setting processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a normal figure effect setting process 8 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing a series of performance prediction setting processing executed by the MPU in the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example; FIG. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of the contents of the ROM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example, and (b) is the contents of the RAM of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example. is a schematic diagram schematically showing a part of. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final variation effect table in the ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a winning final table in the ninth control example. FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final table for deviation in the ninth control example; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a final effect variable setting table in a ninth control example, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a win setting table in a ninth control example. . FIG. 22 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a deviation setting table in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a flow chart showing command determination processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing winning information command processing 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing final winning processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing a time-saving effect setting process 9 executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing final variation effect update processing 9 executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device in the ninth control example; FIG. 21 is a front view schematically showing the game board of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example; (a) is a diagram showing an example of a right-handed notification screen in the first notification mode displayed on the third symbol display device in the tenth control example, and (b) is a third control example in the tenth control example. It is the figure which showed an example of the right hitting information screen in the 2nd information mode displayed on a pattern display apparatus. FIG. 21 is a front view schematically showing a game board of a pachinko machine in a modification of the seventh control example; FIG. 22 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of the performance of the pachinko machine in the modified example of the seventh control example;

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko game machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as a first embodiment with reference to FIGS. 1 to 71. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

In the following description, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the front side of the paper is defined as the front (front) side, and the back side of the paper is defined as the rear (rear) side. Also, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. ) side. Further, arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the up-down direction, left-right direction, and front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63 and 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. Balls (game balls) flow down in front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13, and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are respectively released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface, and the upper tray 17 discharges prize balls, rental balls, and the like. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the inclination guides the ball thrown into the upper tray 17 to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, an indicator lamp 34 is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). The display lamp 34 has a built-in light emitting means such as an LED and can indicate that prize balls are being paid out and that an error has occurred.

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, and a large number of nails for guiding balls (shown below the center frame 86, and in the upper half of the game area). ) and windmills (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display unit 80 and the like are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and allows the player to visually recognize various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and tapping screws or the like are installed from the front side of the game board 13. is fixed by

Note that the base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side can be shielded so as to be invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be viewed from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the balls shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left part of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left part in FIG. 2). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly according to whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 140, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 4R probability variable jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “4R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds, and a time-saving state during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). be.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game that is easy to shift to a special game state It is the state of In the high-probability state (during variable probability) in this embodiment, the probability of a big hit increases during a predetermined number of variations (100 variations in this embodiment), and the probability of a second symbol to be described later increases. It includes a game state in which the ball is likely to enter the prize winning opening 140.例文帳に追加"Low probability state" refers to a state in which the odds are not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the odds are variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and the jackpot probability remains as it is, only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, and the second winning port 140 It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is likely to win a prize. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it means that the game is in a state of neither variable probability nor time reduction (state in which neither the jackpot probability nor the second pattern winning probability is increased).

In this embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300 described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the game state after the jackpot game ends varies by 100 During the number of times, it will be in a high probability state. In addition, if it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the end of the jackpot game becomes a time saving state for 100 variations.

During the probability change or the time reduction, not only the probability of winning the second symbol is increased, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. and a long time is set. When the electric role product 140a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 140 more than when the electric role product 140a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 during the probability change or during the time saving, or in addition to changing the opening time, A change may be made to increase the number of times the accessory 140a is released more than during normal times. In addition, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed during the probability change or the time reduction, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a associated with the second winning opening 140 is opened and when it hits once. At least one of the number of times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit are not set. Only the probability may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display device unit 80, the winning (starting winning) to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 is used as a trigger, and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the third symbol is displayed. It is composed of a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67. A second pattern display device (not shown) is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

In this embodiment, the third pattern display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 so as to fill an opening 511a of the rear case 510, which will be described later, and the center frame 86 is arranged to frame the window of the base plate 60. is set. That is, when viewed from the front, it appears that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81, but in reality, the third pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86 are spaced apart in the front and rear direction. It is

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display of 9-inch size, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle and lower are displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second pattern display device alternately lights up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as a display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) for a predetermined time each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. This is for variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device stops and displays the symbol "○" after the second symbol is variably displayed. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning hole 140 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the variable probability or during the time saving than during the normal gaming state. As a result, the variable display of the second symbol is performed in a short time during the probability change and the time reduction, so that more winning lotteries can be performed than during normal times. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 140a of the second winning opening 140.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the probability variation and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time or the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a for one hit, etc. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than normal during the variable probability or during the time saving, the winning probability may be constant regardless of the game state, and one winning The opening time and the number of openings of the electric accessory 140a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the ball shot to the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B described above, and is displayed on the second symbol suspension lamp (not shown). is also displayed. Four second pattern holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third pattern display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, the maximum number of held balls to pass through the through gate 67 is not limited to four times, and may be set to three times or less, or five times or more (for example, eight times). Also, the number of through gates 67 to be assembled is not limited to two, and may be, for example, one. Also, the mounting position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right and left sides of the variable display unit 80, and may be below the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning hole 64 through which balls can win is arranged. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the first prize winning port 64 in a front view, a second prize winning port 140 through which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball enters the second winning hole 140, a second winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the second winning hole switch. (See FIG. 4), a lottery for a big win is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

Also, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are also one of the prize winning ports from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 140 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball wins may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140 may be set to five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second prize winning port 140. - 特許庁This electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), which makes it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol triggered by the passage of the ball through the through gate 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state), and the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 140.例文帳に追加

As described above, during the probability variation and during the time saving, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during normal, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short, so in the variation display of the second symbol "○ ' is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 140a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to enter the second winning hole 140 during the variable probability and the shorter working hours compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 140, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of the 15R probability variable jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the event of a jackpot is higher when the ball enters the second winning port 140 than when the ball enters the first winning port 64. is set. On the other hand, the first prize winning port 64 does not have an electric accessory like the second prize winning port 140, and is in a state where balls can always win prizes.

Therefore, during normal operation, the electric accessory attached to the second prize winning port 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second prize winning port 140. Then, a ball is shot so that the ball passes through the left side of the variable display unit 80 (so-called "left-handed hitting"), and by winning the first prize-winning port 64, many chances of a big winning lottery are obtained, and a big win is achieved. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning port 140 is likely to be in an open state, and the second winning port 140 is in a state where it is easy to win. Therefore, the ball is shot toward the second winning hole 140 so that the ball passes the right side of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right hitting"), passes through the through gate 67, and the electric accessory is opened. In addition, it is more advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variable jackpot by winning the second prize winning port 140.例文帳に追加

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, since the configuration of the game board 13 is bilaterally symmetrical, it is possible to aim for the first winning hole 64 by "right-handed hitting" or to aim for the second winning hole 140 by "left-handed hitting". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment provides the player with information on how to shoot balls according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether the game is in variable probability, short time, or normal). It is possible to eliminate the need to change the to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the annoyance of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable prize winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first prize winning port 64, and a specific prize winning port 65a is provided substantially in the center thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning in the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 140 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so as to cause the first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B to be lit, and the third symbol display device 81 is caused to display the stop symbol corresponding to the big win, thereby indicating the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the balls are likely to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large opening that is opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big win is lit in the first pattern display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the A special game is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. You may make it form as a state. In addition, the number of the specific winning openings 65a is not limited to one, and one or a plurality of two or more (for example, three) may be arranged. The left side of the variable display device unit 80 is not limited to the lower left side of the prize winning opening 64, for example.

An affixing space K1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided at the right corner of the lower side of the game board 13. 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 140 are guided through the out hole 71 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A pair of out ports 71 are arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning port 65a.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills (not shown). ).

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132, which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 4) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In the main control unit 110, the MPU 201 performs main processing of the pachinko machine 10, such as the setting of the jackpot lottery, the display settings of the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display results of the second symbol display device. to run.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The RAM 203 stores various areas, counters, flags, contents of internal registers of the MPU 201, return addresses of control programs executed by the MPU 201, etc., and a stack area for storing various flags, counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (not shown) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol reservation lamp, and the opening/closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a (Fig. 11 ) is connected to a solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory. Sends various commands and control signals to

The input/output port 205 also includes various switches 208 including a group of switches (not shown) and a group of sensors including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253 .

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (not shown) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues an instruction to shoot the ball. . The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on the condition that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) of the handle 51 , and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51 .

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main control device 110, the display control device 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the other device 228, the frame button 22, and the like. Other devices 228 include drive motors 631 , 731 , 782 , 861 .

Sound lamp control device 113, based on various commands (fluctuation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from main control device 110, determines the display mode of third symbol display device 81, and sends the determined display mode to the command The display control device 114 is notified by (display variation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). In addition, the sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 or super reach. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect contents of the hour. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 . The display control device 114 displays various images on the third pattern display device 81 in accordance with commands transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 .

Also, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) representing the display content of the third pattern display device 81 from the display control device 114 . In the audio lamp control device 113, based on the display command received from the display control device 114, in accordance with the display content of the third pattern display device 81, output the audio corresponding to the display content from the audio output device 226, Lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled in accordance with the display contents.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 changes the third pattern, etc. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 to the sound lamp control device 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 outputs sound from the sound output device 226 in accordance with the display contents indicated by this display command, so that the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 are matched. be able to.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, the structure around the variable winning device 65 will be described. 5 is a front perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, and FIGS. 6(a) and 6(b) are front perspective views of the variable winning device 65. FIG. FIG. 6(a) shows a closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b in which the opening/closing plate 65b is closed so as to restrict the ball from flowing down to the specific winning hole 65a. An open state of the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in which the opening/closing plate 65b is opened to allow the ball to flow down. Note that FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 5 and 6 .

The variable winning device 65 accepts a ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 6(b)), and opens the opening/closing plate 65b so that it can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a. , the upper surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the rear side.

Since the electric accessory 140a is arranged above the left-right central part of the opening/closing plate 65b (see FIG. 2), the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to the ball that deviates from the electric accessory 140a and flows down. . That is, the landing of the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not occur in the left-right central portion, but mainly occurs in the left-right outer portion of the electric accessory 140a. In other words, the placement of the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to positions on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b.

However, the placement of the ball after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited to this. That is, depending on how the ball flows after landing on the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball may be arranged near the center position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In particular, in this embodiment, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 2) covering the electric accessory 140a from the front side is curved so as to secure a space on the opening/closing plate 65b side (the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). ) is formed as a curved surface that protrudes downward toward the rear side from the lower end of the front end portion disposed opposite to ). It is possible to reduce the degree to which momentum is lost due to collision. As a result, it is possible to increase the possibility that the ball will be arranged near the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Note that the center of the radius of curvature of the curved shape of the lower portion of the front design member 141 may be arranged in either the front or rear direction. In the present embodiment, the radius of curvature in the lateral view is arranged downward on the front side, so that a larger space on the side of the opening/closing plate 65b can be secured. In addition, since the front design member 141 has a shape in which the width of the front design member 141 becomes smaller toward the lower side at the left and right ends, it is possible to easily secure a space between the front design member 141 and the opening/closing plate 65b on the left and right sides.

In the open state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without omission. On the front side of the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, an inclined flow bottom surface 163a1 that slopes downward toward the rear is disposed at a vertical position that can guide the ball to the ball passage hole 163b.

The inclined flow lower surface 163a1 is formed one step lower than the left and right end portions of the lower surface portion 163a so that the ball rolled left and right by the lower surface portion 163a can be transferred with less resistance. Guide plate portions 163a2 are formed on the left and right outer sides of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1 in order to reduce the flow resistance of the ball that has landed on the opening/closing plate 65b on the left-right outside of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1.

The guide plate portion 163a2 is a plate-like portion extending forward and inward in the left and right direction from the rear wall portion and the inner left and right wall portions of the receiving member 163, and the front end surface is formed as an inclined surface that is displaced rearward toward the inner left and right sides. It is formed.

As a result, when a ball rolling on the opening/closing plate 65b contacts the front end surface of the guide plate portion 163a2, the ball can be guided downward along the slope of the inclined surface, so that the ball can be moved downward along the inclined surface. It can be guided to 163a1 with less resistance. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b starts the closing operation with a ball on the opening/closing plate 65b, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b cannot be performed even if the ball is arranged outside the inclined flow surface 163a1 to the left and right. The degree of inhibition can be reduced.

That is, for example, the flow of the ball deteriorates and the closing of the opening/closing plate 65b is delayed, or the ball swept backward by the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b rebounds from the rear wall portion of the receiving member 163 and hits the opening/closing plate 65b again. By applying a load in the direction (front side) to open the opening/closing plate 65b, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the opening/closing plate 65b is unintentionally opened.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the opening/closing plate 65b is closed by a rising motion. That is, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b is guided (swallowed) to the specific winning hole 65a by the operation of the opening/closing plate 65b, so that the ball on the opening/closing plate 65b does not shift to the left/right position, and the ball lands on the opening/closing plate 65b. The ball on it is guided to the specific winning hole 65a almost without omission.

At this time, if the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b are arranged on the left and right outer sides or if the number of balls is large, the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b may be delayed. In contrast, in the present embodiment, the shapes of the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163, the inclined flow lower surface 163a1, and the guide plate portion 163a2 are devised, so that the flow of balls guided to the specific winning opening 65a can be retained. Therefore, it is possible to keep the quickness of the closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b.

Instead of devising the shape of the receiving member 163, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b on which the ball rides in the open state is formed flat (see FIG. 6(b)). Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b flows backward once, and then flows leftward and rightward due to the action of the shape of the receiving member 163, and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1. Therefore, collision of the balls on the opening/closing plate 65b can be easily avoided.

That is, even if a plurality of balls land on the opening/closing plate 65b at the same time, the balls are temporarily moved backward in parallel, so that the balls can be prevented from colliding with each other on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, compared to the case where the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is formed to have a laterally inclined surface like the lower surface portion 163a, and the rolling balls flow in the left/right direction, the rolling surface of the opening/closing plate 65b is reduced. Since it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball will move irregularly, it is possible to prevent unintended malfunctions.

The receiving member 163 is formed with abutment surface portions 163a3 that abut on the tip portions of the rotation at both left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. there is The abutment surface portions 163a3 are formed as a pair of right and left sides, and are formed so as to allow surface contact rather than point contact due to a shape design that matches the shape of the opening/closing plate 65b. In addition, since stress concentration can be avoided by receiving the load at the time of contact, the durability can be improved.

Further, an auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is formed on the lower side of the contact surface portion 163a3 so as to be substantially parallel to the open/close plate 65b, which is arranged opposite to the contact surface portion 163a3, with a slight gap therebetween. The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 is provided as a fail-safe in the event that contact between the contact surface portion 163a3 and the opening/closing plate 65b fails for some reason.

In this embodiment, the member to be fixed 161 that restricts the flow of the ball is arranged on the near side of the contact surface portion 163a3, and is basically configured so that the ball does not collide with the contact surface portion 163a3. However, for example, if the tip of the opening/closing plate 65b that contacts the contact surface portion 163a3 is missing, there is a possibility that the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state cannot be maintained.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when normal contact between the opening/closing plate 65b and the contact surface portion 163a3 cannot be maintained, the front and rear width portions at the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4 are displaced. , so as to maintain the stability of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b. As a result, it is possible to improve the reproducibility of the arrangement of the opening/closing plate 65b in the closed state.

The auxiliary contact surface 163a4 may be configured to contact the opening/closing plate 65b when the shape of the contact surface portion 163a3 is normal. In this case, the contact surface portion 163a3 contacts with the opening/closing plate 65b from the normal shape, so there is a disadvantage that the load is likely to be accumulated. It is possible to reduce the magnitude of the local load that the contact surface portion 163a3 receives due to the contact with the contact surface portion 163a3.

When the opening/closing plate 65b moves from the open state to the closed state, the game ball in the process of being received by the opening/closing plate 65b can be received in a state of being pushed into the opening/closing plate 65b by the shape of the front design member 141 described above. .

That is, in a state in the middle of being received (for example, in a state of being sandwiched between the turning tip of the opening/closing plate 65b and the opening frame of the specific prize winning port 65a and sliding sideways), the ball hits the lower shape of the front design member 141. When it touches, it can be made to flow down to the inside of the specific winning opening 65a by being guided by the curved shape. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviated from the opening/closing plate 65b falls on the front side of the third flow path forming part 336, so that the visibility to the third flow path forming part 336 can be easily secured. can do.

When the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the ball does not land on the opening/closing plate 65b. Therefore, when the opening/closing plate 65b is closed, the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b is positioned outside the electric accessory 140a. is limited to

Therefore, according to the configuration of the present embodiment, it is possible to limit the arrangement of the balls flowing down without being guided to the specific prize winning opening 65a in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the left and right outer positions of the electric accessory 140a. As a result, it is possible to ensure the field of view at the left and right inner positions of the left and right ends of the electric accessory 140a below the electric accessory 140a.

Next, the configuration of the downstream side of the specific winning opening 65a (the side on which the ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a flows) will be described. 7 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 8 is a rear perspective view of the game board 13. FIG. 7 and 8 illustrate a state in which components other than the first winning port 64, the second winning port 140, and the variable winning device 65 are removed from the components provided on the base plate 60. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 8, on the rear side of the base plate 60, behind the variable prize winning device 65, there are a first prize winning port 64, a second prize winning port 140, and a ball entered into the general prize winning port 63 (see FIG. 2). A collecting gutter 150 is provided in which a path is formed for flowing the ball discharge passage (not shown).

The collecting gutter 150 has a groove-shaped portion that forms a flow path, and the groove-shaped portion has an open front side facing the base plate 60 . By closing this open portion with the base plate 60, a path for flowing the ball to the ball discharge path is completed.

The collecting gutter 150 includes a first flow path portion 151 that forms a flow path for balls that enter the first winning hole 64, and a second flow path part 152 that forms a path for balls that enter the second winning hole 140. and a plurality of third flow passages 153 forming flow passages for the balls entered into the general winning holes 63 arranged on both left and right sides.

The first flow path portion 151 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward and to the left from the rear position of the first prize winning port 64, and the second flow channel portion 152 is configured as a flow path that slopes downward and to the right from the rear position of the second prize winning port 140. It is configured as a flow path for The third channel portion 153 is configured as a channel extending downward from the general winning opening 63 .

Therefore, when viewed from the front, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 are arranged at the left and right central positions of the game area, but the flow of the balls entering the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140 is , and gathered to the left and right outside from the central position in the left and right by the collecting gutter 150 . Thereby, a space can be provided below the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 140, and the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, which will be described later, can be arranged using this space.

9 is an exploded front perspective view of the base plate 60, the variable prize winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300, and FIG. is an exploded rear perspective view of the . 9 and 10, only the lower half of the base plate 60 is illustrated, the other portions are omitted, and the other components assembled to the base plate 60 are omitted. The ground of the base plate 60 is visible. 9, the center frame 86 is shown assembled to the base plate 60 for convenience of explanation.

Fixing of the variable winning device 65, the collecting gutter 150 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable winning device 65 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the front side of the game board 13 by tapping screws or the like. The collecting gutter 150 is arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and is fixed from the back side of the game board 13 by a tapping screw or the like.

The sorting device 300 has an insertion hole 311 fastened and fixed to the variable prize winning device 65 at the upper portion, and an insertion hole 331 fastened and fixed to the collecting gutter 150 at the left and right portions. That is, unlike the variable winning device 65 directly fixed to the base plate 60 and the collecting gutter 150, the presence or absence of the sorting device 300 does not affect the completion of the game board 13.

In other words, the variable prize winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 in this embodiment can be used as they are when the sorting device 300 is provided and when the sorting device 300 is not provided. As a result, regardless of the presence or absence of the sorting device 300, the variable winning device 65 and the collecting gutter 150 can be shared.

Next, details of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 will be described. The variable prize winning device 65 is configured to be able to receive balls from the game area through the specific prize winning port 65a, and the sorting device 300 constitutes a downflow path along which the balls received by the variable prize winning device 65 flow. In the present embodiment, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes based on the detection result of the ball flowing through the flow path of the sorting device 300, but the details will be described later.

11 is an exploded front perspective view of the variable winning device 65, and FIG. 12 is an exploded rear perspective view of the variable winning device 65. FIG. As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the variable winning device 65 includes a fixed member 161 fixed by tapping screws or the like from the front side of the game board 13, and a fixed member 161 arranged on the front side of the fixed member 161. A front design member 162 fastened and fixed to 161, and a receiving member 163 arranged on the back side of the fixed member 161, fastened and fixed to the fixed member 161, and capable of receiving a ball passing through the specific winning opening 65a. , an intervening member 164 that is arranged on the back side of the receiving member 163, is fastened and fixed to the receiving member 163, and intervenes as a connection part with the sorting device 300; and a state switching device 165 which is fastened and fixed to the opening and closing plate 65b and configured to be capable of switching the open/closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b depending on the presence or absence of energization.

The member to be fixed 161 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the shape of its front side is flat except for the through hole for inserting the screw, the fastening position with the front design member 162, and the specific winning opening 65a. . On the other hand, the shape of the rear side of the member to be fixed 161 is a three-dimensional shape that protrudes toward the rear side inside the thin-walled portion that is in surface contact with the base plate 60 in the outer peripheral portion.

In particular, the boundary portion 161a with the thin portion is formed in the shape of a horizontally elongated substantially elliptical frame, and a through-hole having a size that allows the boundary portion 161a to be disposed is formed through the base plate 60. As shown in FIG. That is, the boundary portion 161a is a portion that is inserted through the through hole of the base plate 60 .

Inside the boundary portion 161a, there is a specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long plate extending rearward in a horizontally long plate shape parallel to the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a slightly below the lower edge of the specific winning opening 65a. and a pair of left and right extending support plates 161b each having a substantially T-shape and having a vertically elongated plate-shaped portion extending downward at an intermediate position of the horizontally elongated plate-shaped portion.

The extended support plate 161b functions to support both the area behind the specific winning opening 65a and the downstream path of the sorting device 300, which will be described later. A projecting support portion 161c projecting from the horizontally elongated plate portion of the extending support plate 161b, a projecting support portion 161d projecting from the vertically elongated plate portion of the extending support plate 161b, and the lower edge of the boundary portion 161a. The projecting support portion 161e projecting from the upper surface of the unit has a function as a portion for supporting the sorting device 300, and the details will be described later.

Inside the boundary part 161a, a symmetrical projecting part 161f projecting in a left-right symmetrical shape below the left-right central position of the specific winning hole 65a contacts the ball flowing down the sorting device 300 and guides the ball down. have a function.

A plurality of through holes 161g for inserting fastening screws to be screwed into the front design member 162 are arranged inside and outside the boundary portion 161a. A plurality of to-be-fastened portions 161h having female thread portions for screwing fastening screws inserted through the receiving member 163 are arranged inside the boundary portion 161a.

A fastened portion 161i having a female threaded portion for screwing a fastening screw to be inserted through the interposed member 164 is arranged outside the boundary portion 161a at a cut (left-right central position) of the boundary portion 161a. That is, of the through-holes formed in the base plate 60, the connecting portion between the through-hole for inserting the boundary portion 161a and the through-hole for inserting the second prize winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 9). ), the to-be-fastened portion 161i is arranged.

The front design member 162 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the front side is formed in a flat shape so as to make the distance from the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) uniform. The sphere can flow down in the range of the back side of the front design member 162 and the front side of the fixed member 161 .

On the back side of the front design member 162, there are a plurality of female threaded portions which are disposed at positions matching the through holes 161g of the member to be fixed 161 and into which fastening screws inserted through the through holes 161g can be screwed. It has a fastened portion 162a and a plurality of extended portions 162b and 162c extending toward the rear side in such a shape as to cover the fastened portion 162a from above.

The extended portions 162b and 162c can prevent the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 from directly colliding with the fastened portion 162a, thereby increasing the durability of the fastened portion 162a. can be improved.

Furthermore, by forming the upper surfaces of the extended portions 162b and 162c as inclined surfaces, it is possible to restrict the flow-down path of the ball. That is, the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162b (two locations on the left and right central sides) extending near the left and right edges of the specific winning opening 65a are formed as inclined surfaces that slope down toward the left and right outer sides. It is possible to suppress the ball on the part 162b from flowing toward the specific winning hole 65a. That is, the ball riding on the extended portion 162b falls downward on the left and right outer sides of the extended portion 162b, and then flows down toward the out port 71 along the inner rail 61 (see FIG. 2).

In addition, since the upper surfaces of the extension portions 162c (two points at both the left and right ends) extending on both the left and right ends are formed as inclined surfaces that slope downward toward the left and right inner sides, the ball flowing on the extension portions 162c is formed. The flow-down route can be summarized as the flow-down route of the ball on the extended portion 162b. As a result, compared to the number of falling balls, the range in which the falling balls are arranged can be narrowed (the density of ball placement can be increased), and the visibility is not hindered by the balls (the flowing path is non-configured space) can be reserved.

Although the front design member 162 shown in FIG. 11 is illustrated in a plain color and the visibility on the back side is good, it is not necessary to configure the front design member 162 in a plain color. For example, the front side of the front design member 162 may be decorated by sticking a sticker with an illustrated pattern or character, or a groove may be cut in the front design member 162 with a geometric pattern, and the groove may be irradiated with light. A geometric pattern may emerge and be visually recognized. Alternatively, the front design member 162 may be configured to be non-permeable after being plain or decorated as described above.

The receiving member 163 is made of a light-transmitting resin material and formed in a horizontally long frame shape (or box shape) with an open front side, and includes the guide plate portion 163a2, the contact surface portion 163a3, and the auxiliary contact surface 163a4. , a lower surface portion 163a forming a flow-down surface inside the frame, a ball passing hole 163b arranged as a through hole through which the ball flowing down the lower surface portion 163a can pass, and a position matching the fastened portion 161h of the member 161 to be fixed. A plurality of insertion holes 163c through which fastening screws fastened and fixed to the fastened portion 161h are inserted from the back side, and a female screw portion into which the fastening screws inserted through the intervening member 164 are screwed and which is located in the center of the left and right. A pair of fastened portions 163d arranged on the side and a plurality of fastened portions 163e having female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted through the state switching device 165 are screwed.

The lower surface portion 163a is formed as a laterally inclined surface that slopes downward toward the left and right outer sides with the lateral central portion as the apex, and the inclined flow slopes downward toward the rear at a position one step lower than the left and right outer end portions of the laterally inclined surface. Since the lower surface 163a1 is provided, the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the inclined flow-down surface 163a1 is disposed so as to pass through the ball passage hole 163b with little resistance.

The ball passage hole 163b is a detection hole formed in the detection sensor SE1 engaged with the back side of the receiving member 163. As shown in FIG. That is, the detection sensor SE1 detects that the ball has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

The intervening member 164 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes a main body portion 164a having a light refracting surface that slopes downward toward the rear, and a fastened portion of the receiving member 163 formed through the upper portion of the main body portion 164a. A pair of insertion holes 164b through which fastening screws to be screwed into 163d can be inserted, a light-emitting substrate 164c arranged above the insertion holes 164b and having LEDs disposed thereon, and both left and right ends on the lower end side of the main body 164a. A pair of to-be-fastened portions 164d formed having a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted through the sorting device 300 can be screwed, and a to-be-fastened member 161 that is formed through the upper part of the main body portion 164a and is to be fastened. and an insertion hole 164e through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the portion 161i can be inserted.

The light-emitting substrate 164c is disposed with the surface on which the LEDs are arranged facing obliquely forward and upward. It is arranged just below the mouth 140 . Due to this arrangement, the light from the light emitting board 164c easily enters the field of view of the player who wants to enter the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a and gazes obliquely backward and downward.

Therefore, when a ball entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a is detected, the LED of the light emitting board 164c is controlled to light up, thereby preventing the ball from entering the second winning hole 140 or the specific winning hole 65a. It is possible to make the player easily grasp whether or not has occurred.

Due to the configuration described above, the intervening member 164 is fastened and fixed to both the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 . As a result, the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 can be firmly fixed compared to the case where the member to be fixed 161 and the receiving member 163 are only fastened and fixed. In addition, since the arrangement of the sorting device 300 connected and fixed to the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 via the intervening member 164 can be stabilized, the fixed member 161 and the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300 Relative positional deviation can be suppressed.

The state switching device 165 has a plurality of insertion portions 165a through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 163e of the receiving member 163 are inserted, and has a plurality of openings for passing wires and for heat dissipation. A lower case portion 165b formed in a deep box shape with an open top, an electromagnetic solenoid 165c housed in the lower case portion 165b, and a plunger tip of the electromagnetic solenoid 165c engaged with the plunger. A slide portion 165d that is slidably displaced is rotatably supported by the lower case portion 165b in such an arrangement that the front end portion of the rotation protrudes from the front end portion of the lower case portion 165b, and a rotation portion that rotates as the slide portion 165d is slid is displaced. It includes a moving portion 165e and an upper lid portion 165g fastened and fixed to the lower case portion 165b by fastening screws inserted through the plurality of insertion holes 165f.

The tip of the rotating portion 165e is recessed so that the rod-shaped portion can be engaged therewith. engaged. The transmission projection 65c is arranged at a position eccentric from a metal shaft rod 65d that forms a rotation axis for opening and closing the opening and closing plate 65b. With this configuration, the opening/closing operation of the opening/closing plate 65b can be caused in accordance with the rotation of the rotating portion 165e.

13 and 14 are exploded front perspective views of the sorting device 300. FIG. 13 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from above, and FIG. 14 shows a perspective view of the sorting device 300 from below.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 300 includes an upper member 310 having a pair of insertion holes 311 through which fastening screws to be screwed into the fastening portion 164d of the interposed member 164 can be inserted. , an intermediate member 330 which is vertically fastened to the upper member 310 and has a pair of through holes 331 through which fastening screws screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150 can be inserted; A substrate 350, which is housed between the member 330 and the upper member 310 and on which a light emitting means 351 such as an LED is arranged on the front side, and a substrate 350 which is housed between the middle member 330 and the upper member 310, depends on the presence or absence of energization. and a slide displacement member 370 arranged below the middle member 330 and slidably displaced back and forth between the front side position and the rear side position as the state of the state switching device 360 is switched, An insertion hole that is disposed below the intermediate member 330 so as to sandwich the slide displacement member 370 between the intermediate member 330 and is formed so as to allow the fastening screw that is screwed into the female screw portion of the collecting gutter 150 to be inserted. a lower member 380 having 381;

Before describing the details of the configuration of each unit, an overview of the functions of the sorting device 300 will be described. The sorting device 300 is a device that constitutes a flow path along which balls that have passed through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 12) of the detection sensor SE1 flow down.

The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b flows down in the order of the inside of the upper member 310, the passage forming portions 334, 335, and 336 formed between the upper member 310 and the middle member 330, and the inside of the lower member 380. Then, the balls flowing down from the lower member 380 are discharged to a ball discharge passage (not shown).

The ball flowing down inside the sorting device 300 is configured to be visually recognized by the player, and the flow-down mode provides the player with not only a mere presentation effect that pleases the player's eyes, but also the player. There is an effect related to the game profit such as causing a change in the profit.

Differences in the manner in which balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 are mainly caused by the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the position of the slide displacement member 370 when the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 makes a difference in which part of the lower member 380 the ball passes through.

Therefore, the player's line of sight naturally tends to gather at the location where the ball flows down from the middle member 330 toward the lower member 380 (the location where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged, as will be described later). It is devised assuming the concentration of

Next, the details of the configuration of each part of the sorting device 300 will be described. The upper member 310 is a U-shaped thin member made of a light-transmitting resin material, and includes the above-described insertion hole 311, a pair of openings 312 penetrating to receive a ball, and a mark. A pair of colored (in this embodiment, red) transparent sealing members 313 attached as a pair of transparent sealing members 313, a pair of upper surface portions 314 extending from the lower edge of the opening 312 to the front side along the outer peripheral portion, and an intermediate member a plurality of insertion cylindrical portions 315 formed with through-holes through which fastening screws threaded into the intermediate member 330 can be inserted; fastening portions 316 having female threads into which the fastening screws threaded through the middle member 330 can be inserted; A pair of long front-to-rear projections 317, which are longitudinally elongated portions projected downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 and arranged side by side, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310. A pair of left and right inner projecting portions 318 which are elongated portions projecting in the left and right direction and are arranged between a pair of front and rear long projecting portions 317, and downward from the lower surface of the upper member 310 A pair of left and right outer projecting portions 319 which are elongated portions projecting in the left and right direction and are arranged on the left and right outer sides of the pair of front-rear long projecting portions 317, and a size that allows the upper portion of the substrate 350 to be arranged. a receiving recess 320 formed as a recess in the

The opening 312 is a passage-shaped portion (tunnel-shaped portion) that receives the ball that has passed through the ball-passing hole 163b of the variable winning device 65 and flows it downward. 12) is cut along an inclined plane so as to be flush with the back surface of the plate. As a result, the upper front edge of the opening 312 can be brought into contact with the back surface of the detection sensor SE1.

Further, the opening 312 is formed with such an opening degree that it does not enter the inside of the opening of the ball passing hole 163b when viewed from the opening direction of the ball passing hole 163b. As a result, it is possible to reduce the flow resistance when the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b is guided to the opening 312. FIG.

The seal member 313 receives light emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350 and is visually recognized brilliantly, thereby functioning as a member that attracts the player's attention, the details of which will be described later.

The upper surface portion 314 is a thin plate portion that is inclined in accordance with the flow-down path of the ball below the upper member 310 . The first upper surface portion 314a disposed on the front side of the opening 312 is formed to be inclined downward toward the front side, and the second upper surface portion is connected to the front end portion of the first upper surface portion 314a and disposed on the left and right inner sides. 314b is formed so as to be inclined downward toward the left and right inner sides. Further, the left and right second upper surface portions 314b are configured so that the left and right intervals become longer toward the near side, so that the field of view of the player who visually recognizes the ball through the space between the second upper surface portions 314b can be ensured.

The insertion tube portion 315 has a counterbore formed on the upper surface thereof for receiving the screw head of the fastening screw. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the screw head of the fastening screw from being visually recognized by the player, even though the fastening screw is inserted from the upper side.

The insertion tubular portion 315 is arranged at a position that matches a fastened portion 332 d having a female screw portion formed on the intermediate member 330 . In particular, the fastened portion 332d corresponding to the left insertion tube portion 315 also serves as a support portion for supporting the rotating portion 363, the details of which will be described later.

The fastening screw to be screwed into the fastened portion 316 is arranged in such a manner that the screw portion faces upward and the screw head faces downward. Therefore, while the fastening part 316 is arranged on the near side, the screw head is made inconspicuous to the player who views it obliquely from above. As a result, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the sorting device 300 from deteriorating due to the fastening screws while the upper member 310 and the middle member 330 are firmly fixed.

The reason why the to-be-fastened part 316 is formed only on the right side is that since two insertion cylinder parts 315 are already arranged on the rear side, one fastening position on the front side is sufficient, and the screw head faces downward. The reason for this is that, although it is not conspicuous because it is laid out, the sorting device 300 looks better if it is omitted if it is not necessary. Note that the arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is not limited to this. For example, they may be arranged on the left side, or may be arranged as a pair of left and right.

The arrangement of the fastened portion 316 is set so as to avoid the falling path of the balls and to minimize the deterioration of the appearance of the sorting device 300, which will be described later in detail.

The lower surfaces of the front-rear elongated protruding portions 317, the left-right inner protruding portions 318, and the left-right outer protruding portions 319, which are formed in pairs, are curved such that the arrangement is lowered with increasing distance from the same location. formed as a plane. The curved surface has different shapes for the front-rear projection 317, the left-right inner projection 318, and the left-right outer projection 319, and the difference in shape is intended to control the flow of the ball.

The intermediate member 330 includes the pair of insertion holes 331 described above, a rear frame portion 332 formed in a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a lower bottom portion on the rear side, and a frame shape (substantially box shape) having a bottom portion on the front side. A pair of front frame-shaped portions 333 formed in a box shape, a pair of first flow path forming portions 334 recessed on the left and right outer sides of the front frame-shaped portion 333 and forming a flow-down path of the ball, and the first A pair of second flow passage forming portions 335 which are connected to the front end portion of the flow passage forming portion 334 to form a flow-down path of the sphere and which are recessed on the front side of the front frame portion 333, and the second flow pass forming portions. A pair of third flow passage forming portions 336 are connected to the left and right inner end portions of the front frame portion 333 to form a flow-down path of the ball, and are recessed on the left and right inner sides of the front frame portion 333 .

In addition, the intermediate member 330 has a left-right elongated shape on the rear side of the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, and is formed through the lower bottom and functions as a ball discharge passage. A partition plate portion 338 formed in a plate shape elongated in the front-rear direction so as to partition the third flow path forming portion 336 into left and right, and a left and right long rectangular plate portion 338 extending from the lower surface of the rear end portion of the third flow pass forming portion 336 to the left and right. and a pair of alignment projections 339 projecting as shape projections.

The rear frame-shaped part 332 does not form a ball flow path unlike the front part which forms a ball flow path, and is mainly configured as a part that supports the substrate 350 and the state switching device 360 . The rear frame-shaped portion 332 has a placement through hole 332a formed through the front end portion of the left-right center portion in the vertical direction so that the slide displacement member 370 can be placed therein, and a through hole elongated in the left-right direction. A guide hole 332b is formed through the lower bottom portion to guide the sliding displacement of the guided portion 362c of the state switching device 360, and a plurality of female screw portions formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the lower member 380 can be screwed therein. A fastening part 332c and a columnar fastening part 332d having a female threaded portion at the upper end into which a fastening screw inserted through the insertion tube portion 315 of the upper member 310 can be screwed are provided.

The front frame-shaped part 333 is subjected to light diffusion processing on the inside of the frame and the front and back surfaces of the lower base, so that the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped part 333 is reduced. The front frame-shaped portion 333 is formed in a substantially square frame shape when viewed from above, and an insertion hole 333a formed as a spot facing hole through which a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 316 of the upper member 310 can be inserted. Prepare.

The first flow path forming part 334, the second flow path forming part 335, and the third flow path forming part 336 are parts that constitute the flow-down path of the sphere, and are arranged so that the flow-down direction of the sphere, the inclination angle, etc. are different. designed, but more on that later.

An open portion 335a, which is opened on the front side at the connecting position between the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336, allows the symmetrical projecting portion 161f (see FIG. 12) of the variable winning device 65 to enter. It is a gap for That is, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is arranged to enter the inside of the flow channel through the opening portion 335a so as to be able to come into contact with the balls flowing down the sorting device 300. As shown in FIG.

The ejection holes 337 are partitioned by a partition plate portion 338, and are formed in a pair of right and left holes, and are formed in a size that allows balls to be ejected through at least two paths. That is, it is configured with a lateral length that is at least twice the diameter of the sphere. In this embodiment, since a plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged side by side in the lower member 380 arranged below the discharge hole 337, the discharge hole 337 is arranged in accordance with the arrangement of the ball through holes of the detection sensors SE1. It is sufficient to design the shape of

The partition plate portion 338 functions as a guide portion that guides the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in addition to the function of partitioning the third flow path forming portion 336 as described above, the details of which will be described later. The alignment projecting portion 339 is fitted with the projecting portion 383a of the lower member 380, and is a portion for avoiding positional deviation between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380, the details of which will be described later.

The substrate 350 is formed in an inverted T shape in which the lower portion 353 is longer in the left and right direction than the upper portion 352 , and a recess for alignment is provided in the lower end portion on the left end side of the lower portion 353 . A portion 354 is provided.

The concave portion 354 is positioned in the left-right direction by engaging with a portion corresponding to the internal shape of the intermediate member 330 , and the elongated lower portion 353 is attached to the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330 in the front-rear direction. Positioning in the front-rear direction is performed by being supported so as to be sandwiched between the upper member 310, and the upper part 352 is accommodated in the accommodation recess 320 of the upper member 310, thereby preventing the upper part 352 from falling off upward and fixing the arrangement. The details will be described later along with the intention of the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 .

The state switching device 360 is a device housed in the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330, and includes an electromagnetic solenoid 361 and a tip end of a plunger supported by the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so as to be linearly displaced in the horizontal direction. and a rotating portion 363 that is rotatably supported by being inserted into the left fastened portion 332d and that rotates as the sliding portion 362 slides. , provided.

The slide portion 362 includes a recessed portion 362a that is recessed so as to receive the disk portion 361a at the tip of the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 from above, a protruding portion 362b that protrudes rightward from the right side, and a lower side. and a guided portion 362c protruding downward from the front-rear central portion of the guide portion 362c and formed with an elongated oval cross section in the left-right direction.

Since the disk portion 361a supports the slide portion 362 from above from the direction in which the recessed portion 362a is formed, it is possible to prevent the slide portion 362 from falling upward. Therefore, the arrangement of the slide portion 362 can be maintained between the disc portion 361a and the lower bottom portion of the intermediate member 330 without fixing the slide portion 362 to the disc portion 361a with an adhesive or the like.

The guided portion 362c is inserted through the guide hole 332b of the intermediate member 330 to prevent the displacement direction of the slide portion 362 from being deviated from the horizontal direction. In particular, in the present embodiment, since it is elongated in the horizontal direction, it is possible to maintain the posture of the sliding portion 362 by engaging the guided portion 362c and the guide hole 332b. The cross-sectional shape of the guided portion 362c is not necessarily limited to this, and may be circular or rectangular, for example.

The rotating portion 363 is formed in a substantially L shape when viewed from the top, and is formed in a cylindrical shape elongated in the vertical direction at the L-shaped connecting portion, and has a through hole of a size that allows the fastened portion 332d of the middle member 330 to be inserted thereinto. A support cylindrical portion 363a having a hole, an upper cylindrical portion 363b projecting upward from the end of the L-shaped short side and inserted into a through-hole of the overhanging portion 362b, and a long side of the L-shaped portion. A lower cylindrical portion 363c projecting downward from the side tip portion and inserted into the concave portion 378 of the slide displacement member 370 is provided.

With the above-described configuration, the rotating portion 363 is configured to be rotatable around the support cylinder portion 363a as a central axis. This displacement of the rotating portion 363 is caused by a change in the state of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 . That is, when the plunger is slid and the slide portion 362 is displaced in the left-right direction by energizing the electromagnetic solenoid 361, the upper cylindrical portion 363b inserted through the through hole of the projecting portion 362b is displaced. The lower cylindrical portion 363c is displaced, and as a result, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced.

The slide displacement member 370 is supported so as to be slidably displaced in the front-rear direction between the upper and lower positions of the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380. A thin plate portion 371 supported by being sandwiched from above and below by 380, a pair of left and right upper projecting portions 376 projecting upward from the thin plate portion 371, and a left and right center on the rear side of the upper projecting portion 376. and a recessed portion 378 which is recessed at the projecting end portion of the projecting portion projecting upward at the portion and formed so as to receive the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 .

The thin plate portion 371 has a pair of left and right supported holes 371a penetrating through the rear half portion, and the front side end portion of the left and right central portion, and the thin plate portion 371 is elongated in the front-rear direction with a width shorter than the arrangement interval of the upper projecting portion 376. A recessed portion 372 that is recessed, a pair of lower protruded streaks 373 protruding downward in the shape of a protruding line along the edge of the recessed portion 372, and projections along the left and right edges of the rear half portion. A plurality of upper and lower ridges 374 protruding in both vertical and vertical directions in a strip shape, and a columnar protrusion 375 protruding downward from the rear end portion and inserted into the guide long hole 386 of the lower member 380. Prepare.

The lower ridge portion 373 and the upper and lower ridge portions 374 are portions that are assumed to face and slide on the intermediate member 330 or the lower member 380 arranged on the upper and lower sides. It is a ridge for reducing the contact area between the member 330 and the lower member 380 . Since the displacement resistance of the slide displacement member 370 can be reduced by reducing the contact area, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the slide displacement member 370 from slowing down.

The upper projecting portion 376 is a substantially trapezoidal columnar portion when viewed from the front, and is arranged so as to pass through the placement through hole 332 a and enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 . The width of the left and right inner gaps of the upper projecting portion 376 is designed to be slightly longer than the left and right thickness of the partition plate portion 338 of the intermediate member 330 . With this configuration, the partition plate portion 338 can guide the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 .

In other words, the upper protruding portion 376 is arranged so as to sandwich the partition plate portion 338 in the gap on the left and right inner sides, and is configured to be prevented from being displaced in the left-right direction by coming into contact with the partition plate portion 338 . As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be properly guided, and the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 can be maintained in the front-rear direction.

The recessed portion 378 is formed as an elongated hole in the left-right direction so as to correspond to the displacement of the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 that is required to generate the front-rear displacement of the slide displacement member 370. be.

The protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is configured to enter above the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 through the placement through hole 332a, thereby forming a lower cylindrical portion of the rotating portion 363. The portion 363c can be easily inserted into the recessed portion 378. As shown in FIG.

Thus, the shape of the placement through-hole 332a is a shape that includes the entire range in which the upper protruding portion 376 to be inserted and the protruding portion in which the recessed portion 378 is formed are arranged. Designed as a through hole.

The lower member 380 includes the above-described insertion hole 381, a plate-like portion 382 formed in a thin plate shape elongated in the left and right direction, and a plurality of (four in this embodiment) detection sensors below the plate-like portion 382. A sensor holding frame portion 389 formed in a frame shape that allows the SE1 to be arranged side by side.

The sensor holding frame portion 389 has a frame shape in which the rear side surface into which the detection sensor SE1 is inserted and the upper and lower side surfaces through which the ball passes through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 are opened, and other portions are closed. formed in

The plate-like portion 382 has a through-hole formed at a position that matches the through-hole of the detection sensor SE1 in the same way as the sensor-holding frame portion 389 has through-holes in the vertical direction. A ridge portion 383 projecting upward in the shape of an elongated ridge in the front-rear direction at an intermediate position of SE1, and a pair of projections projecting from the front end portion of the ridge portion 383 to the left and right. A set portion 383a, a pair of guide projecting portions 384 projecting at a position behind the projecting portion 383 and capable of being inserted into the supported hole 371a of the slide displacement member 370, and the guide projecting portions 384. A pair of guide ridges 385 formed as long ridges in the front-rear direction at both positions on the left and right outer sides of the guide ridges, and a long hole-shaped guide long hole 386 extending on the same straight line as the ridge portion 383 in a top view. , a curved surface portion 387 formed in a curved surface shape that protrudes rearward on the front side surface, and an insertion hole 388 that is formed so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 332c of the intermediate member 330 can be inserted therethrough. .

The ridge portion 383 is formed as a ridge having a lateral thickness slightly shorter than the lateral gap width of the recessed portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370. placed. That is, the ridge portion 383 functions as a guide portion that guides the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 .

The projecting portion 383 a is designed such that the left and right inner end portions thereof are positioned at the same positions as the left and right outer end portions of the alignment projecting portion 339 of the intermediate member 330 . That is, the left and right outer ends of the alignment protrusions 339 are fitted to the left and right inner ends of the pair of protrusions 383a, so that the middle member 330 is aligned with the lower member 380 as a reference. Directions can be positioned appropriately. At the same time, the rear side surface of the frame front portion of the lower member 380 (the portion that connects the protrusion 383 and the projecting portion 383a on the front end side) is brought into contact with the front side surface of the alignment projecting portion 339, thereby The position of the intermediate member 330 in the front-rear direction with reference to the member 380 can be determined appropriately.

Accordingly, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of positional deviation between the third flow path forming portion 336 as a structure of the intermediate member 330 and the detection sensor SE1 as a structure of the lower member 380 .

The guide projecting portion 384 is formed in a left-right long elliptical shape, is inserted into the supported hole 371 a of the slide displacement member 370 , and limits the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 . That is, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement within the range where the guide projecting portion 384 is arranged inside the supported hole 371a.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the slide displacement member 370 from colliding with the ridge portion 383, so that, for example, the end of displacement in the forward direction is determined at the position where the slide displacement member 370 collides with the ridge portion 383. Compared to the configuration, the durability of the protrusion 383 can be improved. Therefore, the guiding effect of the protrusion 383 can be maintained for a long time.

Even if the guide projecting portion 384 is damaged, it does not immediately affect the operation of the slide displacement member 370 , but functions as a portion for preventing collision with the projecting portion 383 . For this reason, normally, the design is made with a strength that can be used for a set period of time (for example, three years) in a state where the guide protrusion 384 is not damaged. The strength of the guide projecting portion 384 and the projecting portion 383 may be designed in anticipation of use in a state where the sliding displacement member 370 collides. That is, the life of the guide projecting portion 384 may be set to less than a set period (for example, two years), and the strength of the projecting portion 383 may be used for the rest of the period. In this case, the degree of freedom in setting the resin material used for the lower member 380 and the degree of freedom in shape can be improved.

The guide projection 385 is arranged with a gap width slightly longer than the horizontal width of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 so that the thin plate portion 371 can be arranged in the gap. The displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is limited to the displacement on the left and right inner sides of the guide ridges 385 . As a result, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the front-rear direction can be caused with a small displacement in the left-right direction.

The guide long hole 386 is a long hole formed with a lateral width that allows the cylindrical protrusion 375 of the slide displacement member 370 to be inserted. The direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is restricted in the front-rear direction by guiding the cylindrical protrusion 375 to the guide elongated hole 386 .

The curved surface portion 387 is a contact surface for guiding the flow of the sphere that flows below the intermediate member 330 . In this embodiment, the flow of the ball entering the out hole 71 is guided, but the details will be described later.

A fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 388 with the screw head directed downward. As a result, it is possible to avoid conspicuous visibility of the fastening screw. Further, the insertion holes 388 are arranged on the left and right outside and on the rear side of the range in which the plurality of detection sensors SE1 are arranged. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole 388 blocks the view of the ball passing through the through hole of the detection sensor SE1 or near the detection sensor SE1.

As described above, the slide displacement member 370 has a plurality of portions, that is, the guide protrusion 385 for the thin plate portion 371, the guide protrusion 384 for the supported hole 371a, and the concave portion 372 and the lower protrusion 373. It is guided by the projection 383 , the guide elongated hole 386 for the cylindrical projection 375 , the partition plate 338 for the upper projection 376 , and the like, and is displaced in the front-rear direction. As a result, since the load during guidance can be distributed to a plurality of positions, it is possible to avoid the load from being applied locally, and to avoid damage to the slide displacement member 370 and the guide portion that guides the slide displacement member 370 . can be done.

As can be seen from this, the slide displacement member 370 is not guided by a single member, but is guided by a plurality of members including at least the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 . That is, the slide displacement member 370 has at least a pair of upper projecting portions 376 guided by the partition plate portion 338 of the intermediate member 330 and a recessed portion 372 guided by the projecting portion 383 of the lower member 380 .

Therefore, if the assembly between the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is poor and the dislocation is large, the movement of the slide displacement member 370 is hindered. Here, the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 are portions that continuously form a flow-down path of the sphere, and it is preferable to keep the displacement small. It is possible to ensure that the misalignment is small.

In other words, if the displacement of the lower member 380 with respect to the middle member 330 becomes excessively large, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is not performed satisfactorily. , the relative placement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 may be defective and an error notification may be performed.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from being continued while the relative arrangement of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is in an unsatisfactory state.

Next, details of the internal structure of the sorting device 300 will be described. In addition, here, the configuration related to the flow of the ball inside the sorting device 300 and the configuration of entering the flow-down path side of the ball will be mainly described.

15 is a front view of the receiving member 163 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 16 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 taken along line XVI-XVI in FIG. 15, and FIG. 15 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 18 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and sorting device 300 along line XVIII-XVIII of FIG.

15 to 18, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the front position. First, the details of the flow path of the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 300 will be described.

A ball that lands on the opening/closing plate 65b when the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state (see FIG. 6(b)) rolls on the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 and is guided to the ball passage hole 163b. The ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163 b passes through the opening 312 of the upper member 310 and is guided to the first flow path forming portion 334 of the middle member 330 . The first flow path forming part 334, the following second flow path forming part 335, and the following third flow path forming part 336 are all configured as inclined flow paths that slope downward, and are connected to each other. is formed in a spiral shape forming an angle of 90 degrees when viewed from above.

That is, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed as an inclined flow path that allows the ball to flow down to the front side in the front-rear direction, and the second flow path forming part 335 is based on the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the first flow path forming part 334. The third flow passage forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined flow passage that rotates 90 degrees and allows the ball to flow down in the left and right direction. It is formed as an inclined flow path that causes the ball to flow down to the back side in the front-rear direction rotated 90 degrees in the direction.

In this way, by forming the flow-down path in a spiral shape with a right angle of curvature, it is possible to reduce the extent to which the flow-down speed of the spheres increases toward the downstream side. More specifically, the sphere flowing down the first flow path forming part 334 accelerates toward the front side, and the flow direction in the following second flow path forming part 335 does not have a longitudinal component, so the first flow path It is possible to realize a flow-down mode in which the influence of the acceleration in the component 334 is suppressed. Furthermore, in the third flow passage forming portion 336 following the second flow passage forming portion 335, the flow is directed rearward in the direction opposite to the acceleration direction in the first flow pass forming portion 334, so the acceleration in the front-rear direction is received. It is possible to realize a flow-down mode with reduced influence.

Therefore, for example, it is possible to easily avoid an excessive flow speed of the ball on the downstream side, unlike the flow down mode in which the ball flows down in the same direction (for example, leftward) all the time. In other words, the flow speed of the ball can be made uniform throughout the flow path, the player's attention to the ball can be maintained at a high level, and the situation in which the player loses sight of the ball can be easily avoided. It has the effect of being able to

Further, for example, it is possible not to form the second flow path forming part 335, but forming the second flow path forming part 335 makes it easier to prevent clogging of balls and reverse flow. When the second flow path forming part 335 is not formed (when the left-right direction length of the second flow path forming part 335 is 0), that is, when the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 are When the spheres are connected, it is necessary to reverse the flowing direction of the ball from the front side flow to the rear flow by 180 degrees at the connection point. In this case, the switching angle of the ball's flow direction is large, and in particular, it is necessary to reverse the velocity direction back and forth. may occur.

On the other hand, if the switching angle of the flow direction is 90 degrees or less as in this embodiment (90 degrees in this embodiment), the speed direction of the ball does not reverse, so the ball flows smoothly. This makes it easier to avoid stagnation, clogging, and backflow of the spheres.

The shape of the flow path at the connecting ends of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 will be described. At the connection end between the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336, the above-described symmetrical projecting part 161f is arranged as a part that guides the downflow of the ball in a manner that bends the downflow direction of the ball. be done.

The symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed so that the portion arranged downstream of the sphere is more receded from the path of the sphere than the portion arranged upstream. For example, the lateral width of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f arranged to face is formed longer than the lateral width of the partition plate portion 338 arranged adjacent to it. Further, the rear end portions of the left and right ends of the symmetrical protruding portions 161f arranged to face each other are arranged closer to the front side than the flow channel side surfaces of the second flow channel forming portion 335 near the open portion 335a (FIG. 17). reference).

As a result, when the ball collides with the symmetrical protruding portion 161f, it is possible to prevent the ball from being excessively decelerated or from backflowing.

At the connection end between the second flow passage forming portion 335 and the first flow passage forming portion 334, the side wall portions 334a curved at the front left and right ends of the intermediate member 330 bend the flowing direction of the ball. It is formed as a part that guides the flow of the sphere in a manner.

In addition, at the upstream end of the first flow path forming part 334, a curved surface shape (see FIG. 16) that lowers toward the front side protrudes upward from the downstream surface of the first flow path forming part 334. A curved protrusion 334b is formed as a portion that guides the flow of the ball in a manner that bends the flow-down direction of the ball.

That is, the sphere that has passed through the opening 312 rolls on the curved projection 334b, flows down the first flow passage forming portion 334, and contacts the side wall portion 334a while flowing down, thereby switching the flow direction to the second flow path. Flowing down the flow path forming part 335 and contacting the symmetrical projecting part 161 f while flowing down, the flow direction is switched, the flow flow down the third flow path forming part 336 , and reaches the discharge hole 337 .

The side wall portion 334a is formed in a shape that can be engaged with and aligned with the projecting support portion 161d of the member 161 to be fixed. That is, the side wall portion 334a is supported so as to be sandwiched between the left and right protruding support portions 161d, and positional deviation in the left-right direction is regulated, thereby aligning the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 in the left-right direction. It can be performed.

The longitudinal inclination angles and length ratios of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 will be described. With respect to the inclination angle in the longitudinal direction, the first flow path forming part 334 has an inclination angle of about 7 degrees with respect to the horizontal, the second flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal, and the third flow path forming part 335 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. The flow passage forming portion 336 has an inclination angle of about 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal. That is, the inclination angle is set to the maximum in the first flow path forming part 334, and is set to a slightly loose common inclination angle in the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336. FIG.

Regarding the length, each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has a front frame-shaped portion 333 formed in a square outer shape when viewed from above, which is the inner side surface, and has the same center as the center of the square formed by the front frame-shaped portion 333. It is formed to have a large square with outer sides. Here, in the present embodiment, the length of one side of the front frame portion 333 is 21 mm, and the length of one side of the large square is 45 mm. It is formed.

For this reason, the total clearance between both sides of the sphere is set to 1 mm for the commonly used sphere with a diameter of 11 mm. . Considering that the distance between the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is defined to be about 19 mm, it can be said that this is a small clearance, and the misalignment of the falling ball can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Among the portions constituting the ends of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 arranged in a square surrounding the square front frame portion 333, the upstream end portion of the first flow path forming portion 334 is Since only the curved protrusions 334b that constitute the components are arranged inside (on the front side) the apexes of the square, the first flow path forming part 334 is formed into the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336. short in comparison.

In terms of actual measurement values in top view, the flow paths formed by the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 have substantially the same length (33 mm between the centers of the spheres), and the length is It is approximately 1.5 times the length of the flow path formed by the first flow path forming member 334 (22 mm between the centers of the spheres).

It can be explained from the ratio of the longitudinal direction inclination angle and length of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 that the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 is not constant. That is, the time to pass through the first flow path forming part 334 with the maximum inclination angle and the shortest flow path length is the second flow path formation part 335 with a looser inclination angle and 1.5 times the path length. and shorter than the time to pass through the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

In this embodiment, with this configuration, when passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1, the arrangement shifts to the rear side, and a part of the detection sensor SE1 is hidden by the non-transmissive resin portion. The ball can be displaced to the front side at an early stage from the state in which the visibility of the ball is poor in , and the state can be switched to a state close to the player and in which the visibility of the ball is high. This makes it easier to prevent the player from losing sight of the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 163b.

Furthermore, in a state where the visibility of the ball is high, by slowing down the flow speed of the ball, the player does not need to quickly move the line of sight toward the ball, and the game burden on the player who pays attention to the ball (movement of the eyeball) is reduced. eye fatigue) can be reduced.

When focusing on the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 with high visibility in this way, the ball flows down in the left-right direction along the second flow path forming part 335. Compared to the case in which the ball flows down in the front-rear direction along the third flow passage forming portion 336, the amount of displacement of the ball in the front view is smaller, so the game burden on the player who pays attention to the ball is reduced. , can be minimized when focusing on the sphere flowing down the third channel forming portion 336 .

In other words, since the lengths and inclination angles are equivalent, the time required for the sphere to pass through the second flow passage forming portion 335 and the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow passage forming portion 336 are equivalent, but the amount of displacement of the sphere when viewed from the front is different. A ball flowing down the second flow passage forming part 335 is slower than a ball flowing down.

The flow path of the ball changes only at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 where the game load is minimized and it is easy to draw attention to the ball. is common in Therefore, since the player's line of sight tends to be naturally concentrated on the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336, the game burden on the player who concentrates the line of sight in this manner can be effectively reduced.

In addition, in order to secure the field of vision of the player who pays attention to the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336, an opening portion 335a is formed on the front side surface of the second flow passage forming portion 335 in this embodiment. (See FIG. 17), it is possible to avoid obstruction of the line of sight toward the third flow passage forming portion 336 by the meat portion of the second flow passage forming portion 335 .

Furthermore, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f disposed inside the open portion 335a is formed only in a portion necessary for abutting and guiding the falling ball, and the formation of shaped portions on the upper and lower sides thereof is omitted. be done. In other words, the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is formed as a vertically thin plate-like portion, and a space is secured on the upper and lower sides thereof (see FIG. 18). Therefore, compared to the case where the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed with a thickness in the vertical direction, the possibility that the line of sight toward the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is obstructed by the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is reduced. It can be made low and the visibility can be improved.

In addition, it is configured such that the spheres deviating from the opening/closing plate 65b and directed toward the out port 71 gather toward the viewing side centering on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 5). In particular, in the present embodiment, a ball that enters the out port 71 flows down below the third flow path forming portion 336, contacts the curved surface portion 387 of the lower member 380, and is discharged downward.

Therefore, assuming that the ball flowing down the third flow passage forming portion 336 is viewed obliquely from the upper front side, the ball entering the out port 71 flows down the inner side of the third flow passage forming portion 336 . Therefore, the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 and the ball entering the out port 71 are covered in the front and rear sides, so that the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 is observed. The total number of balls that enter the field of view increases.

In other words, regardless of whether the ball enters the specific winning port 65a and flows down the third flow path forming part 336 or the ball does not enter the specific winning port 65a but enters the out port 71, the ball enters the field of view focusing on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, irrespective of the ease with which the ball is directed to the specific winning opening 65a, that is, the structure of the nail implanted in the base plate 60 (the quality of the so-called gauge), most of the shot balls (other winning openings 63, 64, 140 (balls other than the balls that have entered the ball) gather and the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (the portion where the player's attention is focused) is arranged at the position covered in the front-rear direction. As a result, the line of sight can be efficiently guided to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 by the falling ball.

As described above, the visibility at the position closer to the front side has been improved. In addition, in the present embodiment, the visibility at the position closer to the back side is It is configured to lower the

For example, the inner surface of the front frame portion 333 of the intermediate member 330 is formed with a light diffusing processed surface 333b having a prism-like shape for producing light diffusing action. In FIG. 17, the saw-toothed portion is the light diffusion processing surface 333b, which is formed over substantially the entire inner circumference of the inner surface and over the top and bottom.

When the effect of light diffusion occurs, the light is diffused in multiple directions, and the entire surface is visible as if it is shining. and the visibility on the far side becomes poor. According to the present embodiment, the visibility is poor when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 of the substrate 350, and conversely, when the light is not emitted, the visibility is at least lower than that when light is emitted. visibility can be improved.

On the other hand, if there is a shielding object between the light and the shielding object, the shadow of the shielding object will be visually recognized as a black dot, making it easier to determine its position.

A processed surface similar to the light diffusion processed surface 333b is also formed in other portions. For example, there are a light diffusion processed surface 319a formed on the back surface of the left and right outer protrusions 319, and a light diffusion processed surface 332e formed on the back surface of the frame front portion of the rear frame portion 332 (FIG. 17). reference).

The processed surface formed in the same shape is a plate-like portion extending to the rear side of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, and is attached to the front frame-like portion 333 of the intermediate member 330 in the assembled state. Examples include a light diffusion processing surface 314c formed on the upper surface side of the lid portion, and a light diffusion processing surface 340 formed over the entire lower surface of the portion on the front side of the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330. be done.

With these configurations, in the present embodiment, light diffusion is provided on the back side, the bottom side, the inner side of the vortex, and the upper side of the vortex of the flow path formed in a spiral shape from each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, respectively. A processed surface is formed to achieve the effect of changing visibility due to light irradiation.

In a state where the light diffusion processing surface is not irradiated with light, the direction is changed in the left-right direction from the third flow path forming part 336 with the player's eyes focused on the rear end portion of the third flow path forming part 336 from the front side. The sphere can be hidden by the front side frame-shaped part 333 to make it difficult to see immediately.

Furthermore, let's look at the ball after it has passed the detection sensor SE1 held by the sensor holding frame 389 and fallen from the player's line of sight, who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 obliquely from above. Even so, since the line of sight passes through the light diffusion processed surface 340, it becomes difficult to identify the sphere after it has passed through the detection sensor SE1 and fallen by irradiating the light diffusion processed surface 340 with light. .

In this embodiment, as will be described later, control is performed so that the profit obtained by the player changes depending on how the ball flows down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, it is necessary to confirm the behavior of the ball at the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in order to grasp how the ball flows down from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336. , the attention to the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be further improved.

On the other hand, if light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, a state in which the shadow of the sphere is easily visible as a black dot can be configured. In this manner, by switching the presence or absence of light irradiation depending on the situation, the visibility of the sphere can be switched between good and bad. In addition, depending on whether or not the sphere is arranged on the front side of the black point, it is possible to construct a situation in which the black point is hidden by the sphere and a situation in which the black point is visible without being hidden by the sphere.

As described above, the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 are formed in the vicinity of the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336. It is formed on the side surface that does not come into contact with the ball flowing down the channel.

As a result, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be prevented from being scraped by contact with the spheres, so the shapes of the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 can be maintained for a long period of time. can be used, and the effect of light diffusion can be maintained.

Furthermore, by contacting the light diffusing surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 with the spheres, it is possible to prevent the spheres from being hindered from flowing down or being decelerated. In addition, by ensuring the visibility inside the flow path, the visibility of the sphere is reduced even while the sphere is flowing down the flow path formed by the flow path forming parts 334 to 336. can be avoided.

It should be noted that the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a, 332e, 333b, and 340 may be intentionally formed on the channel side. In this case, depending on the size of the prism, it is possible to produce the effect of diffusing the light and the effect of decelerating the sphere by colliding with it.

In the front frame portion 333 of the intermediate member 330, the formation of the light diffusion processing surface 333b is omitted at the fastening position with the fastening portion 316 due to the difficulty of processing, and high visibility is maintained without countermeasures. there is a possibility. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the visibility is reduced by the fastening screws.

That is, by utilizing the fact that the fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 316 is made of metal and is non-permeable, it is possible to hide the portion where it is difficult to form the light diffusion processed surface 333b. When the front frame portion 333 is irradiated with light, the light diffusion processed surface 333b shines brilliantly, and in the portion where the light diffusion processed surface 333b is omitted, the fastening screw reflects the light and shines, so that the light is diffused. It is possible to reduce the visibility of the back side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 in the line of sight from the front side, including the portion where the formation of the processed surface 333b is omitted.

The light diffusion processing surface 332e of the intermediate member 330 is formed on the back side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. The purpose of this is to make the substrate 350 disposed on the back side in addition to shining brilliantly. and function as a blindfold for the state switching device 360 . In particular, since the state switching device 360 is arranged on the back side of the substrate 350 (see FIG. 17), the substrate 350 serves as a blindfold, making it easy to prevent the state switching device 360 from being visually recognized by the player.

The substrate 350 is accommodated in a manner supported by the rear frame portion 332 of the intermediate member 330, but is arranged with a gap from the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 in the left-right central portion, and slides into the gap. A displacement member 370 is arranged (see FIG. 18). That is, the substrate 350 is arranged at a position sandwiching the slide displacement member 370 with the lower bottom portion of the rear frame portion 332 .

More specifically, the substrate 350 is supported such that the lower portion 353 is sandwiched between the rear frame portions 332 at the left and right ends (see FIG. 17). At this support point, the lower bottom portion of the rear frame-shaped portion 332 is provided with a thick portion 332f (see FIG. 16). A slide displacement member 370 can be arranged in the gap (see FIG. 18).

As shown in FIG. 18, the upper portion 352 of the substrate 350 enters the inside of the housing recess 320 of the upper member 310 and faces the light diffusion processing surface 164f formed on the interposed member 164 in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351 arranged on the upper part 352, the light diffusion processing surface 164f of the intervening member 164 can produce a brilliant effect. The visibility of the range of can be reduced.

Here, the light emitting means 351 arranged in the upper part 352 irradiates light near the lower end of the light diffusion processed surface 164f. Since it is formed in the entire vertical direction, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized as light with a wide vertical width. Therefore, from the player's eye level, it is possible to make it appear as if the specific winning hole 65a is illuminated above and below.

In addition, in the field of view from the front side, the light diffusion processing surface 164f is arranged at the left-right center side position of the receiving member 163, but even if it is arranged on the back side of the detection sensor SE1, the detection sensor SE1 hinders the field of view and is good. Therefore, sufficient effects can be obtained as long as they are formed in at least the arrangement gap between the pair of detection sensors SE1.

The lower side portion 353 of the substrate 350 is arranged so as to irradiate the light toward the seal member 313 and the portion disposed therebelow where the ball flows down, the details of which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20, switching of the flow-down path of the ball that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and its significance will be described. 19 and 20, FIG. 15 to FIG. 18 will be referred to as needed.

19 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVII-XVII of FIG. 15, and FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the line XVIII-XVIII of FIG. It is a diagram. 19 and 20, when shown, the opening/closing plate 65b is shown in the closed state, and the slide displacement member 370 is shown in the rear position.

Here, the four left and right detection sensors SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame portion 389, the flow of the ball to each detection sensor SE1, and the function of each detection sensor SE1 will be described.

Two sets of the four detection sensors SE1 are arranged bilaterally symmetrically, and include a probability variation detection sensor SE11 and a normal detection sensor SE12 having a common function. The variable probability detection sensor SE11 is arranged inside in the left-right direction, and the normal detection sensor SE12 is arranged outside in the left-right direction.

The functions of these four detection sensors SE1 are different from those of the detection sensors SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b. The detection sensor SE1 arranged behind the opening/closing plate 65b is an entering ball sensor that causes the payout of prize balls. That is, when it is detected that a ball that has entered the specific winning hole 65a has entered the detection sensor SE1 behind it, a predetermined number of prize balls (in this embodiment, 10 balls per detection of one ball) are paid out. It is paid out to the player side by the control device 111 (see FIG. 4).

On the other hand, the detection sensor SE1 supported by the sensor holding frame 389 is not a detection sensor that causes the payout of prize balls, but a detection sensor that changes the game state after the jackpot game ends by detecting the entering ball. Function.

In addition, as will be described later, in the present embodiment, the detection sensor SE1 arranged in the sensor holding frame portion 389 is used for switching whether or not to shift to the variable probability state, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, the detection sensor SE1 may function as a ball entry sensor for switching whether or not the next big win is to be won.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the front position (see FIGS. 17 and 18), the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so that the thin plate portion 371 covers the upper side of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is prevented from passing through. Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is guided to the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 so as to be guided by the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member.

Since the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 facing the ball is formed in an arcuate shape with the channel side concave, the flowing ball can smoothly flow toward the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12. can be done.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged in the rear position (see FIGS. 19 and 20), the slide displacement member 370 retracts backward from above the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Ball passage is allowed.

That is, which detection sensor SE1 the ball passes through corresponds to the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 (front position or rear position). Then, when it is detected that the ball has passed through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 during the big winning game, the game state after the big winning game is controlled to be the variable probability state. In other words, when the ball is not detected to have passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and only passes through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the game state after the jackpot game is changed to the normal state (or time saving state ).

Here, in the present embodiment, as the types of jackpots, variable probability jackpots and normal jackpots are provided as described above. In order to realize this, in the present embodiment, different operation patterns are prepared as operation patterns of the slide displacement member 370 for each jackpot type.

In other words, the slide displacement member 370 is controlled to operate in an operation pattern that makes it easy for the ball to pass through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 in the case of a variable probability big hit, and in the case of a normal jackpot, the ball moves. Although it is controlled to operate in an operation pattern such that it is difficult to pass through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and easy to pass through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the details of the control will be described later.

Thus, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 is directly related to the profit that the player can obtain, and the arrangement naturally attracts the player's attention. On the other hand, more than a few fraudulent acts of illegally switching the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 have been discovered, and measures against this are considered important.

As a premise, the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 is switched depending on whether or not the electromagnetic solenoid 361 of the state switching device 360 is energized. That is, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is not energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are arranged on the right side by an urging spring (not shown), and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is positioned on the front side. By being placed on the side, the slide displacement member 370 is maintained in the front position.

On the other hand, when the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized, the plunger of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the slide portion 362 are moved to the left by the electromagnetic force, and the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 (see FIG. 13, the concave portion of the slide displacement member 370). The slide displacement member 370 is maintained at the rear side position by displacing the portion inserted into the installation portion 378 toward the rear side. This is the normal operation mode, and the energization of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 and the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 correspond one-to-one.

A person who commits the above-mentioned fraudulent act inserts a thin metal wire such as a piano wire into the sorting device 300 through the ball delivery opening, the gap between the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 (see FIG. 1), etc. By pressing the thin metal wire against the slide displacement member 370 and pushing the slide displacement member 370 toward the back side, there is a possibility of illegally creating a state in which the ball can enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11. be.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged such that the thin plate portion 371 is positioned below the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 18). When the thin metal wire is passed through the path forming portion 336 and pressed against the slide displacement member 370 , it is difficult to press against the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 , and the upper projecting portion 376 is pressed against it. The front side surface 376a of the upper protruding portion 376 has a curved surface shape that relieves the load to the left and right outer sides as described above, so that even if a fine metal wire is pressed against the front surface 376a, the load can be relieved to the left and right outer sides. This makes it easier to avoid a situation in which the slide displacement member 370 is improperly displaced to the rear position.

In addition to the fact that the path leading to the slide displacement member 370 is not straight but spirally wound, the slide displacement member 370 itself is arranged farther from the front side surface of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) toward the rear side. Since it is separated (about 10 cm), it can be difficult for the thin metal wire to reach the slide displacement member 370 in the first place.

These configurations also have the effect of improving the degree of freedom in designing the configuration of the state switching device 360 . That is, conventionally, in many cases, the disposition of the slide displacement member 370 is maintained by mechanical devising (displacement regulation) of the mechanism for transmitting the driving force against the fraudulent act as described above. , the configuration of the state switching device 360 is limited. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by configuring the slide displacement member 370 so that it is difficult to apply a load in the first place, the conditions required for the state switching device 360 can be partially omitted, and the state switching device 360 can be freely designed. degree can be increased.

In addition, when applying a pressing load to the slide displacement member 370 with a thin metal wire that is laid through the third flow path forming part 336, the thin metal wire itself may cause the ball to flow down the third flow path forming part 336. , it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

As described above, depending on whether the ball passes through the through-hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12, the profit obtained by the player changes greatly. should be avoided.

In the conventional model, it was normal to configure so as to regulate the entry to the normal detection sensor SE12 in the state where the entry to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is allowed, but in this embodiment, the probability variation detection In the state where the ball is allowed to enter the sensor SE11 (see FIGS. 19 and 20), no movable member is provided to restrict the ball from entering the normal detection sensor SE12. It is a configuration that allows

Even with this configuration, if at least one ball passes through the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11 when ten balls flow down, the variable probability state after the big winning game is ensured. Based on this idea, in the present embodiment, by omitting the arrangement of the movable member that normally opens and closes the detection sensor SE12, it is possible to reduce the material cost and the product cost. In addition, as a result of arranging no movable member, there is no need for maintenance due to failure or malfunction of the movable member, and the pachinko machine can be used longer than the life of the movable member.

On the other hand, as a device different from the movable member, as a device for guiding the ball to the detection sensor SE1 on the appropriate side, the shape of the flow path and the arrangement of the fixed protrusions 317, 318, 319 and shape have been devised. That is, a portion fixedly arranged inside the flow path (that is, a protrusion) prevents a larger ball than expected from flowing to the normal detection sensor SE12 when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position. It is intended to be realized by the shape of the installation portions 317, 318, 319). This will be explained below.

First, the contrivance of the shape of the flow path will be described. The lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336 is formed as an inclined surface that is inclined downward at an angle of 5 degrees with respect to the horizontal toward the center side in the left-right direction (partition plate portion 338 side) in the lateral direction. (See FIG. 15).

This inclination angle is set to be the same as the inclination in the longitudinal direction of the second flow path forming part 335 in terms of angle and direction. It is possible to reduce bounce of the ball when the ball flows in (bounce in the direction away from the partition plate portion 338).

Due to this inclination in the lateral direction, the arrangement of the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be brought closer to the partition plate portion 338 side. Therefore, the ball flowing down from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 toward the detection sensor SE1 side can be arranged on the side close to the partition plate portion 338, so that the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear side position. It is possible to reduce the possibility of the ball accidentally passing through the through-hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged away from the partition plate portion 338) in the arranged state.

In addition, regardless of the inclination of the lower bottom surface 336a in the lateral direction, the flow path formed by the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has a left-right direction path formed only by the second flow path forming portion 335. Since the direction of inclination is the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side), the velocity in the left-right direction is generated in the left-right inward direction. This also reduces the possibility of the ball accidentally passing through the through hole of the normal detection sensor SE12 (the detection sensor SE1 arranged apart from the partition plate portion 338).

Next, arrangement and configuration of the fixed projecting portions 317, 318, and 319 will be described. It is the left and right inner projecting portions 318 that the spheres that have flowed down the third flow path configuring portion 336 are first placed close to each other. The left and right inward projecting portion 318 is the smallest projecting portion among the projecting portions 317, 318, and 319, and is located on the front side of the center of the detection sensor SE1 and above the projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370. Since it is arranged on the front side, it contacts the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 without omission while sliding on the partition plate portion 338 .

Projecting tip surfaces of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are configured as curved surfaces that are concave downward when viewed from the front (see FIG. 15), and the rear end side of the projecting portion is more horizontal than the front end side of the projecting portion. It is formed so that it spreads outward and downward, and its front and rear ends are connected by a concave curved surface (see FIG. 17). Therefore, the ball passing through the rear end portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and coming into contact with the left and right inner projecting portion 318 receives a load in a direction in which the left and right outward component and the downward component are mixed, and flows down. .

On the other hand, since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are formed to be small, the load received from the left and right inner projecting portions 318 alone does not determine whether the ball flows downward or in the left or right outward direction. function as attachments. Since the left and right inner projecting portions 318 are arranged on the upstream side of the slide displacement member 370 , the above-described biasing force is generated regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 .

The flow of the ball after coming into contact with the left and right inner projections 318 will be described separately for each case. When the slide displacement member 370 is located at the front position, the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 while contacting the upper projecting portion 376 and the front-rear long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 18). and flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

The protruding ends of the front-to-rear protruding portion 317 have similar uses as the upper protruding portion 376 . That is, since it is formed as a curved surface for switching the flowing direction of the sphere, the radius of curvature of the curved surface is made substantially the same as the radius of curvature of the front side surface 376 a of the upper projecting portion 376 . As a guideline, the upper projecting portion 376 forms a curved surface starting from the left and right inner sides and ending at the rear position of the center position of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 in top view (see FIG. 17), while The long protruding portion 317 has a curved surface starting from the ceiling surface of the flow path and ending at a position close to the terminal position (rear end position) of the front side surface 376a at the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction view. (See FIG. 18).

Here, the upper side surface of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down to the left and right outer sides, and the ball that is urged to the left and right outer sides by contact with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 utilizes the momentum. Since the ball flows down in the left-right direction, the ball can flow down smoothly.

Furthermore, the left and right outward projecting portions 319 are formed above the ball flowing down in the left and right outward direction, and by suppressing the bouncing of the ball, it is possible to smoothly form the downward flow of the ball. Since the purpose of the left and right outer protrusions 319 is not to switch the ball flow direction but to suppress ball bouncing, its shape is significantly different from the front-rear long protrusions 317, and the protruding end is a variable detection sensor. It is formed as a curved surface with a large radius of curvature extending from above SE11 to above normal detection sensor SE12.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the left and right outer projecting portions 319 are arranged on the front side from the center of the opening of the detection sensor SE1 (that is, the center of the flow path) (see FIG. 19), the left and right outer projecting portions 319 When the provided portion 319 abuts on the sphere in the vertical direction, the center of the sphere is likely to be arranged on the rear side of the thickness center of the left and right outer projecting portions 319 . Therefore, when the left and right outer protrusions 319 and the ball come into contact with each other in the vertical direction, a load having a backward component can be easily applied to the ball, so that the ball does not flow backward to the front side. can be prevented.

With these configurations, it is possible to easily prevent ball clogging and backflow of balls when a plurality of balls flow down.

When the slide displacement member 370 is located at the rear position, the thin plate portion 371 and the upper projecting portion 376 are retracted further rearward than the longitudinally elongated projecting portion 317 . flows in contact with

The front-rear long projecting portion 317 has a projecting end portion (curved surface) having a surface shape in which the normal passes through the center of the third flow path forming portion 336, and the center of the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Since the center of thickness is arranged just behind the position, it is easy to apply a load with a suppressed component in the left-right direction to the ball in contact. This load functions as a load that causes the ball to flow obliquely forward and downward because the projecting tip of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 has a concave curved surface shape (see FIG. 20).

Therefore, the ball that does not go all the way to the right due to the momentum from the left and right inner projections 318 receives the load from the front-rear long projections 317 and flows toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

Here, depending on where the ball collides with the front-rear projecting portion 317, there is a possibility that the ball may rebound toward the front side (reverse flow may occur). Since the contact with the setting portion 318 forces the ball to the left, right, and diagonally downward, even if the ball rebounds to the front side, the ball does not reach the rear end of the lower bottom portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336 (see FIG. 20) or the , the rear side surface of the front frame-shaped portion 333 (see FIG. 19), and the back flow in the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily avoided.

What is unique in this embodiment is that even when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position and the ball flows to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side, the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position and the ball flows to the normal detection sensor SE12 side. In the same way as in the case above, the sphere is displaced from the right and left inner projecting portions 318 to the left and right outer sides due to the load. This application will be described later.

The slide displacement member 370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position. When 370 makes a closing motion (moving from the rearward position to the forward position), it may apply a forward load to the sphere, and the load in the direction (forward) that causes the sphere to flow back through the third flow path forming portion 336 is applied. may be given.

In order to prevent this, it is preferable to control the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 . For example, if the ball is controlled to complete the closing operation before it reaches the slide displacement member 370, the possibility of the ball colliding with the slide displacement member 370 during operation can be eliminated, so the ball may flow backward. can be lessened.

In addition, the front surface of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 is formed as a curved surface facing the left and right outer sides, and the left and right inner protruding portions 318 are arranged so as to collide with the ball without omission. It is possible to produce an action of guiding the sphere that has reached the rear end portion of the flow passage forming portion 336 to the left and right outer sides. This makes it difficult for the ball to flow backward.

Also, the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 (movement from the front position to the rear position) is not an operation in a direction facing the ball, but an operation in a direction away from the ball. Even if the movement is performed while riding on the thin plate portion 371, the load that pushes the ball back toward the front side is unlikely to occur. Therefore, it is considered that even if the opening operation is performed at an arbitrary timing without considering the arrangement of the balls, the backflow of the balls will not easily occur.

When the ball rolls on the thin plate portion 371 while rotating forward on the upper surface of the slide displacement member 370 (before it flows to the left and right outside), the opening operation of the slide displacement member 370 suppresses the rotation of the ball. Since a load is applied in the direction (in the direction of backward rotation), the rotation of the ball can be stopped, and the flow of the ball can be stopped, making it easier to shift to free fall.

Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is opened while the ball is rolling on the thin plate portion 371, it is possible to easily avoid the ball being guided to the normal detection sensor SE12 by the force of the previous rolling. , the ball can be easily guided to the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment equipped with the sorting device 300 described above, how the sorting device 300 looks from the player's perspective will be described. In the following, as an example, different cases will be described in which the angles of the line of sight with respect to the horizontal direction are different.

21 is a front view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300, FIG. 22 is a perspective view of the variable prize winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 as viewed in the direction of arrow XXIII in FIG. 16. FIG.

As a premise, the player who operates the pachinko machine 10 can play the game in a desired posture except for gripping and rotating the operating handle 51 (see FIG. 1). For example, a game is played by keeping one's head sufficiently away from the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) with a line of sight (see FIG. 22) in a direction that is horizontal or inclined downward by about 5 degrees from the horizontal. Alternatively, a game may be played by bringing the player's head closer to the pachinko machine 10 and viewing the inside of the glass unit 16 with a line of sight (see FIG. 23) in a direction inclined downward by about 30 degrees from the horizontal. In general, the former provides a wider field of view, but makes it difficult to notice details, while the latter narrows the field of view, but makes it easier to notice details in that field of view.

FIG. 21 is illustrated as a reference, and the following description will be mainly given while comparing FIGS. 22 and 23. FIG. 21 to 23 show the opening state of the opening/closing plate 65b for the sake of convenience.

FIG. 21 shows the light emitting means 351 in phantom lines. Although the light emitting means 351 are arranged symmetrically (see FIG. 13), only the left half is shown for easy understanding. Since the function of the light emitting means 351 arranged at the top is as described above, the three light emitting means 351 in the left half arranged in the lower side part 353 will be explained here.

First, the upper light emitting means 351 emits light toward the sealing member 313 . As described above, since the seal member 313 is formed to be red transparent, when light is emitted from the light emitting means 351, the periphery of the seal member 313 is illuminated in red. As a result, the player's attention to the sealing member 313 and its surroundings can be improved. Since the seal member 313 is arranged right above the third flow path forming part 336 (see FIG. 18), the third flow path forming part 336 can be noticed.

In addition, formation of the light diffusion processing surface 332e is omitted on the front side of the upper light emitting means 351 (see FIG. 18). As a result, the light from the light emitting means 351 can be prevented from being visually stretched vertically by the light diffusion processing surface 332e, and the periphery of the sealing member 313 can be illuminated intensively.

Although the light emission control is not limited in any way, for example, during a jackpot game, control is performed to irradiate the seal member 313 with light in a situation where it is desired to draw attention to the ball flowing down the third flow path forming part 336. By doing so, it is possible to draw attention to the seal member 313 and naturally guide the line of sight to the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 arranged therebelow.

Next, the light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side correspond to the positions right above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, respectively. That is, the control of the light emitting means 351 is such that when the ball enters the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 emits light, while the ball is normally detected by the detection sensor SE12. By controlling the light emitting means 351 arranged directly above the normal detection sensor SE12 to emit light when the ball is entered, the player can be notified of the passing point of the ball.

The light emitted from these light emitting means 351 arranged side by side on the lower side is directed to the light diffusion processing surface. That is, the light emitting means 351 on the left and right central side are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 332e (see FIG. 18), and the light emitting means 351 on the left and right outer sides are arranged to face the light diffusion processed surface 319a (see FIG. 17). ing. The light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 332e are formed over the top and bottom of each part.

Therefore, the position where the light from the light emitting means 351 is visually recognized is not limited to the height position of the LED of the light emitting means 351, but is formed as a range that spreads vertically (as a vertically extending strip of light visible). Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the visibility of the light from the light emitting means 351 can be improved even if the angle of the player's line of sight changes.

The downward inclination angle (5 degrees) from the horizontal in FIG. Therefore, in FIG. 22, the outer shape of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 can be visually recognized. However, since the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction, it is difficult to grasp the change due to the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in this field of view.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 23, when viewed at an angle of 30 degrees from the horizontal, the vertical width of the field of view at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrower than when viewed in the direction of FIG. As a result, the degree of difficulty in confirming the switching of the flow-down mode of the ball at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 increases. However, in this field of view, it is easy to grasp the displacement of the upper projecting portion 376 when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

In addition, since the placement through-hole 332a of the middle member 330 is formed as an opening of a minimum size sufficient for the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 to pass therethrough, the inside of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 It is possible to hide the state switching device 360 (see FIG. 17) arranged in the position so that it is difficult to see.

During the actual jackpot game, a plurality of balls are guided to the specific prize winning port 65a during the round game, and flow down the respective flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 in order. When a plurality of spheres are arranged simultaneously in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, there is a possibility that the line of sight directed to the sphere on the back side is obstructed by the sphere on the front side.

For example, when a plurality of spheres are arranged in the third flow path forming portion 336, those spheres are arranged at the same position in FIG. Therefore, the ball on the front side hides the ball on the back side.

Also, when the ball normally flows toward the detection sensor SE12 side, it flows from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right outward direction. Since the visibility is reduced by the light diffusion processing surface 333b of the front frame portion 333 after it is detached from the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right direction, the movement of the ball in the process of detaching from the third flow path forming portion 336 in the left and right direction Flows from the downstream end position (the position of the sphere P1) of the second flow path forming part 335 to the upstream end position (the position of the sphere P2) of the third flow path forming part 336. If there is a sphere (a sphere that is slightly displaced in the left-right direction from the third flow path forming part 336), the sphere hides the sphere that is in the process of moving off the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 in the left-right direction.

In other words, whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 is determined by determining whether the flow direction of the ball has switched to the left or right outside at the rear end of the third flow path forming portion 336. This can be done by visual inspection, and it suffices to pay attention to the inner side of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the periphery of the right edge portion. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at the connection position between the third flow path forming part 336 and the second flow path forming part 335 on the upstream side in the direction of the line of sight, the inside and the right side of the third flow path forming part 336 It is configured so that the sphere can flow down a path that includes the edge periphery (moving from the position of sphere P1 to the position of sphere P2). Therefore, depending on the arrangement of the ball flowing down the upstream side, there may occur a situation where it is not possible to grasp whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12.

23, the spheres flowing through the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the spheres flowing through the second flow passage forming portion 335 are clearly separated in the vertical arrangement. It is easy to avoid the situation where the ball of the ball is blindfolded. On the other hand, since the vertical width of the flow path that is visible at the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 is narrow, the area of the sphere that can be visually recognized from the direction is reduced.

In particular, the ball that has passed through the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, as described above, regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370, after once flowing downward to the right, toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 The flow route is switched between the flow route and the flow route toward the normal detection sensor SE12. Therefore, compared to the case where the flow path of the ball is switched depending on whether the ball flows straight down or the flow direction of the ball switches to the right, the area of the ball that is visually recognized at the switching position becomes smaller.

As another mode of switching, it is assumed that the switching position is arranged on the upstream side, such as the case where the flow path of the sphere is switched depending on whether it flows directly downward or switches to the right. For example, when the left and right inner projecting portion 318 is not formed and the ball toward the probability variation detection sensor SE11 flows downward from the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, the switching position is at least the third flow path It is positioned behind the center line of the component 336 .

On the other hand, when the switching position is displaced to the right of the rear of the center line of the third flow passage forming portion 336 as in the present embodiment, the sphere moves downward from the lower bottom portion of the third flow passage forming portion 336. By dropping (falling by the vertical difference between the upper surface of the lower bottom portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 and the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370, see FIG. 18), the ball is formed on the third flow route forming portion 336 itself. In addition to the effect of partially hiding the sphere, the sphere is partially hidden by the front frame-shaped portion 333 by displacing the sphere to the left and right outside of the range visible through the third flow path forming portion 336 .

Therefore, since the area of the ball that has passed through the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336 and is visible to the player's eyes is reduced, it is difficult to grasp which flow path the ball has flowed down. Become. As a result, it is possible to further improve attention to the ball flowing down near the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

As described above, according to the present embodiment, in a plurality of direction views (see FIGS. 22 and 23) described as direction views for identifying the flowing direction of the ball flowing down the rear end portion of the third flow path forming portion 336, , both have advantages and disadvantages. As a result, the player is allowed to adjust and select his/her favorite visual recognition method instead of requesting the player to play a one-sided game even with respect to the visual recognition method of the sorting device 300, thereby providing a wide range of game modes. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game.

The field of view of the player can be secured by various methods, but in this embodiment, in particular, by forming a gap between the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310, the third flow path forming portion Since the roof portion of 336 can be removed, the third flow path forming portion 336 can be easily recognized visually.

Regarding the directional views of FIGS. 22 and 23 , the visibility on the front side of the sorting device 300 will be described. Although not shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, since the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 (see FIG. 5) are arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300, the thickness of the member allows the light to pass through. Visibility is obstructed due to less light coming through.

Since the range where the field of view is blocked by the front design member 162 is narrowed, it is possible that the spheres flowing down inside the sorting device 300 can be seen more easily when viewed from the direction shown in FIG. 23 than when viewed from the direction shown in FIG. have a nature.

The member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162 are basically flat as described above, and are configured so that light is less likely to be refracted (see FIG. 12). Thereby, it can be avoided that the visibility of the sorting device 300 is deteriorated.

Even the portions that cannot be made flat from a functional point of view are formed so as to have little effect on visibility. For example, the protruding support portions 161c to 161e for positioning and engaging the sorting device 300 are arranged so that the player looking at the passage forming portions 334 to 336 does not block the line of sight of the player looking diagonally downward. outside the line of sight (upper rear, left and right outside, left and right lower).

Further, for example, the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed at the height of the center of the sphere, and is formed to be thin with the minimum thickness necessary for strength (see FIG. 18). As a result, even if the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is placed between the ball and the player's eyes, it is possible to prevent the entire ball from being hidden. visibility can be ensured.

Between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 , the ball that deviates from the specific prize winning opening 65 a flows down toward the out opening 71 . The influence of the ball flowing down toward the out port 71 on the field of vision will be described.

FIGS. 22 and 23 illustrate an example of the arrangement of balls flowing down toward the out port 71 with the opening/closing plate 65b opened. While the opening/closing plate 65b is open, the ball that has flowed down from above the opening/closing plate 65b rides on the opening/closing plate 65b and is guided toward the specific winning opening 65a. It becomes a ball that deviates to the left and right of 65b. These balls flow down between the extended portions 162 b and 162 c and are guided by the inner rail 61 to flow down toward the out port 71 .

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, from the player's point of view, the balls flowing on the inner rail 61 are arranged below the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336. It is possible to easily avoid the deterioration of the visibility of the balls flowing down the constituent parts 334 to 336 .

On the other hand, the ball flowing down the inner rail 61, like the ball flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335, flows at a moderate angle toward the center in the left-right direction of the game area. In the same way as the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335, the player's line of sight is guided to the left-right central position of the game area. This effect guides the player's line of sight to the out port 71 and to the third flow path forming portion 336 . That is, since the lateral direction positions of the out port 71 and the third flow path forming part 336 are the same position (right and left central position), the player can move the line of sight up and down so that the out port 71 and the third flow path The line of sight is guided to a state in which both of the constituent parts 336 can be visually recognized.

Therefore, the ball launched toward the game area is likely to efficiently enter the specific winning hole 65a (whether the number of waste balls during the jackpot game is small), 162c, irrespective of whether or not the balls flowing down frequently occur (whether or not wasteful balls occur frequently during the jackpot game), the effect of guiding the player's line of sight to the third flow path forming part 336 by the flowing balls. can be played.

That is, when the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the player's line of sight can be guided to the third channel forming part 336 while flowing down the second flow path forming part 335, and the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a. , the line of sight of the player can be guided to the third flow passage forming portion 336 while flowing down the inner rail 61 .

Normally, the ball heading for the out port 71 is a useless ball and does not have any effect in the game. to the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

In addition, in the closed state of the opening/closing plate 65b, the ball flows on the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b and passes through the front side of the second flow path forming portion 335, so that the field of view of the second flow passage forming portion 335 can be lowered. have a nature.

On the other hand, the second prize winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a are arranged above the lateral center position of the specific prize winning port 65a, and the third flow passage forming part 336 is arranged below the lateral center position of the specific prize winning port 65a. According to the configuration of the present embodiment, the ball can be prevented from flowing down by the second winning port 140 and the electric accessory 140a. can do. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the visibility of the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the periphery of the rear end thereof is lowered due to the ball flowing down the front side of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In the present embodiment, the time required for the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be ensured by the length of the passage forming portions 334 to 336. We are trying to avoid increasing the space. That is, as shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the arrangement interval between the specific prize winning port 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 as a guideline for the arrangement of the third flow passage forming part 336 from the player's line of sight. form a short

Moreover, since the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the lower rear side of the specific winning hole 65a (see FIG. 18), as shown in FIG. , it is visually recognized that the slide displacement member 370 is arranged so close to the outer shape of the specific prize winning opening 65a that it bites into it.

In addition, the ball enters the specific winning port 65a which is elongated in the left and right direction, and the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b of the detection sensor SE1 arranged at the left and right ends of the specific prize winning port 65a has a symmetrical flow path. Via the parts 334 to 336, they are collected under the left and right central sides of the specific prize winning opening 65a. As a result, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened compared to the case where the ball flows down in the horizontal direction of the specific prize winning opening 65a. In addition, since the structure required for the flow-down path of the ball can be a structure in which the lateral length becomes shorter toward the lower side, it can be easily arranged near the lower edge of the curved inner rail 61 . can.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the design idea is to arrange the specific winning hole 65a close to the out hole 71, but the structure is not such that the ball flows directly downward from the left and right inner ends of the second flow path forming part 335, but the second By adopting a structure in which the ball flows backward from the left and right inner end portions of the flow path forming portion 335 by the third flow path forming portion 336, the out port 71 (the front side (upstream side) of the curved surface portion 387) is arranged. opening) can be formed directly below the second flow path forming portion 335 . As a result, the vertical interval between the specific winning opening 65a and the out opening 71 is shortened.

In this way, by shortening the vertical arrangement width and the horizontal width of the specific prize winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 from the player's line of sight, in the design of the game area where the size in the front view is restricted to a certain standard, the specific Since the vertical width of the range occupied by the winning opening 65a and the slide displacement member 370 can be shortened, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

For example, as in the present embodiment, the specific winning port 65a can be arranged near the lower end of the game area, so the variable winning device 65 can be effectively used in the symmetrical game area.

Next, an example of the flow down of the ball after hitting the sorting device 300 and the operation pattern of the movable accessories (the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370) in consideration of the flow down will be described.

First, as a premise, the ball that has passed through the opening 312 flows down the first flow path forming part 334, the second flow path forming part 335, and the third flow path forming part 336 in order (see FIGS. 16 and 17). The time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 can be set arbitrarily. Designed.

That is, it takes 0.3 seconds to pass through the first flow passage forming portion 334 after entering the specific winning hole 65a, 0.3 seconds to pass through the second flow passage forming portion 335, and 0.3 seconds to pass through the third flow pass. It is configured to take 0.3 seconds to pass through configuration section 336 .

Therefore, even if the ball enters the specific prize winning port 65a immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable prize winning device 65 is opened, it is placed at the rear end of the third flow passage forming portion 336 for 0.9 seconds. It is configured so that the ball does not reach the detection sensor SE1 that is to be detected. As a result, for 0.9 seconds after the opening and closing plate 65b is opened, the ball does not move to the position of the slide displacement member 370, and the ball cannot pass through either the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12. , the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 can be designed without worrying about the wrong winning of the ball.

Therefore, for example, control to release the opening and closing plate for a short time at the start of the round game R in order to prevent erroneous winning to the V winning sensor, which is commonly seen in pachinko machines equipped with V probability variable attackers. control with naturalness) can be dispensed with. As a result, the opening and closing plate for opening and closing the specific prize winning opening operates in a natural manner, thereby providing the player with an environment in which the player can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the pachinko machine provided with the V probability variable attacker in the above example, the ball entering the ball immediately after the V probability variable attacker is released tends to cause an erroneous winning, but in the variable winning device 65 of this case, as will be described later, Conversely, the entering ball has a favorable effect (for example, the effect of hiding the operation of the slide displacement member 370 with the ball). .

The time required for the sphere to pass through can be arbitrarily set depending on the length and inclination of each of the channel forming portions 334 to 336, the shape of the channel inner wall (whether it is smooth or uneven).

The contents of the ROM 202 (see FIG. 4) in the first control example of the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24(a) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 in the main controller 110, and FIG. 24(b) schematically shows the correspondence relationship between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. FIG. 24(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second winning random number counter C4 and the winning in the normal symbol.

As shown in FIG. 24(a), the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 contains a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, and a second winning random number table 202c as part of the above fixed value data. , and a variation pattern selection table 202d are stored at least.

The first winning random number table 202a is a data table that stores the jackpot determination value of the first winning random number counter that is periodically updated (for example, every 2 msec). When the value of the first winning random number counter obtained based on the start winning coincides with one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won.

The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 24 (b)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is each jackpot type. , and is defined in association with the type of winning opening that triggered the lottery of special symbols. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

Specifically, when the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning port 64) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 9". is defined in association with the jackpot A1 (see 202b1 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot A1 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "10 to 19" in association with the jackpot A2 (see 202b2 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot A2 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the first operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined in the range of "20 to 39" in association with the jackpot B1 (see 202b3 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot B1 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "40 to 49" in association with the big winning B2 (see 202b4 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot B2 is reached, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the second operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operation pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "50 to 79" in association with the jackpot C1 (see 202b5 in FIG. 24(b)).

When the jackpot C1 is won, four rounds of the jackpot game are executed in the third operation pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the actuation pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

The value of the first winning type counter C2 is defined in the range of "80 to 99" in association with the jackpot C2 (see 202b6 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot C2, four rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operating pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operating pattern Y (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

As described above, when a big win is achieved in the special symbol 1 lottery (lottery based on the ball entering the first winning hole 64), the 4-round big win game is selected in any case. Therefore, it is not possible to expect a large number of prize balls compared to the case of a big win in the lottery for the special symbol 2, which will be described later. On the other hand, since the 4-round jackpot game ends in a shorter time than the 15-round jackpot game, the launching of the ball for the subsequent jackpot win can be started early.

On the other hand, when the lottery for the special symbol 2 (lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140) results in a big hit, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 99". a is associated and defined (see 202b7 in FIG. 24(b)).

In the case of a jackpot a, 15 rounds of jackpot games are executed in the third operating pattern (details will be described later) of the variable winning device 65, and the slide displacement member 370 is operated in the operating pattern X (details will be described later). controlled to displace.

As described above, if the lottery for the special symbol 2 (the lottery based on the ball entering the second winning hole 140) results in a big win, 15 rounds of the big win game is selected in any case. Therefore, the player who wins the jackpot in the lottery of the special pattern 2 can obtain a large amount of payout prize balls compared to the case of winning the jackpot in the lottery of the special pattern 1, so that the player can enjoy the special pattern. It is possible to increase the motivation of playing a game for performing the lottery of 2 (a game of shooting a ball so as to enter the second winning hole 140).

In addition, since the operation pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is fixed to the operation pattern X, even if the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 is not ensured, there is little possibility that the player will be disadvantaged. Therefore, when there is a third operation pattern as an operation pattern that has the disadvantage that the visibility to the slide displacement member 370 is slightly deteriorated, but has the advantage that the ball is likely to enter the specific winning opening 65a, the special symbol 2 is drawn by lottery. By setting the operation pattern of the variable winning device 65 for the big win in the third operation pattern, the influence of the disadvantages can be reduced and only the advantage of being able to shorten the time required for the big win game can be emphasized. .

That is, since the possibility of delaying the big win game in the lottery of the special pattern 2 can be reduced, the big win game which is comfortable for the player (the time efficiency of putting out prize balls is good) can be realized.

In addition, the setting of the jackpot type of the special symbol 2 is not limited to this. For example, as the special symbol 2 jackpot type, a jackpot type in which the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 is controlled by the operation pattern Y may be provided. Also, this jackpot type may be provided at a small percentage (for example, about 20%).

As a result, the player's attention to the slide displacement member 370 can be improved, so that the player can be prevented from casually playing the big winning game. In other words, the player can visually recognize the displacing motion of the slide displacing member 370, make the player happy and sad at the timing of the displacing motion, and enhance the interest of the player.

As described above, during the probability change of the special symbol, the probability of winning the normal symbol is increased, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened (3 seconds), and the opening time of the electric accessory 140a when the normal symbol is hit. It is set to be longer (1 second x 2 times). Therefore, it becomes easier to enter the ball into the second winning hole 140, so that the lottery for the special symbol 2 can be easily performed. Therefore, once it is possible to shift to the variable probability state of the special symbols, the variable probability state of the special symbols is likely to become a jackpot of the special symbols, and when it becomes a jackpot, it is easy to become a jackpot a (a jackpot with a good profit balance). This makes it easier for the player to win a large number of prize balls. As a result, the player can play the game while strongly anticipating that the special symbols will shift to the variable probability state, so that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 24(c)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of normal symbols, "5 to 28" is defined as the determination value for winning the normal symbol (see 202c1 in FIG. 24(c)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see 202c2 in FIG. 24(c)). In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained based on the passing of the ball through the normal winning prize opening 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to. It is determined whether or not The variation pattern selection table 202d is a data table in which the determination value of the variation type counter for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is defined for each display mode.

FIG. 25 is a diagram showing changes over time in the operating pattern of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the operating pattern of the slide displacement member 370 of the distribution device 300 in the first round for each jackpot type.

When the MPU 201 (see FIG. 4) determines the big hit in the special figure winning determination, after the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, it starts controlling the big winning game (of the determined type). Operation control of the opening/closing plate 65b of the variable winning device 65 and the slide displacement member 370 of the sorting device 300, which is performed when a jackpot game is awarded, will be described below. Note that FIG. 24 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIG. 25 .

Incidentally, in this control example, the driving mode differs depending on the type of jackpot only in the first round, and the driving mode is common in the second and subsequent rounds. Therefore, the driving mode of the first round for each jackpot type will be described.

In the case of the jackpot A1 or jackpot A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the first operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 0.2 seconds. In the first operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 0.2 seconds is performed at intervals of 1.0 seconds, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time.

In addition, the initial opening time is longer than the period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game ball is continuously shot, and the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of the game ball It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 0.2 seconds in the first operation pattern is set to limit the number of balls entering the left and right sides of the specific prize winning opening 65a to one while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is an opening time setting for preventing a plurality of balls from entering one side of the specific winning port 65a in a row (hereinafter also referred to as "entering balls in a row"). It is not intended to limit the number of balls to one. That is, even if the opening time is 0.2 seconds, it is possible that one ball reaches each of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a and enters the specific winning opening 65a at once.

In the case of the jackpot A1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set on the basis of the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. It is driven and controlled to be displaced to the rear side position.

Therefore, the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a passes through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 19), passes through the front side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 20). .

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

In the case of the big hit A2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. The drive control of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is set on the basis of the drive control of the opening/closing plate 65b. The slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled to be displaced to the rear side position, and after 0.8 seconds have passed, the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled to be displaced from the rear side position to the front side position.

As described above, the time required for the ball to pass through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17) is set to about 0.9 seconds, so before the ball reaches the slide displacement member 370 The slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the front position.

Therefore, a ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a passes through each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 (see FIG. 17), passes through the upper side of the slide displacement member 370, and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17). .

At this time, since the number of spheres arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides is limited to one, visibility is not lowered by other spheres. Therefore, the player can easily visually recognize the state in which the ball passes through the normal detection sensor SE12.

0.8 second as the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is based on the idea that the time is shorter than the time required for the sphere to pass through each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336, and that the ball is the third flow passage forming portion. It is set from the idea that it takes longer than the time it takes to reach 336.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the ball passes through the second flow path forming part 335 and reaches the third flow path forming part 336 in about 0.6 seconds after entering the specific winning hole 65a. Even if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a just before the end of 0.2 seconds as the opening time of the opening and closing plate 65b, the slide displacement member is applied after the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336. 370 can be displaced.

Therefore, as long as the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, the operation of the slide displacement member 370 can be hidden by the ball arranged in the third flow passage forming part 336 regardless of the ball entering timing ( See Figure 22). As a result, it is possible to avoid conspicuous displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370, attention to the ball flowing down each flow path configuration portion 334 ~ 336 as a ball entering the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or normal detection sensor SE12 can be improved.

Note that the displacement start time of the slide displacement member 370 is not limited to 0.8 seconds. For example, it may be set to 0.4 seconds. In this case, since the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced before the ball reaches the third flow path forming portion 336, the possibility that the ball will block the line of sight is low, and the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced. can be visually recognized by the player.

However, even in this case, since the second flow passage forming portion 335 is arranged close to the front plate portion of the fixed member 161 and is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370, the line of sight of the player is tend to gather on the spheres flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335 . That is, by drawing attention to the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 (for example, by displaying a message such as "Attention to the flowing sphere!" can be easily avoided from being visually recognized by the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, each flow passage forming part 334 to 336 is configured so as to be separated at the center of the left and right, so if the ball enters the specific winning hole 65a on the left or right side, the ball will enter. By paying attention to the rear side of the third flow path forming portion 336 on the side not facing, the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 can be visually recognized without being blocked by the flowing ball (see FIG. 22).

In this way, in the case of the big hits A1 and A2, the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is limited to one, thereby improving attention to the ball. In addition, the player can easily see whether the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of the big win B1 or the big win B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the second operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the specific winning hole 65a. The initial open state is maintained for 1.0 second. In the second operation pattern, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled so that the opening operation for 1.0 seconds is performed at intervals of 1.0 seconds, and the open/close plate 65b is operated for a long time.

In addition, the initial opening time is longer than the period in which at least one game ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a when the game ball is continuously shot, and the specified number (10 in this embodiment) of the game ball It is set as a period shorter than the period required to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

The opening time of 1.0 seconds in the second operation pattern is set as a time during which a plurality of balls can enter one of the left and right sides of the specific winning opening 65a while the opening/closing plate 65b is open. This is the setting of the opening time for allowing a plurality of balls to enter one of the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a in a row (hereinafter also referred to as "entering a ball in succession").

In this control example, the interval between ball launches is set to 0.6 seconds, so even if the interval between balls flowing down does not change from the time of launch, the opening/closing plate 65b is opened once every 1.0 seconds. In the meantime, two balls can enter the specific winning hole 65a. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is limited to every 1.0 second, the next ball reaches each flow passage forming portion 334 before the two balls pass through each flow passage forming portion 334 to 336. Entering into ~336 can be restricted.

In the case of the big win B1, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big win B2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit B1, the ball that has passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit B2, the ball that has passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 is the normal detection sensor SE12. pass through.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one ball or two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides. When the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one, the visibility is not lowered by other balls as in the case of the big hits A1 and A2. A person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two (or more) balls are arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides, the ball on the upstream side is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the ball on the downstream side. , which may reduce the visibility of the downstream ball. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336. .

In the case of a big win C1, a big win C2 or a big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 165c (see FIG. 11) so that the opening/closing plate 65b operates based on the third operation pattern. When the special figure variation display (symbol variation effect) ends, the MPU 201 operates the electromagnetic solenoid 165c so that the timer means (not shown) keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the predetermined opening time OP (10 seconds) elapses. is driven and controlled, and the first round round game R is started after the opening time OP has passed.

That is, the first operation time T1 (maximum 30 seconds) is started to be measured by the timer means, and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to open the ball into the specific winning hole 65a. The opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time within the operation time T1.

Then, in the round game R of the first round, the round end condition (round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) has elapsed or a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls has won ) is satisfied, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so as to displace the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the first round ends.

In this control example, since the open/close plate 65b maintains the open state during the round game R of the first round, a situation may occur in which a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a in succession. On the other hand, since the opening interval of the opening/closing plate 65b is not limited, unlike the second operation pattern, the next ball is opened before the two balls pass through each of the passage forming portions 334 to 336. It is also possible for the ball to enter the passage forming portions 334 to 336 . Therefore, compared to the second operation pattern, the visibility of the ball arranged on the downstream side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is improved by the ball arranged on the upstream side in the third operation pattern. It is easy for the situation to fall.

In the case of the big win C1 or the big win a, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern X described above. Further, in the case of the big win C2, the MPU 201 drives and controls the electromagnetic solenoid 361 so that the slide displacement member 370 operates based on the operation pattern Y. Therefore, in the case of the big hit C1 or the big hit a, the ball that passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11, and in the case of the big hit C2, the ball that passed through each flow path configuration part 334 to 336 is normal. It passes through the detection sensor SE12.

Thus, regardless of whether the ball is passed through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or passed through the normal detection sensor SE12, the control mode is such that the opening/closing plate 65b is maintained in an open state. Since the time required to reach the point is controlled from the structure, the possibility of malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 due to ball engagement can be eliminated.

At this time, the appearance of each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 differs depending on whether one ball or two balls are arranged in each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides. When the number of balls arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on the left and right sides is one, the visibility is not lowered by other balls as in the case of the big hits A1 and A2. A person can easily visually recognize the situation in which the ball passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, when two balls are arranged in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 on one of the left and right sides, the ball on the upstream side is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the ball on the downstream side. Visibility of side balls may be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention of the player who wants to know whether the ball passes the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 to the ball flowing down the respective flow path forming parts 334 to 336. .

In the third operation pattern, there is no restriction on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific winning hole 65a in the round game R of the first round. Arrangement of spheres tends to be disorderly. Therefore, the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is likely to deteriorate.

On the other hand, the fact that there is no limit to the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific winning hole 65a has the effect of allowing the progress of the round game R to be performed early. That is, the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number (10 in this embodiment) of pachinko balls). Winning can be easily fulfilled at an early stage, and delay of a big winning game can be avoided.

In particular, the special pattern 2 jackpot is 100% probability that the slide displacement member 370 is driven and controlled in the operation pattern X, so if the ball enters the specific winning opening 65a, the ball will pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11. is promised. In this case, the player's attention to the detection sensor SE and the slide displacement member 370 is originally low.

Therefore, even if the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is allowed, the disadvantage felt by the player is small. In the third operation pattern, while allowing the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 to deteriorate, priority is given to avoiding the delay of the big win game, thereby realizing the progress of the big win game in a short time. In this way, it is possible to improve the player's interest in the jackpot game.

Regardless of the jackpot type, when the round game R of the first round ends, the timer means holds the opening/closing plate 65b in a closed state until the first interval time Int1 (2.0 seconds) between rounds elapses. 165c is driven and controlled, and after the first inter-round interval time Int1 elapses, the round game R of the second round is started.

In the second round, similarly to the start of the first round, the timer means starts measuring the first operating time T1 (maximum 30 seconds), and the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced from the closed state to the open state to open the specific winning hole. The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is controlled to open the opening 65a, and the opening/closing plate 65b is operated for a long period of time. From the second round onwards, the slide displacement member 370 is always maintained at the front position, so the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a is normally discharged after passing through the detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 17).

Then, in the second round round game R, when the round end condition (elapse of the round game time (30 seconds, which is the maximum value of the first operation time T1) or winning of a specified number of pachinko balls) is satisfied, The electromagnetic solenoid 165c is drive-controlled so that the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to the closed state to close the specific winning hole 65a, and the round game R of the second round ends.

After that, as in the second round, the round game R of the third round to the final round (fourth round) is repeated with the inter-round first interval time Int1 between each round game R, and the opening and closing plate 65b is displaced between the closed state and the open state, and the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven and controlled to open and close the specific winning opening 65a.

When the final round game R ends, the electromagnetic solenoid 165c is driven so that the timer means keeps the opening/closing plate 65b closed until the first inter-round interval time Int1 and the ending time ED (11 seconds) elapse. It is controlled, and the jackpot game ends with the lapse of the time.

In this control example, the short-open displacement operation of the opening/closing plate 65b and the drive control of the slide displacement member 370 are performed only in the first round, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be executed in all rounds, or may be executed in rounds other than the first round (for example, the 3rd round, the 8th round, the 12th round, etc.).

As described above, according to this control example, the manner in which the ball enters the opening/closing plate 65b is changed depending on the difference in the opening patterns (first operation pattern to third operation pattern) of the opening/closing plate 65b. The visibility of the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the passage forming portions 334 to 336 and the third passage forming portion 336 can be made different. As a result, the player who pays attention to the passage of the ball through the detection sensor SE1 arranged on the downstream side of the third flow passage forming part 336 can be motivated to devise a shooting mode of the ball.

For example, a decrease in the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 may occur when a plurality of spheres are arranged simultaneously in each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336, so if necessary (for example, the second operation pattern or By intentionally widening the shooting interval of the ball (in the jackpot type of the third operation pattern), it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1. In addition, in the first operation pattern, since the entry of the ball into the specific winning hole 65a is restricted, it is possible to avoid deterioration of the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 regardless of the shooting mode.

On the other hand, if the ball shooting interval is extended, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so there is a possibility that the round game R will be delayed. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, in order to visually recognize the displacement of the slide displacement member 370, after a certain period of time (for example, 1.0 seconds) is left after the start of the round game R, the ball is caused to enter the specific winning opening 65a. Also good. In this case, at the timing when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced (timing 0.8 seconds after the start of the round game R in the case of the operation pattern Y), the situation where the ball is arranged in the third flow path forming part 336 is avoided. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from blocking the displacement operation of the slide displacement member 370 .

On the other hand, if the period until ball launch is set, the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a is extended, so the round game R may be delayed. In other words, the player can choose how to play the round game R between the game mode in which the visibility of the detection sensor SE1 is prioritized and the game mode in which avoidance of the round game R is prioritized.

For example, according to the present embodiment, the passage forming portions 334 to 336 and the slide displacement member 370 are configured symmetrically, and a ball can enter through the specific winning opening 65a from either the left or right side.

That is, for example, the above-described firing mode that widens the shooting interval of the ball and the firing mode that increases the time until the ball is fired are maintained when the ball is entered on the left side, and the ball is fired in an arbitrary firing mode when the ball is entered on the right side. The same effect as described above can be achieved even if the game is played by shooting.

Specifically, as a shooting mode in which the ball is shot toward the specific winning hole 65a separately to the left and right, at least the first ball is shot to the right, and the number of shots (for example, the second ball) is shot to the right. to the left and the remaining balls to the right.

In this case, by not paying attention to the spheres flowing down the right channel as each of the flow channel constituting parts 334 to 336, but focusing on the spheres flowing down the left channel, it is possible to avoid the line of sight being blocked by other spheres. While, it is possible to visually confirm whether or not the ball flowing down the left channel passes through the variable probability detection sensor SE11. In addition, in this case, since the balls are continuously shot toward the right side of the specific winning opening 65a, it is possible to avoid the extension of the period until the specified number of balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. It is possible to avoid delaying the round game R.

It should be noted that the purpose of this separation of firing balls to the left and right is not to make one ball enter the left channel. In particular, it suffices if the number of balls arranged in each of the left flow path forming portions 334 to 336 can be limited to one in about 0.9 seconds until the number of the balls passes through the left flow path, and other periods In , it is sufficient to separately hit the ball so that it enters the left and right channels arbitrarily.

As a result, when the opening width above the specific winning port 65a is not long as in the present embodiment (for example, the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a and the arrangement of the nails (see FIG. 2), the number of ball entry paths is small. ), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the balls heading for the specific winning opening 65a collide with each other and one of the balls spills to the left and right outer sides of the specific winning opening 65a. Although the nail arrangement is left-right asymmetrical in FIG. 2, the nail arrangement may be left-right symmetrical.

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 fastened and fixed to the back side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is a unit fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the rear side.

26 is a front perspective view of operation unit 500, and FIG. 27 is a rear perspective view of operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 27, illustration of the liquid crystal display (variable display unit 80) arranged in the opening 511a of the rear case 510 is omitted, and the rear side can be seen through the opening 511a. 26 and 27 will refer to FIG. 2 as appropriate.

The operation unit 500 includes a box-shaped rear case 510 whose front side is opened from a bottom wall portion 511 and an outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511 . A rectangular opening 511 a is formed in the center of the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , so that the rear case 510 is formed in a rectangular frame shape when viewed from the front. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 can be divided when viewed from the front).

The back case 510 extends as a plane plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall part 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 includes a positioning convex portion 513a that protrudes toward the front side in a shape that can be fitted into a fitting concave portion (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13, and the base plate 60. and a plurality of insertion holes 513b through which fastening screws to be fastened can be inserted.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning projections 513a into the fitting recesses of the base plate 60, and the fastening screws are inserted through the insertion holes 513b and screwed into the base plate 60. Since the game board 13 and the action unit 500 can be integrally fixed, the rigidity of the game board 13 and the action unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited at all, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the protrusion may have an outer shape slightly smaller than the inner shape (circular or oval in this embodiment) of the fitting recess of the base plate 60, or the fitting gap may be large in consideration of workability during assembly. A protrusion having a shape (smaller outer shape) may be used. Further, when the inner shape of the fitting recess is formed in a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning protrusion 513a is also formed in a rectangular shape correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and various light emitting means and various operation units are arranged inside. That is, the operation unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a first operation unit 600 arranged in the inner right part of the rear case 510, a second operation unit 700 arranged in the inner lower part of the rear case 510, and a third operation unit 800 disposed on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510 . In addition, a substrate having a light emitting means such as an LED is disposed on the left inside of the rear case 510 so as to cover the substrate from the front side and is formed of a light transmissive material. A diffusion decorative plate LB1 to be formed is provided.

Specifically, the first operation unit 600 is positioned to the right of the opening 511a, the second operation unit 700 is positioned below the opening 511a, and the third operation unit 800 is positioned above the opening 511a. It is arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the case 510 . First, an overview of operation control of the operation unit 500 will be described.

28 to 35 are front views of the operation unit 500 showing an example of the operation of the operation unit 500. FIG. In FIG. 28, each operation unit 600 to 800 in the effect standby state is illustrated, and in FIG. 29, the state in which the first operation unit 600 has changed from the effect standby state of each operation unit 600 to 800 to the extended state is illustrated, FIG. 30 illustrates a state in which the second operation unit 700 has changed from the presentation standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state.

In FIG. 30, the second operation unit 700 is illustrated in a state in which the surface of the covering member 787 facing forward is different from that of the second operation unit 700 illustrated in FIG.

28 to 35, the inner shape of the center frame 86 is illustrated by imaginary lines. The third pattern display device 81 arranged on the back side can be visually recognized inside the center frame 86, but outside the center frame 86, the base plate 60 is made of a transparent resin member. The field of view is likely to be blocked by nails, various prize openings 63, 64, 65a, 140, etc., and through gates 67, etc. (see FIG. 2) provided on the base plate 60. Therefore, for example, in a state where the operation units 600 to 800 are arranged outside the center frame 86 as shown in FIG.

Although the frame shape of the center frame 86 is different from that of the center frame 86 shown in FIG. 2 in order to match the configuration of the operation unit 500, the roles are the same. In addition, the inner frame of the center frame 86 has a curved shape that protrudes downward on the front side of the third operation unit 800, but the outer frame of the center frame 86 is not curved downward, and the center frame 86 is curved downward. On the inner frame side of 86, a circular transparent decorative thin plate is protruded so as to cover the third operation unit 800 from the front side. Therefore, the role of rolling the ball on the upper side of the center frame 86 to the left and right sides is the same as that shown in FIG. It is arranged so as to straddle the upper side of the unit 800 from side to side.

FIGS. 31 and 32 illustrate a state in which the third operation unit 800 has changed from the presentation standby state of each of the operation units 600 to 800 to the extended state. In FIG. 31, the first decorative member 870 faces forward and the third operation unit 800 is shown separately combined, and in FIG. A coalesced state is illustrated.

31 and 32 occurs in a displacement mode combining linear motion displacement and rotational displacement. Since the collision with the decorative members 870 and 880 causes a problem, the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the third operation unit 800 is in an extended state (or in a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced downward to a degree sufficient to avoid the collision of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the waiting state for presentation). On the premise that the displacement of 870, 880 is allowed in the virtual circle 800F (see FIG. 32), the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is instructed to execute reverse displacement (switching rotation operation). The details are described later.

FIG. 33 shows the third action unit 800 in the extended state and the second action unit 700 in the intermediate effect state slightly lowered from the extended state, and FIG. 34 shows the state of FIG. 600 is shown displaced to the intermediate effect state, and in FIG. 35, from the state of FIG. illustrated.

28 to 35, the displacement trajectory of the third motion unit 800 and the displacement trajectory of the first motion unit 600 or the displacement trajectory of the second motion unit 700 partially overlap when viewed from the front. Therefore, for example, when the third operation unit 800 is in the extended state (see FIG. 31), and the state of the first operation unit 600 or the second operation unit 700 changes from the presentation standby state, there is a possibility of collision.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the state change from the effect standby state of the first operation unit 600 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the third operation unit 800 is in the effect standby state, or the third operation By controlling the state change from the effect standby state of the unit 800 to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 It is possible to avoid overlapping when viewed from the front. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the state change to the extended state of the second operation unit 700 is controlled to be executable on the condition that the first operation unit 600 and the third operation unit 800 are in the presentation standby state, By setting the arrangement of the second operation unit 700 to an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33) when the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state, the second operation unit 700 can be placed in front of the other operation units 600 and 800. Overlapping can be avoided. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of arrangement of the operation units 600 to 800 (overlapping front and rear positions can be allowed).

In particular, as the visual recognition state of the second operation unit 700, there are a plurality of cases where the second operation unit 700 is visually recognized in a protruded state closer to the opening 511a and in a state in which the third operation unit 800 is slightly receded from the opening 511a but is arranged close to the third operation unit 800. By constructing the states, the function of the second action unit 700 as an effect device is improved.

As shown in FIGS. 28 to 35, the first motion unit 600 performs displacement motion on the right side of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The second decoration rotating member 660 of the first operation unit 600 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box-shaped member 661. The box-shaped member 661 has a first rendering surface 661a facing obliquely to the left in the rendering standby state, and a first rendering surface 661a. It has a second effect surface 661b formed on the back side of the surface 661a, and a third effect surface 661c as a surface adjacent to the first effect surface 661a and the second effect surface 661b. Each rendering surface 661a to 661c is optionally decorated with figures, patterns, characters, and the like.

When the first action unit 600 is in the effect standby state, the second decoration rotary member 660 is arranged at a position on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, where the visibility from the front side tends to decrease due to the arrangement of the center frame 86. However, since the first effect surface 661a is oriented obliquely toward the player side (the surface on the near side is tilted 45 degrees toward the arrow L side with reference to the arrow FB), the third effect surface 661a From the inside of the frame of the opening of the pattern display device 81 and the center frame 86, the second decorative rotary member 660 is viewed obliquely through the gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81. The visibility of the effect surface 661a can be improved.

On the other hand, in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the second decoration rotary member 660 projects in front of the third pattern display device 81, thereby allowing the player who visually recognizes the inside of the center frame 86 to face it. In this case, the second decorative rotating member 660 is oriented with the second rendering surface 661b facing directly in front, so the visibility of the second rendering surface 661b from the line of sight of the player who visually recognizes the second decorative rotating member 660 is can be improved.

In this way, the second decorative rotary member 660 is configured to be able to switch the effect surfaces 661a to 661c visually recognized by the player according to the arrangement, and to change the visibility of the respective effect surfaces 661a to 661c visually recognized by the player. For the purpose of improvement, it is configured so that the posture can be switched according to the arrangement.

In other words, the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) is not limited to planar posture changes parallel to the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1), but is designed to provide angle changes intended for the relationship with the line of sight of the player. That is, the closer the center frame 86 is placed to the center of the frame, the more the player's line of sight is oriented forward and backward, making it easier for the player to face the player. Since the line of sight of the player tends to become oblique as it is placed closer to the frame of the center frame 86, visibility can be improved by making the performance surface oblique so as to directly face the line of sight.

As the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is displaced in conjunction therewith. The projecting decorative portion 652b is decorated with figures, patterns, etc. on the front surface of the board, and when the first action unit 600 is in the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 34), the back case 510 By placing it in the upper right corner, it is hidden from the player's view.

On the other hand, when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state (see FIG. 28), the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged on the center frame 86 so as to overlap the right edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the front view. It is configured so that it can be visually recognized by the player by being placed inside the frame.

In this state, the right end portion of the external shape of the projecting decorative portion 652b is located on the right side of the right edge of the third pattern display device 81. As shown in FIG. Therefore, by using the decoration on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b, it is possible to perform a display effect that makes the player feel as if the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is expanding.

More specifically, the right edge of the area where the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized is defined by the first operation unit 600, and in the waiting state of the first operation unit 600 for rendering, the second decorative rotary member The left edge of the first rendering surface 661a of 660 and the region right end RE1 of the region in which the display of the third pattern display device 81 can be visually recognized approximately match.

On the other hand, in the overhanging state of the first operation unit 600, the overhang decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to extend beyond the region right end RE1 to the right. Therefore, by associating or matching the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the decoration of the plate front surface of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, the display area of the third pattern display device 81 appears as if the area right end RE1 can be made to appear to the player as if it were expanding beyond the As a result, it is possible to realize an unexpected presentation.

As an example of matching the above display and decoration, for example, a polka dot pattern is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a similar polka dot pattern is used as the decoration on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b, A certain number is written on the front surface of the projecting decorative portion 652b in the same typeface as the typeface of the numbers (for example, numbers for notifying the success or failure of the lottery) variably displayed on the third pattern display device 81. An example of doing so is illustrated.

As an example of associating the above-mentioned display with the decoration, for example, six of the seven colors forming the rainbow are displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and the plate front of the projecting decorative portion 652b remains. An example in which the third pattern display device 81 is colored in one color, and a wooden stick arranged so as to align the right end with the region right end RE1 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and a flame is modeled on the plate front of the projecting decorative portion 652b. An example is exemplified in which the first operation unit 600 is decorated in such a way that it is associated with ignition when the first operation unit 600 is extended.

Note that the presentation mode of the projecting decorative portion 652b is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types of presentation modes can be configured by controlling the brightness of the projecting decorative portion 652b. Light emitting means for changing the brightness of the portion 652b will be described later.

In addition, by disposing a small liquid crystal device having a display surface on the front side instead of the projecting decorative portion 652b, the display of the liquid crystal device can be changed in a plurality of types, so that the area beyond the right end RE1 of the region can be displayed. It is possible to avoid the limitation of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 when enlarging the display area.

Further, the object to be associated with the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b is not limited to display, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b may be associated with the decoration (first decoration, second decoration) formed on the member of the second operation unit 700 (for example, the covering member 787). , the decoration of the protruding decorative portion 652b, and the decorations formed on the members of the third operation unit 800 (for example, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880) (the decoration of the first covering portion 875, the second covering decoration of the installation portion 885).

36 is a front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 37 is a rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. The first operation unit 600 is configured in a complicated displacement mode in which the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates while changing its attitude. By relatively displacing on the basis of , the player can visually recognize different appearances before and after the displacement.

38 is an exploded front perspective view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 39 is an exploded rear perspective view of the first operation unit 600. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, the first operation unit 600 includes fixed means 610 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, a rotating member 620 rotatably supported by the fixed means 610, A drive transmission device 630 that transmits a driving force for rotating the rotating member 620, and a supported member 640 whose one end is rotatably supported by the rotating tip of the rotating member 620. , a first decorative rotary member 650 rotatably disposed at the other end of the supported member 640, a second decorative rotary member 660 rotatably supported by the first decorative rotary member 650, and a decorative fixing member 670 fixed to the front side of the lower half of the fixed means 610 .

The means to be fixed 610 is arranged to face the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 in the front-rear direction, and the base member 611 is arranged on the front side of the base member 611 while creating a space between the base member 611 and the base member 611 . and a front lid member 612 fastened to and secured to the .

The front lid member 612 includes a transmission arrangement portion 613 for arranging the drive transmission device 630, a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670 on the front side of the transmission arrangement portion 613, and a fixing portion 614 for fixing the decorative fixing member 670. A support fastening portion 615 for rotatably supporting the rotating member 620 inside the portion 614 and a guide elongated hole 616 formed as an elongated hole for guiding the other end of the supported member 640 are provided. Prepare.

The elongated guide hole 616 is formed with a unique shape in which straight portions and curved portions are mixed, the details and operation of which will be described later.

Rotating member 620 is provided at one end (lower end) of main body 621 formed in the shape of an elongated plate, and is externally supported by support fastening portion 615 of fixed means 610 . a transmission long hole 623 formed in the intermediate portion of the body portion 621 as a long hole extending in a straight line direction; A circular through-hole 624 drilled as a circular hole in a drilling direction parallel to and a gear tooth portion 625 formed in a gear tooth shape along a part of a circle centered on the circular through-hole 624 Prepare.

A torsion spring SP1 is wound around the tubular portion 622 . The torsion spring SP1 is configured such that one arm contacts the side wall of the main body 621 and the other arm contacts the projecting piece of the front cover member 612. It is configured such that an urging force is generated in the viewing clockwise direction).

In addition, in the axial support of the cylindrical portion 622 , a fastening screw is screwed into a female screw portion formed at the tip portion of the support fastening portion 615 while the support fastening portion 615 is inserted into the cylindrical portion 622 . be. As a result, the rotating member 620 is pivotally supported by the support fastening portion 615 so as not to fall off.

The long transmission hole 623 functions as a guide hole through which the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is inserted, and the circular through hole 624 functions as an insertion hole through which the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is rotatably inserted and fixed. However, the details will be described later.

The drive transmission device 630 includes a drive motor 631 fastened and fixed to the front side of the front cover member 612, a drive gear 632 fixed to a drive shaft protruding rearward through a through hole 613a of the front cover member 612, and A transmission gear 633 pivotally supported by the tubular portion 613b of the front cover member 612 in mesh with the drive gear 632, and a transmission gear cam pivotally supported in the tubular portion 613c of the front lid member 612 in mesh with the transmission gear 633. 634;

In a state in which the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are inserted into the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c, fastening screws are screwed into the female thread portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 613b and 613c. As a result, the transmission gear 633 and the transmission gear cam 634 are pivotally supported by the front lid member 612 so as not to fall off.

The front lid member 612 is formed with an arcuate hole 613d extending along an arc centered on the cylindrical portion 613c. A cylindrical portion 634a protruding in a cylindrical shape is inserted through.

The transmission gear cam 634 is a rotating member having a gear portion that meshes with the transmission gear 633, and includes the above-described cylindrical portion 634a and a plate-like extension extending from an angular position including the cylindrical portion 634a in the outer diameter direction. and a setting portion 634b.

The cylindrical portion 634a is inserted through the arc-shaped hole 613d, and is inserted through the long transmission hole 623 of the rotating member 620 on the front side thereof. Here, the width and length of the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 are designed to be slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 634a. As a result, the sliding resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a slides in the arc-shaped hole 613d and the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced.

The extending portion 634b is configured to be able to enter the detection groove of the photocoupler type detection sensor KS1 fastened and fixed to the front cover member 612 . As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can grasp the attitude of the transmission gear cam 634 by reading the change in the output of the detection sensor KS1.

The supported member 640 includes a long main body portion 641, a cylindrical portion 642 projecting from the back side of the main body portion 641 and having a cylindrical cross section that can be inserted into the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620, and A tubular portion 643 protruding parallel to the tubular portion 642 and an intermediate gear 644 formed so as to engage with the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 while being pivotally supported by the tubular portion 643 . , a bottomed tubular portion 645 formed in a large-diameter tubular shape having a perforated bottom on the back side of the intermediate gear 644, and an end opposite to the end where the bottomed tubular portion 645 is arranged. and an extended support portion 646 extending to the front side at the portion.

With the above-described configuration, as the rotating member 620 rotates and displaces, the gear tooth portion 625 and the intermediate gear 644 can be meshed to generate driving force transmission.

With the cylindrical portions 642 and 643 inserted through the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644, the fastening screws are screwed into the female thread portions formed at the distal end portions of the cylindrical portions 642 and 643. As shown in FIG. As a result, the rotating member 620 and the intermediate gear 644 are axially supported by the body portion 641 of the supported member 640 so as not to fall off.

The bottomed tubular portion 645 has the bottom rear side arranged close to the front side edge of the front lid member 612, and the intermediate gear 644 and the gear teeth 654a of the first ornamental rotating member 650 can mesh with each other on the bottom front side. and an insertion hole 645b formed in a circular shape around the center of the cylindrical shape and through which the cylindrical support portion 651a can be inserted. Details of the shape will be described later.

The extended support portion 646 functions as a support portion for rotatably supporting the second decoration rotating member 660, and details thereof will be described later.

The first decorative rotary member 650 includes a main body member 651 forming a perpendicular rotary shaft, a front rotary member 652 pivotally supported between the main body member 651 and a bottomed cylindrical portion 645, and a front rotary member 652. A decorative substrate 653 fixed to the back side of the decorative portion 652b and having a light emitting means such as an LED disposed on the front side, a rear rotating member 654 that is coaxial with the front rotating member 652 and fastened and fixed to the rear side, A wire receiving member 655 that is fastened and fixed to the main body member 651 from the front side to form a cylindrical space through which wires pass, and a fastening screw that is arranged on the front side of the wire receiving member 655 and inserted through the main body member 651 from the rear side. It has a front decorative portion 656 that is fastened and fixed by being screwed in, and a perpendicular rotation member 657 that is externally fitted and pivotally supported in a cylindrical portion formed by the wire receiving member 655 and the main body member 651 .

The main body member 651 has a cylindrical support portion 651a extending cylindrically on the back side, and the cylindrical support portion 651a has a pair of female screw portions 651b formed at the diametrical positions of the distal end thereof. It has a notch 651c which is cut to reduce the wall on one side of a plane passing through the portion 651b.

The cylindrical support portion 651a is formed with a thickness that allows electrical wiring to be inserted therein, and the notch portion 651c functions as an opening for securing an entrance for the electrical wiring.

The cylindrical support portion 651a includes, from the base end side, the center hole of the front rotating member 652, the center hole of the rear rotating member 654, the insertion hole 645b of the bottomed cylindrical portion 645, the stepped ring-shaped collar C1, and the front lid. The member 612 is inserted through the guide elongated hole 616, and a fastening screw inserted through the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is screwed into the female threaded portion 651b at the tip of the member 612 to be fastened and fixed.

That is, the cylindrical support portion 651a, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, the bottomed tubular portion 645, the collar C1, and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 described above are coaxially supported and guided by the axis O1 extending in the front-rear direction. It is configured to be displaceable along the slot 616 .

An opening C2a is formed in a part of the circumference of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, and the opening C2a is arranged opposite to the notch portion 651c of the main body member 651 in the assembled state to provide a path for electric wiring. to form

A part of this electrical wiring passes through the inside of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 and is guided inside the second ornamental rotating member 660 , and the terminal is connected to the connector arranged on the electrical board 662 . In addition, the other wires are formed in the gap formed between the body member 651 and the wire receiving member 655 (the upper side, that is, the side facing the body member 651 on the opposite side of the semi-cylindrical portion 655a). The terminal is guided to the back of the projecting decorative portion 652 b through the gap) and connected to the connector of the electrical decoration board 653 .

The rear rotating member 654 has gear teeth 654a formed along the circumference of the rear side end, and the gear teeth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are formed so as to mesh with each other. It should be noted that the gear teeth 654a are formed along a portion of the circumference rather than over the entire circumference as a sufficient arrangement for the operation described below.

The front rotating member 652 includes gear teeth 652a formed as bevel gears and a projecting decorative portion 652b projecting radially outward. An electric decoration board 653 is fastened and fixed to the rear side of the decorative projection 652b, and the projection decorative part 652b is illuminated or blinked by light emitted from a light emitting means arranged on the electric decoration board 653. It is possible.

Since the front rotating member 652 is fastened and fixed to the rear rotating member 654, the rear rotating member 654 and the front rotating member 652 rotate integrally.

The axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is rotatably supported by a circular tubular portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portion 651 d of the main body member 651 and the semi-cylindrical portion 655 a of the wiring receiving member 655 , and is the gear of the front side rotating member 652 . It includes gear teeth 657a formed as bevel gears mateable with teeth 652a.

With this configuration, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the front rotating member 652 . That is, the front rotating member 652, the rear rotating member 654, and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 are interlocked, and the details of the operation will be described later. Note that the gear teeth 652a, 657a are formed along a portion of the circumference rather than over the entire circumference as a sufficient arrangement for operations to be described later.

The second decorative rotary member 660 includes a box-shaped member 661 fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotary member 657 , an electric board 662 fixed to the box-shaped member 661 inside the box-shaped member 661 , and the box-shaped member 661 . and the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 and fastened and fixed to the distal end portions of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

In this embodiment, as the box-shaped member 661, which will be described later, rotates, the electrical board 662 is also rotated. Where there is a possibility that the electrical wiring passing between them may be twisted or the arrangement may be disordered, the function of the wiring clamp plate 663 having a through-hole for temporarily fastening the wiring prevents the wiring from being twisted or disorderly. We are trying to avoid being placed in

In this embodiment, since the electrical wiring is fixed to the electrical board 662, twisting of the electrical wiring is unavoidable. On the other hand, the rotational displacement of the second decorative rotating member 660 is not generated by one rotation or more, but is a rotational displacement that is reversed at a rotation angle of 135 degrees. It is possible to avoid a situation where the wiring is twisted.

The second decorative rotating member 660 is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape, and is configured to be rotatable about a rotating shaft (rotating shaft formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a) parallel to the longest side of the rectangular side surface having the longest side. be.

The axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 is supported by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a so as not to fall off, with the wiring retaining plate 663 functioning as a retainer. Since the second decorative rotating member 660 is fastened and fixed to the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657, it is possible to prevent the second decorative rotating member 660 from falling out of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

The electrical board 662 is arranged so that the thickness direction of the board and the thickness direction of the box-shaped member 661 are aligned. On the side surface in the thickness direction of the electrical decoration board 662, the first rendering surface 661a is illuminated by a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side and whose optical axis is directed in the thickness direction, and is arranged on the back side and whose optical axis is directed in the thickness direction. The second rendering surface 661b is illuminated by light emitting means such as LEDs, and the third rendering surface 661c is illuminated by light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the back side (the side that illuminates the second rendering surface 661b) and whose optical axis is directed in the width direction. be

In this way, the light emitting means arranged on the illumination board 662 functions to illuminate each of the rendering surfaces 661a to 661c individually, but the LEDs that illuminate the third rendering surface 661c are located on the back side (the second rendering surface 661b). illuminating side), illuminates the third rendering surface 661c (the surface facing upward) in the state where the second rendering surface 661b is arranged on the front side (the extended state of the first operation unit 600). When the LED is caused to emit light, the second rendering surface 661b can be illuminated with light traveling at an angle from the optical axis of the LED.

That is, unlike the case where the LEDs are arranged behind the electrical decoration board 662, it is possible to prevent the light from being hidden by the electrical decoration board 662, so that the second rendering surface 661b is illuminated by the light that illuminates the third rendering surface 661c. can also illuminate As a result, it is possible to increase the number of types of rendering modes in which the second rendering surface 661b is illuminated, or to improve the brightness of the second rendering surface 661b during the light emitting rendering.

The decoration fixing member 670 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and has decoration characters and figures formed thereon so that the player can visually recognize it. . The arrangement of the decoration fixing member 670 is fixed on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the line of sight of the player with respect to the decoration fixing member 670 is always inclined to the right. That is, by inclining the direction of the light emitted from the illumination board 671 to the left, the light can be emitted to the side where the eyes of the player are likely to be arranged.

The decorative fixing member 670 has a lower edge portion and a right edge portion raised toward the back side, and a front-to-rear gap is formed between the upper edge portion and the left edge portion and the front lid member 612 . This front-rear gap functions as a gap through which the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced.

40 is a front view of the first action unit 600 in the effect standby state, FIG. 41 is a rear view of the first action unit 600 in the effect standby state, and FIG. 42 is a view in the direction of arrow XLII in FIG. 6 is a side view of the first operating unit 600; FIG. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 (see FIG. 38) and fastening screws is omitted.

In the performance standby state, the displacement start direction SD1 of the cylindrical portion 634a of the drive transmission device 630 is configured to be along the longitudinal direction of the transmission long hole 623 (for example, parallel). Thereby, the displacement resistance when the cylindrical portion 634a starts to be displaced while sliding in the transmission elongated hole 623 can be reduced. That is, at the start of displacement, inertia assistance cannot be obtained compared to the middle of displacement, and the driving force required to be generated by the drive motor 631 tends to increase. , it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 at the start of displacement.

In addition, the same thing is configured to hold for the displacement start direction SD2 of the cylindrical portion 634a in the overhanging state (see FIG. 45). That is, in the present embodiment, the displacement direction of the cylindrical portion 634a disposed in the long transmission hole 623 at both end positions of the rotating member 620 (the position in the standby state for the effect, the position in the overhanging state) The displacement of the cylindrical portion 634a (that is, the shape of the transmission gear cam 634) is designed along the longitudinal direction (eg parallel). As a result, it is possible to reduce the load on the drive motor 631 when the rotation member 620 starts to be displaced from both end positions.

As shown in FIG. 41, the gear teeth 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear teeth 654a of the first decoration rotating member 650 mesh with the intermediate gear 644 from both sides. In this embodiment, the radius R1 of the gear tooth portion 625 and the radius R2 of the gear tooth 654a are designed to have the same length. The rotation angle of the side rotation member 654 is the same angle.

Therefore, the rotation angle of the rear rotating member 654 can be changed depending on the design of the rotation angle (angle θ) generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 .

As shown in FIG. 42, the gear teeth 652a of the front rotating member 652 and the gear teeth 657a of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 mesh with each other, and the rotational driving force transmitted to the front rotating member 652 crosses the rotating shaft at right angles. It is transmitted to the second decorative rotary member 660 .

The rotation angle of the second decoration rotary member 660 is the same as the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657 a , and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657 a is proportional to the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652 a of the front side rotation member 652 . That is, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is proportional to the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 (see FIG. 41).

In this embodiment, the rotation angle of the gear teeth 657a and the rotation angle of the gear teeth 652a are the same (the gear ratio is 1), so the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is It is the same as the rotation angle generated between the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 .

Next, the displacement of the first action unit 600 from the effect standby state will be described in chronological order. 43 is a front view of the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state, and FIG. 44 is a rear view of the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state. 45 is a front view of first operation unit 600 in the extended state, and FIG. 46 is a rear view of first operation unit 600 in the extended state. In order to facilitate understanding of the shape, illustration of the base member 611 and fastening screws is omitted.

The rotation angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 19 degrees between the effect waiting state and the intermediate effect state, and the rotating angle of the rotating member 620 is set to 26 degrees between the intermediate effect state and the extended state. is set to

In the intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600, the box-shaped member 661 of the second decoration rotating member 660 is in a posture with the narrow third rendering surface 661c facing the front side. In the extended state of the first action unit 600, the second rendering surface 661b is configured to face the front side (see FIG. 45).

As shown in FIG. 44, the guide long hole 616 has a linear portion 616a formed on a straight line extending vertically from the upper end, and a curved line (substantially arc-shaped) connected to the lower end of the linear portion 616a. and a curvilinear portion 616b formed at the .

In the intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 46, in the extended state of the first motion unit 600, the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b.

Therefore, the displacement of the axis O1 between the waiting state for the effect and the intermediate effect state is a linear displacement along the linear portion 616a, and the displacement of the axis O1 between the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state is the curved portion. It is configured to have a curvilinear displacement along 616b.

The first operation unit 600 is configured to be changeable in state as described above, and the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal end side of the change in state. That is, the rotating member 620 is displaced by receiving the driving force from the drive transmission device 630, and the supported member 640, the first ornamental rotating member 650, and the second ornamental rotating member 660 follow the displacement of the rotating member 620. .

Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, there is a possibility that the sliding displacement of the portion guided by the long guide hole 616 will increase the displacement resistance generated between the long guide hole 616 and the rotary member 620 in this embodiment. This is suppressed by arranging the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616 along the direction of displacement.

For example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the waiting state for rendering (FIG. 41) is a downward tilting displacement, and the guide elongated hole 616 is also formed to extend downward. Further, for example, the displacement of the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 from the overhanging state (see FIG. 46) is a displacement in which it rises obliquely upward to the right. It is

In this way, by aligning the displacement direction of the rotating member 620 with the longitudinal direction of the guide slot 616, the displacement resistance of the portion displaced inside the guide slot 616 (and the axis O1) can be reduced. can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the effect of the shape of the guide slot 616 will be described, including other effects. 47A and 47B are schematic diagrams schematically showing the displacement amount and the displacement angle of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620. FIGS. 6 is a schematic diagram showing the magnitude relationship of the amount of displacement on the driven side of the supported member 640 when the supported member 620 rotates in the tilting direction at a constant angular velocity; FIG. As for the positive and negative values, positive indicates downward displacement and negative indicates upward displacement. In FIG. 48(b), the numerical values in FIG. 48(a) are illustrated as a bar graph.

In FIG. 47 , the arrangement of the supporting positions of the supported member 640 accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is illustrated at intervals of 10 degrees as the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 . Rotating member 620 in the extended state is shown in solid lines.

47, the angle θ is illustrated as an angle between a line segment connecting the axis O1 and the center of the circular through hole 624 and a line segment connecting the center of the circular through hole 624 and the center of the cylindrical portion 622. there is

The guide long hole 616 functions as a long hole that guides the end of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is arranged. Displacement in the guide elongated hole 616 is displacement caused by displacement of the tubular portion 642 of the supported member 640 connected to the circular through hole 624 of the rotating member 620 as the rotating member 620 rotates. Hereinafter, the cylindrical portion 642 of the supported member 640 is also referred to as the driving side of the supported member 640, and the end portion of the supported member 640 on which the axis O1 is disposed is also referred to as the driven side of the supported member 640.

An overview of the operation centering on the rotating member 620 will be described. The vertical displacement of the supported member 640 supported by the rotating member 620 is due to the vertical displacement of the tip of the rotating member 620 (the driving side of the supported member 640) due to the rotation of the rotating member 620, and the posture displacement of the supported member 640. It is generated as a result of adding up the accompanying vertical displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 .

In the performance standby state, in addition to the fact that the supported member 640 is in the vertical posture, the velocity component of the displacement of the rotating member 620 is larger in the horizontal direction than in the vertical direction (the rotation arm is positioned at 45 degrees to the left and right from the vertical). range). In other words, there are two conditions for the displacement in the vertical direction to be small.

Both of these are reversed in the overhanging state, and the conditions for increasing the displacement in the vertical direction are duplicated. Therefore, the speed is low at the start of the downward displacement and is likely to be high at the end of the downward displacement.

Next, the details of the operation centered on the rotating member 620 will be described. Displacement (tilting displacement) of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the overhanging state will be described. When the rotating member 620 is tilted and displaced, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced mainly by its own weight.

Therefore, if the guide long hole 616 is formed in the vertical direction, the driven side of the supported member 640 may drop violently. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is preferable to stop the first action unit 600 in an intermediate effect state (position in the middle of tilting displacement, see FIG. 44).

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the shape of the guide long hole 616, a mode is adopted in which a curved portion 616b is combined with a linear portion 616a below. As a result, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced by its own weight in the linear portion 616a and enters the curved portion 616b, the displacement resistance applied to the driven side of the supported member 640 can be increased. As a result, it is possible to easily prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from vigorously falling beyond the arrangement in the intermediate effect state.

Displacement of the driven member 640 in the linear portion 616a will be described. When the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces the linear portion 616a, the driving side of the supported member 640 straddles the extension line of the linear portion 616a. That is, in the standby state for the effect, the driving side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the right side of the linear portion 616a (see FIG. 41), and in the intermediate effect state, the driving side of the supported member 640 is positioned on the left side of the linear portion 616a. placed (see FIG. 44). Therefore, the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically reciprocatingly displaced while the rotating member 620 is tilted without changing direction.

As a result, the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the vertical direction can be kept small compared to the magnitude of the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, so that the driven side of the supported member 640 is a linear portion. 616a, the supported member 640 can be seen by the player in a displaced manner as if it is rotationally displaced about the driven side of the supported member 640. FIG.

According to this displacement mode, it is possible to generate sliding displacement in the left-right direction by utilizing the run-up due to the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 about the driven side. The load required for the displacement can be kept low compared to the case of sliding displacement in the left-right direction. Therefore, the load required to start the operation of the supported member 640 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

On the other hand, while the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is kept small, the displacement of the driven portion of the supported member 640 is sufficiently ensured according to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 . The rotation direction of the driven side of the supported member 640 with respect to the driving portion is maintained in the counterclockwise direction in rear view (the direction is not switched). As a result, as described above, the orientation change direction of the supported member 640 and the rotation direction of the second decorative rotary member 660 are maintained without being switched (inverted).

As a result, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 are reciprocating (returning). The displacement mode can be a vigorous displacement mode.

Further, even in a situation in which the displacement of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 due to the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 is sufficiently ensured, the displacement direction of the main moving portion of the supported member 640 has a large horizontal component. Moreover, since the displacement is in the direction (downward) along the direction of gravity, the load required to start the displacement of the rotating member 620 can be reduced, and the degree of performance required of the drive motor 631 can be reduced. can do. Thereby, cost reduction of the drive motor 631 can be achieved.

The action produced by the curved portion 616b will be described. A state in which the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b is defined as an intermediate rendering state of the first motion unit 600. FIG. As described above, the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state is 19 degrees. Therefore, the state where the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the curved portion 616b roughly corresponds to the angular width range of 20 degrees to 45 degrees in FIG.

First, as a premise, there is no necessity to employ a curved portion for the guide slot 616 . In other words, regardless of whether or not a bent portion is employed to increase the displacement resistance in the intermediate effect state as described above, the long guide hole 616 may be composed only of linear portions.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the use of the curved portion 616b prevents the speed of the driven member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the displacement. This will be explained below.

Whether guided by the linear portion 616a or guided by the curved portion 616b, when the driving side of the supported member 640 connected to the rotating member 620 is displaced downward, the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward. Downward displacement is the same.

The difference is that when guided by the curved portion 616b, in the upper half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 displaces in the opposite direction (rightward) to the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640. ), and in the lower half of the curved portion 616b, the driven side of the supported member 640 is aligned with the displacement direction (leftward) of the driven side of the supported member 640 ( A curved portion 616b is formed so as to be displaced and guided in the leftward direction.

As a result, even before the amount of downward displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 becomes large (inclination start side), the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 is swung left and right. A large displacement speed on the driven side of 640 can be ensured.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the displacement speed of the driven member 640 from becoming excessive at the end of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620 . That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is vertically displaced along an arbitrary path from a specific initial position to the end position, if the time required for the displacement is the same, the results of integrating the vertical velocities are the same. If the displacement is slow at the start of displacement, the displacement speed increases in the final stage.

When the driven side of the supported member 640 is arranged on the imaginary axis OE1 guided on a straight line extending in the vertical direction shown for comparison in FIG. and becomes maximum at the end of displacement (lower end of displacement) of the supported member 640 . In other words, compared to the vertical displacement amount UX1 of the axis line O1 guided by the guide elongated hole 616 while the rotating member 620 rotates 10 degrees and reaches the displacement lower end, the vertical displacement amount of the imaginary axis line OE1 during the same period. The quantity UE1 becomes large.

Therefore, in the displacement state of the imaginary axis OE1, the driven side of the supported member 640 may bounce back. adversely affect performance.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by adopting the curved portion 616b in the guide slot 616, the range in which the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 increases is shifted to the displacement start side of the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620. Also, the displacement speed on the driven side of the supported member 640 is made uniform.

Uniformity in this case means not only that the velocity is brought to the same level over the entire range of displacement, but also means that the magnitude of the velocity is suppressed. In particular, in this embodiment, in the tilting displacement of the rotating member 620, the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side gradually increases on the entry start side into the curved portion 616b, and the supported member 640 enters the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b. It is configured such that the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side gradually decreases after the start.

That is, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is guided by the curved portion 616b, the displacement of the supported member 640 becomes monotonous by providing a speed difference in the displacement speed of the driven side of the supported member 640. can be avoided.

Furthermore, by reducing the speed required for the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end side portion of the curved portion 616b, that is, the amount of displacement required per unit time, the rotating member 620 is moved upward (raised up). Since the amount of displacement for lifting the driven side of the supported member 640 per unit time can be reduced at the start of driving in the case of operation), the load on the drive motor 631 can be reduced.

Next, referring to FIG. 49, the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 accompanying the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing changes in the angle θ [degrees] as the rotating member 620 rotates.

The angle θ can be regarded as the relative rotation angle between the rotating member 620 and the supported member 640 about the circular through hole 624 and is directly linked to the rotation of the second decoration rotating member 660 . That is, the magnitude of the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is defined according to the magnitude of the angle θ.

In this embodiment, the rotation transmission ratio between the gear tooth portion 625 of the rotating member 620 and the gear tooth 654a (see FIG. 39) of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the gear of the gear tooth 652a and the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 38) are both set to 1. Therefore, since the angle θ and the rotation angle of the rotation member 657 perpendicular to the axis are the same, the change in the angle θ can be grasped as the change in the attitude of the second decoration rotation member 660 .

The change in angle θ is 45 degrees from the waiting state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 41) to the intermediate effect state of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 44). 90 degrees from the state to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 (see FIG. 46).

In the effect standby state, the second decorative rotating member 660 is in a posture in which the first effect surface 661a is tilted leftward by 45 degrees (the third effect surface 661c is tilted rightward by 45 degrees). Accordingly, every time the state is switched from the intermediate effect state to the extended state, the second decorative rotating member 660 rotates 45 degrees so that the third effect surface 661c faces the front side (see FIG. 43) and then the second effect surface 661c. The effect surface 661b faces the front side (see FIG. 45).

The setting of the angle θ is achieved by designing the elongated guide hole 616 for defining the attitude of the supported member 640 . That is, in this embodiment, the guide slot 616 is designed so as to satisfy both the arrangement of the second decoration rotating member 660 and the attitude of the second decoration rotating member 660 according to the angle θ.

As a result, even if only the sensor for detecting the arrangement of the rotating member 620 is provided as the detection sensor KS1 as in the present embodiment, the output of the detection sensor KS1 is used as the basis of the output of the second decorative rotating member 660. The placement and attitude can be determined by the audio ramp controller 113 (see FIG. 4).

That is, if the extended portion 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, it can be determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the effect standby state (see FIG. 41), and the drive motor 631 is started from that state. , the rotation angle of the rotating member 620 and the arrangement and posture of the second decorative rotating member 660 can be determined.

Here, the amount of change in angle θ is not proportional to the amount of rotation angle of rotating member 620 . Therefore, when judging the arrangement and orientation of the second decorative rotating member 660 from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631, it is not necessary to calculate the numerical values from the rotation angle of the drive motor 631 by proportional calculation. Further, as a result, even when rotating the rotating member 620 at a constant speed, it is possible to avoid the rotation speed of the second decoration rotating member 660 from becoming constant. This will be explained below.

A change in the angle θ is substantially the same as a change in the amount of change in the displacement speed of the driven member 640 on the driven side. That is, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the extended state is generally greater than the angle change from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state (approximately 13 degrees while the rotating member 620 rotates 5 degrees). large (approximately 20 degrees during 5 degree rotation of the rotating member 620 while the driven side of the supported member 640 is disposed in the upper half of the curved portion 616b).

On the other hand, the angle change from the intermediate effect state to the extended state gradually decreases from the position where the driven side of the supported member 640 enters the lower half of the curved portion 616b, and finally changes from the effect waiting state to the intermediate effect state. below the level of angular change to state (down to about 7 degrees).

In this way, the numerical value of the angle θ with respect to the rotation per unit angle of the rotating member 620 is configured to change, so that the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660 also changes. can be configured to That is, in a range where the numerical value of the angle θ is small, the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660 tends to be small, and the posture can be easily maintained. The rotation angle of the member 660 is likely to increase, and a state in which the surfaces facing the player (performance surfaces 661a to 661c) can be easily changed quickly can be achieved.

With the above-described configuration, the displacement motion of the second ornamental rotating member 660 can be adjusted. In the displacing operation of the second ornamental rotating member 660, as described above, the arrangement and posture are changed due to the displacement of the supported member 640, and the center of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a and rotational displacement about the rotation axis are performed simultaneously.

The rotational angle (angular velocity) of the rotational displacement around the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a is determined by the following: It becomes conspicuously large at the timing of entering.

That is, in the tilting displacement, the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 is suppressed until the intermediate effect state is reached, and the supported member 640 moves up and down (bounces back) somewhat from the position of the driven side of the supported member 640 in the intermediate effect state. However, it is possible to maintain the state in which the second decorative rotary member 660 directs the third rendering surface 661c to the front side (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced downward from the intermediate effect state, the rotation speed of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases when the rotating member 620 rotates at a constant speed, and the attitude change in the rotating direction increases. conspicuously visible. That is, it is possible for the player to visually recognize that the second decorative rotating member 660 is instantaneously rotationally displaced.

In the present embodiment, the second rendering surface 661b of the second ornamental rotating member 660 faces the front side at the end of rotation (lower end of displacement) of the rotating member 620, and is placed close to the ornamental fixing member 670. In order to be visually recognized integrally (see FIG. 28), it is desirable to be able to prevent the driven side of the supported member 640 from rebounding upward from the state where the rotating member 620 is arranged at the lower end of displacement.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the curved portion 616bb of the guide slot 616 is configured as described above to equalize the displacement speed of the supported member 640 on the driven side. It is possible to prevent the supported member 640 from becoming excessively displaced on the driven side in the state of being arranged at the lower end of displacement, and prevent the supported member 640 from springing back.

In addition to the fact that the displacement speed is made uniform in this way, the arrangement of the center portions of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotary member 660 at the end of the downward displacement of the rotary member 620 (for example, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 643). is closest to the support fastening portion 615 as the rotation shaft of the rotating member 620 . As a result, it is possible to prevent the rotating tip of the rotating member 620 from swaying due to the weight of the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 that are supported on the rotating tip side of the rotating member 620 . Rotational displacement can be stabilized.

In addition, the lower half of the curved portion 616b bounces back around the circular through-hole 624 of the rotating member 620 on the driven side of the supported member 640 at the lower end of the displacement of the rotating member 620 (towards the upper left). is configured to preferably impede displacement of the That is, the lower half portion of the curved portion 616b is slanted in the upper left direction, and the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640 in this direction can be suppressed. Rebounding of member 640 can be prevented.

In other words, in this embodiment, the displacement direction when the driven side of the supported member 640 is displaced following the displacement of the driven side of the supported member 640, and the case where the driven side of the supported member 640 stops at the end of displacement. is different from the displacement direction of the driven member 640 in .

In the former case, if there is no guide, it is assumed that the supported member 640 is displaced downward to the left along the direction of displacement of the driven member 640 (rotating direction of the rotating member 620). By being guided by 616, it is slightly swung in the horizontal direction along the guide slot 616 and displaced downward.

On the other hand, the latter is a circular trajectory centered on the driving side of the supported member 640 , so the displacement direction is not along the long guide hole 616 but along the width direction of the long guide hole 616 . As a result, displacement of the supported member 640 on the driven side can be suppressed, and rebounding of the supported member 640 can be prevented.

A feature of the displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction will be described. When the state of the first motion unit 600 changes from the extended state to the presentation standby state, the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction.

The load (that is, the driving force generated by the drive motor 631 ) required to raise and displace the rotating member 620 mainly consists of the rotating member 620 , the supported member 640 , and the first decoration provided on the supported member 640 . It is used for upwardly displacing the rotary member 650 and the second decorative rotary member 660 and for rotating the second decorative rotary member 660 .

In other words, the smaller the rotation angle of the second decoration rotating member 660, the less the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

Here, as shown in FIG. 49, in this embodiment, at the time when the rotating member 620 starts rotating from the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the rotation angle is proportional to the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660. It is designed so that the value of the angle .theta. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the load required when the rotating member 620 is raised and displaced.

At the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction, the rotation axis of the second ornamental rotating member 660 centered on the extended support portion 646 of the supported member 640 is aligned with the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 ( It is arranged in a posture facing up and down).

Therefore, when the rotational displacement of the second ornamental rotating member 660 is stopped at the end of the upward displacement of the rotating member 620, the load applied to the rotating member 620 as the inertia force in the rotational direction of the second ornamental rotating member 660 is The moving member 620 can be twisted about its longitudinal axis, and the rotating member 620 can withstand a slight elastic displacement locally by distributing the load in the longitudinal direction.

Therefore, compared to the case where the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620 in a front view, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the rotating member 620 is broken. . In addition, excessive elastic displacement of the rotating member 620 is suppressed by abutment with the front lid member 612, and a load that cannot be received by the rotating member 620 is endured by elastic deformation of the front lid member 612. Therefore, damage to the rotating member 620 can be prevented.

Displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b will be described. The projecting decorative portion 652b is a member that rotates around the axis O1, and the rotational angle thereof corresponds to the angle θ described above. Therefore, even when the change in the layout of the driven side of the supported member 640 is small, such as when the performance standby state changes to the overhanging state, the overhanging decorative portion 652b rotates as long as the angle θ changes. .

The change in angle θ from the presentation standby state to the projecting state is about 135 degrees, and the projecting decorative portion 652b is rotated by about 45 degrees. Here, if the protruding decorative portion 652b rotates counterclockwise by 45 degrees from the effect standby state, it seems to collide with the other operation units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) in the assembled state (see FIG. 28). In the present embodiment, since the supported member 640 itself, which serves as a reference for the rotation of the overhanging decorative portion 652b, rotates clockwise, the other operating units 800 (left and right fixed decorative members) can rotate. Collisions can be avoided.

In other words, since the decorative projecting portion 652b is configured to be displaceable with respect to the supported member 640, the space required for displacing the decorative projecting portion 652b can be reduced.

For example, when the projecting decorative portion 652b is a portion that is fixedly arranged with respect to the supported member 640 in the projecting state of the first operation unit 600, the arrangement of the supported member 640 changes from the projecting state to the rendering standby state. , the projecting decorative portion 652b projects to the upper left side of the supported member 640, collides with another operation unit 800, or partially hides the projecting display on the front side of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. There is a possibility that it will have an adverse effect on the performance.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, the driven side of the supported member 640 is used as a reference, and the protruding decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in the direction opposite to the rotational direction of the driven side of the supported member 640. When 640 protrudes toward the third pattern display device 81 side, it protrudes interlockingly, and when the supported member 640 is displaced from the third pattern display device 81 to the retracted side, it interlocks and retreats. Therefore, the projecting decorative portion 652 b in the retracted state can be arranged on the side away from the third pattern display device 81 .

The rotation angle of the overhang decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 in the player's line of sight can be obtained from the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the posture of the supported member 640. FIG. That is, the difference between the change width of the angle θ of about 135 degrees and the posture change angle of the supported member 640 of about 90 degrees is 45 degrees.

Here, in this embodiment, the difference between the change in the angle θ and the change in the attitude of the supported member 640 is the same regardless of the arrangement of the rotating member 620 . That is, as shown in FIG. 47, when the angle .theta. The difference between the change and the change is calculated as ((a1+b1)-(a2+b2))-(b1-b2)=(a1-a2), which is equal to the rotation angle of the rotation member 620. FIG.

Therefore, since the rotation angle of the decorative projecting portion 652b with respect to the attitude of the supported member 640 is equal to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, when the rotating member 620 is rotated at a constant angular velocity, Although the displacement speed of the supporting member 640 is not constant, the angular speed of rotation of the overhang decorative portion 652b with respect to the attitude of the supported member 640 is constant.

Therefore, the player will feel as if the projecting decorative portion 652b arranged on the supported member 640 is driven at a constant angular velocity by a driving means different from the driving motor 631 for driving the rotating member 620. can be visually recognized.

By configuring in this way, the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b with respect to the supported member 640 is such that there are sections where there is sliding movement and there are sections where there is rotational movement from the player's eye level. The displacement mode of the projecting decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized as a soft displacement mode as if it were not a machine.

This effect is achieved by designing the displacement of the supported member 640 by dividing it into a section in which the change in posture is large relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction and a section in which the change in posture is small relative to the amount of displacement in the sliding direction. be able to. That is, the decorative projecting portion 652b rotates with respect to the supported member 640 according to the rotation angle of the rotating member 620, and the displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b corresponds to the displacement of the supported member 640 from the player's point of view. It is influenced by the side that becomes dominant as

Therefore, it is possible to visually recognize that the overhang decorative portion 652b is rotationally displaced in a section in which the posture change is large with respect to the displacement amount in the sliding direction, and is stretched in a section in which the posture change is small relative to the displacement amount in the sliding direction. It can be visually recognized as if the outward decoration portion 652b is slid.

As described above, the rotating member 620 can be rotated and displaced so as to constitute the effect waiting state, the intermediate effect state and the overhanging state, and the case of being displaced from one end of displacement to the other end of displacement has been described. However, the driving direction may be switched so as to displace in the opposite direction at an intermediate position in the displacement range.

For example, after rotating and displacing the rotating member 620 from the effect standby state to the intermediate effect state, the drive direction of the drive motor 631 may be reversed so as to return to the effect standby state. In this case, since it is necessary to stop the rotating member 620 in the middle of its descent, it may be necessary to set the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 to be low in order to set the stop position accurately.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the numerical value of the angle θ (see FIG. 49) tends to increase in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state compared to the effect standby state. The magnitude of the angle θ corresponds to the magnitude of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660, as described above.

Therefore, in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state in which the amount of rotation of the second decoration rotating member 660 increases, the portion of the driving force allocated to the second decoration rotating member 660 increases. The amount allocated to the rotational displacement can be reduced, and the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 can be automatically suppressed.

In other words, the rotational speed of the rotating member 620 can be reduced as the amount of rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 increases, so the rotating speed of the rotating member 620 is set to be low in advance. Even if it is not set, the rotation member 620 can be easily stopped in the vicinity of the intermediate effect state.

Next, the second operating unit 700 will be described. The second motion unit 700 is a motion unit that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 below the opening 511a of the rear case 510, and is the field of view of the player viewing the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 28). In order to secure the production waiting state (see FIG. 28) to retreat below the opening 511a, and the overhanging state (see FIG. 30) that is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and attracts attention, and in between The state is mainly switched between an intermediate effect state (see FIG. 35) as the state of .

50 is an exploded front perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700, and FIG. 51 is an exploded rear perspective view of the rear case 510 and the second operation unit 700. FIG. In FIGS. 50 and 51, mainly the members around the up/down reversal effect device 770 are illustrated in a disassembled state, and the up/down reversal effect device 770 is illustrated in a non-disassembled state.

As shown in FIGS. 50 and 51 , the second operation unit 700 includes a right front plate member 710 fastened to the lower right corner of the rear case 510 and a front plate member 710 between the right front plate member 710 and the rear case 510 . a rotating arm member 720 arranged to be rotatable about the cylindrical projecting portion 511b of the rear case 510; An elevating plate member 740 configured to be vertically displaceable by connecting the tip of the rotating arm member 720 so as to be guided, and a left rear side which is fastened and fixed to the lower left corner of the rear case 510 on the back side of the elevating plate member 740. A plate member 750 , a pair of front side support members 760 configured as a left and right pair and fastened and fixed to the front sides of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 , and the front side of the metal rod 702 fastened and fixed to the rear case 510 . and an up-and-down reversal effect device 770 configured to be capable of displacing the up-and-down plate member 740 and the front side support member 760 in a combination of up-and-down displacement and front-back direction displacement.

The right front plate member 710 includes a transmission support portion 711 that supports each component of the drive transmission device 730, a gap forming portion 712 that is recessed from the rear side at the left edge portion and forms a gap with the rear case 510, A plurality of (three in this embodiment) detection sensors 713 arranged to detect the arrangement of the detected portion 735 of the drive transmission device 730, and a sensor 713 that faces the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the left side. A front upper inclined portion 714 is formed so as to be inclined and formed so as to be able to guide the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770, and a female screw portion into which a fastening screw inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 is screwed is formed. and a plurality of fastened portions 718 .

The detection sensors 713 are arranged at intervals such that a plurality of photocoupler type sensors are arranged with detection grooves at positions where the detected portion 735 can enter. Each detection sensor 713 detects the position of the detected portion 735 in the production standby state of the second operation unit 700, the position of the detected portion 735 in the intermediate production state of the second operation unit 700, and the extension of the second operation unit 700. , the position of the detected portion 735 in the state.

That is, the detection sensor 713 is configured to be able to switch the output depending on whether the second operation unit 700 is in an effect standby state, an intermediate effect state, or an extended state, and the output result is used by the sound lamp control device 113 (FIG. 4) is configured to be able to grasp the state of the second operation unit 700 .

The rotating arm member 720 is pivotally supported by a cylindrical projecting portion 511b projecting from the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 toward the front side, and is formed in a long plate shape with a V shape when viewed from the front. and a support cylinder portion 722 that protrudes rearward in a cylindrical shape from a bent portion of the main body portion 721 and has an inner peripheral side shape formed in a size that allows the cylindrical projecting portion 511b to be inserted. , a long hole portion 723 drilled along the longitudinal direction at the right end portion of the main body portion 721, and a front (projecting direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a) at the left end portion of the main body portion 721. (direction parallel to ), and a cylindrical fastened portion 724 having a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and a rearward at an intermediate position between the cylindrical fastened portion 724 and the support cylinder portion 722. Between the cylindrical fastened portion 725 which protrudes in a cylindrical shape and has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side and the rear case 510 which is wound around the supporting cylindrical portion 722, the body portion 721 is moved upward (left side). and a torsion spring SP2 that applies an urging force in the direction of lifting the

The left side of the main body portion 721 is stepped so as to be displaced toward the front side compared to the base end side portion of the support cylinder portion 722 . 701 is provided.

The support plate 701 is a plate-like portion that is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and has an arc-shaped long hole portion 701a that is bored so that the cylindrical fastened portion 725 can be guided. A fastening screw inserted through the long hole portion 701a with a ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical portion to be fastened 725, so that the rotating arm member 720 is moved to the support plate through the cylindrical portion to be fastened 725. It is supported by 701 so that it cannot fall off.

Since the support plate 701 is fastened and fixed to the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510 , the left portion of the rotating arm member 720 is restricted from moving away from the rear case 510 toward the front side. As a result, it is possible to prevent the load applied to the left side of the rotating arm member 720 from tilting the rotating arm member 720 toward the front side, thereby stably supporting the displacement of the rotating arm member 720. be able to.

The right side portion of the body portion 721 is arranged in the gap between the rear case 510 and the gap forming portion 712 . That is, the displacement of the right side portion of the main body portion 721 in the front-rear direction is restricted by the back case 510 and the gap forming portion 712 .

The elongated hole portion 723 is formed in such a shape that a straight line extending in the longitudinal direction passes through the center of the support cylinder portion 722 . Therefore, when the load applied to the long hole portion 723 is directed in the longitudinal direction of the long hole portion 723, the component of the load in the rotational direction of the rotary arm member 720 is zero.

The drive transmission device 730 is a device for transmitting a driving force through an elongated hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720. The drive motor 731 is fastened and fixed to the right front plate member 710 from the front side. , a transmission gear 733 meshing with the driving gear 732, and a gear cam member 734 meshing with the transmission gear 733.

The transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are pivotally supported by a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 711a projecting cylindrically from the back side of the right front plate member 710 at corresponding positions. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 711a, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the shaft holes of the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 can be screwed therein. By screwing and fixing these fastening screws, the transmission gear 733 and the gear cam member 734 are rotatably supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 711a.

The transmission support portion 711 includes the above-described cylindrical projecting portion 711a and an arc-shaped hole 711b formed in an arc around the cylindrical projecting portion 711a that pivotally supports the gear cam member 734 .

The gear cam member 734 has a detected portion 735 projecting toward the front side in an arc shape centering on the rotating shaft portion and is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the arc-shaped hole 711b, and the gear cam member 734 is extended so as to have a longer diameter than the gear portion. and a cylindrical protruding portion 736a protruding cylindrically from the tip of the extending portion 736 to the rear side.

The detected portion 735 is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 of the right front plate member 710, and the output from the detection sensor 713 determines the attitude of the gear cam member 734 to the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4). is configured as a part to make it detectable.

The cylindrical projecting portion 736a is formed so as to be able to be inserted into the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720, and the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a is transmitted to the rotating arm member 720 via the long hole portion 723. be done.

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the center hole of the ring-shaped collar C3 can be screwed therein. By screwing and fixing the fastening screw, the rotating arm member 720 is connected to the cylindrical projecting portion 736a so as not to fall off.

The elevating plate member 740 is a member that moves up and down as the rotating arm member 720 rotates. It has long horizontal members 742 that are fastened and fixed on the left and right sides.

The guided member 741 is formed so that the metal rod 702 fixed to the rear case 510 in a vertical direction can be inserted through the guided member 741 , and the guided member 741 can be vertically displaced along the metal rod 702 . The tips of the protrusions protruding from the left and right sides of the guided member 741 to the rear side come into contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, thereby restricting the axial rotation of the guided member 741. The posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized.

As the posture of the guided member 741 is stabilized, the posture of the horizontal member 742 fastened and fixed to the guided member 741 is also stabilized.

The horizontally elongated member 742 has a long hole portion 743 formed in an oval shape that is long in the left and right direction with a vertical width that allows the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 to pass through, and an upper side of the long hole portion 743 . A cylindrical portion 744 protruding cylindrically on the front side, and a pair of guide portions 745 disposed below the bottom portion at positions equidistant from the cylindrical portion 744 to the left and right. Prepare.

A fastening screw inserted through the elongated hole portion 743 with the ring-shaped collar C3 interposed therebetween is screwed into the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 , whereby the elevating plate member 740 is turned into a rotating arm via the cylindrical portion to be fastened 724 . It is supported by the member 720 so as not to fall off.

The cylindrical portion 744 is a portion through which the insertion cylindrical portion 773 of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is inserted, and supports the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 so as to be displaceable back and forth. That is, the elevation reversal effect device 770 is not fixed to the elevation plate member 740, but is arranged on the front side of the elevation plate member 740 so as to be displaceable back and forth with the elevation plate member 740 as a reference.

A coil spring CS2 is arranged so as to wind around the cylindrical portion 744 and the insertion cylindrical portion 773 . The biasing force of the coil spring CS2 acts in the direction of separating the lifting plate member 740 and the lifting/lowering reversal effect device 770 from each other.

The guide portion 745 is composed of a pair of left and right guide portions, and includes a longitudinally elongated plate portion 745a and a rotating cylinder rotatably supported by a pair of front and rear shaft portions projecting outward from the plate portion 745a to the left and right. and a portion 745b.

The rotary tube portion 745b rotates when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 described above is displaced back and forth, and functions as a portion that guides the front and back displacement, the details of which will be described later.

The left rear plate member 750, like the front upper inclined portion 714 of the right front plate member 710, is inclined toward the front side as it goes upward on the front side of the right side, and is formed with a rotary cylinder portion 774e of the elevation reversal effect device 770. and a plurality of fastened portions 752 formed with female screw portions into which fastening screws inserted from the rear side of the rear case 510 are screwed.

The blindfold decorative member 768 has a three-dimensional decoration portion 768a formed in a three-dimensional shape from a light-transmitting resin material. , the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a is configured to be illuminated by the light emitted from the LED.

The front side support member 760 includes a fixing plate portion 761 having an insertion hole through which a fastening screw is inserted, and a fixing plate portion 761 which is arranged adjacent to the left and right inner sides of the fixing plate portion 761 and whose back surface faces upward. and a receiving inclined portion 762 which is inclined in a manner facing the front side as much as possible.

The fixing plate portion 761 is fastened and fixed to the front side of the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole from the front side into the corresponding female screw portion. It is a plate part that

In this fixed position, the receiving slope portion 762 is arranged in front of the front upper slope portions 714 and 751 . That is, a guide path is formed by the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751, and the rotating cylinder portion 774e of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is guided along this guide path, so that the up/down reversal effect device 770 moves forward and backward. It is configured to be vertically displaced while being displaced to . The vertical displacement will be described below.

52(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 along line LIIa-LIIa in FIG. 28, and FIG. 52(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 along line LIIb-LIIb in FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 52(a) and 52(b) show the effect waiting state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

53(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 along line LIIIa-LIIIa in FIG. 33, and FIG. 53(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 along line LIIIb-LIIIb in FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. In FIGS. 53(a) and 53(b), the intermediate rendering state of the second action unit 700 is illustrated.

54(a) is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 and the center frame 86 taken along line LIVa-LIVa of FIG. 30, and FIG. 54(b) is a cross-sectional view of second motion unit 700 taken along line LIVb-LIVb of FIG. and a cross-sectional view of the center frame 86. FIG. 54(a) and 54(b) illustrate the extended state of the second operation unit 700. FIG.

The up-and-down displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 of the second motion unit 700 shown in FIGS. Driving force transmission when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced up and down will be described. In this description, FIGS. 28, 30 and 33 will be referred to as needed.

At the start of driving force transmission from the performance standby state (see FIG. 28), the displacement direction of the cylindrical projecting portion 736a (see FIG. Since it is designed to be parallel to the direction, the displacement resistance generated when the gear cam member 734 starts rotating can be suppressed. Moreover, the same thing holds true in the overhanging state as well.

On the other hand, in the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 30), the displacement direction of the cylindrical protruding portion 736a is perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the elongated hole portion 723, so that the gear cam member 734 receives from the rotating arm member 720 in the rotating direction. By maximizing the displacement resistance, the rotational displacement of the gear cam member 734 can be easily stopped.

As shown in FIGS. 52 to 54, the up/down reversal effect device 770 of the second motion unit 700 is arranged on the back side under the center frame 86, and is displaced upward toward the inside of the center frame 86. Along with this, it is configured to be displaced to the front side in the front-rear direction.

The displacement resistance of this displacement is determined by the configuration in which the rotary cylinder portion 774e of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is guided by the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714 and 751, the first horizontal plate 774b of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770, and the 2, the lateral plate 774c is guided by the rotating cylinder portion 745b of the lifting plate member 740, and the amount of the load is reduced.

That is, the pair of rotating cylindrical portions 774e includes the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 which are arranged at symmetrical positions (the front upper inclined portion 751 is arranged on the left side not shown in FIG. 52 and shown in FIG. 56). ), and by rolling the rotary tube portion 774e around the cylindrical portion 774d, it is displaced along the receiving slope portion 762 and the front upper slope portions 714 and 751. The displacement resistance of the body member 771 can be reduced.

Furthermore, by designing the arrangement of the rotating cylinder portions 745b aligned in the front-to-rear direction, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b is arranged slightly upward. This prevents the cylindrical portion 774e from applying an excessive load to the receiving inclined portion 762 and the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751. As shown in FIG.

That is, in this embodiment, the center of gravity position (rotational axis position) of the effect device 780 is designed to be positioned slightly forward of the front-rear center of the main body member 771, and the main body member 771 is always tilted forward due to gravity. direction is biased. Due to the influence of this biasing force, the first horizontal plate 774b and the second horizontal plate 774c are likely to be displaced such that the front side is lowered and the rear side is raised.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front rotating cylinder portion 745b, which is closely arranged when the front side of the first horizontal plate 774b is lowered, is arranged slightly upward, and is closely arranged when the rear side of the second horizontal plate 774c is raised. The rear rotating cylinder portion 745b is arranged slightly downward. Therefore, forward tilting displacement of the main body member 771 can be effectively suppressed.

Furthermore, according to this configuration, since the front rotary cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the second horizontal plate 774c, it can stably roll with the first horizontal plate 774b. , the rear rotary cylinder portion 745b has a gap with the first horizontal plate 774b, so that it can stably roll with the second horizontal plate 774c. As a result, the rotating cylinder portion 745b can be caused to roll normally, and the displacement resistance when the main body member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction can be reduced.

The displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 to the front side is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 in addition to the above-described shape guidance. Therefore, when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced to the front side, it is possible to reduce the displacement resistance in the front-rear direction displacement as compared to when it is lowered.

The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is vertically displaced by the driving force of the driving motor 731, and the driving force is divided into vertical displacement and longitudinal displacement. In the vertical displacement, the burden of the upward displacement is relatively large due to the need to resist gravity, but the longitudinal displacement in this case can be assisted by the urging force of the coil spring CS2. Therefore, it is possible to avoid an excessive driving force required when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced upward.

The length of the coil spring CS2 is set so as to have a natural length in the intermediate effect state of the second action unit 700 (see FIG. 53). That is, when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is arranged below the arrangement of the intermediate effect state, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 displaces the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the front-rear direction by the driving force of the drive motor 731. While acting in the assisting direction, the urging force of the coil spring CS2 does not act on the longitudinal displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 when the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is arranged above the arrangement of the intermediate effect state.

As a result, the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 can be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state. For example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the standby state of the second motion unit 700 and is controlled to stop the second motion unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the stop timing is slightly different from the ideal. Even if it becomes faster, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 can displace the second motion unit 700 toward the intermediate effect state side.

Also, for example, when the same stop control is performed, even if the stop timing is slightly later than the ideal, the second motion unit 700 descends by its own weight, and the descent due to its own weight is caused by the biasing force of the coil spring CS2. By being suppressed, the second action unit 700 can be brought closer to the intermediate effect state side and the arrangement can be maintained.

Further, for example, when the drive motor 731 is controlled to be driven from the extended state of the second motion unit 700, and the stop control of the drive motor 731 is performed so as to stop the second motion unit 700 in the intermediate effect state, the vertical reversal effect device 770 Since the urging force of the coil spring CS2 acts as a displacement resistance when passes the intermediate effect state downward, it is possible to easily prevent a downward displacement larger than the intermediate effect state. Then, even after the drive motor 731 is controlled to stop, the biasing force of the coil spring CS2 is applied, so that the second motion unit 700 can be moved toward the intermediate effect state side.

Here, the effect of displacing the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the front-rear direction along with the up-and-down displacement will be described. As a premise, a movable accessory is known that can be switched between a state in which it is displaced inside and outside a frame bordered by a center frame 86 to attract the player's attention and a state in which it retreats from the player's field of vision.

Most of such movable accessories are designed with emphasis on appearance when placed inside the center frame 86, and when retracted to the outside of the center frame 86, the player does not pay attention to them. Under the assumption that it will not be done, we often did not consider appearance.

Recently, however, the front-to-rear distance from the third pattern display device 81 to the center frame 86 is long. , Since the line of sight reaches the position outside the rear side of the center frame 86 (the position behind the game area), if the appearance of the movable role in the state of retreating to the position outside the rear side of the center frame 86 is bad, the player may may diminish interest.

In contrast, in this embodiment, not only the front side (the first main decorative surface 787a1 in FIG. 52) of the covering member 787, but also the back side (the second main decorative surface 787b1 in FIG. 52) and the upper and lower surfaces (FIG. 52) After forming the decorative surface on the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2), the displacement direction of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is set to the player side (front side) as the base end toward the back side. The line that spreads out toward the rear (inclining downward toward the rear), that is, the displacement direction along the direction of the line of sight at the edge of the player's field of view, so that each decorative surface can easily fit in the field of view of the player. Configure.

As a result, each decorative surface of the covering member 787 can be placed within the visual field of the player without difficulty. Details of each decorative surface of the covering member 787 will be described later. 54, the first main decorative surface 787a1) and the upper side surface (first secondary decorative surface 787a2 or second secondary decorative surface 787b2, in FIG. 52 the first secondary The decorative surface 787a2) and the decorations (graphics, patterns, letters, pictures, etc.) formed thereon are formed as mutually related decorations.

In other words, the first main decorative surface 787a1 and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 are formed as a first decoration related to each other, and the second main decorative surface 787b1 and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 are formed as a second decoration related to each other. and the first decoration and the second decoration are formed as decorations different from each other.

The decoration formed on the upper surface is arranged in the front and rear gap between the center frame 86 and the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 26) arranged on the back side thereof when the second action unit 700 is waiting for the effect. Therefore, it is necessary to switch between a state of paying attention to the ball flowing down the game area formed outside the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) and a state of paying attention to the display effect developed by the third symbol display device 81. It is easy for the player to enter the field of view when moving the player's line of sight.

Therefore, the contents of the decoration (notification contents, for example, “chance” or “jackpot”) visible to the player through the covering member 787 in the overhanging state can be displayed on the covering member 787 even in the waiting state for the effect. It may be visible to the player through the sides.

As a result, the third pattern display device 81 is displaced to the arrangement of the performance standby state so as to be easily visually recognized, and the player's attention can be continuously attracted to the covering member 787 arranged inconspicuously.

Further, as will be described later, the covering member 787 is configured to be rotationally displaceable so as to switch the decorative surface facing the player side, so that the contents of the decorative surface visible to the player in the overhanging state are different. case can occur.

For example, if the vertical reversal effect device 770 is placed in the effect standby state before the player confirms the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state (if overlooked or if the operation speed is excessively fast), the front If the contents of the decoration surface can be grasped only from the side surface, most of the front side surface is hidden by the game board 13 in the standby state of the effect, so the player can be displayed on the display surface of the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the attention to the covering member 787 is reduced.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, when adopting a configuration in which the contents of the decorative surface can be grasped even from the upper side, the player can visually recognize the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 in the effect standby state, so that it is covered in the overhanging state. Through the setting member 787, it is possible to grasp the contents of the decoration (notification contents, such as "chance" or "jackpot") that can be visually recognized by the player.

As a result, for a player who misses the appearance of the covering member 787 in the overhanging state, the content notified by the state of the covering member 787 is displayed on the visible decorative surface of the covering member 787 even in the standby state for the effect. You can keep reporting. As a result, regardless of each state such as the effect waiting state or the projecting state, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be maintained high.

In the present embodiment, the up/down reversal effect device 770 of the second operation unit 700 is displaced in the front-rear direction from the state arranged on the back side of the rear end surface of the game area to the front of the rear end surface of the game area. Configuration as such displacement will be described.

As shown in FIG. 52, when the second motion unit 700 is in the performance standby state, the front surface of the covering member 787 and the back surface of the center frame 86 are arranged to face each other, and the center frame 86 is located on the covering member 787 side. A flow path forming portion 86a is provided so as to protrude from the .

The flow path forming portion 86a is formed by the center of the center frame 86 after a ball jumping into a warp flow path (rolling path) formed inside the center frame 86 from the left and right inlets of the center frame 86 reaches the lower edge of the center frame 86. The rear side part of the guide flow path for once swinging the ball that has flowed down the lower side rolling surface of the frame 86 backward and again forward, and guiding it toward the first prize winning port 64 arranged in the game area. (see FIG. 9). That is, the rear end surface BE1 of the game area is arranged on the rear side of the front surface of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) by the flow path forming portion 86a.

Since the ball flowing down the flow passage forming portion 86a has a high probability of entering the first winning hole 64, the flow forming portion 86a attracts a lot of attention, especially when the ball jumps inside the center frame 86. , the player's line of sight is likely to gather on the flow path forming portion 86a. To make it easy to construct a state in which the effect device 780 in the effect standby state enters the field of view of a player because the effect device 780 is arranged right behind the flow path forming part 86a in the effect standby state (see FIG. 52). can be done.

When the second motion unit 700 is in the effect waiting state, the covering member 787 is arranged on the rear side of the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 52(a)). The front portion is arranged on the rear end surface BE1 (see FIG. 53(a)), and in the extended state of the second operation unit 700, the front portion of the covering member 787 is arranged on the front side of the rear end surface BE1.

That is, the covering member 787 is displaced upward toward the inner side of the center frame 86, and at the same time, is displaced toward the front side so as to enter the same front and rear positions as the front and rear positions of the game area. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the covering member 787 is riding on the center frame 86 and moving toward the front side (approaching the player side).

It should be noted that the effect device 780 is displaced in the longitudinal direction as the second motion unit 700 is vertically displaced. It is configured to match (match) the front and rear positions of the second rendering surface 661 b of the rotating member 660 .

As a result, the front and rear positions of the second effect surface 661b (see FIG. 29) of the first action unit 600 (see FIG. 29) and the effect device 780 (FIG. 30) of the second action unit 700, which are arranged close to each other in the extended state when viewed from the front. will match, and these can be made easier to visually recognize integrally.

On the other hand, the arrangement of the effect device 780 in the front-rear direction is lower in the middle effect state and the effect standby state than in the extended state, so the box-shaped member of the first operation unit 600 is lower than in the extended state. 661 and the rendering device 780 can be separated (independently) to facilitate visual recognition.

The up-and-down reversal effect device 770 includes a body member 771 connected and supported by the lift plate member 740, and a effect device 780 configured to be displaceable with the body member 771 as a reference. Next, details of the up/down reversal effect device 770 will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG.

55 is an exploded front perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770, and FIG. 56 is an exploded rear perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770. FIG. 50 and 51 will be referred to in the description of FIGS. 55 and 56 as needed.

The main body member 771 has a lower elongated portion 772 elongated in the left-right direction, and an insertion cylindrical portion 773 protruding from the left-right central position of the lower elongated portion 772 toward the back side. , a pair of guide extending portions 774 extending from the left and right ends of the lower long portion 772 toward the back side, and a vertically extending connecting portion integrally formed with the left and right central position of the lower long portion 772. An upper long part 775 formed to be long in the left-right direction, and a direct-acting plate member 784 of the production device 780 disposed on the back side from both left and right sides of the upper long part 775 can be guided in the left-right direction. a plurality of guide portions 776, a transmission device holding plate 777 that is fastened and fixed from the back side to the left and right center of the upper long portion 775 to support the drive transmission device, the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion A light emitting means 778 fastened and fixed to the front side of the portion 775 is provided.

The insertion tubular portion 773 is a portion that is inserted through the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 744 of the elevating plate member 740, and is formed in a dimensional relationship that allows sliding on the inner periphery of the cylindrical portion 744. The member 771 is displaced in the front-rear direction. That is, by inserting the tubular portion 773 through the cylindrical portion 744, tilting displacement of the body member 771 in the front-rear direction with respect to the lift plate member 740 can be suppressed.

The guide extending portion 774 includes a vertical plate 774a whose width faces the vertical direction, a first horizontal plate 774b which is connected to the upper end of the vertical plate 774a and whose width direction faces the left-right direction, and a width of the first horizontal plate 774b. A second horizontal plate 774c that is connected to the vertical plate 774a on the lower side and whose width direction faces the horizontal direction (parallel to the width of the first horizontal plate 774b) protrudes from the left and right outer surfaces of the vertical plate 774a toward the left and right outer sides. A pair of upper and lower cylindrical portions 774d provided and a rotating cylindrical portion 774e rotatably supported by the cylindrical portions 774d are provided.

The second horizontal plate 774c has a longer width than the width direction end portions of the first horizontal plate 774b so as to extend inward in the left and right direction. In the assembled state, the widthwise expanded portion is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the lift plate member 740 in the vertical direction. That is, by securing the width length to such an extent that the second horizontal plate 774c is arranged to face the lower bottom portion of the elevating plate member 740 in the vertical direction, the main body member 771 tilts forward with the elevating plate member 740 as a reference. can be suppressed.

A pair of the tubular portions 774d are not arranged in a vertical direction, but the upper tubular portion 774d is shifted forward compared to the lower tubular portion 774d. This deviation is set so that the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the direction of the straight line connecting the centers of the pair of cylindrical portions 774d are parallel (see FIG. 52(a)). That is, by arranging the pair of tubular portions 774d in parallel with the inclination of the front upper inclined portions 714, 751, the pair of upper and lower rotating tubular portions 774e are brought into contact with the front upper inclined portions 714, 751 or the receiving inclined portion 762 at the same time. can be brought into contact. As a result, the pair of upper and lower rotary cylinder portions 774e can be stably rolled, and localized load can be easily avoided.

The guide portions 776 are arranged on both left and right sides in a manner in which a pair of left and right guide portions 776 are arranged vertically, and a plurality of tubular portions 776a having female threads formed on the inner peripheral side are fastened and fixed so as to connect the pair of left and right tubular portions 776a. and a plurality of drop-off prevention plate portions 776b.

The drop-off prevention plate portion 776b has insertion holes drilled at positions corresponding to the plurality of cylindrical portions 776a, and fastening screws inserted through the insertion holes from the back side are screwed into the cylindrical portion 776a. It is a portion that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical portion 776a by , and functions as a portion for preventing the linear motion plate member 784 from coming off, the details of which will be described later.

The transmission device holding plate 777 includes a motor support plate portion 777a for supporting the drive motor 782, an insertion hole 777b drilled in the motor support plate portion 777a at a position through which the drive shaft of the drive motor 782 can be inserted, and A cylindrical protruding portion 777c that protrudes cylindrically toward the front side below the insertion hole 777b, a pair of insertion holes 777d that are drilled at both upper and lower ends so that fastening screws can be inserted, and a fastening screw on the back side. and a fixed wiring retaining member 777e.

The cylindrical protruding portion 777c has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and a fastening screw is screwed into the cylindrical protruding portion 777c while being inserted into the transmission gear 781b, thereby axially supporting the upside-down reversing member 781 so as not to come off. part.

A fastening screw to be screwed into a female threaded portion 775a formed in a corresponding portion of the upper long portion 775 can be inserted through the insertion hole 777d. is fastened to the

The wiring retaining member 777e is a portion for retaining and fastening the electric wiring connected to the drive motor 782 in a gap between it and the transmission device holding plate 777, and has a shape along the outer frame of the transmission device holding plate 777. , the overall rigidity of the transmission device holding plate 777 can be improved.

The light emitting means 778 consists of two left and right elongated plate-like upper and lower electrical boards 778a on which light emitting members such as LEDs are arranged on the front side, and a light transmission board arranged on the front side of the electrical decoration board 778a. and a light diffusing member 778b which is a plate member formed of a flexible resin material and on which light diffusing processing is formed.

The upper electrical board 778a is provided with a pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d on the back side. The detection sensor 778d is a photocoupler-type detection device, and is configured to be able to detect the attitude of the upside-down reversing member 781 of the production device 780 by arranging an arcuate projecting portion 781d in the detection groove. will be described later.

The lower light diffusing member 778b has a plurality of fastened portions formed on the back side, and the fastened portions are inserted from the back side into insertion holes drilled in the lower long portion 772 at corresponding positions. The fastening screw is screwed in and fixed, thereby making the fastening screw inconspicuous.

On the other hand, the upper light diffusion member 778b has insertion holes 778c for inserting fastening screws on both left and right sides. By being screwed into the portion 775b, the upper light diffusion member 778b is fastened and fixed.

In this case, the head of the fastening screw faces the front side and may be conspicuous without countermeasures. , the head of the fastening screw fixed to the insertion hole 778c can be hidden by the covering member 787. As shown in FIG.

Therefore, even if the design is such that the head of the fastening screw faces the front side, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the head of the fastening screw is conspicuous and adversely affects the production. In other words, by designing the covering member 787 so as to hide the fastening screw, the degree of freedom in designing the insertion direction of the fastening screw can be increased.

The effect device 780 is a device configured to be displaceable by disposing an outer portion around the upper long portion 775, and is a vertically reversing member 781 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 777c of the transmission device holding plate 777. , a drive motor 782 in which a drive gear 782a for transmitting a driving force to the transmission gear 781b of the up/down reversing member 781 is fixed to the drive shaft; a pair of intermediate arm members 783 pivotally supported by the intermediate arm members 783, a pair of linear motion plate members 784 supported by the other end of the intermediate arm members 783 and guided by a guide portion 776 for displacement in the left-right direction; A pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged between a linear motion plate member 784 and an intermediate arm member 783 and configured to be rotatable (reversible) by a rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, and the shaft rotating members 785 as a linear motion plate. A pair of shaft support members 786 that jointly support the member 784, a pair of end plate members 785d that are fitted and fixed to the left and right outer tip portions of the shaft rotation member 785 so as not to fall off in a state where the phase is fixed, and A covering member 787 is arranged in front and behind the end plate member 785 d and is formed with a left and right length covering the left and right sides of the upper long portion 775 .

The vertical reversing member 781 includes a main body plate portion 781a formed in a long plate shape, a transmission gear 781b protruding from the rear side of the central portion of the main body plate portion 781a, and a length of the main body plate portion 781a. A pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protruding cylindrically from both ends in the lengthwise direction to the rear side, and a pair of cylindrical protrusions 781c protruding from the front side of the body plate portion 781a in an arc centered on the central axis of the transmission gear 781b. and an arcuate projecting portion 781d.

The transmission gear 781b has a circular hole extending in the front-rear direction at its center. The upside-down reversing member 781 is rotatably supported by the transmission device holding plate 777 via the transmission gear 781b.

The transmission gear 781b meshes with the drive gear 782a. When the drive motor 782 is energized and the drive gear 782a rotates, the transmission gear 781b also rotates in conjunction with the drive motor 782, thereby rotating the upside-down reversing member 781. That is, the upside-down reversing member 781 can be rotated by energizing the driving motor 782 .

The cylindrical projecting portion 781c pivotally supports the intermediate arm member 783. As shown in FIG. That is, the end portion of the intermediate arm member 783 where the one side support hole 783a is formed is displaced following the cylindrical projecting portion 781c that is displaced as the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotationally displaced.

The arcuate protruding portion 781d is formed so as to be arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d of the light emission effect means 778 . That is, the arcuate projecting portion 781d can be arranged on either of the pair of upper and lower detection sensors 778d.

Therefore, by reading the output of the detection sensor 778d, the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 can be changed to two postures in which the arcuate protruding portion 781d is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d, and a posture therebetween (a pair of detection sensors 778d). A position in which the arcuate protruding portions 781d are not arranged in both of the detection grooves).

The intermediate arm member 783 is formed in a long bar shape (narrow plate shape), and has a one-side support hole 783a drilled at one end and pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, A cylindrical other-side cylindrical portion 783b having an inner peripheral side penetrating at the other end opposite to the support hole 783a, and a bevel-like gear tooth (bevel gear) centered on the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. ) and a bevel tooth 783c formed as a .

A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c, and a fastening screw that is inserted through the one-side support hole 783a from the rear side is screwed into the female screw. As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 is pivotally supported by the upside down member 781 so as not to fall off.

The linear motion plate member 784 is formed in a rectangular plate shape elongated in the left-right direction, and has a cylindrical projecting portion 784a which is inserted into the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 and protrudes. An arc-shaped plate portion 784b projecting in an arc shape centering on the central axis of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a, and an oblong shape extending parallel to the left-right direction on both upper and lower sides of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. a pair of long hole portions 784c arranged parallel to each other between the long hole portions 784c, a pair of support plate portions 784d projecting toward the rear side, and an intermediate portion of the support plate portions 784d. A pair of projecting ridges 784e formed as ridges extending in the front-rear direction and protruding on sides facing each other, and a cylindrically-shaped opening at the end of the support plate 784d and opening on the inner peripheral side of the supporting plate 784d. Between a pair of fastened portions 784f having internal threads formed therein, an arrangement hole 784g penetrating between the cylindrical projecting portion 784a and the support plate portion 784d, and a shaft support member 786, a ring-shaped A ring holding half portion 784h having a semicircular surface capable of holding the metal member 785e, and a magnet holding half portion 784i formed in a rectangular box shape so as to be able to hold the magnet Mg between the shaft support member 786. , provided.

The cylindrical protruding portion 784a is formed with an outer diameter slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783, and has a protruding length slightly longer than the axial length of the other side cylindrical portion 783b. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side. That is, the intermediate arm member 783 cannot fall off the cylindrical projecting portion 784a by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the other cylindrical portion 783b from the rear side into the female thread of the cylindrical projecting portion 784a. pivoted on.

The arcuate plate portion 784b is formed in an arcuate shape with an inner peripheral diameter that is slightly longer than the outer peripheral diameter of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b. As a result, the arc-shaped plate portion 784b is arranged close to the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the assembled state so as to face the other-side cylindrical portion 783b in the radial direction, thereby limiting the tilting displacement of the other-side cylindrical portion 783b with respect to the rotation axis. As a result, the rotational displacement of the intermediate arm member 783 about the other-side cylindrical portion 783b can be stabilized.

The elongated hole portion 784c is an opening through which the cylindrical portion 776a of the main body member 771 is inserted. The linear motion plate member 784 is supported by the main body member 771 so as not to fall off by screwing in the screw.

In the supported state (assembled state), the direct-acting plate member 784 can be slidably displaced along the forming direction of the long hole portion 784c. That is, the linear motion plate member 784 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction.

The support plate portion 784d is a plate-like portion for holding the metal rod 785a of the axial rotation member 785 so as to suppress vertical displacement, and the ridge portion 784e defines the horizontal arrangement of the metal rod 785a. It functions as a ridge, the details of which will be described later.

The arranging hole 784g is an opening for avoiding interference with the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, which will be described later in detail.

The shaft rotating member 785 is a member that is arranged in a left and right pair and is pivotally supported by the linear motion plate member 784. A recessed groove portion 785b formed in the circumferential direction at the center position of the direction, and a bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783, which is a member fixed to the metal rod 785a and disposed at the left and right inner ends of the metal rod 785a. A bevel tooth member 785c in which meshing bevel teeth (bevel gears) are formed, an end plate member 785d disposed at the left and right outer ends of the metal rod 785a and fixed to the metal rod 785a, and the end plate member 785d. A ring-shaped metal member 785e arranged around the metal rod 785a so as to be raised from the end plate member 785d, and a female screw formed inside the end plate member 785d, which is a portion projecting from the left and right inner sides of the end plate member 785d. A rotational position stabilizing portion 785f into which a metal screw is screwed and fixed is provided.

The metal rod 785a is arranged between a pair of support plate portions 784d of the linear motion plate member 784, and the ridge portion 784e is arranged to enter the recessed groove portion 785b. Here, the recessed groove portion 785b is configured in a dimensional relationship such that it is slidable with respect to the protrusion portion 784e, and is configured in a dimensional relationship such that displacement in the left-right direction is restricted with respect to the protrusion portion 784e.

That is, the groove width of the recessed groove portion 785b is set slightly longer than the horizontal width of the ridge portion 784e, and the diameter of the groove deep portion of the recessed groove portion 785b is set to be shorter than the gap length between the ridge portions 784e. The diameter of the portion where the groove 785b is not formed is set longer than the length of the gap between the ridges 784e.

As a result, the metal rod 785a can be supported on the back side of the direct-acting plate member 784 so as to be axially rotatable and restrained from being displaced in the left-right direction.

The bevel tooth member 785c is arranged so as to enter the arrangement hole 784g of the linear motion plate member 784 . In a state where the bevel tooth member 785c has partially entered the placement hole 784g, the intermediate arm member 783 moves the bevel tooth portion 783c from the opposite side (back side) of the linear motion plate member 784 so as to mesh with the bevel tooth member 785c. to be assembled.

In this assembled state, the bevel tooth member 785c is inserted into the arranging hole 784g, but since the metal rod 785a is supported by the linear motion plate member 784, it cannot fall off to the front side. and the displacement to the rear side is restricted by the intermediate arm member 783 . Therefore, the bevel tooth member 785c is supported by the linear motion plate member 784 and the intermediate arm member 783 so as not to fall off.

A tubular portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d is formed with an inner peripheral shape corresponding to a non-circular shape (for example, a D-shaped cross section) as the tip portion of the metal rod 785a. are formed in a dimensional relationship with an interference fit, and are fitted and fixed.

The method for fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a is not limited to this. For example, a method of fixing by using an adhesive or the like may be used. A method of fastening and fixing the end plate member 785d to the metal rod 785a may be used, or another method may be used.

The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held so as to be fitted inside the ring holding half portion 784h of the direct-acting plate member 784 . The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held, and the cylindrical portion 785d1 of the end plate member 785d supporting the metal rod 785a is in sliding contact with the inner peripheral side of the ring-shaped metal member 785e. can easily coincide with the axis passing through the rotation center of the bevel tooth member 785c, and the load generated in the axial radial direction of the metal rod 785a can be reduced.

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f functions as a portion in which the provided metal screw is attracted to the magnet Mg.

The shaft support member 786 is a member formed in a square plate shape, and includes an insertion hole 786a formed so that a fastening screw to be screwed into the fastening portion 784f can be inserted, and a ring holding portion of the linear motion plate member 784. A ring holding half portion 786b having a semicircular surface capable of holding a ring-shaped metal member 785e between itself and the half portion 784h and a magnet holding half portion 784i of the linear motion plate member 784 capable of holding the magnet Mg. and a magnet retaining half 786c formed in the shape of a square box.

When a fastening screw is inserted through the insertion hole 786a from the back side and is screwed into the fastened portion 784f to assemble the direct-acting plate member 784 and the pivot member 786, the back side of the metal rod 785a is attached to the plate portion of the pivot member 786. The ring-shaped metal member 785e is held by the ring holding halves 784h and 786b, and the magnet Mg is held by the magnet holding halves 784i and 786c.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed in a box-like shape with left and right inner sides opened as a pair in the front and rear. A decoration consisting of figures, patterns, letters or pictures that can be read with meaning is formed.

That is, the covering member 787 has a first main decorative surface 787a1 formed as a decorative surface to be visually recognized by the player in the overhanging state (see FIG. 54), a second main decorative surface 787b1 formed on the back surface, When the first main decorative surface 787a1 is arranged on the front side and the effect standby state (see FIG. 52) is entered, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is formed on the side where the player can see, and a second secondary decorative surface 787b2 formed. The second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is formed on the side that can be visually recognized by the player when the second main decorative surface 787b1 is arranged on the front side and the waiting state for effect (see FIG. 52) is reached.

The covering member 787 is a pair of left and right members formed of two front and rear members fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d and formed into a substantially box-like shape with left and right inner sides opened in the assembled state (see FIG. 26). and a plurality of extension portions 787c extending toward the left and right members, and a recess portion 787d recessed so as to retract to the left and right outside in a portion between the extension portions 787c. .

The extending portions 787c are formed so that their ends abut or are arranged close to each other when the covering member 787 is arranged close to each other (see FIG. 26). As a result, the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be viewed integrally.

The recessed portion 787d is a circular portion arranged in the center of the light diffusion member 778b of the light emission effecting means 778 and the upper side of the upper long portion 775 in the center of the left and right when the covering member 787 is arranged close to the cover member 787 (see FIG. 26). It is a portion for opening the circular arc plate portion of , etc., and is recessed in a shape that at least avoids interference with these portions.

The covering member 787 has a state in which the first main decorative surface 787a1 faces the front side and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 faces upward (see FIGS. 29 and 52) and the second main The state can be switched between a state in which the decorative surface 787b1 faces the front side and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 faces upward (see FIG. 30). First, the mechanism that constitutes the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described.

57(a) and 57(b) are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the direct acting plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. FIG. 57(a) shows a vertically arranged state (also referred to as an upright vertically arranged state) of the vertically reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same vertical line, and FIG. ) shows a state in which the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated about 24 degrees counterclockwise in a front view about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). 57(a) and 57(b), illustration of the end plate member 785d of the left shaft rotating member 785 and the right shaft rotating member 785 is omitted for easy understanding.

In the upright vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the upper detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56). In addition, in the inverted vertical arrangement state in which the vertical reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees from the erect vertical arrangement state, the arcuate projecting portion 781d is arranged in a state of entering the detection groove of the lower detection sensor 778d. be.

That is, the output of the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56) is configured to be switched depending on whether the upside-down reversing member 781 is in the upright vertical arrangement state or the inverted vertical arrangement state. Device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the state of rendering device 780 .

As shown in FIGS. 57(a) and 57(b), when the vertical inversion member 781 is rotationally displaced, the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced in the horizontal direction while changing its posture. The angle of this posture change corresponds to (is proportional to) the rotation angle of the shaft rotating member 785, and the lateral displacement amount of the other side cylindrical portion 783b corresponds to the lateral displacement amount of the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. corresponds to

Here, the order in which rotational displacement and lateral displacement (linear displacement) occur will be described. These displacements do not occur at the same degree at the same time, but there are arrangements in which the degree of rotational displacement is greater, and arrangement in which the degree of linear motion displacement is greater.

First, to explain the outline, the structure of the upside down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783 and the direct acting plate member 784 is a known slider crank mechanism. That is, when the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates about the cylindrical projecting portion 777c, the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 pivotally supported by the cylindrical projecting portion 781c of the upside-down reversing member 781 moves toward the front. The displacement direction of the linear motion plate member 784 connected to the other side cylindrical portion 783b is regulated so that it moves parallel along the movement axis HL1 passing through the center of the cylindrical projecting portion 777c. The pair of left and right linear motion plate members 784 are simultaneously displaced in opposite left and right directions along the movement axis HL1.

As shown in FIG. 57(b), the other side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced by a length L1 in the left-right direction by the time it rotates about 24 degrees from the vertically arranged state shown in FIG. 57(a). The length L1 is half the width of the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 (the length between the left and right center and the left and right width ends). is illustrated as

57(a) to FIG. 57(b), the posture change around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the intermediate arm member 783 is 5 degrees clockwise when viewed from the front. The angle is suppressed to less than half of 15 degrees, which is the angle between the adjacent teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

Since the bevel tooth member 785c is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 783, the transmission of the load (engagement transmission) between the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c is performed at positions opposed to each other in the front-rear direction, that is, , occurs on the movement axis HL1 in front view.

FIG. 58(a) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 along line LVIIIa-LVIIIa in FIG. 57(a). FIG. 58(b) is a cross-sectional view of the transmission device holding plate 777, the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784, and the shaft rotating member 785 along line LVIIIb-LVIIIb of FIG. 57(b).

As shown in FIG. 58(b), the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 is displaced so as to press the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785 (in FIG. ). In FIG. 58(b), for ease of understanding, the bevel tooth portion 783c and the gear tooth of the bevel tooth member 785c are shown to overlap each other. and the elastic deformation of the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c.

The bevel tooth portion 783c meshes with the bevel tooth member 785c, and the shaft rotating member 785 is rotationally displaced by transmitting the driving force. While the vertical reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. Rotate in the opposite direction.

While the upside-down reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees, the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 rotates 90 degrees around the other side cylindrical portion 783b. Rotate 180 degrees. That is, the angle at which the bevel tooth member 785c rotates around the metal rod 785a is configured to be twice the angle of rotation around the other side cylindrical portion 783b of the bevel tooth portion 783c.

58(a) to the state of FIG. 58(b), the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth member 785c that can be caused by the pressing due to the displacement is less than the thickness of the gear teeth in the circumferential direction. Not enough to reliably rotate the gear teeth of the 785c. That is, the amount of displacement until the representative tooth in contact rotates to the arrangement of the adjacent teeth (according to the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c being arranged in 12 equal parts, the displacement required for rotation of an angle of 30 degrees) amount).

The gear teeth of the bevel tooth portion 783c are displaced so as to press the gear teeth of the bevel tooth member 785c. The accompanying displacement is absorbed by the elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c, so that the attitude of the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotation member 785 in the rotation direction changes from the state shown in FIG. 57(a) to the state shown in FIG. ).

The elastic deformation of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c causes the rotation position stabilizing portion 785f ( (See FIG. 54).

That is, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the lower rotational position stabilizing portion 785f so as to restrict the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 in the backward rotation direction. The right shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the forward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the right shaft rotating member 785 .

As for the left shaft rotating member 785, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged on the front side of the end plate member 785d as in the right side, while the magnet Mg is arranged on the upper side opposite to the right side. (See FIG. 55). Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts to attract the metal screw of the upper rotational position stabilizing portion 785f, so that the left shaft rotating member 785 receives an urging force in the backward rotation direction from the magnet Mg. Therefore, the attracting force of the magnet Mg acts in a direction to increase the displacement resistance of the rotational displacement of the left shaft rotating member 785 .

In this embodiment, the attracting force of the magnet Mg is the driving force applied to the bevel tooth member 785c until the other-side cylindrical portion 783b is displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 from the state shown in FIG. 57(a). designed to be capable of generating loads exceeding

As a result, the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c are elastically deformed so as to absorb the amount of displacement of the bevel tooth portion 783c shown in FIG. 58(b). When the displacement continues beyond the state shown in FIG. 57(b), the bevel tooth member 785c rotates beyond the attracting force of the magnet Mg, and the magnet Mg and the metal screw of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f. As the arrangement separates, the magnetic force is extremely reduced, and the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c released from the attracting force of the magnet Mg undergo elastic recovery and rotational displacement.

Therefore, at the start of rotation, the elastic recovery increases the force in the direction of rotation of the shaft rotating member 785, so that the rotation speed at the start of rotation can be instantaneously increased. This increase in rotational speed occurs not only in the shaft rotating member 785 but also in the covering member 787 (see FIG. 55) that is fastened and fixed to the shaft rotating member 785 .

As a result, the operation of the covering member 787 can be adjusted without changing the driving speed of the driving motor 782. Therefore, the covering member 787 can be produced while reducing the burden of control design of the driving motor 782. You can improve the effect.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the timing at which the rotation of the shaft rotating member 785 is caused by the attracting force of the magnet Mg can be delayed from the timing at which the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 starts rotating. .

The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f that receives the attractive force of the magnet Mg is composed of a pair of upper and lower rotational position stabilizing portions 785f. is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force (see FIG. 52(b)), and when the direction is reversed and the second main decorative surface 787b1 of the covering member 787 faces the front side, the other (see FIG. 52(b) ), the upper) rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is arranged close to the magnet Mg and receives an attractive force.

That is, regardless of whether the surface facing the front side is the first main decorative surface 787a1 or the second main decorative surface 787b1, at least in the close arrangement state (see FIGS. 29 and 30), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is the axial rotation member. It works effectively for the purpose of limiting the rotational displacement of the 785. Therefore, when the shaft rotating member 785 is displaced from the close arrangement state, the magnetic force delays the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 regardless of the direction of the rotational displacement (in both directions).

That is, between the state shown in FIG. 58(a) and the state shown in FIG. 58(b), the degree of translational displacement in the horizontal direction is greater than the degree of rotational displacement. Then, when the up-down reversing member 781 continues to rotate counterclockwise in front view beyond FIG. 57(b), the degree of translational displacement in the left-right direction settles down, and rotational displacement occurs.

According to this embodiment, since the slider-crank mechanism is employed as described above, a similar action is produced. That is, in the vicinity of the vertically arranged state, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c is large in the horizontal direction and small in the vertical direction, so the displacement in the horizontal direction of the intermediate arm member 783 is large and the amount of rotation thereof is small. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is large, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is small.

On the other hand, as the longitudinal direction of the up/down reversing member 781 tilts toward the horizontal direction, the displacement of the cylindrical projecting portion 781c decreases in the horizontal direction and increases in the vertical direction. The smaller it is, the larger the amount of rotation. Therefore, the lateral displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 is small, and the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 is large.

Therefore, in the rotational movement of the vertically reversing member 781 that starts from the vertically arranged state and ends in the vertically arranged state, the degree of horizontal displacement of the linear motion plate member 784 first increases, and then the degree of rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 increases. Then, the degree of horizontal displacement of the direct-acting plate member 784 increases again.

Due to the linear motion displacement and the rotational displacement occurring in this order, the extended portion 787c of the covering member 787 is formed at the connecting portion (see FIG. 55) between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772. Collisions can be avoided. Next, changes in appearance of the covering member 787 will be described.

59(a) to 59(c) are front views of the effect device 780. FIG. 59(a) to 59(c) show the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 in chronological order. FIG. 59(a) shows the rendering device 780 in the upright vertically arranged state of the vertically reversing member 781, and FIG. 59(b) shows the rendering device when the vertically reversing member 781 is rotated 90 degrees from the vertically arranged state. 780 is illustrated, and in FIG. 59(c), the production device 780 is illustrated in which the vertically reversing member 781 is vertically arranged in an inverted position.

The vertically reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in a front view from the upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 57(a)) to change the state to the inverted vertically arranged state. In the inverted vertical arrangement state, the posture of the covering member 787 is reversed 180 degrees with respect to the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)). As a result, the decorative surface visible to the player is switched (see FIG. 59(c)).

When the vertical reversing member 781 rotates 180 degrees clockwise (counterclockwise) in front view from the inverted vertical arrangement state, it returns to the erect vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 57A). 59(a) and 59(c). ), the state can be switched repeatedly.

As described above, while the upside-down reversing member 781 is rotated 180 degrees counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIG. do. Here, from the rotation direction of the bevel tooth portion 783c, the right shaft rotating member 785 rotates backward, and the left shaft rotating member 785 rotates forward. That is, the pair of shaft rotating members 785 arranged on the left and right sides and the covering member 787 fastened and fixed to the end plate member 785d rotate in opposite directions.

Therefore, in the middle position, the covering member 787 on the right side faces the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 toward the front side, and the covering member 787 on the left side faces the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 toward the front side (see FIG. 59(b)). ).

As a result, during the rotational displacement of the covering member 787, the first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2) of the left covering member 787 and the first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2) of the right covering member 787 Alternatively, it is possible to prevent the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) from being visually recognized.

Therefore, the decorative surface of the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be intentionally made to have different contents on the left and right sides, and the contents of the decorative surface can be configured so as to make it difficult for the player to recognize the contents of the decorative surface. The amount of information given to the player by the covering member 787 can be reduced.

As a result, the player's attention to the covering member 787 during rotational displacement can be reduced. In addition, since the decorative surfaces of the pair of left and right covering members 787 are aligned with the first main decorative surface 787a1 (or the second main decorative surface 787b1) when the rotational displacement stops, the game is played until the rotation of the covering member 787 stops. It is also possible to obtain an effect that it is easy to maintain the line of sight of the person on the covering member 787 .

Rotational displacement is executed in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 54). In the state where the two main decorative surfaces 787b1) are aligned, the effect device 780 has risen to near the vertical center of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 30), and in this state the first secondary decorative surface 787a2. (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is less likely to attract attention.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be displaced closer to the second operation unit 700, the field of view to the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) becomes the third movement. It will be blocked by unit 800 .

On the other hand, when the second operation unit 700 is in the production standby state (see FIG. 52) and the production device 780 is arranged below the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or The second secondary decorative surface 787b2) is easily visible to the player.

In this way, in the second operation unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 (or the second secondary decorative surface 787b2) in the overhanging state is prevented from being visually recognized together during rotational displacement, and the player side is prevented from being visually recognized. It is formed as a side that can attract the player's attention in the waiting state for the effect by preventing the face from facing the other side.

As a result, the appearance of the second action unit 700 can be changed according to the arrangement, so the performance performance for the cost of placing the second action unit 700 (occupying space, burden of skillful concealment) becomes excessively low. It can make it easier to avoid the situation from occurring.

After the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787, the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is attracted to the magnet Mg (see FIG. 54(b)), thereby stabilizing the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787. can be improved.

In this embodiment, the metal member attracted to the magnet Mg is composed of a metal screw, so compared to designing a dedicated metal member, it is possible to reduce member costs and improve maintainability. .

As described above, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is accompanied by translational displacement in the horizontal direction, so the arrangement of the rendering device 780 capable of executing rotational displacement is limited. That is, in the production standby state (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate production state (see FIG. 33) of the second operation unit 700, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member arranged on the left and right are rotated by executing rotational displacement. 750 , the front support member 760 , and decorative members such as the three-dimensional decorative portion 768 a fixedly arranged on the front side thereof collide with the covering member 787 .

On the other hand, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30), a space is secured in the left-right direction, so that the axial rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be rotated.

Therefore, the drive control of the drive motor 731 that causes the rotational displacement of the shaft rotating member 785 and the covering member 787 is based on the determination that the second operation unit 700 is in the overhanging state from the output of the detection sensor 713. It is controlled to be executable on the premise that As a result, the rotational displacement of the shaft rotation member 785 and the covering member 787 can be caused normally.

The extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other in the vertically arranged state of the upside down member 781, and in this state are arranged to face the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772 in the front and rear. Therefore, when the covering member 787 is rotationally displaced from this arrangement by the rotating shaft extending in the left-right direction, the extension part 787c collides with the connection part between the upper long part 775 and the lower long part 772, A problem occurs.

On the other hand, the configuration in which the extension portions 787c are arranged close to each other produces an effect that the pair of left and right covering members 787 can be visually recognized as a unit, and is a configuration necessary for presentation. It is preferable to be able to maintain

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is configured to be translatively displaced in the left-right direction by a length L1 before being rotationally displaced (see FIG. 57). Due to the linear motion displacement of the length L1, the extension portion 787c can be retracted from the front and rear positions of the connecting portion between the upper long portion 775 and the lower long portion 772, and the extension portion 787c and the upper long portion 775 can be retracted. and the connection portion with the lower long portion 772 can be avoided.

Further, by configuring the rotational displacement in this way, the rotational displacement does not occur (or is limited) in the length L1 while the covering member 787 is displaced in the left-right direction, and the rotational displacement occurs in the remaining length L2. Therefore, the lateral displacement amount of the covering member 787 during rotation can be kept small.

As a result, compared to the case where the arrangement of the covering member 787 changes greatly during rotation, the attention force of the covering member 787 can be suppressed to a low level, and the rotational displacement can be made inconspicuous. The surfaces 787a1 to 787b2 can be designed ignoring the appearance during rotational displacement, so the degree of freedom in design can be improved.

The timing at which the covering member 787 starts rotating can be arbitrarily set by designing the attracting force of the magnet Mg. Therefore, for example, even if there is a design change to lengthen the horizontal width of the connecting portion between the lower long portion 772 and the upper long portion 775 of the main body member 771, the configuration of the effect device 780 is the same, but the magnet Mg is changed to a magnet having a large attracting force, it is possible to avoid collision between the connecting portion and the extending portion 787c as in the present embodiment.

As shown by the imaginary line in FIG. 59, the insertion hole 778c is arranged so as to be hidden by the covering member 787 at all times. As a result, it is possible to prevent the tightening screw inserted through the insertion hole 778c from being visually recognized by the player, and it is possible to avoid lowering the performance effect due to the tightening screw.

In this embodiment, the decorations (graphics, patterns, or designs) of the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 formed on the pair of left and right covering members 787 are not the same for the left and right covering members 787. , and the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetrical in accordance with the right and left decorations.

That is, since the insertion hole 778c is a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted, the LED cannot be arranged on the electrical board 787a at that position (see FIG. 55). In addition, since the fastening screw is made of metal and does not transmit light, it is likely to be visible in the dark during the lighting effect.

Therefore, it is desirable to arrange the insertion holes 778c in the right and left decorations, avoiding areas that are conspicuously illuminated. As a result, the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c is left-right asymmetrical.

In addition, it is naturally permitted to make the arrangement of the insertion holes 778c bilaterally symmetrical. In particular, when the decorative surfaces 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, and 787b2 of the left and right covering members 787 are identically decorated, there is no disadvantage due to the symmetrical arrangement of the insertion holes 778c, and the electrical decoration board 778a design can be facilitated.

As shown in FIG. 59(b), in this embodiment, the covering member 787 is linearly displaced left and right during the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770, and the vicinity of the central portion of the light diffusing member 778b is the extending portion 787c. Even in a state in which it is not surrounded by the two, the mechanical parts such as the upside-down reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783 and the linear motion plate member 784 are hidden from view.

That is, when viewed from the front, the outer shape of the upper elongated portion 775 of the main body member 771 is designed to fit within the outer shape of the light diffusing member 778b arranged on the front side, and the vertical width of the direct-acting plate member 784 is designed to fit on the front side. It is designed to have a shape that fits within the vertical width of the left and right long parts of the upper long part 775 that is arranged in the upper part 775 . In addition, the vertical inversion member 781 is designed to have a shape that fits within the outer shape of the disk portion of the upper long portion 775 arranged on the front side, and the intermediate arm member 783 is designed so that the displacement locus fits within the outer shape of the light diffusion member 778b. Designed.

As a result, the mechanical part for realizing the displacement of the effect device 780 can be hidden behind the light diffusion member 778b and made invisible, so that the effect of the appearance of the effect device 780 during the reversing operation is reduced. can be avoided.

Returning to FIG. 26, description will be made. The third operation unit 800 is arranged above the display area of the third pattern display device 81 in the standby state for effect, and is supported by the tip of a pair of left and right lifting arm members 801 (see FIG. 31) supported by the rear case 510. This is a unit configured to be vertically displaceable as the lifting arm member 801 is driven in the vertical direction.

60 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 61 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. FIG. 60 and 61 show the parts that constitute the displacement of the third operation unit 800, and the illustration of the decorative members 870 and 880 as the decorative parts arranged outside is omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the third operation unit 800 includes a held member 810 held by an elevating arm member 801 and a fixed cylinder having a cylindrical portion 821 fastened and fixed to the center of the held member 810. As shown in FIGS. A member 820, an inner rotating member 830 pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 821 in a state in which the cylindrical portion 821 is inserted on the inner peripheral side, and a body portion 831 in a state in which the inner rotating member 830 is inserted on the inner peripheral side. A pivotally supported outer rotating member 840 , a plurality of (five in this embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 rotatably connected to the cylindrical portion 842 a of the outer rotating member 840 , and housed in the held member 810 . and a drive transmission device 860 having a plurality of gear members connected to each other and for transmitting driving force for displacing the inner rotating member 830 , the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 .

The held member 810 includes a disk-shaped body member 811 and a perforated lid member 817 that covers the body member 811 from the front side.

The main body member 811 has a cylindrical fixing portion 812 which is recessed at the center to hold the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and has an insertion hole for inserting a fastening screw for fixing and a through hole for inserting an electrical wiring. , a detection sensor 813 which is a photocoupler type sensor and is fixed with the detection groove facing the side capable of receiving the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840, a motor holding portion 814 holding the drive motor 861, A plurality of cylindrical protruding portions 815 protruded on the front side as cylindrical portions that irremovably support the transmission gear 863, and a double cylindrical portion that irresistibly supports the load response gear 865 on the front side. and a plurality of double cylindrical protrusions 816 that protrude.

The perforated cover member 817 has a circular hole 818 drilled in the front-rear direction in the central portion. The circular hole 818 is designed with dimensions such that the transmission gear 863 and the load response gear 865 protrude inward from the inner peripheral edge when viewed in the opening direction.

The fixed cylindrical member 820 includes the above-described cylindrical portion 821, a circular plate portion 822 formed at the front end of the cylindrical portion 821, and a light emitting means such as an LED on the front side. A disc-shaped electrical board 823 to be arranged, and an umbrella-shaped (or bowl-shaped) translucent light-transmitting resin material that can cover the electrical board 823 from the front side. A decorative member 824 and a sliding member 825 formed in an annular shape with an inner diameter slightly longer than the outer diameter of the cylindrical portion 821 on the circular plate portion 822 side and configured to be slidable with the cylindrical portion 821 are provided.

The cylindrical portion 821 has a female screw formed at the tip portion on the back side, and a fastening screw inserted through the insertion hole of the tubular fixing portion 812 of the held member 810 is screwed into the female screw, whereby the fixed cylinder is fixed. A member 820 is non-rotatably fastened to the held member 810 .

The cylindrical portion 821 is axially penetrating on the inner peripheral side, and the electric wiring inserted through the through hole of the cylindrical fixing portion 812 is passed through this penetrating portion toward the front side and arranged behind the electrical board 823 . connected to the connector

The illumination substrate 823 includes, as LEDs, inner light-emitting portions 823a arranged at the apexes of the pentagon and central positions equidistant from the vertices, and outer light-emitting portions 823b arranged at 15 locations at equal intervals on the circumference. And prepare. The inner light emitting portion 823a is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces the front side (forward), and the outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of an LED whose optical axis faces radially outward (diameter direction).

The outer light emitting portion 823b is composed of 15 LEDs arranged at equal intervals on the circumference. As will be described later, the light emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b is emitted to the plated portions 871a of the first decorative members 870 which are arranged in close proximity to each other at equal intervals on the circumference, so that each of the first decorations is illuminated. The member 870 will be illuminated with light from the three LEDs.

The outer light-emitting portion 823b is fixedly arranged on the electric decoration board 823, and the first decorative member 870 is configured to rotate around the center of the circle, but the outer light-emitting portion 823b and the first decorative member 870 are coaxial. , the light from the same number of LEDs (three in this embodiment) is always emitted to each of the first decorative members 870 regardless of the orientation of the first decorative member 870 in the rotational direction. can be irradiated to

As a result, it is possible to suppress the change in the light amount of the light LD1 that irradiates the first decorative member 870 during the rotating operation.

The sliding member 825 has an inner diameter side portion slidable on the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and an outer diameter side portion slidable on the circular flange portion 831 a of the inner rotary member 830 . formed in

The sliding member 825 has a flange-shaped portion formed on the front side, and has a tubular portion projecting rearward from the inner diameter side end of the flange-shaped portion. The diameter is formed slightly shorter than the inner diameter of the circular flange-shaped portion 831a, so that it is slidably fitted inside the inner rotary member 830. As shown in FIG.

The interposition of the sliding member 825 prevents direct contact between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 configured to be rotatable therearound. Further, the sliding member 825 is disposed on the circular plate portion 822 side of the cylindrical portion 821 and similarly on the circular flange portion 831a side of the main body portion 831, which is advantageous in terms of strength. It is possible to reduce the possibility of damage or deformation of the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 due to the load generated when the sliding is defective (when the displacement resistance becomes excessive unintentionally).

The inner rotary member 830 has a cylindrical body portion 831 having a circular flange-shaped portion 831a at the front end, and a longitudinal direction in the radial direction at positions where the circumference of the body portion 831 is equally divided into five in the circumferential direction. A plurality of metal rods 832 fastened and fixed to the circular flange-shaped portion 831a in a posture along which the metal rods 832 are formed to be inserted and guided by the metal rods 832 so as to be linearly displaceable. and a plurality of rotating members 834 rotatably supported on the radially outer portion of the linear motion member 833 .

The body portion 831 includes the circular flange portion 831a and a plurality of sliding projections extending rearward in a ridge shape with the circular flange portion 831a as a base end at intermediate angular positions (five locations) between the adjacent metal rods 832. It includes a ridge portion 831b and a plurality of recessed portions 831c formed at intervals in the circumferential direction at the opposite end of the circular flange portion 831a.

The sliding ridge portion 831b is a portion configured to be slidable on the inner peripheral curved surface of the body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840, and reduces the contact area with the outer rotating member 840 to reduce contact friction. has a semicircular cross section.

The sliding protrusion 831b is arranged at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent metal rods 832 as described above. position (position shifted by 180 degrees).

As a result, the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 in a switching rotation operation to be described later, and the load is applied so that the outer rotating member 840 on which the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally displaced is displaced radially outward. Even if the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is received, the displacement of the outer rotating member 840 can be received by the sliding protrusion 831b. can be kept low.

The recessed portion 831c is a portion into which the transmission projection 864a of the central annular gear 864 is inserted. The rotation angle of the central ring gear 864 and the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 can be matched.

The linear motion member 833 includes a pair of cylindrical protrusions 833a and 833b that are arranged side by side in the linear motion displacement direction and are cylindrically projected toward the rear, and the cylindrical protrusion 833a. , 833b, a cylindrical shaft portion 833c formed on the side away from the central axis of the main body portion 831 and inserted into the rotating member 834, and a tip portion of the cylindrical shaft portion 833c along the circumferential direction. and a recessed groove 833d that is recessed.

The recessed groove 833d is arranged on the side protruding from the rotating member 834 in the assembled state (see FIG. 28), and the projecting portions 873, 883 of the decorative members 870, 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 slide. By being externally fitted, it functions as a displacement restricting groove that prevents the rotation member 834 from falling off in the radially outward direction, the details of which will be described later.

The rotating member 834 includes a bevel tooth portion 834a formed in a bevel gear shape, and a plurality of cylindrical projecting portions 834b projecting in a cylindrical shape in parallel with the linear motion direction. The bevel tooth portion 834a is not formed over the entire circumference, but is formed over 3/4 circumference (approximately 270 degrees) required for operation.

The cylindrical protruding portion 834b has a female screw formed on the inner peripheral side, and by screwing a fastening screw inserted through the insertion holes 874, 884 of the decorative members 870, 880, the decorative members 870, 880 are attached. It functions to fasten and fix to the rotating member 834, and the details will be described later.

The outer rotating member 840 includes a cylindrical main body portion 841 and a plurality of (five in this embodiment) extending radially outward at positions where the circumference of the main body portion 841 is equally divided into five in the circumferential direction. , a gear tooth 843 formed on the outer peripheral side along the circumference of the rear end of the main body 841, and a diameter of the main body 841 that can enter the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. and a detected portion 844 extending outward.

The extended arm portion 842 has a cylindrical portion 842a extending parallel to the central axis of the main body portion 841. A female screw is formed on the inner peripheral side of the cylindrical portion 842a. By screwing a fastening screw into the internal thread while the cylindrical portion 842 a is inserted through the side rod portion 851 , the intermediate arm member 850 is pivotally supported by the extended arm portion 842 so as not to fall off.

The gear teeth 843 are arranged so as to be able to mesh with the load response gear 865 of the drive transmission device 860, thereby functioning as a part for switching the presence or absence of rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840, details of which will be described later.

The intermediate arm member 850 is a member formed to be long, and includes a base end side rod portion 851 whose one end side is pivotally supported by the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840, and the base end side rod portion 851. A thickened portion 852 whose thickness is increased toward the front side on the end side, and a distal side rod portion 853 extending from the front side end portion of the thickened portion 852 in parallel with the longitudinal direction of the proximal side rod portion 851 . , and a rotation transmission portion 854 formed with gear teeth at the end of the tip side rod portion 853 .

The rotation transmitting portion 854 is a portion that interlocks with the direct-acting member 833 and the rotating member 834, and includes a supported hole 854a that is formed in a dimensional relationship that allows rotation with respect to each other while the cylindrical projecting portion 833a is inserted therethrough; A guide hole 854b, which is an arc-shaped elongated hole centered on the supported hole 854a and guides the cylindrical projecting portion 833b while it is inserted, and a bevel gear whose central axis is the supported hole 854a. and a bevel tooth portion 854c that is formed in a shape and meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 to form a bevel gear.

The drive transmission device 860 includes a drive motor 861 that is fastened and fixed to the motor holding portion 814, a drive gear 862 that is fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 861, and a cylindrical protruding portion 815 that is rotatably supported and driven. A plurality of transmission gears 863 meshed so as to transmit driving force via gears 862, a central annular gear 864 meshed with the transmission gears 863, and a front side of the arrangement of the central annular gear 864. A pair of load response gears 865 that are displaced and pivotally supported by the double cylinder projecting portion 816 so as not to fall off, and the back side of the load response gear 865 is supported by the double cylinder of the double cylinder projecting portion 816. and a torque limiter 866 whose resistance is variable according to the rotational load applied to the load response gear 865 .

The central annular gear 864 is formed in an annular shape, is designed so that the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 can be inserted through its inner peripheral side, and is recessed so that it can be placed in the recessed portion 831c of the inner rotating member 830. A transmission protrusion 864a protruding from the bottom plate portion toward the front side in an arrangement and shape corresponding to the setting portion 831c, and a bottom plate having a coaxial double ring shape disposed on the inner and outer diameter sides of the transmission protrusion 864a. and a support annular portion 864b protruding from the portion toward the front side.

In the assembled state, the rear end of the main body portion 831 of the inner rotary member 830 is intermediately fitted in the gap between the support annular portions 864b in a state where the transmission protrusion 864a is inserted into the recessed portion 831c. Or they are fitted in a dimensional relationship of interference fit. Thereby, the central ring gear 864 and the inner rotating member 830 can be rotated integrally.

The arrangement of the concave portion 831c and the transmission protrusion 864a is not limited at all. For example, they may be arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction, or may be arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction.

If they are equidistant, they can be assembled without considering the attitude of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 by aligning the positions of the transmission protrusion 864a and the recessed portion 831c. can be done. As in this embodiment, when the shapes of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are symmetrical in the direction of rotation (same at 72-degree intervals), the postures of the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 are Equal spacing is effective because it is thought that there is little effect due to the shift during assembly.

If the intervals are unequal, the number of man-hours for assembling after aligning the posture of the central annular gear 864 with respect to the inner rotary member 830 is increased by one, but the transmission protrusion 864a to the recessed portion 831c is not installed. The arrangement can be used to align the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 .

The load response gear 865 is arranged to mesh with the gear teeth 843 of the outer rotating member 840 . Due to the torque limiter 866 engaging the load responsive gear 865, the rotational resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864 and the outer rotating member 840 causes the load responsive gear It is configured to switch between a state in which the rotation of 865 is permitted and a state in which it is restricted (restricted).

That is, the torque limiter 866 functions as a so-called safety clutch, and is configured to disconnect and cancel transmission of driving force when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied. In the present embodiment, a device (one-way torque limiter) for transmitting a driving force in one direction is configured as a set in which the transmission direction is reversed, and switching of drive transmission by the torque limiter 866 can be performed in both directions with good responsiveness. It is configured as follows.

62 is an exploded front perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800, and FIG. 63 is an exploded rear perspective view of part of the configuration of the third operation unit 800. FIG. 62 and 63 show the decorative portion of the third motion unit 800 and omit the illustration of the portion for configuring the displacement.

As shown in FIGS. 62 and 63, the third operating unit 800 includes the inner rotating member 830 described above, and a cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the inner rotating member 830 that is fastened and fixed to one of the cylindrical projecting portions 834b. A first decorative member 870 that covers the side surface, and a second decorative member 880 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b and covers the cylindrical projecting portion 834b from the opposite side surface of the first decorative member 870. .

The first decorative member 870 includes a first frame portion 871 that is fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a first covering portion 875 that covers one side of the first frame portion 871. , provided.

The first skeleton portion 871 is entirely plated and configured to easily reflect light.

The inside of the frame of the first covering portion 875 is made of a colorless and light-transmitting resin material, and figures, patterns, and character patterns (hereinafter also referred to as “patterns, etc.”) are drawn on the surface. When the front side faces the front side, the player is made to visually recognize the pattern or the like.

In the present embodiment, independent patterns or the like are drawn on each of the plurality (five) of the first covering portions 875 . Therefore, by changing the first covering portion 875 that emits strong light under the light emission control by the illumination board 823 or by changing the arrangement of the first covering portion 875, the pattern that attracts the player's attention can be changed. can let

For example, the third symbol display device 81 executes a display effect to draw attention to which first covering portion 875 stops on the side of the third symbol display device 81 from the player's line of sight. is controlled to rotate, it is possible to continuously change the first covering portion 875 on the side of the third symbol display device 81 along with the rotation. line of sight can be focused on the first covering portion 875 .

The second decorative member 880 includes a second skeleton portion 881 formed to be fastened and fixed to the cylindrical projecting portion 834b, and a second covering portion 885 formed to cover the other side of the second skeleton portion 881. , provided.

The second skeleton portion 881 includes a holding piece 881a for holding the magnet Mg2 housed in the second covering portion 885 so as not to fall off.

A metal screw is screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 at a position (close position) where the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 housed in the adjacent second covering portion 885 acts. By attracting the magnet Mg2 to the screw, the integrity of the second covering portion 885 can be ensured in the combined state (particularly, one combined state, see FIG. 32).

The second covering portion 885 has a figure, a pattern, or a character pattern (hereinafter also referred to as “pattern etc.”) drawn on the surface, and when the surface faces the front side, the pattern etc. make people see.

In the present embodiment, a pattern or the like drawn on a plurality (five in this embodiment) of the second covering portions 885 is a set of a plurality (at least two, maximum five) of the second covering portions 885. Each of the second covering portions 885 is arranged in a circular shape so that when the five second covering portions 885 are combined, they are visually recognized as a “circular body” in a front view. It is decorated to form a part of the body.

Although the pattern or the like drawn on the second covering portion 885 is not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the contents grasped from the second covering portion 885 in the one united state are the rotation direction of the second decorative member 880. It is designed as a pattern that does not cause a big difference even if the arrangement of the is different. In other words, the design is such that the pattern does not have a clear top, bottom, left, and right, and the change in the outer shape is inconspicuous even when it is rotated (in this embodiment, it is circular).

Therefore, if the plurality of second covering parts 885 can be firmly integrated, the effect performance when the second covering parts 885 are visually recognized by the player can be improved. In this respect, in the present embodiment, the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 strongly integrates the second covering portion 885 in the combined state. It is possible to improve the performance performance in the state.

In each second covering portion 885, a magnet Mg2 is arranged on one side in the width direction, and a metal screw is screwed and fixed on the other side. When the direction of the second covering portion 885 is reversed back and forth by a switching rotation operation, which will be described later, the arrangement of the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw is also reversed when viewed from the front.

Even in this case, the metal screws attracted by the magnets Mg2 are merely replaced by the metal screws screwed into and fixed to the second covering portion 885 adjacent to the opposite side. Since the portion 885 is arranged in an annular shape, there is no change in the degree of attraction when integrated.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the first covering portion 875 does not contain a magnet. As a result, the strength of the integration on the side of the first covering portion 875 is slightly weakened, but this avoids a decrease in performance performance.

That is, since independent patterns and the like are drawn on the first covering portion 875, the degree of integration in the combined state is weak, and even if the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 is slightly deviated, the game can be played. There is no possibility that the pattern or the like that the person visually recognizes cannot be recognized. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the deterioration of the rendering performance of the rendering using the pattern or the like drawn on the first covering portion 875 .

Furthermore, since the strength of the integration on the first covering portion 875 side is weakened, vibration caused by (stopping from) up-and-down displacement, and rotational displacement (stopping from) as integral rotation operation and switching rotation operation ), the arrangement of the united first covering portions 875 can be shifted. As a result, the first covering portion 875 can be displaced in a displacement manner that cannot be realized in a conventional machine in which the first covering portion 875 is not a divided body but a single circular member. The rendering effect of rendering by the covering portion 875 can be improved.

In view of the above circumstances, in the combined state in which the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged close to each other, the state in which the first decorative member 870 faces the front side is also called the individually combined state (see FIG. 31), and the second decorative member 880 faces the front side. is also called a one-confederate state (see FIG. 32). Next, the operation for switching between the individual coalesced state and the single coalesced state will be described.

Figures 64(a), 64(b), 65(a) and 65(b) are rear views of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and Figures 66(a) and 66(b). ), FIGS. 67( a ) and 67 ( b ) are front views of the outer rotary member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850 .

64 to 67, the driving force of the driving motor 861 (see FIG. 60) is transmitted, and the inner rotating member 830 rotates relative to the outer rotating member 840, thereby displacing the intermediate arm member 850. are shown in chronological order.

64(a) and 66(a), the inner rotary member 830 is shown rotating by 45 degrees from the individually combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)). .

64 to 67, the axis of the metal rod 832 is indicated as a virtual position line 832F, and the angular change in the arrangement of this virtual position line 832F corresponds to the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830. FIG. The rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830 from the individually combined state (FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)) is illustrated by angle θ31.

As shown in FIGS. 64 to 67, when the inner rotating member 830 rotates counterclockwise in front view (see FIG. 66) from the individually combined state (this rotating operation is hereinafter also referred to as “switching rotating operation”), the intermediate Since the arm member 850 is allowed to rotate, the inner rotating member 830 is allowed to rotate relative to the outer rotating member 840 . In this embodiment, the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in position by the resistance of the torque limiter 866 (see FIG. 60), and only the inner rotating member 830 rotates.

64 to 67, the arrangement of the cylindrical portion 842a is maintained, and the intermediate arm member 850 is rotationally displaced around the cylindrical portion 842a of the outer rotating member 840. FIG.

From the configuration between the members described above, the imaginary position line 832F is a straight line passing through the center of the supported hole 854a, and the cylindrical projecting portion 833a of the linear motion member 833 is fastened and fixed to the supported hole 854a. A change in the position of the supported hole 854 a corresponds to a change in the position of the direct-acting member 833 .

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the rotation transmitting portion 854 is displaced in the radial direction about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and at the same time is displaced in the circumferential direction. The member 834 similarly displaces radially about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830 and, at the same time, displaces circumferentially. That is, in the switching rotation operation, the linear motion member 833 is displaced by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction while being displaced in the radial direction.

Since the switching rotation operation includes displacement in the circumferential direction, the arrangement of the linear motion member 833, the rotary member 834, and the decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed thereto is not fixed even at the radial end position. Therefore, compared to the case where the displacement is completed only by the linear motion displacement in the radial direction (for example, the reversal motion described above in the second motion unit 700), the effect during the switching rotation motion can be improved. can be kept high.

On the other hand, in the reversing operation described above in the second operation unit 700, by generating a rotating operation with high acceleration using the elastic recovery force of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 58), , the placement of the covering member 787 at the linear movement direction outer displacement end (see FIG. 59(b)) is intended to weaken the fixed impression.

That is, by delaying the start of rotation of the covering member 787 and not delaying the end of rotation of the covering member 787, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is improved. Even in a situation where the period near the dead point of the slider crank continues, the rotation speed of the covering member 787 is increased to maintain a high rendering effect due to the operation of the covering member 787 .

Since the switching rotation includes displacement in the radial direction, a radial load is likely to be applied from the intermediate arm member 850 to the outer rotating member 840, and there is a possibility that the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 will deviate. In the embodiment, the loads in the radial direction of the intermediate arm member 850 similarly occur at equal intervals (72 degree intervals) around the axis of rotation, so that the loads cancel each other out. As a result, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840, so that the switching rotation operation can be easily performed normally.

In this way, the radial displacement (enlargement/reduction displacement) in the rotational movement of the third operating unit 800 occurs with rotation in the circumferential direction. Therefore, in order to avoid collisions with surrounding decorative members, the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800 is performed by determining the posture of the lifting arm member 801 when the third operation unit 800 is in the overhanging state. It is controlled so that it can be executed in the state determined by the output of the sensor.

In addition, along with the above-described displacement of the rotation transmission portion 854, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 also move radially about the rotation axis of the inner rotating member 830. displaced and, at the same time, displaced in the circumferential direction.

By rotationally displacing the intermediate arm member 850, the bevel tooth portion 854c (see FIGS. 66 and 67) meshes with the bevel tooth portion 834a (see FIG. 60) of the rotating member 834, and the rotating member 834 and the rotating member 834 are engaged. Decorative members 870 and 880 fastened and fixed to the member 834 rotate about the metal rod 832 .

The angle of this rotational displacement is proportional to the angle θ32 as the rotational angle of the intermediate arm member 850 with respect to the virtual position line 832F. In addition, the direction of rotation increases so that the angle θ32 moves away from the imaginary position line 832F in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front. ), and is set in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the radially outer side of the imaginary position line 832F.

Since the rotation member 834 assumes a posture in which either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 faces the front side in the integrally rotated state, the maximum angle θ31E (180 in this embodiment) is the maximum value of the angle θ31. degree), and the rotation angle of the intermediate arm member 850 becomes the maximum angle θ32E (90 degrees in this embodiment), the bevel tooth portion 834a of the rotating member 834 is rotated halfway (rotated 180 degrees). ).

That is, the rotation angle of the rotating member 834 around the metal rod 832 is twice the rotation angle around the supported hole 854a of the bevel tooth portion 854c.

Here, unlike the action of the magnet Mg of the second operation unit 700 described above, the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 (see FIG. 62) causes rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 around the metal rod 832. It does not produce an action that delays rotation with respect to

That is, the magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the adjacent second decorative member 880, and the decorative member 880 is displaced radially outward along the metal rod 832 as the intermediate arm member 850 rotates. As a result, a gap is generated between the second decorative members 880 adjacent to each other, and the adsorption force may be lost.

Therefore, before the rotational displacement about the metal rod 832 starts, the attracting force of the magnet Mg2 is lost. No retarding effect occurs.

Therefore, the driving force required to rotationally displace the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced. That is, since the driving force required for the drive motor 861 can be reduced, the size of the drive motor 861 can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be quickly started and terminated early, the player's attention to the rotational displacement about the metal bar 832 can be reduced.

The quickness at the start of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is also maintained by configuring the rotational angle of the decorative members 870 and 880 with respect to the rotational angle of the inner rotational member 830 to be different.

For example, in the process of rotating the intermediate arm member 850, the rotation angle of the virtual position line 832F (the rotation angle of the inner rotating member 830) from the state in which the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged with a reduced diameter and can be rotated together is 45 degrees. , the angle θ32 is 18 degrees (see FIG. 66(b)), and the angle θ32 is 27 degrees when the virtual position line 832F is rotated by an angle of 45 degrees (FIG. 67(a) reference).

That is, the angle θ32 is designed to be smaller on the rotation start side of the inner rotating member 830 from the state in which the integral rotation operation is possible than during rotation. As a result, the degree of rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880 can be suppressed when the inner rotating member 830 starts rotating.

The driving force of the driving motor 861 is used for rotating the inner rotating member 830, rotating the intermediate arm member 850, and rotating the ornamental members 870 and 880. Since the driving force required for rotating the decorative members 870 and 880 can be reduced when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate from the possible state, the load applied to the drive motor 861 when the inner rotating member 830 starts to rotate is not excessive. You can avoid getting bigger.

In addition, since the decorative members 870 and 880 are rotationally displaced around the metal rod 832 while being displaced in the circumferential direction when viewed from the front, the visibility of the decorative members 870 and 880 during rotational displacement can be kept low. can. This makes it possible to reduce the possibility that the side portions of the decorative members 870 and 880 (for example, the connecting surfaces between the first covering portion 875 and the second covering portion 885) are visible. The degree of freedom in designing the side portion of the can be improved.

During the switching rotation operation, the middle arm member 850 overlaps the adjacent middle arm member 850 in a front view. In addition, the arrangement of the extended arm portion 842 adjacent to the extended arm portion 842 on which the cylindrical portion 842a on which the self is supported is arranged overlaps. Therefore, without countermeasures, the intermediate arm member 850 may collide with surrounding parts.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, collision is avoided by shifting the configuration of the intermediate arm member 850 forward and backward for each part. That is, by arranging the distal side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the proximal side rod portion 851 of the intermediate arm member 850, the proximal side rod portion 851 and the distal side rod portion 851 are arranged on the rear side. The rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 can be overlapped in the front and rear, and collision can be avoided during the switching rotation operation.

Further, by arranging the base end side rod portion 851 on the front side of the extension arm portion 842 and the distal end side rod portion 853 and the rotation transmission portion 854 on the rear side of the extension arm portion 842, switching rotation operation can be performed. In this case, the intermediate arm member 850 can be arranged in front of and behind the extended arm portion 842, and collision between the intermediate arm member 850 and the extended arm portion 842 can be avoided.

64 to 67, the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 with respect to the outer rotating member 840 is the direction that allows the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (the counterclockwise direction in front view in the individually combined state, see FIG. 66). ) is explained. In this case, the gear teeth 843 are meshed with the load response gear 865 that generates resistance via the torque limiter 866, so that resistance is received, and the rotational displacement of the outer rotating member 840 is limited.

On the other hand, when the rotation direction of the inner rotating member 830 is the opposite direction (clockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individually combined state), or in a direction allowing rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 (counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front in the individually combined state). When the intermediate arm member 850 continues to rotate in the same direction even after reaching a state in which rotation is restricted due to rotation in the rotational direction (for example, reaching from the individually combined state to the single united state), the outer A load exceeding the allowable value of the torque limiter 866 that regulates the rotation of the rotating member 840 is applied to the load response gear 865 , and the attitude maintenance of the load response gear 865 by the torque limiter 866 is released, and the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are released. and rotate synchronously.

In other words, when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted regardless of the direction of rotation, the inner rotating member 830 is driven to rotate in the direction in which the restriction of rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is continued. , the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 rotate synchronously, and the intermediate arm member 850, the first ornamental member 870 and the second ornamental member 880 rotate together while maintaining their combined state (this rotating operation will be referred to as " (Also referred to as "integral rotation operation").

The integral rotation operation occurs when the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted. In this embodiment, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are arranged close to each other and are combined.

Therefore, unlike the switching rotation motion in which the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced in the radial expansion direction, there is no need to consider the collision with the surrounding decorative members, so the third motion unit 800 waits for the effect. A co-rotating motion can be performed in the state. Therefore, in this embodiment, the co-rotation motion is feasibly controlled regardless of the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 .

In the present embodiment, as described above, the driving force of a single drive motor 861 (see FIG. 60) causes the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to undergo a switching rotation movement accompanied by displacement in the radial expansion direction, and an expansion motion. integral rotation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 without radial displacement. However, it is not possible to immediately perform any action in any direction of rotation.

For example, from the states shown in FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a), the switching rotation operation can be executed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. Rotating motion can be performed, and integral rotating motion can be performed by rotating the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front. cannot be executed.

Further, for example, after the inner rotating member 830 is rotated counterclockwise in front view from the state shown in FIGS. When the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise (counterclockwise) when viewed from the front, the switching rotation operation is executed again, and the integral rotation operation cannot be immediately performed clockwise when viewed from the front. Can not.

As described above, the operation mode of the third operation unit 800 of this embodiment depends on whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the drive motor 861 is restricted or permitted. The relative displacement of inner rotating member 830 and outer rotating member 840 changes.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) determines whether the displacement of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted or permitted for each rotation direction of the drive motor 861. The drive motor 861 can be driven and controlled in an appropriate driving direction based on the determination result. An example of drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described below.

FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing the arrangement of the lifting arm member 801, the drive mode of the drive motor 861, and an example of the output of the detection sensor 813 in chronological order. As shown in FIG. 68, the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) is controlled to alternately repeat the normal effect and the reverse effect as the effect control of the third operation unit 800. FIG.

During the reversal performance, an operation including the switching rotation operation is executed, and during the normal performance, an operation not including the switching rotation operation is executed. This is to avoid collision between the decorative members 870 and 880 and surrounding decorative members during the switching rotation operation.

For the same purpose, when the power is turned on again after a sudden power outage or when the power is turned on first thing in the morning, the rotation control of the drive motor 861 is executed after the third operation unit 800 is set in the extended state. , after grasping the state of the movable portion from the output of the detection sensor 813, control is performed so as to execute the control during the normal presentation. As a result, even if the state of the movable portion cannot be grasped from the output result of the detection sensor 813 when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from erroneously colliding with the surrounding decorative members. .

Forward rotation and reverse rotation are described as the driving direction of the drive motor 861 . The forward rotation in FIG. 68 corresponds to a drive mode in which the inner rotating member 830 is rotated clockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode in which the integral rotation is immediately performed in the individually combined state (see FIG. 66(a))). The reverse rotation at 68 corresponds to a drive mode that rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front (a drive mode that immediately executes the switching rotation operation in the individually combined state).

First, the drive control during the normal effect before reaching the time of the reversal effect will be described. During this normal effect, the third operation unit 800 is in the individual combined state, and the drive motor 861 is stopped or only forward rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotating motions of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are always integrally rotating motions.

Since the switching rotation motion does not occur, collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 can be switched between the presentation standby state and the projecting state at any timing. For example, by driving the driving motor 861 while the held member 810 is vertically displaced by the vertical movement of the lifting arm member 801, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are integrally rotated simultaneously with the vertical movement. It is controlled so that it can also cause motion.

Of course, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 may rotate together while the elevation arm member 801 is fixed. The lifting operation of the lifting arm member 801 may be performed while the integral rotation is stopped.

Since the driving direction of the drive motor 861 is only forward rotation, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched every time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the switching of this output can be determined. , the sound ramp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 as the initial position. can be controlled to stop at the posture of

Next, drive control at the time of reversal effect will be described. First, during the reversal effect, the lifting arm member 801 is displaced downward, and the third motion unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue forward rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the driving motor 861 is driven in reverse rotation. By driving the reverse rotation, the switching rotation operation is performed in the third operation unit 800. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. be.

If the drive motor 861 continues to be driven in the same rotational direction, the united state is reached, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are rotated together. After the integral rotation operation is started, the outer rotating member 840 also starts to rotate in conjunction with the inner rotating member 830, so the detected portion 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 .

After the integral rotation operation is started, the drive motor 861 is stopped, or only reverse rotation drive control is executed. Therefore, the rotating motions of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 are always integrally rotating motions. Since the switching rotation motion does not occur, collision with the surrounding decorative members cannot occur, and the arrangement of the third motion unit 800 can be switched between the presentation standby state and the projecting state at any timing.

Since the drive motor 861 only rotates in the reverse direction, each time the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched, and the sound lamp control device 113 (Fig. 4) can determine the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 .

When switching from the reversal performance to the normal performance, the elevating arm member 801 is displaced downward in advance, and the third operation unit 800 is brought into an overhanging state. In this state, the drive motor 861 is controlled to continue reverse rotation until the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 .

When it is determined that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by switching the output of the detection sensor 813, the drive motor 861 is driven in forward rotation. By driving the forward rotation, the switching rotation operation is performed in the third operation unit 800. During this time, the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 is restricted by the resistance of the torque limiter 866, so the output of the detection sensor 813 is maintained. be.

Then, the integral rotation motion of the first decoration member 870 and the second decoration member 880 is performed. After the integral rotation operation is started, the portion to be detected 844 is retracted from the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 by the outer rotation member 840 starting to rotate, and the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched. That is, the sound lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the integral rotation operation of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 has started by switching the output of the detection sensor 813 .

After the integral rotation operation is started, the normal presentation is performed again. The restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect are the same as the restrictions on the drive control during the normal effect which are arranged before the reversal effect described above.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the single detection sensor 813 is used to determine switching of the rotation mode of the third operation unit 800 (integral rotation operation or switching rotation operation) and to determine the rotation angle of the outer rotating member 840. It can also be used for the determination of the reference. Therefore, the required number of detection sensors 813 can be reduced as compared with the case where individual detection sensors are used for each determination.

As described above, the switching rotation operation can be executed by switching the driving direction of the drive motor 861 to the opposite direction from the state where the integral rotation operation is continued or the rotation is stopped. That is, regardless of the posture of the first decorative member 870 in the individually combined state, the switching rotation operation can be performed to switch to the single combined state.

Therefore, when performing control to switch to the one union state at the timing of the announcement of the big win in the action presentation, it is possible to avoid the player's prediction of the presence or absence of the announcement of the big win from the attitude of the first decoration member 870.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, the decoration in the one union state is designed so that the content grasped by the player does not differ greatly depending on the arrangement of the second decoration member 880 in the rotational direction, as described above. That is, even if the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged differently in the direction of rotation at the start of the switching rotation operation, the content perceived by the player as a united state at the end of the switching rotation operation is the same. can do.

Therefore, unlike the case where the patterns in the single united state are arranged differently in the rotational direction, the integral rotation operation for matching the posture after reaching the single united state can be omitted, so the first decorative member in the individually united state. Regardless of the posture of 870, the drive control up to the jackpot announcement can be the same.

As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to realize both the switching rotation operation and the integrated rotation operation in both forward rotation and reverse rotation as the drive direction of the drive motor 861 . Therefore, compared to the case where the operation mode is fixed between forward rotation and reverse rotation, a wide variety of presentation modes can be realized with the single drive motor 861. FIG.

69 is a cross-sectional view of the third operating unit 800 taken along line LXIX-LXIX in FIG. 28. FIG. As shown in FIG. 69, the opening of the cylindrical portion 821 of the fixed cylindrical member 820 penetrates from the rear end portion where the cylindrical fixed portion 812 of the held member 810 is arranged to the front end portion where the electrical board 823 is arranged. The electrical wiring is guided through this opening from the rear end to the front end, and the terminals are connected to the connector arranged on the electrical board 823 . Electricity is conducted through this electrical wiring, and the LEDs arranged on the electrical board 823 are configured to be capable of controlling light emission.

The light LH1 emitted from the inner light-emitting portion 823a of the decorative electrical board 823 acts to illuminate the bulging portion 824a that bulges toward the front side on the central side of the translucent decorative member 824. As shown in FIG. The bulging portion 824a functions as a portion visible to the player at the center of the circle around which the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880 is arranged when the decorative members 870 and 880 are combined. do.

The light LD1 emitted from the outer light-emitting portion 823b of the electrical decoration substrate 823 is emitted to the inside of the decorative members 870, 880 (the first decorative member 870 in FIG. 69) arranged on the front side, and the decorative members 870, 880 Acts to illuminate from within.

In this embodiment, it is possible to switch between an individually combined state (see FIG. 69) in which the decorative member 870 is arranged on the front side and a combined state (see FIG. 32) in which the decorative member 880 is arranged on the front side. Therefore, it is possible to switch between illuminating the decorative member 870 and illuminating the decorative member 880 with the light LD1.

In the individually united state (see FIG. 69), the plated portion 871a of the first skeleton portion 871 reflects the light to the front side, thereby switching the direction of the light LD1 to the front side. As a result, most of the light LD1 can be emitted toward the first covering portion 875, and the brightness of the first covering portion 875 can be favorably increased when the light LD1 is emitted.

Here, in this embodiment, the electrical decoration substrate 823 is fixedly arranged, and the decoration members 870 and 880 are configured to rotate around it. The placement relationship can be changed by rotation of the decorative members 870,880. For example, if the center of the plated portion 871a is irradiated with the light LD1 during rotation, the light LD1 emitted from the same LED may be irradiated at a position shifted from the center of the plated portion 871a. obtain. Therefore, without countermeasures, the degree of brightness of the first covering portion 875 by the light LD1 is likely to change due to the rotation of the decorative members 870 and 880, and the decorative members 870 and 880 are integrally rotated while emitting light with a constant brightness. There is a possibility that it will be difficult to execute the production to make

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the plated portion 871a capable of reflecting the light LD1 has a concave shape, and the radius of curvature of this concave shape is formed to be smaller than the radius of the decorative substrate 823. and its center is designed to be located near the center of the first covering portion 875 when viewed from the front.

Since the light LD1 is arranged so that the optical axis is oriented in the outer diameter direction of the circle in which the outer light emitting portion 823b is arranged, the light LD1 is reflected by the concave shape of the plating portion 871a, so that the center of the radius of curvature of the plated portion 871a It moves toward the side and illuminates the vicinity of the center of each first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 .

Therefore, regardless of the arrangement of the plating part 871a with reference to the outer light emitting part 823b, the plurality of lights LD1 can be reflected so as to illuminate the vicinity of the center of the first covering part 875. FIG. As a result, the vicinity of the center of the front plate portion of the first covering portion 875 can be stably irradiated with light, so that the first covering portion 875 can be visually recognized with uniform brightness even during integral rotation. be able to.

Further, the first skeleton portion 871 is a portion to be plated in the same manner as the plated portion 871a. Prepare. The light LD1 is reflected by the outer plating portion 871b as well as the plating portion 871a. The degree of light can be weakened.

This avoids a situation in which the intensity of the light seen outside the first covering part 875 is too strong, the player feels dazzled, and the visibility inside the frame of the first covering part 875 is lowered. be able to.

The electrical board 823 is sandwiched between the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the front and back, but the joints are not completely closed, so that all the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b is emitted to the inner side. is not irradiated to

First, the internal structure is visible in FIG. A gap VA1 of a certain degree is formed. Since the outer plated portion 871b protrudes outside the frame of the first covering portion 875 through the gap VA1, the light LD1 passing through the gap VA1 can be reflected by the outer plated portion 871b.

In addition, between the member outer end portion 875b of the first covering portion 875 and the member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885, which is arranged to face the metal rod 832, there is no member interference with the metal rod 832. A large gap VA2 is formed that exceeds the area required to avoid

First, the gap VA2 avoids collision between the metal rod 832 and the decorative members 870 and 880, thereby ensuring a sufficient length of the metal rod 832. It is formed for the purpose of ensuring the function of guiding the linear motion displacement of the member 834 .

Secondly, the gap VA2 is a fastening screw that is inserted through the frame portions 871 and 881, and is screwed into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b of the rotating member 834, thereby connecting the decorative members 870 and 880 to the rotating member 834. It is formed for the purpose of securing an assembly path for a fastening screw for fastening and fixing.

Furthermore, the gap VA2 is formed thirdly for the purpose of ensuring a path for light that has passed through the transparent portions of the skeleton portions 871 and 881 to travel. Since the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at equal intervals on the circumference, the light traveling outward through the gap VA passes through the equally-spaced positions on the circumference and travels radially from the center of the circle. It is seen as a light that

Therefore, by integrally rotating the decorative members 870 and 880, the light passing through the gap VA2 can also be rotated. This makes it unnecessary to control the lighting mode of the light from the outer light emitting portion 823b (for example, while continuing full lighting), while the light emitted radially from the rotation center of the third operation unit 800 is emitted. It is possible to execute a light emitting effect that is visually recognized in a rotating light emitting mode.

In the united state (see FIG. 32), the entire second skeleton portion 881 is made of a translucent resin material, thereby suppressing the second skeleton portion 881 from reflecting the light LD1.

As a result, it is possible to irradiate the frame of the second covering portion 885 with the light (weak light) of the light LD1 that is distant from the optical axis. can be weakened. On the other hand, since the light in the optical axis direction of the light LD1 passes through the gap VA2, the intensity of the light radially emitted from the center of rotation of the third operation unit 800 can be increased.

The frame of the second covering portion 885 is formed of a colored (in this embodiment, an arbitrary color is set as the color of the circular body) and light-transmitting resin material, and light diffusion processing is formed on the inside. A light diffusing decorative portion 885c is arranged along the circumference. Therefore, of the light LD1, the light incident on the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is refracted, and the light diffusion decorative portion 885c as a whole acts to emit surface light.

This surface emission makes it possible to homogenize the light visually recognized through the light diffusion decorative portions 885c arranged in the circumferential direction. 885c can produce an effect that is integrally visible to the player.

Here, as described above, it is possible to improve the rendering performance when the player visually recognizes the second covering portions 885 by firmly integrating the plurality of second covering portions 885 together. This integration can be performed by visually recognizing that the light diffusion decorative portion 885c is continuously connected in the circumferential direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the rendering performance in the combined state when the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side.

The member outer end portion 885b of the second covering portion 885 is formed in a concave shape facing the metal rod 832. , projecting toward the first decorative member 870 with respect to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged.

As a result, when the third action unit 800 is obliquely viewed in the one union state (see FIG. 32), the first covering portion 875 of the first decorative member 870 arranged on the back side is visible to the player. The degree of entry can be lowered, and the influence on the performance can be reduced.

Accordingly, when the frame portion of the first covering portion 875 and the frame portion of the second covering portion 885 are colored in different colors, the second covering portion 885 is arranged on the front side. At times, it is possible to make it easier to prevent the color of the first covering portion 875 from entering the field of vision.

In particular, when the third operation unit 800 alone is in the extended state in the one united state (see FIG. 32), compared to the case where both the other operation units 600 and 700 are in the extended state (see FIG. 32). 33, F9), there are many gaps around the third operation unit 800, and it is easy for a line of sight to see the third operation unit 800 from an oblique direction. Therefore, if no countermeasures are taken, the side of the third operation unit 800 is visible, which tends to reduce the presentation effect.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the end surface 885b1 of the second covering portion 885 is arranged rearward from the center of the front-to-rear width of the side surface in the one united state, so the third operation when viewed obliquely. Even if the side surface of the unit 800 is visible, most of the side surface can be viewed as the second covering portion 885, and the visibility of the first covering portion 875 can be reduced. As a result, the second covering portion 885 can be seen more easily than the first covering portion 875 in the one union state, and the presentation effect can be improved.

In the switching rotation operation for switching between the individually combined state and the united state, the driving force of the driving motor 861 is transmitted to the inner rotating member 830, so that the inner rotating member 830 rotates, while the outer rotating member 840 acts as a torque limiter. A load from 866 stops the rotation.

Although the contact area is reduced by the sliding protrusion 831b, the load transmitted to the outer rotating member 840 increases when the inner rotating member 830 itself has a large rotational resistance. Inevitably, the allowable value of the load transmission of the torque limiter 866 is likely to be hindered.

Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation resistance of the inner rotating member 830 can be suppressed. Therefore, the present embodiment has the following features. For example, the support points between the inner rotary member 830 and the fixed cylindrical member 820 related to the rotation are only the front end that contacts the sliding member 825 and the rear end that is supported by the central annular gear 864. , and other portions are configured to leave a gap. Thereby, the contact area between the fixed cylindrical member 820 and the inner rotating member 830 can be reduced, and the displacement resistance can be easily reduced.

For example, since the inner rotating member 830 is not fastened and fixed to the central annular gear 864, it is considered necessary to provide a stopper to suppress forward displacement with respect to the central annular gear 864. A sliding member 825 serves as this stopper. That is, the sliding member 825 can receive a load from the inner rotating member 830 in the direction of pushing forward, but the front surface of the sliding member 825 is in contact with the short-diameter annular portion 822a of the circular plate portion 822 in the front-rear direction. touch.

The short-diameter annular portion 822a is disposed on the rear surface side of the circular plate portion 822 as an annular protrusion having an outer diameter approximately equal to the outer diameter of the sliding member 825, and has a semicircular cross section at its outermost diameter portion. A protrusion 822b protruding to the side is formed in an annular shape.

Since the ridge portion 822b abuts on the front surface of the sliding member 825 in the front-rear direction, the contact area can be reduced compared to the case where the sliding member 825 and the entire rear surface of the short-diameter annular portion 822a are in contact with each other. can be done. Thereby, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830 in the rotating direction can be reduced.

In addition, since no fastening screw is used between the inner rotating member 830 and the central annular gear 864, the displacement resistance of the inner rotating member 830, which is assumed when the weight of the fastening screw increases, is reduced accordingly. can be done.

Fixing of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 will be described. 62 and 63 will be referred to when explaining this fixation.

The fixing of the first decorative member 870 to the rotating member 834 is performed by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 872 of the first skeleton portion 871 into a female screw of a fastened portion 876 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the first covering portion 875 . After the first covering portion 875 is fastened and fixed to the first skeleton portion 871 by screwing it into, the overhanging portion 873 projecting from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the first skeleton portion 871 is This can be done by inserting a fastening screw into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted on the outside) and inserting it through the insertion hole 874 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

The fixing of the second decorative member 880 to the rotating member 834 is accomplished by inserting a fastening screw that is inserted through the insertion hole 882 of the second skeleton portion 881 into a female screw of a fastening portion 886 formed at the rear portion of the frame of the second covering portion 885 . After the second covering portion 885 is fastened and fixed to the second frame portion 881 by screwing it into the second frame portion 881, the projecting portion 883 projecting from the end of the semicircular recessed portion of the second frame portion 881 is This can be done by inserting a fastening screw into the recessed groove 833d (slidably fitted on the outside) and inserting it through the insertion hole 884 into the cylindrical projecting portion 834b.

In this manner, the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 can be fastened and fixed to the rotary member 834, and the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 870 can be fixed together as the rotary member 834 is linearly displaced or rotationally displaced. Member 880 can be configured for linear displacement or rotational displacement.

In the process of fixing, the projecting portions 873 and 883 enter the recessed groove 833d of the linear motion member 833, thereby disposing the skeleton portions 871 and 881 on the linear motion member 833 (positioning of the metal rod 832 in the longitudinal direction). ) are defined, and the skeleton portions 871 and 881 can be prevented from falling off from the direct-acting member 833 .

Since the skeletal portions 871 and 881 are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834, the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the linear motion member 833 (arrangement in the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832) is similarly defined, and the rotating member 834 is rotated. It is possible to prevent the member 834 from falling off from the direct-acting member 833 .

As described above, in this embodiment, when the rotary member 834 is assembled to the linear motion member 833 , the portions that define the arrangement of the rotary member 834 on the linear motion member 833 are fixed to the rotary member 834 . , unlike the case where the portion that defines the arrangement on the direct-acting member 833 is formed on the rotary member 834 itself, the man-hours for assembly and disassembly can be reduced.

That is, at the time of disassembly, for example, by removing the fastening screws that fasten and fix the frame portions 871 and 881 to the rotating member 834, the restriction on the arrangement of the frame portions 871 and 881 on the direct-acting member 833 can be released. In addition, it is possible to cancel the restriction on the arrangement of the rotating member 834 on the direct-acting member 833 . Thereby, working efficiency can be improved.

The combined operation of each operation unit 600 to 800 will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG. FIGS. 70(a) to 70(d) and FIGS. 71(a) to 71(d) are an operation unit 500 schematically explaining examples of combined operations of the operation units 600 to 800 in chronological order. It is a schematic front view of the. Note that FIGS. 33 to 35 will be referred to as appropriate in the description of FIGS. 70 and 71. FIG.

70 and 71, each rendering surface 661a to 661c of the first operation unit 600, each decorative surface 787a1, 787a2, 787b1, 787b2 of the second operation unit 700, and each covering portion 875, 885 of the third operation unit 800 The decoration in is schematically illustrated so as to be identifiable by letters or the like.

That is, on the first effect surface 661a, the characters "NORMAL" are written vertically, on the second effect surface 661b, the characters "ACTIVE" are written horizontally, and on the third effect surface 661c, the characters are written in the longitudinal direction. A "!" symbol is shown along each line.

In addition, the first main decorative surface 787a1 has the characters "Open War", the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 has the characters "Pinch is a chance", and the second main decorative surface 787b1 has the characters "Attack". are illustrated, and the second secondary decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated with the characters "Patience!?"

In addition, different alphanumeric characters (“I” to “V”) corresponding to different characters are shown inside the frame of the first covering portion 875, and on the second covering portion 885, five digits are integrated as “○”. ” symbols are shown.

In FIG. 70(a), each of the action units 600 to 800 is placed in the effect standby state (see FIG. 28). Above the second action unit 700, a first auxiliary decorative surface 787a2 is illustrated by imaginary lines as a surface that is invisible from the front view but visible from the player's line of sight.

Also, in FIG. 70(b), the first action unit 600 is in the intermediate effect state, the second action unit 700 is in the intermediate effect state, and the third action unit 800 is in the extended state.

By executing the integral rotation motion of the third operation unit 800, the first covering portions 875 of the first decorative members 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 can be replaced one after another. Further, by setting the first motion unit 600 to an intermediate effect state during the continuation of the integral rotation motion or after the stop, the third effect surface 661c is protruded inside the frame of the center frame 86, and the motion units 600 to 800 are moved. You can liven up your movements.

For example, when the third effect surface 661c is visible, by controlling the effect so as to increase the degree of expectation for a big win in the lottery, it is possible to improve the interest of the player who visually recognizes the operation of the first operation unit 600. can.

When the integral rotation motion is stopped, the decoration formed on the first main decorative surface 787a1 of the second operating unit 700 and the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operating unit 700 are displayed. can be viewed integrally.

As a result, it is possible to increase the attention to the first decorative member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700, and the display effect related to the decoration formed on the first decorative member 870 can be displayed by the third pattern display device. By returning the third action unit 800 to the effect waiting state while starting at 81 , the player's line of sight can be smoothly guided to the third pattern display device 81 .

The first decoration member 870 to be noticed is not limited to the first decoration member 870 arranged close to the second operation unit 700 . For example, by controlling the lighting pattern of the outer light emitting portion 823b (see FIG. 60) arranged to irradiate the first decorative member 870 with light, an LED that irradiates the light LD1 toward the first decorative member 870 to be noticed is turned on and other LEDs are turned off, it is possible to draw attention to an arbitrary first decorative member 870 .

At this time, the lighting pattern of the LEDs may be switched while the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870 is stopped, or the lighting pattern of the LEDs may be switched in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decoration member 870. .

When switching the lighting pattern of the LEDs in accordance with the integral rotation of the first decorative member 870, the LEDs to be lit are sequentially switched in the rotational direction so that the light and the first decorative member 870 are rotationally displaced along the coaxial circle. The player may be allowed to view the image as shown. In addition, the LEDs to be lit are fixed, and by utilizing the fact that the respective first decorative members 870 sequentially reach the positions where the light is emitted from the LEDs by integral rotation, the first decorations to which the light is emitted are arranged. The member 870 may be switched.

In the state shown in FIG. 70(a), both the second decoration rotating member 660 and the decoration fixing member 670 of the first operation unit 600 have vertically long decorations and can be visually recognized integrally. In particular, the front side surface of the decorative fixing member 670 is formed as a surface facing in an oblique direction in the same manner as the first rendering surface 661a in the standby state for rendering, thereby enhancing the effect of being visually recognized integrally.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the lower end of the second decorative rotating member 660 is displaced away from the decorative fixing member 670 in the course shown in FIG. Since the second decorative rotary member 660 of the unit 600 has a horizontally elongated decoration, the sense of unity with the decorative fixed member 670 is lowered, and the second operation unit 700 having a horizontally elongated decoration is used. can be viewed integrally with the covering member 787.

Although FIG. 35 shows the intermediate rendering state of the second motion unit 700, if the second motion unit 700 is in the extended state as shown in FIG. The vertical distance between the two decorative rotating members 660 is further reduced, and the integrally visible effect can be enhanced.

At this time, the overhanging decorative portion 652b is overhanging in a visible position, and the above-described effect of visually making the right edge of the third pattern display device 81 expand to the right from the region right end RE1 causes the third pattern display device 81 to expand. Even if the arrangement of the second performance surface 661b is close to the right edge, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling cramped.

In addition, this allows the player to visually recognize the second effect surface 661b as if it were arranged on the center side of the third symbol display device 81, similarly to the second main decoration surface 787b1. It is possible to enhance the effect that the surface 787b1 and the second effect surface 661b are viewed integrally.

In this case, by forming the decoration of the projecting decorative portion 652b with the contents related to the decoration of the second rendering surface 661b and the decoration of the second main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second The main decorative surface 787b1 (first main decorative surface 787a1), the second rendering surface 661b, and the projecting decorative portion 652b can be visually recognized integrally.

In FIGS. 70(c) and 70(d), the first action unit 600 and the third action unit 800 are in the effect waiting state, and the second action unit 700 is in the extended state. FIG. 70(d) shows the reversing operation of the second operating unit 700. In the extended state of the first operating unit 600, the second decoration rotating member 660 moves toward the left and right outside of the covering member 787 of the second operating unit 700. 59), the covering member 787 can be reversed even when the first operation unit 600 is in the extended state.

In the reversing operation of the covering member 787, the auxiliary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2, which are different on the left and right sides, are directed to the front side, so that it is possible to create a state in which there is no distinguishing power, as described above, as shown in FIG. In addition, different secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 may be combined so that the player can identify the contents.

According to FIG. 70(d), the player can identify the contents of "Pinch!?" Therefore, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second action unit 700 .

For example, when notifying that the lottery is lost, the state of FIG. 70(d) is controlled to return to FIG. In this case, the player's line of sight can be focused on the second action unit 700 by performing control such that the state shown in FIG.

In FIG. 71(a), the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 are in the extended state, and the third operation unit 800 is in the presentation standby state. Above the second action unit 700, a second auxiliary decorative surface 787b2 is illustrated by imaginary lines as a surface that is invisible from the front view but visible from the player's line of sight.

In the state shown in FIG. 71(a), the second effect surface 661b and the second main decorative surface 787b1 are arranged close to each other, and the characters written on them are both written horizontally. easy to let In addition, since the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of "attack activation", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In the rendering standby state (see FIG. 70(a)), the first motion unit 600 has the first rendering surface 661a and the decoration fixing member 670 arranged close to each other, and the characters written on them are both vertically written. Therefore, it is easy for the player to visually recognize them integrally. In addition, since the content is a content that makes a series of meanings of "normal time", it is even easier to visually recognize it integrally.

In this way, in this embodiment, the rendering surfaces 661a and 661b of the first action unit 600 are made integral with the side surfaces of different members (for example, the second main decorative surface 787b1 or the front surface of the decoration fixing member 670). Configure. As a result, the performance effect can be improved.

In FIGS. 71(b) to 71(d), the first action unit 600 and the second action unit 700 are in the effect waiting state, and the third action unit 800 is in the extended state. The state shown in FIG. 71(b) and the state shown in FIG. 71(c) are different in the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 due to the integral rotation of the third operation unit 800 being performed. On the other hand, even if the switching rotation motion is executed from any state, it can be visually recognized by the player as the same one union state (see FIG. 71(d)).

That is, when the second decorative member 880 faces the front side, the player cannot recognize the difference in arrangement of the first decorative member 870 . As a result, as the operation control of the third operation unit 800, it is set to notify the success or failure of the big hit by executing the switching rotation operation at the end of the display performance displayed on the third symbol display device 81 during the symbol variation. In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from predicting whether or not the jackpot will be announced based on the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 .

In other words, regardless of the arrangement of the first decorative member 870 at the end of the display effect (whether in the state shown in FIG. 71(b) or the state shown in FIG. 71(c)), a game of whether or not a big win is possible. expectations can be maintained as well. Therefore, the player's attention to the third action unit 800 can be maintained at a high level.

As described above, each of the operation units 600 to 800 can form a case where the decoration is viewed alone and a case where the decoration is viewed integrally in combination. Therefore, the decorations formed in each of the action units 600-800 are designed as decorations that relate to each other between the action units 600-800 rather than being completed only by each action unit 600-800.

Whether or not the operation units 600 to 800 can be controlled is affected by their arrangement. That is, if the operation units 600 to 800 are driven at inappropriate timing, there is a possibility that member operations will collide and malfunction. controlled as

For example, the change to the extended state of the first operation unit 600 may be performed in any state of the second operation unit 700, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled to be executed when it is determined to be in the waiting state for presentation. be.

The change of the first action unit 600 to the intermediate rendering state may be any state of the second action unit 700, any vertical arrangement of the third action unit 800, and no switching rotation action for the rotating motion. Controlled to be executed if determined.

The change to the extended state of the second operation unit 700 may be any state of the first operation unit 600, and the third operation unit 800 is controlled so as to be executed when it is determined to be in the waiting state for presentation.

The change to the intermediate effect state of the second motion unit 700 can be done in any state of the first motion unit 600, in any vertical arrangement of the third motion unit 800, and as long as the rotation motion is not switching rotation motion. Controlled to be executed if determined.

In the control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the rotation is not executed or only the integral rotation operation occurs, the first operation unit 600 is determined to be in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state, and the second operation unit 700 is It is executed when it is determined that it is in the intermediate effect state or the effect standby state.

The control in which the third operation unit 800 changes to the extended state and the switching rotation operation is performed is executed when it is determined that the first operation unit 600 is in the presentation standby state and the second operation unit 700 is determined to be in the presentation standby state. be done.

As described above, the drive control of each of the operation units 600 to 800 is not enabled at arbitrary timing, but is controlled after determining the arrangement of the members of other units.

Next, details of the sorting device 300 according to the first embodiment will be described. In addition, FIG. 1 to FIG. 25 are appropriately referred to in the detailed description of the sorting device 300 . First, an example of decoration applied to the front design member 162 will be described.

72 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIG. 72, the front design member 162 is formed with a light-transmissive window 162d as a difference from the content shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 72, the front design member 162 arranged on the front side of the sorting device 300 has a front plate made of a light-transmitting resin material, and the center side range of the front plate is more flexible than the peripheral range. A window portion 162d is formed as a range with high light transmittance.

In the present embodiment, a light-transmissive seal member SL1 cut out in the central area to match the shape of the window portion 162d is attached to the front plate of the front design member 162. As shown in FIG. With this configuration, the front-rear thickness of the window portion 162d is thinner than the front-rear thickness of the range where the seal member SL1 is attached around the window portion 162d, and the degree of light transmission through the front design member 162 is differentiated. Therefore, the light transmittance of the window portion 162d can be increased.

The first purpose of the window part 162d is to improve the visibility of the sorting device 300, considering that the line of sight passes through the plate part of the front design member 162 when the player looks at the sorting device 300. In particular, it is formed for the second purpose of resolving the dissatisfaction of players that they cannot grasp how the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 . That is, the window part 162d is formed with a shape and size that take into consideration the shape of the sorting device 300 .

Note that the means for forming the window portion 162d as a portion having a higher light transmittance than the surrounding area is not limited at all, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by arranging a light guide plate on the plate portion of the front design member 162 or by forming a plurality of groove patterns so as to perform the same function as the light guide plate, the front design member 162 can be designed for each light emission pattern of a light emitting means such as an LED. The appearance of the member 162 may be changed, a pattern or pattern may be directly drawn on the front design member 162, or a range corresponding to the window portion 162d of the front design member 162 may be formed as an opening. good.

Also, the shape of the window portion 162d is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 72, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, it may be a belt shape extending left and right with the same vertical width, or a shape in which the portion extending left and right is omitted so that the left and right width is equivalent to the left and right width of the range that extends upward It may have a pentagonal shape like a home plate), or it may have a shape along the shape of the front plate edge of the front design member 162 .

Moreover, although the window portion 162d is formed as a single range, it is not limited to this, and various modes are exemplified. For example, a range with high light transmittance may be formed by a combination of multiple locations partitioned by a lattice-like portion or a ladder-like portion, or the range may be defined by arranging a plurality of small windows, The range may be defined in such a manner that the windows are randomly arranged. Also, the shape of the window may be variable.

Moreover, the surface shape of the sealing member SL1 is not limited at all. For example, the surface may have a surface shape in which a large number of irregularities are formed, such as a surface shape formed by texturing, a large number of grooves or ridges may be formed on the surface, or the surface may be formed as a smooth surface.

The surface shape of the window portion 162d is preferably formed as a smooth surface. Various modes other than the shape similar to the surface shape of the member SL1 can be adopted.

73 is a front view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIG. 73, as a difference from the contents shown in FIG. 21, a light-transmissive window portion 162d is formed in the front design member 162. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 73, the window portion 162d is formed in a bilaterally symmetrical shape. A main window portion 162d1 that is short in the vertical direction and long in the horizontal direction, and a sub window formed continuously above the center portion of the main window portion 162d1 in the lateral direction. and a portion 162d2.

In this embodiment, the main window portion 162d1 and the sub window portion 162d2 are made of a colorless and transparent resin material, and are maintained in a state of high light transmittance. The shape of each part will be described in detail below.

The main window portion 162d1 is designed to have an outer edge shape sufficient to ensure the visibility of the second flow path forming portion 335 and the third flow path forming portion 336 when viewed from the front. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 are formed to have the same vertical width as that of the ball passage, and the second flow path forming part 335 is inclined. It is formed in a V shape that is inclined upward toward the left and right outer sides.

As a result, the spheres flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 and the third flow path forming part 336 can be accommodated inside the main window part 162d1 in a front view. It is possible to improve the visibility of the sphere flowing down the flow path forming portion 336 .

The left and right ends of the main window portion 162d1 are set near the center of the left and right width of the first flow passage forming portion 334 (see FIG. 17) formed at the same left and right positions as the ball passage hole 163b. That is, the entire outer wall of the first flow path forming portion 334 cannot be seen through the main window portion 162d1, and the visibility of the side wall portion 334a is particularly low.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the side wall portion 334a is improved compared to the case of designing on the premise that it will be visually recognized by the player, such as when a good-looking shape is required. can do.

The sub-window portion 162d2 is designed to have an outer edge shape sufficient to ensure the visibility of the seal member 313 illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351 when viewed from the front. That is, as shown in FIG. 73, it is formed in a rectangular shape covering the sealing member 313 .

As a result, in addition to the visibility of the ball flowing down the third flow passage forming part 336, the player can grasp the state of the sealing member 313 illuminated by the light emitting means 351 whose lighting timing is controlled based on the flow state of the ball. Since it can be configured to be easy, it is possible to provide the player with a comfortable game.

74 is a perspective view of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 viewed from the direction of the arrow XXIII in FIG. 16, and FIG. 75 is a cross section of the variable winning device 65 and the sorting device 300 along the LXXV-LXXV line in FIG. It is a diagram. In FIGS. 74 and 75, the front design member 162 is provided with a light-transmitting window 162d, which is different from the contents shown in FIGS. 23 and 18 above.

As shown in FIG. 74 , when viewed in a direction looking down on the sorting device 300 (viewed in an angled direction), a part of the upper protruding portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 arranged at the front side position is the opening/closing plate. Visible below 65b.

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 moves to the rear position, the upper protruding portion 376 is hidden behind the opening/closing plate 65b when viewed in the direction of FIG. Therefore, as long as the upper protruding portion 376 is visible, the player can easily predict whether the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 will pass through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or through the normal detection sensor SE12. can do.

The visibility toward the upper protruding portion 376 is also good because the inner side surface 314b1 of the second upper surface portion 314b of the upper member 310 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines left and right outward toward the front side. is secured to

That is, the second upper surface portion 314b functions as a ceiling surface that prevents the ball flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335 from jumping up, and the inner surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface so that the upper projecting portion 376 It avoids unnecessary obstruction of the view to.

In addition, forming the inner side surface 314b1 as an inclined surface compensates for the disadvantage of forming the upper surface portion 314 as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front. When the upper surface portion 314 is configured as an inclined surface as described above, the projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be increased when viewed from a downward direction (viewed from an angled direction) as shown in FIG. While there is an advantage that it is easy to improve the production effect of making the light visible through the light diffusion processed surface 314c, the projection area of the upper surface part 314 becomes large, so that the player can catch the ball flowing down below. It has the disadvantage that the range to be hidden from view may increase.

In other words, constructing the upper surface portion 314 as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the front works well for light performance, but it may work against the visibility of the falling ball. .

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inner side surface 314b1 is formed as an inclined surface that inclines toward the left and right outer sides, so that the ball enters from the second flow path forming part 335 to the third flow path forming part 336. The projected area of the upper surface portion 314 can be reduced in places, and the visibility of the ball flowing down under the upper surface portion 314 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 74 , when viewed from a direction looking down on the sorting device 300 (viewed from an angled direction), the seal member 313 is not visible inside the sub window portion 162d2. In order to visually confirm the state of the member 313, the player is forced to adjust the eye position and line-of-sight angle so that the seal member 313 can be seen, which may impede a comfortable game.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the straight line LL1 as the optical axis of the light emitting means 351 that directs the light to the sealing member 313 passes through the sealing member 313 and the sub-window portion 162d2. Part of the light reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 after passing through the seal member 313. As shown in FIG. Therefore, it is possible to grasp whether or not the light emitting means 351 on the straight line LL1 is lit by looking at the sub window portion 162d2.

Since the sealing member 313 is not subjected to light diffusion processing, the action of stopping the light from the light emitting means 351 is weak, and the light can sufficiently reach the sub-window portion 162d2. As a result, when the light emitting means 351 is turned on, red light, which is the color of the seal member 313, reaches the sub-window portion 162d2, so that the sub-window portion 162d2 can be illuminated in red.

As a result, the difference from the colorless and transparent state of the sub-window portion 162d2 before the light reaches is made easy to understand, so that the player can easily grasp whether or not the light-emitting means 351 is lit. It should be noted that the sealing member 313 (or the wall on which the sealing member 313 is arranged) may be provided with light diffusion processing. In this case, the seal member 313 can be made easier to emit light uniformly.

As shown in FIG. 75 , the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position (height position) that does not overlap the sphere flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 . That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged above the range in which the spheres flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 can be arranged.

In addition, the straight line LL1 is arranged at a position that does not overlap the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a. That is, the straight line LL1 is arranged below the lower surface portion 163a on which the ball that enters the specific winning hole 65a rides.

Furthermore, between the member to be fixed 161 and the front design member 162, as described above, the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) prevents the sphere from flowing down, so that the flow-down range of the sphere is limited to the front design member. It is brought to the left and right outside of the left and right width of 141 . Therefore, the ball flowing down between the fixed member 161 and the front design member 162 is also prevented from overlapping the straight line LL1.

Therefore, on the straight line LL1, the ball flowing down the front side of the base plate 60 (for example, the game area), the ball entering the specific winning opening 65a, the distribution device 300 (for example, the third flow path forming part 336 ) is arranged, it is possible to avoid the situation where the light is reflected and refracted by the sphere. As a result, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 can stably reach the sub-window portion 162d2 regardless of how the sphere flows down.

It should be noted that the placement of the seal member 313 in this embodiment may benefit the player if the player can continue to make the seal member 313 difficult to see unless the player changes his or her line of sight.

For example, in a configuration in which the sealing member 313 is always visible, the light enters the player's eyes each time the light emitting means 351 emits light. By arranging it difficultly, it is possible to weaken the glare felt by the player.

In addition, although the case where the light from the light emitting means 351 reaches the sub-window portion 162d2 has been described in the present embodiment, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, light may be difficult to reach the sub-window portion 162d2 by forming light diffusion processing on the member 161 to be fixed in the range intersecting the straight line LL1.

In this case, it is necessary to change the line of sight from the state shown in FIG. can be done. Therefore, even if the player does not want to know whether or not the ball has entered the variable probability detection sensor SE11 as a preference of the game, the purpose can be achieved if the line of sight shown in FIG. 74 is maintained. Therefore, the game burden on the player can be reduced.

In this embodiment, the case where the sub-window portion 162d2 is formed with a smooth surface shape has been described, but the shape is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the front and back surfaces of the sub-window portion 162d2 may be subjected to light diffusion processing, or may be formed so as to provide an air bubble portion therein so that light can be easily diffused.

In this case, the light reaching the sub-window 162d2 is diffused, so that the area of the light visible through the sub-window 162d2 can be increased. This makes it possible for the player to easily notice that the sub window portion 162d2 is illuminated.

So far, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, the light emitted from the light emitting means 351 that directs light toward the sealing member 313, that is, the LEDs arranged on the straight line LL1 have been described. Next, among the LEDs constituting the light emitting means 351, the light emitted from the plurality of LEDs arranged at four positions on the left and right in the lowermost stage will be described.

76 is a cross-sectional view of middle member 330, slide displacement member 370, lower member 380 and detection sensor SE1 of sorting device 300 taken along line LXXVI-LXXVI of FIG. In FIG. 76, the arrangement of the light emitting means 351 is illustrated by imaginary lines.

In the following description, among the light emitting means 351, the lowermost LED arranged on the left and right inner sides will be referred to as an inner light emitting means 351c, and the lowermost LED arranged on the left and right outer sides will be referred to as an outer light emitting means 351d. .

First, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) of the inner light emitting means 351c is arranged inside the light diffusion processing surface 332e. Therefore, when light is emitted from the inner light emitting means 351c, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusing processed surface 332e formed in a range extending from left to right is illuminated.

This light emission effect is a branching point BP1 where the flow of the ball is branched by the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long left and right space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336). ) is executed on the back side of the

Therefore, in a situation where the inner light emitting means 351c is lit, when the ball flows through the branch point BP1, the part where the ball flowing in front of the light diffusion processing surface 332e emitting light in the range extending to the left and right is arranged is visually recognized as a shadow. Therefore, the player can easily grasp how the ball has flowed by visually recognizing the displacement of the shadow.

The optical axis of the inner light emitting means 351c passes through the front-rear elongated projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 75). In addition, although the optical axis does not pass through the left and right inner projecting portions 318, the arrangement allows light in the vicinity of the optical axis to pass therethrough. is curved.

Therefore, part of the light emitted from the inner light-emitting means 351 is refracted by the curved shapes of the front-rear elongated projecting portion 317 and the left-right inner projecting portion 318, and travels obliquely forward and downward. The light can reach the light diffusion processed surface 340 (see FIG. 75).

Since the light diffusion processed surface 340 is formed over the entire lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 (see FIG. 14), by allowing light to reach the light diffusion processed surface 340, the third flow path structure The visibility of the space below the lower bottom surface of the portion 336 can be reduced. Therefore, it is easy to distinguish between the ball flowing down the inside of the third flow path forming part 336 and the out ball passing through the out port 71 (see FIG. 75) and flowing down the lower side of the third flow path forming part 336. can do.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 76, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d (a straight line extending in the front-rear direction) is outside (upper) the light diffusion processed surface 332e and inside the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b. placed. Therefore, when light is emitted from the outer light emitting means 351d, a light emitting effect is performed in which the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated.

This light emission effect is a branching point BP1 where the flow of the ball is branched by the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 (see FIG. 75, a long left and right space continuously connected from the rear end of the third flow path forming part 336). ) on the upper and front side.

Therefore, when the ball flows through the branch point BP1 in a situation where the outer light emitting means 351d is lit, the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b emit light above and in front of the ball, and the light flows through the branch point BP1. Since the ball is hidden by the light diffusion processing surface 333b (see FIG. 17), it becomes difficult for the player to grasp how the ball flows through the branch point BP1.

In addition, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed over the top and bottom, and the light diffusion processing surface 314c of the upper surface portion 314 is arranged on the upper side thereof (see FIG. 73). Therefore, in addition to the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 when viewed in the front-rear direction, the light-diffusing surface 314c can also be viewed at an angle such as when looking into the light-diffusing surface 333b from above (see FIG. 74). It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the branch point BP1 by light emission.

Further, the light diffusion processed surface 333b is formed over the upper and lower sides, and the light diffusion processed surface 340 is disposed below the light diffusion processed surface 333b. It is formed up to the side and back surfaces (see FIG. 14). Therefore, apart from the effect of making the branching point BP1 difficult to see in the front-rear direction, the lower surface of the second flow path forming part 335 is illuminated, and when the ball flows down the second flow path forming part 335, the ball By blocking the light (the light diffused by the light diffusion processing surface 340) and creating a shadow, the player can easily grasp that the ball is flowing down.

Here, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is arranged on the front side of the branch point BP1 (see FIGS. 17 and 75). Therefore, depending on the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 333b, the light may be hidden by the sphere. ) is arranged outside (upper side) of the range where the sphere flows down the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 76), so that it is possible to avoid a situation in which light is blocked by the sphere arranged at the branch point BP1.

Therefore, the light-diffusing surface 333b can be illuminated brightly by causing the outer light-emitting means 351d to emit light regardless of the manner in which the spheres in the sorting device 300 flow down. When the light diffusion processing surface 333b is illuminated, the ball flowing down the second flow passage forming portion 335 (see FIG. 17) arranged in front of it blocks the light and casts a shadow. It becomes easy to grasp the flowing state of the spheres flowing down the flow passage forming part 335 .

In this embodiment, as a device for avoiding a situation in which the light is blocked by the sphere placed at the branch point BP1, a configuration for smoothing down the flow of the sphere is adopted. The configuration will be described.

The ball that reaches the branch point BP1 and flows down, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position (see FIG. 20), flows down just below and passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and the slide displacement member 370 In the state of being arranged at the front side position (see FIG. 18), it flows down to the left and right outside along the inclination of the ball guide portion 371b and passes the normal detection sensor SE12.

When the ball flows down while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position, the through hole edge 382a of the plate-like portion 382 that supports the left and right outer ends of the slide displacement member 370 is positioned on the left and right outer sides of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is disposed so as to connect the edge portion and the left and right inner edge portions of the normal detection sensor SE12, and the upper surface is formed as an inclined surface that slopes down toward the left and right outer sides. Therefore, the ball reaching the upper surface of the through-hole edge portion 382a is configured to easily flow downward in the left-right direction.

As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball that has started to flow down to the left and right outside along the inclination of the ball guide part 371b flows back inward in the left and right direction after being bridged by the through-hole edge part 382a, or bounces. can be used to smooth the flow of the sphere.

In addition, the light diffusion processing surface 319a is disposed inside the front-to-rear width of the branch point BP1. Therefore, a situation in which the sphere is arranged on the back side of the light diffusion processed surface 319a cannot occur, and thus the situation in which the light is hidden by the sphere regardless of the positional relationship between the outer light emitting means 351d and the light diffusion processed surface 319a is prevented. unlikely to occur.

In this way, the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are not only arranged to be shifted to the left and right, but also the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, 333b arranged at different front and back positions on the front side thereof. By intentionally providing a difference in the positional relationship with the optical axis of each of the light emitting means 351c and 351d and by making the light diffusion processed surfaces 332e, 319a and 333b to which the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d reach, The front and rear positions at which the light reaches, diffuses, and is visually recognized can be made different.

In the above description, the cases where the inner light emitting means 351c and the outer light emitting means 351d are caused to emit light are explained separately, and the explanation is based on the premise that the light emitting means 351c and 351d on the opposite side are extinguished. The actual light emission control of the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not one side at a time, and a control mode such as both lighting or both lighting off may occur. The pattern of light emission control and how the internal flow path of the sorting device 300 is seen at that time will be described below.

77(a) to 77(d) are front perspective views of the middle member 330 of the sorting device 300. FIG. In FIGS. 77(a) to 77(d), for ease of understanding, streaks as shape lines of the light diffusion processed surface are omitted. A case where the combination is different is illustrated, and the range brightly illuminated by the light from the light emitting means 351c and 351d is illustrated with a hatched pattern.

That is, in FIG. 77(a), both light-emitting means 351c and 351d are turned off, and in FIG. 77(b), the inner light-emitting means 351c is turned on and the outer light-emitting means 351d is turned off. FIG. 77(c) shows an outer lighting state in which the inner light emitting means 351c is turned off and the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, and FIG. Both lit states are shown, both lit.

In the both light-off state, as shown in FIG. 77(a), the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a, and 333b are not illuminated, and the visibility of the back side thereof is ensured, but the game gives a dull impression. give to someone. In particular, it becomes difficult to distinguish between the ball flowing above the third flow path forming part 336 and the out ball flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path forming part 336 .

In the inner lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77( b ), the light diffusion processing surface 340 on the lower side of the third flow path forming portion 336 is illuminated, so that the spheres flowing above the third flow path forming portion 336 are illuminated. High visibility is maintained, and the visibility of an out ball flowing down the back side (lower side) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is reduced.

Furthermore, since the light diffusion processed surface 332e is illuminated on the back side of the branch point BP1, the visibility of the flow of balls at the branch point BP1 can be improved. Moreover, since the light diffusion processed surfaces 319a and 333b arranged on the front side of the light diffusion processed surface 332e are maintained in an unilluminated state, it is possible to avoid a situation where the branch point BP1 is blinded by light.

That is, in the inner lighting state, the range from the third flow path forming portion 336 to the branch point BP1 is illuminated with light, and the line of sight to see the branch point BP1 through the front frame portion 333 passes through the branch point. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp the manner in which the ball flows down in BP1. In addition, since the light is illuminated on the spot where the player should pay attention to grasp the flow of the ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the player overlooking the spot of interest, thereby reducing the player's playing stress. can.

A light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed on the inner surface of the front frame-shaped part 333 over the entire range (see FIG. 13), making it difficult for the player to see through the front frame-shaped part 333 and see behind. is configured to be

When viewing the back through the front frame portion 333, the back is viewed through the two inner surfaces of the front frame portion 333 that are opposed to each other in the front-rear direction. Since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

Similarly, if you try to see through the front frame portion 333 with a line of sight slanting from the left and right inner side to the left and right outer directions (a line of sight slanted from the front side left and right central position to the normal detection sensor SE12). It can also be said for players who play.

That is, in the present embodiment, the light diffusion processing surface 333b is formed along the inner side of the rectangular cylindrical shape, and on this inclined line of sight, the rear side surface of the front frame portion 333 and the left and right inner side surfaces (partition plates) are visible. 338 and the side surface opposite to the portion 338 are arranged. Therefore, since there are many plates that need to be seen through, it is even more difficult to see the back side.

In this way, according to the front frame-shaped portion 333, it is possible to make it difficult to see through the rear side of the front frame-shaped portion 333 not only when viewed in the front-rear direction but also when viewed obliquely.

In the outside lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(c), the light diffusion processing surfaces 319a and 333b are illuminated, so that the sphere that has flowed left and right outside at the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light. becomes less visible.

On the other hand, since the light diffusion processing surface 340 formed on the back side (lower side) of the second flow path forming part 335 is illuminated, the visibility of the sphere flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 is improved. can be done. That is, in the outside lighting state, the visibility of the ball flowing on the near side is improved, which has the effect of improving the attention of the player, but the visibility of the branch point BP1 itself is lowered.

In the both lighting state, as shown in FIG. 77(d), the light diffusion processing surfaces 332e, 319a and 333b are illuminated over a wide range. The lighting conditions are a combination of inside lighting conditions and outside lighting conditions, which can have both effects, but not only assist each other in an advantageous effect.

For example, since the light diffusion processed surface 333b is illuminated, the feature that the sphere flowing to the left and right outside of the branch point BP1 is hidden by the light is inherited from the outside lighting state. Therefore, for the purpose of improving the visibility of the branch point BP1, it is optimal to maintain the inner lighting state.

Various modes are exemplified for the control modes related to the lighting/extinguishing of the light emitting means 351c and 351d. For example, in a jackpot game, in a round game in which there is a possibility that a ball may enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11 (see FIG. 76), control is performed to configure an inner lighting state so that the player can easily pay attention to the branch point BP1. However, in a round game other than that, it may be controlled to brighten the whole by configuring an outside lighting state or a both lighting state.

Further, for example, control may be performed in such a manner that the both lighting state and the both lighting state are alternately switched irrespective of the type of round game.

Also, the timing for lighting the light emitting means 351c and 351d is not limited to the round game, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be controlled to light the light emitting means 351c, 351d after the ready-to-win stands upright during the pattern variation, or it is detected that the ball has entered the winning openings 63, 64, 140, 65a or the through gate 67. Then, the light emitting means may be controlled to light 351c and 351d.

Returning from FIG. 73 to FIG. 75, the configuration for optimizing the flow of the balls in the vicinity of the specific winning opening 65a will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 73, the upper side surfaces of the extended portions 162b arranged on the left and right outer sides of the opening/closing plate 65b are formed as inclined surfaces that slope down toward the left and right outer sides.

Therefore, regardless of whether the opening/closing plate 65b is in the open state or the closed state, the ball deviating to the left/right outside of the opening/closing plate 65b and riding on the upper surface of the extension portion 162b is placed on the left/right outside (opening/closing plate). 65b is arranged), it is possible to prevent the ball riding on the extended portion 162b from flowing down through the front side of the specific prize winning port 65a.

Therefore, most of the balls flowing down to the out port 71 can be made to roll on the inner rail 61, so that the balls can be prevented from jumping up (bouncing high) in the vicinity of the out port 71. can be avoided. As a result, it is possible to prevent the main window portion 162d1 and the third flow passage forming portion 336 arranged on the inner side thereof from being hidden by the jumped ball, thereby avoiding a decrease in visibility.

As shown in FIG. 74, the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate 65b in the opened/closed state is formed in a planar shape extending in the left-right direction. On the other hand, the second flow path forming portion 335 is inclined downward toward the left-right center side (partition plate portion 338 side).

Therefore, the closer to the left-right center side, the longer the vertical distance between the opening/closing plate 65b and the second flow path forming portion 335. spheres flowing toward the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be easily distinguished.

As shown in FIG. 74, the opening/closing plate 65b is shaped so that the balls on the upper side face can be flowed into the specific prize winning opening 65a without omission. It is

For example, firstly, the guide plate portion 163a2 of the receiving member 163 is a plate-like portion that abuts on the ball flowing backward from the upper side surfaces of the left and right ends of the opening/closing plate 65b and guides the ball to the left and right inner sides. . The guide plate portion 163a2 does not have a plate-like shape extending in the horizontal direction, but has a plate-like shape extending in a downwardly inclined direction inward and leftward according to the vertical positional displacement of the ball flowing from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163. As shown in FIG.

That is, the front end portion of the guide plate portion 163a2 is formed as an inclined surface arranged rearward toward the left and right inner sides. The left and right inner portions with which the ball to be transferred to the receiving member 163 with a lower floor surface abuts extend in an inclined direction so that the position thereof is downward.

As a result, the contact position of the ball contacting the guide plate portion 163a2 (contact height over the entire length of the ball) can be stabilized, and the ball can be guided smoothly. In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the guide plate portion 163a2 is designed based on the relative relationship between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 and the floor surface so that the ball can come into contact with the ball at the central height position over the entire length of the ball. be.

For example, secondly, the height relationship between the rear end of the upper side surface of the opening/closing plate 65b (rotation base end side) and the lower surface portion 163a of the receiving member 163 is configured to be reversed in the middle. In other words, the height position of the opening/closing plate 65b is lower at the left-right central position where the height position of the lower surface portion 163a is the highest. A pair of switching positions EP1 on the outer side of the direction is configured to be inverted upside down.

In the present embodiment, the switching position EP1 has the property of switching the flow-down mode of the ball between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163. 74) (right above the front frame-shaped portion 333 in FIG. 74).

In the left and right inner range of the switching position EP1 (the range between the pair of left and right switching positions EP1), rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 is suppressed due to the relationship between the vertical positions of the rolling surface of the ball. On the other hand, the rolling of the ball from the receiving member 163 to the opening/closing plate 65b can occur with little resistance.

For example, even if a ball that bounces backward near the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b collides with (the inner rear surface of) the receiving member 163 and bounces forward again, after the ball has stopped bouncing and begins to roll, It is possible to suppress the ball from riding on the receiving member 163 from the opening/closing plate 65b.

In addition, the ball rolling from the opening/closing plate 65b toward the receiving member 163 does not ride on the receiving member 163, but when the ball starts contacting the lower surface portion 163a, the ball moves left and right along the left and right inclination of the lower surface portion 163a. will be carried to

In addition, since the front design member 141 (see FIG. 7) prevents the ball from falling near the left-right central position of the opening/closing plate 65b, it is difficult for the ball to bounce. I can say. However, ball bouncing can occur due to collisions between balls.

In the left and right outer range of the switching position EP1 (the range of the left and right outer sides of the pair of left and right switching positions EP1 (the side where the ball passage hole 163b is arranged)), due to the vertical position of the rolling surface of the ball, from the receiving member 163 While the rolling of the ball to the opening/closing plate 65b is suppressed, the rolling of the ball from the opening/closing plate 65b to the receiving member 163 can occur with little resistance. For example, even if the ball rolling on the lower surface portion 163a moves forward due to a collision with another ball or vibration of the game machine, the ball is prevented from flowing back toward the opening/closing plate 65b. be able to.

To summarize the description of the switching position EP1, by limiting the range in which the ball can roll forward from the receiving member 163 side to the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, the backward flow of the ball near the ball passage hole 163b is prevented. By avoiding and smoothing the flow of the ball, we are trying to avoid the situation where the ball stays.

In addition, the backward rolling of the sphere from the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is not a rolling mode in which the ball is switched to the horizontal flow after the backward flow is completed. , and the ball passing hole 163b.

In other words, the flow is not along a path that intersects at right angles as in the longitudinal direction and the lateral direction, but along the oblique side connecting the other ends of the longitudinal straight line and the lateral straight line whose one ends are arranged at the same position. Therefore, the rolling path of the sphere can be shortened (corresponding to the length of the hypotenuse being shorter than the sum of the lengths of the other two sides in a right-angled triangle).

Furthermore, compared to the case where the ball easily flows backward over the left and right positions of the opening/closing plate 65b, as in the present embodiment, the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 is configured so that the ball can easily flow forward. Therefore, even when a large number of balls enter the receiving member 163 at the same time, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the flow of balls stagnates.

As shown in FIG. 75, the receiving member 163 is not formed in the range on the left and right outer sides of the pair of switching positions EP1 (see FIG. 16), and is spaced forward in the range on the left and right central sides of the pair of switching positions EP1. It has an upper surface portion 163f that is formed in a plate-like shape that is inclined upward so as to leave a gap.

The upper surface portion 163f is designed to reduce the possibility of the ball being clogged in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1 by increasing the position of the lower surface portion 163a. The vertical width can be secured.

This prevents ball clogging in the range between the pair of switching positions EP1, and prevents balls from getting caught between the opening/closing plate 65b and the receiving member 163 when the opening/closing plate 65b is displaced to close with a ball on it. can be avoided.

The laterally extending direction of the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is the direction along the inclination angle of the second flow passage forming portion 335 (the direction inclined 5 degrees from the horizontal), and rolls on the second flow passage forming portion 335. It is disposed at a position (a position 5.5 mm higher than the floor bottom of the second flow path forming portion 335) that abuts on the ball at the central height position of the entire length of the ball.

As a result, when the formation thickness of the symmetrical protruding portion 161f is minimized for the purpose of ensuring the visibility of the branch point BP1, the sphere abuts against the symmetrical protruding portion 161f at a position deviated from the center height of the sphere. As a result, the rolling of the ball can be made smoother than in the case where the load in the direction of lifting the ball or the load in the direction of pressing the ball against the floor is applied to the ball from the symmetrical projecting portion 161f.

If it is acceptable that the visibility of the branch point BP1 is lowered, the thickness of the symmetrical projecting portion 161f is formed to be approximately the same as the total length of the sphere. The projecting portion 161f can be prevented from coming into contact with the ball.

Next, the slide displacement member 370 and its peripheral structure will be described again in detail. 78 is a top view of the middle member 330, the state switching device 360, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380. FIG. In FIG. 78, to facilitate understanding, the middle member 330 is seen transparently with imaginary lines, and the slide displacement member 370 disposed below the middle member 330 is seen through.

The slide displacement member 370 is a member that is slidably displaced in the front-rear direction at the branch point BP1. A gap is maintained. The gap is formed as a gap having a size sufficiently short to prevent the ball from entering the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

As a result, while achieving the purpose of preventing the ball from entering the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the front end of the slide displacement member 370 is scraped or deformed due to contact with the side surface of the discharge hole 337. can do.

The front end portion of the slide displacement member 370, that is, the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 is formed to be inclined in such a manner that the arrangement thereof shifts rearward toward the left and right outer sides. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid stagnation of the ball between the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337 .

That is, even if the ball is sandwiched between the front end of the thin plate portion 371 and the side surface of the discharge hole 337, the front end of the thin plate portion 371 is formed as an inclined surface, so that The resulting load has a directional component directed outwards to the left and right, so the ball can be pushed outward to the left and right. Thereby, ball clogging can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 79, a device for guiding the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 will be described. Since the position of the slide displacement member 370 can change the player's profit, reproducibility (stability) and smoothness are required for the displacement of the slide displacement member 370 .

79(a) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380 taken along line LXXIXa-LXXIXa in FIG. 78, and FIG. 79(b) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate member taken along line LXXIXb-LXXIXb in FIG. 79(c) is a cross-sectional view of the middle member 330, the slide displacement member 370 and the lower member 380 along line LXXIXc-LXXIXc in FIG. 13 and 14 will be referred to as necessary in the description of FIG.

As shown in FIG. 79(a), the upper surface of the thin plate portion 371 on the front side of the upper protruding portion 376 is formed as an inclined surface positioned downward toward the left and right outer sides, and the ball flows along this inclination. obtain. In this embodiment, in order to stabilize the flow of balls rolling on this inclined surface, it is configured to suppress the attitude change of the slide displacement member 370 that causes the inclination of the inclined surface to change.

That is, as shown in FIG. 79( a ), the thin plate portion 371 of the slide displacement member 370 is abutted and supported by the plate-like portion 382 of the lower member 380 not only at the left and right end portions but also at the lower rib portion 373 . As a result, each of the pair of ball guide portions 371b divided into left and right by the concave portion 372 can be supported on the left and right sides (supported on both sides), so that the change in posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed. can.

In other words, even if the loads applied from the balls to the pair of left and right ball guide portions 371b are different (even if the number of balls placed on the ball guide portions 371b is unbalanced), each ball guide portion 371b is supported at its left and right ends. As a result, the ball guide portion 371b and the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented from tilting to the left or right (displacement in the rotational direction about the axis extending in the front-rear direction).

In addition, upward displacement of the edge of the recessed portion 372 is restricted by the partition plate portion 338 disposed on the upper side. That is, it is possible to suppress the upward movement of the slide displacement member 370 and the tilting displacement in the backward tilting direction.

As a result, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily maintained in a proper state, the displacement resistance in the longitudinal direction displacement can be suppressed, and malfunction of the slide displacement member 370 can be prevented.

The ball guide portion 371b is a plate-like portion formed to protrude forward on the protruding base end side of the upper protruding portion 376, and the upper surface on which the ball can roll is inclined downward toward the left and right outer sides. formed as a plane.

The contact between the ball guide portion 371b and the ridge portion 383 is configured to be a point contact. That is, in this embodiment, a pair of hemispherical projecting portions 372a are projected from the recessed portion 372 toward the projecting portion 383 side, and when the gap is filled, the hemispherical projecting portions 372a and the projecting portion 372a are projected. 383 are configured to make point contact with each other.

Here, as described above, the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b on which the ball can roll is formed as an inclined surface that slopes in the horizontal direction. It is decomposed into a directional component and a left-right direction component, and the left-right direction component can displace the slide displacement member 370 in the left-right direction (the direction crossing the front-rear direction, which is the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370).

At this time, it is preferable to make the left-right gap between the concave portion 372 of the slide displacement member 370 and the protrusion 383 small because the left-right position of the ball guide portion 371b is easily stabilized, but contact friction is likely to occur. , which may cause functional problems.

For example, when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction with the ball on the ball guide portion 371b, if the contact friction becomes excessively large, the front-rear displacement becomes defective (for example, no displacement occurs). there's a possibility that.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the contact between the hemispherical protruding portion 372a and the protruding portion 383 is configured to be a point contact. can be kept small. As a result, even when the ball rides on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide displacement member 370 can be displaced in the front-rear direction satisfactorily.

In particular, the longitudinal displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the state where the ball is on the ball guide portion 371b changes the state where the ball cannot enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11, so that the ball can enter the variable probability detection sensor SE11. Since it is a displacement action for switching the state to a state of , it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by performing this displacement action satisfactorily.

Further, by increasing the displacement speed of this displacement operation, it is possible to change the rotation of the ball riding on the ball guide portion 371b when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

80(a) and 80(b) are side views of the slide displacement member 370 and the ball on the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b. FIG. 80(a) illustrates a state in which a ball is placed on the slide displacement member 370 at the front side position, and FIG. 80(b) illustrates a state in which the slide displacement member 370 is displaced to the rear side position. In Figures 80(a) and 80(b), examples of the direction of rotation of the sphere are illustrated by arrows.

As shown in FIG. 80(a), the direction of rotation of the ball that rolls backward and reaches the sliding displacement member 370 is the forward rolling direction. When the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13) is driven so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced back and forth to the rear side position while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the load applied from the slide displacement member 370 to the ball acts to reverse the rotation direction (guiding direction) of the sphere (backward rolling direction).

As a result, the rotation of the ball can be suppressed, so that the ball can easily receive the action of gravity, and the ball can be easily dropped straight down. Therefore, when the slide displacement member 370 is driven while the ball is on the slide displacement member 370, the ball can easily flow down to the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

The front-rear long projecting portion 317 has a function of guiding the ball that has reached the branch point BP1 toward the slide displacement member 370 side. In other words, the front-rear length projecting portion 317 is not limited to the function of guiding the ball to the probability variation detection sensor SE11, but the ball is guided regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 arranged upstream of the probability variation detection sensor SE11. Constructed as a suitably guidable profile.

When the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position, the ball in contact with the front-rear length projecting portion 317 passes through the probability variation detection sensor SE11 due to the path configuration. At this time, since the curve at the end of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 has a substantially circular arc shape in which the width in the front-rear direction is longer than the width in the vertical direction (see FIG. 18), the sphere that makes contact with the ball moves forward. A load is applied in which the downward component is greater than the directional component. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from contacting the front-rear projection 317 from rebounding back and forth in the front-rear direction and flowing backward through the third flow passage forming portion 336 .

On the other hand, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, the flowing direction of the ball depends on the shape of the slide displacement member 370 . In this embodiment, the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 forms a curved surface that curves outward in the left and right direction, so the ball is guided outward in the left and right direction along this curve.

Here, in a state where the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position, when the ball flowing in the front-rear direction collides with the slide displacement member 370 with momentum, the slide displacement member 370 is pushed rearward by the load at the collision. It is possible to switch to a state where the ball can pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the velocity direction of the ball is corrected downward by contacting the front-rear projection 317 before colliding with the upper projection 376 of the slide displacement member 370 . Therefore, since the direction of displacement of the slide displacement member 370 due to the load from the ball is mainly downward, it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the slide displacement member 370 is pushed backward.

In addition, since the load in the direction of rearward displacement of the slide displacement member 370 given by the ball is reduced, the biasing force (electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 13)) for maintaining the slide displacement member 370 in the front position is provided. The biasing force of the return spring) can be reduced, and the electromagnetic force that drives the plunger against the biasing force can be reduced.

Even when the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while the ball is arranged at the branch point BP1, it is possible to easily avoid the backward flow of the ball.

The left and right inner projecting portion 318 abuts the ball on the front side of the front displacement end position of the upper projecting portion 376, and the force of the ball is directed downward to the left and right outside. In addition, the momentum of the ball is directed downward by the front-rear long projecting portion 317 . As a result, the velocity of the ball in the front-rear direction is reduced, so that the inertia of the ball's own weight stabilizes the arrangement, and the load applied from the slide displacement member 370 makes it difficult for the ball to flow backward.

Furthermore, the contact between the ball and the upper projecting portion 376 occurs in a state where the ball is lower than the height position at which it contacts the front-rear projecting portion 317, but the ball can contact the upper projecting portion 376. In the lowered state (see FIG. 80(a)), the ball guide portion 371b contacts with the ball, and is located at a position lower than the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336. As shown in FIG. As a result, even if the ball receives a load in the front-rear direction from the upper projecting portion 376 and is displaced forward, a considerable amount of energy is required to climb from the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b to the lower bottom surface 336a. , the degree of regurgitation of the sphere can be reduced.

In addition, the upper projecting portion 376 has an acute-angled front end portion on the side of the partition plate portion 338, and the plane does not collide head-on with the sphere in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 78). That is, the load applied to the ball from the upper projecting portion 376 is large in the lateral direction and small in the longitudinal direction.

As a result, the ball in contact with the upper projecting portion 376 can smoothly flow in the laterally outward direction, so that the slide displacement member 370 is displaced from the rear position to the front position while the ball is placed at the branch point BP1. In this control mode, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball is caught between the upper projecting portion 376 and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337, resulting in malfunction.

Returning to FIG. 78, FIG. 79(b) and FIG. 79(c), description will be made. Since the slide displacement member 370 is configured to protrude toward the branch point BP1 (front side), there is a possibility that the slide displacement member 370 will be displaced forward due to the weight of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the front-to-rear width length of the portion formed on the rear side of the upper projecting portion 376, i.e., the portion where the upper and lower projecting portions 374 are formed on both the left and right sides in the front-to-rear direction. It is sufficiently secured and configured to be able to contact with the lower bottom portion of the rear side frame-shaped portion 332 over the front-to-rear width. As a result, tilting displacement of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction can be prevented.

In addition, since the upper and lower protrusions 374 are elongated in the front-rear direction, only one load is applied to the rear frame-shaped portion 332 when a load is applied to tilt and displace the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction. can avoid concentrating on Thereby, the deformation of the slide displacement member 370 can be suppressed (the rigidity of the slide displacement member 370 can be increased).

In addition, when the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front position where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the front side surface of the projecting portion (hereinafter also referred to as the projecting portion 378a) in which the recessed portion 378 is formed is It abuts on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 .

In other words, the front side position of the slide displacement member 370 is set so that the front side surface of the projecting portion 378 a contacts the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 . For this purpose, the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 is not formed with a light diffusing surface, and a flat surface is formed on the front and rear surfaces of the projecting portion 378a so as to be able to contact each other. Thereby, the arrangement of the slide displacement member 370 at the front position can be stabilized.

Since the lower cylindrical portion 363c of the rotating portion 363 is arranged inside the recessed portion 378, the driving force of the electromagnetic solenoid 361 transmitted through the lower cylindrical portion 363c is transmitted through the front meat portion of the projecting portion 378a. It is hung on the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 via.

In this way, since the position to which the driving force is transmitted is the left-right central portion of the slide displacement member 370, the driving force can be transmitted to the slide displacement member 370 in a well-balanced manner. That is, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the direction of rotation about the vertical axis during the displacement in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, by pressing the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the posture of the slide displacement member 370 can be easily corrected in the rotational direction about the vertical axis. .

Here, when the posture maintenance and posture restoration of the slide displacement member 370 are executed by the contact between the partition plate portion 338 and the semispherical protruding portion 372a, the contact area between the partition plate portion 338 and the semispherical protruding portion 372a is is small, a load is applied locally, and there is a possibility that the durability of the hemispherical projecting portion 372a is degraded.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, before the front side surface of the projecting portion 378a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, the slide displacement member 370 is displaced in the rotational direction about the vertical axis. Even if this occurs, the transmission of the driving force can eliminate the positional deviation of the slide displacement member 370 in the process in which the front side surface of the protruding portion 378a comes into surface contact with the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338. You can modify your posture.

The partition plate portion 338 abuts against the projecting portion 378a to align the slide displacement member 370 when displaced in the front-rear direction, and also functions as a portion that receives the forward tilting load applied to the slide displacement member 370. have

That is, in a state in which the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the front side position, when a load is generated in a direction to change the posture of the slide displacement member 370 in the forward tilting direction due to the self weight of the ball on the ball guide portion 371b, the slide is displaced. When the projecting portion 378 a is displaced (displaced in the forward tilting direction) within the clearance allowed by the displacement member 370 , the projecting portion 378 a is pressed against the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338 .

In this case, resistance in the opposite direction is applied to the protruding portion 378a from the rear side surface of the partition plate portion 338, thereby suppressing the displacement of the protruding portion 378a. can do.

Next, the details of the operation units 600, 700, and 800, which have not been sufficiently explained, will be explained again. First, as a detailed description of the first operation unit 600, the rotating member 620 will be described.

81(a) is a front view of the rotating member 620, FIG. 81(b) is a rear view of the rotating member 620, and FIG. 81(c) is the direction of arrow LXXXIc in FIG. 6 is a side view of the rotating member 620 in perspective. FIG.

82 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 83 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. 82 and 83 illustrate a state in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 that is displaced along the guide long hole 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range.

As shown in FIGS. 81(a) to 81(c), the pivoting member 620 is designed with an asymmetrical shape in relation to the load applied to the pivoting member 620 during the execution of the motion. The details of the rotating member 620 and the action on the rotating member 620 will be described below.

A body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a first side surface 621a, a second side surface 621b, and a third side surface 621c as flat side surfaces that receive a load when stopped. A first side surface 621 a , a second side surface 621 b , and a third side surface 621 c are formed in order from the cylindrical portion 622 .

The first side surface 621a is a side surface formed on the tilting displacement side of the rotating member 620, and faces the base end side projecting portion 617a projecting from the front cover member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that allows abutment (the shape is designed in relation to the base-end projecting portion 617a). The displacement of the first side surface 621a is restricted by the base-end projecting portion 617a, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 45 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range). ).

The second side surface 621b is a side surface formed on the upward displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with a distal end side projecting portion 617b projecting from the front lid member 612 to the front side with a U-shaped cross section. It is formed in a shape that can be contacted (the shape is designed in relation to the tip end side projecting portion 617b). The displaceable range of the rotating member 620 is defined by restricting the displacement of the second side surface 621b by the tip-side projecting portion 617b (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range). .

The third side surface 621c is a side surface formed on the upward displacement side of the rotating member 620, and is in contact with a rectangular box portion 618 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape on the front side of the front cover member 612. It is formed in a shape that allows contact (the shape is designed in relation to the rectangular box portion 618). The displacement of the third side surface 621c is restricted by the rectangular box portion 618, thereby defining the displaceable range of the rotating member 620 (see FIG. 40 for the rotating member 620 at the terminal position of the displaceable range).

Thus, at the end of displacement of the rotating member 620, each of the side surfaces 621a to 621c of the rotating member 620 contacts the corresponding portion of the front lid member 612, and displacement is restricted. In particular, a plurality of contact points are formed at the end of displacement on the rising side of the rotating member 620 .

The purpose of forming a plurality of contact points is to disperse the load in the rotational direction received at the time of contact at a plurality of points, and to disperse the load in the front-rear direction that may occur on the rotating member 620 at a plurality of points. This has the purpose of suppressing deformation of the rotating member 620 in the front-rear direction.

The load in the front-rear direction that can be applied to the rotating member 620 includes, for example, the load in the forward tilting direction due to the weight of the second decorative rotating member 660, and the torsion caused by the inertia when the rotation of the second decorative rotating member 660 is stopped. A directional load (a load in a rotational direction about the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 620) is exemplified.

In particular, the load in the forward tilting direction is the load in the forward tilting direction with the cylindrical portion 622 as a fulcrum. The load generated at the abutment position is reduced. The second side surface 621b and the third side surface 621c are formed at positions separated from the cylindrical portion 622 for one purpose of reducing the load generated at the contact position.

The body portion 621 of the rotating member 620 includes a recessed portion 621d recessed in a direction away from the drive motor 631 in order to avoid interference with the drive motor 631, and the recessed portion 621d. , and a thickened portion 621e that is thickened to include a range that abuts on the base-end projecting portion 617a as a rotating portion about the tubular portion 622. As shown in FIG.

Since the rotation base end side of the rotation member 620 has a narrow width due to the formation of the concave portion 621d, it is possible that the impact load may cause breakage without countermeasures, but the thickened portion 621e is formed, it is possible to offset the influence of the recessed portion 621d in terms of strength. This makes it easier to avoid breakage of the rotating member 620 .

Furthermore, since the thickened portion 621e is formed in a range including a portion where it can abut against the proximal side projecting portion 617a, the impact load that may occur between the rotating member 620 and the proximal side projecting portion 617a is reduced. It is possible to improve the durability of the rotating member 620 against.

84 is a front view of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. 85 is a rear view of the first operation unit 600. FIG. 84 and 85 illustrate a state in which the width direction end of the extension 634b of the transmission gear cam 634 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1.

The extension part 634b is formed with a width (length in the circumferential direction) that is three times or more as long as the width of the detection sensor KS1 when viewed from the rear. Here, forming the width length of the extending portion 634b sufficiently long has a structural purpose in addition to the purpose of utilizing it for detection.

That is, in this embodiment, the supported member 640 is connected to the front side of the rotating tip of the rotating member 620, and the second decoration rotating member 660 is arranged in front of the supported member 640. In addition, a load in the forward-tilting direction may be applied to the rotating member 620, and without countermeasures, the rotating member 620 may be deformed in the front-rear direction, resulting in malfunction.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, behind the cylindrical portion 634a connected to the rotating member 620, the extending portion 634b arranged to face the rear surface of the fixed means 610 is formed in a wide shape. The load applied from the extended portion 634b to the fixed means 610 via the portion 634a in the forward tilting direction of the rotating member 620 can be received in a wide angle range of the arc-shaped hole 613d (the area where the load is applied is increased). can be secured). As a result, the load received per unit area can be reduced, so that the forward tilt displacement of the rotating member 620 can be suppressed while avoiding damage to the extended portion 634b.

In this embodiment, it is possible to obtain a structurally advantageous effect by securing a long width length of the extension portion 634b. Even in a control mode in which the driving of the rotating member 620 in the rising direction is stopped in the state (see FIG. 84), the load such as inertia causes the rotating member 620 to reach the end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side. The structure is devised to reach

For example, firstly, the inertial force of each member is generated in the direction to displace the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side. Not only the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 itself, but also the inertial force associated with the rotational displacement of the supported member 640 and the second ornamental rotating member 660 rotating clockwise about the axis O1 in the rear view. , in the direction of displacing the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side (the direction of rotating the rotating member 620 counterclockwise in rear view).

For example, secondly, the center of gravity of the front rotating member 652 (this embodiment , the same as the center of the protruding decorative portion 652b) is arranged at a position left and right away from the vertical position of the axis O1 as the rotation axis of the gear tooth 654a.

Therefore, the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in the direction of rotating the gear teeth 654a. In the present embodiment, the gear tooth 654a receives a load in the direction of counterclockwise rotation in a rear view due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 itself.

This load is transmitted to the intermediate gear 644 and the gear tooth portion 625 in this order, so that a load is applied to the rotating member 620 through the gear tooth portion 625 in the direction of counterclockwise rotation when viewed from the rear. That is, as a load different from the inertia of the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620, the load in the rotating direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652 is generated in the direction of displacing the rotating member 620 to the end position on the initial position side.

In this way, due to the inertial load generated on the rotating member 620 and the load in the rotation direction due to the weight of the front rotating member 652, there is a load that rotates the rotating member 620 even after the drive motor 631 is de-energized. configured to occur.

Therefore, in a state in which the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 and the rotation member 620 has not reached the displacement end position as shown in FIG. Even if the cutting is controlled, the rotational displacement of the rotating member 620 continues due to the load described above, and the rotating member 620 can reach the displacement end position (see FIG. 40) on the initial position side.

86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88 show the elongated guide hole 616, the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the detection sensor KS1, and the extension portion of the transmission gear cam 634. 634b is a rear view of 634b.

In FIGS. 86(a), 86(b), 87(a), 87(b), and 88, the rotational motion of the transmission gear cam 634 started from the waiting state of the first motion unit 600 is time-sequential. is illustrated.

FIG. 86(a) corresponds to the effect waiting state of the first action unit 600, FIG. 86(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 85, and FIG. 87(a) is the first action. FIG. 87(b) corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 83, and FIG. 88 corresponds to the extended state of the first motion unit 600. FIG.

Arrangement of electrical wiring passing through the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. An electrical wiring 618d whose end portion is fixed to a connector 618c arranged on a substrate accommodated in the rectangular box portion 618 is arranged so as to enter the second decorative rotating member 660 through the opening C2a.

The electric wiring 618d is arranged so as to bypass the lower side of a partition portion 619 projecting from the front cover member 612 toward the base member 611 (see FIG. 39) and enter the opening C2a. The electric wiring 618b has a length that takes into consideration the movement trajectory of the dish-shaped lid C2 having the opening C2a, and is arranged between the connector 618c and the opening C2a so as to bend under its own weight.

The partition portion 619 includes columnar portions 619a formed at both upper and lower end portions, and plate-like portions 619b projecting in the shape of a long plate so as to connect the columnar portions 619a. The columnar portion 619 a and the plate upper portion 619 b abut on the front side surface of the base member 611 .

A female screw is formed on the inner side of the columnar portion 619a, and a fastening screw passing through an opening formed in the base member 611 at a position corresponding to the columnar portion 619a is screwed into the base member 611 and the front lid. Member 612 is fastened. In other words, the partitioning portion 619 not only restricts the arrangement position of the electrical wiring 618d, but also secures the rigidity of the base member 611 and the front cover member 612. As shown in FIG.

Next, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d will be described with particular attention to the movement of the opening C2a. First, the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 86(a) will be described. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is downwardly displaced in the time series of FIGS.

In the operation from the effect standby state (see FIG. 86(a)) to the state in which the width direction end of the extension 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 86(b)), the dish-shaped lid While the vertical arrangement of the portion C2 does not change significantly, the arrangement of the opening C2a is rotationally displaced counterclockwise in rear view.

As a result, the electrical wiring 618d in the vicinity of the opening C2a can be moved away from the partition 619 before the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starts full-scale downward displacement. It is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from being caught between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 in the process of doing so.

In particular, at the timing when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 are closest to each other (see FIG. 87(b)), the opening C2a faces the side (downward) where the electrical wiring 618d is retracted from the partition portion 619. ing.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the electric wiring 618d from being sandwiched between the partition 619 and the electric wiring 618d. It is possible to avoid problems such as

As shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the posture of the opening C2a is continuously rotated counterclockwise when viewed from the back during the downward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. At the lower displacement end of the dish-shaped lid portion C2, the opening C2a faces the opposite side (lower side) of the connector 618c, and the electrical wiring 618d is purposely configured to have downward slack. As a result, it is possible to avoid unnecessary slackness of the electrical wiring at the displacement end position (for example, flapping due to slackening in the front-rear direction) while ensuring the length of the electrical wiring 618d itself.

Furthermore, the length of the electrical wiring 618d is designed to be long enough not to come into contact with the extended portion 634b while the first operating unit 600 is operating. As a result, even without providing a partition between the extension 634b and the electrical wiring 618d, it is possible to prevent the electrical wiring 618d from coming into contact with the extension 634b and receiving a load.

In this embodiment, when the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is closest to the transmission gear cam 634 (see FIG. 88), the extension portion 634b is arranged away from the connector 618c (with the rotational axis of the transmission gear cam 634 as a reference). ), it is possible to secure a large range for arranging the electrical wiring 618d while avoiding contact with the extended portion 634b, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the length of the electrical wiring 618d. be able to.

Next, the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 starting from FIG. 88 will be described. The dish-shaped lid portion C2 is displaced upward in the time series of FIGS. 88, 87(b), 87(a), 86(b), and 86(a).

During the upward displacement of the dish-shaped lid C2, the opening C2a does not face the partition 619 side until the dish-shaped lid C2 comes closest to the partition 619 from the displacement lower end position (see FIG. 88). is facing As a result, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 can be displaced upward while securing downward slack in the electrical wiring 618d.

Even after the dish-shaped lid portion C2 has passed the lower end of the partition portion 619, the direction of the opening C2a is such that it faces downward while gradually rotating (the electrical wiring 618d near the opening C2a is connected to the partition portion 619). 87(a)).

Then, in a state where the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is sufficiently separated from the partition portion 619, the opening C2a is rotated to face the partition portion 619 side (see FIGS. 86(a) and 86(b)), and the electrical wiring 618d is removed. It is arranged so as to enter (accommodate) between the partition portion 619 and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

As a result, the electric wiring 618d can be prevented from being broken by being sandwiched between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619, and the electric wiring 618d can be displaced along with the vertical displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2. It is possible to suppress the load applied to the

In other words, the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is restricted by changing the arrangement of the opening C2a in accordance with the arrangement relationship between the partition 619 and the dish-shaped lid C2. Since the electrical wiring 618d is prevented from being arranged between the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the partition portion 619 when the interval between the two becomes narrow, the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d can be suppressed.

Therefore, compared to the case where the electrical wiring 618d is arranged at an arbitrary position, the electrical wiring 618d and the dish-shaped lid C2 can be designed to be arranged close to each other. degree of freedom can be improved.

Also, the restriction of the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d is realized by the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid C2, not by using a separate member such as a binding band. As described above, the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is a member used for fastening and fixing the first decorative rotating member 650 to the main body member 651, and it also serves to limit the arrangement of the electrical wiring 618d.

This eliminates the need for a dedicated member such as a binding band for bundling the electrical wiring 618d. Furthermore, unlike a binding band, the direction of the opening C2a can be changed so that the electrical wiring 618d can be arranged on the appropriate side corresponding to the arrangement of the dish-shaped lid C2, so the electrical wiring 618d can be stretched or bent. You can easily avoid the situation.

In this embodiment, the opening C2a is formed as a fan-shaped opening with a central angle of about 110 degrees. Since the opening C2a is formed as a wide opening, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in the shape adopted as the portion (connection terminal, etc.) of the electrical wiring 618d passing through the opening C2a.

Next, the arrangement structure of the electrical wiring 618d arranged on the front side of the opening C2a will be described. 89 is a front perspective view of the first decorative rotary member 650 and the second decorative rotary member 660. FIG.

In FIG. 89, only the parts required for explanation are illustrated, and the illustration of other parts is omitted. That is, the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 of the first decorative rotating member 650, and the electrical decoration board 662 and the wiring clamping plate 663 of the second decorative rotating member 660 are shown in solid lines, and are boxed for easy understanding. The shape member 661 is shown in phantom lines so that the inside can be visually recognized.

Also, FIG. 89 illustrates an arrangement example of the electrical wiring 618d, and illustrates a dish-shaped lid portion C2 having an opening C2a through which the electrical wiring 618d is inserted. The electric wiring 618 d is branched between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 by wiring connected to the terminal of the electric board 653 (see FIG. 41) and wiring connected to the terminal of the electric board 662 . The state of doing is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 89, the wiring retaining plate 663 is a disk-shaped member having a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and is bored in an elongated hole shape through which the electric wiring 618d can be inserted. and a pair of insertion holes 663b formed on both sides of the insertion long hole 663a as through holes through which fastening screws can be inserted.

Since the diameter of the wire clamping plate 663 is formed to be larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 (see FIG. 39) is prevented from falling out of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. This can be prevented by the wiring retaining plate 663 .

A fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female screw formed in each of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

In this way, the wiring retaining plate 663 has both a function of preventing the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from falling off and a function of integrally fixing the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. In addition to this, the wiring fastening plate 663 has a function of temporarily fastening the electrical wiring 618d.

As shown in FIG. 89, the electric wiring 618d passes through the wiring insertion elongated hole 663a of the wiring retaining plate 663, and is temporarily held in such a manner that displacement is suppressed by being pinched. In the present embodiment, the rotational motion of the second decoration rotating member 660 is not one or more rotations, but a rotation motion of less than half a rotation (rotational motion of about 135 degrees) in the reciprocating direction. Therefore, it is configured so as not to twist the electric wiring 618d by rotating the second decorative rotary member 660 multiple times.

It is conceivable that the load applied to the electrical wiring 618d (the load in the twisting direction) when the second decoration rotary member 660 rotates increases near the wiring insertion long hole 663a where twisting tends to occur. Since the wiring insertion slot 663a is formed in an elongated shape, and the electric wiring 618d is temporarily held by being sandwiched between the wiring insertion slots 663a, displacement of the electric wiring 618d within the elongated hole shape is allowed. ing.

Therefore, even if the electrical wire 618d is overloaded in the twisting direction, the load can be relieved by displacing the electrical wire 618d within the wire insertion elongated hole 663a. Thereby, the durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the direction of the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 will be described. Since the body member 651 rotates integrally with the rotating motion of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 shown in FIGS. Torsion in the direction of rotation occurs. That is, as the rotating member 620 rotates in the tilting direction, twisting occurs in the counterclockwise direction in a rear view.

As the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction, the opening C2a of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 is also displaced counterclockwise in a rear view. The durability of the electrical wiring 618d can be improved).

The dish-shaped lid portion C2 rotates along the guide elongated hole 616 while being displaced in the vertical direction. Here, in time series from FIG. 86(a) to FIG. 88, the electrical wiring 618d changes from a state of large slack to a state of small slack between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2.

Corresponding to this, the electrical board 662 rotates from the state in which the terminal of the electrical wiring 618d on the electrical board 662 side is arranged on the rear side (body member 651 side) (see FIG. 89), and the terminal is It is configured as an operation to change the state to the state arranged on the front side (the side of the wiring receiving member 655). Therefore, the state change can be such that the electric wiring 618d is pulled to the front side.

86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d is in a state in which the electrical wiring 618d has a large slack inside the body member 651 (a state in which the terminals on the electrical board 662 side are arranged on the back side). ) to a state in which the slack is small (a state in which the terminal on the electrical board 662 side is arranged on the front side).

Therefore, in this embodiment, the magnitude relationship of slackness is reversed (balanced) between the relationship between the connector 618c and the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the relationship inside the main body member 651. FIG. Thereby, the load applied to the electric wiring 618d due to the operation of the first operation unit 600 can be reduced.

The relationship between the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electric wiring 618d in the portion arranged between the main body member 651 and the wiring receiving member 655 will be explained. do.

86(a) to 88, the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the body member 651 is twisted counterclockwise in a rear view, while the body member 651 and the wire receiving member 655 are twisted. The electrical wiring 618d in the portion disposed therebetween is twisted in the direction of rotation of the electrical board 662 (counterclockwise when viewed from the bottom in FIG. 89 (viewing the insertion hole 663b from the electrical board 662 side)). That is, they are twisted in mutually opposite directions.

This embodiment is designed to minimize the twisting of the electrical wiring 618d in the standby state of the first operation unit 600, and maximizes the twisting of the electrical wiring 618d in the overhanging state. there is

As a result, even if the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a is greatly slack, the problem is unlikely to occur (standby state, see FIG. 86(a)). In a state in which it is preferable to reduce the slackness of the electrical wiring 618d between the connector 618c and the opening C2a while reducing the generated load (projection state, see FIG. 88), the main body member 651, the wiring receiving member 655, and the electric It is possible to suppress slackness of the electrical wiring 618d (suppress displacement of the electrical wiring 618d) by maximizing the twist caused by the rotational movement of the decorative substrate 662. FIG.

In this way, as means for improving the durability of the electrical wiring 618d, a state in which twisting is minimized and sufficient slack is generated, and a state in which the slack is reduced by the twisting and the surrounding member (for example, the extension portion 634b) and the electrical wiring are connected. It is configured to switch between a state of avoiding contact with the wiring 618d.

As another embodiment, in the time series operations shown in FIGS. 86(a) to 88, the direction of rotation of the electrical board 662 is reversed (bottom view in FIG. (viewing direction) and clockwise). In this case, the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d arranged inside the main body member 651 and the twisting direction of the electrical wiring 618d due to the rotational movement of the electrical board 662 are the same. deformation can be offset.

Next, the features of the overhang decorative portion 652b in the operation of the first operation unit 600 will be described. 90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92 are front views schematically showing the guide slot 616, the rectangular box portion 618 and the projecting decorative portion 652b. It is a schematic diagram.

90(a), 90(b), 91(a), 91(b) and 92 schematically illustrate the outlines of the guide slot 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 for easy understanding. Therefore, the gear tooth 652a of the front rotating member 652 is omitted, and the displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b from the waiting state of the first action unit 600 is illustrated in chronological order.

FIG. 90(a) shows an arrangement corresponding to the effect waiting state (see FIG. 40) of the first operation unit 600, and FIG. An arrangement corresponding to the state in which the detection sensor KS1 is arranged in the detection groove (see FIG. 84) is illustrated, and FIG. FIG. 91(b) shows an arrangement corresponding to a state (see FIG. 82) in which the dish-shaped lid portion C2 displaced along the guide slot 616 is arranged at the right end of the displacement range, and FIG. , an arrangement corresponding to the extended state of the first operating unit 600 (see FIG. 45).

In the effect standby state (see FIG. 90(a)), the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged to the right so as to overlap with the rectangular box portion 618 in top view. As a result, the projecting decorative portion 652b can be placed outside the player's field of vision (see FIG. 28). Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since the line of sight is likely to be blocked by the outer edge member 73 by arranging the overhang decorative portion 652b behind the outer edge member 73 (see FIG. 2) in the standby state for rendering, the overhang decorative portion 652b visibility can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the decorative projecting portion 652b is displaced downward while the decorative projecting portion 652b is shifted to the right so as to overlap the rectangular box portion 618 in top view, the decorative projecting portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 are displaced downward. It collides with the shaped box portion 618 and causes a problem.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, prior to the downward displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b or along with the downward displacement of the decorative projecting portion 652b, the attitude of the decorative projecting portion 652b is configured to change ( See FIGS. 90(b) and 91(a)). This posture change occurs as a rotational movement in the direction of retreating from the rectangular box portion 618 (oblique upper left direction in a front view, rotational direction about the axis O1). collision can be easily avoided.

In this embodiment, due to this posture change, after the projecting decorative portion 652b is retracted from the position above the rectangular box portion 618 (see FIG. 91(a)), the full-fledged dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the projecting decoration The downward displacement of the portion 652b is started.

The downward displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b is caused by the downward displacement of the axis O1. ) (see FIG. 91(b)), there is a possibility that the projecting decorative portion 652b will collide with the rectangular box portion 618. As shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rectangular box portion 618 is provided with a concave portion 618 a formed along the shape of the long guide hole 616 on the left side surface. In particular, the recessed portion 618a is recessed at a position where the guide long hole 616 and the rectangular box portion 618 are closest to each other, that is, at the right end of the guide long hole 616. As shown in FIG. Thus, the design of the shape of the rectangular box portion 618 is studied with one purpose of avoiding collision between the front rotating member 652 and the rectangular box portion 618 .

Furthermore, since the posture of the decorative projection 652b continues to change as the axis O1 is displaced downward, the decorative projection 652b can be displaced in the direction away from the rectangular box portion 618. FIG. In the present embodiment, in the displacement from FIG. 91(a) to FIG. 91(b), the leftward displacement dimension XL1 (retraction distance) of the overhang decorative portion 652b corresponds to the rightward displacement dimension XR1 of the axis O1. Designed to be greater than or equal to (equal to or greater than) As a result, collision between the projecting decorative portion 652b and the rectangular box portion 618 can be avoided.

In the states shown in FIGS. 91(a) and 91(b), the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement associated with the attitude change of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are opposite to each other and cancel each other out. The lateral displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b is kept small.

On the other hand, in the states shown in FIGS. 91(b) to 92, the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement accompanying the attitude change of the overhanging decorative portion 652b are the same in the lateral direction. are superimposed on each other, the lateral displacement amount of the projecting decorative portion 652b is increased.

As a result, even though the posture of the decorative projection 652b is changed by rotating around the axis O1, the player will not be able to see the decorative projection 652b from FIG. 90(a). Up to FIG. 91(b), it is displaced in the vertical direction with a small lateral displacement (narrow displacement trajectory), and from FIG. 91(b) to FIG. I can show you.

Therefore, a difference can be provided between the structure (member shape) that guides the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b and the structure assumed by the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b seen by the player. As a result, it is possible to execute an unexpected effect.

In other words, the displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b can be seen by the player as if the projecting decorative portion 652b were popping out from the right side of the rectangular box portion 618 to the left. Therefore, in the left and right areas of the center frame 86 (see FIG. 30), where the width is narrow and sufficient displacement in the left and right direction cannot be ensured, it is possible to show the player an unexpected displacement in the left and right direction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the projecting decorative portion 652b.

For the sake of convenience, the lateral displacement of the axis O1 and the lateral displacement of the overhanging decorative portion 652b were compared, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, since the axis O1 is a part of the rotation axis of the configuration of the first operation unit 600, the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 configured to be rotatable about the rotation axis and the lateral displacement of the axis O1 They have the same meaning. Therefore, the above description may be understood as a comparison between the lateral displacement of the dish-shaped lid portion C2 and the lateral displacement of the projecting decorative portion 652b.

93 is a cross-sectional view of the first operating unit 600 taken along line XCIII-XCIII of FIG. 85. FIG. FIG. 93 shows a cross-sectional view in a plane through which the axis O1 and the rotation axis of the intermediate gear 644 pass. As shown in FIG. 93, the rear rotating member 654 is arranged in the bottomed tubular portion 645 from the front side, while the intermediate gear 644 is arranged in the main body portion 641 from the rear side, and communicates with an opening 645a formed therein. The gear tooth 654a and the intermediate gear 644 are meshed at a point.

As shown in FIG. 93, the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663 is formed larger than the outer diameter of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a, and the inner diameter of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 is smaller than the diameter of the wiring retaining plate 663. Therefore, the axial displacement of the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 can be restricted by the wiring retaining plate 663 .

In this embodiment, the axis-perpendicular rotating member 657 provides a slight gap between the stepped portions formed in the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a on the axial base end side (the upper side in FIG. 93) and the wiring retaining plate 663. are placed vacantly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 from coming off and to stabilize the arrangement of the axis-perpendicular rotation member 657 in the central axis direction of the cylindrical portion formed by the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a.

A fastening screw passing through the insertion hole 663b of the wiring retaining plate 663 is screwed into the female screw formed in each of the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a. As a result, the wiring retaining plate 663 and the semi-cylindrical portions 651d and 655a are integrally fixed.

As shown in FIG. 93, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged on the rear side compared to the second decorative rotary member 660, so that the third pattern display device 81 is arranged relative to the second decorative rotary member 660. (see FIG. 2) are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. In other words, it is arranged close to the opening 511a (see FIG. 26) in which the third pattern display device 81 is arranged in the front-rear direction.

As a result, compared to the case where the third pattern display device 81 and the projecting decorative portion 652b are arranged apart, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the area right end RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81. is arranged (see FIG. 29), and it is possible to make it easier to cause the player to see (illusion) that the display area is expanded to the right.

In particular, when the projecting decorative portion 652b and the second decorative rotating member 660 are viewed at the same time (for example, see FIG. 29), the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged away from the third pattern display device 81 toward the near side. Since it is easy to visually recognize independently of the display of the third pattern display device, on the contrary, the projecting decorative portion 652b arranged close to the third pattern display device 81 from the front side is used as part of the display. It can make the effect of making it look (illusory) stand out.

In other words, by preparing one particularly conspicuous object (corresponding to the second decorative rotating member 660), other configurations (corresponding to the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the projecting decorative portion 652b) can be discriminated. I am trying to keep it low. This makes it difficult to distinguish between the display of the third pattern display device 81 and the projecting decorative portion 652b.

The protruding decorative portion 652b is a portion formed from a hard resin, and the shape cannot be changed in the middle. The appearance (color, brightness, etc.) of the overhang decorative portion 652b can be changed by controlling to change the height, etc.).

Therefore, by changing the light emitting mode of the light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the electrical board 653 so as to match the moving image displayed in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the third pattern display device 81 The projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to overlap the area right end RE1 of the display area of (see FIG. 29), and the effect of giving the player the illusion that the display area is expanded to the right is easily generated. be able to.

Next, a detailed description of the second operation unit 700 will be given again. 94 is a front view of the second motion unit 700 in the extended state, and FIG. 95 is a cross-sectional view of the second motion unit 700 along line XCV-XCV in FIG. 94. FIG.

As described above, the second motion unit 700 is configured such that, in the sliding displacement, the up-down displacement and the front-rear direction displacement occur synchronously (the sliding displacement occurs in the front-rear direction when tilted obliquely). It is devised so that the displacement occurs smoothly so that the displacement is not overly noticeable.

For example, in the sliding displacement of the second motion unit 700, the oblique tilting displacement in the front-rear direction is not composed of a single displacement, but a combination of the vertical displacement and the front-rear displacement. It is configured.

That is, first, the elevating plate member 740 connected to the rotating arm member 720 is guided by the metal rod 702 at the left end so as to be vertically displaced in the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the metal rod 702 . At the left end, a left rear plate member 750 and blind decoration member 768 are also arranged in front of and behind the lift plate member 740 to prevent the lift plate member 740 from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction. Thereby, the displacement direction of the lifting plate member 740 can be limited to the vertical direction.

A right side portion of the lifting plate member 740 is supported by the rotating arm member 720 . The right end of the elevating plate member 740 is not supported by a fixed member (a member fixed to the back case 510), but is indirectly fixed via the production device 780 (the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751). and receiving inclined portion 762) (see FIG. 54). As a result, the right end of the lift plate member 740 is prevented from being freely displaced in the front-rear direction, and the displacement direction of the lift plate member 740 can be limited in the vertical direction.

The effect device 780 supported by the elevating plate member 740 is guided by the cylindrical portion 744 (see FIG. 50) so as to be displaced in the front-rear direction. In this way, in order to realize the sliding displacement in the front-rear direction tilted obliquely, the displacement guidance of the lifting plate member 740 and the production device 780 as the constituent members is divided into the gravity direction and the horizontal direction. It is

As a result, compared to a configuration that guides in an obliquely tilted front-rear direction, it is possible to facilitate a configuration in which displacement resistance is maintained low.

The extended state of the second operating unit 700 illustrated in FIGS. 94 and 95 is controllable to perform a displacement (see FIG. 57) that switches the state of the covering member 787 . That is, in the present embodiment, in other states of the extended state (for example, the effect standby state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 28) and the intermediate effect state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 33)), the The second operating unit 700 is controlled such that no displacements that switch the state of the setting member 787 occur.

By controlling in this manner, the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 are positioned so as to overlap the left and right positions reached by the left and right ends of the covering member 787 when the covering member 787 is displaced to switch its state. Even if they are arranged, it is possible to prevent the covering member 787 from colliding with the right front plate member 710 or the left rear plate member 750 . Therefore, the degree of freedom in arrangement of the right front plate member 710 and the left rear plate member 750 can be improved.

A contrivance of the configuration of the rendering device 780 for the displacement for switching the state of the covering member 787 will be described. First, the driving motor 782 (see FIG. 56) that generates the driving force for the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is positioned at the center of the production device 780 (at the center of the inserting cylindrical portion 773 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 744). centered directly above).

As a result, not only is it possible to prevent the direction of the effect device 780 from tilting to the left or right due to the weight of the drive motor 782, but the left-right balance of the driving force generated from the drive motor 782 can be stabilized.

Furthermore, in the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 95) capable of executing displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787, the cylindrical fastened portion 724 of the rotating arm member 720 that supports the lifting plate member 740 The left and right position of is equal to the left and right center position of the production device 780 or is set to the right side.

In this way, while supporting the right side portion of the lifting plate member 740 is constituted only by the rotating arm member 720 capable of displacing the cylindrical fastened portion 724 as a supporting position in the left-right direction, the effect device 780 is particularly arranged. When it is assumed that the position of the cover member 787 is likely to change, that is, when the covering member 787 is displaced to change its state, the cylindrical to-be-fastened portion 724 is placed at the same position as the left-right center position of the effect device 780 or at the right side position. By setting, the arrangement and posture of the effect device 780 can be stabilized.

Note that the control for executing the displacement that switches the state of the covering member 787 is performed only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state. It is possible to control the state of the 2-operation unit 700 to change to an effect waiting state or an intermediate effect state.

That is, for example, in order to switch the state of the covering member 787 from the effect waiting state of the second motion unit 700 and bring the second motion unit 700 into the intermediate effect state, the second motion unit 700 is stretched once. After executing the displacement to switch the state of the covering member 787 as the out state, the second motion unit 700 is controlled to be displaced downward so as to change to the intermediate effect state.

As shown in FIG. 95, the light diffusing member 778b is formed long in the left-right direction to such an extent that it overlaps the inner end portions of the pair of front support members 760 when viewed in the front-rear direction. As a result, the rotary tube portion 774e (see FIG. 54) supported by the front support member 760 can be hidden from the player, so that the player can grasp the arrangement and shape of the rotary tube portion 774e. Thus, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player grasps that the effect device 780 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Furthermore, in the extended state of the second operation unit 700, the light diffusing member 778b and the fixedly arranged three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are visible in a straight line on the left and right in a front view (see FIG. 94). In this state, the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a are arranged along the lower edge of the third pattern display device 81 in front view and across the left and right length of the lower edge.

On the back side of the light diffusion member 778b and the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a, substrates to which the LEDs are fixed are arranged respectively on the front side. can be executed. By this light emitting effect, the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is made to look like it is separated by light, or the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81 is made brighter by light. You can direct to

Therefore, according to this embodiment, the light diffusing member 778b has a function as a member that hides the rotary cylinder portion 774e (see FIG. 54) and a function as a member that performs light emission effects jointly with the three-dimensional decoration portion 768a. It can be configured to combine

As shown in FIG. 95, the horizontally elongated member 742 is behind the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a and is covered with a front side space in a range (left range) outside the rear of the light diffusion member 778b. A setting cover 742a is provided.

The covering cover 742a is a blindfold member formed over the vertical width of the horizontal member 742, and is arranged so that the electrical wiring can be passed through the gap between the horizontal member 742 and the covering cover 742a. That is, the electric wiring for energizing the effect device 780 is guided to the effect device 780 side from behind the blindfold decorative member 768 through the gap between the covering cover 742a and the horizontally long member 742, and is guided to the drive motor 782. , the electrical board 778a, the detection sensor 778d (see FIG. 56), and the like.

At this time, not only the covering cover 742a but also the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a are arranged in a folded manner in front of the electrical wiring, so that the player's line of sight is easily blocked, and the electrical wiring is It is possible to make it easier to prevent being visually recognized by the player.

In other words, the light diffusing member 778b and the three-dimensional decorative portion 768a, which are originally arranged for light production, are arranged in front of the path of the electric wiring so as to function as a blindfold for the electric wiring. The size of the covering cover 742a required for blindfolding can be minimized.

In addition, since the arrangement of the three-dimensional decoration part 768a is fixed, it does not overlap the horizontal member 742 in the standby state (see FIG. 31) or the intermediate effect state (see FIG. 33), and the electric wiring can be hidden. Not available.

Considering this, in the present embodiment, the formation range of the laterally elongated member 742 is set to the range outside the light diffusion member 778b when viewed from the front. As a result, the horizontal member 742 and the light diffusing member 778 can hide the electrical wiring. can be prevented from being viewed by the player.

96 and 97 are front views of the transmission device holding plate 777, the vertical reversing member 781, the intermediate arm member 783, the linear motion plate member 784 and the shaft rotating member 785. FIG. FIG. 96 shows a horizontally arranged state of the up-down reversing member 781 in which a pair of cylindrical projecting portions 781c are arranged on the same straight line extending in the left-right direction, and FIG. (See FIG. 59(c)) is illustrated.

The pair of intermediate arm members 783 are not formed in the same shape, but are provided with curved portions 783d that are curved upward from the lower surface of the vertically reversing member 781 in the horizontally arranged state. The curved portion 783d is curved to protrude in a direction away from the driving gear 782a in order to avoid collision between the intermediate arm member 783 and the driving gear 782a when the upside down member 781 is vertically arranged.

FIG. 98 is a front perspective view of the up/down reversal effect device 770. FIG. In FIG. 98, the outer shape of the covering member 787 is schematically illustrated by imaginary lines so that the inside can be seen through the covering member 787 .

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged near both left and right ends, not on the side where the pair of covering members 787 are arranged close to each other. Therefore, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg acts independently on the pair of covering members 787 instead of directly joining the covering members 787 together.

As a result, for example, when one of the covering members 787 malfunctions, it is possible to prevent the other covering member 787 from malfunctioning as well.

Further, for example, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the horizontal direction, it is possible to prevent the magnetic force from acting in the opposite direction of the horizontal displacement. That is, when the upside-down reversing member 781 starts rotating from the upright vertically arranged state, the timing at which the magnetic force acts can be delayed.

As a result, when the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the horizontal direction, it is possible to suppress the change in the load applied to the covering members 787 by the magnet Mg. When the pair of covering members 787 begin to move away from each other in the left-right direction, the covering members 787 vibrate or become displaced due to a sudden change in magnetic force. It is possible to make it easier to avoid a situation in which the system becomes stable and malfunctions occur.

As shown in FIG. 98, the magnets Mg are arranged on opposite sides vertically, and the effect of this will be described. The rotational position stabilizing portion 785f to which the metal screw that abuts the magnet Mg and is loaded with magnetic force is fixed is arranged on the same side in the front-rear direction (the front side when the upside-down member 781 is vertically arranged in an upright position; 55). Therefore, the direction of the load generated on the magnet Mg in relation to the metal screw is the same in the front and back direction on both the left and right sides.

More specifically, for example, when the upside-down reversing member 781 changes from an upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(a)) to an inverted vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(c)), the covering member 781 on the left side in front view is changed. Since the member 787 rotates in the forward direction, the forward displacement of the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located above) causes the magnet Mg to move forward as a reaction to the attractive force. While a load is generated, the covering member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the backward direction. A forward load is generated on Mg as a reaction to the adsorption force.

Further, for example, when the upside-down reversing member 781 changes from an inverted vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(c)) to an upright vertically arranged state (see FIG. 59(a)), the covering member 787 on the left side in the front view rotates in the direction of backward rotation, a backward load is applied to the magnet Mg as a reaction to the attractive force as the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located on the upper side) is displaced backward. On the other hand, since the covering member 787 on the right side in the front view rotates in the forward direction, the metal screw arranged close to the magnet Mg (located on the lower side) is displaced rearward, causing the magnet Mg to rotate. A rearward load is generated as a reaction to the adsorption force.

In this way, the direction of the load generated by the magnet Mg between the rotating covering member 787 and the main body member 771 and the direct-acting plate member 784 supporting the covering member 787 while maintaining its posture is It is configured to be the front and rear in the same direction.

Here, when a load in the front-rear reverse direction is generated on both the left and right sides (for example, by placing the left magnet Mg at the lower position, the left and right magnets Mg are placed at the lower position, and the left shaft rotation member 785 is placed at the lower position). When the design of the rotational position stabilizing portion 785f is changed so that it is arranged on the back side of the magnet Mg in the upright vertical arrangement state), the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state raises and lowers. A mode of displacement given to the reversal effect device 770 is a mode in which the up/down reversal effect device 770 is rotated by a rotation shaft extending in the vertical direction.

In this case, vibrations in the rotational direction of the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction are likely to occur in the up/down reversal effect device 770 . In particular, as in the present embodiment, the bevel tooth member 785c (see FIG. 96) is elastically deformed in the process of releasing the attraction of the magnet Mg, and the elastic recovery of the bevel tooth member 785c is utilized after the attraction of the magnet Mg is released. In the configuration in which the covering member 787 is vigorously rotated, it is assumed that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is likely to vibrate in the rotational direction about the rotating shaft extending in the vertical direction.

Furthermore, it becomes difficult to relieve the load from the up/down reversal effect device 770, and there is a possibility that the up/down reversal effect device 770 is damaged or the durability of the up/down reversal effect device 770 is lowered. Therefore, in view of the purpose of stabilizing the displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 in the long term, it is considered necessary to take countermeasures.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state, the cover member 787 rotates and the body member 771 supports the cover member 787 while maintaining its posture. Since the direction of the load generated between the moving plate member 784 and the moving plate member 784 is configured to be the same in the front and rear direction on both the left and right sides, the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are peeled off from the attracted state is used to produce a vertical reversal effect. The mode of displacement given to the device 770 can be a mode in which the vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction.

Therefore, the displacement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 (displacement having a component in the front-rear direction) can be easily offset, and the up/down reversal effect device 770 is damaged by the load generated when the magnet Mg and the metal screw are separated from the attracted state. can be avoided.

In the second motion unit 700, the direction of slide displacement of the rendering device 780 (the direction having a vertical component and a longitudinal component, that is, the direction in the plane orthogonal to the horizontal direction) and the covering member 787 are arranged close to each other. and the displacement start direction (horizontal direction) from the state where the vertical reversing member 781 is vertically arranged) are perpendicular to each other.

Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid the displacement of one due to the inertia of the displacement of the other. For example, when the effect device 780 is slid and displaced, it is easy to avoid a situation in which the covering members 787 are unintentionally started to displace (displace in directions away from each other) from the state in which they are arranged close to each other. be able to.

Next, a detailed description of the third operation unit 800 will be given again. First, details of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described. 99(a) is a front perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 99(b) is a rear perspective view of the intermediate arm member 850. FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 99( a ) and 99 ( b ), the intermediate arm member 850 has a characteristic shape in which the axial position of the long rod portion is switched at the thickened portion 852 .

As shown in FIG. 99(a), the thickened portion 852 is arranged to face the distal end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent rotating member 850, and is arranged to face the distal end side rod portion 853 and the proximal side reinforcing portion 852a. , and a concave portion 852b which is hollowed out from the front side along the axial direction.

The base-end reinforcing portion 852a is lightened in the same manner as the recessed portion 852b, but is designed to have a relatively small lightening amount and a high deformation resistance. As a result, even if contact is made with the distal end side rod portion 853 formed on the rotational distal end side of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase, excessive deformation can be avoided. can do.

The recessed portion 852 b acts to weaken the resistance to elastic deformation of the thickened portion 852 . Thereby, the flexibility of the thickened portion 852 can be ensured, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

On both lateral side surfaces of the increased thickness portion 852, there are formed curved portions 852c that are concavely formed in a curved shape. The curved shape portion 852c can smoothly receive the curved shape portion 854d formed on the rotation base end side of the rotation transmission portion 854 formed on the end portion of the distal end side rod portion 853 of the adjacent intermediate arm member 850 in the combined state. formed from a shape.

In this embodiment, the rotation direction of the intermediate arm members 850 when the adjacent intermediate arm members 850 are rotated and arranged close to each other is Since they are reversed, which of the lateral side surfaces of the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged close to the curved portion 854d depends on which combined state is configured.

On this premise, since the curved portion 852c is formed on both side surfaces, the curved portion 854d can be smoothly received in any combined state. As a result, the state change to the united state can be executed smoothly.

In addition, since the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d are designed so that they can contact with each other at their surfaces, an excessive load is applied locally between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the combined state. can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

The third operation unit 800 is configured to be vertically displaceable by the elevating arm member 801. The direction of the elevating displacement and the start of displacement of the linear motion member 833 and the rotating member 834 from the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 are as follows. and are not necessarily orthogonal to each other.

For example, as shown in FIG. 66(a), virtual position lines 832F recognized as displacement starting directions of the rotating members 834 are set as different directions at intervals of 72 degrees. , and the direction of vertical displacement cannot be perpendicular to each other.

Therefore, there is a possibility that the load and inertia that occur when the third operation unit 800 is vertically displaced unintentionally cause a rotation operation (an integral rotation operation or a switching rotation operation). A device for countermeasures against this malfunction will be described.

FIG. 100 is a schematic diagram of the third operation unit 800 schematically showing the displacement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIG.

In FIG. 100, of the imaginary position lines 832F of the metal rods 832, the imaginary position line 832F extending downward in the individually combined state and the angle between the imaginary position line 832F and the longitudinal direction of the intermediate arm member 850 are 0.5 degrees. and a virtual position line 832F rotated counterclockwise in front view until changed.

That is, FIG. 100 shows a state where the angle θ51 is 45 degrees and the angle θ52 is 44.5 degrees.

As shown in FIG. 100, the intermediate arm member 850 slides the rotating member 834 along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 while suppressing the rotating motion of the rotating member 834 at the start of the switching rotating motion. configured to allow

The amount of change in angles θ51 and θ52 in FIG. 100 means the rotation angle of intermediate arm member 850 with respect to metal rod 832, and corresponds to the angle at which engagement rotation of bevel teeth 834a and 854c (see FIG. 61) occurs. .

Here, backlash (clearance) is essential for the meshing of the gear teeth to be upright, and the setting of the size of this clearance changes the responsiveness of rotation. Various aspects can be selected for setting the backlash, but in this embodiment, the backlash is set at 0.5 degrees.

That is, until the angle θ51 in the combined state changes to the angle θ52, the backlash (gap) is merely filled and the engagement rotation is not started. On the other hand, the rotation tip side portion of the intermediate arm member 850 slides radially outward of the third operation unit 800 along the imaginary position line 832F.

That is, at the start of the switching rotation operation from the united state (individually united state), the rotational operation of the rotating member 834 is suppressed, and the sliding movement mainly along the metal rod 832 occurs.

101 is a schematic front view of the third operation unit 800. FIG. In the description of FIG. 101, FIG. 100 will be referred to as appropriate. In FIG. 101, the third motion unit 800 is shown in a combined state, and the torque limiter 866 and magnet Mg2 that provide resistance to displacement of the third motion unit 800 are shown.

Here, it is configured so that the rotating member 834 does not rotate when the inner rotating member 830 slightly rotates relative to the outer rotating member 840 (for example, rotating about 5 degrees (see FIG. 100)). ing.

As a result, as in the present embodiment, even if the magnet Mg2 is employed to maintain the united state of the plurality of first decorative members 870 and the second decorative members 880, and the attracting force is generated in the circumferential direction. , since the displacement of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 from the combined state can be limited to linear motion displacement, the combined state by the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can be easily maintained.

In other words, when the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 rotate around the metal rod 832 at the start of displacement from the combined state, the first decorative member moves in the direction perpendicular to the direction of the magnetic force. Since the 870 and the second decorative member 880 are displaced, the magnetic force is likely to disappear. On the other hand, in this embodiment, the displacement at the start of the displacement from the combined state of the first decorative member 870 and the second decorative member 880 is the displacement along the plane on which the five magnets Mg2 are arranged (the metal rod 832 ), it is easy to maintain the combined state due to the magnetic force.

As a result, even if the inner rotating member 830 unintentionally rotates slightly (for example, rotates about 5 degrees) due to the influence of an unintended load, the plurality of first decoration members 870 and the second decorations 870 and 830 can rotate. The combined state of the members 880 can be easily maintained.

As shown in FIG. 101, the torque limiter 866 cuts the connection when a load exceeding a predetermined allowable value is applied in forward rotation, and reduces the resistance (idling) so as to generate switching rotation DR1. In the reverse direction rotation, idling rotation AR1 is generated so that the resistance is reduced (idling). The torque limiter 866 is composed of a pair of reversed forward and reverse rotations.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the left torque limiter 866 generates resistance in clockwise rotation when viewed from the front until the applied load reaches a permissible value, and when the permissible value is exceeded, the switching rotation DR1 causes idling. On the other hand, in the counterclockwise rotation direction when viewed from the front, it is configured to cause idling rotation AR1.

In addition, the torque limiter 866 on the right side is configured to cause idling rotation AR1 in the clockwise rotation direction as viewed from the front, while the applied load does not exceed the allowable value in the counterclockwise rotation direction as viewed from the front. It is configured to generate a switching rotation DR1 in which resistance is generated until reaching the allowable value, and idling occurs when the allowable value is exceeded.

In this manner, the pair of torque limiters 866 function as safety clutches in different rotational directions, thereby enabling switching rotational motion in both directions, as described above.

Furthermore, in a state where a load exceeding the allowable value in the rotational direction does not occur, resistance is applied to the outer rotating member 840 in both forward and reverse directions via the load response gear 865 (see FIG. 61) assembled to the torque limiter 866. , it is possible to suppress the rotational movement of the outer rotating member 840 that may be caused by unintended load (inertial force of vertical displacement and impact force when opening and closing the door). Therefore, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 can be maintained by the set of torque limiters 866 .

As shown in FIG. 101, the magnet Mg2 is fixed to one side of the second covering portion 885 in the width direction, and arranged concentrically when the five second covering portions 885 are annularly united. The magnet Mg2 generates an attractive force with the metal screw Nj2 fixed to the second covering portion 885 which is adjacently arranged.

With this configuration, when the magnets Mg2 are arranged on both sides in the width direction of the specific second covering portion 885 (that is, when the magnets Mg2 are arranged adjacent to the specific second covering portion 885 on both sides) Both of the covering portions 885 are separated from the specific second covering portion 885 in the combined state compared to the case where the magnet Mg2 receives the biasing force in the direction toward the specific second covering portion 885). It is possible to prevent the gaps between the second covering parts 885 from becoming large at different positions, and to make the gaps between all the adjacent second covering parts 885 uniform.

Further, as described above, the displacement of the second decorative member 880 from the combined state is configured as a radially outward sliding movement, and until the rotational movement about the metal rod 832 is started, the combination due to the magnetic force has not occurred. When separated to the extent that they are released (see FIG. 100), the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 acts in the direction of shortening the circumference of the concentric circles in which the second decorative members 880 are aligned (direction facing the center of the concentric circles). It acts as a resistance to the radially outward sliding movement of the second decorative member 880 .

In addition, since this resistance force is generated in the same magnitude from each direction that divides 360 degrees into 5, it is possible to balance the load that the third operation unit 800 receives from the magnet Mg2. That is, compared to the case where the magnetic force Mg2 acts unevenly, the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be easily stabilized.

The five second decorative members 880 have the same shape, and the arrangement of the magnets Mg2 is also the same, so that the front and rear positions of the magnets Mg2 are the same. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second decorative member 880 from being subjected to a load having a component in the front-rear direction due to the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2. occurs in the front-rear direction, and the second decorative member 880 can be easily avoided from vibrating in the front-rear direction.

102 is a front view of outer rotating member 840 and middle arm member 850. FIG. In FIG. 102, the arrangement state corresponding to the individually combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is illustrated. 840 is made visible.

As shown in FIG. 102, in this embodiment, at least one portion that restricts the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 in one direction (clockwise direction in front view in FIG. 102) can be secured. In many cases, the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 is restricted at two points. A configuration for restricting the rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 will be described.

First, there is a contact projecting portion 845 projecting radially outward from the outer peripheral surface of the body portion 841 of the outer rotating member 840 . The contact protruding portion 845 is tapered radially outward at an intermediate angular position between the adjacent extended arm portions 842, and the inside is hollowed out in a direction parallel to the axial direction of the main body portion 841. ing.

The contact projecting portion 845 is arranged to face the intermediate arm member 850 in the rotation direction of the intermediate arm member 850, and is arranged so as to be able to contact the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850. , to prevent excessive rotation of the intermediate arm member 850 .

The thickened portion 852 is weakened in resistance to elastic deformation by the concave portion 852b (see FIG. 99(a)). Similarly, the contact projecting portion 845 is lightened. As a result, even if the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced at a high speed and the curved portion 852c of the thickened portion 852 collides with the abutment projecting portion 845, the load generated at that time is absorbed by the abutment projecting portion. Since elastic deformation of 845 and thickened portion 852 can be absorbed, breakage of contact projecting portion 845 and thickened portion 852 can be avoided.

The contact protruding portion 845 is not provided at all intermediate angular positions of the extended arm portion 842, but is omitted at the angular position where the detected portion 844 is formed. As a result, the contact projecting portion 845 and the detected portion 844 are displaced from each other when viewed in the axial direction, and the direction in which the outer rotating member 840 is removed from the mold can be set in the axial direction of the main body portion 841 . . Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the design of the molding die.

As described above, in this embodiment, the formation of the abutment projecting portion 845 is omitted in exchange for simplification of the design of the molding die. As a second configuration, the thickened portion 852 is formed with a base end reinforcing portion 852a.

The proximal side reinforcing portion 852a is arranged to face the distal side rod portion 853 (see FIG. 99(a)) in the rotation direction of the adjacent rotating member 850, and can abut when the distal side rod portion 853 is over-rotated. , the intermediate arm member 850 is configured to prevent excessive rotation.

The base-end reinforcing portion 852a is lightened in the same manner as the recessed portion 852b, but is designed to have a relatively small lightening amount and a high deformation resistance. As a result, even if the rotary arm member 850 comes into contact with the tip of the rotating arm member 850, which is the side where the inertial force in rotation tends to increase, it is possible to avoid an excessive amount of deformation.

The curved shape portion 852c is designed so that it can come into contact with the curved shape portion 854d on its surface, and an excessive load is not locally generated between the curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d in the combined state. can be suppressed, and the durability of the intermediate arm member 850 can be improved.

In this way, when the contact projecting portions 845 are arranged to face each other, the displacement of the rotating arm member 850 is not only the contact with the contact projecting portion 845 but also the displacement of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 . The curved shape portion 852c and the curved shape portion 854d can be brought into contact with each other, and the base end side reinforcement portion 852a of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 can be brought into contact with the tip end side rod portion 853. , excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 is restricted.

On the other hand, even if the arrangement of the contact projecting portion 845 is omitted, the curved portion 852c and the curved portion 854d of the adjacent rotating arm member 850 are brought into contact with each other, or the adjacent rotating arm member Excessive rotation of the rotating arm member 850 can be restricted by a configuration in which the proximal reinforcing portion 852a of the rotating arm member 850 and the distal end rod portion 853 can be brought into contact with each other.

These abutment configurations are configured so that the five pivot arm members 850 are associated with each other (circularly arranged). Therefore, at first glance, the formation of one abutting projecting portion 845 is omitted, and since there is little configuration for restricting the rotation of only the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the omitted portion, the load at the time of contact may be concentrated. However, in reality, the interaction of the five rotating arm members 850 can disperse the load at the time of contact.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the durability of the single rotating arm member 850 (the rotating arm member 850 corresponding to the portion where the contact projecting portion 845 is omitted) from being extremely deteriorated.

In addition, the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 extending in the shape of an annular plate on one plane along the back side end portion of the contact projection portion 845 from the outer peripheral surface of the main body portion 841 is also the same as the contact projection portion. As with the portion 845, portions overlapping the detected portion 844 when viewed in the axial direction are omitted.

Omitting the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as compensation for simplification of the design of the molding die, similarly to the omission of the formation of the contact projecting portion 845 described above. The effect of the portion 846 is achieved by the adjacent rotating arm member 850 (the structure for supporting the same) even in a portion where the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted.

That is, the effect of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 can be explained as correction of the displacement of the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 . That is, from the combined state (see FIG. 64(a)), the rotating arm member 850 is displaced radially outward (see FIG. 65(a)). 99(b)), the rear side surface of the base-end rod portion 851 (see FIG. 99(b)) is arranged to face the annular plate-shaped portion 846 and can come into contact therewith. As a result, the front-rear position of the rotating arm member 850 can be corrected by the abutment.

This action cannot be achieved if the annular plate-shaped portion 846 is omitted, because contact with the annular plate-shaped portion 846 does not occur. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the rear side surface of the distal end side rod portion 853 of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842, so that the distal end of the rotating arm member 850 is arranged Even if the position is shifted back and forth, the rear side surface of the distal end side rod portion 853 is arranged to face the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842 so as to be able to come into contact with the front side surface of the extended arm portion 842, so that the contact causes rotation. The fore-and-aft position of the arm member 850 can be modified.

Thus, in this embodiment, the extension arm portion 842 is configured to produce the same action as the annular plate portion 846 . As a result, the effect of correcting the front-to-rear arrangement of the rotating arm member 850 can be produced in all the rotating arm members 850 while partially omitting the formation of the annular plate-shaped portion 846 .

103(a) is a rear view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850, and FIG. 103(b) is a front view of the outer rotating member 840 and the intermediate arm member 850. FIG. In Figures 103(a) and 103(b), the relative positioning of the outer rotating member 840 and the middle arm member 850 in one union is illustrated.

The state illustrated in FIG. 103(a) is a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state in FIG. 65(b) to the maximum angle θ31E (180 degrees in this embodiment) (state in which the switching rotation operation has been completed). 103(b) is a state in which the virtual position line 832F has rotated from the state in FIG. completed state).

Comparing the united state and the individually united state (see FIGS. 64(a) and 66(a)), the lateral side of the intermediate arm member 850 close to the outer rotating member 840 is reversed, so that the abutment There is a difference that the curved shape portion 852c that contacts the projecting portion 845 is on the opposite side, and the curved shape portion 852c that contacts the curved shape portion 854d is on the opposite side.

For the purpose of accommodating this difference, the contact projecting portion 845 has a line-symmetrical shape in a front view with respect to the radial direction of the main body portion 841, and the pair of curved portions 852c and 854d , with respect to the longitudinal direction line of the intermediate arm member 850 (a straight line connecting the base end of rotation and the supported hole 854a).

Further, the curved shape of the contact projecting portion 845 and the curved shape of the curved portion 854d are designed to be similar curved shapes in accordance with the shape of the curved portion 852c. As a result, the combined state can be configured with the same engagement relationship in both the individual combined state and the one combined state.

In the combined state, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 is sandwiched between the contact projecting portion 845 and the curved portion 854d from both sides. As a result, the thickened portion 852 of the intermediate arm member 850 can be prevented from being displaced in any rotational direction, so that the state of the intermediate arm member 850 can be easily maintained, and the combined state can be maintained. can be made easier.

104 and 105 are front views of the third operation unit 800. FIG. FIG. 104 shows a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position (an intermediate state between the individual combined state and the one combined state), and FIG. 105 shows the one combined state.

106 is a cross-sectional view of the third operation unit 800 along line CVI-CVI in FIG. 105, and FIG. 107 is a cross-sectional view of third operation unit 800 along line CVII-CVII in FIG. As the configuration of the third operation unit 800, the front-rear arrangement of the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 can be set arbitrarily.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal bar 832, the player can see the metal bar 832 through the intermediate arm member 850, so that the visibility of the metal bar 832 can be lowered. On the other hand, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 106 and 107, the metal rod 832 is arranged on the front side of the intermediate arm member 850. As shown in FIGS.

With this arrangement, the metal bar 832 as a supporting member functions as a shielding member that partially hides the intermediate arm member 850 . As a result, the intermediate arm member 850, which is not a decorative member but a functional member, can be prevented from being conspicuous, and the appearance of the third operation unit 800 can be improved.

In the exposed state (see FIG. 104), the metal bar 832 also functions as a rendering member that reflects light due to the luster of the surface. The performance effect can be improved. In other words, the metal bar 832 can be used as a reflecting member for light production.

If the intermediate arm member 850 is arranged on the front side of the metal rod 832, there is a possibility that the intermediate arm member 850 will block the light entering the player's eyes. Since it is arranged on the back side of 832, it is possible to avoid the light being blocked by the intermediate arm member 850 and the poor appearance.

As described above, in the present embodiment, light can be reflected via the metal rod 832 in the state in which the metal rod 832 is exposed (see FIGS. 104 and 107) during the switching rotation operation. , the range in which the light effect is performed can be extended. That is, it is arranged not only in the rear range of the translucent decorative member 824 where the electrical decoration substrate 823 (see FIG. 60) is arranged, but also in a front view so as to protrude radially outward of the translucent decorative member 824 . Even in the range ER1 (see FIG. 104) where the metal bar 832 is exposed and visually recognized, the reflected light can be visually recognized by the player.

As a portion that receives light, the bulging portion 824a has, on its inner peripheral surface, a light diffusion shape portion 824b (see FIGS. 106 and 107) having an annular light diffusion shape. The light emitted from the inner light emitting portion 823a can be emitted to the light diffusing shape portion 824b, and the light diffusing shape portion 824b that receives the light shines brightly in an annular shape.

As a result, not only the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880, but also the light diffusing shape portion 824b can be visually recognized brightly in a circular shape during the switching rotation operation in which the circular arrangement of the decorative members 870 and 880 is cancelled. Thus, it is possible to easily maintain the rendering effect using the annular shape of the third operation unit 800 .

As shown in FIGS. 104 and 105, the light-transmitting decorative member 824 includes not only a bulging portion 824a that is visually recognized in the combined state, but also an extended portion that extends radially outward from the bulging portion 824a in a front view. 824c.

The extended portion 824c is hidden by the decorative members 870 and 880 in the combined state, and thus has a low function as a decorative portion. .

That is, as shown in FIGS. 104 and 107, the extended portion 824c is difficult to use for performance, such as the body portion 831 of the inner rotary member 830 and the extended arm portion 842 of the outer rotary member 840 (see FIG. 61). It is formed in a size large enough to shield and blind the mechanism part.

Since the decorative pattern is applied not only to the bulging portion 824a but also to the front side of the extended portion 824c, the decorative pattern can be visually recognized in the range where the mechanical portion is shielded and blinded. You can improve the effect.

An example of drive control of the third operation unit 800 will be described. First, the relationship between the up-and-down displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to drive control of the lift arm member 801 and the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 due to drive control of the drive motor 861 will be described.

According to this embodiment, the vertical displacement and rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 are configured to be independently executable. Rotational displacement may occur in the third operation unit 800 in conjunction with this. In this case, the posture of the third operating unit 800 changes, or the combined state of the third operating unit 800 is released (the decorative members 870 and 880 are displaced radially outward against the attractive force of the magnet Mg2). As a result, there is a possibility that the production effect will decrease.

In order to avoid this, for example, the up-down displacement of the third operation unit 800 and the rotational displacement (particularly, integral rotation operation) of the third operation unit 800 may be controlled to be performed at the same time.

As a result, the rotational displacement of the third motion unit 800 during the up-and-down displacement can be shown to the player as a performance motion, so that the performance effect can be prevented from deteriorating. Furthermore, while the integral rotation operation continues, the load continues to be applied in the direction of displacing the decorative members 870 and 880 inward in the radial direction (see FIG. 101), so that the combined state of the third operation unit 800 can be canceled. can be avoided.

In addition, even if control is not performed to simultaneously execute vertical displacement and rotational displacement, the posture of the third motion unit 800 is adjusted in advance so that the rotating arm member 850 is less likely to be displaced by the vertical displacement. Control may be performed to adjust the orientation of the unit 800 in the rotational direction.

A change in the detection mode of the detected portion 844 of the outer rotating member 840 by the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 68) means that, in this embodiment, the rotating mode of the inner rotating member 830 is executed in integral rotation. means. Therefore, it is assumed that the detection mode of the detection sensor 813 and the control of the third operation unit 800 are associated with each other and designed on the premise of this.

This premise is based on the fact that the switching rotation operation is performed in a state in which the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained (a state in which the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 are not interlocked). Therefore, it is preferable to avoid situations in which this premise may be violated.

In this embodiment, when the rotation of the inner rotating member 830 is controlled by the driving force of the driving motor 861, the resistance applied by the torque limiter 866 acts to suppress the rotation of the outer rotating member 840, thereby The posture of 840 is maintained.

Therefore, for example, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the direct-acting member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 increases during the switching rotation operation, and the motion resistance between the inner rotating member 830 and the outer rotating member 840 increases. increases and exceeds the resistance exerted by the torque limiter, the outer rotating member 840 and the inner rotating member 830 may interlock, preventing the switching rotation from being performed properly.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834 and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced.

For example, the displacement direction of the tip of the intermediate arm member 850 that displaces the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 from the combined state is along the longitudinal direction of the metal rod 832 . That is, since the intermediate arm member 850 is displaced in a direction perpendicular to the direction of rotation of the metal rod 832, resistance to the rotation of the metal rod 832 is less likely to occur. and the resistance generated between the middle arm member 850 can be kept small.

In the state where the linear motion member 833 and the rotary member 834 are arranged at the radially outer end positions (see FIG. 104), the displacement direction of the rotation tip side (for example, the supported hole 854a) of the intermediate arm member 850 is the metal rod. Since it follows the rotation direction of 832, it is easy to configure a state in which the metal rod 832 and the intermediate arm member 850 move in parallel, especially when the speed is insufficient. In this case, the switching rotation operation becomes defective.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a control mode is adopted in which, once the switching rotation operation is started, the drive is continued at a sufficient speed until the united state is reached. When placed in position (see FIG. 104), the decorative members 870, 880 are subject to inertia so as to rotate about the metal rod 832. As shown in FIG.

Under the influence of this inertia, the rotary member 834 fastened and fixed to the decorative members 870 and 880 rotates, and the bevel tooth portion 834a and the bevel tooth portion 854c engage and rotate. It rotates radially inward through the radially outer end position (see FIGS. 65(b) and 67(b)).

When the intermediate arm member 850 is out of the radially outer end position, it becomes easier for the rotation tip side of the intermediate arm member 850 to be displaced in the direction along the metal rod 832, and the resistance to the rotational movement of the metal rod 832 can be easily suppressed.

As described above, in this embodiment, the resistance between the metal rod 832, the linear motion member 833, the rotating member 834, and the intermediate arm member 850 is reduced by designing the relationship between the members and the drive control. there is

During the switching rotation operation, the posture of the outer rotating member 840 is maintained, and the arrangement of the detected portion 844 does not change. I can't judge.

For example, the control to stop the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached can be realized by presetting a necessary and sufficient drive time for the switching rotation operation and controlling to stop the drive at that drive time. However, depending on the degree of resistance between the metal rod 832, linear motion member 833, rotating member 834, and intermediate arm member 850, the amount of displacement may differ even if the drive time is the same. It may stop working. In this case, there is a possibility that the performance effect will be reduced.

On the other hand, instead of the control mode of stopping the drive motor 861 at the timing when the united state is reached, the detection mode of the detected part 844 by the detection sensor 813 is changed, so that the switching rotation operation is completed and the integral rotation operation is started. It may be determined that it has started (see FIG. 68), and after this determination, the drive motor 861 may be controlled to stop. With this control, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the drive motor 861 is stopped before the decorative members 870 and 880 reach the united state after the switching rotation operation is executed.

As drive control, the switching rotation operation is performed in the extended state of the third operation unit 800 as described above, but the integral rotation operation can be performed regardless of the state of the third operation unit 800. is.

As drive control, the switching rotation operation can be executed without being influenced by the arrangement of the rotation direction of the third operation unit 800. Therefore, as described above with reference to FIG. can be avoided. That is, the state is not limited to the state in which the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 (see FIG. 66A), but the state in which the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813. The switching rotation operation can be performed even from

On the other hand, unlike the case where the switching rotation operation is performed in a state where the detection target portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, the detection target portion 844 is positioned in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 after the switching rotation operation is completed. Since the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change until the vehicle enters the vehicle, it is necessary to devise a control mode.

For example, regardless of the output of the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation may be executed in a drive period set in advance as a driving period necessary and sufficient for the switching rotation operation. The drive motor 861 may be controlled to continue driving until it enters the detection groove.

In the latter case, after the switching rotation operation is completed, the operation mode shifts to the integrated rotation operation, and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813, so that the switching rotation operation is already completed and the decorative member 870, It can be determined that 880 is docked.

On the other hand, although the drive motor 861 is driven for a sufficient length of time to shift from the switching rotation operation to the integral rotation operation and the detected portion 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 . If the output of the detection sensor 813 does not change, it can be determined based on the output of the detection sensor 813 that the third operation unit 800 is malfunctioning.

In the latter case, the switching rotation operation is executed from an arbitrary rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800, and in the state in which the one union state (see FIG. 32) is maintained, the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 detects Drive continues until portion 844 enters.

In the union state of the third operating unit 800, as described above, the appearance is less likely to be different even if the rotational arrangement is different. Therefore, even if the rotational displacement of the third operation unit 800 is continued until the part to be detected 844 enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 in the one union state, it is possible to easily avoid a decrease in the performance effect.

Furthermore, when performing control to return from the reversal effect shown in FIG. The period until the output of 813 changes can be minimized. In other words, since a short driving period is enough for the detected part 844 arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 to retreat from the detection groove, the length required for the control to return from the reversal effect to the normal effect. can be minimized.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the degree of freedom of the rotation arrangement of the third operation unit 800 that starts the switching rotation operation to switch from the normal effect to the reverse effect is improved, and the normal return operation is prolonged. In some cases, the switching rotation operation from the reversal performance as the return operation to the normal performance is shortened.

That is, a part of the return operation (rotational displacement until the detected portion 844 is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor 813) for correcting the difference in the rotational arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be viewed even if the rotational arrangement is different. It is possible to avoid a decrease in the presentation effect of the third action unit 800 during the return action by performing the action in the one united state in which the appearance is difficult to change.

Furthermore, by performing part of the return operation in advance, it is possible to shorten the period required for the switching rotation operation as the rest of the return operation.

Among the operation units 600, 700, and 800, the configuration commonly adopted by the plurality of operation units 600, 700, and 800 will be cross-sectionally explained, including the reasons for the differences in the manner of adoption.

First, as a first cross-sectional explanation, the configuration of the detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, and 813 that are commonly employed in each of the operation units 600, 700, and 800 will be confirmed, and the mode of adoption (number of sensors, The reason for the difference in the shape of the piece to be detected, etc.) will be explained.

The detection sensor KS1 of the first operation unit 600 is a detection device for detecting the arrangement of the first operation unit 600, and the extended portion 634b can enter the detection groove. The detection device provided in the first operation unit 600 is only one detection sensor KS1 (see FIG. 41). With respect to a plurality of displacement members including the rotating member 620, the supported member 640, the overhanging decorative portion 652b, and the second decorative rotating member 660, if the orientation of the rotating member 620 is determined, the arrangement and orientation of the other displacement members are determined. , it is possible to determine the arrangement and posture of a plurality of displacement members based on the detection result of one detection sensor KS1. This makes it possible to reduce the number of detectors to be installed.

The detection sensor 713 of the second motion unit 700 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 of the second motion unit 700, and the detected portion 735 can enter the detection groove. There are three detection devices for the second motion unit 700 to detect the posture of the gear cam member 734 (see FIG. 50), which correspond to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the extended state of the second motion unit 700, respectively. do.

A detection sensor 713 for determining the effect standby state is necessary for determining return to the initial position. The detection sensor 713 for judging the overhanging state is necessary for judging whether the upward displacement end position has been reached, and also for judging the reversing operation of the up/down reversing effect device 770 and the displacement caused by the influence of unintended load. required for The detection sensor 713 for judging the intermediate production state is necessary for judging whether the player has reached the upper or lower position in the intermediate production state, and also for judging positional deviation due to the influence of an unintended load. In the following, the reversal operation and the effects of unintended loads will be described in order.

First, the inversion operation will be explained. The second operation unit 700 is configured to enable vertical displacement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 caused in conjunction with the rotation of the gear cam member 734, as well as the reversal operation of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 (see FIG. 59).

Since there is a possibility that the vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the reversal operation, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for determining the effect standby state) is adopted, the overhang state or There is a possibility that it is not possible to determine the positional deviation in the vertical direction in the intermediate effect state, and it is not possible to execute an appropriate effect operation.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, it is possible to determine that the vertical reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction by reversing the vertical reversal effect device 770 in the overhanging state, and based on this determination result, the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be adjusted appropriately. By rotating the drive motor 731 in the correcting direction (so as to be in the overhanging state), the arrangement of the up/down reversal effect device 770 can be properly maintained.

In this embodiment, the reversing operation is permitted only when the second operation unit 700 is in the extended state (when the gear cam member 734 is on the operation terminal side). It is easy to rotate the member 734 toward the end of the operation.

Next, the effects of unintended loads will be described. In the second operation unit 700, the elevation plate member 740 is vertically displaced in conjunction with the rotating arm member 720 rotated by the rotation of the gear cam member 734, and the front and rear positions corresponding to the vertical position of the elevation plate member 740. 52 to 54).

Therefore, as the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the front-rear direction by the load applied in the longitudinal width direction of the game machine, the vertical positions of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 and the elevator plate member 740 are changed, and accordingly the gear cam. The orientation of member 734 may change. Examples of the load applied in the longitudinal width direction of the game machine include impact load when the player hits the game machine, load when the front frame 14 is opened and closed, and the like.

Since there is a possibility that the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 is displaced in the vertical direction due to the load in the front-rear width direction, for example, when only a single detection sensor 713 (detection device for determining the effect standby state) is adopted, the tension There is a possibility that the up/down reversal effect device 770 cannot be maintained in an appropriate arrangement because it is not possible to determine the positional deviation in the vertical direction in the extended state or the intermediate effect state.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the effect standby state, the intermediate effect state, and the overhanging state of the second operation unit 700 is provided. Therefore, for example, when a load in the front-rear width direction is applied to the game machine in an intermediate effect state, and the vertical positions of the up/down reversal effect device 770 and the lift plate member 740 change, the posture of the gear cam member 734 changes accordingly. , it can be determined that the vertical reversal effect device 770 has been displaced in the vertical direction, and based on this determination result, the drive motor 731 is rotated in the direction to correct the posture of the gear cam member 734 appropriately (so that it is in the intermediate effect state). Thus, the arrangement of the up-and-down reversal effect device 770 can be properly maintained.

In addition, when it is determined that the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is detached from the detection sensor 713 due to an unintended load from the state in which the detected portion 735 of the gear cam member 734 is arranged in the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state, this implementation Although it cannot be determined in which direction the detected part 735 is displaced, the driving motor 731 is controlled to drive the driving motor 731 in the direction in which the effect device 780 is displaced downward first. As a result, it is possible to prevent the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 from colliding.

In this embodiment, when the detected portion 735 again enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate effect state due to this drive, the displacement of the detected portion 735 due to an unintended load causes the effect device 780 to move upward. If it is found that the load has occurred on the load side and the drive is stopped at that point, the effect caused by the unintended load can be canceled out.

In addition, due to this drive, when the detected part 735 does not enter the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the intermediate production state and enters the detection sensor 713 corresponding to the production standby state, the detected part 735 due to an unintended load It is found that the displacement of was occurring on the side of downward displacement of the effect device 780, and the driving is continued so as to cause the effect device 780 to be displaced upward again. By stopping the drive, the effects caused by unintended loads can be offset.

Note that the detected portion 735 entering the detection groove of the detection sensor 713 does not serve the structural purpose as described for the extended portion 634b. formed as a shape. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the posture of the gear cam member 734 can be improved.

The detection sensor 778d is a detection device for detecting the posture of the upside-down reversing member 781 of the second motion unit 700, and the arcuate projecting portion 781d can enter the detection groove. There are two detection devices for the second operation unit 700 to detect the orientation of the upside-down member 781 (see FIG. 56). and correspond to

The second operation units 700 are arranged as a left and right pair in the upright vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(a)) and the inverted vertical arrangement state (see FIG. 59(c)) of the upside-down reversing member 781. A combined state in which the covering member 787 is adjacent.

For example, if only a single detection sensor 778d (a detection device for reversing the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down member 781) is employed, the posture deviation of the upside down member 781 from the upright vertical arrangement state is Since it can be determined, it is possible to drive and control the driving motor 782 so as to maintain the combined state of the covering member 787 based on the determination result. On the other hand, since it is not possible to determine the posture deviation of the upside-down reversing member 781 from the inverted vertical arrangement state, the combined state of the covering member 787 in the inverted vertical arrangement state may be affected by an unintended load, control failure, or the like. Even if there is a change, the change in state cannot be determined by the detection sensor 778d, and the state in which the combined state is canceled will continue, which is not desirable in terms of presentation.

In contrast, according to the present embodiment, the detection sensor 778d corresponding to the upright vertical arrangement state of the upside down reversing member 781 and the inverted vertical arrangement state of the upside down reversing member 781 is provided. Therefore, the detection sensor 778d can determine that a state change from the united state has occurred regardless of whether it is in the upright vertical orientation state or the inverted vertical orientation state, and based on the determination result, the united state can be changed. By driving and controlling the driving motor 782 on the returning side, the covering member 787 can be returned to the united state. Thereby, the rendering effect of the second operation unit 700 can be improved.

Note that the arcuate projecting portion 781d that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 778d does not serve the structural purpose described for the extension portion 634b. is formed as a plate-like portion of Thereby, the resolution for detecting the orientation of the upside down member 781 can be increased.

The detection sensor 813 of the third operation unit 800 is a detection device for detecting the posture of the outer rotating member 840 of the third operation unit 800, and the detected portion 844 can enter the detection groove (see FIG. 60). reference). There is one detection device for the third operation unit 800 to detect the posture of the outer rotating member 840, and this single detecting device detects the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 itself and the rotation of the outer rotating member 840. It is used (also used) for determining the rotation (switching rotation operation) of the inner rotating member 830 in the closed state.

Note that the detected portion 844 that enters the detection groove of the detection sensor 813 does not serve the structural purpose as described for the extended portion 634b. formed as a shape. Thereby, the resolution for detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840 can be improved.

The detection sensor 813 is provided for the purpose of detecting the attitude of the outer rotating member 840, and the number thereof is as small as one. For example, even if a displacement occurs such that the combined state is canceled when the outer rotating member 840 is maintained in a posture in which the detected part 844 is not arranged in the detection sensor 813, the detection sensor 813 can determine it. can't.

Therefore, rather than determining the deviation from the united state and then returning to the united state, the decorative members 870 and 880 are returned to the united state (individual united state (Fig. 66(a)) at regular time intervals. )), the drive motor rotates the inner rotating member 830 clockwise when viewed from the front, and rotates the inner rotating member 830 counterclockwise when viewed from the front in the combined state (see FIG. 103(b)). A control that drives the 861 to rotate for a certain period of time (for example, a short period of time) is considered preferable.

With this control, even if the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880 is unexpectedly canceled, the decorative members 870 and 880 can be returned to the combined state by driving the driving motor 861 at regular time intervals. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from being kept in the combined state for a long period of time.

As a second cross-sectional explanation, the action of the magnets Mg and Mg2 will be explained. As described above, in the second operation unit 700, the magnet Mg functions to maintain the attitude of the covering member 787, and in the third operation unit 800, the magnet Mg2 functions to maintain the combined state of the decorative members 870 and 880. As shown, similar techniques are adopted, but the design concept of the direction of the load generated by the magnets Mg and Mg2 is different, so it will be explained here.

The second operation unit 700 is designed so that the directions of the magnetic forces generated between the magnets Mg and the metal screws arranged on the left and right sides are aligned in the front-rear direction at both the left and right positions. In other words, the line of action of the magnetic force is designed to be parallel to the plane perpendicular to the metal rod 785a as the rotation axis of the covering member 787. As shown in FIG.

In this case, compared to the case where the magnetic force of the magnet Mg is generated in the axial direction of the metal rod 785a, the degree (magnitude) of the magnetic force generated as resistance to the sliding displacement of the covering members 787 approaching and separating from each other can be reduced. As a result, the movement resistance of the covering member 787 at the start of movement can be reduced.

On the other hand, in the third operation unit 800, the direction of the line of action of the magnetic force generated between the magnet Mg2 arranged on the decorative member 880 and the metal screw Nj2 is the five rotation axes for the rotational movement of the decorative member 880. It is designed to be arranged on a plane parallel to the plane on which the metal rod 832 is arranged (the plane orthogonal to the rotation axis of the inner rotary member 830).

In this case, the magnetic force of the magnet Mg2 can reduce the degree to which the decorative members 870 and 880 are subjected to a load in the rotational direction, so that the magnetic force can easily prevent the decorative members 870 and 880 from wobbling in the rotational direction. be able to.

As a third cross-sectional explanation, the display on the display device such as the third pattern display device 81 and the effect of visually recognizing the operation units 600, 700, and 800 integrally will be explained.

In the first operation unit 600, the projecting decorative portion 652b is arranged so as to appear to overlap with the region right end RE1 of the display region of the third pattern display device 81 (see FIG. 29). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the overhanging decorative portion 652b is arranged near the area right end RE1 of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the display area and the overhanging decorative portion 652b are grouped together. It can be made easy to visually recognize as a display effect of.

In the second operation unit 700, the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is arranged to match the height between the inner lower edge of the center frame 86 and the lower edge of the opening 511a (FIGS. 26 and 52). reference). Therefore, for example, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 is arranged near the lower edge of the display area of the third pattern display device 81, the display area and the first secondary decorative surface 787a2 are one. It can be made easy to visually recognize as a grouped display effect.

In the third motion unit 800, each first covering portion 875 visible to the player in the individually combined state is decorated differently, and in the overhanging state, the third covering portion 875 surrounds the periphery in a front view. A display area of the pattern display device 81 is arranged. For this reason, for example, in a range close to the first covering portion 875 in the display area of the third pattern display device 81, by displaying a display corresponding to the position where the first covering portion 875 is arranged, the display area and the first covering portion 875 are displayed. The covering portion 875 can be easily visually recognized as a group of display effects.

Further, if the third operation unit 800 is drive-controlled so that it rotates integrally, it is possible to execute a roulette-like operation presentation in which each first covering portion 875 rotates. By moving the display so as to run parallel to the first covering portion 875 in a range close to the first covering portion 875 in the display area of the pattern display device 81, the display area and the first covering portion 875 are separated from each other. It can be made easy to visually recognize as a grouped display effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 108, a second embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the internal shape of the flow path configuration parts 334 to 336 is fixed was described, but in the sorting device 2300 of the second embodiment, the first flow path configuration part 2334 with a variable internal shape Prepare. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

When explaining the first flow path forming part 2334 as an alternative part of the first flow path forming part 334 in the first embodiment, the structure arranged on the right side will be illustrated and explained. The configuration can also be the first flow path configuration portion 2334 . Also, the configuration may be different between the left and right so that only one of the left and right sides is the first flow path forming portion 2334 and the other is the first flow path forming portion 334 .

FIG. 108 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 2300 in the second embodiment along line corresponding to line XVI-XVI in FIG. As shown in FIG. 108, the first flow path forming portion 2334 of the sorting device 2300 includes a through hole 2410 drilled in the front-rear direction at the lower portion of the curved protrusion 334b, and slides back and forth along the through hole 2410. It includes a slide member 2420 that is guided in a displaceable manner, and a solenoid 2430 that is arranged inside the rear frame portion 332 so as to generate a driving force for slidingly displacing the slide member 2420 .

In FIG. 108, the front side arrangement FP of the slide member 2420 in the non-excited state of the solenoid 2430 is illustrated by a solid line. When the solenoid 2430 is energized, the driving force of the solenoid 2430 slides the slide member 2420 to the rear side arrangement RP.

In this embodiment, when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 protrudes inside (upper side) than the bottom surface 2334c which is the bottom surface of the fixed flow path and on which the ball can roll. In the arrangement RP, the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 is configured so as not to protrude (retract) inside (above) the bottom surface 2334c.

That is, when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP, the ball contacts the upper surface of the slide member 2420, and when the slide member 2420 is arranged on the rear side RP, the slide member 2420 and the ball do not contact.

The upper surface of the slide member 2420 is formed as a plane parallel to the bottom surface 2334c. Therefore, even if the slide member 2420 slides while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334c, it is possible to suppress the influence on the flow-down mode of the ball.

The flowing direction of the ball rolling on the bottom surface 2334c is the oblique front-back direction, and the direction of sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 is the front-back direction. Therefore, the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 influences the strength of rotation of the ball.

Since the ball rolls forward on the bottom surface 2334c, it rotates forward in the traveling direction (forward). When the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the front side arrangement FP to the rear side arrangement RP by energizing the solenoid 2430 from the de-energized state (see FIG. 108) of the solenoid 2430, the upper surface of the slide member 2420 rolls. A rearward load (frictional force) is created against the lower end of the moving ball. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is accelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be increased, and the rolling speed of the ball can be increased.

On the other hand, when the slide member 2420 is slidably displaced from the rear side arrangement RP to the front side arrangement FP by changing the solenoid 2430 from the energized state to the non-excited state (see FIG. 108), the bottom surface 2334b A forward load (frictional force) is generated via the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 against the lower end of the ball that is rolling. Therefore, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is decelerated, the degree of rotation of the ball can be reduced, and the rolling speed of the ball can be reduced.

Furthermore, since the vertical position of the upper surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP is higher than the vertical position of the bottom surface 2334b, in addition to the frictional force from the slide member 2420, the load in the direction that pushes the ball upward occurs. Therefore, the velocity in the vertical direction of the ball rolling downward can be reduced, so that the falling velocity of the ball can be reduced.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, by executing the control that causes the sliding displacement of the slide member 2420 while the ball is rolling on the bottom surface 2334b, the ball flowing down inside the sorting device 2300 The speed can be variable. This makes it possible to variably control the time from when the ball passes through the ball passage hole 163b to when it reaches the branch point BP1 (see FIG. 74).

In this embodiment, since the slide member 2420 is arranged behind the second flow passage forming part 335, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state in which the ball is affected by the slide member 2420. be able to.

That is, since the contact between the slide member 2420 and the ball is caused before the ball is introduced into the second flow passage forming portion 335, which is easily visible to the player and tends to attract attention, rotation is added to the ball. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the state of moving or displacing in the vertical direction. As a result, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player who visually recognizes the ball flowing down the second flow path forming portion 335 .

In this embodiment, a contact load is applied when the slide member 2420 is displaced when the sphere is arranged on the upper side of the bottom surface 2334c. A contact load with slide member 2420 is not applied to the ball passing through .

Therefore, the sphere placed above the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is in operation and the sphere placed above the bottom surface 2334c while the slide member 2420 is stopped are in a flow-down mode (rotation, change in rotation, flow-down speed). , flow rate change, etc.) can be different.

Next, with reference to FIG. 109, a third embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side was described, but in the sorting device 3300 of the third embodiment, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is arranged in a normal detection sensor By moving to the rear side of SE12, the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

As an example of changing the arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12, description will be made on the right side of the left and right center, but the configuration on the left side of the left and right can be arbitrarily designed. For example, on the left side, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the same manner as in the first embodiment, and the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300 may be configured to be different, and also on the left side, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged on the left and right sides of the sorting device 3300 so that they are arranged side by side as described in detail below. may be symmetrical.

109(a) and 109(b) are cross-sectional views of the sorting device 3300 in the third embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. FIG. 109(a) shows a state in which the electromagnetic solenoid 361 (see FIG. 17) is de-energized and the slide displacement member 3370 is placed in the front position, and FIG. 109(b) shows the electromagnetic solenoid 361 is energized. A state in which the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position is illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), the guiding path of the ball after flowing through the third flow path forming portion 336 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the sphere is changed by disposing the slide displacement member 3370 .

As shown in FIGS. 109(a) and 109(b), the middle member 3330 of the sorting device 3300 includes a rear frame-shaped portion 3332 that divides the ball guide path to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12. is configured in a shape that is open to accept a ball from the left side.

The slide displacement member 3370 is configured to be slidably displaceable between a front position and a rear position. The rear position of the slide displacement member 3370 (see FIG. 109(b)) is the right end of the front side surface 376a of the upper projecting portion 376 and the rear frame portion 3332 as a path entrance for guiding the ball to the probability variation detection sensor SE11. (or the right end of the front side surface 376a is positioned slightly forward) with the rear inner surface of the open portion 3332g formed in .

By setting the position of the slide displacement member 3370 in this way, if the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming portion 336 will hit the front side surface 376a of the slide displacement member 3370. While in contact with the ball, it flows to the right and passes through the normal detection sensor SE12. It can be configured to flow to the right while contacting the front side surface 376a and pass through the probability variation detection sensor SE11.

That is, the flow path of the ball passing through the normal detection sensor SE12 and the flow path of the ball passing through the variable probability detection sensor SE11 are both the flow path that flows to the right after passing through the third flow path forming part 336 consists of The only difference is the front-to-rear position that flows to the right.

Therefore, it can be difficult to determine whether the ball has flowed to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or to the normal detection sensor SE12 from the player's line of sight viewing the third flow path forming portion 336 from the front side.

The slide displacement member 3370 includes a pair of rod-shaped guide portions 3371c extending from the front end portion of the thin plate portion 371 toward the front side, an upper front projecting portion 3376b integrally formed with the upper projecting portion 376, and an upper horizontal projecting portion 3376c formed integrally with the upper projecting portion 376.

The rod-shaped guide portion 3371c has an upper surface that is flush with the upper surface of the ball guide portion 371b, and is formed in a pair of left and right sides on the left and right sides of the center of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336. through the front side surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 so as to be accommodated in the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 .

That is, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the front side position, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged on the back side of the lower surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 so that it does not contact the ball, and the slide displacement member 3370 is positioned at the rear side, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c is arranged across the front-rear direction gap between the front side surface of the discharge hole 337 and the ball guide portion 371b.

By configuring the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c in this way, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, the ball can be supported by the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c on the lower left and right sides of the ball, and the ball can be slid and displaced. It can span to member 3370 .

As a result, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the ball flows down toward the normal detection sensor SE12. That is, the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c can easily avoid misguiding the falling ball.

In addition, since the spheres passing through the third flow passage forming portion 336 are placed on the top surface of the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c formed flush with the top surface of the sphere guide portion 371b, the sphere and the sphere guide portion 371b can be avoided from colliding head-on in the longitudinal direction. That is, due to the rod-shaped guide portion 3371c, the ball collides head-on with the ball guide portion 371b and the ball flows backward, or the ball is caught between the front side surface of the ball guide portion 371b and the front side surface of the discharge hole 337. Therefore, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the operation becomes defective.

The upper front protruding portion 3376b has the same shape as the front-rear long protruding portion 317 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment, and has the same relative position at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 in the first embodiment. This is a shaped portion integrally formed with the upper projecting portion 376 in a positional relationship of .

The upper lateral protrusion 3376c has the same shape as the left and right inner protrusions 318 (see FIG. 18) described above in the first embodiment, and has the same relative position at the front position of the slide displacement member 370 in the first embodiment. The shape portion is formed integrally with the upper front projecting portion 3376b in a positional relationship of .

As a result, the action of the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c on the abutting ball is the action on the ball flowing down near the upper projecting portion 376 regardless of the arrangement of the slide displacement member 3370. occur.

In other words, unlike the case where the front-rear elongated projecting portion 317 and the left-right inner projecting portion 318 (see FIG. 18) are fixedly arranged, when the slide displacement member 3370 is arranged at the rear side position, the projecting portion 3370 does not move. It is possible to eliminate the action of the portions 3376b and 3376c to force the ball that has reached the front position of the upper projecting portion 376 toward the normal detection sensor SE12 side.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 110 and 111. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side was described. By moving to the rear side of SE11, the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 are arranged side by side in the front-rear direction. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

Figure 110 (a) and Figure 110 (b) schematically shows the configuration of the downstream side of the third flow path configuration portion 336 in the fourth embodiment, the third flow path configuration portion 336, probability variation detection sensor SE11, normal detection FIG. 13 is a schematic top view of the sensor SE12 and a slide displacement member 4370;

FIG. 111(a) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path forming portion 336, the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12 and the slide displacement member 4370 along the CXIa-CXIa line in FIG. 110(a), and FIG. b) is a schematic cross-sectional view of the third flow path forming portion 336, the variable probability detection sensor SE11, the normal detection sensor SE12 and the slide displacement member 4370 along the line CXIb-CXIb of FIG. 110(b). In FIG. 111(b), illustration of the upper contact portion 4373 is omitted for ease of understanding.

The slide displacement member 4370 is configured to block one of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12 so that the ball cannot pass through, and to open the other to allow the ball to pass, above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 It has a front slide member 4371 that slides left and right, and a rear slide member 4375 that slides left and right above the normal detection sensor SE12.

The front side slide member 4371 and the rear side slide member 4375 are slidably displaced in left and right directions opposite to each other by the driving force of the solenoid. 110(a) and 111(a) to the rear open state shown in FIGS. 110(b) and 111(b), the front slide member 4371 moves left and the rear slide member 4375 is configured to slide rightward.

The front side slide member 4371 includes a slide plate 4372 arranged so as to cover the probability variation detection sensor SE11, and an upper contact portion 4373 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the left and right inner projecting portions 318 (see FIG. 17). , and are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 are integrally slidably displaced.

The upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372 is flush with the lower bottom surface 336a of the third flow path forming portion 336, and is formed as an inclined plane with the same inclination in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 111(b)). Therefore, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the inclination of the upper side surface 4372a allows the ball rolling on the upper side surface 4372a to flow toward the normal detection sensor SE12. On the other hand, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a contacts the upper contact portion 4373 and receives a load, so that it flows downward (downward to the right).

Therefore, when the front side slide member 4371 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the front side slide member 4371 is configured to come into contact with the ball at different points and guide (flow) the ball in different directions. be done.

The rear-side slide member 4375 includes a slide plate 4376 arranged to cover the upper portion of the normal detection sensor SE12, and an upper contact portion 4377 formed in a shape similar to the shape of the longitudinally long projecting portion 317 (see FIG. 17). and are integrally formed by a connecting portion (not shown). That is, in FIG. 110, the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally slidably displaced.

An upper side surface 4376a of the slide plate 4376 is a slanted plane that is reversed from the upper side surface 4372a (see FIG. 111(a)). Therefore, in the front open state (see FIG. 111(a)), the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a allows the ball arranged on the upper side surface 4376a to flow toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side. On the other hand, in the rear open state (see FIG. 111(b)), the ball that has passed through the lower bottom surface 336a and the upper side surface 6372a contacts the upper contact portion 4377 and receives a load, thereby flowing downward.

Therefore, when the rear slide member 4375 changes between the front open state and the rear open state, the rear slide member 4375 contacts the ball at different points, and the state changes so as to guide (flow) the ball in different directions. Configured.

By configuring in this way, the ball after passing backward above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 returns to the upper direction of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 again and passes the probability variation detection sensor SE11. It is possible to improve the ability to pay attention to the sphere that has passed through the flow path forming portion 336 .

As a mode to return above the variable probability detection sensor SE11 again, for example, it is assumed that the solenoid is driven so that the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state at the timing when the ball passes backward through the upper side surface 4372a. be. In this case, the ball usually rides on the upper side surface 4376a before passing through the detection sensor SE12, flows backward along the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a, and returns to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 side.

In this way, when the timing at which the ball passes through the third flow passage forming portion 336 and the driving timing of the slide displacement member 4370 match, the ball is configured to return to the variable probability detection sensor SE11 side. Therefore, compared to the gaming machine configured so that the ball that has passed above the probability variation detection sensor SE11 to the downstream side does not pass the probability variation detection sensor SE11, after passing through the third flow path configuration portion 336 It is possible to improve attention to the driving timing of the sphere and the slide displacement member 4370 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 112, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the spherical flow path is shared up to the third flow path forming part 336, and the branch point BP1 is arranged behind the third flow path forming part 336. In the sorting device 5300 of this embodiment, the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged upstream of the third flow path forming part 336, and the flow path of the spheres changes on the upstream side of the third flow path forming part 336. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

112(a) and 112(b) are partial cross-sectional views of the sorting device 5300 in the fifth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. In FIG. 112(a), the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged at the right position, and the ball is guided to the probability variation detection sensor SE11 by the slide displacement member 5370. In FIG. 112(b), the slide displacement member 5370 is A state in which the ball is normally guided to the detection sensor SE12 by the slide displacement member 5370 is illustrated.

In addition, in FIGS. 112(a) and 112(b), the guiding path of the ball after flowing through the first flow path forming portion 334 is illustrated by imaginary lines. Thus, the guide path of the sphere is changed by disposing the slide displacement member 5370 .

The slide displacement member 5370 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction by an electromagnetic solenoid (not shown). and an upper projecting portion 5376 .

The thin plate portion 5371 is formed so thin that a ball that has passed through the first flow path forming portion 334 can ride on it. The left side surface 5376a of the upper protruding portion 5376 facing the sphere is formed in an arc shape with a concave portion on the flow path side, so that the flowing sphere can smoothly flow backward.

According to this embodiment, like the sorting device 5300, the forward and backward width of the ball flowing down path is formed long, and the visibility of the ball flowing down the front side is higher than that of the ball flowing down the rear side. Since the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the front side where the visibility of the ball is high while adopting the configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to determine the flow-down mode (flow-down path) of the ball.

In this embodiment, when the slide displacement member 5370 is arranged on the right side, the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is not particularly blocked, and the structure is such that a ball can enter. On the other hand, the ball that normally flows down the upstream side of the path entrance to the detection sensor SE11 flows toward the front side while flowing down the first flow path forming portion 334 .

Therefore, immediately after passing through the first flow passage forming portion 334, the sphere is unlikely to move in the opposite direction to the rear, so that the sphere is unlikely to enter the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11. Therefore, in the present embodiment, provision of a member for closing the path entrance to the normal detection sensor SE11 is intentionally omitted, thereby reducing member costs.

Next, with reference to FIG. 113, a sixth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the case where the left and right flow paths are separated by the partition plate portion 338 and the flow paths do not merge has been described. 336 is connected to a confluence channel 6341 extending rightward from the downstream side of the left curved protrusion 334b. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 113 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 6300 in the sixth embodiment taken along line XVII-XVII in FIG. As shown in FIG. 113, the flow path on the right side of the sorting device 6300 is formed of flow path forming portions 334 to 336 as in the first embodiment.

On the other hand, the flow path on the left side of the sorting device 6300 is formed by a confluence flow path 6341 that extends linearly to the right from a point where a space for one ball is left on the front side of the curved protrusion 334b. The channel 6341 is connected to the third channel forming portion 336 as the right channel. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the balls flowing down the right channel and the balls flowing down the left channel join at the connection point JP1 where the channels are connected, so the balls may collide with each other.

The confluence channel 6341 has a raised floor portion 6342 at the lower end of the channel. The raised floor portion 6342 is formed as a floor surface positioned higher than the lower bottom surface 336 a of the third flow path forming portion 336 . As a result, it is possible to make a difference in height position between the ball flowing into the connection point JP1 from the confluence channel 6341 and the ball flowing down the right channel and down the third channel forming part 336. It is possible to reduce the degree of backflow that occurs when they collide with each other.

Due to the contact between the spheres at the connection point JP1, the flow down of the spheres can be delayed as compared with the case where the contact between the spheres does not occur. As a result, the time required for the ball passing through the ball passage hole 163b (see FIG. 16) to reach the branch point BP1 can be changed depending on whether the balls contact each other or not.

The operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is set by a constant operation from the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b regardless of the ball entry state. It is possible that the sphere can reach the bifurcation point BP1 when 370 is placed differently.

The premise of the contact between the spheres is that the spheres merge and that there is a sphere flowing down the confluence channel 6341 . If the player wants to cause the balls to come into contact with each other, the player can play the game by adjusting the launch intensity so that the balls enter the pair of left and right ball passing holes 163b (see FIG. 74). If it is desired to avoid the contact with the ball, the shooting intensity should be adjusted so that the ball enters only the ball passage hole 163b on one side (right side).

According to the present embodiment, the adjustment of the firing intensity of the ball is related to the presence or absence of contact of the ball at the connection point JP1, and is related to the state of the slide displacement member 370 at the timing when the ball reaches the branch point BP1. , directly affect the profits of the players. Therefore, it is possible to increase the player's motivation to adjust the ball launch strength.

Also, according to this embodiment, the contact at the connection point JP1 is closely related to the formation of a sphere continuation. That is, the two spheres that are in contact at the connection point JP1 can flow down to the branch point BP1 while being arranged close to each other.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 114 and 115. FIG. In the first embodiment, the case where the flow path to the branch point BP1 is only the flow path configured by the flow path configuration units 334 to 336 has been described. It is configured such that the ball can flow down to the branch point BP1 without passing through the flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 . In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

114 is a front perspective view of a sorting device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment, and FIG. 115 is a cross-sectional view of the sorting device 7300 taken along line CXV-CXV of FIG. As shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the sorting device 7300 has a ball passing hole 163b as a path through which a ball entered into the specific winning hole 65a can pass, and a ball opening formed at a substantially central position on the left and right. It has a passage hole 7163b.

The ball passage hole 7163b is similar to the detection sensor SE1 used to detect the entry of balls into the variable winning device 65 and to detect the timing of changing the state of the opening/closing plate 65b to the closed state by determining the number of entry of a specified number of balls. is formed as a sphere passage aperture of the detection sensor SE71 having the function of .

On the downstream side of the ball passage hole 7163b, a cylindrical flow path 7164 is provided that extends in a downwardly inclined direction rearward and has a rectangular cylindrical cross section. Cylindrical channel 7164 is formed sufficiently large so that the ball can flow down inside, and the end thereof extends up to the upper front side of branch point BP1. In other words, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b is configured to flow down the inside of the cylindrical channel 7164 and reach the branch point BP1.

The length of time required for the sphere to pass through the cylindrical channel 7164 is set to be shorter than the length of time required for the sphere to pass through the channel forming portions 334 to 336. It is set to be equal to the length of time it takes for a sphere to pass through 334 .

Therefore, for example, when the sorting device 7300 is driven and controlled in the above-described operation pattern Y (see FIG. 25), as described above, it passes through the ball passage hole 163b and passes through the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. The ball can reach the branch point BP1 only after the slide displacement member 370 returns to the front position. is placed in the back position, the branch point BP1 may be reached.

In particular, the ball that has passed through the ball passage hole 7163b immediately after the opening/closing plate 65b has changed to the open state easily reaches the branch point BP1 while the slide displacement member 370 is arranged at the rear side position.

That is, even if the drive control pattern of the slide displacement member 370 is the same, the probability variation is detected depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through the ball passing hole 163b or passes through the ball passing hole 7163b. Sensor SE11 can be configured to change whether a ball passes or not. As a result, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the flow of the ball inside the specific winning hole 65a.

As shown in FIG. 114, when viewed from a general direction during a game, the cylindrical flow path 7164 reduces the visibility of the branch point BP1, the slide displacement member 370, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336. The arrangement of the cylindrical flow path 7164 is devised so as to avoid this.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, while maintaining high visibility of the branch point BP1, the number of flow paths for guiding the ball to the branch point BP1 is increased. It is possible to increase the types of required length of time and improve the player's attention to the specific winning hole 65a.

Next, referring to FIG. 116, an eighth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b of the guide long hole 616 of the first operation unit 600 are connected at one point, and at the connecting position, the path of the axis O1 is bent and the displacement direction of the axis O1 is changed. is switched, but in the first operation unit 8600 of the eighth embodiment, the guide elongated holes 8616 are connected at a plurality of points (two points), and the path of the axis line O1 is bent at the connecting positions to change the direction of displacement. The displacement direction of O1 is switched. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 116 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide long hole 8616 and the rotating member 620 in the eighth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 116, the guide slot 8616 bends left and right twice below the linear portion 616a.

That is, the guide elongated hole 8616 includes a linear portion 616a, a first curved portion 8616b connected to the lower end portion of the linear portion 616a and formed on a curve (substantially circular arc shape), and the first curved portion 8616b. A second curved portion 8616c is connected to the lower end portion of the first curved portion 8616b and is formed on a curved line (substantially arcuate shape) in which the center of the curvature radius is left-right reversed to that of the first curved portion 8616b.

In the present embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the linear portion 616a, that is, at the connecting portion between the linear portion 616a and the first curved portion 8616b, the axis O1 Since the displacement direction is switched, the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In addition, when the axis O1 is arranged at the lower end position of the first curved portion 8616b, that is, at the connecting portion between the first curved portion 8616b and the second curved portion 8616c, the displacement direction of the axis O1 is switched. , the displacement speed of the axis O1 can be reduced (dropped).

In this way, since it is possible to configure a plurality of midway positions where it is easy to stop the axis O1, the axis O1 is stopped midway to stop the second decoration rotary member 660 (see FIG. 43) that is stopped midway. The types (variations) of postures can be increased.

Next, with reference to FIG. 117, a ninth embodiment will be described. In the first embodiment, the guide slot 616 of the first operation unit 600 has a single path. A first path composed of a curved portion 616a and a curved portion 616b and a second path connected to the right side of the first path are provided. In addition, the same code|symbol is attached|subjected to the same part as each embodiment mentioned above, and the description is abbreviate|omitted.

FIG. 117 is a schematic front view showing the relationship between the guide long hole 9616 and the rotating member 620 in the ninth embodiment. As shown in FIG. 117, the guide slot 9616 has a linear portion 616a and a curved portion 616b in the same manner as the guide slot 616 of the first embodiment. An angle maintaining portion 9616c that extends obliquely to the right from the connection point, and a connecting portion 9616d that extends from the right end of the angle maintaining portion 9616c toward the curved portion 616b and is connected to a midway position of the curved portion 616b. .

The angle maintaining portion 9616c rotates the rotating member 620 to the tilting side from the state in which the axis O1 is located at the connection point between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b (see FIGS. 43 and 44). It is formed in the same direction as the displacement trajectory of the axis O1 when it is assumed that the axis O1 is displaced while the angle θ is maintained.

In this way, the angle θ is maintained while the axis O1 is displaced in the angle maintaining portion 9616c. The facing posture (see FIG. 43) is maintained.

In other words, when the axis O1 displaces the angle maintaining portion 9616c when the rotating member 620 rotates, the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620 in the tilting direction. As a rotation mode, it is possible to maintain a posture in which the third rendering surface 661c faces the front over the formation length (formation angle width) of the angle maintaining portion 9616c.

When the axis O1 displaces the connecting portion 9616d, the change in the angle θ accompanying the rotation of the rotating member 620 is allowed, so the box-shaped member 661 rotates in conjunction with the rotation of the rotating member 620. .

On the other hand, even when the tilt angle of rotating member 620 is the same, the magnitude of angle θ when axis O1 is arranged in curved portion 616b and the angle when axis O1 is arranged in connecting portion 9616d are Since the magnitude of θ is different, by making the left and right paths along which the axis O1 is displaced different, it is possible to make the halfway attitude of the box-shaped member 661 interlocked with the rotation of the rotating member 620 different.

Also, regardless of whether the path along which the axis O1 is displaced is left or right, the angle θ when the axis O1 is disposed at the upper end of the displaceable range and the angle θ when disposed at the lower end are of one type. The attitude of the box-shaped member 661 when O1 is arranged at the upper end or lower end of the displaceable range can be maintained (see FIGS. 40 and 45).

In other words, in the present embodiment, the supported member 640 and the second ornamental rotating member 660 (Fig. 43 and FIG. 44), the displacement speed of the supported member 640 related to the displacement speed of the axis O1, and the rotation speed of the box-shaped member 661 of the second decorative rotary member 660 can be generated in a plurality of types. can.

The guide elongated hole 9616 is merely composed of a plurality of paths, and does not have a mechanism for limiting the paths over which the axis O1 can be displaced. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of malfunction due to a defect in the mechanism that restricts the path, and to reduce the product cost by simplifying the configuration.

On the other hand, the branching of the displacement path of axis O1 can be controlled by the direction of the load applied to axis O1 via rotating member 620 . This will be explained below. First, the case where the rotating member 620 is rotated in the tilting direction will be described.

First, when the axis O1 is displaced along the left path (the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b), the drive motor 631 (see FIG. 40) is operated so that the rotational displacement of the rotational member 620 does not stop halfway. Drive control.

In this case, the axis O1 enters the curved portion 616b due to the inertia of displacement along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the linear portion 616a, and is displaced to the lower end position of the guide long hole 9616 as it is.

Second, when the axis O1 is displaced along the path on the right side (the angle maintaining portion 9616c and the connecting portion 9616d), the turning member 620 is displaced at the stage where the axis O1 is arranged at the connection point between the linear portion 616a and the curved portion 616b. is driven and controlled to stop or decelerate halfway, and then the drive motor 631 is driven and controlled again in the same direction.

In this case, the inertia of the displacement along the direction (vertical direction) in which the linear portion 616a extends decreases, so the selection of whether the axis O1 displaces the left path or the right path results in less displacement resistance. side is chosen.

Here, when the axis O1 enters the angle maintaining portion 9616c, since the magnitude of the angle θ is maintained, the intermediate gear 644 (see FIG. Also, there is no need to transmit the driving force to the members on the downstream side of the transmission of the driving force. That is, since the displacement resistance is reduced by that amount, the axis O1 can be moved toward the angle maintaining portion 9616b.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the drive control of the tilting direction of the rotating member 620, control is performed so as to select the path along which the axis O1 is displaced depending on whether the drive motor 631 is controlled to be stopped halfway or not. be able to.

In addition, when the rotating member 620 is displaced in the rising direction, the axis O1 receives a load from the rotating member 620 in an obliquely upper right direction. , the axis O1 can be displaced upward along the curved portion 616b.

In this embodiment, the connection point between the connecting portion 9616d and the curved portion 616b is set in the middle of the curved portion 616b. It is formed as an upper left inclined surface arranged on the upper right side of the arranged axis O1.

Therefore, when the axis O1 is located at the lower end position of the curved portion 616b, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced upward (bouncing back) along the circle centered on the circular through hole 624.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, part or all of the configuration in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with part or all of the configuration in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball once flows down toward the near side by the sorting device 300 and then flows down backward, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the time required for the ball to flow down may be ensured by bending the path a plurality of times or forming a deceleration convex portion that decelerates the ball, without forming a portion that flows down toward the near side.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the lower bottom surface of the front design member 141 of the second prize winning opening 140 has a curved surface shape has been described. Any shape is acceptable as long as it can be used. For example, it may be configured in an inclined plane shape, or may be formed so that a large number of fine projections protrude from the plane so as to impart an irregular load to the colliding ball.

In the above-described first embodiment, when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows down the sorting device 300, the case where it flows down exclusively through the flow path forming parts 334 to 336 in order has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. not a thing For example, an opening penetrating downward may be formed in the left-right central portion of the specific winning opening 65a, and the balls may be formed so as to directly flow into the third flow passage forming portion 336 through this opening.

For example, when balls enter one by one, the balls do not pass through the opening, but when a plurality of balls enter the specific winning hole 65a together, the balls can pass through the opening. Also good. In this case, the time required for the ball to reach the slide displacement member 370 can be changed depending on whether the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a passes through the opening or does not pass through the opening.

In the first embodiment described above, the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 are arranged behind the specific prize winning opening 65a, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the detection sensors SE<b>11 and SE<b>12 may be arranged directly below the downstream end of the second flow path forming part 335 . Moreover, in this case, the order of the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 may be reversed. That is, when the ball enters the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, the branch to each of the detection sensors SE11 and SE12 may occur immediately after the ball flows down in the horizontal direction, or immediately after the ball flows down in the front-rear direction (flows toward the front side). may be branched to the respective detection sensors SE11 and SE12.

In the above-described first embodiment, as features of the sorting device 300 alone, the channel directions and inclinations of the channel forming portions 334 to 336 have been described, but the features are not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on an island, the direction and inclination of the flow path may be designed in consideration of the "sleep" that is performed on a daily basis.

Laying down means that the pachinko machine 10 is installed not in a vertical posture but in a state of being inclined in the front-rear direction. Usually, a pachinko machine is installed in a posture (nekase) lying backward about 1 degree (4/5 rins). Compared to the description of the above sorting device 300 alone (state without rest), considering the installation angle of about 1 degree, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path having an inclination in the front-back direction The meaning of the inclination of the component 336 changes.

That is, in the sorting device 300 alone, as described above, the first flow path forming part 334 is tilted downward from the horizontal by 7 degrees to the front side, and the third flow path forming part 336 is tilted to the rear side by 5 degrees from the horizontal. It is designed to be inclined, but considering the installation angle together, the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 similarly form a flow path inclined downward by 6 degrees. . On the other hand, since the second flow passage forming portion 335 is inclined in the left-right direction, it is less likely to be affected by the installation angle, and can be regarded as having an inclination of about 5 degrees as described above.

In this case, the acceleration of the ball in the first flow path forming part 334 and the third flow path forming part 336 is the same for the balls flowing down in the sorting device 300, and the acceleration is slightly increased in the second flow path forming part 335. become smaller. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the flow speed of the ball in the horizontal direction, so that the player can easily see the ball flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 . In addition, since the first flow path forming part 334 is still shorter than the third flow path forming part 336, the first flow path forming part 334 is shorter than the third flow path forming part 336. can pass between

In this way, the flow of the balls inside the sorting device 300 is affected by the aging of the pachinko machine 10 because it has a flow path in the front-rear direction. Therefore, if the angle of inclination of each of the passage forming portions 334 and 336 is made smaller than the angle of rest (approximately 1 degree), the flow direction of the spheres in the passage forming portions 334 and 336 will change depending on the quality of the rest (angle setting). It is necessary to set the angle of inclination larger than the angle of the repositioning.

In addition, in the structure in which the balls flow down inside the sorting device 300 has a flow path in the front-rear direction, and the flow path is visible, a slight difference in the flow velocity of the balls flowing down the flow path can cause There is a possibility that the degree of laziness of the pachinko machine 10 can be grasped. If you dare to grasp the degree of laziness, the flow path of the sorting device 300 should be configured so that it is easy to visually recognize it.

On the other hand, in the above-described first embodiment, the fixed member 161 and the front design member are provided around the front side of each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 so that the degree of "sleep" cannot be grasped from a slight difference in the flow speed of the ball. 162 are arranged to surround, the variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper side, and the light diffusion processing surface 340 is arranged on the lower side so as to deteriorate the visibility.

In this way, the visibility of the ball flowing down each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 is made worse except for the normal player's line of sight (range of 0 degrees to about 30 degrees when viewed from the front). As a result, it is possible to avoid grasping the degree of "sleep" of the pachinko machine 10 by comparing the flow velocities of the balls flowing down the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the inclination of the first flow path forming portion 334 is greater than the inclination of the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, this inclination relationship may be reversed, or the same inclination may be used.

Further, although each of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 has been described as forming a spiral flow path by bending a linear flow path, the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a meandering channel shape or a stepwise curved channel shape may be used.

Further, although the flow paths are configured to be bent at right angles at the connection points of the respective flow path forming portions 334 to 336, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path may be bent at an acute angle or an obtuse angle at the connection point. Further, Krun may be employed as each of the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, a case was described in which the time required for the sphere to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 was designed to be 0.3 seconds, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be designed so that the time required to pass through the third flow path forming portion 336 is 1 second (0.6 seconds or more). As a result, even if the ball enters the sorting device 300 while maintaining the firing interval (0.6 seconds), the ball on the upstream side flowing down the third flow path forming part 336 is , the third flow passage forming portion 336 can be made to function as a blindfold for the sphere flowing down.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the passage length of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 is ensured to ensure the flow time of the sphere, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, long ridges are formed in a direction intersecting the flowing direction of the game ball from both inner walls of the route to the slide displacement member 370, and protrude alternately, and the ridges are made to collide with the game ball. It may be configured to decelerate the ball by As a result, it is possible to secure the flow-down time of the ball without increasing the path length.

The deceleration ridges may be arranged uniformly over the entire range of the path to the slide displacement member 370, or may be arranged unevenly. For example, the first flow path forming part 334 and the second flow path forming part 335 are not formed with ridges, and the ridges are formed only in the third flow path forming part 336, so that the third flow path forming part 336 It can be configured so that the spheres reach the third flow passage forming portion 336 gently while the spheres reach the flow passage 336 quickly.

In addition, the projecting direction of the ridges may be a direction in which the ridges are alternately projected from the left and right along the downward flow path of the balls, or they may be projected upward from the bottom at predetermined intervals. Any direction is fine.

In the case of projecting from the left and right direction, the load applied to the ball from the ridge has a component in the left and right direction. For example, at the position closest to the slide displacement member 370, by protruding from the left and right outer wall portions to the left and right inner sides, the load from the protrusion normally goes to the partition plate portion 338 side instead of toward the detection sensor SE12 side. By doing so, it is possible to easily avoid the erroneous guidance of the ball to the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the case of projecting upward from the bottom side, the protrusion itself may function as a blindfold for the slide displacement member 370, so it is preferable to design the formation height and formation position in consideration of the player's line of sight. .

In addition, you may form a protrusion so that it can be projected and retracted. In this case, it is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down in the extended state, and to resume the downward flow of the ball in the retracted state.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which blindfold is performed by a ball flowing down the front side of the slide displacement member 370, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable decorative member may be arranged in front of the sorting device 300, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be blinded by the decorative member. The cosmetic member may be driven or may operate with the weight of a sphere.

Also, when blindfolded by a ball, it is not limited to the case where the ball is arranged on the front side. For example, when a mirror is arranged on the back side of the slide displacement member 370 and the state of the slide displacement member 370 is visually recognized using the reflection of the mirror, a ball is arranged between the slide displacement member 370 and the mirror. If so, a blindfold function can occur.

In the first embodiment, the case where the ball reaching the slide displacement member 370 is blindfolded has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the first winning hole 64 may be arranged behind the game area like the detection sensors SE11 and SE12, and the first winning hole 64 may be blinded, or the other general winning holes 63 may be blinded. Anything is fine.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336 are linear and formed of flow passages capable of guiding spheres one by one has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed as a meandering flow path, or may be formed as a flow path in which a plurality of branches occur. may be configured.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the blinding effect is produced by the ball directed toward the slide displacement member 370 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ejection path for ejecting balls that have entered the other winning openings 63, 64, 65, 140 is arranged on the front side of the slide displacement member 370 (for example, arranged so as to intersect on the front side), The slide displacement member 370 may be blinded by the ejection path and the balls arranged in the ejection path.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a flows exclusively through the first flow path forming part 334 to the second flow path forming part 335 side (front side) has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a seesaw-shaped distribution mechanism for distributing balls is provided downstream of the specific winning port 65a, and the distribution mechanism selects the balls flowing toward the second flow path forming portion 335, The sphere may flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side.

The distribution mechanism may be displaced by the ball's own weight, or may be driven by a driving device to perform a constant movement from the opening and closing of the opening/closing plate 65b, or may be driven in a predetermined pattern from the time the pachinko machine is powered on. You can control it like this.

In the case of drive control, for example, when the type of incoming ball changes, control may be performed so that the ball flows toward the second flow path forming part 335 side. For example, when the number of balls entering the specific winning hole 65a exceeds the count (10 balls/round) (excessive winning), the balls are configured to flow to the second flow passage forming part 335 side. can be In this case, the number of balls flowing down the second flow path forming part 335 side can be compared with the number of excess prize balls paid out, and the player can quickly grasp the additional profit to be obtained. In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

Further, for example, in a configuration in which a ball that enters the first winning port 64 flows down the sorting device 300, if the number of reserved special symbols 1 is 4 (full tank) and a ball enters, The ball may be configured to flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side. In this case, the player can be made to notice that the reserved number of special symbols 1 is full by visually recognizing the balls flowing on the side of the second flow passage forming part 335 . In this case, the slide displacement member 370 and its downstream configuration may be maintained or omitted.

In the case of displacing by the ball's own weight, the predetermined movement may be repeated each time the ball reaches, or different movements may be performed depending on the number of balls that reach. For example, when one ball enters the specific winning hole 65a, it does not flow to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and when two or more balls enter the specific winning hole 65a together, The balls may flow toward the second flow passage forming portion 335 side. Also, the opposite is possible.

Further, these operation modes may be the same downstream of the pair of detection sensors SE1 arranged on the left and right sides of the specific winning hole 65a, or may be configured to be different on the left and right sides.

Here, if the ball flows down from the specific winning hole 65a to the slide displacement member 370 for a long time, the game may be delayed due to the long ball discharge time. Therefore, for example, using the above-described distribution mechanism, the number of balls entered into the specific winning opening 65a is made to flow down to the second flow path forming part 335 side, and the balls after that are distributed to the second It may be configured to discharge without passing through the flow path forming portion 335 . As a result, it is not necessary to wait for the counted number of balls to flow down the flow passage forming portions 334 to 336, so the length between rounds can be set short.

In the above-described first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is arranged under the third symbol display device 81, and the case where the ball is flowed to the near side near the lower end of the game area has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, the specific winning opening 65a is arranged above the lower edge of the third symbol display device 81, and the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 of the sorting device 300 are arranged close to the third symbol display device 81 or viewed from the front It may be configured to be arranged on the front side of the display area.

In this case, the line of sight for visually recognizing the ball flowing down the sorting device 300 can be the line of sight facing the display area side of the third symbol display device 81 . In this case, by associating the size of the profit that the player can obtain from the flow of the ball in the sorting device 300 with the contents of the notification on the liquid crystal display, the player can check the display to see whether the profit is large or small. You can easily see what you have earned.

Also, the case where the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is visually recognized at a position shifted downward in a front view with respect to the ball rolling on the third flow path forming portion 336 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 is arranged in such a positional relationship that the ball rolling on the third flow passage forming portion 336 is not vertically displaced when viewed from the front and can be visually recognized as overlapping. Also good. In this case, not only the ball entering the sorting device 300 but also the ball rolling on the inner rail 61 can function as a blindfold for the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336 .

In the above-described first embodiment, as the operation pattern Y of the slide displacement member 370, the case where the slide displacement member 370 is switched to the front position at a time when the ball entering the specific winning hole 65a cannot reach has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, the slide displacement member 370 may be controlled to be switched to the front position 1.2 seconds after the opening timing of the opening/closing plate 65b.

In this case, the front flowing ball that has reached the slide displacement member 370 before 1.2 seconds has passed can be made to enter the through hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11. On the other hand, the trailing ball that follows the leading trailing ball and reaches the slide displacement member 370 after 1.2 seconds passes normally enters the through hole of the detection sensor SE12.

Here, when the trailing ball has a positional relationship that functions as a blindfold for the trailing ball, the player sets the timing at which the flow of the trailing ball switches (downward) toward the variable probability detection sensor SE11 to the trailing ball. Hidden, it cannot be seen. In addition, since the chasing ball usually hits the detection sensor SE12, the player may assume that the ball has not hit the variable probability detection sensor SE11.

In this way, it is possible to make it look as if the ball has not entered the through-hole of the variable probability detection sensor SE11, so that the display effects of the time saving state and the variable probability state are made the same to maintain the player's expectation. In such a game machine, the presentation effect of the display presentation can be improved.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the ball that has collided with the left and right inner projecting portions 318 does not normally flow toward the detection sensor SE12 only with the load due to the collision, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path on the upstream side of the left and right inner protrusions 318 is configured so that the speed and rotation of the ball until it is guided to the left and right inner protrusions 318 can be configured with a plurality of types (for example, Kroon and widening the path width to increase the degree of freedom in the flow direction of the ball), and the load due to collision with the left and right inner protrusions 318 due to the difference in ball speed and rotation It may be constructed so as to be guided by the normal detection sensor SE12.

In the first embodiment, the case where the slide displacement member 370 and the projecting portions 317 to 319 are formed separately has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may be formed integrally with the slide displacement member 370 . That is, at least one of the projecting portions 317 to 319 may project from the upper projecting portion 376 of the slide displacement member 370 .

In the first embodiment described above, the operation timing of the slide displacement member 370 is the operation pattern Y considering the possibility of being hidden by a ball, but the operation timing is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the control for causing the LED of the light emitting means 351 to emit light at the timing when it is hidden by the sphere may be interwoven.

In the first embodiment described above, the case where the displacement resistance of the axis O1 is changed by the shape of the long guide hole 616 has been described, but the invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the displacement resistance may be changed by changing the width and length of the guide long hole 616 to form an outer phase of the gap, or by using a magnetic force or the urging force of a coil spring to change the displacement resistance.

In the above-described first embodiment, the long guide hole 616 is formed in a shape that bends in the middle, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape may be bent multiple times. In this case, it is possible to form a plurality of positions where the resistance to vertical displacement of the axis O1 increases.

Further, the shape of the guide slot 616 may be designed for the purpose of changing the amount of change in the angle θ during rotation of the rotating member 620 . For example, the long guide hole 616 may be formed in a shape capable of guiding the supported member 640 so as to partially form a range in which the angle θ can be maintained while the rotating member 620 is rotating.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the guide elongated hole 616 is fixed has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a plurality of guide long holes 616 are formed in which the axis O1 is movable, and the axis O1 is shifted by a predetermined switching means (for example, another driving device or a button-type switching device that is switched by coming into contact with the rotating member 620). The long guide hole 616 to be guided may be configured to be switchable, or the shape of the long guide hole 616 may be configured to be changeable.

In the above-described first embodiment, the second decorative rotating member 660 is arranged on the right side of the third pattern display device 81, and the first rendering surface 661a is directed diagonally forward and leftward. However, this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, it may be configured so that the effect surface is directed to the front and oblique right side in a state arranged on the left side of the third pattern display device 81, or when arranged on the lower side (upper side) of the third pattern display device 81 Alternatively, the performance surface may be directed diagonally forward (downward).

In the above-described first embodiment, the rotating member 620 is arranged on the proximal end side of the displacement, but it is not necessarily limited to this. good. On the other hand, the use of the rotating member 620 rather than the direct-acting member functions favorably to secure the rotation angles of the second decoration rotating member 660 and the projecting decoration portion 652b.

For example, when a member that slides laterally is fixed to the driving side of the supported member 640, the angle that affects the rotation angle of the second decorative rotating member 660 and the projecting decorative portion 652b is an angle above the horizontal (angle a1, etc.). is limited to On the other hand, if the rotating member 620 is used, not only the angle above the horizontal but also the angle below the horizontal (angle b1, etc.) can be used. Note that regardless of this favorable effect, a member that slides linearly may be connected to the driven side of the supported member 640 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the second decoration rotating member 660 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped and has decorations on three sides that intersect at right angles has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the second ornamental rotating member 660 may be formed with a pentagonal cross section, and configured to be stop-controllable in a posture in which each side face faces forward.

In the first embodiment, the decorative fixing member 670 is a fixed decorative member, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a liquid crystal display device may be arranged. In this case, it is possible to easily switch between displays that are easy to see together with the first operation unit 600 and the second operation unit 700 .

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the rotation axis of the rotating member 620 and the second decoration rotating member 660 can intersect at right angles has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the rotation axis of the second decorative rotating member 660 may be configured with the longitudinal component as an axis (as an oblique rotation axis).

In the above-described first embodiment, the setting of the urging force of the coil spring CS2 has been described so that the second action unit 700 can be easily maintained in the intermediate effect state, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a magnet may be arranged near the long hole portion 723 of the rotating arm member 720 so as to generate an attractive force between the magnet and the magnet arranged on the right front plate member 710 . is likely to occur in the intermediate rendering state of the second motion unit 700 .

Further, for example, instead of forming the inclined portions 751 and 762 linearly, they may be formed in a curved shape such as a wave shape or a sawtooth shape. Further, when the coil spring CS2 is used, the biasing force is not limited to being generated only when the coil spring CS2 is compressed.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which the posture of the shaft rotating member 785 is maintained by elastic deformation of the bevel tooth portion 783c and the bevel tooth member 785c until the attraction force of the magnet Mg is exceeded, but this is not necessarily the case. is not limited to For example, instead of the elastic deformation of the gear, a permissible value may be set for the sliding friction between the rotating shaft and the support cylinder that supports the shaft.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the covering member 787 rises from below and enters from the rear end portion of the game area to the front side has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be possible to project forward by downward displacement. In this case, the upper edge of the center frame 86 may be passed forward from below, or the game area may be protruded forward from above the game area (for example, above the front frame 14).

In the above-described first embodiment, the cover member 787 rotates in the opposite direction, so that the sub-decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 are not aligned and visually recognized, thereby reducing the distinguishability. However, this is not necessarily the case. isn't it. For example, instead of turning the secondary decorative surfaces 787a2 and 787b2 toward the front side, they may rotate while turning toward the left and right outer sides. Moreover, even if the rotation is in the same direction, the rotation angle may be shifted.

In the first embodiment described above, both the second operation unit 700 and the third operation unit 800 share the rotational angle of the link mechanism (intermediate arm member 783, intermediate arm member 850) to rotate the shaft rotating member 785 and the rotating member. 834 is configured to rotate (reverse), but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in a structure in which a metal rod 832 that guides a rotating member 834 is grooved in a unicursal pattern and a projecting piece protruding from the rotating member 834 is inserted into the groove, the rotating member may vary depending on the design of the groove. 834 rotation timing can be defined.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the output of the detection sensor 813 is switched from the state in which the detected part 844 is arranged in the detection sensor 813 is controlled to determine that the switching rotation operation is switched to the integral rotation operation. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, after reversing the driving direction of the drive motor 861 in a state where the detected portion 844 is not arranged in the detection sensor 813, by detecting that the detected portion 844 has entered the detection sensor 813, the switching rotation operation can be changed. It may be determined that the operation has switched to the integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the configuration of the first decorative member 870 and the configuration of the second decorative member 880 are different in places, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. For example, magnets Mg2 may be arranged on both decorative members 870 and 880, or both decorative members 870 and 880 may be plated.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the switching rotation operation and the integral rotation operation are clearly separated by disposing the torque limiter 866 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an oil damper that produces viscous resistance may be provided. In the case of an oil damper, since resistance is always generated regardless of the switching of the operation mode, the torque limiter can reduce the displacement resistance in the rotational direction after the operation mode is switched to the integral rotation operation. This makes it easy to achieve high-speed rotation after switching to integral rotation operation.

In the first embodiment, the case where the light LD1 is reflected to the front side by the plated portion 871a has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the metal rod 832 may reflect light. During the integral rotation operation, the metal rod 832 is hidden by the linear motion member 833 by arranging the linear motion member 833 on the base end side of the metal rod 832 (the inner diameter side of the circle). When the 833 is arranged on the tip side (the outer diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832, it is possible to reflect the light LD1 by exposing the base end side (the inner diameter side of the circle) of the metal rod 832. is.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the bottom surface of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downward to the left and right inner sides has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the first flow path forming portion 334 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal plane) along the left-right direction, or may be configured to be downwardly inclined in the left-right direction. can be The former can reduce the momentum of the ball toward the second flow path forming portion 335 compared to the latter.

Further, for example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the second flow passage forming portion 335 may be configured so as not to be inclined (parallel to the horizontal surface) along the front-rear direction, or may be inclined downward toward the rear. can be configured to The former can reduce the momentum of the ball toward the third flow path forming portion 336 compared to the latter.

Moreover, although the case where the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow path forming portion 336 is inclined downward inward in the left-right direction has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rolling surface (bottom surface) of the third flow passage forming portion 336 may be configured to be non-inclined (parallel to the horizontal surface) along the left-right direction. In this case, since the ball is less urged toward the partition plate portion 338, the degree of damage to the partition plate portion 338 due to collision or friction with the ball can be kept low.

In the first embodiment described above, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d is arranged outside the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d may be configured so as to pass through the inside of the trajectory of the sphere passing through the branch point (located at a lower position). In this case, when the outer light emitting means 351d is turned on, the sphere passing through the branch point overlaps with the optical axis of the outer light emitting means 351d, so that the light can be reflected to the rear side. A state (dark state) in which the light does not reach the light diffusion processing surface 333b can be obtained.

That is, while the lighting of the outer light emitting means 351d continues, the sphere flows down at the branch point, and the light diffusion processed surface 333b (and the light diffusion processed surface illuminated by receiving the light diffused from the light diffusion processed surface 333b) 314c, 340) can be correlated. Since each of the light diffusion processed surfaces 314c, 333b, 340 has a larger area (projected area) in the player's line of sight than the ball, the player can easily grasp how the ball flows down at the branch point. .

In the above-described first embodiment, the timing for controlling the lighting of the light emitting means 351 is explained during the jackpot game, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emission may be controlled based on the detection of winning in the winning openings 63, 64, 140, etc., or the light emission may be controlled due to the input operation of the frame button 22. Alternatively, light is emitted due to the occurrence of a prize exceeding a prescribed number (the number of prizes that define the end of the round game of the jackpot game, the maximum number of times of holding fluctuations based on the balls entering the prize openings 64 and 140) You may make it control.

In the first embodiment, if the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is defective, the assembly position of the middle member 330 and the lower member 380 is defective, so the operation of the slide displacement member 370 is checked. Thus, the case where it is possible to determine whether the assembly of the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 is good or bad at the manufacturing stage has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, a detection sensor that detects the position of the slide displacement member 370 may be provided to detect the movement of the slide displacement member 370 during operation. In this case, if the positional relationship between the intermediate member 330 and the lower member 380 deviates due to repetitive operations or the influence of some external force, although it did not appear at the manufacturing stage, the occurrence of the deviation is detected by the operation of the slide displacement member 370. Defects can be determined.

In the first embodiment described above, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 for switching the flowing direction of the ball at the branch point BP1 is linear displacement in the front-rear direction, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be a rolling action (e.g., roulette type), or may be provided with a shape that makes the ball flow irregularly (e.g., a funnel-shaped croon) so that the ball can flow down in multiple directions. good.

In the above-described first embodiment, the sorting device 300 is adopted as a device for switching whether the ball passes through either the variable probability detection sensor SE11 or the normal detection sensor SE12, but it is not necessarily limited to this. do not have. For example, it may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the start winning opening (the winning opening 64, 140), may be adopted as a device for guiding the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, or may be adopted as another winning opening. Or you may employ|adopt as a device which guides a ball|ball to a prize-winning area.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 300 is arranged at the lower corner of the game area has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, the sorting device 300 may be arranged in the upper corner of the game area (for example, above the center frame 86), or may be arranged in the left and right corners (left and right outside of the left and right edges of the center frame 86). It may be placed on the central side of the game area. For example, when arranged in the upper corner of the game area, the line of sight of the player looking at the sorting device 300 is inclined upward with respect to the horizontal plane. The downstream sphere can be configured to hide the upstream sphere.

Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured to have a reverse inclination, and the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161.

In the first embodiment, the case where the shape of the window portion 162d is designed based on the shape of the flow passage forming portions 335 and 336 in a front view and the arrangement of the seal member 313 has been described, but the configuration is not necessarily limited to this. isn't it. For example, it may have a shape that allows (only) the slide displacement member 370 to be visually recognized from the player's line of sight (viewed obliquely downward), or may have a shape that reduces the visibility of the slide displacement member 370 . Further, the shape may be such that one of the front side position and the rear side position of the slide displacement member 370 is visible and the other side is invisible.

In addition, in the first embodiment, the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 are configured as a pair of left and right and are not merged, thereby reducing the number of balls entering one flow path (dispersing the entering balls). The slide displacement member 370 is adapted to switch between any paths of the balls passing through the respective flow paths, while producing an action that facilitates avoidance of ball clogging.

In this regard, the shape of the window portion 162d is such that only one of the left and right pairs of the slide displacement member 370 (eg, the ball guide portion 371b and the upper projecting portion 376) can be seen and the other cannot be seen. Any shape is fine. In this case, since the player can predict the path of the ball flowing down on the side that cannot be visually recognized, the interest of the player can be improved.

In the first embodiment, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state where the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b is the backward direction (forward direction of the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336). A case has been described where the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction is suppressed by sliding, and the amount of rotation of the ball in the state immediately before it falls is suppressed, so that the player can see that the ball is temporarily stopped, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to this.

For example, the displacement direction of the slide displacement member 370 from the state in which the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b may be configured to be the forward direction (opposite direction to the traveling direction of the ball flowing down the third flow path forming portion 336).

That is, by displacing the ball guide portion 371b forward and allowing the ball guide portion 371b to enter the lower side of the third flow passage forming portion 336, the variable probability detection sensor SE11 can be opened. The upper projecting portion 376 is formed separately from the ball guide portion 371b, and is arranged so as to protrude toward the branch point BP1 when the ball can ride on the ball guide portion 371b. When the ball guide portion 371b is displaced to a state where the ball does not ride on the ball guide portion 371b, the upper protruding portion 376 is displaced in the front and rear reverse direction at the same timing as the displacement of the ball guide portion 371b, and the probability variation detection sensor SE11 is displaced. All you have to do is secure a path for the ball to.

In this case, the rotation of the ball in the forward rolling direction can be accelerated by the sliding movement of the ball guide portion 371b with the ball during sliding displacement. can be made to appear to the player as if it immediately fell (falls smoothly).

In the above-described first embodiment, the control of the rotating member 620 takes into consideration the inertial load applied to the rotating member 620 after the drive motor 631 is de-energized, and the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1. Although the control mode is such that the power supply to the drive motor 631 is cut off due to the fact, the control mode is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the detection sensor KS1 detects that the extended portion 634b is arranged in the detection groove of the detection sensor KS1, the drive power of the drive motor 631 is reduced, and the drive motor 631 is rotated weakly for a short period of time and then stopped. Also good. As a result, the rotating member 620 can be reliably reached to the displacement end position (the position in the waiting state for the effect).

In the first embodiment described above, the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762 of the second operation unit 700 are formed of straight inclined grooves, but this is not necessarily the case. do not have. For example, by forming a groove having a partial curve that curves forward on the lower end side, the displacement of the effect device 780 is combined with the vertical slide displacement, the forward/backward slide displacement, and the forward/backward posture displacement. It can be a displacement mode.

As for the shape of the grooves of the front upper inclined portions 714 and 751 and the receiving inclined portion 762, various modes are exemplified. For example, it may have a doglegged shape (or inverted doglegged shape) when viewed in the left-right direction, or may have an S-curved shape.

In the above-described first embodiment, regarding the reversing operation of the second operation unit 700, by delaying the start timing of the reversing operation by magnetic force, the members (for example, the main body member 771 and the covering member 787, the drive motor 782 and the covering member, etc.) 787) has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, by setting the number of gears of the bevel tooth portion 783c of the intermediate arm member 783 and the bevel tooth member 785c of the shaft rotating member 785, a design method that avoids collision between the members may be employed.

In the above-described first embodiment, in the second operation unit 700, the case where the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 is arranged in the horizontal position corresponding to the horizontal center of the effect device 780 in the overhanging state as the upper end position will be described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by arranging the rotating tip of the rotating arm member 720 to the right of the left-right center of the effect device 780, the metal rod 702 that supports the left side of the elevator plate member 740 and the right side of the elevator plate member 740 are supported. It is possible to ensure a long support position interval with the rotating arm member 720 that is engaged. As a result, the lift plate member 740 can be stably supported.

In the third operation unit 800, the bulging portion 824a is configured as a portion that remains unchanged in shape and can be visually recognized by the player regardless of whether the decorative members 870 and 880 are in the individually combined state or the one combined state. Also, in the one united state, the bulging portion 824a is made visible to the player as a part (central portion), so that the bulging portion 824a, the first covering portion 875, and the second covering portion 885 are connected to each other. Although the case where the shape is designed so as to suppress discomfort has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the display device (segment display device or liquid crystal display device) may be arranged in such a positional relationship that the display section is arranged in front of the bulging portion 824a. In this case, unlike the case where the visibility of the swelling portion 824a is changed by changing the illumination mode (brightness or color) of the light from the inner light emitting portion 823a, the object visually recognized by the swelling portion 824a is displayed in the display mode of the display portion. can be changed by switching, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of production.

Further, for example, for either the first decorative member 870 or the second decorative member 880, the shape of the covering portions 875 and 885 may be changed so as to extend toward the center of the circular shape in the combined state. The extended portion may be configured to cover the bulging portion 824a. In this case, in either the individually united state or the one united state, the bulging portion 824a can be hidden so as not to be visually recognized by the player. The degree of restriction on the degree of freedom in designing the portion 885 can be reduced.

In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the plurality of decorative members 870 and 880 are magnetically attracted to the third operation unit 800 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the united state may be maintained by the load of the concave-convex engagement, or the united state may be maintained by the biasing force of the spring member.

In the first embodiment described above, the switching rotation operation is realized by setting the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 of the third operation unit 800 to be smaller than the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, but this is not necessarily the case. not a thing For example, by adopting an operation mode in which momentum is applied, even when the attraction force of the magnet Mg2 is greater than or equal to the resistance force of the torque limiter 866, the switching rotation operation can be realized.

As a mode of operation to give momentum, for example, rotation control in the opposite direction may be performed as a preparatory operation (preliminary operation). In this case, a reaction can be applied to the rotational displacement of the decorative members 870 and 880, and a load can be generated in the direction of throwing the intermediate arm member 850 radially outward from the arrangement in the combined state. This makes it easier to release the attraction due to the magnetic force.

In the above-described first embodiment, as a device for suppressing wobbling during the switching rotation operation of the third operation unit 800, the case where the decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to undergo radial displacement before the reversing operation has been described. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the magnet Mg2 is arranged so that the line of action of the magnetic force can be drawn on the plane on which the metal bar 832 as the rotation axis of the reversing operation is arranged, the diameter of the decorative members 870 and 880 from the combined state is Even if the reversing motion occurs before the direction change, the magnetic force generated between the plurality (five) of the decorative members 870 and 880 is generated on the same plane, so the wobble that occurs in the third motion unit 800 during the switching rotation motion is suppressed. can do.

In the above-described first embodiment, the switching rotation operation is configured such that the decorative members 870 and 880 are reversed by 180 degrees, but this is not necessarily the case. For example, it may be configured so that they are reunited by a 120-degree reversal operation. In this case, before and after the switching rotation operation, while the sides of the decorative members 870 and 880 that are visible in a front view are the same, the viewing angles of the covering portions 875 and 885 are made different (for example, before the operation, the rightward direction is 60°). , and 60 degrees to the left after the action) can be executed.

Further, regarding the structure of the plurality of intermediate arm members 850, for example, by configuring the lengths to be uncommon, or by configuring the formation range and shape of the bevel tooth portions 854c to be uncommon, the switching rotation operation can be performed by 180 degrees. The decorative members 870 and 880 that reconfigure the combined state by reversing 120 degrees and the decorative members 870 and 880 that reconfigure the combined state by reversing 120 degrees may coexist. For example, among five decorative members 870 and 880, one decorative member 870 and 880 is configured to be flipped 120 degrees by switching rotation, and the other (four) decorative members 870 and 880 are configured to be switched and rotated. It may be configured to be inverted by 180 degrees.

The angle of the reversing operation in the switching rotation operation can be set arbitrarily. It can be set to 180 degrees or 120 degrees as described above, 0 degrees, 360 degrees, or any angle from 0 degrees to 360 degrees.

In the above-described first embodiment, a pair of left and right torque limiters 866 are arranged above the rotation axis of the outer rotating member 840 and in asymmetrical positions. However, this is not necessarily the case. For example, both of the pair of torque limiters 866 may be arranged on the left side, the right side, or the lower side of the outer rotating member 840, and the rotation of the outer rotating member 840 may be arranged. They may be arranged on opposite sides (opposite sides) with the axis interposed therebetween.

In the above-described first embodiment, a case has been described in which a plurality of (five in the first embodiment) intermediate arm members 850 are configured to have a common shape, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by varying the shapes of the supported hole 854a in which the linear motion member 833 that slides along the metal rod 832 and the guide hole 854b are arranged, the start timing of the slide displacement along the metal rod 832 can be set by the linear motion member. A difference may be generated between 833 .

For example, by changing the design of the supported hole 854a so as to form it as an elongated hole or a hole with a large diameter, and mixing the intermediate arm member 850 with a correspondingly changed design of the guide hole 854b, the linear motion in the switching rotation operation can be achieved. A difference can be provided in the displacement start timing of the member 833 .

As a result, the decorative members 870 and 880, which are fastened and fixed to the rotating member 834 connected to the direct-acting member 833, are displaced radially outward from the united state at different timings. Therefore, the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 can be separated in the shear direction (radial direction).

In this case, the load for releasing the adsorption can be reduced, so the driving force required for the drive motor 862 can be reduced, and the arrangement of the third operation unit 800 can be stabilized.

It should be noted that it is not necessary to generate displacement in the shearing direction (radial direction) at the attracting portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2 each time. For example, it is configured so that a displacement mode that causes a displacement in the shear direction occurs when the switching rotation operation is performed from the combined state (forward trip), but does not occur when the switching rotation operation leads to the combined state (return trip). can be

For example, the design of the intermediate arm member 850 can be changed from a combined state (a state in which the tip of rotation is arranged on the rotation shaft side of the inner rotary member 830) to a state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position. The displacement mode in which the intermediate arm member 850 rotates and the displacement mode in which the intermediate arm portion i850 rotates from the state in which the decorative members 870 and 880 are arranged at the outermost diameter position to the combined state are different. , it is possible to selectively generate a displacement mode in which displacement in the shear direction (radial direction) is generated in the attracted portion between the magnet Mg2 and the metal screw Nj2.

In the first embodiment, the number of detection sensors KS1, 713, 778d, 813 has been described for each operation unit 600, 700, 800, but the number is not necessarily limited to this. For example, instead of one detection sensor KS1, a plurality of detection sensors KS1 may be arranged at positions where the extended portion 634b can be detected. Fewer or four or more detection sensors 713 may be employed. As for the arrangement of the detection sensor KS1, a position where the extended portion 634b can be detected in the intermediate effect state or the extended state of the first motion unit 600 is exemplified.

Further, for example, only one of the two detection sensors 778d may be employed, and instead of the single detection sensor 813, a plurality of detection sensors 813 may be arranged at positions where the detected portion 844 can be detected. It may be configured as follows. As for the arrangement of the detection sensors 813, for example, by arranging the five detection sensors 813 at equal intervals on the circumference, five types (rotational It can be determined in 5 different modes depending on the direction).

In the above-described second embodiment, the case where the balls continue to roll regardless of the arrangement of the slide member 2420 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the distance between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 in the front side arrangement FP and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314 of the upper member 310 may be configured to have a length equivalent to the diameter of the sphere. In this case, when the slide member 2420 is placed on the front side FP, the ball can be sandwiched between the upper side surface of the slide member 2420 and the lower side surface of the upper surface portion 314, so the deceleration effect of the ball can be strengthened. , stagnation of the ball can be easily generated.

In the above-described second embodiment, there is no description that the ridge is formed inside the first flow path forming portion 2334, but the first flow path forming portion 2334 is provided with a ridge for decelerating the ball. It may be configured as follows. In this case, the height of the protrusions is set so as to contact either the sphere that rides on the slide member 2420 at the front side position FP or the sphere that rides on the bottom surface 2334c when the slide member 2420 is placed at the rear side BP. , may be set to a height that does not contact the other. In this case, the deceleration action by the protrusion can be generated in either the state where the slide member 2420 is arranged on the front side FP or the state where the slide member 2420 is arranged on the rear side BP.

In the third embodiment, the slide displacement member 3370 is formed integrally with the thin plate portion 371 and the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, in accordance with the timing at which the thin plate portion 371 is arranged at the front side position and the rear side position, the upper front projecting portion 3376b and the upper lateral projecting portion 3376c as separate members appear and disappear in the vertical direction and contact the ball. and a non-contact state.

In addition, although the arrangement of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 is not limited at all, it is better to use the probability variation detection sensor SE11 on the rear side as in the present embodiment. Winning can be easily avoided.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the slide plate 4372 and the upper contact portion 4373 and the slide plate 4376 and the upper contact portion 4377 are integrally formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, these components may be configured as separate members, and may be configured to operate synchronously (interlockedly) at the same timing. In addition, you may comprise so that it may be slidably displaced in the front-back direction.

In the above-described fourth embodiment, when the sliding members 4371 and 4375 are slid at the timing when the ball passes rearward through the upper side surface 4372a of the slide plate 4372, the ball is returned forward due to the inclination of the upper side surface 4376a. , but not necessarily limited to this. For example, an additional ball entry detection sensor may be arranged behind the slide plate 4372 in the front open state.

In this case, only the ball on the slide plate 4372 when the state changes from the rear open state to the front open state can be guided to the additional ball detection sensor. Benefits obtained by the player by entering the ball into the additional ball detection sensor (for example, as a larger benefit than the right obtained by entering the ball into the probability variation detection sensor SE11, winning multiple jackpots (Acquisition of the right to transition to the variable probability state, etc.) can improve the attention to the ball that has passed through the third flow path forming part 336 .

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the flow path from the raised floor portion 6342 at the downstream end of the confluence flow path 6341 is configured as a flow path along the left-right direction has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. . For example, in the vicinity of the raised floor portion 6342, a curved flow path may be formed in which the connection point JP1 side faces rearward. As a result, both the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the raised floor portion 6342 and the ball entering the connection point JP1 from the second flow path forming portion 335 can have backward velocity components. By colliding, it is possible to prevent backflow from occurring.

Note that the connection point JP1 may be configured to be arranged at the center position of the sorting device 6300 in the left-right direction. Further, the structure of the flow path forming portions 334 to 336 may be configured to have a reverse inclination, and the variable probability detection sensor SE11 and the normal detection sensor SE12 may be arranged near the fixed member 161. In this case, it is possible to make it easier for the balls to gather at the connection point JP1 and then flow down to the near side, so that attention to the balls flowing down inside the sorting device 6300 can be improved.

In the ninth embodiment, the elongated guide hole 9616 is configured as a branched elongated hole, and the path through which the axis O1 passes through the elongated guide hole 9616 is switched depending on how the load is applied to the axis O1. has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the guide slot 9616 may be switched. That is, in the guide elongated hole 9616, only the linear portion 616a is always configured as an elongated hole, and the curved portion 616b, the angle maintaining portion 9616c, and the connecting portion 9616d are configured as elongated holes. and the case where the long hole is blocked may alternately be switched. In this case, it is possible to prevent the axis O1 from being displaced along an erroneous path, thereby preventing the supported member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 from being displaced in an unintended manner.

For example, in the guide long hole 9616 having branches, a switch valve may be provided to limit the displacement path of the axis O1 by closing one of the paths. In this case, while the shape of the guide long hole 9616 is fixed, the displacement path of the axis O1 can be restricted by the switching valve. Unintended displacement of the member 640 and the second decorative rotating member 660 can be prevented.

<First control example>
Next, a first control example of the pachinko machine 10 in each embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 118 to 194. FIG. FIG. 118 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example, and FIG. 119 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in this first control example. As for the configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, each configuration used in each of the above-described embodiments is appropriately used.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example has an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. An inner frame 12 formed in a shape and supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 118) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . In addition, the inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 135) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided above the upper plate 17 . This frame button 22 is used by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 118), which will be described later, is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. manipulated.

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified, and the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two stages, a "sand beach stage" and a "deep sea stage." ing. Various effects such as variable effects and ready-to-reach effects that are performed when a ball enters the first ball hole 64 (starting winning), which will be described later, are designed to be performed in accordance with the theme given to each stage. It is The stage is changed when the frame button 22 is operated by the player during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during high-speed variation. ”→“Beach stage”→…. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "sand beach stage" is set as the initial stage.

On the other hand, the third pattern display device 81 is configured to display a selection screen of the super ready-to-win effect mode during the normal ready-to-win when the normal ready-to-win effect is started and the normal ready-to-win is to be developed into the super ready-to-win. When the frame button 22 is operated by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the content of the effect at the time of super ready-to-win is changed.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying whether prize balls are being paid out or when an error has occurred is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. A ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower portion of the lower tray 50 when viewed from the front and is operated when the balls stored in the lower tray 50 are ejected downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 for receiving the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 118, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the first control example, specifically, the configuration necessary for explaining this control example will be mainly described. In addition to the configuration whose detailed description has been omitted in FIG. 2 described above, the configuration already described in FIG. 2 will be described again for convenience of description. 118, elements similar to those in the configuration of FIG. 2 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 118, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails for guiding balls, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62, a general winning opening 63, a first A ball entrance 64, a second ball entrance 640, an electric accessory 640a, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, etc. are assembled together, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of the inner frame 12. The general winning hole 63, the first ball-entering hole 64, the second ball-entering hole 640, the variable prize winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in through-holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and are arranged on the game board. 13 is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 118, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 135) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 118) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 118) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

In the pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, a lottery for a special symbol (first symbol) is performed, and the ball enters the normal ball entrance 67. When it passes, a lottery for a normal pattern (second pattern) is performed. As types of special symbols, there are provided two types of special symbols, namely, a first special symbol and a second special symbol. A lottery for the second special symbol is executed for the ball entering the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁In other words, in this control example, a plurality of special symbol lotteries with different execution triggers can be executed.

In the special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery) performed for the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit. Along with determination of success or failure, determination of the type of the jackpot is also performed when it is determined to be a jackpot of a special symbol. When the jackpot of the special pattern is achieved, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special game state, and the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is closed for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds, or until 10 balls are won). ) is opened and the opening is repeated 10 times (10 rounds). When a ball wins in the specific winning hole 65a, 10 balls are paid out as prize balls. of prize balls will be paid out. There are four types of jackpot types of special symbols: ``jackpot A'', ``jackpot B'', ``jackpot C'' and ``jackpot D''. As a result, a game value (game value) corresponding to these jackpot types is given to the player.

Also, when the lottery for the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started in the first symbol display device 37, and after a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds to 90 seconds) has passed, A special symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the first symbol display device 37 is performing a variable display, the ball enters the maximum for each type of special symbol. It is reserved up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . When the variable display ends on the first symbol display device 37, the ball is held based on the entry into the first ball entrance 64 (first special symbol hold), or the ball is entered into the second ball entrance 640. If there is a reserved ball (second special symbol reserved), a lottery for the next special symbol is performed, and a variable display corresponding to the lottery is started.

In this control example, when both the first special symbol reservation and the second special symbol reservation exist, the special symbol lottery using the second special symbol reservation is preferentially executed. are doing. In this way, by providing priority to the order in which the lottery is executed according to the type of special design, only the special design lottery of the type with high priority can be executed, so depending on the type of special design When a difference is provided in the privilege given to the player according to the result of the special symbol lottery, and the degree of establishment of the execution opportunity of each special symbol type is differentiated, specifically, the first special symbol To make the execution opportunity of the second special symbol lottery more difficult to be established than the execution opportunity of the lottery, and to make it easier to give a privilege advantageous to the player in the second special symbol lottery than in the first special symbol lottery. In this case, the second special symbol lottery is executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, so that the execution opportunity of the lottery (second special symbol lottery) advantageous to the player is established. Regardless, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the period in which the lottery (second special symbol lottery) that is advantageous to the player is not executed becomes longer and the player's desire to play is reduced.

As shown in FIG. 118, the game area formed on the game board 13 (the area where the ball can flow down) is changed by the variable display unit 80 to the left area (the game area formed to the left of the variable display unit 80). , and a right area (game area formed on the right side of the variable unit 80). The left area is shot when the player plays a left-handed game, that is, shoots a ball by the shooting solenoid of the ball shooting unit 112a while suppressing the rotation amount of the operation handle 51 (see FIG. 1). The right area is a game area where the ball can reach, and the right area is the area where the player is playing right-handed games. This is a game area where a shot ball can reach when playing a ball shooting game.

A through gate 67 is provided in the left area, and the sphere flowing down the left area reaches the lower area formed below the variable display unit 80 . This lower area is provided with a first ball entry port 64 and a second ball entry means 640 accompanied by an electric accessory 640a. On the other hand, the right area is provided with a through gate 67 and a general ball entrance 63, and the ball flowing down the right area is configured to reach a variable winning device 65 provided in the lower area. ing.

The first ball entrance 64 provided in the lower area is arranged so that the ball that has flowed down the left side area is easier to enter than the ball that has flowed down the right side area. About 1 out of 15 balls enters the first ball entrance 64, and about 1 out of 100 balls that flow down the right side area is placed at a position where it can enter the first ball entrance 64. is set. When a ball enters the first ball entrance 64, three balls are paid out as prize balls.

In addition, the second ball entrance 640 provided in the lower region is accompanied by an electric accessory 640a, and when the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (displayed in white in FIG. 118), the ball When it is difficult to enter the second ball entrance 640 and in the open state (shown in black in FIG. 118), the ball is configured to enter the second ball entrance 640 more easily than in the closed state. ing. As shown in FIG. 118, the electric accessory 640a is composed of a pair of blade members, and when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, the ball flowing down the left area also flows down the right area. The balls also enter the second ball entering means at a similar ratio (about 2 out of 3 balls). Then, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640, one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

The specific winning hole 65a, which is opened and closed when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the jackpot game state (special game state), is located at a position ( below the right area). Therefore, when the jackpot game is started, the right-handed game is more advantageous to the player than the left-handed game.

On the other hand, in the normal symbol lottery performed for the passage of the ball through the through gate (normal ball entrance) 67, whether or not the normal symbol wins is determined. When the normal pattern is won, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. become easy. That is, when the normal symbol wins, the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery) is likely to be performed.

Further, when the lottery for the normal design (second design) is performed, the fluctuation display of the normal design is started in the second design display device 83, and after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds, 30 seconds, etc.) has passed, A normal symbol indicating the result of the lottery is stopped and displayed. When the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 while the second symbol display device 83 is performing variable display, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37. It is displayed and also shown in the second symbol reservation lamp 84 . When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the normal ball entrance 67 remains, the lottery for the next normal symbol is performed, and the variable display corresponding to the lottery is displayed. be started.

As described above, there are four types of special symbol jackpot types: "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C", and "jackpot D".

In any of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", "jackpot C" and "jackpot D", the number of rounds is a special game state (10R jackpot game) of 10 rounds. In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A", as an added value after the jackpot ends, the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to a variable state (high probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols). . The probability variation state continues until the next special symbol lottery wins the jackpot.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot B", as an added value after the jackpot game ends, the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), The time saving state continues for the first period (the period until the lottery of special symbols is completed 30 times).

When the jackpot type is "jackpot C", as an added value after the jackpot game ends, the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), The time-saving state continues for a second period longer than the first period (a period until the lottery of special symbols is completed 50 times).

When the jackpot type is "jackpot D", as an added value after the jackpot game ends, the game state after the jackpot game ends shifts to a time-saving state (low probability state for special symbols, high probability state for normal symbols), The time-saving state continues for a third period (a period until the lottery of special symbols is completed 80 times) longer than the second period.

Here, the "special symbol high probability state" refers to a state in which the special symbol jackpot probability is increased, in other words, a game state that easily shifts to a special game state (10R jackpot game state). . On the other hand, when it is not "special symbol high probability state", it is called "special symbol low probability state", which means that the probability of big hit is lower than the special symbol high probability state. In addition, the “normal pattern high probability state” means that the probability of winning the normal pattern is increased, and the normal pattern winning game (the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, making it easier to enter the ball into the second ball entrance 640). It refers to a state in which it is easy to execute a game). On the other hand, if it is not "normal pattern high probability state", it is called "normal pattern low probability state", which means that the normal pattern winning probability is normal (state lower than high probability state).

In other words, if the probability variable state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery are usually ( (low probability), which is the most advantageous game state for the player. On the other hand, if the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the probability of winning the jackpot in the special symbol lottery is low, but the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery becomes a high probability, the game state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols).

In addition, even if the time saving state is set as the game state, the period during which the time saving state continues (short time period) differs depending on the selected jackpot type. D" is the jackpot type that is most advantageous to the player among the jackpot types (jackpots B to D) for which the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, followed by "jackpot C" and "jackpot B" in that order. It will be a big hit type.

In addition, in this control example, the number of fluctuations in the special design as a condition for ending the time saving state, that is, the number of fluctuations in the first special design and the number of fluctuations in the second special design, is a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 (times, 50 times, 80 times) is established when reaching any of the time saving end conditions (special figure fluctuation number end conditions), but other time saving end conditions may be provided without being limited to this. For example, among a plurality of special symbol types, it is possible to provide a time saving end condition that is established when the number of fluctuations of a specific special symbol type (second special symbol) reaches a predetermined number of times. By configuring in this way, during the time saving state, that is, when the game state in which the game per normal pattern is easily executed and the game state in which the second special symbol lottery is easily executed is set, the first special symbol fluctuates. It is possible to suppress the end of the time saving state due to the change. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate execution of the second special symbol lottery during the time saving state.

In addition, if the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific winning result different from the jackpot winning, or if the number of times of specific winning results reaches a predetermined number, the time-saving end condition (lottery result end condition) is established. may be provided. As a result, the timing at which the time saving state ends can be changed according to the result of the special symbol lottery, so that it is difficult for the player to predict how long the time saving state will continue.

In this control example, as described above, when the probability variable state is set, the probability variable state is configured to continue until the jackpot is elected, but not limited to this, the end condition of the time saving state described above Under the same technical concept, it is possible to provide a probability variable end condition, for example, a probability variable end condition that is established when the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times, and a special lottery to end the probability variable state , It may be configured to terminate the variable probability state when the lottery result is a lottery result to end the variable probability state.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, when the same jackpot type (jackpot A to jackpot D) is selected, a short fluctuation time is selected as the fluctuation time of the special symbol lottery executed after the jackpot game ends. A first game state that is likely to be played and a second game state that is likely to be selected for a longer variation time than the first game state can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time in the game state set after the jackpot game ends.

As described above, in the special symbol jackpot in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of the jackpot is common regardless of the type of jackpot, and depending on the type of jackpot, after the jackpot is completed, "variable state" or "time saving state" is configured to be set. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be changed according to the type of jackpot, or the number of rounds may be changed only for a part of the type of jackpot. Further, for example, the period of "normal symbol high probability state" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, as a time-saving state of normal symbols, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is lengthened, or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per normal symbol is increased. Also good.

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 118). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. The plurality of LEDs 37a perform variable display by indicating whether or not the special symbol lottery performed with the entry of the ball into the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is indicated by the lighting state, or the variation of the balls entered into the first ball entrance 64 has not been executed. The number of held balls, which is the number of balls (held balls), is indicated by the lighting state.

When the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is displayed in the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is suspended up to four times. , the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device and is also indicated by the third symbol display device 81 . In the present embodiment, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is suspended up to four times. Alternatively, the number of times may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. In addition, the LEDs 37a are configured so that each LED emits a different color (for example, red, green, and blue). Depending on the combination of the emitted colors, various game states (high-probability state of special symbols) of the pachinko machine 10 can be achieved with a small number of LEDs. , etc.) can be displayed. In addition, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a big win as a stop symbol after the end of the variation, but also indicates the big win type (big win A, big win B) in the case of a big win. A special symbol (first symbol) is shown.

The game area is also provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") and a second pattern display device 83 composed of LEDs. . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variable display of the second special symbol (first symbol) using this as a trigger. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronism with the variable display of the special second special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a 15-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. be done. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. The third pattern (the first special pattern or the second special pattern) is composed of 10 types of special patterns imitating the numerals "0" to "9". Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery by the main controller 110, which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols (for example, "777") are displayed in a variable display, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot occurs after the is over.

Specifically, the main display area Dm displays three pattern rows Z1, Z2, and Z3 on the left, middle, and right, respectively. The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display.

Also, in the main display area Dm, a third symbol is stop-displayed on the activated line L1. When the third symbols are stopped on the activated line in a combination of big winning symbols (in this embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols), a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning. Furthermore, there is a possibility that the combination of the same odd-probability symbols will be stop-displayed when a "jackpot A" that is a hit occurs. Also, the main symbols composed of even numbers (2, 4, 6, 8) correspond to the "normal symbols". When a "jackpot B", which is a 16R normal jackpot, occurs, the same combination of normal symbols is always stop-displayed. In addition, the same combination of normal symbols is stop-displayed even in some of the cases where the "jackpot A" is achieved. As a result, even when the normal symbols are stopped and displayed, it is possible to expect that a big hit A has been achieved.

In addition, the mode of the variable display of the symbols in the third symbol display device 81 is not limited to the one described above, and is arbitrary. The number of symbols can be changed as appropriate. Also, the patterns displayed in a variable manner on the third pattern display device 81 are not limited to the above.

A small display area Dm4 is formed on the upper right side of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front. This small display area Dm4 is configured to allow the variable display of the third pattern to be displayed in a simple manner. Here, when the variable display is executed in the small display area Dm4, for example, a display effect such as an effect in which a predetermined character takes an action or an effect to prompt the user to press the frame button 22 is executed in the main display region Dm. is the case. During execution of the display effect, by displaying the effect in a larger main display area Dm, it is possible to provide a more comprehensible effect. Further, by simply displaying the variable display of the third pattern in the small display area Dm4 during execution of the display effect, it is easy for the player to know that the variable display of the third pattern is continuing. can be understood.

As shown in FIG. 120(a), a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. In this secondary display area Ds, as shown in FIG. 120(b), a reserved symbol consisting of a black circle is displayed. As described above, when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of times the ball enters is up to four times. Reserved. The number of reserved symbols displayed in the sub-display area Ds is the same as the number of reserved ball entries. In this control example, since the maximum number of reserved balls is set to 4 for the first special symbol and 4 for the second special symbol, a maximum of 8 reserved symbols are displayed in the sub-display area Ds. be. Although FIG. 120(b) shows an example of displaying a reserved design in the sub display area Ds, the display position of the reserved design is not limited to this, and a reserved design is displayed in a partial area of the main display area Ds. It may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, there is no need to display all the reserved patterns that are reserved and stored. When there is, only the reserved design of the second special design (special design 2 reserved design) is displayed, and when the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design is set, the reserved design of the first special design (Special figure 1 reserved pattern) may be configured to be displayed only, or the degree of visibility of the reserved pattern corresponding to each special pattern type may be changed according to the game state. When a high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, the special figure 2 reserved pattern is displayed so that it is easier for the player to visually recognize than the special figure 1 reserved pattern, and the low probability state of the normal pattern When (normal state) is set, the special figure 1 reserved design may be displayed so as to be easier for the player to visually recognize than the special figure 2 reserved design. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the special symbol type mainly executed according to the set game state in an easy-to-understand manner.

In this embodiment, the number of reserved symbols is varied in correspondence with the number of reserved balls, but the method of displaying the number of reserved balls is not limited to this. For example, the number of held balls may be displayed numerically. In addition, the display mode of the reserved design is changed according to the special design type so that the player can identify whether the displayed reserved design is the special design 1 reserved design or the special design 2 reserved design. Alternatively, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand how many reserved symbols correspond to which special symbol type, each reservation is made in the same display mode (idea including completely the same display mode) It may be configured to display a pattern.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 131, the contents of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example will be described. First, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 125, the content of the win rate UP effect will be described.

In this control example, as described above, after the end of the jackpot game, it is configured so that the normal symbol high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) is set, and the normal symbol high probability state is set. During the interval, an effect (battle mode effect) that makes it difficult for the player to grasp whether the probability variable state is set or the time saving state is set is executed. And the timing when the high probability state of the normal pattern can end, that is, the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the time saving state with the number of time saving times of 30 times (30th special figure fluctuation) and the time saving number of times in the time saving state with 50 times At the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied (50th special figure fluctuation) and the timing when the time saving end condition is satisfied in the time saving state with the number of time saving times of 80 times (80th special figure fluctuation), the high probability state of the normal pattern is It is configured to execute an effect (battle effect) suggesting whether or not to end.

In this battle production, a friendly character and an enemy character battle, and when the friendly character loses the battle, it is notified that the high probability state of the normal pattern is over. In addition, even when a big win is won in the special symbol lottery executed during the normal symbol high probability state, the battle performance is executed, and the performance that the ally character wins the battle is executed. Further, even when the high probability state of the normal symbols is not terminated and the special symbol lottery is not winning the jackpot, the battle performance is executed. In this case, an effect result (continuation) is displayed in which the ally character neither wins nor loses the battle.

In this way, during the execution period of the battle mode production (normal symbol high probability state), by configuring the battle production to be executed by various execution opportunities, the production executed during the battle mode production period On the other hand, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early. Further, by grasping whether or not the timing at which the battle production is executed is the timing at which the time saving end condition can be satisfied, it is possible to predict the production result of the current battle production.

In the battle mode production described above, in order to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving end condition is satisfied or not, the battle production is configured to be executed even at the timing when the time saving end condition cannot be satisfied. However, if it is configured in this way, every time the battle production is executed, the high probability state of the normal symbol will end? There is a problem that the player is given a sense of danger.

On the other hand, in this control example, the player is notified in advance of the winning percentage in the battle effect executed during the battle mode effect. Then, the higher the winning rate notified in advance, the less likely it is that the ally character will be defeated in the battle effect executed during the battle mode effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the battle production while referring to the previously reported winning percentage.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the winning percentage notified in advance can be increased during the jackpot game and during a predetermined period (three rotations of special figure fluctuation) after the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. (The production for increasing the winning rate is configured to be executable). That is, before the high-probability state of the normal symbol is set, the effect for notifying the player of the winning percentage of the battle effect in advance can be executed. By configuring in this way, for example, when information indicating jackpot winning is included in the reserved symbols already acquired at the end of the jackpot game (in the case of holding consecutive wins), for example, it is set after the jackpot game is finished. Even when the game state is the time-saving state (30 times), the performance indicating that the winning rate is high can be executed before the special symbol lottery is performed after the jackpot game is finished.

Here, the definition of the battle winning percentage in the battle mode production will be explained. As described above, in this control example, the battle production is configured to be executed under various conditions during the battle mode production, and when defeated in the battle production, the high probability state of the normal symbol ends, It is configured to transition to a state. In other words, when the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the battle production in which the production result is defeated in the final variation in the time saving state is executed. . On the other hand, when the variable probability state is set, since the high probability state of the normal symbol does not end without going through the jackpot winning, the performance result of the battle performance is never defeated.

In addition, in this battle production, when the lottery result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the battle production is executed in which the production result is a win. In other words, the battle winning rate is a numerical value of the jackpot winning expectation during the period (during the battle production mode) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. In other words, the battle winning rate does not change according to the type of game state (probability variable state or time saving state) set after the end of the jackpot game, but the battle according to the length of the period during which the high probability state of the normal pattern continues. The odds of winning will change. Therefore, when the short working hours state (80 times of working hours) is set rather than the short working hours state (30 times of working hours) is set after the end of the jackpot game, the special symbol lottery before the time saving end conditions are established. Since the probability of winning a jackpot is high, it is configured so that a high winning rate is easily selected as the battle winning rate. In addition, if the jackpot is a consecutive chance (holding consecutive), it is confirmed that the jackpot will be won before the time saving end condition is satisfied, so it is high regardless of the game state set after the jackpot game ends. It is possible to make it easier to select the winning percentage.

In addition, in the win rate UP effect in this control example, by making it easier to select the battle win rate corresponding to the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, it is possible to suggest the game state to the player, and the probability is low. Therefore, it is configured so that a winning percentage deviating from the battle winning percentage indicated by the actually set game state can be selected. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect that presents a surprise to the player, for example, an effect that displays a low winning percentage when a variable probability state is set. In addition, by configuring it so that a winning percentage deviating from the battle winning percentage indicated by the actually set gaming state can be selected, the set gaming state is easily discriminated by the player by the winning percentage increasing effect. can be suppressed.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, even if the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the same, the data table referred to when determining the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation is changed. configured so that it is possible. By changing the data table referred to when determining the variation time of the special symbol variation, the execution frequency of the battle presentation during the battle mode presentation can be varied. Specifically, as a special symbol variation executed during the high probability state of normal symbols, when the lottery result is out, the ratio of selecting the variation time (60 seconds) that can execute the battle production is varied. By doing so, it is configured to vary the frequency of the execution of the battle effect in which the lottery result is "Continue".

First, with reference to FIGS. 121 to 123, the content of the win-rate-increasing effect executed during the jackpot game will be described. As described above, in this control example, the win rate UP effect is executed during the jackpot game (first half period) and for a predetermined period (second half period) after the jackpot game ends. In this control example, during the first half period (during the jackpot game) of the winning rate UP presentation, the winning rate UP presentation is executed according to the game result of the player. Specifically, a lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to execute the performance based on the fact that the ball launched during the jackpot game wins the general ball entrance 63 or the specific prize winning port 65a, and the result of the lottery is the performance. When the result of the lottery indicates that the game is to be executed, the winning rate UP effect is executed.

In this way, it is determined whether or not to execute the winning rate UP effect according to the game result of the player during the jackpot game (whether or not a prize is won in the prize winning opening). It is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to execute the winning rate UP performance. Furthermore, in this control example, when the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during a period during which the player is likely to stop shooting the ball during the jackpot game, that is, during the interval period provided between the round games, , at other timings (during the round game) than when the ball enters the general ball entrance 63, the winning rate UP performance is more likely to be executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the player to continuously shoot balls during the jackpot game, so that the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be enhanced.

In addition, the execution probability of the winning rate UP effect during the next round game is variable according to the number of times the winning rate UP effect is executed during one round game. By constructing in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the jackpot game ends without the win-rate-increasing effect being executed even though a proper game is being executed during the jackpot game. .

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 118, it is possible to enter the ball into the general ball entrance 63 by a right-handed game for making the ball enter the specific winning opening 65a during the jackpot game. However, the game board 13 is not limited to this, and is a proper game method for causing the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a and a proper game method for executing the winning rate UP effect. The game board 13 may be configured so that , and are different. In this case, for example, during the jackpot game, executing a right-handed game makes it easier for the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a than when executing a left-handed game, and executing a left-handed game makes it easier to win a right-handed game. It may be configured such that the ball can be more easily entered into the ball entrance which can trigger the execution of the win-rate-increasing presentation than when the game is executed.

In addition, in this control example, the winning of the ball to the specific winning hole 65a is also configured to trigger the execution of the winning rate UP effect, and during one round game, the end condition of the round game (10 balls When more balls enter the specific winning hole 65a (so-called over-winning) than winning), a lottery is executed as to whether or not to execute the winning rate UP effect. By constructing in this way, in addition to obtaining a large number of prize balls for the player, it is possible to execute an unprecedented game of aiming for over-winning in order to execute the win-rate-increasing effect. can improve the interest of

FIG. 121(a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 when a jackpot game is started. As shown in FIG. 121(a), in addition to the display mode showing the information for informing the player during the jackpot game, the display mode showing that the winning rate UP effect is executed is displayed.

Specifically, a small display area Dm1 is formed on the upper left side of the display screen, and "Right shot" is displayed as a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to the game method during the jackpot game. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that executing the right-handed game during the jackpot game is a game method advantageous to the player.

In addition, in the small display area Dm2, a round number notification mode for indicating the number of rounds of the round game being executed is displayed. A winning symbol notification mode for indicating a symbol stop display mode) is displayed. In FIG. 121(a), the display screen immediately after the start of the first round of the jackpot game that is executed after the winning symbol is stopped and displayed at "222" is taken as an example. "222" is displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In this control example, an advantageous winning symbol (777) for notifying that a variable probability state is set after the end of the big winning game as a stopping display mode of winning symbols (stopping display mode of the third symbol) for indicating the winning of the big win. , normal winning symbols (numbers other than 777 (for example, 222)) that cannot be identified by the player in the game state set after the end of the jackpot game can be displayed.

When the advantageous winning pattern is stopped and displayed, since it is confirmed that the variable probability state is set after the end of the big win game, the variable probability state is set without executing the win rate increasing performance during the big win game and after the end of the big win game. An effect (determined effect) is executed for notifying the player of the fact that is set in an easy-to-understand manner. In this way, by switching the content of the effect executed during the jackpot game according to the type of the winning symbol stopped and displayed when the big win is won, an unnecessary effect for the player, that is, a variable probability state is set. To suppress the decrease in a player's willingness to play, since it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect suggesting whether or not a variable probability state is set after an easy-to-understand notification of that. can be done.

In this control example, there are two types of winning symbols to be stopped and displayed at the time of winning, namely, advantageous winning symbols and normal winning symbols, but three or more winning symbol types may be provided. In this case, the winning pattern type is provided so that the expectation that the probability variable state is set is different, the probability variable state is set, or the time-saving state of a specific number of time-savings is set. It is preferable to provide a winning symbol type so as to notify that there is a high possibility of being won. By configuring in this way, for example, when the winning pattern type that is likely to be set to the probability variable state or the time saving state of 30 times is stopped, other winning pattern types (for example, probability variation Compared to the case where the state or the time-saving state with a high possibility of setting the time-saving state of 50 times) is stopped and displayed, it is normal in the state where the number of special design fluctuations after the jackpot game is over 30 times. It is possible to increase the degree of expectation that the variable probability state is set when the high probability state of the pattern continues. In this way, by providing a plurality of winning symbol types, the winning symbol types and the game status after the end of the jackpot game are determined in a composite manner, thereby predicting the currently set game status with higher accuracy. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state.

In the display area HR2, a winning information reporting mode indicating the number of consecutive wins in the jackpot game is displayed, and in the display area HR3, an obtained information reporting mode for indicating information about the number of winning balls obtained during the consecutive winning period is displayed. . The number of consecutive chances is the jackpot won during the period (continuous advantageous period) during which the game can be executed without the game state shifting to the normal state (time saving state, variable probability state, jackpot game state). It shows the number of times.

In this control example, the number of jackpots won during the continuous advantageous period is cumulatively displayed as the consecutive winning notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, after the continuous advantageous period ends. The number of consecutive wins may be accumulated even when a jackpot is won (when the game is pulled back) within a predetermined period (after shifting to the normal state). In this case, as the predetermined period, for example, the period until the number of special symbol fluctuations reaches 30 times, or the second special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol 2 reservation (maximum 4) acquired during the continuous advantageous period ( It is sufficient to set the period until the special figure 2 lottery) ends. By configuring in this way, the player can be motivated to play the game to increase the number of consecutive wins even after the end of the continuous advantageous period.

In this control example, an example of showing the number of big wins numerically is used as the mode of notifying the number of consecutive wins displayed in the display area HR2. It is possible to display an icon corresponding to one big win (eg small icon), an icon corresponding to five big wins (eg medium icon), and an icon corresponding to ten big wins (eg large icon). , the type and number of icons corresponding to the number of consecutive wins may be displayed. With this configuration, an icon (special icon) that is not displayed until the number of consecutive wins reaches a specific number can be provided. can let

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpots won during the continuous advantageous period (history of the number of jackpots) is displayed as the consecutive winning notification mode. , It may be configured to notify other game history information, for example, the type of past jackpot game executed during the continuous advantageous period (number of rounds, game state set after the end of the jackpot game), hit The pattern type (advantageous winning pattern, normal winning pattern) and history information such as the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the jackpot game may be displayed, or the winning percentage displayed in the winning percentage UP effect. (%) history information may be displayed.

FIG. 121(a) shows an example of a jackpot game based on winning a jackpot (first win) in a special symbol lottery in a normal state, so that "Bonus x 1" is displayed in the display area HR2 and the display area HR3. , "0010P (points)" is displayed as an acquisition information notification mode for indicating information about the number of winning balls acquired during the consecutive winning period.

Furthermore, in the display area HR1, an effect situation notification mode for indicating the effect result of the winning rate UP effect is displayed, and in the sub display area Ds, an effect guidance notification mode for guiding the content of the effect being executed is displayed as "winning rate Raise your stats to gain an advantage in battle." is displayed. As a result, it is possible to inform the player who is playing the jackpot game in an easy-to-understand manner that the win-rate-increasing effect will be executed. In the example shown in FIG. 121(a), since the effect of adding the winning percentage has not been executed even once, "0% winning percentage" is displayed in the display area HR1.

In this control example, as shown in FIG. 121(a), the initial value of the winning percentage displayed in the display area HR1 is set to "0%". Accordingly, a different value may be set as the initial value of the winning rate. In this case, the game situation in which a high winning rate is likely to be displayed in the winning rate UP effect, that is, the case where the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, It is good to set the initial value of the winning rate to be high. By structuring in this way, by grasping the initial value of the winning rate displayed at the start of the winning rate UP performance, the enjoyment of predicting the game state to be set after the end of the big winning game can be provided.

In this control example, the initial value of the winning percentage is displayed immediately after the start of the jackpot game (from the start of the first round). , 5th round), the winning rate UP effect may be executed. Also, even when the winning rate UP effect is executed, the initial value of the winning rate is not displayed, and the initial value of the winning rate is displayed when the first win rate addition condition is satisfied during the winning rate UP effect. can be configured to By constructing in this way, it is possible to play the game while enjoying which value is set as the initial value of the probability, and to display the initial value to the player who does not want to check the winning percentage. It is possible to execute a jackpot game without any trouble.

Here, in this control example, the game board 13 having the configuration shown in FIG. 118 is used. The variable winning device 65 that is variably operated during the jackpot game is arranged at a position where the ball fired by the right-handed game can enter, and the winning percentage addition condition during the jackpot game is provided in the right area. It is constructed so that it can be established when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63 . Therefore, by arranging the variable winning device 65 at a position (for example, a position below the electric accessory 640a) where both the ball fired in the left-handed game and the ball fired in the right-handed game can enter. A player who wants to change the winning rate by the winning rate UP performance during the jackpot game can play the right-handed game, and a player who does not want to change the winning rate can play the left-handed game.

In this way, by allowing the player to select the game method (left-handed game, right-handed game) during the big-hit game, an effect is executed during the big-hit game while winning a predetermined number of prize balls during the big-hit game. By making it possible to change the contents of the (winning rate UP effect) effect, the effect executed during the jackpot game can be the content desired by the player.

In this case, it is preferable to display a display mode for notifying the player of the relationship between the game method that can be executed during the jackpot game and the effect content that is executed during the jackpot game. If you complete the hitting game, the jackpot game will end with a winning rate of ?%.If you complete the jackpot game with a right-handed game, the winning rate will be displayed." By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to easily understand the game method according to the content of the presentation desired by the player.

In addition, the ratio of the ball fired in the right-handed game winning to the variable winning device 65 and the ratio of the ball fired in the left-handed game winning to the variable winning device 65 may be different. It may be configured so that the ball is more difficult to enter the variable winning device 65 in the right-handed game than in the left-handed game. As a result, since the jackpot game period can be lengthened in the right-handed game rather than the left-handed game, many balls are entered into the general ball entrance 63 before the jackpot game ends. It is possible to make it easier to play, and it is possible to enhance the production effect of the winning rate UP production. Also, it may be configured such that the ball is more difficult to enter the variable winning device 65 in the left-handed game than in the right-handed game. As a result, the left-handed game is more disadvantageous to the player than the right-handed game, so the player can be actively made to play the right-handed game, and as a result, the winning rate is improved. It is possible to provide a jackpot game in which the winning rate is easily variable. Therefore, the performance effect of the performance executed during the jackpot game can be enhanced.

In this control example, the content of the win-rate-increasing effect executed during the jackpot game is different depending on the game method executed during the jackpot game. If the rate at which the specific effect is executed can be varied according to the method, and the player can select the game method, the same technical idea as this control example is obtained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 121(b), the contents of the winning rate UP effect during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 121(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when an effect in which the winning rate is variable is executed in the winning rate UP effect. In this control example, when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game, a lottery is conducted as to whether or not an additional effect is to be executed. , an additional effect is executed. Then, as the effect mode of the additional effect, the effect mode of varying (increasing) the winning rate or the effect mode for liveliness is determined.

By configuring in this way, for a player who is executing a jackpot game, based on the ball entering the general ball entrance 63 during the jackpot game, a ball other than prize balls (three) Since it is possible to provide the privilege, the interest in the game can be improved during the jackpot game. In addition, as the effect mode of the additional effect, it is possible to select (determine) the effect mode for changing (increasing) the winning rate displayed in the winning rate UP effect and the effect mode for liveliness, Even if the winning rate cannot be changed (increased) in the winning rate UP effect, for example, it reaches the upper limit value of the winning rate display set in advance and the winning rate cannot be increased any more. , the additional performance can be continuously executed using the lively performance mode, and it is possible to suppress the rapid deterioration of the performance effect.

As shown in FIG. 121(b), the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during the jackpot game, and when the additional effect is executed in the effect mode of varying (information) the winning percentage, the capsule 801 is opened. An image is displayed in the main display area Dm, in which the content 801a showing the value of the variable winning rate pops out of the capsule 801 is displayed. In FIG. 121(b), the content 801a is displayed in the display mode of "10%" to indicate that the winning percentage is increased by 10%. Then, in the sub display area Ds, the player is notified that an additional effect has been executed based on the entry of the ball into the first ball entrance 63 and that the winning rate has been changed (increased) by the winning rate UP effect. A comment "Capsule GET!! Winning rate 10% GET!!" is displayed as a notification mode for easy-to-understand notification.

The diagram shown in FIG. 121(b) shows the state after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the diagram shown in FIG. 121(a). It shows a state in which three balls have newly entered the specific winning hole 65a and one ball has entered the general ball entering hole 63 without changing the number of rounds. Therefore, in the display area HR3, additional winnings from the time shown in FIG. there is

Next, with reference to FIG. 122(a), the effect contents during the interval period during the jackpot game will be described. FIG. 122(a) is a diagram showing a display screen during the interval period during which the winning rate UP effect is being executed. In this control example, it is easier for the ball to enter the general ball entrance 63 during the interval period than to enter the ball into the general ball entrance 63 during the round game. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, even during the interval period during which it is difficult for the ball to enter the specific winning hole 65a during the jackpot game, the player is motivated to continuously shoot the ball. As a result, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As shown in FIG. 122(a), during the interval period, a comment "capsule get high probability state" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds as a guidance mode indicating that the additional effect is likely to be executed during the period (state). Is displayed. As a result, the player can be urged to shoot the ball at this timing with a desire to enter the ball into the general ball entrance 63 . In the example shown in FIG. 122(a), it is not that the additional effect is likely to be executed. The sub-display area Ds indicates that the effect mode to be executed is likely to be executed.

By configuring in this way, by facilitating the execution of the additional performance internally, as a result, the additional performance is performed in a specific performance mode (a performance mode in which the capsule 801 is displayed) in which information advantageous to the player is imparted. is made easy to execute, the player can be made to think that the probability of executing the additional effect in the specific effect mode is increased, so even during the interval period , the player can continue to play the game with motivation to shoot balls. It should be noted that, without being limited to this, without changing the probability that the additional performance is executed, as the additional performance to be executed during the interval period, the specific performance mode is configured to be more likely to be selected than during the period other than the interval period. You can

Next, with reference to FIG. 122(b), description will be given of the display contents when the lively effect mode (decoration effect mode) is displayed as the additional effect. FIG. 122(b) is a diagram showing display contents when the decoration effect mode is selected as the effect mode of the additional effect. In this control example, the decoration effect mode is set such that one of nine animal-like characters is randomly selected and displayed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to display a different character even when the specific effect mode is not continuously selected as the additional effect, thereby suppressing the deterioration of the effect of the effect. can do.

Further, although the details will be described later, in this control example, the same character is configured to be restricted so that the same character is not selected (hardly selected) for a predetermined number of times (three times) in succession as the decoration effect mode. . Only when a specific condition is satisfied, the same character can be selected a predetermined number of times (three times) in succession. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of character selected at random, and to enhance the presentation effect.

Here, the conditions (specific conditions) under which the same character can be selected a predetermined number of times (three times) in succession include the upper limit of the winning rate (upper limit winning rate) set in the winning rate UP effect, and the currently displayed Winning percentage (display winning percentage) and, if the difference is a predetermined value (50%) or more, or if the winning information that wins the big hit is included in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired, the conditions are set. there is In this way, information advantageous to the player is not provided by itself, but information advantageous to the player can be provided by using a plurality of decoration performance modes used as lively performance during the jackpot game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the content of the decoration effect mode.

As shown in FIG. 122(b), when the additional effect is executed in the specific effect mode, the elephant character 802 showing the decorative effect mode is displayed in the main display area Dm, and the display area HR4 is formed and displayed. The character history of the decorated effect mode is displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 122(b), in addition to the currently displayed decoration effect mode (character 802), the character history is displayed so that the player can determine the types of the past two decoration effect modes. In FIG. 122(b), since the display screen at the time when the decoration effect mode was displayed for the first time during the current jackpot game is displayed, "-" is displayed in the character history display for the past two times.

In this control example, the display content of the character history display is configured to be erased in units of one jackpot game, but is not limited to this. can be configured to In this case, unless the player executes at least three additional effects during one round game, the player cannot acquire advantageous information using the decorative effect mode. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game so as to enter the ball into the ball 63. Also, the display contents of the character history display may be maintained across a plurality of jackpot games. With this configuration, for example, when the big win game ends when the same character is displayed twice in succession, the same character can be displayed three times in succession in the next big win game. Therefore, it is possible to make the player play the game while having expectations.

In this control example, when the same effect mode (character 802) is displayed three times in succession as the decoration effect mode, information advantageous to the player is given. Although it is configured so that the player can grasp the types of the decoration effect modes for three times, when the conditions for imparting advantageous information to the player using the decoration effect modes are different, the conditions may be changed. It is preferable to change the display contents of the character history display so that the player can grasp the type of decoration effect mode within the applicable range.

In addition, in this control example, as a condition for imparting advantageous information to the player using the decorative effect mode, the condition is that the same effect mode (character 802) is displayed a predetermined number of times in succession. However, without being limited to this, a condition may be provided that is satisfied when different characters 802 are displayed in a specific order. In this case, in the case of which type (character 802) the type of decorative effect mode set in the additional effect to be executed next is, a condition for imparting information advantageous to the player using the decorative effect mode It is preferable to provide an informing (suggesting) means capable of informing (suggesting) to the player whether or not is established. As a result, an effect that is easy for the player to understand can be executed.

Then, when the same effect mode (character 802) is displayed three times in succession as the decorative effect mode of the additional effect, as shown in FIG. A production is executed. FIG. 123(a) is a diagram showing a display screen when the same character 802 is displayed three times in succession as a decorative effect mode of the additional effect.

As shown in FIG. 123(a), the display area HR4 displays a display mode indicating that the elephant character 802 has been displayed three times in succession as a character history display, and the sub-display area Ds displays a decoration. A comment of "achievement of character bingo" is displayed as an effect result display mode for indicating that the effect is successful using the effect mode. Then, "+30%" is displayed as the display mode 802a indicating that the winning rate is variable (increased) by 30% as the result of this production, and the "winning rate 40%” is displayed.

In this control example, the additional effect shown with reference to FIG. 121(b), that is, the additional effect is executed in the effect mode (specific effect mode) in which the winning rate can be varied (increased) as the effect result of one additional effect. 123(a), i.e., when the winning rate is varied (increased) based on the results of the additional effects performed a plurality of times, the winning rate is greatly increased. It consists of By configuring in this way, even if the additional performance is executed in the decoration performance mode during the big win game, the possibility of sufficiently increasing the winning rate can be left until the big win game ends, so that the big win can be achieved. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a player's motivation for playing a game is lowered by the performance contents of the additional performance.

When the last round (10 rounds) of the jackpot game ends, the ending screen of the jackpot game shown in FIG. 123(b) is displayed. FIG. 123(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in the ending screen of the jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 123(b), in the ending screen of the jackpot game, the main display is a display area HR1 in which the winning rate increased during the jackpot game, that is, the winning rate at the end of the first half period of the winning rate UP effect is displayed. It is formed near the center of the area Dm, and in FIG. 123(b), it is displayed as "current winning percentage 40%".

Then, as a guidance mode for indicating that the winning rate UP effect will continue (entering the second half period) even after the jackpot game ends, the characters "entering the winning rate UP zone" are displayed. Further, in the small display area Dm1, the characters "Right-handed" are continuously displayed as a guidance notification mode for guiding the player to continue the right-handed game even after the jackpot game ends. . Thus, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that it is necessary to continue the right-handed game even after the jackpot game ends.

As shown in FIG. 123(b), in this control example, when the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during the ending period of the jackpot game, the additional effect is not executed. there is Specifically, the processing for setting whether or not to execute the additional effect and the effect mode of the additional effect is executed in the same manner as in other periods, but the display command for executing the additional effect is set. It is configured not to execute the processing that By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the winning percentage displayed near the center of the main display region HR1 from suddenly increasing and the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

In addition, regarding the effect mode of the additional effect set during the ending period, the effect may be configured to be interrupted and displayed in the second half period of the win rate increasing effect, or the additional effect set during the ending period may be displayed. Only the amount of increase in the winning rate in the game may be discriminated, and an effect corresponding to the determination result may be executed in the second half period of the win rate increasing effect. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player willingly play the game of entering the ball into the general ball entrance 63 even during the ending period of the jackpot game.

In this control example, the ending period of the jackpot game is used as an example of the period during which the additional effect is not executed during the jackpot game. A period during which the additional effect is not executed may be provided in a predetermined period such as a period, or a period during which the additional effect is not executed may be provided within a period during which the specific effect is being executed. By configuring in this way, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to execute additional effects at different timings based on the ball entry timing into the general ball entrance 63, a plurality of additional effects are redundantly executed. It is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 124 and 125, the content of the effect in the winning rate UP zone which is set after the end of the jackpot game will be described. This winning rate UP zone is a winning rate UP production executed for a period (second half period) until the special symbol variation is executed a predetermined number of times (three times) after the end of the jackpot game, and is the first half of the winning rate UP production. An effect for making the winning rate variable (increasing) again is executed with respect to the winning rate (%) raised in the period.

In this winning rate UP zone, each time a special symbol variation is executed, an effect (slot effect) for varying (increasing) the winning rate is executed, and three special symbols are executed. An effect is executed to change (increase) the winning rate up to three times before the variation is executed. In addition, during the winning rate UP zone, it is configured so that an effect for varying the winning rate is executed in a different effect mode according to the type of variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation, and the normal variation pattern (variation If time 10 seconds) is selected, a slot effect is executed in which whether or not the winning rate is variable (increased) and, if the winning rate is variable (increased), the variable (increase) amount is determined by lottery. When a specific variation pattern (variation time 11 seconds) is selected, it is determined that the winning rate is variable (increased), and an increase fixed effect is executed in which only the variable amount is determined by lottery. Configure. In this way, according to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, by configuring to vary the effect result of the effect to be executed, the control processing (special symbol lottery, variation pattern Control processing for selecting the type of) can be used to increase the variation of the effect mode set by the audio lamp control device 113, so that the control executed by the audio lamp control device 113 The processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 can be reduced as compared with the case of setting the effect mode of the effect only based on the processing result of the process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124(a), the contents of the slot effect executed during the winning rate UP zone will be described. FIG. 124(a) is a diagram showing the effect contents of the slot effect in the winning rate UP zone. As shown in FIG. 124(a), during the winning rate UP zone set after the end of the jackpot game, the sub-display area Ds provides guidance that the current win rate UP zone is in effect. Zone" comment is displayed. Then, a remaining period notification mode for indicating the remaining period of the winning rate UP zone is displayed in the display area HR5. FIG. 124(a) shows the period during which the first special symbol variation is executed in the win rate UP zone, and in the display area HR5, except for the effect being executed (special symbol variation), the last two Characters of "last 2 times" are displayed to indicate that the effect (special symbol variation) is to be executed.

Three variation areas (first variation area La, second variation area Lb, and third variation area Lc) are formed in the center of the main display area Dm, and the winning rate increases for each variation area. Values are dynamically displayed (variable display) from the top to the bottom. In this slot effect, the display mode (% symbol) normally displayed dynamically (variably displayed) in the first variable area La and the third variable area Lc is stopped first. Then, the display mode (% pattern) is stopped and displayed in the second variation area Lb that is stopped and displayed with a delay, and when the same display mode (% pattern) is stopped and displayed in a straight line, the display mode (% pattern) ) is displayed, an effect that increases the winning rate is executed.

That is, in this slot effect, the winning rate is variable before it is notified whether or not the winning rate will increase, that is, during the period in which the display mode of at least one of the plurality of variable regions is dynamically displayed. It is configured to inform the player of possible candidates. By configuring in this way, when the slot effect is executed, first, the player expects a large value to be displayed as a value that may increase, while the first variation region is displayed. La and the third variable region Lc are stopped and displayed, and then the second variable region Lb is stopped and displayed while expecting the winning rate to increase. Therefore, even when a performance mode in which the winning rate does not increase is selected, the player can be kept interested until the end of the slot performance. In addition, since it is configured to be able to display multiple values (% symbols) as values (% symbols) that may increase the winning rate, values (% symbols) that actually increase the winning rate ( % pattern) can also be displayed. Therefore, for example, by displaying a value (% pattern) larger than the value (% pattern) that actually increases the winning rate, the player is expected to greatly increase the winning rate. It is possible to make the player interested in up to.

In the diagram shown in FIG. 124(a), "10%" and "20%" are displayed in double as values (% symbols) that may increase the winning rate. Therefore, when the % symbol indicating "10%" is stopped and displayed at a specific position of the second variation area Lb (the position where the three % symbols are stopped and displayed on a straight line), the winning percentage is 10%. If the % symbol indicating "20%" is stopped and displayed, the effect result is that the winning rate increases by 20%, and other symbols (for example, the % symbol indicating "30%", When the lost symbol indicating "loss" is stopped and displayed, the effect result of the current slot effect does not increase the winning rate.

Here, with reference to FIG. 124(b), the effect contents when the effect result of the slot effect does not increase the winning rate will be described. FIG. 124(b) is a diagram showing a display screen when the effect result of the current slot effect is an effect result that does not increase the winning rate. As shown in FIG. 124(b), when the effect result of the slot effect is the effect result (loss) that does not increase the winning rate, the same % pattern is displayed on a straight line in the three fluctuation areas (La to Lc). A display mode that is not stopped is displayed, and a comment of "sorry" is displayed in the sub-display area Ds to notify that the effect result is not correct.

In addition, in FIG. 124(b), as a display mode when the performance result is a failure, an example of stopping and displaying a failure symbol of "cross mark" at a specific position in the second variation area Lb is shown. Without limitation, by stopping and displaying at a specific position a type of % symbol (for example, "80%") that is not stopped and displayed in the first variable area La and the third variable area Lc, the effect result is out. can be shown.

In addition, a composite pattern (for example, "10% and 20%"), which is a combination of a plurality of % patterns, may be stopped and displayed at a specific position in the second variation area Lb. ), when this composite symbol (“10% and 20%”) is stopped and displayed, a % symbol indicating 10% and a % symbol indicating 20% are displayed on a straight line. Therefore, an effect for increasing the winning rate by 30% in total is executed. By configuring in this way, when there are multiple values that may increase the winning rate at the time when the first variable area La and the third variable area Lc are stopped and displayed, at most all the values Since it is possible to increase the winning rate by the total value obtained by summing up, it is possible to increase the expectation of the slot effect for the player. In addition, as the symbols stopped and displayed in the second variation area Lb, a universal symbol (for example, a symbol imitating "ALL") that can correspond to all % symbols may be displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 125(a), the increase confirmation effect executed during the win rate UP zone will be described. FIG. 125(a) is a diagram showing the display contents executed during the rise finalization effect. This rising fixed effect is a effect executed when a specific variable time (11 seconds) is selected as a variation pattern of the special symbol, and unlike the slot effect described above, at the time the effect is executed , It is a production that confirms that the winning rate increases. Therefore, when the increase fixed effect is executed, the player is first notified that the winning rate will increase, so that the player who is worried about whether the winning rate will increase or not can feel at ease. A game can be executed. After that, a suggestive effect is executed to suggest how much the winning rate will increase in the increase fixed effect this time.

When the increase confirmation effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 125(a), the characters "win rate increase confirmed" are displayed in the vicinity of the center of the main display area Dm as a notification mode for notifying that the probability increases. Below, as a suggestive effect suggesting a value for increasing the probability, a suggestive effect mode in which an increase value is variably displayed is displayed in the display area HRa. In this suggestive presentation mode, a "plus mark" and a "%" are displayed fixedly, and a two-digit numerical value is variably displayed between them. It will show the increase value of the winning rate.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this suggestive presentation mode, the variation area of the ones place and the variation area of the tens place are configured to be variably displayed in different modes. Specifically, the value to be finally stopped and displayed is determined by the audio lamp control device 113 , and a display command including value information indicating the determined value is transmitted to the display control device 114 . Then, the display control device 114 determines the value information included in the received display command, and determines the variable display mode based on the determination result. More specifically, the values in the ones place and the values in the tens place included in the value information are individually discriminated, and if each value satisfies a predetermined condition, for example, the value in the tens place is 3 or more. Alternatively, if the value in the ones digit is 6 or more, the variable display mode is determined so that the value on the side that does not satisfy the predetermined condition is first stopped and displayed, or the variable display mode is determined to be one from a plurality of variable display modes. It is configured to randomly determine the variable display mode.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a plurality of types of effect patterns until the suggestive effect mode is stopped and displayed on the display control device 114 side, so that the processing load of the sound lamp control device 113 is increased. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the production effect.

Then, in the final variation of the winning rate UP zone, the performance result of the winning rate UP performance executed during the jackpot game is shown, and the performance mode executed during the high probability state of the normal symbols in a mode according to the performance result. is determined. Here, with reference to FIG. 125(b), the contents of the effect after the third win-rate increase effect is completed in the final change of the win-rate increase zone will be described. FIG. 125(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents displayed when the winning rate UP effect is completed and a character to be used in the next effect zone is selected based on the determined winning rate. be.

In this control example, as an effect to be executed while the normal symbol high probability state is set, after the win rate UP effect is completed, a battle zone is set, and a battle between the ally characters and the enemy characters is performed. (Battle production) is configured to be executed. Then, the above-described win rate UP effect is a effect for indicating the degree of expectation for victory of the ally character in the battle effect.

As shown in FIG. 125(b), when the win-rate-increasing effect ends, a display screen for selecting an enemy character to be fought against in the next battle zone is displayed. A display area HR6 is formed in the center of the main display area Dm, and a plurality of enemy characters corresponding to the final displayed winning percentage are displayed, and below it, the enemy character of the battle zone to be executed next is selected. The characters "determine enemy in battle zone" are displayed as a guidance mode to indicate that the game is being played.

Here, to specifically explain the contents of the display area HR6, the enemy character ch1 corresponding to the display win rate of 59% or less is "Monster", and the enemy character ch1 corresponding to the display win rate of 60% to 89% is "Rabbit" is displayed as ch2, "Tortoise" is displayed as the enemy character ch3 corresponding to the display win rate of 90% to 99%, and "Carrot" is displayed as the enemy character ch4 corresponding to the display win rate of 100%. there is

In the example shown in FIG. 125(b), the display win percentage displayed in the display area HR1 is "60%", so the "rabbit" is selected as the enemy character in the display area HR6.

As described above, in this control example, as an effect to be executed during the winning rate UP zone, after informing a value that can increase the probability, the first effect (slot effect) to notify whether the probability will increase or not. , and a second effect (increase confirmation effect) of notifying the increasing win after notifying that the probability increases. Therefore, it is possible to greatly change the contents expected of the player depending on the type of effect to be executed, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the type of effect (slot effect, increase fixed effect) to be executed during the winning rate UP zone is configured to be determined by the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. As a result, it is possible to increase the variation of effects executed during the win rate UP zone without increasing the processing load of the audio ramp control device 113 .

In addition, in this control example, according to the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol variation, the type of effect to be executed during the winning rate UP zone is configured to be different, so the effect period of each effect is It is necessary to prepare in advance according to the variation pattern of the corresponding special symbol variation. The variation time) is defined as 10.1 seconds, and by making it difficult for the player to notice the difference in the length of the variation time, the effect period of the first effect and the effect period of the second effect may be the same. . By configuring in this way, the effect period of the first effect and the effect period of the second effect can be made the same. Even if the ramp control device 113 adds the processing for determining the type of effect to be executed during the win rate UP zone, the effect data of the first effect and the effect data of the second effect are generated during the effect period of the same length. , there is no need to generate new performance data or separately provide dedicated performance data. Therefore, the amount of effect data can be reduced.

In addition, in this control example, it is configured so that different effects are executed according to the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol lottery. , out) may be configured to execute a different effect. By constructing in this way, it is possible to predict the result of the special symbol lottery according to the type of the performance executed during the winning-probability-up zone, so that the performance that attracts more attention from the players can be executed. becomes possible.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129, the content of the battle mode effect executed while the high probability state of the normal symbol is set will be described. The battle mode is a production mode in which a friendly character and an enemy character repeatedly battle, and is a mode production executed during a high probability state of normal symbols. In other words, it is a mode effect that can be executed both when the game state is the time saving state and when it is the variable probability state. While the battle mode is being executed, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp whether the set game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state.

Then, when the battle effect is executed during the battle mode and the ally character is "defeated", the normal pattern high probability state ends at that point, and the state shifts to the normal state. In addition, when a jackpot is won in the special symbol lottery, an effect is executed in which the ally character "wins" in the battle effect. Furthermore, if the player selects "Continue", in which the enemy character escapes and the game is not settled, as a result of the battle production, the special symbol lottery does not win the jackpot (lost and wins), and The high probability state of the normal pattern does not end. In other words, in a state where the end condition of the high probability state of normal symbols is not established, even in a part of the case where the special symbol lottery is lost in the special symbol lottery, the battle effect is executed.

By configuring in this way, the battle effect can be executed at various opportunities, so that it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the battle effect is not executed at all during the battle mode. Also, when this battle mode is executed, the lucky point is added by 1 each time the special symbol variation is executed, and when the lucky point reaches a specific value (100), It is configured to notify the player that the variable probability state is set as the game state. This lucky point is configured so that a plurality of points can be added during the special symbol variation presentation, in addition to being added by one each time the special symbol variation is executed.

That is, since 1 is added at least each time the special symbol variation is executed, when the battle performance continues for 100 variations, it is possible to notify that the probability variation state is set without fail. In addition, as the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed, when the effect in which the lucky point is added is executed a plurality of times, even if the number of times of the special symbol change is small, the probability variable state is set. It is possible to notify that. Thus, by varying the timing of notifying that the variable probability state is set according to the performance mode of the special symbol variation performance to be executed, it is possible to quickly grasp that the current game state is the variable probability state. It is possible to make the player interested in the performance contents of the variable performance to be executed.

FIG. 126(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen immediately after the battle mode is started. As shown in FIG. 126(a), when the battle mode is executed, a display area HR7 formed above the main display area Dm displays "in battle mode" as a guidance mode for guiding the current production mode. is displayed, and "rabbit" is displayed as the type of the enemy character to be fought during the current battle mode in the display area HR8 formed below. As shown in FIG. 125(b), the type of the enemy character to be fought during this battle mode is the type of the enemy character selected based on the effect result of the win rate UP effect. In other words, in the example shown in FIG. 126(a), the display screen is displayed when the enemy character type "rabbit" is selected when the display win rate is 60 to 89%.

A display area HR6 is formed in the lower left part of the main display area Dm, and "1P" is displayed as the accumulated value of lucky points. This lucky point is configured to be incremented by 1 each time a special symbol variation is started. , an effect of adding 1 lucky point is executed in accordance with the operation mode. Since the configuration is such that 1 is added to the lucky points when the reserved symbols of the n and second special symbols are shifted, the lucky points are updated corresponding to the number of variations of the second special symbols. It is possible to make it easy for the player to think that it is a thing. As a result, by updating the value of the lucky point according to the execution content of the variation production, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp the cumulative value of the special symbol variation after the battle mode is set, so the game state is a time saving state. is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict at what timing the time saving state will end.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "If the lucky points reach 100 points, the odds are confirmed?" be. By configuring in this way, it is possible to inform the player of the contents of the effect in the case where the battle mode is set in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 126(b) is a diagram showing an example of the effect contents when the special symbol variation is stopped and displayed (off and stopped) during the battle mode. In FIG. 126(b), at the timing when the special symbols are stopped and displayed, an effect for adding lucky points is executed, and the characters "+2P GET" are displayed in the display area HR9 as a display mode indicating that two lucky points are added. is displayed, and 2 is added to the total number of lucky points displayed in the display area HR6. In this way, by making it possible to add a plurality of lucky points in one special symbol variation, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the current number of special symbol variations, so at what timing the time saving state occurs. It is possible to make it difficult to predict whether the process will end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127(a), the contents of the battle effect executed during the battle mode will be described. FIG. 127(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a battle effect is executed. As shown in FIG. 127(a), when the battle effect is executed, a display mode in which a friend character, a boy 810, and an enemy character, a rabbit 811, battle is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. The characters "START" are displayed to indicate that the battle is about to begin. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "If you lose the battle, the time will be shortened" indicating the content of the battle effect is displayed.

As described above, the results of the battle production are "victory" indicating that the jackpot has been won, "defeat" indicating that the time saving state ends, and "continuation" that the high probability state of the normal pattern continues. There are three types of Then, when "Victory" is selected as the effect result of the battle effect, the display mode shown in FIG. 127(b) is displayed. FIG. 127(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a friendly character wins in a battle effect. As shown in FIG. 127(b), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, characters "Victory!!" are displayed as a result display mode for indicating the effect result of the current battle effect. , and in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a display mode indicating that the boy 810 has defeated the rabbit 811 is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "jackpot" indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery is displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in a stop display mode (555) indicating that the jackpot has been won. In this case, since a jackpot game is executed, the display area HR6 for showing the accumulated number of lucky points is not displayed.

On the other hand, when "defeat" is selected as the effect result of the battle effect, the display mode shown in FIG. 128(a) is displayed. FIG. 128(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when a friendly character is defeated in a battle effect. As shown in FIG. 128(a), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, characters of "defeat" are displayed as a result display mode for indicating the effect result of the current battle effect. In the central part of the main display area Dm, a display mode indicating that the boy 810 has been defeated by the rabbit 811 is displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "battle mode finished" indicating that the time saving state is finished is displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in a stop display mode (361) indicating that the win has been lost. In this case, since the normal state is set from the next special symbol variation, the display area HR6 for showing the accumulated number of lucky points is not displayed.

Further, when "Continue" is selected as the effect result of the battle effect, the display mode shown in FIG. 128(b) is displayed. FIG. 128(b) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when an enemy character has escaped in a battle effect. As shown in FIG. 128(b), in the display area HR10 formed above the main display area Dm, characters "Continue" are displayed as a result display mode for indicating the effect result of the current battle effect. A display mode in which a rabbit 811 is running away from a boy 810 is displayed in the center of the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Continue the battle!!" indicating that the high-probability state of the normal symbol will continue is displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in a stop display mode (361) indicating that the win has been lost. In this case, since the high probability state of the normal symbol continues, the display area HR6 for indicating the accumulated number of lucky points is continuously displayed. Further, when the effect result of the battle mode is "Continue", the effect of adding lucky points is executed, and in the example shown in FIG. 128(b), the display indicates that 5 lucky points are added. "+5 PGET" is displayed as a mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(a), description will be given of the effects executed when the lucky points reach 100P during the battle mode. FIG. 129(a) is a diagram showing an example of display contents when the lucky points reach 100P during the battle mode. In this control example, it is configured so that the lucky points reach 100 points only when the game state is a variable probability state. Rush into the "invincible zone" to show something.

In this control example, as described above, even if the jackpot in which the variable probability state is set as the gaming state is won, the third symbol indicating the jackpot winning is an advantageous winning symbol (for example, 777) and stops at a normal winning symbol other than may be displayed. In this case, as in the case of winning the jackpot in which the time saving state is set, the winning rate UP production is executed during the jackpot game, and the battle production is performed against the enemy character corresponding to the production result (display winning rate) of the winning rate UP production. Enter the battle mode where is unfolding. In other words, during the battle mode, it is configured so that it is difficult for the player to grasp whether the current game state is the variable probability state or the time saving state.

During the battle mode, an effect of adding lucky points is executed. This lucky point is the first addition effect in which the value is added "1P" when a new special symbol variation is executed, and the value is "2P or more" as part of the variation effect executed during the special symbol variation. The second addition performance to be added is accumulated, and when the cumulative addition number of lucky points reaches "100P", it reaches the "invincible zone" where it is confirmed that the variable probability state is set. .

That is, in a state in which the variable probability state is set, when entering the battle mode, according to the execution frequency of the second addition effect described above, the timing at which the current gaming state is notified that the variable probability state ( The timing of entering the invincible zone) will be different. Therefore, the player who is playing the game in the battle mode expects that the friendly character will not be defeated by the battle effect and that the addition effect will be executed many times so that the lucky point reaches 100 points. As a result, it is possible to suppress early boredom with the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 129(b), the contents of the shortened zone effect executed during the shortened mode will be described. FIG. 129(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the shortened zone effect. This shortening zone is an effect that is executed during the shortening mode, and the state in which the variable state is confirmed (the high probability state of the normal pattern continues 100 times or more, which is greater than the maximum number of continuations of the time saving state (80 times) It is a production that is executed in the state of

In this control example, when the period during which the variable probability state continues continues for a predetermined period (100 times), it is configured to switch the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation, It is configured so that a variable time shorter than the data table referred to during the battle mode is likely to be selected. Specifically, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the variation time of 5 seconds is determined (selected). As a result, the number of special symbol lotteries per unit time can be increased, so that the player can efficiently play the game.

In this shortened zone effect, as shown in FIG. 129(b), an attack standby effect is executed in which the boy 810 is displayed to attack the enemy character 811 of the battle opponent. That is, in the state where the shortened zone effect is being executed, as described above, since the variable probability state is determined, even if the battle effect is executed, the battle victory is determined. Therefore, the attack standby production is executed, and the battle production is executed in a production mode in which the battle production wins in a short period of time (5 seconds).

Next, with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131, the contents of the characteristic effects among the button effects for allowing the player to operate the frame button 22 will be described.

Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine 10 provided with an operation means (frame button 22) that can be operated by a player, so that an operation effect can be executed in which the effect mode is changed by the player's operation of the operation means. As an operation effect, it has been proposed to make the player operate the operation means by various operation methods. There is (long press effect etc.).

In this long-press performance, a performance lottery is executed when it is determined that a predetermined period has elapsed since the operation means was pressed, and a performance is executed based on the result of the lottery. In this case, if the player releases the operating means for a moment, the duration of the operation to the operating means is reset. There is a problem that it is necessary to make the user wait until the time elapses, and the user's motivation to operate is lowered.

In addition, it is common for such an operation effect to have an operation effective period defined as its effect period (a period for validly determining the operation to the operation means), and during the entire period during the operation effective period If the operating means is operated so that the highest condition of the operation presentation is established, if the operating means is released even once during the effective operation period, the highest condition cannot be established. , there is a problem that the player's motivation to operate is remarkably lowered.

In contrast, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the operation means is operated at a plurality of timings within the operation valid period, and it is determined that the operation means is operated at those timings. In the case, it is configured to execute the production lottery. By configuring in this manner, as in the conventional art, the effect lottery can be reliably executed at all timings for the player who is operating the operation means during the entire period within the operation valid period, and during the process. Even for the player who has released the operation means in , the effect lottery can be executed at all timings depending on the release timing. Therefore, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to operate the operating means again.

Further, by determining whether or not the operation means is operated at a plurality of timings within the operation valid period, the operation means can be continuously operated for one operation valid period. Execute an effect (long-press effect) to make the player operate, execute an effect (continuous hit effect) to operate the operation means multiple times, and execute an effect (timing press effect) to notify the timing of operating the operation means. You can Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the variations of effects for allowing the player to operate the operating means.

Furthermore, in this control example, when the player interrupts the operation of the operation means (when the player releases the frame button 22) during execution of the long-press effect, the continuous operation period of the operation means and the operation valid period Based on the remaining period of the period, different effects can be executed for the remaining operation valid period. Specifically, when the hand is released from the frame button 22 in the middle of the long-press effect, if a predetermined condition is satisfied, the continuous-hit effect is executed. In this manner, the frame button 22 can be configured to be capable of executing an operation presentation indicating a different operation method (long press, repeated press) within one operation valid period according to the operation content of the operation means of the player. Since a new operation performance can be executed for the player who has released his/her hand from, the player can easily participate in the operation performance with a new feeling.

FIG. 130(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed during the long-press effect, which is one of the operation effects executed during the normal state. In FIG. 130(a), when the player continuously presses the operation means (frame button 22), a gauge indicating specific stage information rises, and depending on the degree of rise of the gauge, An operation effect (long press effect) that suggests the result of the special symbol lottery is being executed.

Specifically, in the display area HR12 formed in the central portion of the main display area Dm, a guidance notification mode for guiding the operation method of the operating means for the operation effect being executed is displayed as "Hold down to save energy." The long press image NG includes a button image imitating the frame button 22, a comment of "long press", and an "arrow image" schematically showing an operation method for the button image. is displayed, and a time gauge TG for indicating the length of the operation valid period set for the current long-press effect is displayed below it.

This time gauge TG informs the player of the remaining period of the operation valid period by decreasing the specific display area (displayed in black in the figure). Since the performance has just started, most of the time gauge TG is in the specific display area (displayed in black in the figure). (indicated by ) is displayed.

With this configuration, it is possible to inform the player of the remaining period of the operation valid period in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, the elapsed period of the operation effective period indicated by the time gauge TG is displayed in the elapsed display area (displayed in white in the figure). As a result, it is possible to make it easier for the player to relatively determine how long the remaining period is with respect to the length of the entire operation valid period.

Further, in the main display area Dm, a spirit gauge KG and a boy 810 are displayed as a display mode that is changed based on the player's operation (pressing) of the frame button 22 as a long-press effect. be. The fighting spirit gauge KG is a display mode capable of displaying five stages of stage information. In the display screen shown in FIG. 130(a), the spirit gauge KG is displayed in the initial stage (displayed in black in the figure), and the variable condition of the display mode is displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 by the player. is established, the display mode of the spirit gauge KG is variably displayed. The variable display mode of the spirit gauge KG will be described later with reference to FIG. 130(b). The spirit gauge KG is configured so that the display mode can be changed in a maximum of 5 steps, and depending on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, the upper limit step that can be changed by operation effect (long press effect) is set in advance. set.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player (such as winning a jackpot), the upper limit stage is set so that the number of stages in which the display mode of the fighting spirit gauge KG is changed tends to increase. set. With this configuration, the frame button 22 can be voluntarily operated so that the number of times the display mode of the spirit gauge KG changes increases when the long-press effect is executed.

Also, the boy 810 is configured so that the display mode can be changed in accordance with the variable degree of the display mode of the spirit gauge KG described above. Specifically, the boy 810 is changed to a mode in which he is wearing an aura, and thereafter, the display mode is changed so that the size of the aura increases each time the spirit gauge KG increases. As a result, the effect result of the current operation effect can be notified to the player in a visually easy-to-understand manner.

When the player operates the operation means during the long press effect, the display modes of the spirit gauge KG and the boy 810 are variably displayed as shown in FIG. 130(b). FIG. 130(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the player is long-pressing the frame button 22 during the long-press effect.

As shown in FIG. 130(b), when the player performs a long-press operation on the frame button 22 during the long-press effect, it is determined whether the operating means (frame button 22) is operated at a plurality of timings within the operation valid period. Since the frame button 22 is pressed at the determination timing to determine whether or not, it is determined that the operation means is being operated at the determination timing, and a variable lottery to determine whether or not to raise the spirit gauge KG is performed. done. Then, when the variable lottery is won, a variable effect is executed in which the gauge amount of the fighting spirit gauge KG is increased. The example shown in FIG. 130(b) shows a state in which the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG has increased to the second level. A boy 810 is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the gauge amount of the fighting spirit gauge KG.

In addition, the time gauge TG is displayed in a mode indicating that the remaining period of the operation valid period is decreasing (a mode in which the area indicating the remaining period (displayed in black in the figure) gradually decreases). Here, in this control example, as shown in FIGS. 130(a) and 130(b), the remaining period of the valid operation period is displayed without changing the size of the entire display area of the time gauge TG. is configured to reduce By configuring in this way, it is possible to display not only the remaining time of the operation valid period but also the mode indicating the elapsed time of the operation valid period (displayed in white in the drawing). Therefore, even if the remaining period of the operation valid period is not indicated in a specific number of seconds, the form (white display part) indicating the time that has already passed with respect to the overall length of the operation valid period set this time. , and (black display portion), the player can easily grasp the remaining time of the valid operation period.

In addition, as in this control example, when the elapsed state of the operation effective period is notified using the time gauge TG, that is, the operation effective period is not indicated by a specific number of seconds but by the degree of change in the display mode. By configuring to inform the player of the remaining period, it is possible to inform the player of different operation valid periods using the same display form only by executing the process of changing the variable speed of the display form. Since it becomes possible, the control processing for notifying the player of the remaining period of the operation valid period can be reduced. Also in this case, as in the fifth control example, the elapsed time of the valid operation period can also be displayed, so that the remaining period of the valid operation period can be displayed to the player in response to the variable speed of the display mode. It can be made easier to understand.

In this control example, the remaining time until the operation effective period ends is displayed (suggested) by the time gauge TG, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the remaining number of seconds may be displayed as a number and counted down according to the passage of time so that the player can recognize the remaining operation effective period. Further, for example, the remaining time may be indicated to the player by changing the coloring of the button image of the long-press image imitating the frame button 22 according to the remaining operation effective period. Specifically, for example, if the remaining time is 4 seconds or more, the button image is displayed in blue, and if the remaining time is 3 seconds or more and less than 4 seconds, the button image is displayed in green. When the remaining time is 2 seconds or more and less than 3 seconds, the button image is displayed in yellow, and when the remaining time is 1 second or more and less than 2 seconds, the button image is displayed in orange. However, if the remaining time is less than one second, the button image may be displayed in red. Also, it is not necessary to indicate to the player the remaining time until the operation effective period ends. Since display control can be simplified by omitting the indication indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period, the processing load of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced.

Further, in this control example, when an operation effective period is set in which the player can operate the operation means, the time gauge TG is displayed to set not only the remaining period of the operation effective period but also the operation effective period. However, in all cases where the operation valid period is set, there is no need to display the time gauge TG. An operation effect) and an operation effect in which the time gauge TG is not displayed (hidden operation effect) may be executable. With such a configuration, even when the time gauge TG is not displayed, the player can positively operate the frame button 22 because the valid operation period may be set.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the time gauge TG is configured to notify the player of the entire period of the valid operation period. It may be configured to notify. By configuring in this way, it is possible to leave the possibility that the operation valid period is set even in the period before and after the time gauge TG is displayed, so that the operation means ( The frame button 22) can be operated, and the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced.

Next, with reference to FIG. 131, the contents of the operation effect executed when the player releases the long press operation on the frame button 22 during the long press effect will be described. FIG. 131(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen displayed when the player releases the long press operation on the frame button 22. FIG.

FIG. 131(a) shows the state in which the player releases the long-pressing operation, that is, releases the frame button 22, in a state where the operation valid period (10 seconds) remains for 6 seconds during the long-pressing effect. 4 shows a display screen. As shown in FIG. 131(a), in the vicinity of the center of the main display area Dm, instead of the long-press image NG (see FIG. 130(a)), a repeated-press image RG is displayed and formed above the repeated-press image RG. In the display area HR12 where the frame button 22 is displayed, as a guidance notification mode for guiding the operation method of the frame button 22, the characters "continuous tapping for the rest!" are displayed.

By performing such a display, based on the fact that the player has canceled the long press operation during the operation valid period, the operation method that the player is caused to perform during the remaining operation valid period is different from the long press operation. It is possible to notify the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the operation has been switched to the continuous hitting operation, which is a different operation method.

Then, in the state shown in FIG. 131(a), that is, in a state in which the display mode in which the operation method to be executed by the player is switched from the long-pressing operation to the continuous-hitting operation is displayed, the player executes the continuous-hitting operation, When the operation timing coincides with a plurality of determination timings set within the operation valid period, the display screen shown in FIG. 131(b) is displayed. FIG. 131(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when performing a repeated hitting operation after the operation content is switched to the repeated hitting operation during the long press effect.

As shown in FIG. 131(b), when the variable condition of the display mode is satisfied by the continuous hitting operation, the effect of increasing the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG and the effect of varying the display mode of the boy 810 are prolonged. Execution continues from the display mode during the pressing operation.

In this way, even if the operation contents of the operation means (frame button 22) to be executed by the player are changed within one operation valid period, the same display mode is continued based on the operation result. By configuring to variably display by pressing, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the contents of the operation have been changed during the series of operation presentations.

As described above, in the first control example, after executing the long press operation on the frame button 22 during the operation valid period set for the long press effect, the player cancels the long press operation. In this case, an effect can be executed to prompt the player to perform repeated hits, which is different from the long-pressing operation.

In other words, in an operation presentation in which one operation valid period is set, first, a first operation presentation prompting the first operation is executed, and the result of the first operation during the first operation presentation and the remaining period of the operation valid period are calculated. , a second operation presentation prompting a second operation different from the first operation can be executed within the operation valid period. By configuring in this manner, the player can be made to operate the operation means with a plurality of operation contents within one operation valid period, so that the player's desire to operate can be enhanced.

Furthermore, the second operation effect is configured to be executed when it is determined that the first operation cannot be executed within the operation valid period. By configuring in this way, a different operation can be urged to the operation means compared to the case of repeatedly executing the first operation performance urging the player who cannot execute the first operation. is possible, it is possible for the player to easily operate the operating means.

In addition, the second operation presentation is configured to be executable when it is determined that the remaining period of the operation effective period is longer than or equal to a predetermined period when it is determined that the first operation cannot be executed. there is As a result, even though the second operation performance is executed, the operation valid period sufficient for the player to execute the second operation cannot be secured, and the player's desire to play is lowered. can be suppressed.

As described above, this control example is configured to execute determination for changing the display mode at a plurality of timings of the operation valid period, and when it is determined that the operation means is being operated at the plurality of timings, , the display mode is configured to be variable.

By configuring in this way, for example, as the first operation effect, an effect is executed to prompt the player to press and hold the operation means (frame button 22) (the first operation), and as the second operation effect, , even if it is configured to execute an effect prompting the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (frame button 22) (second operation), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 It is only necessary to perform processing for switching the presentation mode of the operation presentation from the first operation presentation to the second operation presentation, and it is possible to share the determination processing regarding the operation of the operating means. Therefore, it is possible to easily execute an effect prompting the player to perform different operation contents in one operation valid period.

In this control example, it is determined whether or not the operating means is being operated at a plurality of predetermined specific timings within the operation effective period, and if it is determined that the operating means is being operated, the Since it is configured to perform a determination for changing the mode, even when the player is continuously operating the operating means (during a so-called long-pressing operation), the player can operate the operating means. It is configured to be able to change the display mode even in a state of continuous operation at short intervals (so-called continuous operation). A determination means for determining the situation (non-timing determination means for determining the operation status at non-specific timing) is provided, and the operation means is operated at the specific timing based on the determination result of the non-timing determination means. The content of determination for varying the display mode to be executed may be made different.

Specifically, it is preferable to make it easier to change the display mode when it is determined that the operation means is operated at the specific timing as the operation means is operated during the non-specific timing. By configuring in this way, regardless of the specific timing, it is easier to change the display mode when the operation means is operated positively within the operation valid period, so that the player can participate in the game. It can increase motivation.

Further, as described above, the operation effective period is formed so as to include at least the first period as the specific timing and the second period as the non-specific timing, and it is determined that the operation means is operated during the first period. A first operation determining means capable of determining and a second operation determining means capable of determining whether the operating means is being operated during the second period are provided, and the determination result of the first operation determining means and the second operation determining means are provided. The degree of change in the display mode may be varied based on the determination result of the means and the content of the operation presentation (the content of the operation urged to the player). During the period in which the pressing operation is urged, the display mode is made easier to change as the operation to the operating means is determined by the second operation determining means, and the timing of allowing the player to operate the operating means only at a specific timing as the content of the operation presentation. During the period in which the pressing operation is urged, it is preferable to make it difficult to change the display mode as the operation to the operation means is determined by the second operation determination means.

By constructing in this manner, the processing for determining the operation status of the player during the effective operation period is made common, and at the same time, the contents of the operation effect being executed are made to correspond to the actual operation contents of the operation means. , the variable degree of the display mode can be varied.

In other words, since the processing for determining the player's operation status during the operation valid period is standardized, the player can press and hold the operation can be performed. However, when the long-pressing operation is performed so that the operation to the operation means is surely determined by the first operation determination means, the operation to the operation means is also determined by the second operation determination means. Therefore, when an effect prompting a timing push operation is being executed, it is possible to make it easier to change the display mode by executing the corresponding timing push operation than by executing the long push operation.

Therefore, the player can be motivated to operate the operation means to perform an operation corresponding to the instructed operation content.

Further, when it is determined that the operation means is operated during the non-specific timing, in the case of executing the process of making it difficult to change the display mode, when it is determined that the operation means is operated during the non-specific timing In addition, an effect that imposes a penalty on the player (for example, an effect that reverses the degree of change in the display mode or an effect that the display mode is difficult to change) is executed, or the instructed operation content is executed. It is preferable to configure so as to execute an effect that emphasizes and notifies. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to operate the operation means with the operation content corresponding to the operation presentation executed during the operation effective period.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 132 to 134, the flow of various effects executed in this first control example will be described. First, with reference to FIG. 132, description will be given of the flow of effects that are executed when winning the probability variable jackpot in the special symbol lottery. FIG. 132 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of effects executed during the period from the time when the probability variable jackpot is won, to the execution of the special symbol change a predetermined number of times (approximately 100 times) after the jackpot game ends. be.

In this first control example, as described above, the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery has won the probability variable jackpot (winning the jackpot in which the probability variable state is set after the jackpot game ends) to the player. In the case of stopped display with the notified probability variable pattern (for example, ``777''), and with the normal pattern (for example, ``222''), it is difficult (impossible) for the player to distinguish whether the probability variable jackpot or the normal jackpot has been won. Stop display may occur.

Then, when the jackpot is won with the normal pattern (when the third pattern indicating that the jackpot is won is stopped and displayed with the normal pattern), the game state set (is set) after the jackpot game is finished is the probability variable state. A game state suggesting effect for suggesting whether or not there is is configured to be executed during a big win game or during a special symbol variation after the big win game ends. By configuring in this way, even if a jackpot is won in which the variable probability state is not set (the time saving state is set) after the jackpot game is finished, until the time saving state set after the jackpot game is finished. , the player can play while expecting that the variable probability state is set.

On the other hand, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed in the probability variation pattern, at that time, that is, before the jackpot game is started, it is notified that the current jackpot is a probability variation jackpot, so the above-mentioned game state suggestion Without executing the performance, during the jackpot game, the performance during the jackpot is executed to congratulate the winning of the probability variable jackpot, and even after the jackpot game is over, the game state confirmation performance is executed to notify that the probability variable state is set. It is configured to

By configuring in this way, the game state suggesting effect is executed in spite of notifying that the variable probability state is set after the end of the jackpot game, and the situation where the player is confused can be prevented. can be suppressed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 132 (a), the jackpot variation production executed during the special symbol jackpot fluctuation, the jackpot game performance executed during the jackpot game period, and the predetermined after the jackpot game ends Various patterns of performances are executed by differentiating the performance modes from the first period performance executed in the period (the period until the special symbol variation is executed 100 times).

For example, when the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery is stop-displayed in the probability variation symbol (777), like "production pattern 1" shown in FIG. As the effect, the effect of congratulating the variable probability jackpot is executed, and the invincible mode (see "invincible zone" in FIG. 129(a)) is set as the first period effect after the end of the jackpot game. Then, after the special symbol variation is executed 100 times (after the end of the first period effect), the shortening mode (see "shortening zone" in FIG. 129(b)) is set.

On the other hand, when the third symbol indicating that the jackpot has been won in the special symbol lottery is stopped and displayed as the normal symbol (222), the jackpot game is in progress as in the "production pattern 2" shown in FIG. 132(c). A point acquisition additional effect (see FIG. 121(b)) is executed as a effect, and the win rate UP zone (see FIGS. 124 and 125) is used during the period from the end of the jackpot game until the special symbol variation is executed three times. ) is set, and then the battle mode (see FIGS. 126 to 128) is set as the first period effect.

And, in the example shown in FIG. 132 (c), since the variable probability state is set as the gaming state, after the first effect period ends, the shortened mode (see "shortened zone" in FIG. 129 (b)) set. In this way, in the state where the variable probability state is set as the game state, there is no defeat in the battle during the battle mode (the high probability state of the normal pattern ends). It becomes easy to execute an effect indicating that the winning percentage is high.

Furthermore, in this control example, an effect (see FIG. 126) is executed in which lucky points are added during the battle mode. An invincible mode (see "invincible zone" in FIG. 129(a)) indicating that the game state being played is a variable probability state is configured to be set. In addition, the effects in which lucky points are added include a first addition effect in which a specific number (1) of lucky points is added each time a variable effect is started, and an indeterminate number of lucky points ( 2 to 5) a second addition effect to be added can be executed.

Therefore, as in "production pattern 3" shown in FIG. 132(d), when the lucky points reach a predetermined number (100P) before the special symbol variation is executed 100 times after the end of the jackpot game, the battle The mode (performance mode in which it is difficult to determine whether the set game state is the probability variable state or the time saving state) is switched to the invincible mode (the performance mode in which it is determined that the probability variable state is set). Then, after the end of the first presentation period, the shortened mode (see "shortened zone" in FIG. 129(b)) is set.

By constructing in this way, even if a jackpot is won with normal symbols and the battle mode is set after the jackpot game is over, the player can expect the lucky points to reach the predetermined number (100 points). You can play games.

Furthermore, in this control example, when a specific jackpot type is selected among the cases where the probability variable jackpot is won, the probability variable pattern (777) is displayed as the jackpot pattern indicating the jackpot winning. . After the end of the jackpot game, the variation pattern of the special symbol lottery is selected by referring to the same variation pattern table as during the shortening mode.

Here, in the first control example, the battle mode is set after the end of the big win game, and the game state suggesting effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the variable probability state is set during the battle mode. are doing. Specifically, when the variable time of 60 seconds is selected as the variable time of the special symbol lottery executed during the battle mode, the battle production (see FIGS. 127 and 128) is executed, and the result of the battle production An effect that suggests the game state to the player is executed by .

That is, in order to execute the game state suggesting effect for suggesting whether the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is the probability variable state or the time saving state, a variable time of 60 seconds is selected during the battle mode. It was necessary to select the variation time of the special symbol lottery by referring to the variation pattern table obtained.

On the other hand, in this control example, when winning a variable probability jackpot in which a specific jackpot type is selected, the player is informed of the probability variable jackpot before the jackpot game ends, and the jackpot game ends. It is configured so that the battle mode will not be set later. Then, when winning a probability variable jackpot in which a specific jackpot type is selected, it is possible to execute a shortened variation referring to a variation pattern table referred to during the shortened mode from the first special symbol lottery after the end of the jackpot game. It consists of

That is, in the first control example, the type of the variation pattern table referred to during the variable probability state is configured to be different based on the jackpot type of the variable probability jackpot. Then, when the jackpot type that refers to the same variation pattern table as when the time saving state is set is selected, an effect of notifying that the jackpot game is a probability variable jackpot before the jackpot game ends. 132(b), and executes an effect to notify that it is a variable probability big hit. If not, the effect is executed according to the flow of FIG. 132(c).

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is selected to which the variation pattern table that is not referred to when the time saving state is set is selected, it is configured to execute the effect in the flow of FIG. are doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the time efficiency of the special symbol lottery executed during the variable probability state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, the flow of the effect executed when winning the time-saving jackpot will be described. FIG. 133(a) schematically shows the flow of effects executed during the period from the time of the jackpot fluctuation to the execution of the special symbol fluctuation a predetermined number of times (approximately 100 times) after the jackpot game ends when the time saving jackpot is won. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 133(a), even when the time-saving jackpot is won, the production is executed in the same flow as "production pattern 2 (see FIG. 132(c))" when the probability variable jackpot is won. In addition, if you win the time saving jackpot, the battle production that will be executed in the time saving final variation (out of the 30th, 50th, and 80th special pattern changes, the number of changes that will be the time saving final change in the time saving state set this time) In the battle production performed by the player), the production results in “defeat” is executed, and then the normal state is shifted to.

By configuring in this way, the high probability state of the normal pattern is maintained during the jackpot game period after the special symbol lottery is won by the partial effect when the probability variable jackpot is won and the effect when the time-saving jackpot is won. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to distinguish whether he or she has won a time-saving jackpot or a probability variable jackpot over the period until the end.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(c), among the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the relationship between the display mode of the winning percentage (display value of the winning percentage) and the internal situation of the game will be briefly described. to explain. FIG. 133(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the winning percentage (display value of the winning percentage) and the internal situation of the game. As shown in FIG. 133(c), when a winning percentage of 100% is displayed, a variable probability state is set (has been set) as the gaming state, or a jackpot election is confirmed (special The symbol lottery is a jackpot winning, or the information indicating the jackpot winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation) state. Further, when a win rate of 90 to 99% is displayed, there is a possibility that a variation pattern table in which a battle effect is unlikely to occur is being referred to, or a situation in which a variation pattern table in which a battle effect is likely to occur is being referred to. , and the possibility that the variable probability state is set as the game state (is set) is about 3 times the possibility that the time saving state is set (is) becomes.

If a win rate of 60 to 89% is displayed, there is a possibility that a variation pattern table in which a battle effect is likely to occur is being referred to. It indicates that it is higher than the possibility, and the possibility that the variable probability state is set as the game state (is set) is about twice the possibility that the time saving state is set (is set) .

If a win rate of ~59% is displayed, there is a possibility that a variation pattern table in which a battle effect is unlikely to occur is being referred to, or a variation pattern table in which a battle effect is likely to occur is being referred to. It shows that it is higher than the possibility, and the possibility that the variable probability state is set as the game state (is set) is equivalent to the possibility that the time saving state is set (is set).

In this way, the higher the winning percentage is displayed, the higher the possibility that the next big win will be likely to be won, thereby enhancing the presentation effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133(d), among the effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the relationship between the degree of accumulation of lucky points and the internal state of the game will be briefly described. FIG. 133(d) is a diagram showing the relationship between how lucky points are accumulated and the internal state of the game. As shown in FIG. 133(d), according to the type of game state, it is configured so that the amount of lucky points accumulated is variable. The execution frequency of the addition effect is varied so that the lucky points reach near the upper limit within the period. Then, even if the variable probability state is set, according to the type, lucky points are accumulated in the same way as when the time saving state of 30 times, 50 times, or 80 times is set (addition are accumulated). As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging the game state based on how lucky points are accumulated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 134, the relationship between the operation effective period determination timing and the button effect will be described. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing the relationship between the determination timing of the operation effective period and the button effect. In this control example, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, depending on the operation content of the frame button 22 within one operation valid period, the operation content for the player to operate the frame button 22 can be changed midway. It is configured to allow

Here, in this control example, an operation determination timing is provided at a specific timing within an operation valid period for validly determining an operation to the frame button 22, and the operation determination timing and the operation timing to the frame button 22 are different. A lottery (gauge UP lottery) for varying the presentation mode of the operation presentation can be executed when they match.

Then, as an operation effect, a long-press effect (see FIG. 130) is executed. , the gauge UP lottery is repeatedly executed at each operation determination timing. Then, when the game is won in the gauge-up lottery, an effect is executed in which the value of the fighting spirit gauge KG increases.

Here, when the player releases the hand during the valid operation period, the long-press effect ends. Then, when it is determined that the remaining period of the operation effective period is more than half (5 seconds or more), a repeated hit effect (see FIG. 131(a)) is executed, and the player is asked to repeatedly hit the frame button 22. is guided. Then, when the operation timing of the continuous hitting operation (the detection timing of the frame button 22 and the timing of each operation judgment match), the gauge UP lottery is executed again, and if the lottery is won, the value of the spirit gauge KG is increased. A production is executed.

Returning to FIG. 118, the description continues. The second symbol display device 83 performs variable display by indicating whether or not the normal symbol lottery that is performed when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a normal symbol (second symbol) according to the lottery result of the normal symbol is indicated by a lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, every time the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the symbol "O" and the symbol "X" as the second symbol are alternately lit. display is performed. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (“○” symbol in this control example), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second ball entrance 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. It is configured to be in an actuated state (opened), and as a result, a state in which a ball can easily enter the second ball inlet 640 is achieved. The number of times the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 is reserved up to four times at maximum, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display device 37 and is also lit and displayed by the second symbol reservation lamp 84. . Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

In addition, the variable display of normal symbols (second symbols) is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in this control example. And part of the third pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . Also, as with the first ball entrance 64, the maximum number of balls that pass through the normal ball entrance 67 is not limited to four times, but may be three times or less, or five times or more ( For example, it may be set to 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entrance 64 through which a ball can enter is provided. When a ball enters the first ball inlet 64, a first ball inlet switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first ball inlet switch is turned on. A special symbol lottery is performed by the main controller 110, and the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates a display according to the lottery result. In addition, the first ball entrance 64 is also one of the prize winning openings from which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed below the first ball entrance 64, and a horizontally long rectangular special prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery for special symbols performed by the main controller 110 results in a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses so that the big win stops. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (16-round jackpot) in which a larger amount of prize balls than normal is paid out. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a which is normally closed is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls have been won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated 16 times (16 rounds). The state in which this opening and closing operation is performed is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player, and the player is given a game value (game value) by paying out a larger amount of prize balls than usual. is done.

Specifically, the variable prize winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific prize winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific prize winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball is likely to enter the specific prize winning port 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big hit in the first pattern display device 37 is lit, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time, and the specific winning opening is opened. A special game state is a game state in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times when a ball enters the specific winning opening 65a while the opening 65a is open. You may make it form.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through an out hole 66.例文帳に追加The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 119, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 135). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 135) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the first control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 135, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 135 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

First, the contents of the ROM 202 will be described with reference to FIGS. 137-140. As shown in FIG. 137, in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, as part of the above-described fixed value data, a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a second winning random number table 202c, a variation pattern At least a selection table 202d and a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e are stored.

The first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 137(b)) is a data table that stores a jackpot determination value of a first winning random number counter C1, which will be described later. Although the details will be described later together with the description of the first winning random number counter C1, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 acquired based on the starting winning is one of the determination values defined in the first winning random number table 202a. , it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot.

Specifically, for each symbol type (first special symbol, second special symbol), the value determined to be a jackpot is commonly defined, and if the state of the special symbol is a low probability state , When the value of the first per random number counter C1 is "0" and the state of the special symbol is a high probability state, the value of the first per random number counter C1 is "0 to 5" , a random number value (first winning random number counter value) that is determined to be a big hit is defined.

Since the range that the value of the first winning random number counter C1 can take is "0 to 299", the probability of being determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special pattern is 1/300, and the high probability state of the special pattern is considered as a big hit. The determined probability is 6/300 (1/50).

The first hit type selection table 202b (Fig. 137 (c)) is a data table that stores the determination value for determining the jackpot type, and the determination value of the first hit type counter C2 is for each jackpot type. are defined in association with each other. Specifically, when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit (common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol), if the value of the first winning type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 54", the big hit Determined as A1 (10 rounds variable probability jackpot), if in the range of "55 to 59", determined as jackpot A2 (10 rounds variable probability jackpot), if in the range of "60 to 64", jackpot If it is determined to be A3 (10 rounds probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "65 to 69", it is determined to be jackpot B1 (10 rounds short time 30 times jackpot) If it is in the range of "70 to 74" , It is determined that it is a jackpot B2 (10 rounds short time 30 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "75 to 84", it is judged to be a jackpot C1 (10 rounds short time 50 times jackpot), "85 to 89" If it is in the range, it is determined to be a jackpot C2 (10 rounds short time 50 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of “90 to 94”, it is determined to be a jackpot D1 (10 rounds short time 80 times jackpot), “95 ~ 99”, it is determined to be a jackpot D2 (10 rounds short time 80 times jackpot) (see FIG. 137(c)).

As described above, in this control example, a plurality of jackpot types are provided as jackpot types in which the jackpot game content and the game state set after the jackpot game is the same. Although the details will be described later, in this control example, when selecting the variation time of the special symbol lottery executed during the time saving state or the variable probability state, a different data table (variation pattern table) according to the selected jackpot type configured for reference.

For example, when winning the ``10-round probability variable times jackpot'', the ``jackpot A1'' as the jackpot type is configured so that the special symbol variation with a longer variation time is more likely to be executed than the ``jackpot A3''. .

In addition, when "jackpot A1", "jackpot B1" and "jackpot C1" are selected as the jackpot types, the same data table (fluctuation pattern table 1) is referred to and "jackpot A2" and "jackpot B2" are referred to. , When "jackpot C2" is selected, the same data table (fluctuation pattern table 2) is referenced, and when "jackpot A3" is selected, a dedicated data table (fluctuation pattern table 3) is referenced. be.

By configuring in this way, during the period in which the production mode (winning rate UP zone, battle mode) described above with reference to FIGS. It is possible to prevent the game state in which the player is playing from being grasped.

In addition, the variation pattern table 1 described above is defined so that the variation time of 60 seconds is more likely to be selected than the variation pattern table 2 when the result of the special symbol lottery is out. is stipulated so as not to select a variable time of 60 seconds when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost. Here, in this control example, when the variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation time of the special symbol variation, the battle effect is executed.

In other words, the battle effect is a effect that is executed when the 60-second special symbol variation is selected. Then, when the result of the special symbol lottery in which the fluctuation time of 60 seconds is selected is a big hit, "victory" is selected as the effect result of the battle effect, and when the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, If the special symbol lottery (variation) ends the time saving condition, that is, if the special symbol variation of the number of times the time saving ends, "defeat" is selected as the result of the battle production, other than that ( If it is a special symbol lottery (variation) other than the time saving end number, "Continue" is selected as the production result of the battle production.

Therefore, depending on which variation pattern table is selected with reference to the variation time of the special symbol lottery, the selection ratio of the 60-second variation for the lost winning differs. The appearance frequency of the battle production in which is “continued”) can be varied. As a result, during the battle mode, the number of special symbol lotteries that can be executed within a unit period can be varied according to the variation pattern table to be referred to.

In addition, since it is possible to reduce the number of executions of battle effects with the effect result being "continued", it is possible to increase the ratio of selecting "victory" or "defeat" when the battle effects are executed. . As a result, the player can be interested in the content of the performance during the battle performance.

Further, the variation pattern table referred to when "jackpot A3" is won is defined so that the variation time of 60 seconds is not selected when the result of the special symbol lottery is lost, and When the result of the special symbol lottery is a loss, the short variation time is more likely to be selected than other variation pattern tables. As a result, it is possible to increase the number of executions of the special symbol lottery per unit time. In addition, when this "jackpot A3" is selected, an effect for informing that the jackpot this time is a probability variable jackpot is executed before the special symbol lottery is executed after the jackpot game is finished, and after the jackpot game is finished. A shortened zone (see FIG. 129(b)) is set.

Specifically, the stop display mode of "777" indicating the probability variable jackpot is displayed as the stop display mode of the third symbol for notifying that the result of the special symbol lottery is the jackpot, or the winning percentage executed during the jackpot game. In the UP effect, the winning rate increases to "100%", and an effect is executed to notify that the current big win is a probability variable big win.

In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning is compared with the first winning type selection table 202b. A jackpot type corresponding to the value of the winning type counter C2 is selected.

The second hit random number table 202c (see FIG. 138(a)) is a data table in which hit determination values for normal symbols are stored. Specifically, in the normal state of the normal design, "5 to 28" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 138(a)). In addition, in the high-probability state of the normal design, "5 to 204" is defined as the judgment value for winning the normal design (see FIG. 138(a)). In the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired based on the ball passing through the normal ball entrance 67 and the second winning random number table 202c are referred to, and the normal symbol is determined. It is determined whether it is a hit or not.

In the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 138(b), (c), and FIGS. 139(a) to (c)), the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 for determining the display mode of the variation pattern is determined for each display mode. is a data table defined in each. The details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described later together with the description of the variation type counter CS1.

The variation pattern scenario selection table 202e selects the type of the variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation. It is a data table that is defined in correspondence with the number of special symbol fluctuations from. By using this variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, it is possible to easily set a specific variation pattern (variation time) for a predetermined number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. The detailed contents of this variation pattern scenario selection table 202e will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 136, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 150), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 159). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . The RAM 203 is provided with a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored in accordance with the timing of the ball. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 are stored in accordance with the timing of entering the ball. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with an execution area 203c, which stores the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3, which are targets for the lottery. Further, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is stored in time with the timing of passing through the normal entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through any normal entrance (through gate) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 299. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 150) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 159).

The value of the first hit random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and when the game ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c when the special symbol lottery is not being executed). On the other hand, when the game ball enters the second ball entrance 640, the value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (the execution area 203c if the special symbol lottery is not being executed). Stored.

The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 137(b)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is equal to the value of the random number for the big win set by the first random number table, it is determined as the big win of the special symbol. In addition, this first random number table 202a is for when the probability of special symbols is low (a period in which the probability of special symbols is low), and when the probability of winning a special symbol is high (special The number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each type is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between when the probability of special symbols is low and when the probability of special symbols is high.

In addition, in this control example, the random number (value "0" of the first winning random number counter C1) determined as a big hit in the low probability state of the special symbol is determined as a big hit in the high probability state of the special symbol. Although it is used as a random value, the random value that will be the jackpot stored in the first winning random number table for low probability and the random value that will be the jackpot stored in the first random number table for high probability A random number value for each jackpot may be defined so that the value does not overlap with the numerical value. By configuring in this way, as in this control example, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state), random By changing the numerical value, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number that will be the big hit of the special symbol, so that fraud can be suppressed.

The first win type counter C2 determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when a special symbol jackpot is won, and adds 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 99). and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first hit type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (hereinafter , Various starting ball entrances) are stored in the corresponding reserved ball storage areas (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) at the timing of winning.

Here, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. Otherwise, that is, if it is a random number that causes the special symbol to come off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in each reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b) is a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot. If so, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the first hit type stored in the same reserved ball storage area (first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b). The display mode is the one indicated by the value of the counter C2.

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, as described above with reference to FIG. 137(c), when the special symbol lottery results in a big hit, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 54", the big hit A1 (10 round probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "55 to 59", it is judged to be jackpot A2 (10 round probability variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 64", jackpot A3 (10 rounds probability variable jackpot), if it is in the range of "65 to 69", it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (10 rounds short time 30 times jackpot), If it is in the range of "70 to 74", It is determined to be a jackpot B2 (10 rounds short time 30 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "75 to 84", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (10 rounds short time 50 times jackpot), and in the range of "85 to 89" If it is, it is determined to be a jackpot C2 (10 rounds short time 50 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "90 to 94", it is determined to be a jackpot D1 (10 rounds short time 80 times jackpot), "95 ~ 99”, it is determined to be a jackpot D2 (10 rounds short time 80 times jackpot) (see FIG. 137(c)). In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of this control example has nine kinds of winning types (jackpots A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2) according to the value of the random number indicated by the first winning type counter C2. configured to be determined.

The stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this control example, the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is selected by the stop type selection counter C3, and after the ready-to-win occurs, the final stop symbol shifts by one before or after the ready-to-win symbol. "Reach outside the front and rear" (for example, 98, 99) to stop at the same time, and "Reach other than the front and back" (for example, the range of 90 to 97) in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and rear of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs. Three stop (effect) patterns such as "completely out of reach" (for example, the range of 0 to 89) are selected. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this control example), and at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol is reserved in the RAM 203. The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 is stored in the ball storage area 203a at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640. - 特許庁

In addition, from the value (random number) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by a stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control It is provided in ROM 202 of device 110 . In addition, in this control example, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability. is changing This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol high probability state or a special symbol low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, a table for high-probability situations with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary because the jackpot is likely to occur. is selected, making it easier for "completely out" to be selected. In this table, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-reel reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-reel reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-reel reach". In addition, in the low-probability state, the range of the random number corresponding to the stop type of "completely out" is as narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64. table for is selected, making it difficult for "completely out" to be selected.

In this stop type selection table, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, making it easier for "Reach other than front-rear deviation" to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first ball entrance 64 can be secured, and the variable display by the third symbol display device 81 can be continued. easier to do. In the latter table as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Rough display modes such as so-called normal reach and super reach are determined by the fluctuation type counter CS1. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 159) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. In addition, from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern selection table 202d (FIGS. 138(b), (c), and FIG. 139(a)) stores a random value for determining one variation time of the pattern variation. to (c)) are provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 as described above.

Here, details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 138(b), (c), and FIGS. 139(a) to (c). This variation pattern selection table 202d is, as shown in FIG. 138(b), a normal table 202d1 (see FIG. 138(c)), a first time-saving and probability variation table 202d2 (see FIG. 139(a)), Second time-saving/probable variable table 202d3 (see FIG. 139(b)), probable variable table 202d4 (see FIG. 139(c)), first specific variation table 202d5 (see FIG. 139(d)), and second It has at least a specific fluctuation table 202d6.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 138(c). FIG. 138(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of this normal table 202d1. The normal table 202d1 is a data table that is referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol variation when the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state. be.

Specifically, regardless of the symbol type of the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), when the success determination result is "big hit", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49". Jackpot variation A (30 seconds) in the range of , Jackpot variation B (60 seconds) in the range of “50 to 99”, and Jackpot variation C (90 seconds) in the range of “100 to 198”, respectively are defined in association with each other.

Further, if the result of the judgment is "out", the value of the variation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 99" and the variation A (10 seconds) is out of the range of "100 to 169". A variation B (30 seconds) and a variation C (60 seconds) outside the range of "170 to 198" are defined in association with each other.

In addition, in this control example, the contents of the variation pattern table are defined so that a common variation pattern is selected for the symbol types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). Without limitation, the contents of the variation pattern table may be defined so that different variation patterns can be selected for each symbol type of the special symbol. In addition, in this control example, the content of the variation pattern table is defined so that a common variation pattern is selected regardless of the value of the number of reserved special symbols. , It may be configured such that the larger the reserved number of special symbols, the easier it is to select a variation pattern with a shorter variation time than the smaller number. As a result, the special design fluctuates long in a state where the number of special design reservations is large (for example, the state in which the upper limit number of special design reservations has been obtained), and a period in which it is not possible to acquire new special design reservations. is set for a long time.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 138(b). FIG. 138(b) is a diagram showing the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202d. As shown in FIG. 138(b), the variation pattern scenario selection table 202d includes a normal table 202d1, a first time-saving/probable variable table 202d2, a second time-saving/probable variable table 202d3, a probable variable table 202d4, and a first specific A change table 202d5 and a second specific change table 202d6 are defined.

Next, the contents of the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 138(c). FIG. 138(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. This normal table 202d1 defines the type (variation time) of the variation pattern indicating the lottery result of the special symbols selected in the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) as the game state. Data table. When the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the jackpot fluctuation A (30 seconds) in the range of "0 to 49", and the jackpot fluctuation in the range of "50 to 99". B (60 seconds), and the range of "100 to 198" is defined as the jackpot variation C (90 seconds), and if the result of the special symbol lottery is out, the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 is " Variation A (10 seconds) in the range of 0 to 99, Variation B (30 seconds) in the range of 100 to 169, Variation C (60 seconds) in the range of 170 to 198 is stipulated.

Next, with reference to Drawing 139 (a), the contents of table 202d2 for the 1st time saving and probability variation are explained. Drawing 139 (a) is a figure showing the contents of table 202d2 for the 1st time saving and probability variation. This first time saving/probability variation table 202d2 shows the type (variation time) of the variation pattern indicating the lottery result of the special symbol selected in part of the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol as the game state It is a defined data table and is referenced based on scenarios defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 defines the jackpot variation B (60 seconds) in the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol lottery If the result is out of range, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 99" and the short fluctuation (5 seconds) is out of the range of "100 to 149" and fluctuation A (10 seconds). However, deviation C (60 seconds) is defined in the range of "150 to 198".

Next, with reference to Drawing 139 (b), the contents of table 202d3 for the 2nd time saving and probability variation are explained. FIG.139(b) is the figure which showed the content of the table 202d3 for 2nd time reduction and probability variation. This second time saving/probability variation table 202d3 shows the type (variation time) of the variation pattern indicating the lottery result of the special symbol selected in part of the high probability state (time saving state, probability variation state) of the normal symbol as the game state It is a defined data table and is referenced based on scenarios defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a jackpot, the judgment value of the variation type counter CS1 defines the jackpot variation B (60 seconds) in the entire range of "0 to 198", and the special symbol lottery If the result is out of range, the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is out of the range of "0 to 196", short fluctuation (5 seconds), out of "197", fluctuation A (10 seconds), "198" ”, outlier variation C (60 seconds) is defined.

As described above, the first time-saving/probable variable table 202d2 is more likely to be selected than the second time-saving/probable variable table 202d3. ing. In this control example, in the battle mode executed during the high probability state of normal symbols, when the variation pattern of 60 seconds is selected, the battle effect is executed. That is, the first time saving/probability variable table 202d2 becomes a variation pattern table in which the battle effect is more likely to be executed than the second time saving/probability change table 202d3.

Next, the contents of the probability variation table 202d4 will be described with reference to FIG. 139(c). FIG. 139(c) is a diagram showing the contents of the probability variation table 202d4. This probability variation table 202d4 has a variation pattern type (variation time) indicating the lottery result of a special symbol selected in a part of the probability variation state (high probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) as a game state. It is a defined data table and is referenced based on scenarios defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation time of 5 seconds in the entire range of "0 to 198" of the judgment value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (short fluctuation, short fluctuation), stipulated. As a result, it is possible to facilitate execution of the special symbol lottery with good time efficiency.

Next, referring to FIG. 139(d), the contents of the first specific variation table 202d5 will be described. FIG. 139(d) is a diagram showing the contents of the first specific variation table 202d5. This first specific variation table 202d5 is a variation pattern type ( This is a data table that defines a variation time) and is referred to based on scenarios defined in a variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a big hit, the specific variation A (11 seconds) is defined in the entire range of "0 to 198" for the determination value of the variation type counter CS1, and the special symbol lottery If the result is out of range, the specified variation A (11 seconds) is in the range of "0 to 2" and the specific variation B (10 seconds) is in the range of "3 to 198". stipulated.

Next, the contents of the second specific variation table 202d6 will be described with reference to FIG. 139(e). FIG. 139(e) is a diagram showing the contents of the second specific variation table 202d6. This second specific variation table 202d6 is a variation pattern type (variation time ), which is referred to based on scenarios defined in a fluctuation pattern scenario selection table 202e, which will be described later.

Specifically, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is defined in the entire range of the determination value of the variation type counter CS1 from "0 to 198". By defining the second specific variation table 202d6 in this way, when the variation pattern is determined (selected) with reference to the second specific variation table 202d6, it is possible to always determine the variation time of 60 seconds. Therefore, it is possible to reliably execute the battle production.

Next, referring to FIG. 140, the contents of the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e will be described. FIG. 140 is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e. As shown in FIG. 140, in the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e, various variation patterns are stipulated in association with the game state (the type of the jackpot won last time) and the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game. It is

Specifically, when the game state is normal (normal state), the scenario is defined so that the normal table 202d1 is referred to within the range of "1 to" the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game. there is

When the game state is probability change 1 (jackpot A1), the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot game is in the range of "1 to 3", and the first specific fluctuation table 202d5 is "4 to 29, 31 to 49, 51 ~ 79, 81 ~ 100", the first time-saving / probability variation table 202d2 in the range, the second specific variation table 202d6 in the range of "30, 50, 80", and the probability variation table 202d4 in the range of "101 ~" Scenarios are provided for reference.

In addition, when the game state is probability variation 2 (jackpot A2), the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot game is in the range of "1 to 3", and the first specific fluctuation table 202d5 is "4 to 29, 31 to 49 , 51 to 79, 81 to 100”, the second time-saving/probable variable table 202d2 is in the range of “30, 50, 80”, and the second specific variable table 202d6 is in the range of “101 ~”. The scenario is defined so that 202d4 is referenced.

When the game state is probability variation 3 (jackpot A3), the scenario is defined so that the probability variation table 202d4 is referred to within the range of "1 to" the number of special symbol variations after the end of the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the game state is time saving 1 (jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1), the first specific variation table 202d5 is set to "4 ~ 29, 31 ~ 49, 51 ~ 79, 81 ~ 100" so that the first time saving / probability variable table 202d2 is referred to in the range of "30, 50, 80" so that the second specific variation table 202d6 is referred to A scenario is specified.

In addition, if the game state is time saving 2 (jackpot B2, jackpot C2, jackpot D2, the number of special symbol fluctuations after the jackpot game is in the range of "1 to 3", and the first specific fluctuation table 202d5 is "4 to 29, 31 to 49, 51 to 79, 81 to 100”, the second short/probable variation table 202d2 is referred to, and the range of “30, 50, 80” refers to the second specific variation table 202d6. is stipulated.

Returning to FIG. 136, the description continues. The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this example of control, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing, and it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. It is acquired at the same time and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203 d of the RAM 203 .

Then, the value of the random number that is the normal winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 138(a)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. is equal to the winning random number value set by the second winning random number table, it is determined that the win is a normal symbol. In addition, this second hit random number table is for when the probability of normal patterns is low (period in which normal patterns are normal), and when the probability of winning normal patterns is high than that of low probability (normal patterns) It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the jackpot included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

As described above with reference to FIG. 138(a), when the probability of a normal symbol is low, there are 24 random numbers that will win a normal symbol, and the range is "5 to 28" (FIG. 138(a) )reference). These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols are displayed on the second symbol display device 83. A variable display is performed for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the first ball entrance 64 is opened for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when the normal symbols win. The electric accessory 640a is controlled to open and close at first, but the opening time and number of times of the electric accessory 640a may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be set to "0.5 seconds x 2 times".

On the other hand, when the probability of normal symbols is high, there are 200 random numbers for the jackpot of normal symbols, and the range is "5 to 204" (see FIG. 138(a)). These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal pattern high probability state, when the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83. A variable display is performed for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second ball entrance 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the probability of the normal pattern is high, the time of the variable display is significantly shortened from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of the normal pattern is low, and furthermore, the second entrance 640 is opened. Since the period becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second ball entrance 640 . In this control example, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second ball entrance 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. The time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 150). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 159).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 135, the description is continued. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 136, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 159) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 158) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 157) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 135, the RAM 203 has a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, a second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, an execution area 203c, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d, and a first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203d. A special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, a second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, a normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g, a variable probability flag 203h, a time-saving medium counter 203i, a ball standby flag 203j, and a jackpot start flag. 203k and a jackpot medium flag 203m.

The first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for the first special symbol is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is It is shifted (moved) to the execution area 203c, and based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

In addition, when data is shifted from the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a to the execution area 203c, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this control example, in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, in this control example, no winning data is stored in any of the reserved areas of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, and no winning data is stored in the execution area 203c, that is, the special Even if the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 (start winning) in a state where the pattern variation is not executed, the winning data is temporarily stored in the reserved first area, and then the winning data is stored. to the execution area 203c, the processing for storing the winning data in the execution area 203c is shared (unified to the processing for storing the winning data stored in the first reserved area) However, it is not limited to this, and the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 in a state where no winning data is stored in the execution area 203c. When winning (starting winning), winning data may be directly stored in the execution area 203c without going through the reserve area of the first special symbol reserve ball storage area 203a. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of temporarily storing the winning data to be immediately shifted to the execution area 203c in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a.

The second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b has four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each value of the counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding number Area 1 to reserved area 4) are stored in ascending order of area numbers (first to fourth). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for the second special symbol is performed in the main controller 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is It is shifted (moved) to the execution area 203c, and based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 stored in the execution area 203c, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b to the execution area 203c, the first reserved area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area with the area number 1 smaller (first reservation area to third reservation area). done. In this control example, in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

In addition, in this control example, the winning data is not stored in any of the reserved areas of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b and the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c, that is, the special Even if the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) in a state in which the pattern variation is not executed, the winning data is stored in the reserved first area, and then the winning data is stored. to the execution area 203c, the processing for storing the winning data in the execution area 203c is shared (unified to the processing for storing the winning data stored in the first reserved area) However, it is not limited to this, and the ball enters the second ball entrance 640 in a state where no winning data is stored in the execution area 203c. When winning (starting winning), winning data may be directly stored in the execution area 203c without going through the reserve area of the second special symbol reserve ball storage area 203b. By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of temporarily storing the winning data that is immediately shifted to the execution area 203c into the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b.

In this first control example, the second special symbol lottery is configured to be executed with priority over the first special symbol lottery, and the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery can be executed simultaneously. It is configured so that it does not exist. That is, in the state where the winning data is not stored in the execution area 203c (the state in which the special symbol lottery is not executed), the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is prioritized over the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a. If it is determined that the winning data is stored in the reserved first area, and if it is determined that it is stored, the winning data stored in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is executed. 203c. On the other hand, if it is determined that the winning data in the first reserved area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is not stored, then the winning data in the first reserved area of the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is stored, and if it is determined that it is stored, the prize winning data stored in the first reserved area of the first reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted to the execution area 203c.

In this way, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery are performed in accordance with a predetermined priority order without overlapping the execution period for a plurality of types of special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol). In the pachinko machine 10 configured to execute the special symbol types, instead of using the execution area corresponding to each special symbol type, it is preferable to provide one common execution area 203c as in this control example. . As a result, an abnormality occurs in the processing of the main controller 110, and a situation occurs in which winning data is stored in the execution area corresponding to the first special symbol and the execution area corresponding to the second special symbol. can be reliably prevented.

In the pachinko machine 10, as soon as the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting winning), and each value of each counter C1 to C3 is obtained according to the starting winning. Aside from the original special symbol jackpot lottery, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed is predicted (estimated) from the obtained values of the counters C1 to C3. In this way, before the original special symbol lottery is performed, various information obtained when the original lottery is performed based on the data corresponding to the start winning prize (each value of each counter C1 to C3) Prediction is hereinafter referred to as prefetching the lottery result of the special symbol. The various types of information include acceptance/rejection, stop type, variation pattern, and the like.

Then, when the prefetching is completed, a prize winning information command including various information (whether or not, stop type, variation pattern) obtained by the prefetching is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . When the winning information command is received by the audio ramp control device 113, the audio ramp control device 113 extracts the success/failure, stop type, and variation pattern from the winning information command, and stores them as winning information in the winning information storage area of the RAM 223. 223a.

In addition, the above-mentioned look-ahead processing uses various data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) obtained based on the start winning, and pre-discriminates the information obtained when the special symbol lottery is actually executed. (Prefetching) processing is configured to be executed on the main controller 110 side, and the main controller 110 is configured to set a winning information command including information indicating the result of the prefetching processing (preliminary determination result). However, without being limited to this, the main controller 110 sets a winning information command including information indicating various data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) acquired based on the starting winning, and the winning Various data (each value of each counter C1 to C3) included in the winning information command may be pre-read in the processing of the audio lamp control device 113 that receives the information command.

By configuring in this way, it is not necessary to execute the pre-determination (prefetching) process on the main controller 110 side, so the burden of the control process on the main controller 110 can be reduced. In this case, instead of including the various data (the values of the counters C1 to C3) acquired based on the starting winning in the winning information command as they are, the various data acquired based on the starting winning (each counter Each value of C1 to C3) may be processed to the extent that it can be specified on the audio lamp control device 113 side and then included in the winning information command.

In this way, the information (random number value) whose value is updated by the updating process periodically executed in the main controller 110 is not directly included in the winning information command, but the processed information is used as the winning information. By configuring to be included in the information command, even if the command (winning information command) output from the main controller 110 is illegally acquired, the command (winning information command) is included in the acquired winning information command. It is possible to prevent the specifications of the update process executed by main controller 110 from being analyzed from the information received.

The normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, the value of the counter C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the four reservation areas (first reservation area to second reservation area). 4 areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth). That is, similarly to the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning are stored while the winning order is maintained. Note that if data is stored in all of the four reserved areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. A shift process is performed to pack the winning data into a reserve area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is the first special symbol (first symbol) variable display ( It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81 up to four times. The initial value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero. 1 is added up to (see S404 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 151).

The value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S211 in FIG. 151). The pending ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the first special symbol pending ball number counter 203e is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113, every time the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, by the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the variable display of the variable display withheld by the main controller 110 It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

The second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f has the same function as the above-described first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e, but the target is switched from the first special symbol to the second special symbol. Retained ball of variable display (variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the ball entering the entrance 640 (start winning) It is a counter that counts the number (waiting times) up to four times. The initial value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero. 1 is added up to (see S410 in FIG. 153). On the other hand, the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time a special symbol variable display is newly executed (see S205 in FIG. 151).

The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (see S206 in FIG. 151 and S411 in FIG. 153). ). The pending ball number command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203f is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f every time the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of retained balls itself. As a result, the number of variable display pending balls managed by the special symbol pending ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed from the actual variable display pending ball number held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from, the deviation can be corrected by the next received ball number command.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the sub-display area Ds of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command (see FIG. 120(b). ).

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g maximizes the number of reserved balls (number of standby times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. A counter that counts up to four times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. (See S604 in FIG. 156). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S505 in FIG. 155).

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter The value of C4 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d (S605 in FIG. 156). On the other hand, when the ball passes through either the left or right normal ball entrance 67 and the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d. (S603 in FIG. 156: No).

The probability variation flag 203h is a flag indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol probability variation state (special symbol high probability state). If the value of the probability variation flag 203h is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a special symbol normal state (special symbol low probability state). The variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF in the initial state, and is set to ON at the end of the special symbol jackpot A (see S1014 in FIG. 160). On the other hand, when the special symbol lottery results in a big win, the setting is set to OFF when setting the start of the big win (see S213 in FIG. 151).

When the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152) is executed by the MPU 201, a special symbol lottery is performed. In the special symbol variation start process, the probability variation flag 203h is referred to, and if the state is ON, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first hit random number table for high probability, while the probability variation flag 203h is in the state. is off, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the first winning random number table for low probability (see S303 and S304 in FIG. 152).

The time-saving medium counter 203i is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern high probability state, and if the value of the time-saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern high probability state. If the value of the counter 203i during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a low probability state of normal symbols. The initial value of the time-saving counter 203i is set to zero, and a lottery of special symbols is performed in the main control device 110, and when a jackpot (time-saving jackpot) in which a time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends is won, the winner is won. A value indicating the number of times of working hours corresponding to the jackpot type is set at the end of the jackpot game (see S1013 in FIG. 160). In addition, regardless of the type of big win, when a special symbol lottery results in a big win, the value is set to 0 while setting the start of the big win.

In this control example, there are multiple types of jackpots with different numbers of times of saving time, and when "jackpot B1" and "jackpot B2" are won, the number of times of saving time is 30 times, and "jackpot C1" and "jackpot C2" are won. In the case of winning, the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times, and when "jackpot D1" and "jackpot D2" are won, the number of times of time saving is set to 80 times. Then, when it is determined that the variation time of the special symbol variation has passed (when it is time to stop and display the special symbol variation), the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is subtracted by 1.

When the lottery for the normal pattern is performed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203i and the state of the probability variable flag 203h are referred to, and the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 1 or more, or the state of the probability variable flag 203h is turned on. If so, it is determined to be a high probability state of normal symbols. In this case, based on the second winning random number table for high probability, a lottery for normal symbols is performed (see S509 in FIG. 155). On the other hand, if the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is 0 and the state of the probability variation flag 203h is off, it is normally determined as a low probability state of the design, and based on the second per random number table for the low probability time , normal symbol lottery is performed (see S510 in FIG. 155).

The entry standby flag 203j is not used in this control example, but is a flag for indicating a state in which a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot and the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a stop display mode indicating the jackpot win. This ball entry standby flag 203j is set so that, for example, a jackpot game is executed when a ball enters a specific area (operating winning hole) after the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a stop display mode indicating that the jackpot has been won. In the pachinko machine 10 configured as above, a flag used to indicate a jackpot waiting state in which a jackpot game is started by entering a ball into a specific area (operating prize opening). If this ball entry standby flag 203j is ON, it means that the game is in the big win standby state, and if it is OFF, it means that the game is not in the big win standby state. This entry standby flag 203j is set to ON when a special symbol lottery results in a big win and the variation time of the variation pattern corresponding to the big win has passed. Also, the ball entry standby flag 203j is set to OFF when a game ball enters the operation winning hole during the jackpot standby state. While this ball entry standby flag 203j is on, the ball entry into the operation winning opening is treated as valid (when the entry ball is detected, the jackpot is started).

The jackpot start flag 203k is a flag indicating whether or not to start a jackpot. If the big win start flag 203k is ON, it means that it is time to start a big win, and if it is OFF, it means that it is not time to start a big win. The big win start flag 203k is set to ON when a special symbol indicating that the result of the special symbol lottery is a big win is stopped and displayed. Also, the jackpot start flag 203k is set to OFF when the jackpot start is set.

The jackpot flag 203m is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot (special game state) is in progress. If the big-hit flag 203m is on, it means that the big-hit is in progress, and if it is off, it means that the big-hit is not in progress. The jackpot middle flag 203m is set to ON when a jackpot (special game state) is started when a special symbol lottery results in a jackpot. In addition, it is set to OFF at the end of the jackpot (special game state). In the special symbol variation process, this big-hit flag 203m is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the game is in the middle of a big-hit game.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

Thus, the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 is provided with various counters and flags.

Returning to FIG. 135, the description is continued. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for opening and closing driving to the front side and a solenoid for driving the electric accessory 64a is connected. Send a signal.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and continuous advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Details of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will now be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 142(a) is a block diagram showing the configuration of the ROM 222. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 142(a), the ROM 222 is provided with at least a variation pattern table 222a, a winning percentage selection table 222b, a lucky point selection table 222c, a gauge rise lottery table 222d, and an additional lottery table 222e. there is

The variation pattern table 222a is used to specify the detailed display mode of the variation effect based on the rough display mode (variation time) of the variation effect selected by referring to the variation pattern selection table 202d in the main controller 110. be done. More specifically, when a variation pattern command for notifying the display mode selected by main controller 110 is received, one variation pattern (variation The detailed display mode of the effect) is extracted (specified) (see S5205 in FIG. 174). Of the variation patterns defined in this variation pattern table 222a, for variation patterns corresponding to super reach with a variation time of at least 60 seconds, it is determined whether or not to execute the above-described battle production (see FIGS. 127 and 128). It also contains information to show

The win rate selection table 222b is a data table referred to for determining the upper limit of the battle win rate indicating the effect result of the battle effect executed during the normal symbol high probability state. The details of the winning rate selection table 222b will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the contents defined in the win percentage selection table 222b. As shown in FIG. 143, the win rate selection table 222b defines the upper limit of the battle win rate in correspondence with the determined jackpot type and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f.

Here, the above-described battle effect is executed when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol variation during the period in which the battle mode is set, and different effects depending on the game situation. This is an effect in which the result is displayed. Specifically, when a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected for a special symbol lottery that wins a big hit, the effect result of "win" is selected, and the variation time is 60 seconds for a special symbol lottery that wins. When the second variation pattern is selected, it determines whether the time saving end condition is satisfied or not, and if it is determined that the time saving state ends with this special pattern variation, the result of "defeat" is the time saving state When it is determined that is not finished, the effect result of "Continue" is displayed.

In other words, during the variable state, it is configured so that "defeat" is not set as the production result of the battle production, and during the time saving state, "defeat" is set in the variable production corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation that ends the time saving state. It is configured so that In other words, when the variable probability state is set, it is more difficult to select “defeat” as the result of the battle production than when the time saving state is set, and as a result, “victory” is more likely to be set. .

In this way, whether or not to win in the battle production (whether to lose) is determined according to the actually set game state, so the winning percentage by the battle production is determined based on the jackpot type. Then, the winning rate addition effect (point acquisition effect during the jackpot game (see FIG. 121(b)) with the determined winning rate as the upper limit value, and the winning rate UP effect executed during the winning rate UP zone (see FIGS. 124 and 125). ), it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in the first control example, the battle effect is executed when the fluctuation time of the special symbol fluctuation executed during the battle mode is 60 seconds, and the fluctuation pattern scenario selection table 202e ( 140), the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation is selected using different variation pattern tables according to the determined jackpot type.

Then, the ease with which a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is selected differs depending on the type of variation pattern table to be referred to. That is, when a variation pattern is selected with reference to a variation pattern table in which a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is difficult to be selected, it is possible to make it difficult for the battle effect to appear during the battle mode. Furthermore, the variation pattern table in which it is difficult to select a variation pattern with a variation time of 60 seconds is easier to refer to when the probability variation state is set as the game state than when the time saving state is set. Configure. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, in this control example, as information for indicating the degree of expectation that the production result of the battle production is "victory", the production is configured to execute the production showing the "win rate" numerically. For example, an effect indicating information for indicating the degree of expectation that the effect result of the battle effect will not be "defeat", that is, the degree of expectation that the effect result will be "victory" or "continuation" is executed. Also, in this case, the battle effect in which the effect result is "continued", that is, the state in which the variation pattern table is referred to, in which the variation pattern of 60 seconds is likely to be selected in the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied, In order to show a higher degree of expectation than the state in which the variation pattern table is referred to, it is difficult to select the variation pattern of 60 seconds in the battle performance where the performance result is "continuous", that is, the special symbol variation in which the time saving end condition is not satisfied. It is good to set the contents of the production.

A detailed explanation of the contents defined in the variation pattern scenario selection table 202e will be given. If the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39", the winning rate (upper limit) is "50% or less", and in the range of "40 to 79", the winning rate (upper limit) is "60% to 89%". However, "100%" is defined as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "80 to 94", and "90 to 99%" is defined as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "95" to "99". .

In addition, when the jackpot type is "jackpot A2", that is, when it is a jackpot type in which the probability is variable and the battle effect is difficult to be executed during the battle mode, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 39". "100%" as the (upper limit), "90% to 99%" as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "40 to 79", "60" as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "80 to 94" % to 89%”, and “up to 59%” as the winning rate (upper limit) within the range of “95” to “99”.

When the jackpot type is "jackpot B1, C1, D1", that is, when it is a jackpot type in which the battle production is likely to be executed in the time-saving state and in the battle mode, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 39". The win rate (upper limit) is "~59%", the win rate (upper limit) is "~59%" in the range of "40-79", and the win rate (upper limit) is in the range "80-94". 60% to 89%”, and “90% to 99%” as the winning rate (upper limit) within the range of “95” to “99”.

In addition, when the jackpot type is “jackpot B2, C2”, that is, when it is a jackpot type in which the battle production is difficult to be executed in the time-saving state and in the battle mode, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is in the range of “0 to 39”. Winning rate (upper limit) is "~59%", Winning rate (upper limit) is in the range of "40-79", Winning rate (upper limit) is "60%-89%", Winning rate (upper limit) is in the range of "80-94" "90% to 99%" is defined as the range, and "90% to 99%" is defined as the winning rate (upper limit) in the range of "95" to "99".

Furthermore, when the jackpot type is "jackpot D2", that is, when it is a jackpot type in which the battle production is difficult to be executed in the time-saving state and in the battle mode, the value of the acquired production counter 223f is within the range of "0 to 39". (upper limit) is "~59%", "40-79" as the winning rate (upper limit) "90%-99%", "80-94" as the winning rate (upper limit) " 60% to 89%”, and “up to 59%” as the winning rate (upper limit) within the range of “95” to “99”.

As described above, the winning rate selection table 222b is configured so that the winning rate (upper limit) "100%" is selected only for the jackpot type in which the variable probability state is set. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the result of the battle effect is "lost" even though the battle winning percentage is displayed as 100%.

In addition, the jackpot types (jackpot A2, jackpot B2, jackpot C2, jackpot D2) that refer to the variation pattern table in which the battle production is difficult to execute are more likely to execute the battle production. A1, jackpot B1, jackpot C1, jackpot D1) are configured to facilitate selection of a higher win rate (90 to 99%, etc.). That is, when a jackpot type (jackpot A2, jackpot B2, jackpot C2, jackpot D2) that refers to a variation pattern table that makes it difficult to execute a battle production is selected, the production result for the appearance rate of the entire battle production Since the proportion of the battle production in which is “winning” is high, it is configured so that a high winning rate is likely to be selected.

By configuring in this way, the winning percentage displayed when the battle effect is executed can be easily associated with the effect result of the actual battle effect. It is possible to make the player interested in the effect that the winning rate displayed in .

Furthermore, in the first control example, a higher winning rate (upper limit value) is configured to be easily selected. In other words, when the number of times of saving time is set, the number of special symbol lotteries that are executed until the battle production where the production result is "defeat" is executed (until the time saving state ends) is increased. , In the meantime, the possibility of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery increases. Therefore, when the time-saving state is set, the time-saving jackpot in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied is configured to make it easier to select a higher winning rate than the time-saving jackpot in which the time-saving end condition is easy to be satisfied. By doing so, it is possible to easily associate the winning percentage displayed when the battle effect is executed with the effect result of the actual battle effect. The player can be interested in the performance that increases the winning rate.

In addition, in this control example, as the time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the fluctuation number end condition that is established when the special symbol lottery is executed a predetermined number of times is set, but other time saving end conditions are provided. Alternatively, for example, it may be possible to set a lottery result termination condition that is established when the number of times the special symbol lottery result becomes a specific lottery result reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, twice).

In this control example, "jackpot A1" to "jackpot A3" can be set as the jackpot type for which the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends, but when "jackpot A3" is set as the jackpot type. is configured to set an effect mode (shortened mode) in which the battle effect is not executed after the end of the jackpot game. Therefore, the win rate selection table 222b does not define a value corresponding to the "jackpot A3".

The lucky point selection table 222c is a data table referred to when determining the value of the lucky point to be added and displayed during the normal symbol high probability state. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the value (the value stored in the upper limit point storage area 223q) determined as the upper limit value of the lucky points to be added and displayed during the high probability state of the normal symbol, and the currently displayed value. The difference value from the value of the lucky point (the value stored in the display point storage area 223r), the number of times of short remaining time (short time remaining), and the jackpot type (jackpot type set when the previous jackpot was won) ), and the value of the lucky points to be added and displayed in the addition display effect is defined.

In this control example, during the period in which the high probability state of normal symbols is set, the effect of adding and displaying lucky points is executed, and when the lucky points reach 100P, the variable probability state It is configured to be able to notify the player of the setting. That is, when the time saving state is set, the lucky points are configured so as not to reach 100P. By configuring in this way, it is suppressed that the lucky points reach 100P except when the variable probability state is set.

However, even if the time saving state is set, if the addition display performance is not executed so that the lucky points reach around 100P during the time saving state, the currently set game state is displayed for the player. There is a problem that it is immediately determined whether the is in the probability variable state or the time saving state, and the production effect of the addition display production in which the addition display of the lucky points is executed is reduced.

Therefore, in the first control example, the value determined as the upper limit (the value stored in the upper limit point storage area 223q) and the currently displayed lucky point value (stored in the display point storage area 223r) The value of the lucky point to be given in the addition display effect is determined based on the difference value between the remaining time and the number of remaining time reduction (short remaining time).

By configuring in this way, even when the time saving state is set with a small number of times of time saving (for example, 30 times), the lucky points can be easily reached to around 100 (up to the upper limit) during the time saving state. be able to.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 configured to be able to set a plurality of time-saving states with different times of time-savings set as in the first control example, the lucky point reaches near 100 (up to the upper limit) during time-saving. When the effect mode of the addition display effect is determined so as to make it easier, the addition display effect is executed in which the addition degree of the lucky points is clearly different according to the set number of times of time saving. Therefore, there is a possibility that a new problem arises in that the game state is easily determined by the player depending on the effect content of the addition display effect that is executed.

On the other hand, in the first control example, an effect pattern can be set in the addition display effect executed when the variable probability state is set. Specifically, even in a probability variable state in which a high probability state of normal patterns continues until the next big win is won, a value for performance can be set as a value of the number of times of remaining time reduction (short time remaining time), and the number of times of time reduction is 30. A performance pattern in which lucky points are added at the same degree of addition as in the time-saving state in which times are set, a performance pattern in which lucky points are added at the same degree of addition as in the time-saving state in which the number of time-savings is set to 50 times, and 80 times of time-savings. It is possible to set a performance pattern in which the lucky points are added at the same degree of addition as in the time saving state in which the times are set.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the addition display effect in the variable probability state with the same degree of addition (addition mode) as when the time saving state is set, the player can receive the addition display effect It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the current game state based on the performance contents.

In addition, in the first control example, the addition display effect can be executed with a performance pattern that can be executed when the time saving state of the number of times of time saving different from the number of times of time saving of the time saving state actually set is set. ing. Specifically, when the time saving state of the time saving number of times 50 times is set, at a rate of about 80%, the production pattern corresponding to the time saving number of times 50 times, that is, when the special symbol variation is executed 50 times A production pattern of addition display production is set so that the lucky point reaches the upper limit value, and the production pattern corresponding to the number of times of time reduction of 30 times is set at a rate of about 10%, and the number of times of time reduction is 80 times at a rate of about 10%. It is configured so that a corresponding production pattern is set.

By configuring in this way, since the addition display effect of adding the lucky points toward the timing different from the timing when the time saving end condition is actually satisfied is executed, it is difficult for the player to grasp the number of remaining time saving times. can do. Furthermore, although the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times, when the addition display effect is executed in the same effect pattern as when the number of times of time saving is set to 30 times, the 30th special symbol variation is completed. Since the high-probability state of the normal pattern is continued even after the game, the player can be made to think that the probability variable state is set instead of the time-saving state of 30 time-saving times. In addition, although the number of times of time saving is set to 50 times, when the addition display effect is executed in the same effect pattern as when the number of times of time saving is set to 80 times, the lucky point reaches around 100. Since the time-saving state ends before the time, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp when the time-saving state ends, and an unexpected performance can be provided.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, as the upper limit value of the lucky point during the time saving state, a value around 100 is set as the upper limit value, and a value that is significantly different from 100 (for example, around 50 ) is set as the upper limit value. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp when the time saving state will end, and it is possible to provide an unexpected effect.

The gauge increase lottery table 222d is a data table that is referred to when executing an increase lottery to determine whether or not to raise the spirit gauge KG in the operation effect (long press effect) described above with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131. be. Although detailed illustration is omitted, the propriety of the increase lottery is defined in correspondence with the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, and an effect mode is set to increase the spirit gauge KG when winning the increase lottery. be. This gauge rise lottery table 222d changes the value of the production counter 223f corresponding to the rise lottery according to the stage number of the variable mode in the production being executed, the current variable stage, and the result (whether or not) of the special symbol lottery. It is stipulated to be different, and it is stipulated that the higher the number of stages that can be raised from the current variable stage, the easier it is to win the rising lottery when the special symbol lottery is won. there is

The additional lottery table 222e is a data table referred to when determining the effect mode of the additional effect when the condition for executing the additional effect is established during the jackpot game. In this first control example, as the effect mode of the additional effect, an additional effect for liveliness (see FIG. 122(b)) and an additional effect for increasing the winning rate of the battle effect to be executed later (FIG. 121(b) ) and are configured to be executable. That is, the benefit (advantage degree) provided to the player differs depending on the effect mode of the additional effect selected with reference to the additional lottery table 222e.

Next, details of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 142(b). FIG. 142(b) is a block diagram showing the defined contents of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 142(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, a fluctuation start flag 223c, a stop type selection flag 223d, and a valid A period timer 223e, an effect counter 223f, an effect information storage area 223g, an additional effect information storage area 223h, a variable win rate flag 223i, an upper limit win rate storage area 223j, a display win rate storage area 223k, and a lottery number counter 223m. , a fixed flag 223n, a high probability flag 223p, an upper limit point storage area 223q, a display point storage area 223r, a press timer 223s, a long press flag 223t, a press release flag 223u, a continuous hit effect flag 223v, an upper limit At least a gauge amount storage area 223w, a gauge counter 223x, a time saving number counter 223y, a state storage area 223aa, and an arrival flag 223ab are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. In the pachinko machine 10, when the main controller 110 detects the starting winning, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 obtained according to the starting winning. From, various information obtained when the lottery of the special pattern corresponding to the starting winning prize is carried out (won or not, stop type, variation pattern) is predicted (estimated) in the main controller 110, the predicted various information is , is notified from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 by means of the winning information command.

When the winning information command is received, the audio lamp control device 113 extracts the various information (win/fail, stop type, variation pattern) notified by the winning information command as winning information. It is stored in the storage area 223a. More specifically, the extracted winning information is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the four open areas (1st to 4th areas). be done. That is, the smaller the area number is, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning.

The special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is similar to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110, the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81), which is a variable effect (variable display) performed in the main control unit 110, and is a counter that counts the number of pending balls (standby count) of the variable effect suspended in the main controller 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 203f value cannot be obtained. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the number of reserved balls command transmitted from the main controller 110, and manages the number of reserved balls by the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b. It's becoming

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of holding balls of the variation display is added by the ball entering the first entrance 64, or when the first special symbol variation is executed in the main controller 110 When the number of reserved balls is subtracted, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113. In addition, when the number of pending balls in the variation display is added by entering the second ball entrance 640, or when the second special symbol variation is executed in the main controller 110 and the number of pending balls is subtracted , Sends a pending ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol pending ball number counter 203f after addition or subtraction to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command. The value of the ball number counter 203f is acquired and stored in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b (see S4408 in FIG. 166). Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, since the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is updated, the first special symbol reserved ball of the main controller 110 The value can be updated while synchronizing with the number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f.

The value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b after the storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of , a command for the number of pending balls for display is transmitted to the display control device 114 .

When the display control device 114 receives the display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the reserved ball number corresponding to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 The drawing of the image is controlled so that the pattern is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. Therefore, the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main controller 110. can be changed while synchronizing with Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on when a fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4402 in FIG. 166), and is turned off when the fluctuation display in the third pattern display device 81 is set. (See S5203 in FIG. 174). When the fluctuation start flag 223c is turned on, a fluctuation pattern command for display is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed in the command output processing of the main processing executed by the MPU 221 (see S4002 in FIG. 162). It is sent to controller 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223d is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S4405 in FIG. 166), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (see S5217 in FIG. 174). When the stop type selection flag 223d is turned on, the stop type is set based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command (see S5219 in FIG. 174).

The valid period timer 223e is a timer for measuring an operation valid period in which the operation of the frame button 22 by the player can be effectively determined. While the effective period timer 223e is measuring the period (while the value of the effective period timer 223e is greater than 0), it means that the operation is in the effective period, and the effective period timer 223e is not measuring the period. If not (if the value of the validity period timer 223e is 0), it means that the operation validity period has not expired. This effective period timer 223e is set with a value corresponding to the operation effective period of the operation effect executed when it is determined that the start timing of the operation effect (long press effect) executed as the variable effect has come. Then, in the effect update process (see S4011 in FIG. 165) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the audio lamp control device 113, the value of the effective period timer 223e is updated (subtracted) ( See S4303 in FIG. 165). Then, in the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4007 in FIG. 163), it is referred to when determining whether or not the current operation valid period is in effect (S4101 in FIG. 163).

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for selection of variation patterns, selection of various effects, and the like. This effect counter 223f is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 99, and is updated by adding 1 each time the main process (see FIG. 162) is executed. . The effect counter 223f has a separate counter for each type of effect.

The effect information storage area 223g is a storage area for temporarily storing the details of the effect executed (set) by the pachinko machine 10, for example, the effect executed during the jackpot game. Information indicating the content (effect information) is stored, and is referred to when setting the effect mode after the end of the jackpot game.

In this control example, when a variable probability jackpot is won, a second period after the first period (for example, the jackpot game ends) according to the contents of the effect executed during the first period (for example, during the jackpot game) After), it is configured to determine the effect mode of the effect to be executed. More specifically, in the case of winning a variable probability jackpot, if it is reported that the current jackpot is a variable probability jackpot by the end of the jackpot game (until the end of the first period), in the second period If the effect of informing the player that it is in a probability variable state is executed, and it is not notified that the current jackpot is a probability variable jackpot until the end of the jackpot game (until the end of the first period), In the second period, a suggestive effect for suggesting whether or not the current game state is the variable probability state is executed.

In this way, according to the content of the effect executed during the first period (for example, during the jackpot game), the effect of the effect executed during the second period after the first period (for example, after the jackpot game is finished) By configuring so as to determine the mode, after executing a notification effect for clearly notifying the player of the specific information (information indicating the game state), the content regarding the specific information (information indicating the game state) is displayed. It is possible to suppress the execution of the suggestion effect that suggests.

The additional effect information storage area 223h is a storage area for temporarily storing information indicating the content (type) of the additional effect executed during the jackpot game, and the additional effect is executed during the jackpot game. Information indicating the content (type) of the additional effect to be executed is stored each time. Then, when a new additional effect is executed, the information stored in the additional effect information storage area 223h is read, and the addition to be newly executed is performed based on the read information and the predetermined effect condition. A production mode of the production is determined.

Also, in this control example, if the timing at which the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied is within the period in which the additional effect is already being executed, , is configured to regulate the execution of new additional effects. In this case, the content of the additional effect whose execution is restricted is also stored in the additional effect information storage area 223h. In other words, the contents (types) of the set additional effects can be stored by distinguishing between the executed additional effects and the non-executed additional effects.

With this configuration, when a new additional effect can be executed, the additional effect is executed based on the information indicating the non-executed additional effect stored in the additional effect information storage area 223h, When the conditions for executing the additional performance are met, the additional performance can be executed in a performance mode in which the contents of the information indicating the non-executed additional performance stored in the additional performance information storage area 223h are also added. .

The variable winning rate flag 223i is a flag for indicating that the winning rate for the battle effect is variable, and is set to ON when the winning rate is variable (addable). On the other hand, when the win rate cannot be added, that is, when the win rate has already reached the upper limit, the setting is turned off. As a result, the control for varying the winning percentage can be appropriately executed within the period in which the winning percentage can be varied.

The upper limit win rate storage area 223j is a storage area for storing the upper limit value that can be displayed in the display effect for increasing the win rate in the battle effect, and is a mid-win effect that is executed when the jackpot game is started. In the setting process (see S4502 in FIG. 168), when it is determined that the battle effect is to be executed after the jackpot game ends (S4601 in FIG. 168: No), the upper limit determined with reference to the win rate selection table 222b The winning percentage (upper limit of displayed winning percentage) is stored (S4605 in FIG. 168).

Then, in the additional performance mode setting process (see S5009 in FIG. 173) executed when the execution condition for the additional performance during the jackpot game is met (S5008 in FIG. 172: Yes), the performance mode for the additional performance is determined. The information (upper limit win rate) stored at the time is referred to. Also, in the winning rate UP zone effect setting process (see S5305 in FIG. 176) executed during the winning rate UP zone after the end of the jackpot game, the information (upper limit win rate ) is referenced.

The display winning percentage storage area 223k is a storage area for temporarily storing information for indicating a variable displayed winning percentage (display winning percentage) during a period in which the winning percentage of the battle effect can be variably displayed. 0% is stored as the value. Then, when the execution condition of the additional effect during the jackpot game is established (S5008 of FIG. 172: Yes), the additional effect mode setting process (see S5009 of FIG. 173) and the win rate UP zone after the end of the jackpot game are performed. Information for indicating the effect mode of the additional effect (increased winning rate) set in the effect setting process for the winning rate UP zone (see S5305 in FIG. 176) executed in .

As a result, it is possible to appropriately manage the displayed winning percentage that is currently being displayed. In this control example, information indicating the increased display winning percentage is stored in the display winning percentage storage area 223k. Information indicating the difference (so-called increase) from the next displayed win rate may be stored in the display win rate storage area 223k.

The lottery number counter 223m is a counter for measuring the number of lotteries for determining whether or not to execute the additional effect executed during the jackpot game, and when the lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect is executed. The counter value is incremented by one. Then, in the effect mode variable processing (see S4508 in FIG. 170) executed when the round game ends, the value of the counter is read, and when it is determined that the value of the lottery number counter 223m is less than 1 (S4804 in FIG. 170: Yes), the high probability flag 223p is set to ON. Then, the value of the counter is cleared to 0 each time the round game ends.

In other words, if the lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect is not executed even once during one round game, the lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect is executed during the next round game. When executed, it is configured to win with a high probability. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the additional effect is not executed during the jackpot game.

In this control example, as described above, when the lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect is not executed, that is, during the round game, the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 provided in the right area. When the ball is not played and no over-winning to the specific winning port 65a occurs, the lottery for whether or not to execute the additional performance in the next round game is configured to be won with a high probability. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the number of times the effect mode that increases the winning rate is selected as the effect mode of the additional effect is a predetermined number of times (for example, once) or less in one round game, the following A lottery for whether or not to execute the additional performance may be won with a high probability in the round game, or a performance mode for increasing the winning rate may be easily selected as the performance mode of the additional performance.

In addition, in this control example, according to the game content in one round game content, it is configured to vary the execution probability of the additional effect during the next round game, but not limited to this, multiple times The execution probability of the additional effect during the next round game may be varied according to the game content in the round game. In this case, for example, instead of resetting the value of the lottery number counter 223m for each round game, it may be configured to reset when a specific round game ends. Furthermore, in this control example, when additional effects are not executed during the jackpot game (the number of executions is small), a situation in which the additional effects are likely to be executed can be created, so that the additional effects are executed during the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, the more additional effects are executed during the jackpot game (the more the number of executions), the more additional effects are executed. It may be configured to facilitate creation of an easy situation. As a result, the player can be motivated to play the game to execute the additional effect.

The definite flag 223n is a flag for indicating a state in which it is reported that the probability variable jackpot has been won, and is set to ON when it is notified that the probability variable jackpot has been won. Specifically, it is set to ON when the variable probability symbol ("777") for notifying the variable probability symbol as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed. Then, when setting various effects during the jackpot game, the setting status of the confirmation flag 223n is discriminated, and when it is determined that it is set to ON, the probability variable jackpot is indicated or the probability variable jackpot is celebrated. set.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is set to OFF, a game state suggestion effect (additional effect for increasing the winning rate, etc.) for suggesting the game state to be set after the jackpot game ends for the player. executed. In addition, the setting state of the flag is discriminated also in the winning effect ending process (see S4510 in FIG. 171) for setting the effect mode after the jackpot game ends, and the effect mode corresponding to the setting situation is set. As a result, it is possible to set the aspect of the performance executed after the end of the big win game in correspondence with the presence or absence of the variable probability big win notification. This confirmation flag 223n is set to OFF after determining (setting) the aspect of the effect to be executed after the end of the jackpot game.

The high-probability flag 223p is a flag for indicating that the lottery for whether or not to execute the additional effect is won with a high probability, and is set to ON when the winning probability is in a high-probability state. . On the other hand, when the winning probability is in the normal state, it is set to OFF. In this control example, according to the game contents during the jackpot game, the execution frequency of the additional effect is configured to be variable. is easily executed (the high probability flag 223p is set to ON). By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the additional effect is not executed during the jackpot game.

The upper limit point storage area 223q is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value that can be displayed in the lucky point addition display effect, and is executed in the time saving effect mode setting process (see S5208 in FIG. 175). In the effect setting process after the first time (see S5309 in FIG. 177), the determined upper limit number of lucky points is stored (S5508 in FIG. 177). Then, based on the difference value from the value of the currently displayed lucky point, the content of the effect for adding the lucky point is determined.

The display point storage area 223r is a storage area for storing the value of the lucky points displayed (displayed) on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 by executing the lucky point addition display effect. , the value corresponding to the display point added in the time saving effect mode setting process (see S5208 in FIG. 175) is stored. In this control example, the display point storage area 223r has a display point counter, and the value of the display point counter is added and updated in correspondence with the added value. Then, when the period during which the lucky point addition display effect is executed ends, the information (the value of the display point counter) stored in the display point storage area 223r is cleared to zero.

The press timer 223s is a timer for measuring the period during which the frame button 22 is pressed. When the frame button 22 is pressed, the press timer 223s starts to measure. Then, in the effect update process (see S4306 in FIG. 165) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the timer is updated (S4307 in FIG. 165), When the value of the timer is updated to the value corresponding to 2 seconds, the long press flag 223t indicating that the button is being pressed for a long time is set to ON. As described above, instead of determining that the long-pressing operation is performed immediately after the frame button 22 is pressed, the long-pressing operation is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed for a predetermined period of time. By configuring to determine that the frame button 22 ) can be easily increased in variations of the operation presentation.

The long press flag 223t is a flag for indicating that the player is performing a long press operation on the frame button 22, and is set to ON when the long press operation is being performed. Then, when the player releases the frame button 22 while the long press flag 223t is set to ON, that is, when the operation of the frame button 22 is not detected, the flag is set to OFF.

The pressing release flag 223u is a flag for indicating that the player has released the operation of the frame button 22 during the long pressing operation. It is set to ON when the button 22 is released. Then, it is referred to when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected, and is set to OFF when the depression of the frame button 22 is detected while the depression release flag 223u is set to ON.

In this control example, if the player releases the frame button 22 after the long-pressing operation is executed within the operation valid period 1, the effect to encourage the long-pressing operation to the frame button 22 is continued. It is configured to execute an effect that prompts the user to operate the frame button 22 by a different operation method instead of executing it by pressing the button. Here, by using the press release flag 223u, it is possible to reliably detect the state in which the player releases the frame button 22 after the long press operation is executed within one operation valid period. It is possible to execute an effect that prompts a repeated hit effect.

The repeated hitting effect flag 223v is a flag for indicating that an effect for prompting a repeated hitting effect is being executed in one operation valid period, and is set to ON when the repeated hitting effect is being executed. Then, when an operation to the frame button 22 is detected, it is determined whether the repeated hit effect flag 223v is set to ON, and if it is set to ON, an operation effect corresponding to the repeated hit effect is executed. be. On the other hand, when it is set to OFF, processing for detecting a long-pressing operation (processing for measuring pressing time by the pressing timer 223s) is executed.

The upper limit gauge amount storage area 223w is a storage area for temporarily storing the upper limit value determined as the upper limit amount capable of raising the spirit gauge KG in the operation effect, and is used in the variable display setting process (FIG. 174). (see S4013)), the upper limit amount is determined based on the result of the corresponding special symbol lottery, and the determined upper limit amount is stored. Then, it is referred to when determining whether or not to increase the gauge amount during the operation presentation.

The gauge counter 223x is a counter for indicating stage information of the fighting spirit gauge KG which is varied in the operation effect, and the value of the counter is incremented by one each time the display mode of the fighting spirit gauge KG changes (increases). In this control example, the display mode of the spirit gauge KG can be varied (increased) in a maximum of five stages, and the value of the gauge counter 223x is updated to a value corresponding to the number of variable stages of the spirit gauge KG. (addition) is configured to be possible. As a result, it is possible to properly determine the level information of the spirit gauge KG that is actually displayed.

The time saving number counter 223y is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the special design variation executed during the time saving state, and the value of the counter is changed every time the special design variation is performed during the high probability state of the normal design. It is configured to be incremented by 1. Then, referring to the value of the time saving number counter 223y, an effect is executed to suggest to the player whether or not the current game state is a state in which the number of special symbol fluctuations satisfies the time saving end condition. ing.

The state storage area 223aa is a storage area for storing the set game state, and when the game state is changed, the changed game state is stored. Then, it is referred to when determining which game state the current game state is.

The reach flag 223ab is a flag for indicating that the lucky point value has reached a predetermined value (100P), and is set to ON when the lucky point value has reached the predetermined value (100P). Then, it is set to OFF when the jackpot is won. While the arrival flag 223ab is set to ON, the processing for adding the value of the lucky points is skipped.

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 166) of the audio ramp processing device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and continuous announcement production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later with reference to FIG.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 157).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, referring to FIG. 144, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 144 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this control example, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this control example, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. to store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address assigned to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash memory 234d) and stored in the buffer RAM 234c. Set once. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR flash memory 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND flash memory 234a. 2 kilobytes). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR flash memory 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed first.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d is stored in one of the buffer RAMs 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234, while the address specified by the bus line 240 is the address pointing to the program stored in the NOR flash memory 234d, is previously set to the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR flash memory 234d. The instruction code of the corresponding address in the program is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this control example, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234a. The reason for storing in the memory 234d is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, the NOR flash memory 234d is a memory from which data can be read at high speed. By storing in the memory 234d, when the address "0000H" is designated from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

Now, the boot program is the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d. Programs and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the program and its control program are stored in the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to the storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, the MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed to be included, and the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S8002 in FIG. 180) executed after the boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 180) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the command pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are stored. can reliably transfer the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a very small capacity NOR flash memory 234d. can do.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 149) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c to be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process during the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 182(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

Thus, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction are transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by transferring the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 can perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In addition, in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by the player while the main image at power-on is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect when the selection is made.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S8003 and S8004 in FIG. 180).

Here, the power-on variation image will be described with reference to FIG. 145 . FIG. 145 shows the power on display displayed on the third symbol display device 81 while the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is being transferred from the character ROM 234 immediately after the display control device 114 is powered on. It is an explanatory view explaining a time image.

Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to perform the power-on main image shown in FIG. 145(a). The image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays FIG. 145(c), on the display screen of the main image at power-on, a variation image at power-on with a "○" pattern at the lower right position of the screen, and a "○" at power-on as shown in FIG. 145(c). A power-on fluctuation image of an "x" pattern is alternately and repeatedly displayed at the same position as the pattern during the fluctuation period. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. Judging the result, if it is a "special design jackpot", the image shown in FIG. The image shown is displayed for a certain period of time after the stop of the variable effect.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like at the time of manufacture, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. 145(b) and (c) are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to do so. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description continues. The back image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. Here, with reference to FIG. 146, the rear image and the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c among the rear images will be described. FIG. 146 is an explanatory diagram for explaining two kinds of back images and the range of the back images stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 for each back image. FIG. 146(b) shows the back surface A corresponding to the "sand beach stage" and the back surface B corresponding to the "deep sea stage".

As shown in FIG. 146, the character ROM 234 prepares back images corresponding to the back surfaces A and B, which are longer in the horizontal direction than the display area displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . The image controller 237 draws the image so that the back image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 while scrolling the image horizontally from left to right.

The images prepared for each back surface A and B (hereinafter referred to as "scrolling images") are configured such that the back images are continuous at positions a and c. The image between position c and position d and the image between position a and position a' are composed of images corresponding to the horizontal width of the display area, and the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area, and then the third pattern display device 81 displays an image between the position a and the position a' as the display area. The background image is scrolled in a continuous manner.

When the player operates the frame button 22 to change the stage to the "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage", the MPU 231 shifts the corresponding rear image from position a to position a' to the initial position of the display area. , and controls the image controller 237 so that the image at the initial position is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Then, as time elapses, the display area is moved from left to right with respect to the scroll image, and the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is sequentially displayed on the third pattern display device 81. When the area reaches the image between position c and position d, the image controller 237 is controlled so that the display area is again displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as an image from position a to position a'. Therefore, the third pattern display device 81 can display the images between the positions a to c by repeatedly scrolling them in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Next, for each rear image, the range of the rear image stored in the rear image area 235c will be described. As shown in FIG. 146(a), the rear surface A corresponding to the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, has all the image data corresponding to the entire range of the rear surface A, that is, from position a to position d. It is stored in the image area 235c. Normally, the game is often played without changing the stage while the sandy beach stage, which is the initial stage, is displayed. 235c, the number of data accesses to the character ROM 234 can be reduced, and the load on the display control device 114 can be reduced.

On the other hand, for the back surface B corresponding to the deep-sea stage, as shown in FIG. back image area 235c.

Here, the operation of the frame button 22 performed by the player to change the stage is performed at arbitrary timing based on the player's will. In order to change the rear image immediately, it is ideal to keep the entire range of image data for all rear images resident in the resident video RAM 235. A large-capacity RAM must be used, which may lead to an increase in cost.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the initial position of the back image that is displayed first when the stage is changed is fixed in the range from position a to position a', and the position from position a including the initial position is fixed. Since the image data corresponding to the image during b is stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the player can press the frame button. When the stage is changed at any timing by the operation of 22, the image data resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to immediately display the initial position of the back B in the third pattern. It can be displayed on the device 81, and can be displayed while scrolling or changing color tone over time. In addition, since only image data corresponding to a partial range of image is stored for the rear surface B, an increase in storage capacity of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed, and an increase in cost can be suppressed.

After the image of the initial position is displayed on the rear face B, the image data resident in the rear face image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 is used to scroll the range from position a to position b from left to right. The range from the position a to the position b is set so that the image data corresponding to the image from the position b' to the position d can be completely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal RAM 236 during this period. As a result, the image data from position b' to position d can be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 while the range from position a to position b is being scrolled. After scrolling the range from position a to position b by using the image data corresponding to the back image stored in the normal video RAM 236 without delay, the range from position b' to position d is scrolled to the third position. It can be displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

Image data stored in the normal-use video RAM 236 on the back surface B is stored in a sub-area dedicated to the rear-surface image provided in the image storage area 236a (see FIG. 144) of the normal-use video RAM 236. FIG. As a result, the rear image data stored in the sub-area dedicated to the rear image is not overwritten by other image data, so that the rear image can be reliably displayed.

Further, in the back surface B, the image data stored in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 and the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 are images corresponding to images between positions b′ and b. Data is stored redundantly. Under the control of the image controller 237 by the MPU 231, the image up to the position b is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the rear image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, and then the normal video image is displayed. By displaying the image from the position b' on the third pattern display device 81 using the image data stored in the RAM 236, the back image is scrolled and displayed in a smooth connection on the third pattern display device 81. ing.

Further, the MPU 231 uses the image data in the normal video RAM 236 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position c and position d is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as a display area. The MPU 231 uses the image data in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235 to control the image controller 237 so that the image between position a and position a' is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as the display area. do. As a result, the third pattern display device 81 can repeatedly scroll and display the images between the positions a to c in a smooth manner so as to flow toward the left.

Returning to FIG. 144, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above ten types of main patterns (see FIG. 120) imitating the numbers "0" to "9" which are the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, even though the first pattern display device 37 has started the variable performance after the ball enters the first ball entrance 64, the third pattern display device 81 immediately starts the variable performance. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is not possible.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as a fish character 311, a female character 312, and a male character 313 are displayed in accordance with various effects, and data corresponding to these are displayed in the character pattern area 235e. By being resident, when the display control device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, it does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but stores the resident data. By reading out the image data previously resident in the character design area 235e of the video RAM 235, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. This eliminates the need to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are preliminarily resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data previously resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. As a result, it is not necessary to sequentially read the image data corresponding to the error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is predetermined.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including transfer data information in a later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. It is configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, a storage image data discrimination It has at least a flag 233i and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main controller 110. For example, a variable effect, an opening effect, , round effects, ending effects, and demonstration effects are provided.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable performance is started, if the stop type of the variable performance is off, the stop symbol indicating the failure is finally stopped and displayed, and the stop type of the variable performance is the jackpot A or the jackpot B. , the stop symbols indicating the respective jackpots are finally stopped and displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

The opening performance is a performance for informing the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to a special game state from now on and that the specific prize winning port 65a that is normally closed will be repeatedly opened, and the round performance will start from now on. This is an effect for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started. The ending effect notifies the player of the end of the special game state, and notifies the player of the game value (short period of time for normal symbols) given to the player after the end of the big win, or the reserved special symbol. This is an effect for notifying the player that the result of the lottery will be a big win in the lottery.

A player can easily recognize the short period of time of the normal design by informing the short period of time of the normal design in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the normal ball entrance 67, so the chances of lottery for the normal pattern are increased and the chances of winning the normal pattern are also increased. . Therefore, the electric accessary 64a is often opened as a jackpot of the normal symbols, so that the ball is easily entered into the first ball entrance 64, and the lottery of the special symbols is easily performed. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first ball entrance 64 is a prize winning opening in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball is entered, a jackpot of normal symbols is produced, and the electric accessory 64a is released, and the ball is placed in the first position. When it becomes easier to enter the ball entrance 64, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get the expectation that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of sub-patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores display data tables corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect, respectively. In addition, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern and a total of 32 tables. Display data tables corresponding to each game menu screen are also stored in the data table storage area 233b.

Details of the display data table will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 147 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display data table for the variable effect (variation display data table) among the display data tables. The display data table such as the variable display data table is associated with an address that represents the time (in this control example, 20 milliseconds) during which an image for one frame is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content (drawing content) of the image for one frame to be displayed at that time.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for specifying an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect expressing the insertion of a character, characters used for various effects, etc., is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. The type of the back surface is to display either back surface A or B corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "sand beach stage" or "deep sea stage"), or to display a back surface different from back surface A or B. Information specifying whether to display an image is described. In addition, when specifying that a back image different from the back faces A and B is to be displayed, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image is to be displayed.

When the type of back surface specifies that one of the back surfaces A and B is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back image corresponding to the stage designated by the player among the back surfaces A and B as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A and B, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In this control example, only the back face type is specified as the drawing content of the back face image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed according to the back surface type, and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81 display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Rather than directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since each third symbol is assigned a unique number, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily specified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time in which the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player does not recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described at "0000H" which is the top address of the display data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 147) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order specified in the display data table, so the image specified in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114 .

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 148, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 148 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the video RAM 235 for normal use from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 for normal use and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 148). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 148).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 148, "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 149) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 148, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information defined for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. process.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The character ROM 234 can be reliably transferred to the normal video RAM 236 at the desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the timing of starting transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, various effects images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c indicates whether or not to display the power-on images (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIGS. flag to indicate This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on variation image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 (see S8005 in FIG. 180). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S9705 in FIG. 192(b)).

The simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S8301 in FIG. 182(b)). When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination processing (see S8308 in FIG. 182(b)) and the simple display setting processing (see S8308 in FIG. 182(b) S8309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 183 to 188) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S9601 in FIG. 192(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident object image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 192(b)) is executed to transfer the resident object image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 193) is executed to transfer image data necessary for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to commands and the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on commands and the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A later-described drawing list (see FIG. 149) is generated in which the content of the instruction for drawing an image is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 149), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all of the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to that display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data indicating that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is included in a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 149) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the rendering processing of one frame of image is completed (FIG. 182(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S9305 in FIG. 191) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 149), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a drawing list that instructs H.237.

Details of the drawing list will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 149 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (pattern) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and develops the drawn sprites in the frame buffer by overwriting. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the first drawn sprite is placed on the backmost side (backmost drawing layer), and the last drawn sprite is placed on the frontmost side (foremost drawing layer). can be placed in When the comment display function is turned on, the image arranged on the foremost side (the foremost drawing layer) is a character image forming the comment. By arranging the comment on the foremost side (the foremost drawing hierarchy), the player can visually recognize the comment more clearly.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this control example) on the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see (b )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S9307 in FIG. 189). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation in accordance with the completion of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233i is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233i is generated by initial setting processing (see S8002 in FIG. 180) executed by the MPU 231 in the main processing when power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 193) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 (see S9813 in FIG. 193). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S9814 in FIG. 193). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j selects a frame buffer for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 (hereinafter referred to as a "drawing target buffer") from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233j is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. Then, the information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S9902 in FIG. 194).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is done by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the rendering process of the process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed (see S9902 in FIG. 194).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main controller in the first control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 150 to 160. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

FIG. 150 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various prize winning switches are read (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (399 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this control example), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this control example, 399, 99, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104), and the first A starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the ball entrance 64 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the start winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is the process for displaying on the second symbol display device 83, is executed (S106), and the through gate passage process associated with the passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance 67. (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. FIG. After executing the through gate passage processing, the firing control processing is executed (S108), and other processing to be periodically executed is executed (S109), and the timer interrupt processing ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 151, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 151 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether the current state is the jackpot waiting state or the special symbol jackpot (S201). Specifically, it is determined whether any of the entering ball waiting flag 203j and the jackpot flag 203m is ON. As a result of the determination, if it is in the jackpot waiting state or the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

In the process of S201, when it is determined that neither the jackpot standby state nor the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S202). , If the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol) Acquire (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S204). If the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set (S206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S206, the data stored in the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Data is shifted, and the process proceeds to S213.

On the other hand, in the process of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S204: No), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (first (S208), and determines whether or not the acquired value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S209). .

In the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S209, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (that is, is 1 or more) (S209: Yes), the first special symbol reserved ball number The value (N1) of the counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S210), and a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by calculation is set (S211). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the reserved ball number command by the process of S211, the data stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted by the same method as the process of S207 (S212), and the process proceeds to S213. Transition. In the process of S213 executed after the process of S207 or S212, the special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 is performed (S213), and this process is terminated. The details of this special symbol variation start process will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the processing of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), the variable time counter for measuring the variable time is updated (S214), and the updated variable time counter is updated. Based on the value, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display executed in the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S215). The variation time of the variation display executed in the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has not elapsed (S215: No), the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S216), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S215, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S215: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S217). The stop symbols are set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area. More specifically, whether or not the special symbol jackpot is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and in the case of the special symbol jackpot, depending on the value of the first winning type counter C2. Then, one of the jackpots A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2 is determined.

In this embodiment, when the jackpot A1 is reached, the first symbol display device 37 turns on the blue LED, when the jackpot A2 hits, the red LED lights up, and when the jackpot hit A3 , the green LED is lit, and if the jackpot B1 is achieved, the blue and green LEDs are lit, and if the jackpot B2 is achieved, the red LED and the green LED are lit, resulting in the jackpot C1. In this case, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are lit, and in the case of the big win C2, the blue LED, the red LED, and the green LED are lit up, and in the case of the big win D1, A blue LED, a red LED, and a green LED are lit, and when the jackpot D2 is achieved, a blue LED, a red LED, and a green LED are lit. If it is out, the blue LED and the red LED are turned on. The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

After the process of S217 is completed, when the variable display being executed in the first symbol display device 37 is started, the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the special symbol variation start process is It is determined whether or not it is a special symbol jackpot (S218). If the lottery result of this time is a special symbol jackpot (S218: Yes), the variable probability flag 203h is set to OFF, the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is reset to 0 (S219), and the process proceeds to S224.

On the other hand, in the process of S218, if the lottery result of this time is out of the special design (S218: No), whether the value of the time saving medium counter 203i is a value greater than 0 (that is, whether it is a normal working time saving state of the design) ) is determined (S220), and if it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203i is greater than 0 (S220: Yes), the value of the time saving counter 203i is subtracted by 1 (S221), and the process proceeds to S222 do. On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S220 that the value of the counter 203i is 0 (S220: No), the process of S221 is skipped and the process proceeds to S222.

In the process of S222, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving counter 203i after the subtraction is 0 (S222). When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203i is 0 (S222: Yes), a state command indicating that the game state has been changed from the time saving state of the normal design to the normal state of the normal design is set (S223). , and thereafter, the process proceeds to S224. The status command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is output by voice during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201, which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the state command, the sound lamp control device 113 acquires the game state included in the state command. As a result, the state grasped by the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the actual state of the pachinko machine 10 .

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S222 that the value of the counter 203i is not 0 (S222: No), the process of S223 is skipped and the process proceeds to S224.

In the process of S224, a stop command indicating the stop type is set, and this process ends. The stop command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159), which will be described later. It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the state command, the audio lamp control device 113 sets the third symbol as the stop symbol based on the stop type indicated by the stop command.

Next, with reference to FIG. 152, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 152 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and Based on the values of the various counters stored in the execution area of the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (whether or not a special symbol big win) or a "special symbol omission" is made (determination of success or failure), and the first symbol is selected. It is a process for determining the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, each value of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c is obtained (S301).

Next, the variable probability flag 203h is read to determine whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability state of the special symbols (S302). In the process of S302, if the variable probability flag 203h is ON, it is determined that the special symbol is in the variable probability state, and if the variable probability flag 203h is OFF, it is determined as the low probability state (not the variable probability state) of the special symbol. In the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability variable state of the special symbol (S302: Yes), the value of the first per random number counter C1 obtained in the process of S301 and the special symbol for high probability time Based on the big hit random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S303). Specifically, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is compared with the first winning random number table for high probability (see FIG. 137(b)). As described above, 20 random numbers from "0 to 5" are set as the random numbers that become the jackpot of special symbols, and the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the random numbers that become these winnings match. If so, it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

On the other hand, in the process of S302, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol probability variable state (it is in the special symbol low probability state) (S302: No), the first winning random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first winning random number table for low probability (see FIG. 137(b)), the lottery result as to whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is compared with the special symbol jackpot random number table for low probability. When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 coincides with the winning random number value (that is, "0"), it is determined that the special symbol is a jackpot. When the lottery result of the special symbol is obtained, the process proceeds to S305.

In the process of S305, based on the fluctuation pattern scenario selection table 202e (see FIG. 140), the fluctuation pattern table to be used this time is specified (S305), and the process proceeds to S306.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol obtained by the process of S303 or S304 is a special symbol jackpot (S306), and when it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (S306: Yes), Based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301, the display mode at the time of the big hit is set (S307). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 137(c)) to determine what the jackpot type is. do. As described above, in the case of a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is in the range of "0 to 54", it is a big hit A1 (10 rounds probability variable big hit). If it is in the range of "55 to 59", it is determined to be a jackpot A2 (10 rounds variable jackpot), and if it is in the range of "60 to 64", it is a jackpot A3 (10 rounds variable jackpot). If it is in the range of "65 to 69", it is determined to be a jackpot B1 (10 rounds of short time 30 times), and if it is in the range of "70 to 74", it is a jackpot B2 (10 rounds of short time 30 times) ), and if it is in the range of "75 to 84", it is determined to be a jackpot C1 (10 rounds time saving 50 times jackpot), and if it is in the range of "85 to 89", it is a jackpot C2 (10 rounds If it is in the range of "90 to 94", it is determined to be a jackpot D1 (10 rounds, 80 times in a short time). If it is in the range of "95 to 99", it is a big hit. It is determined that it is D2 (10 rounds short time 80 times jackpot) (see FIG. 137(c)). In this control example, even when the second special symbol lottery results in a big hit, the same control processing as in the above-described case of a first special symbol lottery result in a big hit is executed. In the process of S307, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 (the lighting state of the LED 37a) is set according to the determined jackpot type (jackpots A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2). be done. In addition, the jackpot types (jackpots A1 to 3, B1, B2, C1, C2, D1, D2) are set as the stop types in order to stop and display the stop symbols corresponding to the jackpot types on the third symbol display device 81. .

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined (S308). When the variation pattern is set in the processing of S308, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 until it stops with the big winning symbol. A pattern variation time is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d (see FIGS. 138(c) and 139(a) to (c)), and the variation type A variation pattern (variation time) corresponding to the value of the counter CS1 is determined.

On the other hand, in the processing of S306, when it is determined that the special symbol is out (S306: No), the display mode at the time of being out is set (S309). In the process of S309, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the off symbol, and the third symbol is displayed based on the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area 203c. As the stop type to be displayed in the device 81, it is set whether it is a front-rear out-of-reach reach, a reach other than front-rear out-of-order, or a complete out-of-reach.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol probability variable state, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. to set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", set the complete out. , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal state with special symbols, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability, and the stop type is set. do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", set the complete out, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", set the reach other than front and rear out, and set the reach to "98". , 99”, set the front-rear out-of-reach reach.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S310). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the lost symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S308, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is compared with the variation pattern table 202d, and the variation pattern (variation pattern) corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 time).

After the process of S308 or the process of S310 is finished, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined in the process of S308 or S310 is set (S311). Next, a counter value corresponding to the variation time of the current variation pattern is set in the variation time counter (S312). Then, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S307 or S309 is set (S313). These variation pattern command and stop type command are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 and transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 in the process of S901 of the main process (see FIG. 159). When the process of S312 ends, the process returns to the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151).

Next, the starting winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 153 is a flow chart showing this starting winning process (S105). This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first ball entrance 64 and the second ball entrance 640. , when there is a start winning, processing for executing the holding processing of the values indicated by the various counters.

When the starting winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (starting winning) (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entrance 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S402). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64 (S401: No), or even if the game ball has won the first ball entrance 64, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (N1) is not less than 4 (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, there is a winning to the first ball entrance 64 (S401: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the first special 1 is added to the value (N1) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203e (S404). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S405, the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the variation type counter CS1 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above are stored in the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the first special symbol reservation ball storage area 203a (S406), and the process proceeds to S407. In the process of S406, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the second reserved area is the first area, if the value is 2, the third reserved area is the first area, and if the value is 3, the fourth reserved area is the first area.

In the process of S407, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (start winning) (S407). In this process as well, similarly to the process of S401, the ball entering the second ball entrance 640 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the game ball has won the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N2 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is acquired. (S408), it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S409).

Then, there is no winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: No), or even if there is a prize to the second ball entrance 640, the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If it is determined that it is not less than 4 (that is, it is 4) (S409: No), the process proceeds to S413. On the other hand, there is a winning to the second ball entrance 640 (S407: Yes), and if the value (N2) of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S409: Yes), the second special 1 is added to the value (N2) of the symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (S410). Then, a reserved ball number command indicating the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f changed by the calculation is set (S411).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of S411, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2 and the variation type counter CS1 updated in the process of S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is Stored in the first area among the empty reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the second special symbol reservation ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 (S412), and proceeds to the processing of S413. In the process of S412, as in the process of S406, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of S413, a prefetching process for prefetching success or failure from various counter values acquired based on the start winning is executed (S413), and this process is terminated. Details of this prefetch processing will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 154 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S413). In this look-ahead processing (S413), first, it is determined whether or not a new ball entering the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 has been detected in the current starting winning processing (see FIG. 153). (S501), if no new ball is detected (S501: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S501 that a new ball has been detected (S501: Yes), then whether the number of held balls corresponding to the detected ball is the upper limit (that is, 4). It is determined whether or not (S502), and if it is determined that it is the upper limit value (S502: Yes), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S502, if it is determined that the number of pending balls is less than the upper limit (S502: No), whether the timing to start the variable display based on the entering ball is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503). In the process of S503, it is determined whether or not the variable probability state is obtained according to the current game state and the result of the read-ahead of the reserved balls that were reserved before the current ball entry. Specifically, if the held ball does not include a jackpot, the current game state and the timing of starting the variable display based on the entered ball detected this time match, so the current game state is the probability variable state. It is determined that In addition, when a jackpot is included in the reserved balls, there is a possibility that the game state is changed according to the type of the jackpot. Specifically, when the variable probability jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the variable probability state after the jackpot, and when the normal jackpot is reserved, the state is shifted to the normal state after the jackpot. Taking these factors into consideration, it is determined whether or not the start timing of the variation display based on the hit ball detected this time is in the probability variation state.

In the processing of S503, if it is determined that the start time of the variation based on the entrance detected this time is the probability variable state of the special symbol (S503: Yes), the type of the entrance where the entrance was detected and the high probability time Based on the first winning random number table (see FIG. 137(b)), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S504), and the process proceeds to S506. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start time is the low probability state of the special symbol (S503: No), the type of entrance where the ball is detected and the first random number table for low probability (Fig. 137) (b)), the lottery result based on the current ball entry is acquired (S505), and the process proceeds to S506.

In the process of S506, which is executed after the process of S504 or S505, a winning information command is set based on the type of the entrance where the current ball is detected and the lottery result obtained in the process of S504 or S505. (S506), this processing ends. The winning information command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S901) of the main process (see FIG. 159), which will be described later. It is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the prize winning information command, the audio ramp control device 113 stores the type of entrance notified by the prize winning information command and the lottery result in the prize winning information storage area 223a.

Next, referring to FIG. 155, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 155 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), and the variation display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the second symbol entrance 640 are performed. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory 640a.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S501). During the winning of the normal symbol (second symbol), the second symbol display device 83 is displaying the winning, and the opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is performed. including while As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (S501: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S501: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S502), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S502: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S503). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is greater than 0 (S504), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is 0 (S504: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is not 0 (S504: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S505).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S506). In the process of S506, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203d are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203d is obtained (S507).

Next, it is determined whether or not the present time is in the time-saving state of normal symbols (S508). Specifically, the value of the counter 203i during time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more, or when the probability variation flag 203h is ON, it is determined that it is a time saving state of normal symbols, and the value of the counter 203i during time saving is 0, And, if the variable probability flag 203h is off, it is determined that it is in the normal state of normal symbols (not in the time saving state).

In the process of S508, when it is determined that the time saving state of the normal design (S508: Yes), the value of the second random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S507, the second per random number table for high probability time Based on this, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S509). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 138(a)).

On the other hand, in the processing of S508, if it is determined that it is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S508: No), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S507 and the second winning for low probability time Based on the random number table, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S510). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second winning random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 138(a)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S509 or S510 is a normal symbol win (S511), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S511: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S512). In the process of S512, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "O" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol), and the process proceeds to S514. .

On the other hand, in the process of S511, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S511: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S513). In the process of S513, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S514.

In the process of S514, it is determined whether or not it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S514), and if it is in the time saving state of the normal design (S514: Yes), the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display in the second design display device 83 is set to 3 seconds (S515), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S514, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal symbol (S514: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S516), and this process exit. In this way, except during the special symbol jackpot, when the normal symbol has a high probability, compared to the normal symbol when the probability is low, the time of the fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds". The pattern lottery frequency increases. Therefore, the frequency of wins in the normal pattern lottery increases, and the electric accessory 640a attached to the second ball entrance 640 is easily opened, so that the ball can easily enter the second ball entrance 640. state.

In the process of S502, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S502: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S517). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S515 or the process of S516 before the variable display is started on the second symbol display device 83 .

In the process of S517, if it is determined that the variable time has not elapsed (S517: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S517, when it is determined that the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S517: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S518). In the process of S518, if the normal symbol lottery is won and the display mode is set by the process of S512, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S513, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S518, when the second symbol display update process (see S907) of the main process (see FIG. 159) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After completion, the stop symbol (normal symbol) is stop-displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S512 or the process of S513.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S519). If the lottery result of this time is a hit of the normal design (S519: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the present is in the time saving state of the normal design (S520), and when it is determined that it is in the time saving state (S520: Yes), the opening time and number of openings of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 are set to "1 second x 2 times" (S522), and the process proceeds to S523. . On the other hand, in the process of S520, when it is determined that the normal state of the normal pattern (not the time-saving state) (S520: No), the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is set to "0.2 seconds x 1 time" (S521), and the process proceeds to S523.

In the process of S523, the start of opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is set for the time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S521 or S522 (S523), and the process ends. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 64a is set by the process of S523, when the electric accessory opening/closing process (see S905) of the main process (see FIG. 159) is executed next, the electric accessory 64a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S519, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S519: No), the process of S520 to S523 is skipped, and this process ends.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 156 is a flow chart showing this through gate passage processing (S107). This through gate passage processing (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 150) to determine whether or not a ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67. In this case, the value indicated by the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired and retained.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601). Here, passage of the ball through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is obtained (S602). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than the upper limit (4 in this control example) (S603).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal ball entrance 67 (S601: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67, the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203g (M) is not less than 4 (S603: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal ball entrance (through gate) 67 (S601: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203g is less than 4 (S603: Yes), the normal symbol 1 is added to the value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203g (S604). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203. area (S605), and the process ends. In the process of S605, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 157 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S701), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout launch control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 158, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 158 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this control example) is executed. (S802). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S803).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 119) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S804), and if it is turned on (S804: Yes), the process proceeds to S812. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805), and if not stored (S805: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S812.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S805: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S806). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed. Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S914 in FIG. Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S812, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S812). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S813, S814).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pushed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S813, S814) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization processing of the RAM 203 (S813, S814) is similarly executed. . In the RAM initialization process (S813, S814), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S813), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S814). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S810.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S804: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S805: Yes), and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S807: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S808). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S809), and the process proceeds to S810. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S810, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113, and the execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. FIG. Next, the interrupt is permitted (S811), and the process proceeds to main processing, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 159, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 159 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S901 to S907 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S910 and S911 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 150), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is transferred to each sub-side control device (peripheral (S901). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 150). Send a prize ball command to In addition, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the reserved ball number command set in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) and the start winning process (see FIG. 153). Also, the winning information command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 153) is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . Also, the opening command, round number command, and ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 160) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S902). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this control example). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S903), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S904). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is satisfied, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In this control example, the jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second entrance 640 is executed (S905). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product 64a is set by the processing of S523 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 155), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product 64a is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory 64a is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S521 or S522 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S906). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed as the first symbol display. Start at device 37 . In this control example, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, the red LED is lit.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S308 or the process of S310 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152) ends, the first symbol display device 37 is terminated, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is displayed as the first symbol in the display mode set by the process of S307 or S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 152). Stop display (illumination display) is performed on the device 37 .

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S907). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set by the process of S515 or the process of S516 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155), in the second symbol display device 83 Start variable display. As a result, the second symbol display device 83 performs a variable display in which the second symbol "O" symbol and the "X" symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S518 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 155), it is executed in the second symbol display device 83. End the current variation display, in the display mode set by the processing of S512 or the processing of S513 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 155), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 ( display).

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S908). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this control example) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S909). If the predetermined time has already passed (S909: Yes), the process proceeds to S901, and the above-described processes after S901 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S909: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S910, S911).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S910). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (399 and 239 in this control example), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S902 (S911).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S901 to S907 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S908, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S908: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt processing of FIG. 157 has been executed, so the processing at power-off from S912 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S912), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S913). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S914), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S915), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the processing of S908 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S901 to S907, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S910 and S911 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S901. That is, the process can be started from the process of S901 in the same way as the initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing at power-off, the initial setting processing (see S801 in FIG. 158) can be performed. ), the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value (initial value), so that the process of S901 can be started. Therefore, the control burden on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S904) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S904). This jackpot control process (S904) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 159), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, specific winning opening ( This is a process for opening or closing the large opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a special symbol jackpot is started (S1001). Specifically, the process of S214 of the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 151) is executed, and if the start of the special symbol jackpot is set, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is started. In the processing of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is started (S1001: Yes), an opening command is set (S1002), and this processing is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp control is performed. It is sent towards device 113 . Upon receiving the opening command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display opening command to the display control device 114 . When the display opening command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1001, when the special symbol jackpot is not started (S1001: No), it is determined whether the special symbol jackpot is in progress (S1003). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1003, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S1003: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1003, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (1003: Yes), it is determined whether it is time to start a new round (S1004). If it is time to start a new round (S1004: Yes), the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a is opened (S1005), and a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1006). After setting the round number command, this process is terminated. The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1004, if it is determined that it is not the time to start a new round (S1004: No), it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a are met (S1007). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls When (for example, 10) wins, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1007, when the condition for closing the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is satisfied (S1007: Yes), the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a is closed (S1008), and this process ends. do. On the other hand, if the conditions for closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a are not met (S1007: No), it is determined whether it is time to start the ending effect (S1009). Specifically, when the special game state (all 16 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state ends, it is determined that it is time to start the ending effect.

In the processing of S1009, if it is time to start the ending effect (S1009: Yes), an ending command is set (S1010), and this processing ends. The ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output processing (S901) of the main processing (see FIG. 159). It is sent towards device 113 . When receiving the ending command, the audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display ending command to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of S1009, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the ending effect (S1009: No), then it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the ending effect (S1011), and the end timing of the ending effect is reached. If it is determined (S1011: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S1011, when it is determined that the end timing of the ending effect has come (S1011: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current big win is the big win A (S1012).

In the process of S1012, if it is determined that it is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot B) (S1012: No), the value corresponding to the jackpot type is set to the value of the counter 203i during time saving (S1013), and the process is performed. The process proceeds to S1015. On the other hand, in the process of S1012, if it is determined that the current jackpot is the jackpot A (S1012: Yes), by turning on the probability variation flag 203h, the probability variation state of the special symbol is given after the end of the jackpot (S1014), and the process proceeds to S1015.

In the process of S1013 or the process of S1015 executed after the process of S1014, the lottery state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot (whether the special symbol is a probability variable state or the special symbol is a low probability state) is voiced. A status command for notification to the lamp control device 113 is set (S1015), the end of the jackpot is set (S1016), and this process is finished.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the first control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 161 to 179, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 161, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 161 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S3901). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing in S4017 (see FIG. 162) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S3902). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 162, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S4014: Yes in FIG. 162), it executes power-off processing in S4017. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S4016 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing in-progress flag.

In the processing of S3902, if the power-off processing flag is off (S3902: No), the startup processing this time was started after the power was completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred. , or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise (without receiving a power-off command from the main controller 110). It has been started. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S3906. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S3903: Yes), it will transfer to S3904 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S3903: No), the process proceeds to S3908.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). from), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S3903: Yes), and the process proceeds to S3904. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S4017 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S3903: No), and the process proceeds to S3908.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S3902: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S4017, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, since control cannot be continued in such a case, the process moves to S3904 and initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S3904, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S3904). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S3905: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S3906). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S3905: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S3907), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S3908, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S3908). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S4017 is executed (see S4016 in FIG. 162). In other words, the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S4017 is executed. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S4017 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S3908: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S3909), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), an interrupt Permission is set (S3911), and the process proceeds to main processing. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S3908 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S3908: No), S3909, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S3910, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S3910), interrupt permission is set. Then (S3911), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clear processing of S3909 is skipped is that when the processing of S3908 is reached from S3904 via the processing of S3906, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S3904, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 162, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 162 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S4001 was executed (S4001). If not (S4001: No), the process proceeds to S4012 without performing the processes of S4002 to S4011. In the process of S4001, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has passed because S4002 to S4011 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). , S4012, and S4013 for updating the variable display setting process are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S4012 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S4013 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S4001 (S4001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S4003 to S4013 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S4002 ).

Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S4008 described later (S4003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S4004). . In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S4005 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S4005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S4006). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the reserved number display update process, a process of lighting a reserved lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S4007). This frame button input monitoring/rendering process is a process of monitoring an input as to whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed, and setting an effect corresponding to the confirmation of the input of the frame button 22 . Specifically, when the frame button 22 is pressed (continued to be pressed) during the operation effective period of the operation presentation for allowing the player to operate the frame button 22, processing for changing the display mode. is. The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4007) ends, lamp editing processing is executed (S4008), and then sound editing/output processing is executed (S4009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S4009, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S4010), and thereafter, during the execution of the variable display, effect update processing for varying the effect mode according to the remaining variable time, various timer values, etc. is performed. is executed (S4011), and the process proceeds to S4012. The details of this rendering update process (S4011) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4012, a command determination process is performed to perform a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 (S4012). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, when the command determination process ends, the variable display setting process is executed (S4013). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S4013 is finished, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S4014). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S4014 (S4014: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S4016), and the power-off processing is executed (S4017). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S4018), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S4014 (S4014: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S4015), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S4015: No), the process returns to S4001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S4015: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 163, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S4007) executed by the MPU in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 163 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing. This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 163) is, as described above, a process of monitoring the input of the frame button 22 and setting the corresponding effect when the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see FIG. 163), first, it is determined whether the value of the effective period timer 223e is greater than 0 (S4101). (S4101: No), which means that it is not the valid period of operation, so the process ends. In other words, unless the operation valid period is in effect, even if the depression of the frame button 22 is detected, the display mode of the operation effect is not variably displayed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4101, if it is determined that the value of the effective period timer 223e is greater than 0 (S4101: Yes), it means that the operation effective period is now. is detected (S4102). In the process of S4102, if it is determined that the pressing of the frame button 22 has been detected (S4102: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the pressing timer 223s is greater than 0 (S4103). Yes), that is, if it is determined that it is the first timing at which the depression of the frame button 22 is detected within the current operation valid period (S4103: No), the value of the depression timer 223s is set to 1. (S4104), and the process proceeds to S4105.

The pressing timer 223s set in the process of S4104 is a timer whose value is updated in the later-described effect update process (see S4011 in FIG. 165), and the player continues to press the frame button 22. It is for measuring time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4103 that the value of the pressing timer 223s is greater than 0 (S4103: Yes), the frame button 22 is already pressed (long pressed). , the process of S4104 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4105.

In the process of S4105, it is determined whether the pressing release flag 223u is set to ON (S4105), and if it is determined that it is not set to ON (S4105: No), the frame button 22 continues to be pressed ( A display command indicating the pressed state is set (S4106), and the process proceeds to S4110.

Also, if it is determined in the process of S4105 that the press release flag 223u is set to ON (S4105: Yes), a display command indicating that continuous pressing is in progress is set (S4107), and the press release flag 223u is set to OFF. Then (S4108), the repeated hit effect flag is set to ON (S4109), and the process proceeds to S4110.

Then, after the process of S4106 or the process of S4109 is completed, the pressing effect setting process is executed (S4110), and the process ends. This pressing effect setting process (S4110) determines whether the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 is the determination timing for varying the stage information (kiai gauge KG) of the operation effect. In this case, a process for varying (increasing) the level information (kiai gauge KG) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 164, the contents of the pressing effect setting process (S4110) will be described. FIG. 164 is a flow chart showing the contents of the pressing effect setting process (S4110). When the pressing effect setting process (S4110) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not it is the determination timing (determination timing for the operation effect) for varying the step information (kiai gauge KG) (S4201). If so (S4201; No), this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that it is the determination timing (S4201: Yes), then using the gauge increase lottery table 222d, the presence or absence of gauge increase is determined (S4202). ), increments the value of the gauge counter 223x by 1 (S4204), sets a display command for indicating the value of the gauge counter 223x after addition (S4205), and terminates this processing. Also, in the process of S4203, if it is determined that the gauge does not rise (S4203: No), this process ends.

Returning to FIG. 163, the description continues. If it is determined in the process of S4102 that the pressing of the frame button 22 has not been detected (S4102: No), then it is determined whether the long-pressing flag 223t is set to ON (S4111). If it is determined that the flag 223t is on (S4111; Yes), the long-pressing flag 223t is set to off (S4112), the press release flag 223u is set to on (S4113), and a display command prompting repeated tapping is set (S4114), the value of the press timer 223s is cleared to 0 (S4115), and this processing ends.

In the process of S4111, if it is determined that the long-pressing flag 223t is not set to ON (S4111: No), the process of S4112 to S4114 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4115. In the process of S4115, the process for clearing the value of the press timer 223s to 0 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 165, the processing contents of the rendering update processing (S4011) will be described. FIG. 165 is a flow chart showing the details of the rendering update process (S4011). As shown in FIG. 165, in the effect update process (S4011), the value of the effective period timer 223e for measuring the remaining period of the operation effective period in which the operation to the frame button 22 is determined to be effective, A process of updating the value of the pressing timer 223s that measures the period during which is continuously pressed, and a process of setting a display command for indicating the effect mode corresponding to the updated value are executed. . This effect update process (S4011) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the sound lamp control device 113. This is a process for varying the presentation mode accordingly.

Since this effect update process (S4011) is a process that is periodically executed every millisecond (ms) in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the sound lamp control device 113, the effective period timer 223e and the pressing timer 223s measures values in units of 1 millisecond. Therefore, every time the values of various timers are updated 1000 times, a period corresponding to 1 second (1000 milliseconds) is measured. For convenience of explanation, the values of various timers are shown in units of milliseconds (that is, the same values that are actually updated), and in units of seconds (that is, 1/1 of the values that are actually updated). A value of 1000) may be used for explanation.

When the effect update process (S4011) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current is during special figure fluctuation (during special symbol fluctuation) (S4301), and when it is determined that it is not during special figure fluctuation (S4301: No ), that is, when the condition for executing the special symbol variation is not satisfied (when the winning data is not stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b (standby middle), or when the winning data is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball storage area 203a and the second special symbol reserved ball storage area 203b, but the winning data cannot be shifted to the execution area because it is a jackpot game. (During jackpot game) executes processing for updating other effects being executed (standby effect (demo effect), jackpot game effect) (S4310), and ends this process.

A detailed description of the contents of the processing executed in S4310 will be omitted, but for example, during standby, a display screen showing the result of the previous special symbol lottery (the third symbol stop display mode is displayed) The value of the timer (demo timer) that measures the period from transition from the display screen displayed during standby to the demo screen (screen that displays the model name, demo effects, etc.) is updated, and the A process for varying the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the update result.

During the jackpot game, the value of the timer for measuring the elapsed time of each period of the jackpot game (opening period, round game period, interval period, ending period) is updated, and the third symbol is displayed based on the update result. A process for varying the display mode of the device 81 is executed. Here, for example, even though the round game period has passed a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the ball has not entered the specific winning opening 65a, or the round game period has passed for a specific period (for example, 20 seconds). ) has passed, but the round game has not ended, that is, if the round game end condition established by winning 10 balls into the specific winning hole 65a is not satisfied, the player On the other hand, an effect for emphasizing and prompting the right-handed game is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S4301, if it is determined that the current is during special symbol variation (during special symbol variation), then the value of the valid period timer 223e is greater than 0, that is, the current operation valid period If it is determined that the valid period timer 223e is 0 (S4302: No), the process of S4310 described above is executed, and this process ends. If it is determined in the process of S4302 that the value of the effective period timer 223e is greater than 0 (S4302: Yes), the value of the effective period timer 223e is updated (S4303), and then the updated effective period timer 223e is 0 (S4304).

When it is determined that the valid period timer 223e has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the operation valid period has expired (S4304: Yes), a display command for showing the effect result of the current operation effect is set. (S4305), and the process ends.

In the processing of S4304, if it is determined that the valid period timer value is not 0 (S4304: No), it is determined whether the value of the press timer 223s is greater than 0 (S4306), and it is determined that it is greater than 0. If so (S4306: Yes), the value of the press timer 223s is updated (S4306), and then it is determined whether the updated value of the press timer 223s is a value (20000) corresponding to 2 seconds (S4308). , 2 seconds (S4308: Yes), the long-pressing flag 223t is set to ON (S4309), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4306 that the value of the press timer 223s is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S4306: No), or in the process of S4308 it is determined that the value does not correspond to 2 seconds. If so (S4308: No), the process of S4309 is skipped and this process ends.

Next, the command determination processing (S4012) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 166 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S4012). The command determination process (S4012) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 162) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and determines the command received from the main controller 110 as described above.

In the command determination process (S4012), first, out of the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the variation pattern from the main controller 110 is read. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (S4401). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (S4401: Yes), the variation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4402), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command ( S4403) and returns to the main process. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 174) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S4401: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S4404). When the stop type command is received (S4404: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S4405), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S4406), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 174) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S4404: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from main controller 110 (S4407). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S4407: Yes), the value included in the received reserved ball number command, that is, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110, or The value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is extracted, and this is stored in the corresponding special symbol type storage area in the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113. (S4408). In addition, in the processing of S4408, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. After the process of S4408 ends, the process returns to the main process.

Here, the reserved ball number command is issued when the ball enters the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (start winning), or when a special symbol lottery is performed, the main controller 110 Since it is transmitted from, each time the starting winning prize is detected or the special symbol lottery is performed, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed by the processing of S4408 to the main controller. It is possible to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e of 110 or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N). Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is changed to the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the main control device 110. value (the number of times N of holding variable display in special symbols), the value of the special symbol holding ball number counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 is corrected when the start winning is detected or the special symbol lottery is selected, and the main It is possible to match the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 203e or the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 203f of the control device 110 (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N). Incidentally, when the process of S4408 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated value of the special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b is set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the third symbol display device 81 displays the reserved ball number symbols corresponding to the reserved ball number for each special symbol type.

In the process of S4407, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S4409). When it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S4409: Yes), the information of the received winning command is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (S4410), and the process returns to the main process.

In the processing of S4409, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S4409: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning-related command has been received (S4411). And when it determines with having received the hit related command (S4411:Yes), a hit related process is performed (S4412), and it returns to a main process. Details of the win-related processing (S4412) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 167 to 171. FIG.

In the processing of S4411, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S4411: No), then it is determined whether or not the number-of-balls command has been received from main controller 110 (S4413). Then, when it is determined that the number-of-balls command has been received (S4413: Yes), a prize-ball-related process is executed (S4414), and this process ends. Details of the prize-ball related process (S4414) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S4413, if it is determined that the command for the number of prize balls has not been received (S4413: No), then it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S4415) and returns to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By executing this command determination process, an appropriate process can be executed according to the command output from main controller 110 .

Next, the variable display setting process (S4013) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 174 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S4013). This variable display setting process (S4013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 162) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, This is a process of generating and setting display variation pattern commands based on the variation pattern commands received from main controller 110 .

In the fluctuation display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag possessed by the fluctuation start flag 223c provided in the RAM 223 is on (S5201). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, it is off) (S5201: No), the first special symbol from the main controller 110 (special figure 1) variation pattern command Since it has not been received, the process proceeds to S5209. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag of the fluctuation start flag 223c is on (S5201: Yes), the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag is turned off (S5203), then the current game state is normal It is determined whether the state is (S5204), and if it is determined that it is in the normal state (S5204: Yes), in the processing of S4403 of the command determination processing (see FIG. 166), the variation in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command Based on the pattern type, the variation display mode of the current variation display is determined from the variation pattern table 222a (S5205).

Then, a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the determined variation display mode is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S5206). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

Next, the data stored in the winning information storage area 223a is shifted (S5207). In the process of S5207, the data stored in the first to fourth areas of the prize winning information storage area 223a are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the data in each area is shifted in the order of 1st area→execution area, 2nd area→1st area, 3rd area→2nd area, 4th area→3rd area. After shifting the data, the process proceeds to S5209.

On the other hand, in the process of S5204, if it is determined that it is not in the normal state (time saving state or variable probability state) (S5204: No), the time saving effect mode setting process is executed (S5208), then to the process of S5209 Transition. This time-saving production mode setting process (S5208) sets the production mode of various productions executed when the high probability state of the normal symbol is set. 179 for explanation.

In the processing of S5216, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223d provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S5216). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S5216: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223d is on (S5216: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223d is turned off (S5217). The stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S5218).

Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main control device 110 is set as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S5219), and based on the set stop type, the display control device A display stop type command for notification to 114 is generated, and the command is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114 (S5220), and this process ends. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 175, the contents of the time saving effect mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)) will be described. FIG. 175 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving presentation mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)). In this time-saving production mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)), a process for determining the production mode of the variable production in the state in which the high probability state of the normal symbol is set is executed. In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol lottery and the second special symbol lottery in the high probability state of the normal symbol are configured so that the same effect mode is set as the effect mode of the variable effect. , the same control process is executed.

When the time saving effect mode setting process (S5208 (S5215)) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the reach flag 223ab is set to ON (S5301). When it is determined that the arrival flag 223ab is set to ON (S5301: Yes), the process proceeds to S5304, and when it is determined that the arrival flag 223ab is not set to ON (S5301: No). , it is determined whether the value of the display point counter is greater than 0 (S5302), and if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (S5302: No), the information stored in the effect information storage area 223h is read out (S5303). ) to identify the current rendering state.

Then, it is determined whether the current zone is the winning rate UP zone (S5304), and if it is determined to be the winning rate UP zone (S5304: Yes), the winning rate UP zone production setting process (S5305) is executed, and then displayed. 1 is added to the value of the display point stored in the point storage area 223r (S5306), a display command for indicating the added value is set (S5307), and 1 is added to the value of the time saving counter 223y (S5310 )do.

On the other hand, in the process of S5304, if it is determined that it is not in the winning rate UP zone, the variation display mode is determined based on the read information and the extracted variation pattern (S5308), and the process proceeds to S5310, and S5302 When it is determined that the value of the display point counter is greater than 0 (S5302) in the processing of 1), the effect setting processing is executed after the first time (S5309), and then the processing proceeds to S5310.

When the processing of S5310 is finished, next, the upper limit number of times of reduced working hours (when the game state set this time is the reduced working hours state, the set number of reduced working hours) is read from the information stored in the state storage area 223aa. Then, in order to determine whether the current variation display is the final variation in time saving, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter 223y corresponds to the upper limit number (S5311), and if it is determined to correspond (S5311: Yes) , Determines the variable display mode indicating the time-saving end (the effect mode of the defeating battle effect) (S5313), sets the normal state in the state storage area (S5314), and ends this processing.

As described above, in this control example, when the time saving state is set, it is configured to be able to set different times of time saving, and as a variation pattern of the special symbol variation of the number of times that can be the upper limit of the number of times of time saving, always battle It is configured so that a variation pattern (60-second variation) capable of executing production is executed. Therefore, by executing the processing of S5312 to S5314, the game result can be properly notified to the player only by performing the processing of rewriting the effect result of the battle effect only when the time saving state is actually ended.

Next, with reference to FIG. 176, the content of the effect setting process for winning rate UP zone (S5305) will be described. FIG. 176 is a flow chart showing the contents of the effect setting process for winning rate UP zone (S5305). In this winning rate UP zone effect setting process (S5305), various variable effects are executed during the winning rate UP zone.

When the winning rate UP zone effect setting process (S5305) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation is a big hit change (S5401), and if it is determined to be a big hit change (S5401: Yes), the winning rate A performance mode indicating a winning rate of V% is determined so that the display becomes a special display mode (V%) (S5402), and information stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j and the displayed winning rate storage area 223k is cleared (S5403). ), the variable winning rate flag 223i is set to OFF (S5404), and this process is terminated. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the winning rate UP zone, the battle mode is not set and the jackpot game is started, so the winning rate display for indicating the degree of expectation of victory in the battle production during the battle mode is specially displayed. It is configured to be able to inform the player of the winning of the jackpot by changing the display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S5401, if it is determined that there is no big hit fluctuation (S5401: No), the upper limit of the winning rate stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j is read (S5405), and stored in the display winning rate storage area 223k. The display value of the winning percentage stored in the game is read out (S5406), and the difference value between the upper limit value of the winning percentage read in S5405 and the displayed value read out in the process of S5406 is calculated (S5407).

Then, based on the calculated difference value, a value that can be increased in the current variation effect is determined (S5408), and then it is determined whether the extracted variation pattern is a specific variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 11 seconds). (S5409), if it is a normal variation pattern (variation pattern with a variation time of 10 seconds) that is not a specific variation pattern (S5409: No), a lottery to determine the presence or absence of a winning rate UP is executed (S5410), and a winning rate UP effect is performed. If the execution is won (S5411: Yes), the production mode indicating that the winning rate is increased by the possible increase value determined in the process of S5408 is determined (S5412), and is stored in the display winning rate storage area 223k. The display value is updated (S5413), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5411, if the execution of the winning rate UP effect is not won (S5411: No), a mode of effect indicating that the winning rate is not increased is determined (S5414), and this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 177, the contents of the effect setting processing after the first time (S5309) will be described. FIG. 177 is a flow chart showing the content of the effect setting process after the first time (S5309). In the effect setting process after the first time (S5309), various processes for setting the effect mode for the special symbol variation other than the first special symbol variation during the time saving state are executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 177, first, it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter 223y is 2 or less (S5501), and if it is determined to be 2 or less (S5501: Yes), the time saving number It is determined whether the value of the counter 223y is 2 (S5502), and if it is not 2 (S5502: No), the above-described effect setting processing for the winning rate UP zone is executed with reference to FIG. S5503), the process ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S5502, when it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter 223y is 2 (S5502: Yes), the final winning percentage determination processing is executed (S5504), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5501, if it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter 223y is not less than 2 (3 or more) (S5501: No), then it is determined whether the value of the time saving number counter 223y is 3 If it is determined to be 3 (S5505: Yes), the current game state is read from the state storage area 223aa (S5506), and the upper limit number of lucky points is determined based on the read game state. (S5507), the determined upper limit is stored in the upper limit point storage area 223q (S5508), the effect information of the battle opponent is read out from the information stored in the effect information storage area 223h (S5509), and the The effect mode to be played is determined (S5510), the battle effect setting process is executed (S5511), and the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the time saving number counter 223y is not 3 (4 or more) in the process of S5505, that is, if it is already in the battle mode, the processes of S5506 to S5510 are skipped, and S5511 , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 178, the contents of the final winning percentage determination process (S5504) will be described. FIG. 178 is a flowchart showing the details of the final winning percentage determination process (S5504). In this final winning rate determination process (S5504), a process for determining the effect mode of the effect (see FIG. 125(b)) for determining the battle opponent to be executed as the final variable effect for the winning rate UP zone is executed.

When the final winning percentage determination process (S5504) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation is a jackpot variation (S5601), and if it is determined to be a jackpot variation (S5601: Yes), the winning percentage display is special. A performance mode showing a winning rate V% is determined so as to display the display mode (V%) (S5602), the information stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j and the displayed winning rate storage area 223k is cleared (S5603), and the winning rate is displayed. The variable flag 223i is set to OFF (S5404), and this processing ends. In other words, when a jackpot is won in the winning rate UP zone, the battle mode is not set and the jackpot game is started, so the winning rate display for indicating the degree of expectation of victory in the battle production during the battle mode is specially displayed. It is configured to be able to inform the player of the winning of the jackpot by changing the display mode.

On the other hand, in the process of S5601, if it is determined that there is no big hit fluctuation (S5601: No), the upper limit of the winning rate stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j is read (S5605), and stored in the display winning rate storage area 223k. The display value of the winning percentage is read out (S5606), and the difference value between the upper limit value of the winning percentage read out in S5605 and the display value read out in the process of S5606 is calculated (S5607).

Then, in the variable production of this time, a production mode indicating that the winning rate is increased by the difference value is determined (S5608), a battle opponent corresponding to the upper limit value is determined (S5609), and a production mode for indicating the determined battle opponent is determined. is determined (S5610), then the effect information corresponding to the determined battle opponent is stored in the effect information storage area 223h (S5611), and this process is terminated.

As described above, in this control example, the upper limit value (upper limit value of the winning rate) determined at the time when the winning rate UP zone is set is finally displayed, and the battle opponent corresponding to the upper limit value is competing during the battle mode. It is configured to be determined as a battle opponent. Therefore, even if an effect for increasing the winning rate is not set in the winning rate increasing zone, the upper limit value is finally displayed, so that an easy-to-understand effect for the player can be provided.

In addition, without being limited to this, the battle opponent may be determined based on the display value stored in the display win rate storage area 223k instead of the upper limit value stored in the upper limit win rate storage area 223j. . In this case, even if the same upper limit value is set, the displayed winning percentage at the end of the winning percentage increasing zone can be changed depending on the effect executed during the winning percentage increasing zone. On the other hand, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the current game state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 179, the contents of the battle effect setting process (S5511) will be described. FIG. 179 is a flow chart showing the contents of the battle effect setting process (S5511). In this battle effect setting process (S5511), when a variation pattern (60-second variation) capable of executing a battle effect is set during the battle mode, a process for determining the effect result of the battle effect is executed. .

When the battle effect setting process (S5511) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern extracted this time is a 60-second variation (S5651). If it is determined that it is a pattern (S5651: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5651, if it is determined that it is a 60 second variation (S5651: Yes), then it is determined whether this variation is a jackpot variation (S5652), and if it is determined to be a jackpot variation (S5652: Yes), sets a display command for executing an effect in which the effect result is "victory" (S5663), and ends this process. Also, in the process of S5652, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot variation (S5662: No), it is determined whether this variation is a time saving final variation (S5654), and if it is determined to be a time saving final variation ( S5654: Yes), sets a display command for executing the effect that the effect result is "defeat" (S5665), and terminates this process.

In the processing of S5654, if it is determined that the time saving final change is not made (S5654: No), the display command for executing the effect that the effect result is "continue" is set (S5656), and the display point storage area 223r 5 is added to the value of the display point stored in (S5657), a display command for indicating the added value is set (S5658), and this processing ends.

That is, the display of "Continue" in the battle effect becomes a condition for executing the addition effect that allows the predetermined number of lucky points to be added. Although detailed description is omitted, the processing of S5657 is not executed when the difference between the upper limit number of lucky points and the number of currently displayed lucky points is less than five.

<Regarding control processing of the display control device in the first control example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 180 to 194. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 180, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 180 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply circuit 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" and , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

In contrast, as in this control example, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR flash memory 234d. is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the first data in the NOR type flash memory 234d. The boot program stored in the program storage area 234 d 1 can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S8001), and the display control device 114 to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 181, the boot processing (S8001) will be described. FIG. 181 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S8001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this control example, the control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional gaming machine. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, following the boot program read out from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR flash memory 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is cancelled, , a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are transferred to the program storage area 233a (S8101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the head address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S8102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101.

By setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S8102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S8102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S8103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S8104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after completion of this boot process (see S8001 in FIG. 180). By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initialization setting process (see S8002 in FIG. 180) (S8105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and the boot process is terminated.

By executing the boot process (S8001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained. Therefore, by using the third pattern display device 81, diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed.

On the other hand, without storing all the boot programs in the NOR type flash memory 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot programs are stored in the NAND type flash memory. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a very small capacity NOR flash memory 234d. can do.

Note that in the boot process shown in FIG. 181, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S8101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S8103 to S8105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S8101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the instruction pointer 231a at step S8101. and the processing of S8102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S8103 to S8105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in this control example, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S8103 to S8105 without performing the processes of S8101 and S8102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S8002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the image controller 237 is initialized, the image controller 237 is instructed to draw an image so that an image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. and instruct execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S8003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing in S8003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S8004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S8005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 192(a)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer is executed (see S9602 in FIG. 192(a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this time, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)), the simple command is executed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) shown in FIG. 145 is drawn. Determination processing (see S8308 in FIG. 182(b)) and simple display setting processing (see S8309 in FIG. 182(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 114 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 64 (start winning), and an instruction to start the variable effect is given by the main controller 110 under voice lamp control. When it is received via the device 113, that is, when the display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image shown in FIGS. A simple variable performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S8005, interrupt permission is set (S8006), and thereafter, the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S8006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(a). FIG. 182(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S8201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 182(b). FIG. 182(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 149) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 182(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S8301). If it is off (S8301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81, command determination processing (S8302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S8303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S8302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is transferred. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S8303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S8302), etc., the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. FIG.

After the display setting process is executed, task processing is executed (S8304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S8303) or the simple display setting processing (S8309). The type of sprite (display object) to be displayed is specified, and various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S8305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193. FIG.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S8306). In this drawing process, the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S8304), the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instructions set in the transfer setting process (S8305). , generates a drawing list shown in FIG. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S8307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S8307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process, when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, complete out) The corresponding stop type table and the stop type counter are compared, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S8301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S8301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image shown in FIG. Go to processing.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 183 to 188, the details of the command determination process (S8302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 183 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 183, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S8401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S8303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S8402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S8403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S8404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S8404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S8405) and returns to the processing of S8401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 184(a), the details of the variation pattern command process (S8405) will be described. FIG. 184(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S8501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation longer than the set display data table can be actually obtained. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

In the process of S8502, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8502).

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8503), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S8504). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8505), the variation pattern command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process (see FIG. 189), while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8504, the display data table buffer 233d set by the process of S8501 From the variable display data table, the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a.

Also, in the display setting process (see FIG. 189), the timer counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S8503 is used to measure the time of the variable effect specified in the variable display data table. When it is determined that the variable performance ends, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加

Now, return to the description of FIG. 183 . In the process of S8404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S8404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S8406), If there is a display variation type command (S8406: Yes), stop type command processing is executed (S8407), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the stop type command process (S8407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 184(b). FIG. 184(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing (S8407), first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (jackpot A, jackpot B, front-rear out reach, reach other than front-rear out, or complete out) indicated by the stop type command for display is determined (S8601), and the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop design counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is executed, and the third design display device Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 81 is set (S8602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S8602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned on. (S8603), and returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S8602. In the above-described task processing (S8304), after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S8602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by the processing of S8603, and the specification The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of fluctuation at a time interval of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore command determination processing is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S8601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S8602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in this control example, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description is continued. In the process of S8406, if it is determined that there is no stop type command for display (S8406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an opening command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8408). If there is an opening command (S8408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S8409), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the opening command process (S8409) will now be described with reference to FIG. 185(a). FIG. 185(a) is a flowchart showing opening command processing. This opening command process is for executing a process corresponding to the display opening command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the opening command process, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S8701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S8701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S8702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8701, time data representing the rendering time is set in the timer counter 233h (S8703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8704). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8705), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this opening command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S8704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S8701, At the same time as extracting the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and specifying the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81, the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored by the processing of S8702. From the set transfer data table, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description is continued. In the process of S8408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S8408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the unprocessed commands (S8410), and the If there is a round number command for use (S8410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S8411), and the process returns to S8401.

Here, with reference to FIG. 185(b), the details of the round number command process (S8411) will be described. FIG. 185(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S8801). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8802).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8801, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8803), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S8804). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S8805), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 183 . In the process of S8410, if it is determined that there is no command for the number of rounds for display (S8410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an ending command for display among the unprocessed commands (S8412). If there is an ending command (S8412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S8413), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the ending command process (S8413) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing ending command processing. This ending command process is to execute the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the ending command process, first, the ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, and the display data table is displayed. It is set in the buffer 233d (S8901). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S8902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S8901, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S8903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 ( S8904). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to off (S8905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 183 . In the processing of S8412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S8412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S8414), and the back image is displayed. If there is a change command (S8414: Yes), the back image change command process is executed (S8415), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the back image change command process (S8415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 187(a). FIG. 187(a) is a flow chart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, a back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting processing (S9603) of the change in the back image accompanying the reception of the back image change command in the ON state is set to ON (S9001). . Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surface A, B), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S9002), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S9001 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S9002. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

Further, in the task processing, if it is specified to display one of the back faces A and B according to the back face type of the back face image specified in the display data table, the back face image discrimination flag set by the processing in S9002 is used. , specifying the type of back image to be displayed at that time, further specifying the range of the back image to be displayed according to the passage of time, and the type of RAM in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and the address of that RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more background image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S9002, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 183 . In the process of S8414, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S8414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S8416). Otherwise (S8416: Yes), the error command process is executed (S8417), and the process returns to S8401.

Details of the error command processing (S8417) will now be described with reference to FIG. 187(b). FIG. 187(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S9101). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S9102). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S9101, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S9102, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

Note that if it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S9102, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 183 . In the process of S8416, if it is determined that there is no error command (S8416: No), then it is checked whether there is a command related to the information to be added to the display of the number of times displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It is determined (S8418), and if there is a command related to number display (S8418: Yes), the number addition related command process is executed (S8419), and the process returns to S8401.

The commands related to the number addition display include, for example, a display command for indicating the number of variations of the special symbols, a display command for indicating the lucky points, a display command for indicating the winning percentage, and a display command for displaying the fighting spirit gauge KG. A display command or the like for showing information for varying the step information may be used. A display data table for displaying these display modes is stored in the data table storage area 223b, like the variable display data table. By executing the number addition related command process (S8419), the type of display mode instructed to start display, the display time, etc. are determined from the command related to the number display, and the corresponding display data table is added to the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d.

Here, with reference to FIG. 188, the details of the number addition related command process (S8419) will be described. FIG. 188 is a flow chart showing the number addition related command process. The number addition related command processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the number addition related command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the number addition related command process, the display data table corresponding to the effect indicated by the command is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9201), and the transfer data table corresponding to the set display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (S9202). Next, the time data corresponding to the rendering time indicated by the command is set in the clock counter 233h (S9203), the pointer 233f is initialized (S9204), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Returning to FIG. 183, the description continues. In the process of S8418, if it is determined that there is no command related to the addition of the number of times (S8418: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S8420), and the process proceeds to the process of S8401.

In the process of S8401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S8401: Yes ), and the processing of S8402 to S8420 is executed again. Then, the processing of S8401 to S8420 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

Note that the simple command determination process (S8308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary for displaying the power-on image shown in FIG. Extract only the type command, and execute the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 184 (a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 184 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and other A command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 184(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S8501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main moving image area 235a and power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S8502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, details of the display setting process (S8303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIGS. 189 to 191. FIG. FIG. 189 is a flow chart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 189, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S9301). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, the processing of S9302 to S9304 is skipped, and the processing proceeds to S9305. On the other hand, if the new command flag is ON (S9301: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the previously executed command determination processing, and after setting the new command flag to OFF (S9302), S9303 and S9304 , the process corresponding to the new command is executed.

In the processing of S9303, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is ON (S9303). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S9303: Yes), warning image setting processing is executed (S9304).

Here, with reference to FIG. 190, details of the warning image setting process will be described. FIG. 190 is a flowchart showing warning image setting processing. This process is a process for developing image data for displaying a warning image corresponding to an error that has occurred on the third pattern display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all error determination flags set to ON are displayed. Warning image data for displaying an error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third pattern display device 81 is developed (S9401).

In the task processing (see S8304 in FIG. 182(b)), based on the expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that constitutes the warning image is specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S9401, the error occurrence flag is set to OFF (S9402), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. 189 . After the warning image setting process (S9304), or if it is determined in the process of S9303 that the error occurrence flag is not ON, that is, it is OFF (S9303: No), then the process proceeds to S9305.

In S9305, pointer update processing is executed (S9305). Here, the details of the pointer update processing will be described with reference to FIG. 191 . FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing pointer update processing. This pointer updating process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and the transfer data table respectively stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is the process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the address to which it should be applied.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S9501). That is, the pointer 233f is basically updated so that it is incremented by 1 each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in the various data tables, the Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is specified after the address "0001H". When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 in accordance with the storage in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update processing. Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After the value of the pointer 233f is updated by the processing of S9501, it is then checked whether the data at the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d is End information. is determined (S9502). As a result, if it is End information (S9502: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address where the entity data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demonstration display data table (S9503). If it is a demonstration display data table (S9503: Yes), the display data table buffer Time data corresponding to the effect time of the demonstration display data table set in 233d is set in the clock counter 233h (S9504), the pointer 233f is initialized by setting it to 1 (S9505), and this processing is terminated and displayed. Return to setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be developed sequentially from the top of the demonstration display data table, so that the third symbol display device 81 can repeatedly display the demonstration effects.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9503 that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demonstration display data table (S9503: No), the value of the pointer 233f is decremented by 1 (S9506). ), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, if a display data table other than the demonstration display data table, the menu display data table, and the two-dimensional code display data table, for example, the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, , End information is always displayed at the previous address, so that the third pattern display device 81 is caused to display the last image defined by the display data table in a stopped state. be able to. On the other hand, in the process of S9502, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not the End information (S9502: No), this process is terminated and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, returning to FIG. 189, the description is continued. After the pointer update process, the drawing contents of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process are developed from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S9306). In the task processing, based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S9306 together with the previously developed warning image, etc., the type of the sprite (display object) that constitutes the image is specified, and the display coordinate position is determined for each sprite. , enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and other parameters required for drawing.

Next, the value of the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (S9307), and it is determined whether or not the value of the clock counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S9308). Then, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 1 or more (S9308: No), the display setting process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if the value of the clock counter 233h is 0 or less (S9308: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is time to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is checked whether the fixed display flag is on. (S9309).

As a result, if the confirmed display flag is off (S9309: No), the confirmed display effect has not yet been performed, and it is time to perform the confirmed display effect. The transfer data table buffer 233e is set (S9310), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9311). Then, the time data corresponding to the performance time of the fixed display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9312), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9313). Then, after the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is in progress is set to ON in the ON state (S9314), the contents of the stop symbol discrimination flag are copied as they are to the previous stop symbol discrimination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S9315), returning to V interrupt processing.

Thus, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, etc., the fixed display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the end of the effect. You can set the drawing contents like this. In addition, only by changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the fixed display data table, the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 can be easily changed to the fixed display effect. In addition, compared to the conventional case of changing the display contents by activating another program, the program does not become complicated and bloated, and therefore the MPU 231 is not overloaded. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third pattern display 81 regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 114 .

It should be noted that the last stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S9315 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variable effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variable effect performed immediately before. Until a predetermined time elapses after the start, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before is described. In the task processing (S8304), until a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, from the last stop design determination flag set by S9315, the stop design of the fluctuation production performed one before is specified, and the The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, in the process of S9309, if the fixed display flag is ON (S9309: Yes), it is determined whether or not the demonstration display flag is ON (S9316). If the demonstration display flag is off (S9316: No), it means that the value of the clock counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the fixed display effect, so the demonstration display data table is transferred to the display data table buffer. 233d (S9317), and then by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S9318). Then, the time data corresponding to the presentation time of the demonstration display data table is set in the clock counter 233h (S9319). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S9320), the demonstration display flag indicating that the demonstration is being performed in the ON state is set to ON (S9321), the processing ends, and the processing returns to the V interrupt processing.

As a result, after the fixed display effect is completed, when the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variable effect or the opening command is not received, the demonstration effect is automatically displayed on the third pattern display device 81. You can set the drawing content to be displayed.

In the process of S9316, if the demonstration display flag is ON (S9316: Yes), it means that the demonstration effect is performed after the fixed display effect is completed, and the demonstration effect is completed, so the display setting process is terminated as it is. and return to V interrupt processing. In this case, various settings are made so that the demonstration effect is started again by the pointer updating process executed in the next V interrupt process. The demonstration effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81 until a new display variation pattern command is received.

The simple display setting process (S8309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, one of the power-on variable images corresponding to the stop pattern set based on the stop type command for display is displayed for a predetermined time after the effect time of the power-on variable image ends. 145(b) or (c)) is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193, details of the transfer setting process (S8305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 192(a) is a flow chart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S9601: Yes), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so the resident image transfer setting is made. The process is executed (S9602), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 to transfer the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 192(b).

On the other hand, if the simple image display flag 233c is not turned on as a result of the processing of S9601, that is, if it is turned off (S9601: No), all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video data. It has been transferred to the RAM 235 . In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S9603), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 . Details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, resident image transfer setting processing (S9602), which is part of the transfer setting processing (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 192(b). FIG. 192(b) is a flow chart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S9602).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not a transfer instruction for untransferred image data has been issued to the image controller 237 (S9701). ), and further determines whether or not the image data transfer processing performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9702). In the process of S9702, after instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image data, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the processing of S9702 that the transfer processing has not ended (S9702: No), the image transfer processing is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so this resident image transfer setting processing is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9702: Yes), the process proceeds to S9703. Also, as a result of the process of S9701, even if the transfer instruction for the image data that has not been transferred has not been sent to the image controller 237 (S9701: No), the process proceeds to S9703.

In the process of S9703, it is determined whether or not all resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 have been transferred (S9703). A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S9704), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information about the resident target image data that has not been transferred, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer data described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident target image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (where the data is transferred). The first address of the area provided in the resident video RAM 235 where the resident target image data is to be stored is included. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and then stores it in the buffer RAM 237a while the resident video RAM 235 is not in use. , it is transferred to the specified address of the resident video RAM 235 . Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

As a result of the process of S9703, if all the resident target image data have been transferred (S9703: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to OFF (S9705), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 182(b)), the command Since determination processing (see FIGS. 183 to 188) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 189 to 191) are executed, normal image drawing is set, and the third symbol display device 81 displays A normal image is displayed. Further, subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 193) (see S9601: No in FIG. 192(a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 transfers all resident images to be resident in the resident video RAM 235, excluding the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Then, the MPU 231 controls the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 to be held without overwriting while the power is turned on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display controller 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the image controller 237 , the image drawing process can be performed. As a result, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow when drawing the image. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be immediately drawn and displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 stores image data of frequently displayed images such as rear images, third designs, character designs, and error messages, as well as main controller 110, sound lamp controller 113, and display controller 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is immediately resident after the display is determined by such as, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND type flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at any timing can be prevented. , high responsiveness can be maintained until the third pattern display device 81 displays some kind of image.

Next, normal image transfer setting processing (S9603), which is one process of the transfer setting processing (S8305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 193 is a flow chart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S9603).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S9305) of the previously executed display setting process (S8303) is used. Information described in the indicated address is acquired (S9801). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is transfer data information (S9802). , and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S9803), furthermore, a transfer start flag, which is provided in the work RAM 233 and indicates that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state, is set to ON (S9804), and the process proceeds to S9805.

Also, in the processing of S9802, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but Null data (S9802: No), the processing of S9803 and S9804 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S9805. In the process of S9805, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S9805), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S9805: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction has ended (S9806).

In the process of S9806, after setting an image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, if a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process has ended. . If it is determined by the process of S9806 that the transfer process has not ended (S9806: No), the image transfer process continues in the image controller 237, so this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the transfer process has ended (S9806: Yes), the process proceeds to S9807. Also, as a result of the process of S9805, even if no image data transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 after the previous transfer process is completed (S9805: No), the process proceeds to S9807.

In the processing of S9807, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S9807). is turned off (S9808), the image data of the sprite indicated by the various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the processing of S9803 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the processing proceeds to S9813. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S9807: No), then it is determined whether or not the back image change flag is on (S9809). Then, if the back image change flag is not on but off (S9809: No), there is no image data to start transferring, so the normal image transfer setting process ends.

On the other hand, if the back image change flag is on (S9809: Yes), it means that the back image has been changed. Of the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is specified, and the image data is set as the image data to be transferred (S9811). Furthermore, the head address (storage source head address) and the end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is stored, and the transfer destination (usually (S9812), and the process proceeds to S9813.

When the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, all the corresponding image data are resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, so the image to be transferred to the normal video RAM 236 Data does not exist. Therefore, in the processing of S9812, if the back image discrimination flag in the ON state is for the back A, the normal image transfer processing ends.

In the process of S9813, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred has already been stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813). The determination in the processing of S9813 is performed by referring to the stored image data determination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the sprite to be transferred is normal video If it is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236 and the storage state is "OFF", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

As a result of the process of S9813, if the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S9813: Yes), there is no need to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , the normal image transfer setting process ends. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, thereby reducing the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240. can be planned.

On the other hand, if the image data to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the process of S9813 (S9813: No), a transfer instruction for the image data to be transferred is set (S9814). As a result, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 receives the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 . The transfer data information includes the head address and the end address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data of the image to be transferred, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (here, the transfer destination). The start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is to be stored. The image controller 237 executes image transfer processing based on this transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer processing from the character ROM 234, and specifies the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). forward to the specified address. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231 .

After the processing of S9814, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S9815), and this normal transfer setting processing is terminated. The stored image data determination flag 233i is updated by, as described above, setting the storage state corresponding to the sprite that has become the image data to be transferred to "ON", and by substituting the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are to be stored in the area to "off".

By executing the normal image transfer processing in this way, the processing corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the previously executed command determination processing. When the displayed stop type information is determined to be a jackpot stop type, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. Further, when the back image is changed based on the reception of the back image change command in the previously executed command determination process, the image data used for the back image is stored in the back image of the resident video RAM 235 . Image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in this control example, the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d in accordance with a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. , a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. By executing the normal image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 sends data to the image controller 237 in accordance with the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the sprite image data used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. can be done.

Here, the transfer data table stores the image data to be transferred so that the image data corresponding to the given sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the given sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is defined for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, thereby obtaining the predetermined address according to the display data table. When the sprite is drawn, the image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 194, details of the drawing process (S8306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 194 is a flow chart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites that make up one frame determined in task processing (S8304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information , color information, filter designation information) and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the drawing list shown in FIG. 149 is generated (S9901). That is, in the processing of S9901, the type and address of the storage RAM in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites forming one frame determined in the task processing (S8304). , parameters necessary for the sprite determined by task processing are associated with the specified storage RAM type and address. Then, each sprite is rearranged in order from the sprite that should be placed on the backmost side to the sprite that should be placed on the front side in the image for one frame. As drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which sprite image data is stored and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S8305), the top address (storage source top address) of the character ROM 234 where the image data to be transferred is stored as the transfer data information is displayed at the end of the drawing list. , the final address (storage source final address), and the top address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236).

As described above, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the subarea of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite. , according to the sprite type, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S9902). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b. When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1, the drawing target buffer information includes information instructing to expand the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws the image in order from the sprite described at the head of the drawing list, and develops it by overwriting in the frame buffer indicated by the drawing object buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

When transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the transfer data information is used to determine the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. ), and the head address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236), and the image data stored from the head address of the storage source to the end address of the storage source are sequentially read from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a are sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination top address of the normal video RAM 236 when the normal video RAM 236 is not in use. The image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list transmitted from the MPU 231 after that, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously developed image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer designated by the drawing object buffer information, and sends the image information along with the drive signal to the third pattern display device 81. Send to As a result, the image developed in the frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, while developing the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image developed from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third pattern display 81, and the drawing process and the display process can be processed simultaneously in parallel. can be done.

In the rendering process, after the process of S9902, the rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated (S9903). Then, the drawing process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The rendering target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the load process (see FIG. 182(b)) is performed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. is executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing processing for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information for the first half is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. .

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. . After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By specifying these alternately, it is possible to perform display processing of an image for one frame continuously in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing processing for an image for one frame is being performed.

<Second control example>
Next, a second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 195 to 200. FIG. In the above-described first control example, during the jackpot game, an additional effect can be executed when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63 or an over-win to the specific winning opening 65a. Then, when a ball wins in each winning hole, an execution lottery is performed to determine whether or not to execute an additional performance, and when the execution lottery is won, the additional performance is executed. However, the timing at which the ball enters each prize-winning slot varies, and the execution lottery may be won in succession. There was a problem of providing

On the other hand, in the second control example, a new additional effect is not executed while the additional effect is being executed. As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand due to overlapping of a plurality of additional effects.

Furthermore, in the second control example, the length of the period during which execution of a new additional effect is prohibited is made different according to the type of the additional effect. Specifically, when an additional effect that increases the winning rate is executed, the new additional effect is not executed until the additional effect is completed, and when the additional effect for liveliness is executed, that additional effect is executed. A new additional performance can be executed even during the period of the additional performance. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute an additional performance for providing information (increasing the winning rate) that is advantageous to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and to duplicate the additional performance for the lively additional performance. By doing so, the performance effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, in the second control example, when the execution condition for the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the additional effect is internally executed based on the establishment of the execution condition. A processing for determining a performance mode is performed, and when an additional performance for providing information (increasing the winning rate) that is advantageous to the player is determined, the result of the processing is temporarily stored. After a new additional effect can be executed, when performing an additional effect that provides information (win rate increase) that is advantageous to the player, the processing results of the temporarily stored additional effect are included. It is configured to execute additional production. In addition, the number of times the condition for executing the additional performance is satisfied is also stored during the period in which the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited, and the new additional performance can be executed based on the stored number of times. It is configured to be able to determine the performance mode of the additional performance to be executed.

By constructing in this way, a player actively playing a game to execute an additional performance during a jackpot game is allowed to continue and actively play the game even during the execution period of the additional performance. be able to.

<Regarding the production content of the second control example>
First, with reference to FIG. 195, the contents of characteristic effects among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the second control example will be described. In contrast to the above-described first control example, the second control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the additional effect is executed according to the number of times the execution condition for the additional effect is satisfied (the number of stock times) during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited. The difference is that it is configured to vary the mode of presentation. Therefore, the content of the additional effect executed according to the number of stocks will be described.

FIG. 195(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when a point acquisition effect (additional effect) is executed in a state in which two additional effects are stocked. As shown in FIG. 195(a), when the conditions for executing the additional effect are satisfied at the timing when the new additional effect can be executed (when the ball enters the general ball entrance 63 and wins the execution lottery 2), an additional effect is executed in which capsules 801 corresponding to the number of stocks of the additional effect are successively obtained.

This capsule 801 is the same as the additional effect shown in FIG. 121(b) of the above-described first control example. In FIG. 195(a), characters "10%" are displayed to indicate that the winning percentage displayed in the display area HR1 is increased by 10%. A second capsule 801b and a third capsule 801c are displayed corresponding to the number of stocks of additional effects. That is, the display screen shown in FIG. 195(a) is a display screen when the point acquisition effect (additional effect) is executed in a state where the additional effect is stocked twice. run continuously.

The contents 801a of the second capsule 801b and the third capsule 801c are displayed in the same manner as the capsule 801, and information that is advantageous to the player (information indicating an increase in the winning percentage and information on the presence or absence of consecutive wins) is displayed. be. By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game actively so as to actively execute the additional performance even during the period in which the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited.

In addition, in this control example, when the execution lottery for the additional performance is won during the period in which the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited, the number of winning times of the execution lottery ( number of stocks) is counted and stored. Then, when the execution lottery for the additional performance is won at the timing at which the new additional performance can be executed, the number of times of stock is determined, and the additional performance is executed in a performance mode according to the determined number of times of stock. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to omit the process of setting the effect mode for the additional effect to be stocked, so that the process for determining the effect mode can be simplified.

Furthermore, in this control example, the effect mode (additional effect type) corresponding to the stock of the additional effect is configured to be the same as the effect mode (additional effect type) set as the additional effect to be newly executed. ing. That is, when the type of the additional effect to be newly executed is the additional effect type of the point acquisition effect, as shown in FIG. The production mode is determined as follows. By constructing in this way, it is possible to continuously execute the additional performance corresponding to the additional performance type set for one additional performance, so that the player can easily understand the performance. can be done.

Also, in FIG. 195(a), the point acquisition effect was explained as an example, but for example, when the lively effect is set as the additional effect type, the lively effect is continuously executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of stocks. be done. With this configuration, the effect described above with reference to FIGS. 122 and 123, that is, the effect of giving a privilege to the player when the lively effect is executed according to a specific rule, is executed in a short period of time. It becomes possible to

In addition, in this control example, during the period in which the execution of the additional effect is prohibited, the number of times the lottery for executing the additional effect is won is stored. It may be configured so as to store information for which even the mode of presentation has been determined. In addition, in this control example, the number of times the lottery for the execution of the additional performance has been won is stored. It may be configured to store the number of times the acquisition effect is set.

In addition, it is preferable to execute a notification effect on the display screen to notify the player that the current stock period of the additional effect is in effect. As a result, the player can easily grasp the situation in which a new additional effect is not executed even though the ball is entered into the general ball entrance 63.例文帳に追加In this case, for example, by varying the effect mode of the additional effect being executed, it is possible to notify that it is the stock period of the additional effect, or to display the characters "additional effect stock" in the sub-display area Ds as a guide mode. Good luck.

Next, with reference to FIG. 195(b), the effect mode of the additional effect when the stock count reaches the upper limit number will be described. In this control example, a maximum of 10 additional effects can be stocked, and when the number of stocks reaches the upper limit (10), the number of additional effects corresponding to the number of , the additional effect of the special effect mode is executed.

With this configuration, when the number of stocks of additional effects increases, the number of additional effects corresponding to the number of stocks shown in FIG. can be suppressed. Further, by increasing the number of stocks, it is possible to execute the additional effect of the special effect mode, so that the player can be motivated to play the game to stock the additional effect.

It should be noted that a condition for executing the additional effect of this special effect mode may be provided separately. It is determined whether the production period of is likely to be longer than the remaining period of the round game, and if it is judged that the production period of the additional production to be executed this time may be longer than the remaining period of the round game may be configured to execute an additional effect in a special effect mode having a shorter effect period than the additional effect normally executed. By configuring in this way, the effect period of the additional effect can be easily contained within the round game period, so that the control processing for executing the additional effect can be simplified.

As shown in FIG. 195(b), when the additional effect of the special effect mode is executed, the capsule 801s with the angel pattern and the capsule 801t with the skull pattern appear in the main display area Dm. , and the characters 801u of "Which one to open" are displayed. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "winning rate 100% or 0%" is displayed as a guidance mode for guiding the effect content of the current additional effect.

In other words, in the additional effect shown in FIG. 195(b), the effect of notifying the game state set after the end of the jackpot game is executed. Here, when the capsule 801s with the angel pattern is opened, the win rate of 100% is displayed in the display area HR1, and when the capsule 801t with the skull pattern is opened, the win rate of 0% is displayed in the display area HR1. be.

In this control example, the period during which the additional effect is stocked is set in at least a part of the period during which the additional effect is executed. A period for stocking the additional effect may be settable even during the period during which the additional effect is not displayed. By configuring in this way, for example, the additional effect is executed while the effect other than the additional effect executed during the jackpot game is being executed, and the effect of giving a privilege that is effective to the player is being executed. can be suppressed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the second control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 196, configurations of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the second control example will be described. FIG. 196(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222. FIG. As shown in FIG. 196(a), this second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that an additional effect selection table 222aa is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The additional effect selection table 222aa is a data table referred to for selecting the effect mode of the additional effect to be executed when the conditions for executing the additional effect are satisfied. In this additional effect selection table 222aa, an additional effect for increasing the winning rate and an additional effect for liveliness are defined in correspondence with the value of the stock counter 223an and the acquired value of the effect counter 223f. That is, in the second control example, the effect of the additional effect to be executed according to the number of times (the value of the stock counter 223an) the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited. It is configured so that the mode can be varied, and the greater the value of the stock counter 223an, the more likely it is that an additional effect for increasing the winning rate, that is, an additional effect that is advantageous to the player will be selected. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to increase the value of the stock counter 223an.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 will be described with reference to FIG. 196(b). FIG. 196(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 196(b), this second control example differs from the above-described first control example in that an effecting timer 223am and a stock counter 223an are added, and the rest is the same. . The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The effecting timer 223am is a timer for measuring a period during which the execution of a new additional effect is prohibited, and when the execution of the additional effect is set, a period corresponding to the type of the additional effect to be executed is set. be done. Then, in the effect update process (S4011) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 162) of the sound lamp control device 113, the value of the timer is subtracted. Then, when the condition for executing the additional performance is established, the value of the timer 223am during performance is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the current time is the additional performance prohibition period during which the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited.

In this second control example, the length of the additional effect execution prohibition period is determined according to the type of the additional effect, instead of prohibiting the execution of the new additional effect during the entire period during the execution period of the additional effect ( A value is set in the timer 223am during the performance), and the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited during the additional performance execution period. By configuring in this way, for example, only the period in which information beneficial to the player is notified in the effect period of the additional effect is set as the additional effect execution prohibition period, or other conditions (for example, acquired If the condition that is established when information indicating jackpot winning is included in the special figure 2 pending) is established, the period different from the case where it is not established will be the additional effect execution prohibition period can be easily executed.

Further, even in the pachinko machine 10 configured such that the execution period of the additional effect can be varied based on the timing at which the player operates the operation means (the frame button 22), the execution timing of the additional effect set to be executed. It is possible to easily set the additional effect execution prohibition period in accordance with the execution period.

The stock counter 223an is a counter for accumulating the number of times that the conditions for executing the additional effect are satisfied during the additional effect execution prohibition period. The value of the stock counter 223an is incremented by 1 when the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied during the additional effect execution prohibition period. Then, it is referred to in the processing for determining the performance mode of the additional performance, and is used in the processing for facilitating selection of an additional performance of a different performance mode as the performance mode of the additional performance according to the value of the stock counter 223an. Then, the value is reset to 0 when a new additional effect is executed or when the jackpot game (round game) ends.

Details of the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222aa will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 196(b) is a diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the additional effect selection table 222aa. In this additional effect selection table 222aa, the upper limit value of the winning rate stored in the upper limit winning rate storage area 223j, the difference value between the upper limit value and the winning rate currently displayed in the display area HR1, the value of the stock counter 223an, In association with the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, the effect modes of the additional effect for increasing the winning rate and the additional effect for liveliness are defined respectively.

Specifically, when the winning rate upper limit is "100" and the difference value is "50~", the normal "point addition effect (Fig. 121(b) 195(a)” corresponding to the number of stocks “1 to 3”, and “special point addition effect” for the number of stocks “4~”. (See FIG. 195(b))" is defined.

In addition, when the difference value is "~49", the normal "additional point effect (see Fig. 121(b))" is set to "1 to 3" when the stock number of additional effects is "0". 122(b)) corresponding to the number of stocks, and for the number of stocks "4 or more", a "special lively additional effect" is defined.

In addition, when the winning rate upper limit is "79 to 99" and the difference value is "50 ~", the normal "point addition effect (see Fig. 121 (b) )” corresponds to the number of stocks “1 to 3”, “point addition effect (see FIG. 195(a))” corresponding to the number of stocks “4~” corresponds to the number of stocks “ Point addition effect (see FIG. 195(a))” is stipulated.

In addition, when the difference value is "~49", the normal "lively effect" (see Fig. 122(b)) is set to "1 to 3" when the additional effect stock count is "0". On the other hand, a "lively effect" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined, and a "lively effect" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined for the number of stocks "4 or more".

Furthermore, when the winning rate upper limit is "~78" and the difference value is "50~", the normal "point addition effect" (see Fig. 121 (b)) ” is a “point addition effect (see FIG. 195(a))” corresponding to the number of stocks “1 to 3”, and “point addition effect” corresponding to the number of stocks “4~” Additional effect (see FIG. 195(a))” is defined.

In addition, when the difference value is "~49", the normal "lively effect" (see Fig. 122(b)) is set to "1 to 3" when the additional effect stock count is "0". On the other hand, a "lively effect" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined, and a "lively effect" corresponding to the number of stocks is defined for the number of stocks "4 or more".

That is, in the second control example, the effect of the additional effect to be executed according to the number of times (the value of the stock counter 223an) the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited. It is configured so that the mode can be varied, and the greater the value of the stock counter 223an, the more likely it is that an additional effect for increasing the winning rate, that is, an additional effect that is advantageous to the player will be selected. there is By configuring in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to increase the value of the stock counter 223an.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the second control example>
Next, various control processes executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the second control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 198 to 200. FIG. First, with reference to FIG. 198, details of the effect update process 2 (S4061) will be described. FIG. 198 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update process 2 (S4061). This effect update process 2 (S4061) is a process that is executed in place of the effect update process (S4011) in the first control example, and timing other than the special symbol fluctuation (during the special symbol fluctuation period), that is, the jackpot This is a process for updating the value of the in-production timer 223am that is set during the game.

Of the effect update process 2 (S4061) in the second control example, in each process of S4302 to S4310, the same process as each process of the effect update process 2 (S4011) in the first control example is executed. In the process, when it is determined that the present is not during the special figure fluctuation (during the jackpot game), the production timer update process is executed (S4351), and then the process is shifted to S4310. is different from the effect update process (see S4061) described above.

Here, with reference to FIG. 199, the contents of the effect timer update process (S4351) will be described. FIG. 199 is a flow chart showing the content of the effect timer update process (S4351). This effect timer update process (S4351) is the process executed when it is determined that the present is not in the special figure fluctuation (S4301 of FIG. 198: No) in the effect update process 2 (see S4061 of FIG. 198). Then, a process for measuring a prohibition period for prohibiting the execution of the additional effect during the jackpot game is executed.

When the effect timer update process (S4351) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223am is greater than 0, that is, whether the prohibition period is measured by the effect timer 223am (S6001). Then, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223am is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S6001: No), the present process is terminated because the current time is not the prohibition period. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the effect timer 223am is greater than 0 (S6001: Yes), the value of the effect timer 223am is updated (S6002), and it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223am after updating is 0. Then (S6003), if it is determined to be 0, that is, if it is determined that it is time to end the prohibition period (S6003: Yes), a display command indicating that an additional effect is possible is set (S6004), and this processing is performed. exit. Also, in the process of S6003, if the value of the effect timer 223am after updating is not 0, that is, if it is determined that it is during the prohibition period (S6003: No), this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 200, the contents of the additional effect mode setting process 2 (S5059) will be described. FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the contents of the additional effect mode setting process 2 (S5059). This additional effect mode setting process 2 (S5059) is different from the above-described additional effect mode setting process (S5009 in FIG. 173) in that the process during the prohibition period is added, and the effect mode of the additional effect is added. The difference is that the process of determining is changed to the process of determining the effect mode based on the number of times the additional effect is stocked, and the rest is the same. Identical contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the additional effect mode setting process 2 (S5059) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the effect timer 223am is greater than 0, that is, whether it is during the prohibition period (S5151), and the value of the effect timer 223am is determined. If it is determined to be greater than 0 (S5151: Yes), the value of the stock counter 223an is incremented by 1 (S5152), and this processing ends.

If it is determined in the process of S5151 that the value of the effect timer 223am is not greater than 0 (is 0) (S5151: Yes), the additional effect mode setting process (S5009 in FIG. 173) of the first control example described above and The same processing of S5101 to S5103 is executed, and then the effect mode of the additional effect is determined using the additional effect selection table 222aa based on the calculated difference value and the upper limit value (S5153). The additional effect selection table 222aa used in the process of S5153 is configured so that the value of the stock counter 223an is also referred to, as described above with reference to FIG.

After completing the processing of S5153, the value of the stock counter 223an is cleared to 0 (S5154), and the processing of S5101 to S5103, which is the same as the additional effect mode setting processing of the first control example (S5009 in FIG. 173), is executed. After that, the value corresponding to the additional effect period to be executed is set to the value of the effect timer 223am (S5155), and the process is terminated.

As described above, in the second control example, the length of the period during which execution of a new additional effect is prohibited is varied according to the type of the additional effect. Specifically, when an additional effect that increases the winning rate is executed, the new additional effect is not executed until the additional effect is completed, and when the additional effect for liveliness is executed, that additional effect is executed. A new additional performance can be executed even during the period of the additional performance. By constructing in this way, it is possible to execute an additional performance for providing information (increasing the winning rate) that is advantageous to the player in an easy-to-understand manner, and to duplicate the additional performance for the lively additional performance. By doing so, the performance effect can be further enhanced.

In addition, in the second control example, when the execution condition for the additional effect is satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the additional effect is internally executed based on the establishment of the execution condition. A processing for determining a performance mode is performed, and when an additional performance for providing information (increasing the winning rate) that is advantageous to the player is determined, the result of the processing is temporarily stored. After a new additional effect can be executed, when performing an additional effect that provides information (win rate increase) that is advantageous to the player, the processing results of the temporarily stored additional effect are included. It is configured to execute additional production. In addition, the number of times the condition for executing the additional performance is satisfied is also stored during the period in which the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited, and the new additional performance can be executed based on the stored number of times. It is configured to be able to determine the performance mode of the additional performance to be executed.

By constructing in this way, a player actively playing a game to execute an additional performance during a jackpot game is allowed to continue and actively play the game even during the execution period of the additional performance. be able to.

<Regarding the third control example>
Next, a third control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 206. FIG. In the first control example described above, among the additional effects that are executed during the jackpot game, when the additional effect for liveliness is executed, unless the predetermined condition is satisfied (the jackpot is (unless information indicating winning is included), a specific number of additional performances in the same display mode are not displayed continuously, and the player is also interested in the additional performance for liveliness. was configured to However, in the above-described first control example, the display mode of the additional effect for liveliness is set at random, and only when the randomly set display mode is the same two times in succession, the predetermined condition is satisfied. Since the display mode is configured to be variable depending on the presence or absence of the display, there is little opportunity for the same display mode to be displayed three times in succession, and the presentation effect is not favorably enhanced.

On the other hand, in the present third control example, as the display mode of the additional effect for liveliness executed during the jackpot game, the display mode is randomly determined within a range excluding the display mode displayed in the past, The type of information provided to the player is made different according to the combination of the display modes at the time when the additional effect for liveliness is executed a specific number of times (five times). By constructing in this way, when the additional effect for liveliness is executed a specific number of times, some information is provided to the player based on the result of the effect, so the effect mode is randomly set for the player. It is possible to reliably give a privilege based on the specific number of executions of the additional performance for liveliness, and to suitably enhance the performance effect.

Furthermore, in the third control example, it is possible to inform the player of which display mode is displayed as an additional effect for making the player more likely to receive a privilege that is advantageous to the player. As a result, the player can play the game while expecting that a desired display mode will be set for the display mode of the additional effect for liveliness that is set at random.

This third control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the effect content of the additional effect executed during the jackpot game is different, and in order to differentiate the effect content of the additional effect, voice ramp control is performed. The difference is that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the device 113 is partially changed, and the content of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is partially changed, but the rest is the same. Differences from the above-described first control example will be mainly described below, and detailed descriptions of the same contents as in the first control example will be omitted.

<Regarding the contents of the performance in the pachinko machine of the third control example>
Here, with reference to FIG. 201 and FIG. 202, among the various effects executed in the third control example, characteristic effects will be described. In the third control example, the effect contents of the additional effect executed during the jackpot game are different from those in the above-described first control example.

FIG. 201(a) is a diagram showing a display screen when a jackpot game is started. As shown in FIG. 201(a), when the jackpot game is started, a bingo card is displayed in the display area HR20 formed in the center of the main display area Dm, and "Bingo Game Start" is displayed above the bingo card. characters are displayed. Then, as a game guidance mode for suggesting a privilege based on the effect result of the bingo game, characters of "Get secret information with the number of established lines" are displayed. Furthermore, in the secondary display area Ds, a comment "A maximum of 5 types of numbers will appear" is displayed as a game guidance mode for guiding that the number that can be obtained in this bingo game is 5 types. be.

As a result, the player who has started the jackpot game can easily understand that the privilege is given according to the number of lines established by the maximum five types of numbers that can be obtained during the bingo game. In addition, in the third control example, as in the first control example described above, additional effects such as entering a ball into the general ball entrance 63 and over-winning into the specific winning opening 65a during a jackpot game are executed. It is an opportunity. Then, as an additional effect, an effect in which numbers are displayed is executed, and the bingo game progresses. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to establish the execution opportunity of the additional effect in order to proceed with the bingo game.

When the jackpot game progresses from the state shown in FIG. 201(a) and an additional effect is executed based on the ball entering the general ball entrance 63, the display screen shown in FIG. 201(b) is executed. is displayed. FIG. 201(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when an additional effect is executed in a bingo game executed during a jackpot game. As shown in FIG. 201(b), when the condition for executing the additional effect is satisfied (when the execution of the additional effect is determined based on the ball entering the general ball entrance 63), a randomly set number is displayed. In FIG. 201(b), a display icon 820 indicating the number "1" is displayed, and a display mode in which the area corresponding to the number "1" of the bingo card in the display area HR20 is filled (marked with a cross in the figure). display) is displayed.

Furthermore, a display area HR21 is formed to display acquired numbers as a history. This display area HR21 is formed in a size corresponding to the number of display icons 820 obtainable in the current bingo game, and as shown in FIG. (“1”)) is displayed, it is possible for the player to predict how many types of remaining display icons 820 can be obtained. In other words, the display area HR21 has a history display mode for informing the player of the number of display icons 820 obtained during the bingo game and the types of numbers indicated by the display icons 820 in an easy-to-understand manner. This allows the player to easily grasp how many more types of display icons 820 can be obtained during the bingo game.

In the example shown in FIG. 201(a), as the display mode of the displayed bingo card, there is a display mode in which nine types of numbers (“1” to “9”) are displayed in nine square areas. Although displayed, the display mode of the bingo cards used in the bingo game is not limited to this, and may be, for example, an overlapping display mode in which the same number is displayed in a plurality of areas. In this case, when numbers displayed in a plurality of areas are set as an additional effect, the number of bingo establishment lines can be easily increased, and numbers displayed in a plurality of areas are not set as an additional effect. In such a case, it is possible to make it difficult for the bingo to be established, so that a well-balanced effect can be executed for the player. In addition, since it is difficult for the player to predict the number of lines on which bingo will be established until the last display icon 820 is displayed, the player can be kept interested until the end of the bingo game.

When the bingo game ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 202(a) is displayed. FIG. 202(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the fifth kind of display icon 820 (number "9") is displayed. As shown in FIG. 202(a), the player is notified by the history display in the display area HR21 that the fifth type of display icon 820 has been displayed. Specifically, the history display in the display area HR21 indicates that the display icons 820 indicating the numbers "1", "3", "5", "7", and "9" were displayed in the current bingo game. is displayed.

In the display area HR20, the areas corresponding to the numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) indicated by the display icons 820 acquired this time are displayed in a display mode (displayed with crosses), and the results of the bingo game are displayed. A display mode indicating that the number of lines on which bingo is established is two is displayed. In addition, above the main display area Dm, characters "2 lines established" are displayed as a result display mode indicating the result of the current bingo game. Furthermore, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment "Congratulations" is displayed as a guide mode indicating whether the result of the current bingo game is advantageous to the player.

In the example of the bingo game shown in FIGS. 201 and 202, as shown in FIG. 201(a), nine types of numbers (“1” to “9”) are displayed in a nine-square area. Since the bingo game using the bingo card is being executed, if the type of the acquired number is, for example, "1", "2", "3", "4", "5", the bingo establishment line The number becomes 1 line. Also, if the additional effect is not executed five times during the jackpot game, five types of the display icons 820 cannot be acquired, so there is a possibility that the number of bingo establishment lines will be zero. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 202(b), when the number of lines for establishing bingo is two, the result of the bingo game is a result that is advantageous to the player (upper limit of the number of lines that can be assumed to be established). A comment "Congratulations" is displayed.

The guidance mode displayed in the sub-display area Ds is configured to change the display mode according to the result of the bingo game. For example, in the example of the bingo game shown in FIGS. When 5 types of 820 are acquired and the number of bingo establishment lines is 1 line, the comment "participation prize" is displayed in a state where 5 types of display icons 820 are not acquired and the number of bingo establishment lines is 1 line. In this case, the comment "It's a participation prize, but you could have worked harder" indicating that the upper limit number of additional effects was not executed is displayed in a state where 5 types of display icons 820 have not been acquired, and the number of bingo establishment lines is 0. In the case of , a comment of "sorry" is displayed. In this way, by varying the content of the guidance mode indicating the result of the bingo game according to the number of execution times of additional effects and the number of lines on which bingo is established, the game can be played whether the result of the current bingo game was good or not. It is easy for people to understand.

Then, after the bingo game ends, as shown in FIG. 202(b), a privilege corresponding to the number of lines on which bingo is established is provided. FIG. 202(b) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of privilege information based on the result of the bingo game. In the third control example, as the benefits given to the player as a result of the bingo game, the game state information indicating the game state set after the end of the jackpot game, and the special figure 2 that has already been acquired during the jackpot game. It is configured to provide privilege information such as consecutive-chance information indicating winning of a jackpot (information indicating that it will be a reserved consecutive jackpot). is configured to be displayed in a manner that is easy for the player to distinguish.

In FIG. 202(b), as the game state information, characters of "probability change confirmed" are displayed in the main display area Dm as a display mode for clearly notifying that the probability change state is set after the jackpot game ends, and the sub display area Ds. In the , the characters "You did it" are displayed to congratulate you on setting the variable state. As described above with reference to FIG. 202(a), FIG. 202(b) is given to the player because the result of the bingo game is advantageous to the player (the number of lines for which bingo is established is 2). As the privilege information, the display mode is displayed so that the player can easily determine that the variable probability state is set. A mode, that is, a display mode only suggesting the possibility of setting a variable probability state is displayed, and when the number of lines for establishing bingo is 0, a display mode of ``no benefits'' is displayed, that is, the display mode is set after the jackpot game ends. The display mode for notifying (suggesting) the game state is configured not to be displayed.

As a result, the player who wants to quickly determine the game state set after the end of the big win game can be made interested in the bingo game executed during the big win game.

In addition, in this control example, as the privilege information to be given to the player according to the result of the bingo game, information regarding any one of the plurality of privilege types (game state information, consecutive chance information) is given. It is configured as follows. By configuring in this way, for example, when the result of the bingo game executed during the jackpot game in which the time saving state is set after the jackpot game ends is advantageous to the player, the game state information (time saving Instead of clearly notifying the player of the information indicating that the state is set, it is possible to notify the player of information (for example, consecutive win information) that is advantageous to the player possessed by another privilege type. .

In the third control example, the display mode is set based on the result of the bingo game for the privilege type that is advantageous to the player among the plurality of privilege types, but this is not limitative. Instead, the display mode may be set based on the result of the bingo game only for the game state information indicating the game state set after the end of the jackpot game. In this case, a situation may occur in which the player is clearly notified that the time-saving state is set after the jackpot game ends, but the time-saving state is also set in the display mode indicating that the time-saving state is set. In spite of this, it is possible to suppress the excessive decrease in the player's willingness to play when the time saving state ends due to excessive expectations that the variable probability state is set. It can be said that it is useful information for

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 203, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. FIG. 203 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 203, the third control example differs from the above-described second control example in that an array storage area 223ba, a selected information storage area 223bb, and a display number counter 223bc are added. , are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The array storage area 223ba is a storage area for temporarily storing the number type set for each area (9 squares) of the bingo card used in the bingo game. a), the upper left area where "1" is displayed on the bingo card shown in FIG. It has 9 types of storage areas corresponding to 9 areas (lower right area where "9" is displayed on the bingo card shown in FIG. 201(a)), and numbers determined at the start of the bingo game. It is stored in the recording area corresponding to the type. Then, at the end of the bingo game, it is referred to when specifying the number of lines where bingo is established by the number type resulting as the display mode of the additional effect.

By constructing in this way, the number of lines established in the bingo game can be reliably determined even when the type of numbers displayed on the bingo card is randomly determined at the start of the bingo game. be able to.

In this control example, the type of numbers to be displayed on the bingo card is determined randomly. A player may select one bingo card from among them. In this case, the ROM 222 of the MPU of the voice lamp control device 113 stores in advance information corresponding to the number arrangement of a plurality of types of bingo cards, and the information corresponding to the selection result of the player is read out and stored in the arrangement storage area 223ba. It should be configured so that it is stored in . With this configuration, the type (type of number) of the display icon 820 that is randomly determined for the number array selected by the player from among a plurality of patterns predetermined as the number array of the bingo card is selected. Since the bingo game used is executed, it is possible to change the result of the bingo game according to the player's selection result. Therefore, in the player-participation type production, it is possible to easily make the player happy and sad.

In addition, when the player is configured to be able to select one bingo card from among a plurality of bingo cards having a predetermined array of numbers, each bingo card can be selected when the player selects a bingo card. It is preferable to display a selection screen that allows confirmation of the number array specified in . As a result, the player can proceed with the bingo game while considering whether the selection of the bingo card is appropriate or not, thereby making it easier to improve the interest in the game.

Further, in this case, it is preferable that the bingo game proceeds in a state in which the player can confirm at least one of the number arrays defined on the bingo cards that the player has not selected. As a result, the player can more easily determine whether or not the selection of the bingo card is appropriate.

Further, even when the number array is determined for each area of the bingo card as in the third control example, the player may be allowed to select arbitrary numbers. It is possible to easily make the player happy and sad in the presentation of the pattern.

In the third control example, the bingo game is executed using the bingo card determined at the time the bingo game is started. When a condition is established, for example, when a specific effect result is established in a mini-game in which the effect result is changed by the player operating the operation means, the number array of the bingo card may be configured to be variable. good. As a result, even if the progress of the bingo game is unsatisfactory, it is possible to change the progress of the bingo game to a situation that is advantageous to the player by varying the number arrangement of the bingo cards. It is possible to execute an effect that arouses the interest of the player until the game is over.

The selected information storage area 223bb is a storage area for storing information indicating the display mode already selected as the display mode of the additional effect to be executed during the jackpot game, and when the display mode of the additional effect is selected. is stored information indicating the selected display mode. Then, the stored information is read when the next additional effect is executed, and the display mode is selected from a range excluding the display mode indicated by the read information. By configuring in this way, when the additional effect is executed a plurality of times, the additional effect can be executed in various display modes without selecting the same display mode.

Further, in the third control example, the display mode of the additional effect during the jackpot game is configured to indicate the number type used in the bingo game. As the history display displayed in the display area HR21, a display mode corresponding to the information stored in the selected information storage area 223bb is displayed.

The display number counter 223bc is a counter for measuring the number of executions of the additional effects, and a value corresponding to the number of times of the additional effects that can be executed during the jackpot game is set based on the start of the jackpot game, and the additional effects are executed. The value is decremented each time it is executed. Then, when the value of the display number counter 223bc becomes 0, a result effect is executed according to the result of the additional effect.

In the third control example, when the bingo game is started, the number of times the additional effects are executed (the number of times the display icons 820 are displayed) is determined, and the display icons 820 are displayed for the determined number of times. In this control example, since the additional effect is not executed in the same display mode, the number types obtainable in the bingo game can be increased as the number of times the additional effect is executed increases.

In this way, even when the number of executions of additional effects is variable, the number of times of execution of additional effects is set as the value of the display number counter 223bc, and each time the additional effects are executed, the display number counter 223bc is displayed. is subtracted, the result of the bingo game can be reliably displayed when the additional effect is executed for the determined number of times.

<Regarding control processing of the audio ramp control device in the third control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 204 to 206, control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 in the third control example will be described. This third control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the effect executed during the jackpot game is different. More specifically, in the above-described first control example, when a ball enters the general ball entrance 63 during a jackpot game, or when a ball enters the specific prize-winning hole 65a during a jackpot game. In addition, an additional performance is configured to be executable, and as the additional performance, a performance mode for increasing the winning rate or a performance mode for liveliness can be selected.

On the other hand, in the present third control example, the bingo game can be executed during the jackpot game, and the type of numbers used in the bingo game can be displayed as an additional effect.

First, with reference to FIG. 204, the contents of the effect setting process 3 (S4572) during winning will be described. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing the contents of the effect setting process 3 (S4572) during winning. As shown in FIG. 204, the hit production setting process 3 (S4572) in the third control example is the hit production setting process (see S4502 in FIG. 168) in the first control example described above. "777") is different in that the contents of the processing to be executed when it is determined that the stop display is not performed, but the other points are the same. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

When the hitting effect setting process 3 (S4572) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the stop display mode (jackpot design) of the third symbol stopped and displayed this time is "777" (S4601), and "777". If it is determined that it is (S4601: Yes), the processing of S4602, S4603, S4609, which is the same as the hit effect setting processing (see S4502 in FIG. 168) in the first control example described above, is executed, and this processing ends. do. On the other hand, in the processing of S4601, when it is determined that the jackpot symbol is not "777", that is, the stop display mode of the third symbol for indicating the jackpot winning is not the stop display mode indicating that the probability variable jackpot is won. (S4601: No), next, the number array of the bingo card is determined (S4651).

Here, the processing contents of S4651 will be described. In this third control example, nine types of numbers "1" to "9" are prepared as the number types used in the number arrangement of the bingo card. Specifically, it is stored in advance in the numeric information storage area of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 . As shown in FIG. 202(a), nine areas (first to ninth areas) are defined in the bingo card, and each area is stored in the number information storage area. A process of randomly determining one number type from among the number types by lottery is executed.

When the processing of S4651 is completed, the numeric array determined in the processing of S4651 is stored in the array storage area 223ba (S4652), the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 5 (S4653), and the process proceeds to S4608.

In the process of S4653, the number of additional effects to be executed during the bingo game, that is, the number of times the display icon 820 (see FIG. 202(a)) is displayed is defined. This value is configured so that different values can be selected based on the type of jackpot to be executed. The jackpot type in which the variable probability state is set is configured so that a larger value is likely to be set. In this way, by configuring the display number counter 223bc to be able to set different values depending on the type of jackpot, a jackpot game that can provide information that is advantageous to the player (information indicating that the probability variable jackpot) is better. , it is possible to easily increase the number of lines on which bingo is established in a bingo game.

In addition, different processing may be performed as processing for determining the value to be set in the display number counter 223bc. A larger value may be set in the display number counter 223bc more easily than in the case where the display number counter 223bc is not set. , In a state in which information indicating jackpot winning is included in the acquired special figure 2 reservation, a specific value (for example, 2) may be set to the display number counter 223bc. As a result, it is possible to forcibly end the bingo game while the number of lines for establishing bingo is 0, and to provide the above-described specific information, even though the bingo game has started. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected production for the player, and enhance the production effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 205, the contents of the round effect setting process 3 (S4576) will be described. FIG. 205 is a flow chart showing the contents of the round effect setting process 3 (S4576). This round effect setting process 3 (S4576) is different from the round effect setting process (see S4506) of the first control example described above, and performs a process for ending the bingo game when a specific round game is executed. They are different in that they are added, and are otherwise the same.

When the round effect setting process 3 (S4576) is executed, first, the same processes of S4701 to S4706 as the round effect setting process (see S4506) of the first control example described above are executed. Then, when the processing of S4705 or S4706 is completed, it is determined whether the round game to be executed this time is the 8th round (S4771), and if it is determined that it is the 8th round (S4771: Yes), the display number It is determined whether the value of the counter 223bc is 0 (S4772), and if it is determined that it is not 0, that is, if it is determined that the bingo game has not ended when the eighth round is started (S4772). : No), the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 1 (S4773), the same processing of S4707 as the round effect setting processing (see S4506) of the first control example described above is executed, and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S4771, if it is determined that the round game to be started this time is not the eighth round (S4771: No), or in the process of S4772, the value of the display number counter 223bc is 0, that is, already If it is determined that the bingo game has ended (S4772: Yes), the process of S4773 is skipped, the process proceeds to S4707, and then the process ends.

As described above, in the round effect setting process 3 (S4576), although the jackpot game has progressed to the specific timing (8th round start timing), additional effects are executed for a predetermined number of times. When the additional performance is not executed, the processing for terminating the execution of the additional performance is executed when the additional performance is executed next time, regardless of the number of times of the additional performance executed so far. As a result, while the bingo game is being executed, the additional effect (display of the display icon 820) is not executed a predetermined number of times (five times), and the jackpot game ends before the bingo game ends. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the result of the bingo game cannot be notified to the player.

In this control example, by setting the value of the display number counter 223bc to 1 in the process of S4773, the value of the display number counter 223bc becomes 0 when the additional effect is executed next time, and the result of the bingo game is determined. However, without being limited to this, the value of the display number counter 223bc is set to 0 in the processing of S4773, and the result of the bingo game is notified during the eighth round game. can be configured to By configuring in this way, the result of the bingo game can be reliably notified during the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 206, the contents of the additional effect mode setting process 3 (S5079) will be described. FIG. 206 is a flow chart showing the contents of the additional effect mode setting process 3 (S5079). This additional effect mode setting process 3 (S5079) is different from the above-described additional effect setting process 2 (see S5059 in FIG. 200), and when the value of the timer 223am during effect is greater than 0, the process related to the additional effect is completed. The difference is that it is configured to skip to , and that the process for setting the effect mode of the additional effect is different.

When the additional effect mode setting process 3 (S5079) is executed, first, it is determined whether the value of the timer 223am during effect is greater than 0 (S5151), and if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S5151: Yes) , the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not greater than 0 (it is 0) (S5151: No), then the information stored in the selected information storage area 223bb is read out, and 1 is selected from the values not stored. is determined (S5171), a display command indicating the determined value is set (S5172), information corresponding to the determined value is stored in the selected information storage area 223bb (S5173), and the displayed number counter 223bc 1 is subtracted from the value (S5174).

Then, it is determined whether the value of the display number counter 223bc after the subtraction is 0 (S5175), and if it is determined that it is not 0 (S5175: No), that is, if it is determined that the bingo game is not finished, , the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S5175, when the value of the display number counter 223bc is 0, that is, when it is determined that it is time to end the bingo game (S5175: Yes), the information stored in the array storage area 223ba (this time information indicating the number arrangement of the bingo card used in the bingo game) and information stored in the selected information storage area 223bb (number type determined by additional effect), bingo establishment line number is specified (S5176), privilege information corresponding to the specified number of established lines is determined (S5177), a display command for indicating the determined privilege information is set (S5178), and information in various storage areas is cleared. (S5179), and the process ends.

<Fourth control example>
Next, a fourth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 207 to 212. FIG. This fourth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the content of the effect executed during the win rate UP zone is different, but the rest is the same.

In the above-described first control example, as the content of the effects to be executed during the winning rate UP zone, the slot effect (see FIG. 124(a)) and the increase confirmation effect (see FIG. 125) are configured to be executable, It was configured so as to determine the effect content to be executed according to the variation pattern (variation time) type of special symbol variation for indicating the result of the special symbol lottery. Then, when the specific variation pattern type is selected as the variation pattern type, the increase confirmation effect is executed, the player is notified that the winning rate increases, and then the increase amount of the winning rate is notified. was configured to

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the content of the rising confirmation effect executed when the specific variation pattern type is selected as the variation pattern type is made different. More specifically, as the increase confirmation effect, it is possible to execute an operation effect in which the winning rate is increased by 1% based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 (continuous hit operation). By configuring in this way, the amount of increase in the winning rate during the increase confirmation performance can be varied based on the operation of the player, so that the player can be motivated to operate the frame button 22.例文帳に追加can be done.

In this control example, the winning rate of the battle effect is configured to be displayed variably between "0 to 100%". The variable (increase) slot effect and the increase fixed effect for varying (increasing) the winning rate in units of 1% are configured to be executable a plurality of times.

Here, as the winning rate display of the battle effect, if the winning rate is displayed at a specific value (for example, "77%" or "33%") in the process of executing the rising fixed effect multiple times, Since it makes the player think that the game state that is set is a game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player, it is necessary to restrict the display so that the above-mentioned specific value is not displayed.

However, if a plurality of types of effects can be executed as the winning rate increasing effects, it is necessary to perform control for all the winning rate increasing effects so that the winning rate after the increase does not reach a specific value. , there is a problem that the processing load of the display restriction processing for preventing the display of the winning percentage of the specific value increases.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the value of the winning rate displayed (the value in the first place) in the increase confirmation effect, which is the winning rate increasing effect that can increase the winning rate in the minimum unit (1%). is configured to limit the winning percentage, and the winning percentage does not become a specific value no matter what value the performance result of the other winning percentage increasing performance (slot performance) becomes. In this way, when executing a plurality of winning rate increasing effects with different increasing amounts, the display limiting process is executed for one winning rate increasing effect, and the display limiting process is not executed for the other winning rate increasing effects. By configuring, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the display restriction process.

<Regarding the effect content of the fourth control example>
Here, with reference to FIG. 207, a characteristic effect among the various effects executed in the fourth control example will be described. FIG. 207(a) is a diagram showing an example of a display screen when a continuous hitting effect is executed as the increase finalizing effect executed during the winning rate UP zone. As shown in FIG. 207(a), on the right side of the main display area Dm, a repeated hit image RG is displayed to prompt the player to operate the frame button 22. A time gauge TG is displayed below the time gauge TG for indicating the effective period of operation for which is determined to be valid. In addition, in the sub-display area Ds, characters of "Increase the winning rate by repeatedly hitting the button" are displayed as a guidance notification mode for indicating the effect contents of the repeated hitting effect.

Numerical icons 831a to 831b indicating the increased value of the winning rate are displayed from an icon 831 shaped like a pot based on the player's operation of the frame button 22 within the valid operation period. In this control example, the value by which the winning rate increases in the continuous hit effect is configured in units of "1%", and "+1%" indicating that the winning rate increases by 1% is displayed on the numerical icons 831a to 831c. It is "+?%" is displayed in the numeric icon 831d.

Here, in this control example, at the time when one win rate increase effect is completed, the win rate of a specific value (for example, "33" or "77") is displayed in the display area HR1. In order to suppress misrecognition that the jackpot game is a jackpot game that is advantageous to the player (jackpot game in which the variable probability state is set after the jackpot game ends), the winning percentage is displayed at the end of the repeated hitting performance. The display contents of the effect are controlled so that the 1's digit of the number does not become "2, 3, 7, 8".

Specifically, the 1's place of the probability display displayed in the display area HR1 is specified, and the number of times the numerical icon 831a is displayed in the continuous hitting effect is added to the specified 1's place value. When the value reaches "2, 3, 7, 8", the display icon of "+?%" is displayed as shown in the numeric icon 831d. Then, when the continuous hit effect ends, the number of displayed "+1%" is accumulated, and the value obtained by adding the specified one's place value and the accumulated number is "2, 3, 7, After the numeric icon 831d of "+?%" is displayed with a value other than "8", as shown in FIG.

FIG. 207(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen showing the effect result of the repeated hitting effect. FIG. 207(b) shows the effect result when the continuous hit effect is finished in the state shown in FIG. 207(a). If the value of is not added, the effect result will be "+3%" and the winning percentage displayed in the display area HR1 will be the specific value "33%". By displaying the value of "+2%" for the numeric icon 831d displayed as , "+5%" is displayed in the display area HR30 where the effect result of the continuous hit effect is displayed, and "+5%" is displayed in the display area HR1. A continuous hit effect is executed so that the winning percentage to be played is "35%".

As shown in FIG. 207, during the continuous hit effect, the increased value of the winning rate acquired by operating the frame button 22 is individually displayed in the main display area Dm, and after the effect result of the repeated hit effect is displayed in the display area HR30, the display area It is configured to display an addition to HR1. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the situation where the value displayed in the display area HR1 is changed during the continuous hit effect and the player cannot grasp the current win rate. In addition, it is possible to prevent the value displayed in the display area HR1 from being changed during the continuous hit effect, and the specific value from being displayed in the display area HR1 during the process.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, by variably controlling the effect contents of the continuous hit effect, the display win rate is configured not to become a specific value. You may comprise so that the production|presentation may be performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 208, another example of effect control content for preventing the displayed winning percentage from becoming a specific value will be described. FIG. 208 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen in which a plurality of win rate increasing effects are being performed in an overlapping manner. In the example shown in FIG. 208, "+4%" is displayed in the display area HR30 as the effect result of the repeated hit effect, and the effect result of the repeated hit effect (+4%) is displayed on the display win rate "73%" displayed in the display area HR1. is displayed, the displayed winning rate becomes a specific value of "77%", so an additional effect for increasing the winning rate by "+5%" is overlapped with the continuous hitting effect.

By constructing in this manner, the performance contents (display contents) can be controlled so that the win rate display does not become a specific value with respect to the performance contents of the repeated hitting performance only by performing the processing of determining whether or not to execute the additional performance. It is possible to suppress the winning percentage display from becoming a specific value.

In the above-described effect example, by controlling the display content so that the displayed winning percentage is added in the positive direction, the displayed winning percentage is suppressed from becoming a specific value without giving the player a sense of discomfort. However, without being limited to this, the displayed content may be controlled so that the displayed winning percentage varies in the negative direction.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fourth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 209, the electrical configuration in this fourth control example will be described. FIG. 209 is a diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this fourth control example. As shown in FIG. 209, this control example is different from the above-described second control example in that an undetermined flag 223ca is added, and the rest is the same. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The undetermined flag 223ca is a flag for indicating that the numerical icon 831d indicating that the winning percentage to be added is undetermined is displayed during the continuous hit effect, and is the numerical icon 831d indicating that the winning percentage to be added is undetermined. is set to on when displaying . Then, it is set to OFF when a value (win rate) given to the numerical icon 831d is determined in order to indicate the effect result of the repeated hit effect.

<Regarding the Control Contents of the Audio Ramp Control Device in the Fourth Control Example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 210 to 212, the contents of the control processing executed by the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fourth control example will be described. The fourth control example differs from the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 in the above-described first control example in that processing related to repeated hitting effects in the win rate UP zone is added. Specifically, instead of frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4007 in FIG. 163), frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (see 4057 in FIG. 210) is changed to effect update processing (see S4011 in FIG. 165). The difference is that effect update processing 4 (see S4061 in FIG. 212) is executed instead. Other than that, they are identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 210, frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (see 4057) will be described. FIG. 210 is a flow chart showing the details of frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (see 4057). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (see 4057) is different from the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (see S4007 in FIG. 163) of the first control example described above. They are the same except that they are different in that they execute processing for operations. Specifically, when frame button input monitoring/effect processing 4 (see 4057) is executed, it is determined whether the value of the effective period timer 223e is greater than 0 (S4101), and it is determined that it is not greater than 0. If so (S4101: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined to be greater than 0 (S4101: Yes), then it is determined whether the current win rate UP zone (S4151).

In the processing of S4151, based on the effect information stored in the effect information storage area 223g, it is determined whether or not the current state is the winning rate UP zone. Effect setting processing is executed (S4152), and then this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of S4151, if it is determined that the zone is not the winning rate UP zone (S4151: No), S4102 to S4111 which are the same as the frame button input monitoring/effect processing of the first control example (see S4007 in FIG. 163). , and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 211, the repeated hit effect setting process (S4152) executed in the frame button input monitoring/effect process 4 (see 4057 in FIG. 210) will be described. FIG. 211 is a flow chart showing the content of the continuous hit effect setting process (S4152). In this repeated hitting effect setting process (S4152), a process for determining the display mode of the numerical icon 831a (see FIG. 207) displayed based on the operation of the frame button 22 during the repeated hitting effect is executed.

When the continuous hit effect setting process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not pressing of the frame button 22 is detected (S4171). The displayed points displayed, that is, the value of the winning rate displayed in the display area HR1 is read out (S4172), and it is determined whether or not the tenth place of the displayed points is 7 or less (S4173). If it is determined to be 7 or less in the processing of S4173 (S4173: Yes), then it is determined whether the ones digit of the display point is "1, 2, 6, or 7" (S4174). , "1, 2, 6, 7" (S4174: Yes), it is determined whether the undetermined flag 223ca is set to ON (S4175).

If it is determined in the process of S4175 that it is not set to ON (S4175: No), a display command is set to indicate that the number of display points to be added is undetermined (S4176), and the undetermined flag 223ca is set. is turned on (S4177), and the process ends. When the display control device 114 receives the display command set in the process of S4176, the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 displays a numeric icon 831d of "+?%" (see Fig. 207).

On the other hand, in the process of S4173, if it is determined that the tens place of the display point is not 7 or less (is 8 or more) (S4173: Yes), the specific value ("33 , "77"), there is no problem in setting any value to the ones place (the specific value will not be displayed in the future), so the display point is 1 A display command is set to indicate the addition (S4178), then the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of S4174, when it is determined that none of "1, 2, 6, 7" is determined (S4174: No), there is no problem even if the continuous hit effect is executed normally, so the process proceeds to S4178. After that, the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179), and this processing ends. Furthermore, in the process of S4175, if it is determined that the undetermined flag 223ca is set to ON (S4175: No), that is, in the current continuous hit effect, the "+?%" numerical icon 831d (see FIG. 207) ) is displayed, a display command is set to indicate that the display point is incremented by 1 (S4178), then the value of the display point storage area 223r is updated (S4179), and this processing exit. As a result, it is possible to prevent a plurality of numerical icons 831d (see FIG. 207) of "+?%" from being displayed during the continuous hit effect, and the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to FIG. 212, the content of effect update processing 4 (see S4061) will be described. FIG. 212 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 4 (see S4061). In this effect update process 4 (see S4061), the value of the effective period timer 223e set for the continuous hit effect becomes 0, unlike the effect update process (see S4011 in FIG. 165) of the first control example. The difference is that the processing for the case of The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the effect update process 4 (S4061) is executed, first, the same processes of S4301 to S4304 as the effect update process of the first control example (see S4011 in FIG. 165) are executed, and in the process of S4304, If it is determined that the value of the effective period timer 223e is 0 (S4304: Yes), then it is determined whether the undetermined flag 223ca is set to ON (S4351). Then, when it is determined that the undetermined flag 223ca is set to ON (S4351: Yes), the undetermined flag 223ca is set to OFF (S4352), and the display point values are "2, 3, 7, 8 (S4353), the display points obtained by adding the determined value are stored in the display point storage area (S4354), A display command for showing the effect result of the operation effect is set (S4305), and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the process of S4304, if it is determined that the value of the effective period timer 223e is not 0 (larger than 0) (S4304: Yes), the effect update process of the first control example (see S4011 in FIG. 165) ) are executed, and the process ends.

As described above, in the fourth control example, variable stage information can be variably displayed multiple times (effect of variably displaying the winning percentage of battle effects between "0 to 100%") is executed. Furthermore, as a production mode of a variable production that changes the stage information, a production mode with a different variable amount (as a winning rate increase production that varies (increases) the winning rate displayed, the winning rate is set in units of 5% It is configured to be able to set a slot effect that is variable (increased) by , and a fixed increase effect that is variable (increased) in units of 1%.

Here, as the winning rate display of the battle effect, if the winning rate is displayed at a specific value (for example, "77%" or "33%") in the process of executing the rising fixed effect multiple times, Since it makes the player think that the set game state is a game state (probability variable state) that is advantageous to the player, it is necessary to restrict the display so that the above-mentioned specific value is not displayed.

However, if a plurality of types of effects can be executed as the winning rate increasing effects, it is necessary to perform control for all the winning rate increasing effects so that the winning rate after the increase does not reach a specific value. , there is a problem that the processing load of the display restriction processing for preventing the display of the winning percentage of the specific value increases.

On the other hand, in the fourth control example, the value of the winning rate displayed (the value in the first place) in the increase confirmation effect, which is the winning rate increasing effect that can increase the winning rate in the minimum unit (1%). is configured to limit the winning percentage, and the winning percentage does not become a specific value no matter what value the performance result of the other winning percentage increasing performance (slot performance) becomes. In this way, when executing a plurality of winning rate increasing effects with different increasing amounts, the display limiting process is executed for one winning rate increasing effect, and the display limiting process is not executed for the other winning rate increasing effects. By configuring, it is possible to reduce the execution frequency of the display restriction process.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 213 to 221. FIG. The fifth control example is different from the above-described first control example in that the contents of the display control of the lucky points are changed, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the fifth control example, similarly to the above-described first control example, it is configured to execute an effect in which lucky points are added and displayed during a normal symbol high probability state, and a predetermined number of lucky points ( 100P), it is configured to inform the player that the current game state is a variable probability state. That is, when the time saving state is set as the game state, the lucky points are configured so as not to reach 100P.

Then, as a production for adding and displaying the lucky points, a first addition production in which the value is added by 1 each time a special symbol variation is started, and a specific production as a variation production (for example, a battle production in which the production result is "continued"). and a second addition effect of adding a plurality of values (2 to 5) when is executed.

By constructing in this way, while the high probability state of the normal symbol is set, the game can be played while expecting that the lucky points reach the predetermined number.

However, there is a difference between the value of the lucky points (internal points) managed by the sound lamp control device 113 and the value of the lucky points (display points) actually displayed and controlled by the display control device 114. , there was a possibility that the lucky points would reach a predetermined number in spite of the time saving state being set.

Specifically, the display control device 114 displays lucky points (display points) on the liquid crystal screen based on commands output from the sound lamp control device 113 (for example, commands including information indicating internal points). In some cases, neither the audio lamp controller 113 nor the display controller 114 can detect the mismatch when the internal point and the display point are different.

The above-mentioned difference is, for example, when the liquid crystal substrate has an instantaneous power failure, that is, when a command is output from the audio lamp control device 113 to the display control device 114 but the command is not received, or when the audio lamp control device Although the command is not output from 113 to the display control device 114, the display control device 114 may receive the command erroneously due to the generated noise.

On the other hand, in this embodiment, the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to execute processing for determining whether or not the internal point and the display point match.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably detect a mismatch between the internal point managed by the audio lamp control device 113 side and the display point managed by the display control device 114 side.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, when there is a mismatch between the internal point and the display point, one value (the value of the internal point) is made positive, and a correction process for correcting the other value can be executed. are doing. Further, the contents of the correction process are configured to vary according to the remaining period of the period (battle mode period) during which the lucky points can be added and displayed.

Specifically, in the first half of the battle mode, if there is a mismatch between the internal points and the displayed points, instead of immediately executing processing to correct the mismatch, the second addition effect ( It is configured to perform correction processing using the content of the addition when a performance capable of adding a plurality of lucky point values in one performance is executed. By constructing in this manner, for example, the difference between the internal points and the display points can be eliminated while continuing to execute the first addition effect in which the lucky point is added by 1 each time the special symbol variation is executed. can be done.

Also, if the internal points and display points are inconsistent in the second half of the battle mode period, a correction effect will be executed to immediately eliminate the difference between the internal points and the display points. Configure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the battle mode period from ending in a state in which a display point value different from the internal points is displayed, and execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

<Regarding the effect content of the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 213 to FIG. 214, among various effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example, characteristic effects will be described. Specifically, the content of the effect (correction effect) that is executed when there is a difference between the internal points and the display points will be described.

FIG. 213(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the display points are shifted to the negative in the first half of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 213(a), when the display point value is "33" while the internal point value is "34", the display point It is necessary to correct (add) the value of, and in the example shown in FIG. 213(a), a variation pattern in which a variation time of a predetermined period or more is set as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol variation is executed. In this case, within one special symbol variation period, a variation performance (pseudo variation performance) is executed as if the special symbol variation was executed a plurality of times. Then, in accordance with the start of the pseudo-fluctuation effect, the effect of adding 1 to the value of the display point is displayed.

By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute the first addition effect a plurality of times within one special symbol variation period without giving the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, the difference between the internal points and the display points can be eliminated without being noticed by the player. Also, if there is a difference between the internal points and the display points in the first half of the battle mode, multiple special symbol variations will be executed within the remaining period of the battle mode, so the above-described pseudo variation It is possible to wait the execution of the correction process until the special symbol fluctuation is executed with the fluctuation pattern that can execute the production.

Next, with reference to FIG. 213(b), in the latter half of the battle mode, the contents of the correction process executed when the displayed points are shifted to the negative will be described. FIG. 213(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the display points are shifted to minus in the latter half of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 213(b), in the latter half of the battle mode, that is, when the remaining period of the battle mode is short, the execution of the correction process may be put on hold until the second addition effect is executed. , there is a possibility that the battle mode ends while the internal points and the displayed points are deviated.

Therefore, unlike the case where there is a difference between the internal points and the display points in the first half of the battle mode, the correction effect is executed when it is determined that there is a difference. In this way, by immediately executing the correction effect, it is possible to prevent the battle mode from ending with a difference between the internal points and the display points.

In FIG. 213(b), the correction effect of adding 2 to the lucky point is executed in the first addition effect in which the value of the lucky point is normally increased by 1. By configuring in this way, the difference between the internal point and the display point can be immediately and reliably eliminated.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 214(a) and 214(b), description will be given of the effects executed when the display points are greater than the internal points during the battle mode. FIG. 214(a) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the display points deviate to plus in the first half of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 214(a), when the display point value is "36" while the internal point value is "34", the display point In the example shown in FIG. 214(a), the correction process waits until the second addition effect in which +2 is added to the internal points in the audio ramp control device 113, and the second There is a correction process that does not set a command for executing a second addition effect for adding and displaying the display points to the display control device 114 while adding the internal points when the condition for executing the 2 addition effect is satisfied. executed.

With this configuration, it is possible to add only the internal points, so it is possible to eliminate the state in which the display points are deviated to the plus side (the state in which there are more display points than the internal points).

Next, FIG. 214(b) is a diagram showing an example of the display screen that is displayed when the display points deviate to plus in the latter half of the battle mode. As shown in FIG. 214(b), when the value of the display point is "79" despite the value of the internal point being "78", the display point must be corrected as soon as possible. The difference value is subtracted because there is a risk that the battle mode will end with the points misaligned, and that the display points will reach the predetermined number (100P) even though the time saving state is set. Correction processing for display is performed. Specifically, "-1P" is displayed as a subtraction display for directly subtracting the value of the lucky point displayed in the display area HR6, and an effect mode of subtracting 1 from the value of the lucky point is executed. . In this way, by immediately executing the correction effect, it is possible to prevent the battle mode from ending with a difference between the internal points and the display points.

Here, with reference to FIG. 215, the flow of control processing regarding the variable effect display in the audio lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 215 is a diagram schematically showing the flow of control processing regarding the variable effect display in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example.

As shown in FIG. 215, when the special symbol variation (variation A) is executed, the variation pattern for presentation is determined by the sound ramp control device 113, and the variation presentation command (variation pattern command ) is output to the display controller 114 . Then, if the variable performance command to be output includes a performance mode in which the lucky points are added, for example, the lucky point is increased by 1 at the start of the variation, and the lucky point is increased by 2 after 5 seconds from the start of the variation. When the mode is included, information indicating that three lucky points are added in total in the current variable performance is stored in the display point storage area 223r, and the final performance in which the lucky points are added in the current variable performance is displayed. A value for specifying the execution timing of (effect five seconds after the start of fluctuation) is set to the value of the detection timer 223da.

Then, when the display control device 114 receives the variable effect command output from the audio lamp control device 113, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed based on the various effect information included in the received variable effect command. Various effect images to be displayed are created, and a control process for displaying the effect images on the third symbol display device 81 is executed. The detailed control processing contents for displaying the effect image on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same as those of the above-described first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

If the variation effect command received by the display control device 114 includes an effect mode in which the lucky point is increased by "1" at the start of the variation and the lucky point is increased by "2" five seconds after the start of the variation, immediately after the start of the variation Information indicating an addition display that adds 1 to the value of the lucky point displayed on the display screen, adds 1 to the value of the display counter of the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and indicates the number of increments of the display counter. to the audio lamp controller 113. In addition, when five seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, an addition display is instructed to add 2 to the value of the lucky point displayed on the display screen immediately after the start of fluctuation, and the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 has The value of the display counter is incremented by 2, and a confirmation command including information indicating the incremented number of the display counter is output to the sound lamp control device 113 .

Then, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, addition display to the value of the lucky point is executed corresponding to the control processing of the display control device 114, and for example, "9P" is displayed as the lucky point. In this state, when the addition display of "+1" is executed, the addition display with the lucky point value of "10P" is executed. Then, when the addition display of "+2" is executed after 5 seconds, the addition display with the lucky point value of "12P" is executed.

When the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is received, the audio lamp control device 113 identifies the value (addition value) of the display counter included in the received confirmation command, and adds the identified value to the display counter. Set to 223db. Then, it waits until the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, and when it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is 0, that is, all the effects of adding the value of the lucky points executed in this variable effect are performed. When it is determined that the display has ended, the display points (internal points) stored in the display point storage area 223r to be added during the current variation effect and the display control device 114 actually issued an instruction to display the addition. The display points are compared, and it is determined whether or not the same value as the internal points is added and displayed on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 .

Then, when the comparison results match, the value of the lucky point set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the value of the lucky point actually displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 are the same. Since it is a case of matching, the variable production is ended normally. Here, when transmitting signals between a plurality of control devices, the power supplied to one of the control devices may become unstable, or momentary power outages (instantaneous power outages) may occur due to noise, etc. In such a case, the various signals that are output may not be received correctly. In this case, the value of the display point (internal point) set by the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 and the value of the lucky point (display point) actually displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is different.

In particular, as in this control example, when the value of the lucky points reaches a predetermined number, when the configuration is such that a specific effect can be executed, the difference between the internal points and the display points may occur. However, there is a problem that a specific effect is executed while the value of the lucky point indicates a value other than a predetermined number, and the effect is difficult for the player to understand.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, the display control device 114 is configured to output to the sound lamp control device 113 information indicating the content of the display instruction (the display counter of the display control device 114). , the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute processing for correcting the degree of divergence between the internal point and the display point. By configuring in this way, it is possible to solve the problem caused by the difference between the internal point and the display point.

For example, if the display point is 1 larger than the internal point, the variation production command determined when setting the variation production at the time of the next special symbol variation (variation B) is performed immediately after the start of the variation. When the mode is included, information indicating that the lucky point is added in total by 1 in this variable performance is stored in the display point storage area 223r, and the variable performance command and the non-display command are sent to the display control device. 114. Then, when the display control device 114 receives the variable effect command and the non-display command output from the audio lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 determines whether or not the non-display command is received, and when it is determined that the non-display command is received. , if the variable performance command includes a performance mode in which the lucky point is increased by 1 at the start of the variation, an addition display that adds 1 to the value of the lucky point displayed on the display screen immediately after the start of the variation is instructed. Without adding the value of the display counter of the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, a confirmation command including information indicating the current addition number of the display counter is output to the sound lamp control device 113. .

Then, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, addition display to the value of the lucky point is not executed in response to the control processing of the display control device 114, and for example, "12P" is displayed as the lucky point. "12P" remains displayed when the player is in the state. In other words, on the audio lamp control device 113 side, as usual, the processing for determining the variable rendering mode is executed, and when the internal point and the display point are different, if the display point is larger, the non-display command is executed. By setting , it is possible to perform processing without adding display points while adding internal points. Therefore, correction processing can be easily executed without executing complicated control processing as dedicated processing for correcting the difference between the internal point and the display point.

215 is shown as an example when the number of added lucky points included in the set variable display command is the same as the difference between the internal points and the display points, that is, when the variable display command Although the difference between the internal points and the display points can be eliminated by not executing the addition effect of the included lucky points once (not adding and displaying on the display screen), the difference between the internal points and the display points can be eliminated. If the number of added lucky points included in the displayed variable display command is larger than the difference between the internal points and the displayed points, instead of setting the hidden command, the actual added number of lucky points will be used as the internal points. An actual display command including information indicating a value obtained by subtracting the difference from the display point is output to the display control device 114 together with the variable display command, and the display control device 114 performs actual display with priority over the variable display command. If it is configured to discriminate the presence and content of the command, and to instruct the display content based on the content of the actual display command instead of the number of additions of the lucky points included in the variable display command. good. As a result, the number of additions of the display counter value of the display control device 114 and the number of additions of the lucky points on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 are determined based on the actual display command. When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the confirmation command corresponding to , the difference between the internal point and the display point that occurred at the time of the previous variation presentation can be resolved.

Furthermore, in this control example, when there is a difference between the internal points and the display points, the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed is determined, and the internal points are displayed according to the length of the remaining period. The contents of the correction process for correcting the difference from the point are made different. Specifically, when the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the difference between the internal points and the display points is subtracted at the time when the lucky point addition effect is executed next time (as described above with reference to FIG. 215). (added) is executed, or a correction process for hiding the addition effect is executed. As a result, it becomes difficult to execute the performance mode dedicated to the correction process (for example, the performance of subtracting the value of the lucky point), so that the correction process can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if the remaining period is less than the predetermined period, an effect in a mode dedicated to the correction process (for example, an effect of subtracting the value of the lucky points) is executed, and the effect of adding the lucky points is executed within the period during which the effect can be executed. is configured to reliably correct (eliminate) the difference between the internal point and the display point. This can solve the problem that occurs when there is a difference between the internal point and the display point.

In this control example, the content of the correction process is changed by determining the remaining period in which the lucky point addition effect can be executed. When a part of the executable period has passed, a specific effect is executed based on the display point value (the lucky point value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the content of the correction process to be different based on the remaining period until the partial period elapses. By configuring in this way, even in the process of adding lucky points, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand effect without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, in this control example, it is checked whether there is a difference between the value managed by the sound lamp controller 113 and the value managed by the display controller 114, and correction processing is executed based on the confirmation result. However, such a technical idea, that is, when executing one control process across a plurality of control means (setting-side control means and execution-side control means), the setting-side control means By executing confirmation processing to see if the content set by the controller and the content executed by the execution-side control means match, and correction processing based on the result of the confirmation processing, unintended processing can be performed. may be used in other configurations, such as between the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113, or between the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. It may be executed across three or more control means such as the control device 113 and the display control device 114 .

Furthermore, in this control example, the confirmation process and the correction process are executed for the deviation in the effect of varying (adding) the value of the lucky point used as the effect, but it is not limited to this, for example, , Control processing results of the main controller 110, such as time-saving frequency display for variably displaying the value (time-saving frequency) indicating the period during which the high-probability state of the normal pattern continues, and jackpot frequency display for indicating the number of consecutive hits. (The result of the special symbol lottery) may be executed with respect to a variable value based on the information.

In addition, in this control example, when the remaining period of the addition effect is short, a dedicated correction effect (see FIG. 214(b)) is executed to eliminate the difference between the internal points and the display points. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the display point reaches a specific value while there is a difference between the internal point and the display point, or when the internal point reaches a specific value, the display point The value indicated by is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp (for example, the display manner of "?"), and until the difference between the internal points and the displayed points is eliminated, the value indicated by the displayed points is displayed by the player. may be configured to continuously display a display mode that is difficult to grasp (for example, a display mode of "?"). In this manner, the processing load in the correction process can be further reduced by performing correction that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displayed value, rather than correcting the displayed value. In this case, for example, when the difference between the internal points and the display points is within a predetermined range (for example, the difference is "1"), the value indicated by the display points is displayed in a display mode (for example, "?? ” display mode), and when it is larger than a predetermined range, an addition effect for correcting the value of the display point may be executed. In this way, by varying the content of the correction process according to the amount of correction that needs to be corrected, a display mode in which the value indicated by the display point is difficult for the player to grasp (for example, a display mode of "?") is maintained for a long period of time. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the correction process while suppressing the performance that is difficult for the player to understand due to the continuous display.

In addition, in this control example, the correction processing is performed on the setting value related to the effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, without being limited to this, for example, the correction processing may be performed on the set value related to the effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the operation value related to the operation of the decorative accessory. However, the correction processing may be performed on the setting value related to the effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the output value related to the sound output by the sound output device 226. You may perform a correction process for .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed. Specifically, the difference is that a detection timer 223da, a display counter 223db, a non-display flag 223dc, and an addition flag 223de are added. Other elements are the same as those in the first control example described above, and detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

FIG. 216 is a diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fifth control example.

Detection timer 223da, in the variable effect determined by the audio ramp control device 113, when the addition effect (first addition effect and second addition effect) for adding the value of the lucky point is set, last A timer for measuring the time until the end of the addition effect executed during the period, and the value corresponding to the period from the time when the variable effect is executed until the end of the last addition effect executed during the change effect. is set. Then, the value of the detection timer 223da is subtracted with the lapse of time, and when the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, that is, when the final addition effect executed during the variable effect ends, the internal point and the display point. A process of comparing the values with is executed.

With this configuration, even when the value of the lucky point is added and displayed at a plurality of timings in one variable effect, the values of the internal point and the display point are added after the final addition display is completed. Since it is possible to compare, it is possible to easily determine the actually occurring deviation.

The display counter 223db is a counter whose value is updated based on a confirmation command output from the display control device 114 (a command including information indicating the number of added lucky points to be displayed on the display screen). Each time a confirmation command output from the control device 114 is received, the counter value is updated. Then, when the value of the detection timer 223da becomes 0, the value of the display counter 223db is used as the value of the display point.

The non-display flag 223dc indicates a state in which the lucky points are not actually added and displayed even when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the addition effect is to be executed. , when it is determined that the values do not match during the first half of the battle mode, and when it is determined that the value of the display point (display counter) is greater than the internal point (S4490 in FIG. 218 : Yes) is set to ON.

The addition flag 223dd is a flag indicating that it is necessary to add and display the lucky points additionally when the sound lamp control device 113 determines that the addition effect is to be executed. When it is determined that the values do not match during the first half of the battle mode and the value of the display point (display counter) is smaller than the internal point (S4490 in FIG. 218: No), it is set to ON.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 217 to 220, the contents of control processing in the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, compared to the above-described first control example, a confirmation command output from the display control device 114 can be received, and a process to be executed when the confirmation command is received is added. There is a big difference in Another difference is that part of the content of the control processing for displaying the lucky points is changed. Other processing contents are the same. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 217, the contents of command determination processing 5 (S4082) will be described. FIG. 217 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 5 (S4082). This command determination process 5 (S4082) is a process executed when a confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is received, in contrast to the command determination process (see S4012 in FIG. 166) of the first control example described above. are the same except for the addition of

When the command determination process 5 (S4082) is executed, first, the same processes of S4401 to S4414 as the command determination process of the first control example (see S4012 in FIG. 166) are executed. Then, if it is determined that the command for the number of prize balls has not been received in the processing of S4413 (S4413: No), then it is determined whether or not the confirmation command has been received (S4481), and if it is determined that it has not been received (S4481: No), the process according to other commands is executed (S4415), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of S4481 that a confirmation command has been received (S4481: Yes), confirmation processing is executed (S4482), and then this processing ends. Details of the confirmation process executed in the process of S4482 will be described later with reference to FIG. Based on the command including the information indicating the number of added display of the lucky points displayed on the display screen of 81, the value of the lucky points (display points) actually displayed on the display screen is discriminated by the sound lamp control device 113 side. Then, a process of confirming whether the value of the lucky point (internal point) managed by the sound lamp control device 113 is different, and determining that the value of the internal point and the value of the display point are different. and correction processing for canceling the difference is executed.

Here, the contents of the confirmation process (S4482) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 218 is a flow chart showing the details of the confirmation process (S4482). This confirmation process (S4482) is executed when it is determined in command determination process 5 (see S4082 in FIG. 217) that a confirmation command has been received.

When the confirmation process (S4482) is executed, first, the value included in the confirmation command received this time, that is, the value of the lucky points (display points) added and displayed by the display control device 114 is displayed. It is added to the counter 223db (S4485). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the detection timer 223da is 0 (S4486), and if it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is not 0 (greater than 0) (S4486: No), this processing ends. do. That is, if the timing at which the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is received is not the final effect in which the value of the lucky point is added in the variable effect being executed, the display counter 223db is turned on based on the received confirmation command. Only the process of adding the value is executed, and this process ends.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress execution of the process of whether or not the value of the display point and the value of the internal point match each time the confirmation command is received. Here, in the present control example, the first addition effect for adding 1 to the value of the lucky point is executed in accordance with the start timing of the variable effect executed during the battle mode (during the display of the lucky points). . That is, during the battle mode, the lucky points are added and displayed every time the special symbol variation is executed. This makes it easy for the player to understand how lucky points are added as the game progresses in the battle mode.

Further, when a specific performance mode is set as the performance mode of the variable performance, the second addition performance for adding a plurality of lucky points is executed at the execution timing of the specific performance mode. By executing this second addition effect, it is possible to make the player understand that the value of the lucky points can rise suddenly, so it is expected that the lucky points will always rise sharply during the battle mode. A player can play a game while holding it.

In the fifth control example, as described above, the first addition effect and the second addition effect are configured so that they can be executed within one variable effect period. The value will be changed multiple times. Since the confirmation command output from the display control device 114 is configured to be output each time the display value of the lucky points is variably displayed (additional display), the command determination processing 5 ( In FIG. 217 (see S4082), it may be determined multiple times that a confirmation command has been received within one variation effect. In this case, the confirmation process is executed multiple times.

In this control example, the sound ramp control device 113 is configured to set the effect mode of the variable effect corresponding to one special symbol change, and the number of additions of lucky points (the number of internal points) is also , is configured to be managed in units of variable performances, not in units of addition performances. Therefore, each time the confirmation process is executed, the internal points (total number added to the lucky points in this variable effect) and the display points (the number added and displayed to the lucky points by one additional effect) are added. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a discrimination result indicating that the internal point and the display point do not match due to the discrimination being performed on the target.

Note that, in contrast to the configuration of the fifth control example, the internal points are stored for each value added to the lucky points in units of additional effects instead of the total number of points added to the lucky points in one variable effect. Then, every time a confirmation command is received, it is possible to properly determine whether the value of the internal point and the value of the display point match.

In the process of S4486, if it is determined that the value of the detection timer 223da is 0 (S4486: Yes), then the value (display point) of the display counter 223db and the display stored in the display point storage area 223r are displayed. The point value (internal point) is compared (S4487), and it is determined whether the comparison results match (S4488).

In the process of S4488, if it is determined that the comparison results match (S4488: Yes), the production mode of the variable production set in the audio lamp control device 113 (the production mode of the addition production), appropriate Since the addition display of the lucky points is being executed, this processing is terminated without executing the correction processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S4488, if it is determined that the comparison results do not match (S4488: No), the effect mode of the variable effect set in the audio lamp control device 113 (the effect mode of the addition effect) , S4489 to S4495, which will be described later, are executed as correction processing for matching the value of the display points with the value of the internal points.

In the process of S4489, it is determined whether the current period is the first half of the battle mode (S4489). Here, the remaining period until the end of the battle mode is calculated based on the game state stored in the state storage area 223aa and the value of the time saving counter 223y, and the remaining period is 50% of the entire battle mode period. If it is more than that, it is determined to be the first half of the battle mode, and if it is less than 50%, it is determined to be the second half of the battle mode.

In the process of S4489, if it is determined that the current period is the first half of the battle mode (S4489: Yes), then the value (display points) of the display counter 223db is stored in the internal points (display point storage area 223r). value) is determined (S4490), and if it is determined to be greater (S4490: Yes), the non-display flag 223dc is set to ON so as to correspond to the difference value between the display point and the internal point ( S4491), the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S4490 that the value (display point) of the display counter 223db is not larger (smaller) than the internal point (the value stored in the display point storage area 223r) (S4490: No). , the addition flag 223dd is set to ON so as to correspond to the difference value between the internal point and the display point (S4492), and this processing is terminated.

Also, in the processing of S4489, if it is determined that the current is not the first half of the battle mode (the second half of the battle mode) (S4489: No), then the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the display screen. A display command for setting the display value of the lucky points to a value corresponding to the internal points is set (S4493), it is determined whether the non-display flag 223dc is set to ON (S4494), and if it is set to ON. If it is determined that there is (S4494: No), the non-display flag 223dc is set to OFF (S4495), and this processing ends. If it is determined in the processing of S4494 that the non-display flag 223dc is not set to ON (S4494: No), the processing of S4495 is skipped and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the contents of the time saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258) will be described. FIG. 219 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving presentation mode setting process 5 (S5258). This time saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258) is a process for adding the value of the lucky point (S5306 in FIG. 175) to the time saving mode setting process (see S5208 in FIG. 175) of the first control example described above. , S5307), the display point setting process (see S5351 in FIG. 219) is executed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 220, the content of the display point setting process (S5351) executed in the time saving effect mode setting process 5 (S5258) will be described. FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing the contents of the display point setting process (S5351). In this display point setting process (S5351), a process of setting an addition effect for adding the lucky point value as the variable effect is executed.

When the display point setting process (S5351) is executed, first, 1 is added to the value of the display point (internal point value) stored in the display point storage area 223r (S6101). It is determined whether or not there is an addition effect (second addition effect) for adding display points (S6102). In the processing of this S6102, in the effect mode of the variable effect set in the effect setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 219) after the first time executed in the time saving effect mode setting process 5 (see S5258 in FIG. 219) second addition effect Determine if is set.

In the processing of S6102, if it is determined that there is an addition effect (second addition effect) (S6102: Yes), the value to be added in the current addition effect is stored in the display point storage area 223r. The display point value (internal point value) is added (S6103), the value indicating the final execution timing of the addition effect (value corresponding to the number of seconds) is set in the detection timer 223da (S6104), and the process proceeds to S6105. Transition. By setting the value of the detection timer 223da in the process of S6104, in the confirmation process (S4482 in FIG. 218), when the confirmation command is received, is it the timing at which the last addition effect in the current variation effect is executed? It is possible to determine whether or not

On the other hand, in the processing of S6102, when it is determined that there is no addition effect (S6102: No), the addition effect executed in the current variation effect is the first addition effect (the value of the lucky point is 1 at the start of the variation effect). Since it is only the effect to be added), the process for setting a value to the detection timer 223da is skipped and the process proceeds to S6105.

Next, in the display point setting process (S5351), the processing contents after S6105 will be described. In the processing after S6105, the processing for setting a display command for executing the addition effect display of the contents subjected to the correction processing with respect to the effect contents of the addition effect set in the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

First, in the process of S6105, it is determined whether or not the non-display flag 223d is set to ON (S6105). If it is determined that it is set to ON (S6105: Yes), then A difference value (difference value between the internal points and the display points) is calculated based on the setting situation, and it is determined whether or not the additional value (the number of lucky points to be added) in the current second addition effect is equal to or greater than the difference value (S6106). ), if it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the difference value (S6106; Yes), the effect content of the addition effect (second addition effect) to be executed this time is corrected, and the difference value is changed from the addition value to eliminate the difference value. is subtracted, a display addition count command indicating the subtracted value is set (S6107), a non-display addition count command corresponding to the difference value is set (S6108), and the non-display flag 223d is set off (S6109) , the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S6105 that the non-display flag 223d is not set to ON (S6105: No), then it is determined whether the addition flag 223dd is set to ON (S6110). If it is set (S6110: Yes), then it is determined whether there is a second addition effect in the current variation effect (S6111), and if it is determined that there is a second addition effect (S6111: Yes ), a value corresponding to the difference value set in the addition flag 223dd is added to the addition value of the second addition effect, and a display addition count command indicating the value after the addition is set (S6112), and the addition flag 223dd is set to off (S6113), and this processing ends.

As described above, in the display point setting process (S5351), the correction process for eliminating the difference between the internal point and the display point determined in the confirmation process (see S4482 in FIG. 218), that is, The process of eliminating the difference by increasing or decreasing the value of the lucky point to be added is not targeted to the first addition effect (the effect of adding 1 to the value of the lucky point each time the variable effect is started). It is configured to execute the second addition effect (addition processing executed when a specific effect mode is set as the effect mode of the variable effect).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prohibit execution of the correction process for the first variable effect which is executed periodically and whose addition number is a fixed value (1). It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to the change in the performance contents of the variable performance. In addition, by continuously executing the first variable production in which the value of the lucky point is added by a fixed number (1) on a regular basis, every time the variable production is executed (special symbol fluctuation is executed) Since the rule that the value of the lucky point is increased by 1 each time the game is played, the game can be easily played while predicting the degree of addition of the value of the lucky point.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, when it is determined that the correction process is necessary during the first half of the battle mode, the execution of the correction process is put on standby until the second addition effect is executed next time. ing. As a result, the difference between the internal points and the display points can be eliminated simply by executing the process of correcting the value added and displayed in the second addition effect in which the number of additions is indefinite. Therefore, there is no need to separately provide a dedicated addition effect for executing the correction process, and the processing load for executing the correction process can be reduced.

It should be noted that if the second half of the battle mode is entered while waiting for the execution of the correction process, in the confirmation process (see S4482 in FIG. 218), a correction is made to eliminate the difference between the internal points and the displayed points. Configured for processing. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the battle mode ends without executing the second addition performance and the correction processing is not executed, and the correction processing can be surely executed before the battle mode ends.

In this control example, the correction process is executed only when the difference value between the internal point and the display point can be eliminated in one second addition effect. The difference value between the internal points and the display points may be eliminated by using the second addition effect once. In this case, the difference value eliminated by the second addition effect once is subtracted. The residual difference value may be configured to be stored, and correction processing may be performed on the stored residual difference value when the next second addition effect is performed. By configuring in this way, the value to be corrected in one second addition effect can be easily reduced to a small amount, so that it is possible to easily execute the correction process that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. .

As in the fifth control example, when a situation requiring correction processing occurs, it is preferable to provide a notification means capable of notifying the fact to the outside. In other words, if there is a difference between the internal point and the display point, there is a high possibility that an abnormality has occurred in one of the signal transmission systems. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an abnormality with respect to the contents of the game, which causes great inconvenience to the player.

<Regarding the control processing of the display control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 221, the contents of control processing of the display control device 114 executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. The fifth control example differs from the above-described first control example in that the content of the processing executed when a display command for adding and displaying a certain number of times is received is changed. are otherwise identical. The same processing contents are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, in the fifth control example, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed on the basis of the reception of the count addition related command output from the sound lamp control device 113. This control example differs from the first control example in that a display number counter is added as a measuring means for measuring the value to be added and displayed when the value of the displayed lucky point is added and displayed. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The display number counter described above is provided in the work RAM 233 of the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, and when receiving the addition number command and executing the addition display of the lucky points, the value corresponding to the addition display number is displayed. Added to the number counter. Then, the value of the display number counter is reset to 0 when a command indicating the number of times clear for resetting the value of the display number counter is received. In this control example, since it is configured to determine whether the internal point and the display point are different for each variable effect unit, when the variable effect ends (when the special symbol change is stopped and displayed ), the voice lamp controller 113 outputs a command indicating clearing of the count.

FIG. 221 is a flow chart showing the contents of the count addition related command process 5 (S8469). This number addition related command process 5 (S8469) is a process executed when a command relating to addition of the number of times set by the sound lamp control device 113 is received. Processing is performed. Further, according to the processing result of the correction processing executed by the audio ramp control device 113, the processing for changing the addition display mode of the lucky points is executed.

When the number addition related command process 5 (S8469) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the number addition related command received this time is an addition number command indicating that the value of the lucky point is added (S9251). If it is determined to be a count command (S9251: Yes), the same processing of S9201 to S9204 as the count addition related command processing (see S8419 in FIG. 188) is executed, and then the value of the display count counter The addition value indicated by the command received this time is added (S9252), a confirmation command including information indicating the value to be added and displayed is set (S9253), and this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9251 that the command received this time is not the number of addition command (S9251: No), then it is determined whether or not the command of the number of times of non-display addition has been received (S9254). If it is determined that the count command has been received (S9254: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described S9252, then executes the process of S9253, and terminates this process. That is, when the display points are larger than the internal points by the correction processing, the processing for executing the addition display of the lucky points (the processing of S9201 to S9204) is skipped, and only the value of the display count counter is updated. configured to run By configuring in this way, only the value of the internal points can be added without adding the value of the actually displayed lucky points, so that the difference between the internal points and the displayed points can be easily eliminated. be able to.

In the processing of S9254, if it is determined that the command received this time does not receive the command for the number of times of non-display addition (S9254: No), then the number clear command for clearing the value of the display number counter is received. (S9255), and if it is determined that it has been received (S9255: Yes), the value of the display number counter is reset to 0 (S9256), and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S9255 that the command does not indicate clearing of the number of times (S9255: No), this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the audio ramp control device 113 is configured to execute processing for determining whether or not the internal point matches the display point, and the audio ramp control is performed. It is configured to reliably detect a mismatch between an internal point managed by the device 113 side and a display point managed by the display control device 114 side, and when a mismatch occurs between the internal point and the display point. , one value (the value of the internal point) is made positive, and correction processing for correcting the other value can be executed. Further, the contents of the correction process are configured to vary according to the remaining period of the period (battle mode period) during which the lucky points can be added and displayed.

Specifically, in the first half of the battle mode, if there is a mismatch between the internal points and the displayed points, instead of immediately executing processing to correct the mismatch, the second addition effect ( It is configured to perform correction processing using the contents of the addition when a performance in which a plurality of lucky point values can be added in one performance is executed. By constructing in this way, for example, the difference between the internal points and the display points can be eliminated while continuing to execute the first addition effect in which the lucky point is added by 1 each time the special symbol variation is executed. can be done.

Also, if the internal points and display points are inconsistent in the second half of the battle mode period, a correction effect will be executed to immediately eliminate the difference between the internal points and the display points. Configure. As a result, it is possible to prevent the battle mode period from ending in a state in which a display point value different from the internal points is displayed, and execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand.

Furthermore, as in this control example, when the value of the lucky point reaches a predetermined number, when the configuration is such that a specific effect can be executed, the content of the display instruction performed by the display control device 114 ( Information indicating the display counter of the display control device 114 is output to the audio ramp control device 113, and the audio ramp control device 113 executes processing for correcting the degree of divergence between the internal point and the display point. configured as possible. By configuring in this way, it is possible to solve the problem caused by the difference between the internal point and the display point.

Furthermore, in this control example, when there is a difference between the internal points and the display points, the remaining period during which the lucky point addition effect can be executed is determined, and the internal points are displayed according to the length of the remaining period. The contents of the correction process for correcting the difference from the point are made different. Specifically, when the remaining period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the difference between the internal points and the displayed points is subtracted at the time when the lucky point addition effect is executed next time, as described above with reference to FIG. (added) is executed, or a correction process for hiding the addition effect is executed. As a result, it becomes difficult to execute the performance mode dedicated to the correction process (for example, the performance of subtracting the value of the lucky point), so that the correction process can be executed without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, if the remaining period is less than the predetermined period, an effect in a mode dedicated to the correction process (for example, an effect of subtracting the value of the lucky points) is executed, and the effect of adding the lucky points is executed within the period during which the effect can be executed. is configured to reliably correct (eliminate) the difference between the internal point and the display point. This can solve the problem that occurs when there is a difference between the internal point and the display point.

In this control example, the content of the correction process is changed by determining the remaining period in which the lucky point addition effect can be executed. When a part of the executable period has passed, a specific effect is executed based on the display point value (the lucky point value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81). In such a configuration, it is preferable to configure the content of the correction process to be different based on the remaining period until the part of the period elapses. By configuring in this way, even in the process of adding lucky points, it is possible to execute an easy-to-understand effect without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in this control example, it is checked whether there is a difference between the value managed by the sound lamp controller 113 and the value managed by the display controller 114, and correction processing is executed based on the confirmation result. However, such a technical idea, that is, when executing one control process across a plurality of control means (setting-side control means and execution-side control means), the setting-side control means By executing confirmation processing to see if the content set by the controller and the content executed by the execution-side control means match, and correction processing based on the result of the confirmation processing, unintended processing can be performed. may be used in other configurations, such as between the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113, or between the main controller 110 and the sound lamp controller 113. It may be executed across three or more control means such as the control device 113 and the display control device 114 .

Furthermore, in this control example, the confirmation process and the correction process are executed for the deviation in the effect in which the value of the lucky point used as the effect is varied (added). , Control processing results of the main controller 110, such as time-saving frequency display for variably displaying the value (time-saving frequency) indicating the period during which the high-probability state of the normal pattern continues, and jackpot frequency display for indicating the number of consecutive wins of the jackpot. (The result of the special symbol lottery) may be executed with respect to a variable value based on the information.

In addition, in this control example, when the remaining period of the addition effect is short, a dedicated correction effect (see FIG. 214(b)) is executed to eliminate the difference between the internal points and the display points. However, without being limited to this, for example, when the display point reaches a specific value while there is a difference between the internal point and the display point, or when the internal point reaches a specific value, the display point The value indicated by is displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to grasp (for example, the display manner of "?"), and until the difference between the internal points and the displayed points is eliminated, the value indicated by the displayed points is displayed by the player. may be configured to continuously display a display mode that is difficult to grasp (for example, a display mode of "?"). In this manner, the processing load in the correction process can be further reduced by performing correction that makes it difficult for the player to grasp the displayed value, rather than correcting the displayed value. In this case, for example, when the difference between the internal points and the display points is within a predetermined range (for example, the difference is "1"), the value indicated by the display points is displayed in a display mode (for example, "?? ” display mode), and when it is larger than a predetermined range, an addition effect for correcting the value of the display point may be executed. In this way, by varying the content of the correction process according to the amount of correction that needs to be corrected, a display mode in which the value indicated by the display point is difficult for the player to grasp (for example, a display mode of "?") is maintained for a long period of time. It is possible to reduce the processing load of the correction process while suppressing the performance that is difficult for the player to understand due to the continuous display.

In addition, in this control example, the correction processing is performed on the setting value related to the effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display value displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. However, without being limited to this, for example, the correction processing may be performed on the set value related to the effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the operation value related to the operation of the decorative accessory. However, the correction processing may be performed on the setting value related to the effect set by the sound lamp control device 113 and the output value related to the sound output by the sound output device 226. You may perform a correction process for .

<Regarding another example of the fifth control example>
Next, another example of the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 222 to 225. FIG. FIGS. 222 to 225 are diagrams showing an example of a case in which an effect using the decorative accessory YK and the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is executed. Specifically, it schematically shows the second operation unit 700 (see FIG. 30) described in the above-described first embodiment to which this control example is applied. The specific operation contents of the decorative accessory YK are the same as those in the first embodiment, so the description thereof is omitted, but the characters "attack" are displayed on the first display surface of the decorative accessory YK. The first display mode is a different side (rear side) from the first display side, and the second display mode showing the characters "defense" is displayed on the second display side.

This decorative accessory YK is used for the accessory presentation executed during the battle mode, and is configured to be able to notify the player's degree of advantage during the battle mode in accordance with the operation content of the accessory YK. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 222, the first display surface of the decorative accessory YK is displayed to the player at the effect position overlapping the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (overlapping on the front side of the display screen). In the case of the visible first state, the first display mode becomes visible to the player, and in the main display area Dm, an attack standby effect is executed in which the boy 810 maintains a posture to attack the enemy character 811. be done. This attack standby effect notifies the player of the state in which the boy 810 executes an attack at the time when the battle effect is executed, and the effect result of the battle effect is "victory". This effect shows the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the look-ahead information of the special figure 2 pending and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. It is executed based on information, and at least part of the case where the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery being executed contains the information indicating the jackpot winning, and the prediction information and the information being executed There is no information indicating the end condition of the time saving state in the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery, and the variation pattern (60 seconds variation) in which the battle effect is executed in the deviation variation is not included, that is, the effect result is " It is executed at least partly when the "continuation" battle effect is not executed.

By configuring in this manner, the player can play the game without worrying about the battle mode for a predetermined period of time in the battle mode, in which the player cannot know when the game will end. It should be noted that, in this another example, during a period in which information indicating a battle effect in which the effect result is "continued" is not included, the attack standby effect shown in FIG. 222 is executed. For example, even if a variation pattern (60-second variation) in which a battle effect is executed in the loss variation is included, the attack standby effect can be executed, and the loss variation is performed during the execution of the attack standby effect. When a variation pattern of 60-second variation is set in , it is preferable to execute an effect to incite whether or not the battle effect is to be executed, instead of executing the battle effect.

By constructing in this way, the performance effect can be enhanced by prompting the player whether or not the battle performance for confirming the victory is executed, and the victory is defined when the battle performance is actually generated. be able to. Also, since the attack standby performance can be executed even during the period in which the 60-second variation is set in the deviation variation, the execution frequency of the attack standby performance can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that this attack standby effect should be constructed such that a jackpot is won at a rate of about 20% when executed. Thus, when the attack standby performance is executed, it is possible to make the player more likely to have a feeling of expectation for winning a big win than when the attack standby performance is not executed. In addition, in this example, the display mode displayed in the main display area Dm during the attack standby effect is shared (at least partially shared) with the display mode used during the shortened mode. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of effect image data dedicated to the attack standby effect. In addition, the execution frequency of the attack standby production may be varied according to the actually set game state. It may be configured such that the execution frequency of the standby effect is increased. As a result, the player can predict the current game state according to the execution frequency of the attack standby effect. In addition, when a game state (probability variable state) advantageous to the player is set, by increasing the execution frequency of the attack standby production, even if the attack standby production production result is disadvantageous to the player Even if the result (effect result in which the battle effect is not executed) is displayed, it is possible to increase the possibility that the variable probability state is set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the contents of another effect (defense or higher confirmation effect) using the decorative accessory YK will be described. FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an example of an effect during the defensive or higher fixed effect. This defense or higher confirmation effect is an effect that can be executed during the battle mode in the same manner as the attack standby effect shown in FIG. This is an effect for informing the player that "loss" will not be selected as a result, that is, that "continuation" or "win" will be decided. During this defensive or more fixed effect, the second display surface of the decorative accessory YK is visible to the player at the effect position overlapping the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (overlapping on the front side of the display screen). 2 state, and the second display mode becomes visible to the player. This effect shows the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a of the audio lamp control device 113, that is, the prefetch information of the special figure 2 pending, and the result of the special symbol lottery corresponding to the special symbol variation being executed. It is executed based on information, and if there is no information indicating the end condition of the time saving state in the information indicating the result of the special symbol lottery in progress and the look-ahead information, that is, the production result of the battle production is "defeat". during at least a portion of the information-free period.

Then, as shown in FIG. 224, an accessory lock effect capable of informing the player of the period during which the decorative accessory YK is positioned at the effect position (the number of special symbol lotteries executed in the state of being positioned at the effect position) is performed. configured to be executable. By configuring the accessory lock effect to be executable in this manner, it is possible to inform the player of the period in which the boy 810 will not be defeated in an easy-to-understand manner.

FIG. 224 shows an example of an effect when the character object lock effect is being executed. , and the boy 810 is displayed in a display mode wearing an aura. The display of this character lock 5G indicates the number of special symbol lotteries executed during the character lock effect, and according to the example shown in FIG. The player is notified that the attack standby performance will continue during the period during which the symbol lottery is executed.

In the character object lock effect shown in FIG. 224, when the variable effect is set by the sound lamp control device 113, the result of the special symbol lottery to be executed this time is determined based on the received variable pattern command, and furthermore, the winning Winning information (read-ahead information) stored in the information storage area 223a is discriminated, and it is determined whether or not conditions for execution of the attack standby effect are established. Further, the number of prize winning information corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a is discriminated, the executable period of the attack standby performance is specified, and the performance period of the character lock performance is determined. Then, an effect mode is set according to the determined period, and an effect instruction (effect command) corresponding to the determined effect mode is output to the accessory control device for operating the decorative accessory YK and the display control device 114. .

Then, every time a new special pattern variation is started, a performance mode for updating (subtracting) the remaining period of the character object lock effect displayed in the display area HR40 is determined, and the remaining period is 0 (character object lock 0G). When it becomes, the production instruction (production command) for ending the role product lock production is output to the role product control device and the display control device 114 . By configuring in this way, the character lock effect period-managed by the sound lamp control device 113 is executed by synchronizing the operation status of the decorative character YK and the effect display of the third pattern display device 81. be able to.

However, even in this character object lock effect, as in the fifth control example described above, due to the misreception by the character object control device and the display control device 114 side due to the omission of the effect command or the occurrence of noise, There is a problem that the remaining period managed by the audio lamp control device 113 and the remaining period controlled by the character product control device and the display control device 114 may differ. Therefore, in this example, as in the fifth control example, the execution contents of the accessory control device and the display control device 114 can be managed by the audio lamp control device 113 side.

Then, if it is determined that the remaining period managed by the audio lamp control device 113 side is different from the execution status of the character product control device and the display control device 114 side, the audio lamp control device 113 225 is controlled to be displayed until the remaining period managed by the user ends. FIG. 225 is a diagram showing an example of correction processing during the character object lock effect. As shown in FIG. 225, when the remaining period managed by the audio lamp control device 113 side differs from the performance status of the character product control device and the display control device 114 side, the display area HR40 displays "Character product "Lock?G" is displayed, and the performance is executed in a performance mode in which the player cannot grasp the remaining period during which the accessory lock performance continues. As a result, during the performance of the role product lock, at the timing when the decorative accessory YK ends the production, the situation in which "the role product lock 2G" is displayed in the display area H40, that is, the role product control device and the display control device 114 are displayed. , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the degree of progress of the character object lock effect differs.

It should be noted that when displaying "Character object lock? G" in the display area HR40 as a correction process, "Character object lock" is displayed in the display area HR40 as an extension effect for extending the effect period even in the normal character lock effect. Lock?G" can be displayed. In other words, the conditions under which the winning information related to the newly obtained special figure 2 hold is read out from the winning information storage area 223a until the performance period of the predetermined role lock effect elapses, and the role lock effect can be continuously executed. is established, it is preferable to configure the extension effect to be executable. As a result, even in a normal situation, that is, when the period management of the character object lock effect managed by the sound lamp control device 113 is normal, "Character object lock? G" is displayed in the display area HR40. , it is possible to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the correction processing is being executed or the extension performance is being executed.

<A1 embodiment>
Next, the A1th embodiment of the present invention will be described. For the sake of convenience, the same configurations as those explained in the above embodiments and control examples will be explained again. First, referring to FIGS. 226 to 296, an embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described as the A1 embodiment. 226 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, FIG. 227 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment, and FIG. 228 is a pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment. is a rear view of the.

As shown in FIG. 226, the pachinko machine 10 in the A1 embodiment includes an outer frame 11 whose outer shell is formed by wooden frames combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 having substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the outer frame 11 . In order to support the inner frame 12 in the outer frame 11, metal hinges 18 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 227) having a large number of nails, winning slots 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A ball (game ball) flows down the front of the game board 13 to play a pinball game. The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 229) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 226), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided serves as an opening/closing axis for the front frame. 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

The front frame 14 has an upper tray 17 for storing balls projected to the front side and formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface, and prize balls, rental balls, etc. are discharged to the upper tray 17. - 特許庁The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226). A frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17 . The frame button 22 is operated by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 227) is changed, or the content of the super ready-to-win effect is changed. be.

The front frame 14 is provided with light-emitting means such as various lamps around its periphery (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided at the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 226).

In addition, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electrical decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (Fig. 227) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chromium, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29 to 33 in order to create more splendor.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 is provided which is operated by the player to hit the ball in front of the game board 13. As shown in FIG.

Inside the operating handle 51, there are a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball shooting unit 112a, a shooting stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a rotation of the operating handle 51. A variable resistor (not shown) for detecting a dynamic operation amount (rotational position) based on a change in electrical resistance is incorporated. When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes corresponding to the amount of rotation operation. A ball is shot with a strength (shooting intensity) corresponding to , and is hit in front of the game board 13 with a flying distance corresponding to the player's operation. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always urged rightward, and by sliding it leftward against the urge, the bottom opening formed in the bottom surface of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 227, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape as seen from the front, and a large number of nails (not shown) for guiding balls and windmills (movable members 310 are shown). not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning port 63, first winning port 64, second winning port 640, variable winning device 65, second variable winning device (not shown), normal symbol starting port ( Through gate) 67, variable display unit 80, etc. are assembled, and the peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back side of inner frame 12 (see FIG. 226). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmissive resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display unit 80 are formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in a hole and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with a tapping screw or the like.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c of the front frame 14 (see FIG. 226). Mainly referring to FIG. 227, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

In front of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially circular arc is planted, and a strip-shaped metal plate similar to the outer rail 62 is placed inside the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The front outer periphery of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 226). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is defined by two rails 61 and 62 and a resin outer edge member 73 connecting the rails (a winning opening is provided and a shot is fired). area where the ball flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 229) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 227) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 227) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center.

First pattern display devices 37A and 37B having a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged in the lower left side of the game area when viewed from the front (lower left side in FIG. 227). The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are for displaying according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 229), and mainly display the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加Specifically, when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the first The pattern display device 37B is configured to operate.

In addition, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the variable probability, the time saving mode, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state by the lighting state. Whether the stop pattern is a pattern corresponding to the probability variable jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missing pattern is indicated by the lighting state, the number of pending balls is indicated by the lighting state, and a 7-segment display device indicates the round during the jackpot. Display numbers and errors. The plurality of LEDs are configured so that each LED has a different emission color (for example, red, green, and blue), and depending on the combination of the emission colors, it is possible to suggest various game states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. can.

The first prize winning port 64 is arranged below the variable display unit 80 . The variable display unit 80 is arranged so as to partition the game area on the game board 13 into the left and right sides. A right channel is formed through which the ball can flow down. A game ball that has flowed down the left flow path is configured not to flow down the right flow path. The first winning port 64 is arranged at a position where both the game ball that has flowed down the left channel and the game ball that has flowed down the right channel can enter.

The second winning port 640 is arranged at a position where a game ball that has flowed down the right flow path is easier to enter than a game ball that has flowed down the left flow path. The second winning port 640 has a horizontally long rectangular opening formed in the game board 13, and a channel is formed in the opening through which a game ball can flow down. A photosensor is provided to detect a game ball. On the front side of the opening, an electric accessory 640a is attached as a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate capable of closing the opening, and the variable opening/closing plate is used as an axis to drive the opening/closing to the front side. and an open-mouth solenoid (not shown). The opening of the second winning port 640 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. When the normal pattern (second pattern) hits, the opening solenoid is driven to tilt the electric accessory 640a to the front lower side, and the open state where the ball easily wins the opening of the second prize winning port 640 is temporarily maintained. It operates so as to repeat the state of the open state and the normal closed state for a predetermined number of times determined by the game state.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when a prize is won in the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big win (big win lottery), and also determines the kind of big win when it is determined as a big win. As the jackpot type determined here, the 5R time reduction (95 times) jackpot (jackpot A) set corresponding to the first special symbol that is displayed in a variable manner when the first winning opening 64 is won, 5R time reduction (Three times) jackpot (jackpot B) and 15R normal jackpot (jackpot C) are prepared. In addition, a 15R time-saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot D) that is set corresponding to the second special symbol that is variably displayed when winning the second prize opening 640 is prepared. The first pattern display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a jackpot as a stop pattern after the end of variation, but also indicate a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type when the jackpot is won. .

Here, "5R time saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot A)" means that the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is changed 95 times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and 95 During the period until the fluctuation of the round stops, the lottery probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) shifts to a high probability state, and a short-time gaming state is set in which the short fluctuation time of the normal pattern (second pattern) is easily selected. It's a big hit. "5R time saving (3 times) jackpot (jackpot B)" means that the special pattern (first special pattern or second special pattern) is changed three times after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 5 rounds, and the third change During the period until the stop, the lottery probability of the normal pattern (second pattern) shifts to a high probability state, and a short-time game state in which the short fluctuation time of the normal pattern (second pattern) is easily selected is set. is. In addition, "15R normal jackpot (jackpot C)" is a jackpot in which a low probability state is set after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and a time-saving gaming state is not set.

During the time saving (during the time saving game state), not only the winning probability of the second symbol is increased, but also the time during which the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, compared to the normal time. A long time is set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the balls enter the second winning port 640 more than when the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). becomes easy. Therefore, during the time saving, the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640, and the number of times the big winning lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the time saving, instead of changing the opening time of the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640, or in addition to changing the opening time, the electric accessory 640a may be changed to increase the number of times the is opened more than during normal operation. In addition, during the time saving, the winning probability of the second symbol is not changed, and at least the time during which the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning opening 640 is opened and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened in one hit. Either one may be changed. In addition, during the time saving, only the winning probability of the second symbol is determined without the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened or the number of times the electric accessory 640a is opened per hit. , may be changed to be higher than normal.

The game area is provided with a plurality of general winning holes 63 through which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. A variable display unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. In the variable display unit 80, with the winning (starting winning) of the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 640 as a trigger, while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the variation of the third symbol is displayed. A third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as a "display device") for display and the passing of a ball through a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 are used as triggers to variably display the second symbol. A second pattern display device (not shown) composed of LEDs is provided. A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 238), for example, the top, middle and bottom three patterns. A column of symbols is displayed. Each pattern row is composed of a plurality of patterns (third patterns), and these third patterns are horizontally scrolled for each pattern row to variably display the third pattern on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加It's like In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B under the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 238). Decorative display according to the display of the pattern display devices 37A and 37B is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be constructed using a reel or the like.

The second symbol display device 83 displays a symbol "○" and a symbol "x" as display symbols (second symbol (not shown)) every time the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67. are alternately turned on for a predetermined period of time to perform a variable display. In the pachinko machine 10, when it is detected that a ball has passed through a normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if the winning lottery is won, the second symbol display device 83 stops and displays the symbol "O" after the second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a loss, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variable display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device stops at a predetermined symbol ("○" symbol in this embodiment), the electric accessory 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is displayed for a predetermined period of time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set so as to be shorter during the time saving than during the normal game state. As a result, the variable display of the second pattern is performed in a short time during the time saving, so that the winning lottery (the number of times of variable display of the second pattern) can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, the chance of winning in the winning lottery increases, so that the player can be given more opportunities to open the electric accessary 640a of the second winning opening 640.例文帳に追加Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 . When the ball enters the second winning hole 640, four balls are paid out to the player as prize balls on the upper tray 17, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640. , the game can be played while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls possessed by the player, and the lottery of special symbols can be performed for a short period of time while suppressing the investment for additionally lending the balls. .

It should be noted that during the time saving, the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 during the time saving by other methods such as increasing the winning probability, increasing the opening time and the number of opening times of the electric accessory 640a for one time. In this case, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be fixed regardless of the game state. On the other hand, if the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is set shorter than during the normal time during the time saving, the winning probability may be made constant regardless of the game state, and the electric role for one winning may be set. The opening time and number of openings of the object 640a may be fixed regardless of the game state.

The normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is assembled to the game board in the area of the left channel of the variable display unit 80, and among the balls launched to the game board, some of the balls flowing down the left side of the game board are configured to pass through. When the ball passes through the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, the variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the result of the winning lottery is a win, the symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the result of the winning lottery is a loss. For example, an "x" symbol is displayed as a variable display stop symbol.

The number of times the ball passes through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is suspended up to a total of four times, and the number of suspended balls is displayed by the above-described first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the second symbol suspension lamp. (not shown) is also illuminated. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holdings, and are arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 .

The variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device as in the present embodiment. A part of the pattern display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the lighting of the second symbol reservation lamp may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81 . In addition, the maximum number of held balls for passing the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is not limited to 4 times, but is set to 3 times or less or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). You can In addition, the number of normal symbol starting openings (through gates) 67 to be assembled is not limited to one, and may be plural (for example, two). Further, the mounting position of the normal symbol starting opening (through gate) 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display unit 80, but may be the left side of the variable display unit 80, for example. In addition, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol reservation lamp.

Below the variable display unit 80, a first prize winning port 64 is provided through which balls can win. When the ball enters the first winning hole 64, a first winning hole switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is caused to turn on the first winning hole switch. (See FIG. 229), a lottery for a big hit is made, and a display corresponding to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37A. In the present embodiment, when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, the prize ball is not paid out. It may be configured to pay out prize balls.

In addition, the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are also one of the prize winning ports from which four balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win. In this embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are configured to be the same. , the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the first prize winning port 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when the balls enter the second prize winning port 640 are different numbers, for example, the number of balls to the first prize winning port 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when is won may be set to three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters the second prize winning port 640 may be set to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second prize winning port 640. - 特許庁This electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state, making it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning port 640. On the other hand, as a result of the variable display of the second symbol that is triggered by the passage of the ball through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device, the electric accessory is displayed. 640a is in an open state, and the ball is likely to enter the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, during time saving, the probability of winning the second symbol is higher than during normal time, and the time required for the variable display of the second symbol is short, so the symbol "○" in the variable display of the second symbol is more likely to be displayed, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Furthermore, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is opened is also longer during the variable probability and during the time saving than during the normal time. Therefore, during the time saving, it is possible to create a state in which it is easier for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 compared to the normal time.

Here, when the ball enters the first prize winning port 64 and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640, the probability of winning the jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, when the ball enters the second winning port 640 as the type of jackpot selected when the jackpot is won (when the ball wins in the lottery corresponding to the second special symbol), 15R at a rate of 100%. When a time-saving (95 times) jackpot (jackpot D) is selected and a ball enters a first prize-winning port 64 (a jackpot is won in a lottery corresponding to a first special symbol), a time-saving game state is provided. The jackpot is a maximum 5R jackpot (61% of the jackpot), and is configured to select a jackpot type that is more advantageous to the player when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640.例文帳に追加It is By configuring in this way, in the normal game state (the state in which the time saving is not given in the low-probability game state), it is easier for the ball to win in the first winning port 64 than in the second winning port 640. By making a game ball enter a first winning hole 64, the ratio of selecting a jackpot (jackpot A or jackpot B) to which a reduction in working hours is given is set to be low, and a reduction in working hours is given and a ball is put in a second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加can easily win a big hit with the second special symbol and the time-saving state can be easily continued. Therefore, it is possible to increase the value of the reduction in working hours.

A variable prize winning device 65 is disposed on the lower right side of the first prize winning port 64, and a horizontally long rectangular specific prize winning port (large open port) 65a is provided in the approximate center thereof. Also, on the right side of the variable display unit 80, a V winning door 600 capable of guiding a ball to the V ball entrance 600a of the V winning device 620 is arranged. When the lottery result of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a big win B or a small win, the V winning door 600 stands upright and the ball does not enter the V ball entrance 600a. A ball can be entered into the V-ball opening 600a by changing from an upright closed state to an open state rotated about 90 degrees to the right.

In the case of a small win, a 1R (round) small win game is executed in which the V winning door 600 is open for 1.2 seconds or until 10 balls win the V ball opening 600a. On the other hand, in the case of the jackpot B, the V winning door is opened until the 1st round as in the small winning game, and the variable winning device 65 is changed to the opened state from the 2nd round. Here, from the 2nd round, the V winning door arranged on the front side of the specific winning opening 65a is set in advance as 1R (round) for 30 seconds or until 10 balls enter the specific winning opening 65a. A round game is repeatedly executed up to the number of rounds corresponding to the jackpot type.

By configuring in this way, whether it is a small win or a big win B, the third symbol display device 81 or the like does not notify whether it is a small win or a big win B, and the small win is not reported. By configuring to shift to a game or a jackpot game, the game ball is similarly entered into the V winning device 620, and the game is played in anticipation of the game ball entering the V winning hole 624 described later. It can be carried out. In the present embodiment, when a small win is made, a game ball enters a V winning opening 624 of a V winning device 620, which will be described later, so that a big win game is executed after the small win game. . It should be noted that the variable winning device 65 is opened from the 1R for the big winning that starts when a game ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the small winning game.

In the case of the jackpot game in the jackpot B, when the game ball enters the V winning device 620 in the 1Rth jackpot game, the winning control is executed so that the game ball enters the V winning port 624. is configured to As a result, even in the case of a jackpot game in the jackpot B, it can be made to feel as if the variable prize winning device 65 has been opened after winning the V prize opening 624 (actually, the 2R game in the jackpot game). eye is running). It is to be noted that, when a ball enters the V ball entrance 600a or the specific winning hole 65a, 15 balls are paid out to the player as prize balls for one ball. In addition, in the jackpot games other than the jackpot B, since the variable winning device 65 is configured to be in the open state from the 1R (round), the start of the jackpot game instead of the small win is the content of the jackpot game. can also be identified.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to the winning of the first prize winning port 64 or the second prize winning port 640 results in a jackpot, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the third symbol display device 81 displays a stop symbol (for example, a crossover symbol such as 333). In addition, when the big winning lottery performed due to the winning of the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 becomes a small win, after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses, the small winning stop pattern is set. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on, and a stop symbol (for example, a crossover symbol such as 333) is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 similarly displays the third symbol in the ready-to-win display mode (the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same third symbol) regardless of whether it is a small win or a big win B. A chance symbol composed of a combination of a display mode in which three symbols are suspended) and a middle symbol is a chance symbol (the third symbol with the word "CHANCE") is displayed stopped. It is notified by being As a result, the game (corresponding to a small win game or a big win game) in which the 1R V winning door 600 is opened by stopping and displaying the third symbol in the symbol of the chance symbol is executed at least for the player. This can be recognized, and the ball can be expected to enter the V winning opening 624 . In addition, when a specific pattern (for example, 777 zorome pattern) is stopped and displayed among the third patterns, the execution of the jackpot game is notified, and the specific pattern is displayed. is displayed, the player may be made to recognize at an early stage that a high-value-added jackpot game will be executed.

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing the front side around the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The specific winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the case of a big win B, a large opening solenoid is driven from the 2nd round, and in the case of a win other than the big win B, from the 1st round, the opening/closing plate is tilted to the front lower side, and an open state in which the ball easily enters the specific winning opening 65a. is temporarily formed, and the open state and the normal closed state are alternately repeated.

Next, the V winning device 620 will be described with reference to FIGS. 229 to 231. FIG. The V winning device 620 is arranged in the variable display unit 80 and attached to the front side of the third pattern display device 81 . As shown in FIGS. 229 and 231, the V winning device 620 includes a movable guide member 622, a rotating distribution member 621, a V winning opening 624, a left discharge passage 623a, a right discharge passage 623b, a first retention member 622d, and a passage switching. It is configured by the member 622e.

Normally, the rotary distribution member 621 of the V winning device 620 is configured to be visible to the player, and when the power is turned on, the rotary distribution member 621 is always rotated in the left and right direction at a constant cycle. is configured as When the V winning door 600 is opened with the start of a small winning game or a big winning game, game balls can flow into the V ball opening 600 a of the V winning device 620 . A V ball entrance 600a into which a game ball can enter is formed at the abutting portion of the V winning door 600 and the V winning device 620, and the game ball enters the V winning device 620 from the V ball entrance 600a. A guideway is formed to guide the A photosensor capable of detecting the passage of a ball is arranged in the V ball opening 600a, and is configured to be able to count the number of winnings to the V winning device 620 (V ball opening 600a). It is configured such that prize balls (three balls) are paid out to the player based on the ball being detected by the photosensor.

Here, with reference to FIG. 253, the V winning device 620 will be described in detail according to the timing chart of the operation control of the V winning device 620 in the small winning game. When the small winning game is started, after the opening period (t1: 0.1 seconds) has passed, the opening period (t2: 1.2 seconds) V winning opening solenoid operates (operates ON) V winning Door 600 is changed to an open state. When the game ball enters the V ball entrance 600a in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the guideway is configured to stay while being restricted from flowing down by the first staying member 622d shown in FIG. This first staying member 622d is configured so that the stay 1 solenoid is operated (operated ON) for 4 seconds so as to protrude to the front side so as to make the ball stay at the top based on the start of the small winning game. . In addition, when one ball is retained in the first retention member 622d, the game ball flowing down thereafter collides with the retained ball and is discharged to either the left or right. After 1.2 seconds of the opening period of the V prize door 600 have passed, the V prize door solenoid is turned off, and 2.7 seconds after the V prize door 600 is changed from the open state to the closed state, The stay 1 solenoid 209a is turned off, the first stay member 622d retreats toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the balls staying at the top flow down. Below the first retention member 622d, a channel switching member 622e that always operates in the horizontal direction is arranged.

The channel switching member 622e is configured to operate left and right by being turned on and off at intervals of 0.4 s by the channel solenoid 209b. When turned off, it moves to a position that closes the inflow port of the movable guide member 622 so that the ball cannot enter the movable guide member 622 . In the off state, the ball flowing down from the upstream is guided to the right by the inclined portion formed on the upper portion of the channel switching member 622e and is discharged out of the V winning device. On the other hand, when the flow channel solenoid is on and the flow channel switching member is retracted to the left side of the inlet, the ball can flow into the movable guide member 622. It is configured.

At the timing when the first retention member 622d is retracted and the retained game ball flows down, the channel switching member 622e is in an open state (a state in which the channel solenoid is turned on and the channel switching member is retracted to the left). , the ball flows into the movable guide member 622 . As shown in FIG. 231, the movable guide member 622 is configured in a cylindrical shape that allows one ball to flow down, and one end is formed with an inlet for the ball to flow in, and the other end is for discharging the ball. A discharge port 622a is formed. A recess 622c for holding one ball is formed in front of the discharge port 622a (on the upstream side), and a second retention member for preventing the ball that has entered the recess 622c from flowing down is formed on the downstream side of the recess 622c. 622b is arranged. The second retention member 622b protrudes upward when the retention 2 solenoid 612 is actuated (turned on) to prevent the ball entering the recess 622c from flowing down. 622b rotates to the left to change to a released state in which the ball entering the concave portion 622c is allowed to flow down.

As shown in FIG. 253, the second retention member 622b is changed to a regulated state by the activation (ON) of the retention 2 solenoid 612 for 2 seconds (t6) after 5 seconds from the start of the small winning game. , restricts the ball that has entered the concave portion 622c from flowing down. The movable induction member 622 is rotated leftward so that the inflow port side rises as shown in FIG. Thereafter, for 1.5 seconds (t5), the residence 2 movable motor 610a is operated to raise the movable guide member 622 to the maximum movable position (see FIG. 231(b)). As described above, the retention 2 solenoid 612 is controlled to be turned off at the timing of 6 seconds after the start of the small winning game, so the second retention member 622b is released while the movable guide member 622 is rising. In this state, the movable guide member 622 is tilted downward to the left, and when the tilt angle is large, the ball entering the concave portion 622c is configured to easily flow downward to the left.

As shown in FIG. 229(a), when the ball that entered the recess 622c starts flowing down, the ball that entered the recess 622c is ejected to the rotary distribution member 621 through the ejection port 622a. The ejected balls roll on the rotating distribution member 621 and are ejected downstream. The rotating distribution member 621 is rotated left and right at a constant cycle after the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. When the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a at the same timing as the downstream discharge port 621a, it becomes easier for the ball to enter the V winning port 624. On the other hand, when the ball is discharged from the downstream discharge port 621a in a state where the downstream discharge port 621a and the V winning port are not aligned in parallel, the V winning device 620 is discharged by the left discharge passage 623a or the right discharge passage 623b arranged on the left and right. It is configured to be discharged to the outside.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 253, a V effective period is set for two seconds (t7) from 5 seconds after the start of the small win, in which it is determined that the ball has entered the V winning opening 624 as valid. It is configured. Winning detection is validated only when the photosensor detects that a ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during the V validity period, and control processing is performed as invalid if the prize is won during the other period. are doing. By configuring in this way, it is possible to determine only the period during which it is possible to enter the V winning hole 624, and damage caused by fraud such as when the ball is illegally entered into the V winning hole 624 by manipulating the ball with a magnet or the like. can be reduced. In this embodiment, when the winning to the V winning opening 624 is detected during the V valid period, the big winning game is executed after the small winning game. The jackpot game given when the ball normally passes through the V winning opening 624 in the small hit game is the type of the executed small hit game (small hit A or small hit B (Fig. 244 (b) to (c) See)) is configured to set the jackpot type corresponding to.

In addition, the timing chart shown in FIG. 254 is shown for the case of not passing through V in the small hit. In the example shown in FIG. 254, when the channel switching member 622e is in the closed state, the game ball is not guided to the movable guide member 622 by releasing the first retention member 622d V winning It shows an example of not doing so. Similarly, FIG. 254 is an example of a timing chart for entering the V winning port 624 in the case of the jackpot B, and FIG. An example. Also, FIG. 252 is a game flow showing a game state set when a big win or a small win is made in this embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 244 (b), when the small hit A in the special figure 1 is executed, a 5R (time saving 95 times) jackpot is set, and when the small hit B is executed, 10R normal ( No time saving) Jackpot is set. Also, as shown in FIG. 244 (c), when the small hit C in the special figure 2 is executed, a 15R (95 times short time) jackpot is set, and when the small hit D is executed 5R ( Time saving 95 times) is set, and when a small hit E is executed, a 5R (no time saving) jackpot is set. In addition, the time reduction in the name of each jackpot indicates that the time reduction gaming state is set, and the subsequent display of the number of times indicates the number of times the special symbol changes as the period in which the time reduction gaming state is set. Normal indicates that it is a jackpot in which the time-saving gaming state is not set.

In the present embodiment, when the small winning game is executed, by winning the V winning opening 624, the big winning type corresponding to the small winning type is executed. A counter value (for example, the first winning type counter value C2) may be acquired at the timing of winning, and may be selected from a predetermined selection table. The predetermined selection table may set a different selection table for each game state (normal game state, time saving game state), may set a different selection table depending on the type of special symbol, or may set a different selection table depending on the type of special symbol. A different selection table may be set depending on the winning type.

It should be noted that here, when the variable display is stopped and displayed when it is determined that the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) are small hits or big hits, the small hit type , the LED of the first symbol display device 37a is lit and displayed in a lighting mode corresponding to the jackpot type. Since it is a display mode in which a plurality of LEDs are combined and displayed, even if the player visually recognizes the first pattern display device 37a, it is configured so that it is difficult to identify the details of the small winning type and the big winning type at a glance. It is Furthermore, in the case of a big win, the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37 are displayed corresponding to the number of rounds corresponding to the type of the big win. As for the notification of the number of rounds, the number of rounds is not notified by characters or the like, but is displayed together with the lighting of the LED indicating the jackpot type, so that it is more difficult for the player to identify the number of rounds. Thus, even if the first pattern display device 37 notifies the player of the big win type, the small win type, and the number of rounds of the big win to maintain the fairness of the game, the information is difficult for the player to understand. By doing so, it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the small winning game and the big winning game before the execution thereof, and the player can distinguish between the small winning game and the big winning game even during the big winning game in the small winning game and the big winning B. It is configured so that a game can be played while making predictions. As a result, the interest in the game can be further improved.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when a small winning game is executed, the type of the big winning game given when winning the V winning opening 624 differs depending on the type of the small winning, so a big winning that is disadvantageous to the player. When the small winning game corresponding to the small winning type to which the type is given is executed, the shooting of the game ball is stopped and the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the V ball entrance 600a. Although there is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game parlor increases, in the configuration of the present embodiment, the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81, etc. are configured in a notification mode in which the type of the small win is difficult to understand. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the way of playing the game that suffers from the disadvantages described above.

Furthermore, 0.1 seconds after the variation of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined as a small hit is stopped and displayed, the V winning door 600 is opened and the open state is maintained for 1.2 seconds. Therefore, even if the player can identify by analyzing the display mode of the first symbol display device 37, even if the game ball is launched after identification, the V ball entrance 600a is not reached. It is configured so that it is difficult to shoot a game ball to reach it. Specifically, in this embodiment, 100 game balls are fired at equal intervals per minute regardless of the firing intensity, so one shot is fired every 0.6 seconds. Since it takes about 2 seconds for the game ball to reach the V ball entrance 600a after being shot from the launcher, if the game ball is not continuously shot to the right side area, the V ball entrance 600a It becomes difficult to enter the ball into the V ball entrance 600a, and if control is performed so that the ball is not entered into the V ball entrance 600a at the time of the small win, the game ball will enter the V ball entrance 600a for the small winning game corresponding to any small winning type. will not be able to enter the ball. Therefore, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed and the right-handed notification (notification mode for notifying the player that the game ball is to be shot to the right area) is given, the player immediately starts right-handed. You can play the game so that you can do it.

An affixing space K<b>1 for affixing a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided in the lower right corner of the game board 13 . 35 (see FIG. 226).

The game board 13 is provided with a first outlet 71 . Balls that flow down the game area and do not win in any of the winning holes 63, 64, 65a, 600a and 640 are guided through the out hole 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). The out port 66 is arranged below the variable winning device 65 .

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for properly dispersing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills. In this embodiment, one of the windmills (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is illustrated in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 228, the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the bottom of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 229). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

In addition, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with an operation knob 121 of a variable resistor, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 229) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

The third pattern display device 81 performs decorative display according to the display of the first pattern display device 37 . For example, when a ball enters the first winning port 64 or the second winning port 640 (start winning), the first special symbol or the second special symbol (first symbol) is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 as a trigger. is executed. Furthermore, in the third symbol display device 81, in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol is performed. In addition, the variable display of the third symbol is performed in common with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Also, the second special symbol is prioritized over the first special symbol and is configured to be variably displayed, so that the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed at the same time. It is

In the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not variably displayed at the same time, but the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be variably displayed at the same time. It is good also as possible composition. By configuring in this way, more lottery games can be executed in the same time, and the efficiency of the game can be improved.

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch liquid crystal display, and the display contents are controlled by a display control device 114, which will be described later, so that, for example, three pattern columns, left, middle and right, are displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In this embodiment, the display of the game state accompanying the control of the main control device 110 is performed by the first symbol display device 37, while the third symbol display device 81 displays the display of the first symbol display device 37. A corresponding decorative display is performed. Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like. The display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be explained. The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns consisting of numbers "0" to "9".

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery of special symbols performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, is a big win, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed, and the variable display is performed. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after it is over. On the other hand, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a loss, a variable display in which the same main symbols are not aligned is performed.

In the display area of the third symbol display device 81, a symbol row with three main symbols is displayed. In each symbol row, the above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order. That is, main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each symbol row, and each symbol row is cyclically scrolled from top to bottom for variable display. The symbol rows are displayed as a left symbol row displayed on the left side of the display area, a middle symbol row displayed to the right of the left symbol row, and a right symbol row displayed to the right of the middle symbol row.

In addition, the third pattern is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three stages for each pattern row. The middle part of the third pattern is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is stopped and displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of left pattern row→right pattern row→middle pattern row in each game. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols in this embodiment) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

On the other hand, below the display area of the third symbol display device 81 is the number of balls (holding balls) that have not been changed among the balls entered in the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640. One identification pattern (reserved pattern) of "circle pattern" is displayed for one reserved ball, and the player is notified. The player can determine the current number of reserved balls by the number of reserved symbols. A maximum of four balls are set for each of the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640, and each ball is reserved for the first winning hole 64 and the second winning hole 640. are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in distinguishably different colors (for example, black for the first winning opening 64 and red for the second winning opening 640).

In the display area of the third pattern display device 81, in addition to the third pattern and the reserved pattern, character patterns, characters, etc. are displayed as an advance notice display mode to be displayed during the variable display (dynamic display) of the third pattern. be done. Further, when no game is played for a predetermined period of time, a standby display image such as the model name of the pachinko machine 10 and a digest of the ready-to-win display mode is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the number of balls entered into the first prize winning port 64 and the second prize winning port 640 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four times. However, the number of times may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Alternatively, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls may be indicated by a number on a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the areas divided into four areas may be changed by the number of reserved balls. (For example, colors or lighting patterns) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. - 特許庁Further, the variable display unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10>
Next, referring to FIG. 239, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 239 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated. In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controller by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the operation of the sub-controller such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

The ROM 202 of the main controller 110 includes a first winning random number table 202a, a first winning type selection table 202b, a normal symbol random number table 202c, a variation pattern table 202d, a small winning type selection table 202e, a big winning scenario table 202aa, and a small winning. Scenario tables 202ab are set respectively. Data necessary for other games are also stored, but since they are unnecessary in the description of the invention in this embodiment, their description will be omitted.

The first winning random number table 202a, the first winning type selection table 202b, the normal winning random number table 202c, the fluctuation pattern table 202d, and the small winning type selection table 202e will be described in detail later with reference to the drawings.

The jackpot scenario table 202aa is a data table that defines a jackpot scenario in which operation contents during the jackpot game are set. period until), round period (maximum period in which one round of round game is set), inter-round interval period (period from the end of the round game to the start of the next round game) are the jackpot types. Correspondingly defined, corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa, which is set when a jackpot game is started, and whose value is incremented by 1 periodically (every time the main processing of the main control device 110 is executed). Motion control is performed.

The jackpot scenario table 202aa defines a plurality of different tables corresponding to the types of jackpots won. Here, the detailed contents of the jackpot scenario table 202aa will be described with reference to FIG. 248(a). FIG. 248(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the jackpot scenario table 202aa. As shown in FIG. 248(a), the jackpot scenario table 202aa defines different scenarios corresponding to jackpot types (jackpot A to jackpot D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 248(a), for the jackpot types A and C in which the jackpot game for opening the specific winning opening 65a is executed, the jackpot scenario a202aa1 corresponding to the jackpot game for 5R is the jackpot type. D defines a jackpot scenario 202aa6 corresponding to a jackpot game for 15R.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 248(a), for the jackpot type B that opens the V winning port 624 or the specific winning port 65a according to the number of rounds during the jackpot game, as a scenario corresponding to the first round of the jackpot game, A winning scenario a202aa2 indicating the first half of the action of the first round, a winning scenario b202aa3 indicating the second half of the action of the first round, a winning scenario c202aa4, and the actions of the round game from the second round to the fifth round. A jackpot scenario b202aa5 indicating is defined.

In the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. ), and when the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot type B is started, the V prize door 600 is opened and the round game (V challenge) aimed at the V prize mouth 624 is executed. be done.

Furthermore, by opening the V winning door 600 during this V challenge, a game ball can easily enter the V ball entrance 600a, and the game ball that has entered the V ball entrance 600a is transferred to the channel switching member. 622e, based on the detection result of the second retention sensor (not shown) whether or not the game ball is retained by the second retention member 622b of the movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231 (a)) , and based on the result of the determination, the contents of the action in the second half of the first round of the round game are changed.

In the main control device 110, the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the display setting in the first symbol display device 37, the display setting in the second symbol display device 83, and the display setting in the third symbol display device 81 Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as The RAM 203 is provided with various counters for controlling these processes. Here, with reference to FIG. 241, counters and the like provided in RAM 203 of main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are the special symbol lottery, the normal symbol lottery, the setting of the display in the first design display device 37, the setting of the display in the second design display device 83, and the setting of the display in the third design display device 81. etc., it is used in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 .

In order to select the special symbol lottery and the setting of the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the special symbol lottery and the special symbol jackpot type. 1st per type counter C2 used for , stop type selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop type of out of special symbols, and first initial value random number used for initial value setting of 1st per random number counter C1 A counter CINI1 and a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection are used. Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of normal symbols, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 274). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . In the RAM 203, a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and a second winning opening 640 corresponding to the winning of the first winning opening 64 consisting of one execution area and four retaining areas (first to fourth reserved areas) are stored. A special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to winning a prize is provided. Each value of the per-1 random number counter C1, the first per-type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored. In addition, the RAM 203 is provided with a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c consisting of one execution area and four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The value of the second hit random number counter C4 is stored in synchronization with the timing of passing through any of the normal starting ports (through gates) 67. FIG.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 999), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 999 in the case of a counter that can take values between 0 and 999). It is configured to return to In particular, when the first winning random number counter C1 completes one cycle, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 999, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 999. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 274).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is updated, for example, periodically (in this embodiment, once per timer interrupt processing), and the RAM 203 is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. The value of the random number for the special symbol jackpot is set by the first winning random number table (see FIGS. 242(a) to (c)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, and the first winning random number When the value of the counter C1 coincides with the value of the random number set by the first winning random number table to become a big win, it is determined as a special symbol big win. Here, the first winning random number table 202a1 includes a special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol and a special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol.

Here, the first winning random number table 202a will be described. The first winning random number table 202a is a table in which random numbers (determination values) determined as winning in each game state are set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 242(b), in the lottery for the first special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "0 to 3". 3”, it is determined to be a jackpot. On the other hand, when it is determined to be other than "0 to 3" (that is, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is lost), it is determined whether the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is "4". If the result is "4", it is determined to be a small win. Here, when it is determined that there is no small win, it is determined that the lottery result is a loss.

As shown in FIG. 242(c), in the lottery for the second special symbol, it is determined whether the value of the first random number counter C1 obtained in the same manner as the first special symbol is "0 to 3". 0 to 3”, it is determined to be a big hit. On the other hand, when it is determined to be other than "0 to 3" (that is, when it is determined that the jackpot lottery is lost), the value of the acquired first winning random number counter C1 is either "4 to 997" If it is any of "4 to 997", it is determined to be a small win. Here, when it is determined that there is no small win, it is determined that the lottery result is a loss.

In this way, the big winning probability in the big winning lottery of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to be the same, but the second special symbol has a smaller winning probability than the first special symbol with respect to the small winning probability. is set high. As a result, in a time-saving game state in which the game ball is easily entered into the second prize winning port 640, the lottery is likely to be executed with the second special symbol, so the probability of winning a small prize is increased, and the V winning port 624 is entered. can increase the opportunities for Therefore, since it is possible to set the time-saving game state more advantageous to the player, it is expected that the jackpot game to which the time-saving game state is given will be executed even when the normal game state is set. It is possible to prevent the player from quickly getting bored with the game.

The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol jackpot is won. ), and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball wins the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 is reserved in the RAM 203. It is stored in the ball storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a special symbol jackpot or small hit, that is, If it is a random number that causes the special symbol to come off, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 will be the one when the special symbol comes off.

On the other hand, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device. The display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed in 37 is the one at the time of the special symbol jackpot. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Become.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 999. FIG. In this first hit random number counter C1, there are four random numbers for the first special symbol and the second special symbol for the jackpot. It is stored in the table 202a1 and the special symbol 2 per random number table 202a2. In this way, among the total number of random numbers of 1000, the total number of random number numbers that become a big hit is 4, so the probability of a special symbol big win is "1/250".

Further, the value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter within the range of 0-99. Then, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special pattern and the second special pattern is a jackpot, the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 241(a)) for determining the type of jackpot to be executed is It is set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 . The first winning type selection table 202b includes, as shown in FIG. 243(a), a special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1, which is a data table for determining the type of jackpot game for the first special symbol, and a second special A special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2, which is a data table for determining the jackpot game type for the symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 243(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 jackpot type selection table 202b1. As the jackpot type of the first special symbol, three types from the jackpot A to the jackpot C described above are set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "0 to 44" is "jackpot A (5R short time 95 times jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 44" of the first winning type counter C2 is set as the judgment value. The jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "45 to 60" is "jackpot B (5R short time three times jackpot)". That is, the value of "45 to 60" of the first win type counter C2 is set as the judgment value. The jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "61 to 99" is "jackpot C (10R time-saving no jackpot)". That is, the value of "61 to 99" of the first win type counter C2 is set as the judgment value.

In this way, in the normal game state, the game is played mainly by winning the game ball into the first winning hole 64, but the time-saving game state is 61% of the first special symbol jackpot. It is a jackpot (jackpot A and jackpot B) to be given. Therefore, even when the first special symbol is a big hit, the time-saving game state is not necessarily given, so the player is interested in whether it is a jackpot type in which the time-saving game is given even when the big win. You can have it, and you can improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 243(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 jackpot type selection table 202b2. As the jackpot type of the second special symbol, one type of the jackpot D described above is set so as to be selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2. Specifically, the jackpot type when the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is any one of "0 to 99" is "jackpot D (15R short time 95 times jackpot)". That is, a value of "0 to 99" of the first win type counter C2 is set as the judgment value.

In this way, when a big win is achieved for the second special symbol (according to the big win determination for the winning to the second winning port 640), the big win which always gives the time-saving game is provided. there is Furthermore, the number of time reduction is set to 95 times, which is more advantageous than the jackpot B, and the number of rounds to be executed is also set to 15R, which is more advantageous to the player than the jackpots A to C. It is configured. As a result, when a big win is achieved by the lottery of the second special symbols that are likely to be executed mainly in the time-saving game state, the big-win game that is more advantageous than the first special symbols is executed, thereby reducing the time. It is configured to increase the value when the game state is executed.

The small hit type counter C5 determines the small hit type and determines the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 when the special symbol hits. 99), it is incremented by 1 in order, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (for example, 99 in the case of a counter that can take values from 0 to 99). The value of the small hit type counter C5 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and at the timing when the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball in the RAM 203 It is stored in the storage area 203a, and is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203 at the timing when the ball enters the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁

Further, the value of the small hit type counter C5 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. And, when the result of the jackpot lottery for the first special symbol and the second special symbol is a small hit, a small hit type selection table 202e for determining the type of the small hit to be executed (see Fig. 244 (a)) are set in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 . The small hit type selection table 202e includes a special figure 1 small hit type selection table 202e1, which is a data table for determining the type of small hit game for the first special symbol as shown in FIG. A special figure 2 small hit type selection table 202e2, which is a data table for determining the type of the small hit game for the special symbol, is set respectively.

FIG. 244(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 1 small per type selection table 202b1. As the small hit type of the first special symbol, two types of the small hit A and the small hit B described above are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any of "0 to 64", the small hit type is "small hit A (5R short time 95 times big hit when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 64" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "65 to 99" is "small hit B (10R short time no jackpot when V passes)". That is, the value of "65 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small winning A and the small winning B, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small winning game, the type of the big winning game to be executed after that is set. In the case of the small win A, a 5R time-saving 95-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win A, the variable prize-winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state to execute a big win, and then 95 as a time-saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period from when the variation of the special symbol is executed 95 times to when it is stopped and displayed). In the case of the small win B, a 10R time-saving no big win is set, and after the execution of the small win B, a big win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 10R open state, but after the big win game is configured such that the time-saving game state is not set and the normal game state is set. In this way, the number of rounds executed in the big winning game is large, and the small winning B is set more advantageous than the small winning A, but since the time-saving game state is not set after the big winning game, It is difficult to execute the lottery with the second special symbol that is advantageous, and overall, it is set to be advantageous to the player when the small winning A wins the V winning opening 624 rather than the small winning B. It is

FIG. 244(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the special figure 2 small per type selection table 202b2. As the small hit type of the second special symbol, three types of the above-described small hit C to small hit D are set so as to be selected by the value of the small hit type counter C5. Specifically, when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is either "0 to 49", the small hit type is "small hit C (15R short time 95 times big hit when passing V)" becomes. That is, a value of "0 to 49" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "50 to 79" is "small hit D (5R short time 95 times big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "50 to 79" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value. The small hit type when the value of the acquired small hit type counter C5 is any one of "80 to 99" is "small hit E (5R short time no big hit when passing V)". That is, the value of "80 to 99" of the small hit type counter C5 is set as the determination value.

Here, in the small wins C to E, when the game ball enters the V winning opening 624 in the small win game, the type of the big win game to be executed after that is set. In the case of the small win C, a 15R time-saving 95-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win C, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 15R open state to execute a big win, and then 95 as a time-saving game state. It is configured to set a time-saving game (a period from when the variation of the special symbol is executed 95 times to when it is stopped and displayed). In addition, in the case of the small win D, a 5R time-saving 95-time big win is set, and after the execution of the small win D, a big win game is executed in which the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then the variable winning. A jackpot is executed in which the device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and then 95 times of the time saving game (a period until the variation of the special symbol is executed 95 times and is stopped and displayed) is set as the time saving game state. It is configured. In addition, in the case of the small winning E, the 5R time-saving no big winning is set, and after the execution of the small winning E, the variable winning device 65 is set to the 5R open state, and the big winning game is executed. is configured such that the time-saving game state is not set and the normal game state is set.

In this way, with respect to the small winning type for the second special symbol, when the V winning opening 624 is won more than the small winning type for the first special symbol, the time-saving gaming state that is advantageous to the player is set. The percentage of types selected is set high. As a result, when the time-saving gaming state is set, the lottery for the second special symbol is easily executed, and the probability of being determined as a small hit is set higher than the lottery for the first special symbol. It is determined as a small win, and winning a prize in the V winning opening 624 makes it easy to execute the big win game in which the time-saving game state is set again. As a result, while the time-saving game state is continued, the jackpot game can be given to the player, and the value of the time-saving game state can be further increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be a small hit and the fluctuation display stops, the LED corresponding to the small hit type of the first symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed. is configured as Therefore, when the player is in the time-saving game, the player wants to play the game so that a more advantageous jackpot game (jackpot game in which the time-saving game state is set) is executed by effectively using the remaining time-saving number of times. . Then, the small winning game type displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is discriminated, and only when it is the small winning type to which the time-saving game state is not given, the shooting of the game ball is stopped to enter the V ball entrance 600a. There is a possibility that a game method that is disadvantageous to the game parlor side, in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game, is executed. However, in this embodiment, the V winning door 600 is set to the open state for 1.6 seconds 0.1 seconds after the variable display determined as the small hit in the first special symbol and the second special symbol is stopped and displayed. Therefore, in the configuration of the present embodiment, which takes 2 seconds to reach the V ball entrance 600a, the game ball is shot after confirming the first symbol display device 37. Therefore, it is difficult to enter the ball into the V ball entrance 600a, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are determined to be small hits, the fluctuation stops, and the third symbol display device 81 announces hitting to the right. It seems difficult to enter the game ball into the V ball opening 600a in the small winning game in all the small winning types unless the game is played by immediately launching the game ball to the right side area when it is executed. is configured to As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method that is extremely disadvantageous to the game parlor.

Here, with reference to FIG. 247, each winning type and winning game operation will be described. For the jackpot A and jackpot C, 1R is repeated until 10 game balls enter the variable prize winning device 65, or until the open state continues for 29 seconds.

As for the jackpot B, in the 1Rth round game, the V winning door 600 is opened and the V ball entrance 600a is opened for 1.2 seconds. If 10 balls are won in the 1st round, the ball will be closed before 1.2 seconds have passed. It has become. In the 2nd to 5th round games, the round game is executed until 10 game balls are won in the variable winning device 65 or until the open state continues for 29 seconds.

For the jackpot D, 15 round games are repeated until 10 balls enter the variable winning device 65 and game balls win or until the open state continues for 29 seconds.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). Depending on the variation type counter CS1 and the lottery result (off, big hit type, small hit), so-called short off (7 seconds), goose off (30 seconds), normal reach (30 seconds), super reach (60 seconds), special reach Rough display mode (90 seconds), no pseudo development (30 seconds), 1 pseudo development (34 seconds), 2 pseudo development (38 seconds), 3 pseudo development (42 seconds) variation time) is determined. Determination of the display mode is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the symbol variation. Based on the variation time determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the detailed symbol variation mode are determined by the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114. be. The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 274) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process. A variation pattern table (see FIG. 245(a)) storing a random value for determining one variation time of pattern variation from the value (random value) of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. is provided.

As shown in FIG. 245(a), the variation pattern table 202d includes a normal variation pattern table 202d1 used in the normal gaming state and a time saving variation pattern table 202d2 used in the time saving gaming state. are set respectively.

FIG. 245(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal fluctuation pattern table 202d1. Normal variation pattern table 202d1, as a variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is out, short out (7 seconds), false out (30 seconds), various normal reach ( 30 seconds), various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are set. A pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 139", short out (7 seconds) is selected, and when it is "140 to 149", false out (30 seconds) is selected. If it is "150 to 179", normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and if it is "180 to 194", super reach (60 seconds) is selected, "195 to 198" In each case, the determination value is set so that various types of special reach (90 seconds) are selected.

The lottery result of the first special pattern or the second special pattern is a jackpot, and as a variation pattern selected when the jackpot types are jackpots A, C to D (that is, other than jackpot B), various normal reach (30 seconds) , various types of super reach (60 seconds), and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are set, and the corresponding variation pattern is selected by comparing the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value. be done. Here, when the variation is stopped, the third symbol is stopped and displayed (symbol-matched big win) so that the player is notified of the big win. It should be noted that the number "777" is displayed only in the case of the jackpot type in which the time-saving gaming state is set after the jackpot game. In addition, in the case of a jackpot type in which a time-saving game state is set after the jackpot game, a lottery for determining the stop pattern of the third pattern is configured to determine the zoromi other than the zoromi of "777". It is configured so that it is not known whether the time-saving game will be given until after the jackpot game.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 40", normal reach (30 seconds) is selected, and when it is "41 to 179", super reach (60 seconds) is selected. The judgment values are set so that when the range is "180 to 198", various special reach (90 seconds) is selected.

In addition, each variation pattern selected in the case of a big hit is configured with the same variation time as each variation pattern selected in the case of a loss, and finally a stop pattern (zorome) indicating a big win. It is configured differently depending on whether it is displayed or not. As a result, even if the judgment result is a failure, the player can expect a big win by selecting the same variation pattern (variation pattern that becomes a reach) that is also selected in the case of a big win. can.

As a variation pattern to be selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small win or a big win, and the jackpot type is a big win B, pseudo-development no production (30 seconds), pseudo-development once production (34 seconds), pseudo-development 2 times effect (38 seconds), pseudo-development 3 times effect (42 seconds) are set respectively, and the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value are Matching and corresponding variation patterns are selected. Here, when the variation is stopped, the chance number (see FIG. 238) is stopped and displayed, so that the player is informed that at least a small win has been won. As a result, even the big win B is displayed in the same stop pattern as the small win, so the player can play the game expecting that the game ball will enter the V winning hole 624 in the small win game. can.

Specifically, when the value of the variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 49", the pseudo development non-effect (30 seconds) is selected, and when it is "50 to 99", the pseudo development once effect ( 34 seconds) is selected, if it is "100 to 149", a pseudo development twice production (38 seconds) is selected, and if it is "150 to 198", pseudo development three times production (38 seconds) Judgment values are set so that they are selected.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 232 to 236, in the third symbol display device 81 in this embodiment, there is no fake (30 seconds), no pseudo-development effect (30 seconds), and one-time pseudo-development effect (34 seconds). The presentation mode to be displayed will be described. Figures 232 and 233 are diagrams showing the flow of variation of the third symbol in the case of misalignment (30 seconds). When the fluctuation start timing of the first special symbol or the second special symbol determined to be out comes, each third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (left, middle, Right symbol) starts scrolling in the vertical direction. In addition, in the lower right area of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, the fourth symbol is a display area smaller than the area where the third symbol is displayed (the area where each third symbol is displayed). ” and “X” are alternately displayed in two columns on the left and right. The fourth pattern is configured to be variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display period of the special symbols displayed on the first symbol display device 37, and the display mode corresponding to the determination result at the end timing of the variable period. (Loss: A combination of a circle pattern on the left row and an X pattern on the right row, a big hit: a combination of a circle pattern on the left row and a circle pattern on the right row, a small hit: a combination of an x pattern on the left row and an x pattern on the right row) is configured to stop at In addition, as shown in FIGS. 232(a) and 232(b), the state in which three lines are drawn on the fourth pattern indicates that the fourth pattern is variably displayed.

In the case of false deviation (30 seconds), when 30 seconds have passed since the start of the fluctuation, the temporarily stopped third symbol is fixedly stopped (displayed stopped from shaking fluctuation) as shown in FIG. is also configured to be displayed as a stop.

In the pseudo-development non-effect (30 seconds), the symbols that are temporarily stopped are the ready-to-win display mode for the left and right symbols as shown in FIG. The difference is that a chance symbol with a character "CHANCE" is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 234 to 236 are diagrams showing the flow of variation of the third symbol in one pseudo-development effect (34 seconds). When it is determined as a small hit or a big hit B, and the pseudo-development once production is selected, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is triggered to start changing. As shown in a), each third pattern (left, middle and right patterns) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is started to be scrolled in the vertical direction. After that, after being displayed in a scroll display at high speed (speed or mode at which the type of the third symbol is difficult to identify), the chance symbol is temporarily stopped as shown in FIG. After being displayed, each third pattern is shaken and fluctuated up and down.

After that, in the one-time pseudo-development production, as shown in FIG. 234(a), the middle symbol "5" symbol and the right symbol "4" symbol are variably displayed. Here, in the present embodiment, when the third symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of "345", it is set as a symbol of the combination that informs the player that the re-fluctuation will be executed. As shown in FIG. 234(b), by moving to and displaying the combination "345", scroll display in the vertical direction is started again. After that, through high-speed scroll display, the chance number is temporarily stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. Here, in the case of the pseudo-development 2-time production (38 seconds) and the pseudo-development 3-time production (42 seconds), after the temporary stop, if it is the pseudo-development 2-time production, it will change again. In the case of the three-time pseudo-development effect, the chance symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed after the effect of executing the re-variation twice is executed. In this way, by executing the pseudo-variation a plurality of times, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the small winning game or the big winning B starts.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, the SW (switch) effects in the fake, 1-time pseudo-development effect, 2-time pseudo-development effect, and 3-time pseudo-development effect will be described. On the sound lamp control device 113 side, an effect using the frame button 22 is set as one of the effects selected according to the variation pattern command. Detailed performance contents are selected by the sound lamp control device 113 by lottery based on the variation pattern command indicating false-false, 1-time pseudo-development performance, 2-time pseudo-development performance, and 3-time pseudo-development performance. As one of effects, when the temporary stop display is performed, as shown in FIG. An effect prompting the player is executed.

When the frame button 22 is pressed, as shown in FIG. 235(b), if any of the pseudo-development once effect, the pseudo-development twice effect, or the pseudo-development three times effect is selected, it is changed again. A pattern of "345" is displayed to suggest that the change is executed again. On the other hand, in the case that the out of sync is selected, as shown in FIG. 236, the pattern temporarily stopped does not change, and is stopped and displayed as it is at the timing when the fluctuation period has passed. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the configuration is such that the "CHANCE" symbol of the chance eye is displayed as the final stop symbol that has changed again. "4" symbols) may be displayed alternately, or by displaying both symbols and scrolling, the "CHANCE" symbol may be displayed up to the stop display position. In this case, when the "CHANCE" symbol does not stop at the middle symbol, the symbol that has stopped may be re-varied. By configuring in this way, it becomes difficult to discriminate each variation pattern before the player is fixed and stopped, and the start timing of the small winning game and the big winning B can be made difficult to understand. Therefore, even if the configuration is such that the small win and the big win are displayed in a recognizable manner in the fourth pattern, attention to the fourth pattern can be reduced by the performance of the third pattern, and the small win game is started. can be difficult to identify. Furthermore, since the fourth symbol is configured so as not to be able to identify the type of the small win, the first symbol display device 37 must be confirmed, and the shooting of the game ball in the specific small win game is stopped. Special game method (strategic attack) can be suppressed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 237 and 238, the effect mode (variation pattern) in the third symbol display device 81 until the fixed stop symbol in the small win or the big win B will be described. As explained earlier in the pseudo development no performance, pseudo development 1 time performance, pseudo development 2 times performance, and pseudo development 3 times performance, when the chance symbol indicating the final stop symbol stops temporarily, the chance symbol fluctuates. In this state, the characters "Prepare to aim right" are displayed above the chance symbol. Furthermore, the outline of the right-handed informing symbol n is displayed thinly on the upper right of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 to inform the player to operate the shooting handle with the shooting intensity to shoot the game ball to the right side area. Two seconds before the fluctuation time elapses, the words "Now, let's aim for the right" are displayed, and the outline of the right-handed informing symbol n is displayed with a high density (Fig. 237). (b)). After that, at the timing when the fluctuation time has passed, as shown in FIG. 238, the right-handed informing symbol n is displayed not only in outline but also in color, and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed on the left side.

In this way, the game ball is shot to the right area in accordance with the timing when the small winning game is started by stepwise reporting before the right hitting report is fixed and stopped, and the V winning door 600 is opened. It is possible to suppress the problem that the game ball is not fired in time during the period of time.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the re-fluctuation is performed a specified number of times, when the confirmed pattern is displayed, the right-handed notification pattern is configured to be displayed step by step, but not limited to this, it is temporarily stopped. Every time at the timing, the step display of the right-handed information pattern n is started, and if it is lost or changed again, before switching to the display mode of the fixed right-handed information pattern n (see FIG. 238), right-handed information pattern n may be hidden, and the third pattern may be changed again. In this case, the "CHANCE" symbol is displayed in the middle symbol at each temporary stop, and when it is changed again, it is scrolled again without being confirmed and displayed, and if it is out, another second symbol is displayed. It is also possible to replace the 3 symbols with a fixed stop pattern (for example, scroll (shift) by one frame and stop) to notify the deviation. By configuring in this way, it is possible to further make it difficult to understand the start time of the small hit, and to make the player prepare for hitting to the right every time a temporary stop is made, and to prevent the player from firing with a specific type of small win. can be suppressed.

Next, the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 246 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the time reduction variation pattern table 202d2. The time saving variation pattern table 202d2 is a data table used for selecting a special symbol variation pattern when the game state is the time saving game state. In the time saving variation pattern table 202d2, as the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time saving game state is out, short out (2 seconds), short out pseudo once ( 6 seconds), short-out false twice (9 seconds) are set, and the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 and the set determination value are compared to select the corresponding variation pattern.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 90", short deviation (2 seconds) is selected, and when it is "91 to 189", short deviation pseudo once (6 seconds ) is selected, and when the value is "190 to 198", the judgment values are set so that the pseudo-short deviation is selected twice (9 seconds).

A short deviation (2 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set to 2 seconds, and after a high-speed variation for 1 second from the start of the variation, it shakes at the chance eye (the middle pattern is “CHANCE” and the pattern is greatly shaken). After changing and temporarily stopping for 1 second, it switches to a lost pattern (the middle pattern scrolls (slips) one frame downward from the “CHANCE” pattern), stops, and announces that it is off. It is a variation pattern that is In addition, the middle symbol during the temporary stop shakes greatly, and the "CHANCE" symbol and the symbol "1" symbol next to it are alternately displayed at the stop display position. , so that the player does not misunderstand that it is a lottery result such as a small prize.

The variation pattern of the short-out pseudo once (6 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 6 seconds, and the pattern is fast again for 2 seconds after the above-mentioned short-out (2 seconds) temporary stop for 1 second. After starting the fluctuation and changing again, temporarily stop for 2 seconds at the chance eye (temporary stop mode similar to short off (2 seconds)), lose pattern (the middle pattern scrolls down one frame from the “CHANCE” pattern) It is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the pattern is switched to (slipped) symbol, fixed and stopped, and the deviation is notified.

The variation pattern of short-out pseudo twice (9 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 9 seconds, and after the temporary stop of the above-described short-out pseudo once for 2 seconds, the pattern fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds again. After starting and fluctuating again, after temporarily stopping for 1 second at the chance eye (temporary stop mode similar to short off (2 seconds)), the missing pattern (the middle pattern scrolls down one frame from the "CHANCE" pattern ( It is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed to switch to a slipped () symbol), stop, and notify that it is out.

In the time-saving variation pattern table 202d2, the variation pattern selected when the lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the time-saving gaming state is a small win is short-small win (2 seconds), short-small win pseudo once. (6 seconds), pseudo 2 times per short and small (9 seconds), pseudo 3 times per short and small (12 seconds), and the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 and the set judgment value are collated Then the corresponding variation pattern is selected.

Specifically, when the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 67", short and small hits (2 seconds) are selected, and when it is "68 to 136", short and small hits are selected once (6 seconds). ) is selected, and if it is "137 to 167", pseudo 2 times per short and small (9 seconds) is selected, and if it is "168 to 198", pseudo 3 times per short and small (12 seconds) is selected. Each judgment value is set as follows.

The short and small hit (2 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 2 seconds, and after the high-speed variation for 1 second from the start of the variation, it shakes at the chance eye (the middle pattern is “CHANCE” and the pattern is greatly shaken). This is a variation pattern in which a variation effect is executed in which the game is temporarily stopped for one second after variation, and then the game is fixed and stopped to notify that a small winning is achieved. Note that the middle symbol during the temporary stop shakes greatly, and the "CHANCE" symbol and the symbol "eg, "1" symbol" arranged one frame after that are alternately displayed at the stop display position.

The variation pattern of pseudo once per short and small (6 seconds) is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 6 seconds, and the pattern is fast again for 2 seconds after the short and small per (2 seconds) temporary stop for 1 second. After starting the fluctuation and re-fluctuation, a temporary stop for 2 seconds at the chance (temporary stop mode similar to the short and small win (2 seconds)), and then a fixed stop and a small win are notified. It is the variation pattern that is executed.

The variation pattern of pseudo twice (9 seconds) per short and small is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 9 seconds, and after the temporary stop of the pseudo once per short and small mentioned above for 2 seconds, the pattern fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds again. After starting and changing again, temporarily stop for 1 second at the second chance (temporary stop mode similar to short and small wins (2 seconds)), then fixed stop, execution of variable production to notify that it is a small win It is a variation pattern that is

The variation pattern of pseudo 3 times (12 seconds) per short and small is a variation pattern in which the variation time is set at 12 seconds, and after the temporary stop of 2 pseudo per short and small mentioned above for 1 second, the pattern fluctuates at high speed for 2 seconds again. After starting and changing again, temporarily stop for 1 second at the second chance (temporary stop mode similar to short and small wins (2 seconds)), then fixed stop, execution of variable production to notify that it is a small win It is a variation pattern that is

Thus, in this embodiment, during the time-saving game, when the lottery result is out and when it is a small hit, it is configured with the same variation time, and at the same variation timing (timing of passage of variation time) The third pattern is configured to be temporarily stopped at the chance eye. As a result, even when the lottery result is a loss, it is possible to make the player feel as if every variable small winning will occur, and the player can be made to prepare for hitting right in preparation for the start of the small winning game. Further, the first pattern display device 37 confirms whether the type of specific small win (for example, a small win E, which is a small win type that is disadvantageous to the player among the small win types), and launches the game ball. It is possible to suppress the inconvenience that a special game method is performed to prevent the game ball from entering the V ball entrance 600a by stopping the game.

It should be noted that the stepwise notification of the right hitting notification symbol in the normal game state may be configured to be executed for each temporary stop even during the time saving game. By constructing in this way, it is possible to play a game expecting a small win even if the fluctuation is far off.

The second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that increments by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 239, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 239). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically at each timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262), and the ball has passed through either the left or right normal start opening (through gate) 67. When this is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM203.

Then, the value of the random number that becomes the winning pattern is set by the second winning random number table 202c (see FIG. 242(d)) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second winning random number counter C4. However, when it matches the value of the random number set as the winning random number table 202c, it is determined as winning the normal symbol (second symbol). In addition, this second hit random number table 202c is for normal design low probability (normal state period of normal design), and for high probability that normal design hit is higher than the low probability time (normal design It is divided into two types, one for the time saving state, and the other for the time saving state, and the number of random numbers that will be the big hits included in each is set differently. In this way, by making the number of random numbers to be winning different, the probability of winning is changed between when the probability of normal symbols is low and when the probability of normal symbols is high.

FIG. 242(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the above-described second winning random number table 202c. In this second winning random number table 202c, there are 24 random numbers that are winning normal symbols when the probability of normal symbols is low, and the range is "5 to 28". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202C for low probability. In this way, when the probability of normal symbols is low, the total number of random numbers that become a big hit is 24 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of special symbols is "1/10".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is acquired, and the normal symbols fluctuate on the second symbol display device 83. The display runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol "O" is lit and displayed, and the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time". In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability of normal symbols, the second prize winning opening 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 1 time" when normal symbols are won. The opening time and number of times may be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "0.5 sec x 2 times".

On the other hand, there are 200 random numbers for the normal symbol jackpot when the probability of the normal symbol is high, and the range is "5 to 204". These random numbers are stored in the second winning random number table 202C for high probability. In this way, when the probability of the special symbol is low, the total number of random numbers that will be a big hit is 200 out of the total number of random numbers of 240, so the probability of a big win of the special symbol is "1/1.2".

When the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, when the ball passes through the normal starting port 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained, and the normal symbols fluctuate on the second symbol display device 83. The display runs for 3 seconds. Then, if the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be winning, and after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol ), the symbol “◯” is lit and displayed, and the second winning opening 640 is opened “1 second×2 times”. In this way, when the normal pattern has a high probability, compared to when the normal pattern has a low probability, the variable display time is very short as "30 seconds → 3 seconds", and the opening period of the second winning opening 640 becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, so that the ball can easily enter the first winning hole 64 . A table (not shown) storing random numbers for judging whether or not it is a normal symbol win from the value (random number) of the second winning random number counter C4 is provided in the ROM 202 . In the present embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 has a high probability of normal symbols, the second winning hole 640 is opened only for "1 second x 2 times" when normal symbols are won. and the number of times can be set arbitrarily. For example, it may be opened "3 seconds x 3 times".

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once per timer interrupt processing (see Fig. 262). In addition, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 274).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 240, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 240, the RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O, and the like. and a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

When power is interrupted due to power failure or the like, the RAM 203 stores the stack pointer and the values of each register at the time of power interruption (including power failure; the same applies hereinafter). On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was turned off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 274) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 273) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. , NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 241(b), the RAM 203 has a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, Special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, time saving medium counter 203g, jackpot start flag 203h, jackpot medium flag 203i, small hit start flag 203j, small hit medium flag 203k, V passing ground jackpot type value 203m, V flag 203n, and other memory area 203z.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area) as shown in FIG. , the values of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the small winning type counter C5 obtained based on winning in the first winning port 64 are respectively stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3, C5 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reservation area), the area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in ascending order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest winning is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest winning. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main control device 110, when a special symbol lottery is performed, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. Based on the values of the respective counters C1 to C3 which are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area, determination such as lottery for special symbols is performed.

When data is shifted from the first reservation area to the execution area, the first reservation area becomes empty. Therefore, there is a shift process that packs the winning data stored in the other reservation areas (second reservation area to fourth reservation area) to the reservation area (first reservation area to third reservation area) with an area number smaller by 1. done. In this embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, data shift is performed only for the reserved areas (second reserved area to fourth reserved area) in which winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is different from the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a only in that the counter values obtained for the winning to the second winning opening 640 are respectively stored. are the same, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Like the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (first reserved area to fourth reserved area ). Each of these areas stores a second winning random number counter C4.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, and the acquired data is stored in the four holding areas (first holding area to fourth holding area). Areas) are stored in ascending order of area number (first to fourth) among the vacant areas. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, in the main controller 110, when the normal symbol winning lottery is performed, the value of the counter C4 stored in the first reserved area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( (moved), and based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area, a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

In addition, when the data is shifted from the first reserved area to the execution area, the first reserved area becomes vacant. is shifted to a reserved area with an area number smaller by one. Also, the data shift is performed only for the reserved areas in which the winning data are stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third It is a counter that counts the number of held balls (number of waiting times) of variable display performed by the pattern display device 81 up to a maximum of 4 times. The initial value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and each time a ball enters the first winning hole 64 and the number of reserved balls displayed in a variable display increases, the counter 203d reaches a maximum value of 4. are added (see S304 in FIG. 266). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the special symbol is newly executed (see S210 in FIG. 263).

The value of this special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the special symbol 1 reserved ball number command (S211 of FIG. 263, of FIG. 266 S305 reference). The special symbol 1 reserved ball number command is a command transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp controller 113 every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 changes the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d every time the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is changed. It is possible to acquire the value of the number of held balls displayed. As a result, the number of holding balls of variable display managed by the special symbol 1 holding ball number counter 223b of the sound lamp control device 113 is changed to the actual holding ball of variable display that was held by the main controller 110 due to the influence of noise or the like. Even if it deviates from the number, the deviation can be corrected by the next pending ball number command received.

In addition, the voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of pending balls based on the number of pending balls command, and every time the number of pending balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of pending balls. Send a pitch command. The display control device 114 displays the number of reserved balls pattern (reserved pattern) of the third pattern display device 81 based on the number of reserved balls notified by the number of reserved balls command for display.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e differs from the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in that the number of reserved balls that have entered the second winning opening 640 and are reserved is stored. Therefore, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is changed, the voice lamp control device 113 is notified by the special symbol 2 reserved ball number command.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the ball through the normal starting port 67 to a maximum of 4. It is a counter that counts up to times. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time the ball passes through the normal starting port 67 and the number of reserved balls of variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4. . On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed.

When the ball passes through either the left or right normal starting port 67, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times M of fluctuation display is reserved in normal symbols) is less than 4, the second hit random number counter C4. is obtained, and the obtained data is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. On the other hand, if the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 4 when the ball passes through either the left or right normal start opening 67, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c.

The counter 203g during time saving is a counter for counting the number of fluctuations of the remaining special symbols in the time saving game state. A counter value corresponding to the number of times of time saving is set in the time saving medium counter 203g, and by subtracting 1 at the timing when the variation of the special pattern stops, the time is shortened until the number of times of variation of the special pattern set in the time saving game state is completed. It is configured so that the game state is set.

The jackpot start flag 203h is a flag indicating that it is time to start the jackpot game. When the lottery results stop the variation of the special symbol determined to be a big win, the big win start flag 203h is set to ON (see S219 in FIG. 263). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is ON and it is identified that it is time to start the jackpot, it is set to OFF. Note that the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF in the initial state, and is configured to be backed up and held in the state immediately before the power failure when power failure or the like occurs.

The jackpot middle flag 203i is a flag indicating that the jackpot game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the variation of the special symbol whose determination result is a big hit is stopped (Fig. 263: S219). On the other hand, when it is determined that it is time to end the jackpot (when it is determined that the number of rounds of games corresponding to the set jackpot type has ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This jackpot flag 203i is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and is retained by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of a power failure or the like when a power failure or the like occurs. is configured as follows.

The small winning start flag 203j is a flag indicating that it is the start timing of the small winning game. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. It is determined that the small winning start flag 203j is ON, and when it is identified as the start timing of the small winning game, it is set to OFF. This small hit start flag 203j is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when power failure or the like occurs, it is held by backing up the state immediately before the occurrence of power failure or the like. configured to be

The small hit medium flag 203k is a flag indicating that the small hit game is in progress. It is set to ON at the timing when the fluctuation of the special symbol whose determination result is a small hit is stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the small hit (when it is determined that the game of the set number of rounds of the small hit has ended), it is configured to be set to OFF. This small hit medium flag 203k is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure or the like occurs, the state immediately before the power failure or the like is backed up and held. configured to be

The V passage time jackpot type value 203m stores data for determining the jackpot type set when a ball wins in the V prize opening 624 within the V valid period when a small win game is being executed. area. As the V-passing jackpot type value 203m, a data value corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the determined small hit type is stored when the variation of the special symbol in which the determination result is a small hit stops. When a ball wins in the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, the V flag 203n corresponding to the jackpot type corresponding to the data value stored in the V passing jackpot type value 203m is set to ON. ing. At the end of the small winning game, the data value stored in the V-passing big winning type value 203m is cleared. This V-passing jackpot type value 203m is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as RAM clear, and when a power failure occurs, the state immediately before the power failure occurs is backed up. is configured to be held by

In the V flag 203n, when a ball enters the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period in the small winning game, the flag corresponding to the big winning type corresponding to the type of the small winning game being executed is set to ON. be. At the end of the small winning game, it is determined whether or not this V flag 203n is on, whereby it is identified that there was a prize in the V winning opening 624 during the V valid period, and the flag is set to on. Then, the type of jackpot to be executed is discriminated, and the start of the corresponding jackpot game is set. This V flag 203n is a flag that is set to OFF in the initial state such as when the RAM is cleared. is configured as

The other memory area 203z is set (stored) with other data necessary for the game, counters, flags, and the like.

The scenario counter 203aa is a counter for progressing various scenarios (jackpot scenario, winning scenario) that define operation control contents of the big win game or the small win game, and when the big win game or the small win game is started. , "1" is set as the counter value, and then the big hit control processing (see S1004 in FIG. 275) executed in the main processing (see FIG. 274) of the main controller 110, or the small hit control processing (see FIG. 278 S1005) is executed, the value is incremented by "1". The counter value is reset to "0" when the value is added up to the end of various scenarios (jackpot scenario, winning scenario).

The specific controlled flag 203ab is a flag for indicating that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276), which is executed when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, is completed, and is set to ON. This indicates that the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) has ended.

This specific controlled flag 203ab is set to ON when the specific jackpot control process (see S1118 in FIG. 276) is completed (see S1212 in FIG. 276), and the setting status of the flag is the jackpot control process (see S1004 in FIG. 275). ) (see S1118 in FIG. 275). Here, when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203ab is set to ON (S1118: Yes), when the jackpot B is set as the jackpot type, the first round in which a special round game is executed It is determined that the game has ended, and a normal round game (a round game for opening the specific prize winning port 65a) from the second round onwards is executed. Then, it is set to OFF when the jackpot game ends (see S1307 in FIG. 277).

Returning to FIG. 239, the description continues. An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving opening and closing to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected. to send.

The input/output port 205 is connected to various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), and a RAM erasure switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. , and the RAM erasing signal SG2 output from the RAM erasing switch circuit 253, various processes are executed.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 272) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and the ball is shot with strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, and changes production (variation It controls the setting of the display mode of the third pattern display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as display) and advance notice effect. The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81, It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 to change the contents of the presentation. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

The audio lamp control device 113 determines an error according to the command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the audio lamp control device 113, and displays and controls the error command including the error type. Send to device 114 . The display control device 114 controls the third pattern display device 81 to display an error message image corresponding to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

As shown in FIG. 251(a), the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 stores a variation pattern selection table 222a and various data and programs required for game control.

In the variation pattern selection table 222a, a variation pattern of each variation pattern type (out of range, out of reach, various types of reach, etc.) is set to a counter value for selecting a variation pattern (not shown). The sound ramp control device 113 selects a detailed variation pattern based on the variation pattern type indicated by the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110, the result of the suitability determination, and the acquired counter value for selection. This allows the audio ramp control device 113 to select a wide variety of variation modes while strictly observing rough information such as the variation time and the type of variation pattern. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same variable display mode from being displayed frequently, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored early.

The RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 251(b). As shown in FIG. 251(b), the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 includes a winning information storage area 223a, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, a special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, a fluctuation start flag 223d, At least a stop type selection flag 223e, an effect counter 223f, a SW effective time counter 223g, and a memory area 223z are provided.

The winning information storage area 223a has one execution area and four areas (first area to fourth area), each of which stores winning information. Based on the information stored in the prize winning information storage area 223a, the sound lamp control device 113 can determine the lottery result of the reserved ball and the like before the change starts.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, like the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110, is a variable effect (variable display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). ), which is a counter that counts up to four times the number of pending balls (number of standby times) of the variable effect that is being held in the main controller 110 . That is, the number of reserved balls corresponding to the first special symbol is set based on the reserved ball number command output from main controller 110 .

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 and acquire the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b counts the reserved balls of the first special symbol. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the main controller 110, when the number of pending balls of the variable display is added by the ball entering the first winning hole 64, or in the main controller 110, the variable display in the special symbol is executed and suspended. When the number of balls is subtracted, a pending ball number command indicating the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203 d after addition or after subtraction is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 .

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, it acquires the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the reserved ball number command, It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b. Thus, in the voice lamp control device 113, according to the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main controller 110, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is updated. Its value can be updated in synchronization with the number counter 203d.

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is used to display the reserved ball number pattern in the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the number of reserved balls command in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number after storage. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the value of the counter 223b, a display reserved ball number command is transmitted to the display control device 114. FIG.

When the display control device 114 receives this display reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the audio lamp control device 113. Image drawing is controlled so that several patterns are displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third pattern display device 81. FIG. As described above, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b is changed while synchronizing with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 . Therefore, the number of pending ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can also be changed while synchronizing with the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110. FIG. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of held balls whose variable display is held.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c stores the number of reserved balls corresponding to the second special symbol in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b based on the reserved ball number command output from the main controller 110. The only difference is that they are different, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223d is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received, and is turned off when the variation display in the third symbol display device 81 is set. When the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned on, the display fluctuation pattern command is set based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the received fluctuation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S2002) of the main process (see FIG. 281). It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223e is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main controller 110 is received (see S2105 in FIG. 282), and turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2226 in FIG. 284). When the stop type selection flag 223e is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type (jackpot type in the case of a jackpot) extracted from the received stop type command.

The effect counter 223f is a counter used for advance notice effects and various lotteries. It is repeatedly updated in the range of 0-198. Although not shown, it is updated by one each time the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

The SW valid time counter 223g is a storage area that stores a period during which the frame button 22 is determined to be valid.

The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) for temporarily storing commands received from the main controller 110 until processing corresponding to the commands is performed. The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination processing (see FIG. 282) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read, and the command determination processing The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The display control device 114 is connected to the sound lamp control device 113 and the third pattern display device 81, and based on the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, the third pattern display device 81 performs variable display (variation production) and advance notice production are controlled. Details of the display control device 114 will be described later.

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 272).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 228) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the display control device in the A1 control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 257 to 261. FIG. FIG. 257 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the display control device 114. As shown in FIG. The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a work RAM 233, a character ROM 234, a resident video RAM 235, a normal video RAM 236, an image controller 237, an input port 238, an output port 239, and bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the sound lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238 , and the MPU 231 , work RAM 233 , character ROM 234 and image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240 . . A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237 , and an output port 239 is connected via a bus line 241 . A third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239 .

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with a different lottery probability of a special symbol jackpot or a different number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot, the symbols displayed by the third symbol display device 81 are different. Since there are models with exactly the same specifications, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce costs.

The MPU 231, character ROM 234, image controller 237, resident video RAM 235, and normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described below.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the audio ramp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110 . The MPU 231 incorporates an instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches the instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. The MPU 231 is designed so that a system reset is applied from the power supply 115 immediately after power is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same shall apply hereinafter). is automatically set to “0000H” by the hardware of the MPU 231 . Each time an instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is incremented by one. Further, when the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the value of the pointer indicated by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in this embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are stored in a dedicated program ROM as in a conventional game machine. The image data to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. As a result, not only image data but also control programs and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program and the like are stored in the character ROM 234, there is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow especially when performing random access. For example, when reading data continuously arranged in a plurality of pages, the data of the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed. It takes a long time before the data is output. Also, when reading discontinuous data, a long time is required each time the data is read. As described above, since the NAND flash memory has a slow read speed, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions that make up the control program. However, even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. store. The MPU 231 then executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233 . The work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM (Dynamic RAM), as will be described later, and reads and writes data at high speed. Therefore, the MPU 231 can read instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores control programs executed by the MPU 231 and image data displayed on the third pattern display device 81 , and is connected to the MPU 231 via a bus line 240 . The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers image data stored in a character storage area 234a2 of the character ROM 234 to a resident video RAM 235, which is connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236 .

The character ROM 234 is constructed by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR ROM 234d.

The NAND type flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control program executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 for storage and a character storage area 234a2 for storing data of an image (such as a character) to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Here, the NAND type flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the capacity of the character ROM 234 can be easily increased. Thus, in this pachinko machine, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of, for example, 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can. Therefore, the images displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to increase the interest of the player.

In addition, the NAND flash memory 234a can store control programs and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 while storing a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2. In this way, the control program and fixed value data are provided to store the data of the image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without providing and storing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since the characters can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in the failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the corresponding data is retrieved from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like. is read out and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 .

Here, the NAND type flash memory 234a, due to its nature, generates a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which erroneous data is written) when writing data, and generates defective data blocks into which data cannot be written. or Therefore, the ROM controller 234b applies known error correction to the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and avoids bad data blocks when reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a. data address translation.

The ROM controller 234b corrects errors in the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a that contains error bits. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

In addition, the ROM controller 234b analyzes the defective data blocks of the NAND flash memory 234a and avoids access to the defective data blocks. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to prevent the access control to the character ROM 234 from becoming complicated.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When an address allocated to the character ROM 234 is designated from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b reads one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data corresponding to the designated address. is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR ROM 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. do. Then, the ROM controller 234 b outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 after performing known error correction processing.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and one page of data in the NAND flash memory 234a can be set in each bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b, for example, outputs the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while data is set in one bank, or outputs the data specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The processing of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234 can be improved.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub-storage unit in the character ROM 234, and is intended to complement the NAND type flash memory 234a. ). Of the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR-type ROM 234d stores programs that are not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND-type flash memory 234a. At least a first program storage area 234d1 is provided for storing a portion of the boot program to be executed.

The boot program is a control program for activating the display control device 114 so that various controls on the third pattern display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after releasing the system reset. This allows the display control device 114 to execute various controls. The first program storage area 234d1 stores the boot program within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a), which should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, instructions for 1024 words (1 word=2 bytes)) are stored. The number of instructions of the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 only needs to be within the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and instructs the bus line 240 to specify the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified on the bus line 240, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d is transferred to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 .

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, it executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds 1 to the instruction pointer 231a, and transfers the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. to specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 selects the program previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 indicates the program stored in the NOR ROM 234d. , the instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234 c and output to the MPU 231 .

Here, in this embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR ROM 234d. The reason for storing in is as follows. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is unique to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time to read the data of the first page after the address is specified until the data is output. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code that the MPU 231 should execute first after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set the data in the buffer RAM 234c. You spend a lot of time waiting to receive your code. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory from which data can be read at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. Thus, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d into the buffer RAM 234c. , and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be activated in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program is a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program other than the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR ROM 234d. , fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control program are stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). 233a and the data table storage area 233b. The MPU 231 first sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c that is stored, a predetermined amount is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to this, the boot program is set only in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c is transferred to the program storage area 233a. The transfer process can be performed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in storage area 234d1. Therefore, after the transfer process, it is unnecessary to set the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 again in the buffer RAM 234c, so that the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the command pointer 231a to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to be set to a first predetermined address. As a result, when the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined number in the program storage area 233a. Set to a street address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads out the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a, Various processing can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processes. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch instructions at high speed and execute processing for those instructions.

Here, the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 include remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount from the second program storage area 234a1. The instruction pointer 231a is programmed so as to include the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as a first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers a predetermined amount of the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Execute the rest of the boot program contained in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control programs that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and fixed value data (for example, a display data table, a transfer data table, etc., which will be described later) used in the control programs are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Also, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, the initialization process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed after the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286) by the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the second predetermined address. Set the start address of the program corresponding to .

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. When the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the command pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even if most of the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control program is transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. Thus, the MPU 231 can read the control program from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third pattern display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the first instruction to be processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and causes the third pattern display device 81 to display the drawn image at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 261) transmitted from the MPU 231 to be described later, and draws one frame of a first frame buffer 236b or a second frame buffer 236c, which will be described later. The image drawn in the buffer is developed, and the image information for one frame previously developed in the other frame buffer is output to the third pattern display device 81 to display the image on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加. The image controller 237 performs the one-frame image drawing process and the one-frame image display process within the one-frame image display time (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) on the third pattern display device 81 . parallel processing in

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing (see FIG. 288(b)) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image for the next one frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of causing the third pattern display device 81 to display the image developed by the previous drawing.

In this manner, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 and issues a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs image drawing processing and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

The image controller 237 also executes processing for transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 based on transfer instructions from the MPU 231 and transfer data information included in the drawing list.

Image drawing is performed using image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and normal video RAM 236 . That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 based on instructions from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND type flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but its read speed is slower than other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. is configured to As will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image is drawn by the image controller 237 while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. can be processed. Therefore, if the image data used for drawing processing is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, which has a slow read speed, when drawing the image. , the time required for reading the image can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In particular, image data of frequently displayed images and image data of images to be displayed immediately after display is determined by main controller 110 or display controller 114 are permanently resident in resident video RAM 235. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, it is possible to maintain high responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG.

Further, when the display control device 114 draws an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, before the drawing is performed, the display controller 114 stores necessary data for drawing from the character ROM 234 in the normal video RAM 236. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal-use video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for image drawing. Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 composed of , and the time required for reading the data can be saved, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. can.

Further, by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236 as well, there is no need to keep all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235, so there is no need to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. FIG. Therefore, an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235 can be suppressed.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of an SRAM of 132 kilobytes, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given to the image controller 237 by the MPU 231 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the head address (storage source head address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. Final address (storage source final address), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236), and top of transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) Contains an address. Note that the data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the storage source final address.

The image controller 237 reads one block of data from a predetermined address in the character ROM 234 according to various information of this transfer instruction, temporarily stores it in the buffer RAM 237a, and stores it in the buffer RAM 237a when the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 is not in use. , is transferred to the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 . Then, the processing is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source start address to the storage source end address indicated by the transfer instruction is transferred.

As a result, the image data read out from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236 in a short time. can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time with the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of image data, these video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for image drawing processing. , it is possible to prevent the display on the third pattern display device 81 from being too late.

In addition, transfer of image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, so that the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and third symbol display. It is possible to easily determine the period during which the display processing on the device 81 is not used, and to simplify the processing.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 can be retained while the power is turned on without being overwritten. 235e and an error message image area 235f are provided, and at least a power-on variation image area 235b and a third pattern area 235d are provided.

The power-on main image area 235a is the power-on main image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 after power is turned on until all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is an area for storing corresponding data. In the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, a game is started by a player while the main image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and a ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a power-on varying image for displaying the results of the lottery performed by the main controller 110 in a varying effect.

The MPU 231 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a when power supply from the power supply unit 251 is started. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S3003 and S3004 in FIG. 286).

The power-on variation image will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on varying image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to transfer the power-on main image to the third symbol display device. 81 (display of "O" and "X" on the third pattern display device 81).

At this time, when receiving a display variation pattern command transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on a variation pattern command from the main controller 110, which is an instruction command to start variation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of , a variation image at the time of power-on with an "○" symbol at the lower right position of the screen, and a variation image at the time of power-on with an "X" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the variation period. Medium, alternately displayed repeatedly. Then, based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command from the main controller 110, the lottery performed by the main controller 110 is selected from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113. The result is judged, an image is displayed for a certain period of time after stopping the variable performance in the case of ``a special pattern jackpot'', and an image is displayed for a certain period of time after the suspension of the variable performance in the case of ``out of the special pattern''.

The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to use the image data stored in the power-on main image area 235a until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the rest of the image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person involved in the hall can confirm the power-on main image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. can. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. Also, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the remaining image to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is displayed. To wait until the transfer of image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235.例文帳に追加can be done.

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Furthermore, by using the NAND type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress deterioration in the efficiency of the operation check.

Further, when the player starts the game while the power-on main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected, the power-on fluctuation image area is displayed. The MPU 231 sends a signal to the image controller 237 so that the power-on varying image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on varying image resident in 235b, and the images are alternately displayed on the third pattern display device 81. directed against. As a result, a simple variation effect can be performed using the power-on variation image. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b. When the entry of the first entrance ball 64 is detected while the main image is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the corresponding variation effect can be immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加can.

Returning to FIG. 257, the description continues. The third symbol area 235d is an area for permanently storing the third symbol used in the variable effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. That is, in the third pattern area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main patterns with numbers "0" to "9" as the third patterns are resident. As a result, when the third pattern display device 81 performs a variable effect, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. It is possible to quickly start a variable production. Therefore, after the ball enters the first winning hole 64, the variable performance is not immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the first symbol display device 37 has started the variable performance. It is possible to prevent such a situation from occurring.

The character design area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to character designs used in various effects displayed on the third design display device 81. FIG. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "Boy" are displayed according to various effects, and data corresponding to these characters are resident in the character design area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character design based on the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113, instead of newly reading out the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, the image data is stored in the character design area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading the image data resident in advance, the image controller 237 can draw a predetermined image. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so even if the character ROM 234 uses the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the character design can be changed immediately.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the sound ramp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the sound ramp control device 113 detects the occurrence of a vibration error. Notify the display controller 114 with an error command. Also, when the audio lamp control device 113 detects the occurrence of another error, the audio lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the error occurrence together with the error type by an error command. The display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81 when an error command is received.

Here, the error message is required to be displayed almost simultaneously with the occurrence of the error from the standpoint of preventing fraud by the player and protecting the player against errors. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages are pre-resident in the error message image area 235f. By reading the image data pre-resident in the image area 235f, the image controller 237 can immediately draw each error message image. This eliminates the need to sequentially read image data corresponding to error messages from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND type flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used as the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is read after receiving an error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that data is overwritten and updated as needed, and is provided with at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b and a second frame buffer 236c.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data to be stored in each sub-area is determined in advance.

The MPU 231 extracts image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and that is required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 in the subarea provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , instructs the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area for storing. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a specified sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The transfer instruction of the image data is performed by including the transfer data information in the later-described drawing list in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw the image. As a result, the MPU 231 can issue an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, thereby reducing the processing load.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. FIG. The image controller 237 writes the one-frame image drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to either one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, thereby rendering the one-frame image to the frame buffer. While the image is developed and the image is developed in one of the frame buffers, the image information for one frame previously developed is read out from the other frame buffer, and sent to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transmitting the image information with the third pattern display device 81, a process for displaying the image for one frame is executed.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 can expand the one-frame image drawn in one of the frame buffers, and simultaneously , the image of one frame developed earlier can be read from the other frame buffer, and the image of the read one frame can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

A frame buffer for developing an image for one frame and a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 are used for drawing processing of an image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds of completion, the MPU 231 alternately designates either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and for temporarily storing work data and flags used when various control programs are executed by the MPU 231. Configured. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a clock counter 233h, and a stored image data discrimination. It has at least a flag 233j and a drawing target buffer flag 233k.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing control programs executed by the MPU 231 . When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. After storing all the control programs in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 thereafter executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

The data table storage area 233b includes a display data table describing display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main controller 110, and a display data table. This is an area for storing transfer data information of image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table and a transfer data table defining transfer timing.

These data tables are normally stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 434 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , these data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. After all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 using the data tables stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and the third symbol display device 81 can be used to easily execute diversified and complicated effects.

Here, details of various data tables will be described. First, the display data table is prepared one by one for each effect mode of each effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect, a round effect, etc. , an ending effect, and a display data table corresponding to the demo effect are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started in the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command from the sound lamp control device 113 is received. In addition, when the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variable production is started, if the stop type of the variable production is out, the stop symbol indicating the outage is finally stopped and displayed, and if the stop type of the variable production is a jackpot, A stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is finally stop-displayed. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbols in this variable effect, and can easily determine the game value to be given according to the jackpot type.

A player can easily recognize the short period of time of the normal design by informing the short period of time of the normal design in the ending performance. The longer the time period of the normal pattern is, the more chances the ball passes through the through gate 67, so the chances of lottery of the normal pattern are increased and the chance of winning the normal pattern is also increased. As a result, there are more opportunities for the electric accessories to be released as a jackpot of the normal symbols, so that the balls are likely to enter the second prize winning opening 640, and the lottery for the special symbols is facilitated. Therefore, the longer the time period of the displayed normal symbols, the stronger the player's expectation that the special symbols will be a big hit, and the player can be made to have the desire to participate in the game. can. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, since the first prize winning port 64 is a prize winning port in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters, a jackpot of normal symbols is generated and the electric accessory is released, and the ball enters the second prize winning port. As it becomes easier to enter 640, the number of prize balls increases. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is in a state in which it is difficult to reduce the number of balls in hand or in a state in which the number of balls in hand does not decrease even if a game is played, so that the player is in a state in which the number of balls in hand is difficult to decrease or the number of balls in hand does not decrease. You can get a sense of the period that you can get a special symbol jackpot without it. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, in the ending effect, by notifying that any one of the pending special symbol lotteries will result in a special symbol jackpot, the player can receive special symbols in the reserved special symbol lottery. Since it is possible to recognize that a big win will occur, it is possible to make the player have a sense of expectation that the special symbol will surely win a big win. Therefore, since the player's desire to participate in the game can be enhanced, the player can continue to have the desire to participate in the game.

In addition, as described above, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the next variable effect associated with the start winning does not start even after a predetermined time has passed since one variable effect stopped. The third pattern composed of the main patterns with no numerals '0' to '9' is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player and the persons involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

The data table storage area 233b stores one display data table each corresponding to the round effect, the ending effect, and the demonstration effect. Further, if there are 32 variable performance patterns to be set, the variable display data table, which is a display data table for the variable performance, is prepared with one table for one variable performance pattern, and a total of 32 tables.

Here, with reference to FIG. 259, details of the display data table will be described. FIG. 259 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at that time in association with an address that represents the time (in this embodiment, 20 milliseconds) during which one frame of image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 as one unit. It defines in detail the content of an image (drawing content) for one frame.

The drawing contents specify the type of sprite for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency according to the type of sprite. Rendering information for causing the third pattern display device 81 to render sprites, such as values, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for specifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third pattern display device 81 where the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating an enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite to be displayed is specified according to the enlargement ratio. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed larger than the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be displayed smaller than the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when rotating and displaying the sprite. The translucency value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucency value, the more the image displayed behind the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for specifying known α-blending coefficients used when performing superimposition processing with other sprites. Color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. The filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when rendering the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, the drawing contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address are one rear image, nine third patterns (design 1, design 2, . Rendering information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a character, a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. One or a plurality of information regarding effects and characters are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81, and the magnification, rotation angle, translucency, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information are changed over time. Since it is fixed, the variable display data table defines only the back face type, which is information for specifying the back face image type. This back face type is to display one of the back faces A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (one of "town stage", "empty stage", and "island stage"), or to display back faces A to C. Information specifying whether to display a rear image different from C is described. In addition, when specifying to display a back image different from back faces A to C, the back face type also includes information specifying which back face image to display.

When the type of back face specifies that one of the back faces A to C is to be displayed, the MPU 231 specifies the back face image corresponding to the stage specified by the player among the back faces A to C as the object to be drawn. Also, the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame is specified according to the lapse of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a rear image different from the rear faces A to C, the rear face image to be displayed is specified from the rear face type.

In the present embodiment, a description will be given of a case in which only the back surface type is specified as the drawing content of the back surface image in the display data table. may be defined as position information indicating whether the should be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the rear image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 identifies the range of the back image to be displayed for that frame based on the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information was displayed.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on this display data table (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. In this case, the MPU 231 displays the range of the rear image to be displayed for that frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) is started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time since the drawing of the image indicated by the position information (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started.

Furthermore, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position was displayed, and the image drawing based on the display data table (or the third pattern display device 81) according to the back surface type. display) may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display, or along with the back surface type and position information, the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image was displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third pattern display device 81) was started. information indicating whether or not the background image is drawn) may be defined as the drawing content of the back image. Alternatively, the position information may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored, instead of information indicating the elapsed time.

The third symbols (symbol 1, symbol 2, . . . ) describe symbol type offset information as symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to the respective third symbols. Instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol, the offset information is specified because the display of the third symbol in the variable effect is the stop symbol of the variable effect performed one before and the variable effect performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop pattern, and in the pattern offset information from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the offset information from the stop pattern of the previous variation performance is described. As a result, the variable performance is started from the stop symbol in the previous variable performance.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop pattern set according to the stop type command (stop type command for display) received from the main control device 110 via the sound lamp control device 113 Include information. As a result, the variable effect can be stopped with a stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main controller 110. - 特許庁

In addition, since a unique number is attached to each third symbol, the variable symbol in the previous variable effect or the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. , and the offset information is represented by the difference between the numbers attached to each third pattern, the third pattern to be displayed can be easily identified from the offset information.

In addition, in the pattern offset information, the third pattern fluctuates at high speed during the predetermined time when the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third pattern is being variably displayed at high speed, the third pattern is invisible to the player. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop pattern of the variable performance being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third pattern is interrupted, the player is not made to recognize the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

"0000H", which is the top address of the display data table, describes "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the last address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 259) describes the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing contents corresponding to the presentation mode to be defined in the display data table are displayed. is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the selected display data table. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Each time drawing processing for one frame is completed, the pointer 233f is incremented by 1, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the next A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is created by specifying the image contents to be drawn. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, as the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents are identified in the order defined in the display data table, so the image as defined in the display data table is displayed on the third pattern display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. .

Here, as in the conventional pachinko machine, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started each time the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed, the effect images become more diverse. Therefore, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 is limited, and there is a risk that the diversification of controllable effect images will be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to change the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 only by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. Regardless of the processing capability of the control device 114, various modes of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display 81. - 特許庁

In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. The reason why it can be created is that the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance in the pachinko machine 10 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the mode of presentation. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each presentation mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the presentation mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created for each frame according to the set data table. This configuration can be realized only when the pachinko machine 10 is configured to determine the presentation mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the starting prize.

Next, with reference to FIG. 260, details of the transfer data table will be described. FIG. 260 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect. Transfer data information for transferring image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and its transfer timing are defined.

If all the image data of the sprites used in the effects specified in the display data table are stored in the resident video RAM 235, no transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is prepared. As a result, an increase in capacity of the data table storage area 233b can be suppressed.

The transfer data table contains transfer data information of sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") to be transferred at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table in correspondence with the address. (corresponding to addresses "0001H" and "0097H" in FIG. 260). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data is defined in association with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transferring at the time indicated by the address defined in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transferring corresponding to that address. (corresponding to address "0002H" in FIG. 260).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source end address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). is included.

It should be noted that, similarly to the display data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described in "0000H", which is the top address of the transfer data table, and the end address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. "02F0H") describes "End" information indicating the end of the data table. For each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the transfer target image data to be defined in the transfer data table is described.

When the MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table exists, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in a transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233, which will be described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing contents specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f are identified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 261) to be described later is created. At the same time, from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time is acquired, and the transfer data information is added to the created drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 260, when the pointer 233f is "0001H" or "0097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified for the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. The drawing list is added, and the drawing list after the addition is transmitted to the image controller 237 . On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", Null data is defined at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table. The drawing list is sent to the image controller 237 without adding transfer data information to the drawing list.

When transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the processing to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 required for drawing the sprite can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. Using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and displays the display data. When the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

The transfer data table defines transfer data information so that image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to a sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. By controlling the transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 on a sprite-by-sprite basis, the transfer of image data can be controlled in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

The transfer data table has a data structure similar to that of the display data table, and is associated with an address defined in the display data table. Since the data information is defined, the image data is reliably stored in the normal video RAM 236 before the image data of the predetermined sprite is used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. Thus, since the timing of the start of transfer can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND-type flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the third pattern display device 81 can easily display various effects images. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not the third pattern display device 81 displays the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variation image). This simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and power-on varying image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a or power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM. , is set to ON in the main process (see FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 (see S3005 in FIG. 286). Then, when all the resident object image data are stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer processing of the image transfer processing, in order to display an image other than the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, It is set to OFF (see S3305 in FIG. 288(b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S3301 in FIG. 288(b)). If the image display flag 233c is ON, the simple command determination process (see S3308 in FIG. 288(b)) and the simple display setting process (see S3308 in FIG. S3309 of H.288(b)) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, command determination is performed so that various images are displayed according to commands transmitted from the audio lamp control device 113 based on commands from the main control device 110 or the like. Processing (see FIGS. 289 to 296) and display setting processing (see FIGS. 167 to 169) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referenced in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 during the V interrupt process (see S7901 in FIG. 170(a)), and when the simple image display flag 233c is on. Since there is resident target image data not stored in the resident video RAM 235, resident image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 170(b)) is executed to transfer the resident target image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. However, if the simple image display flag 233c is off, normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) is executed to transfer image data required for drawing processing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. FIG.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for The MPU 231 determines the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113, and stores the display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It selects and stores the selected display data table in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 increments the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the rendering content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the image drawing instruction for is described. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by 1, the MPU 231 adds an image to the image controller 237 for each frame based on the drawing contents defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. A drawing list (see FIG. 261), which will be described later, is generated in which the content of the drawing instruction is described. As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

The transfer data table buffer 233e transfers a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d according to a command or the like transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. is a buffer for storing When the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 selects the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b, and transfers the selected transfer data table. Store in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents of the transfer data table buffer 233e by writing Null data, which means that there is no transfer target image data.

While incrementing the pointer 233f by one, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a later-described rendering list (see FIG. 261) describing the image rendering instruction contents for the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the transfer process. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Transfer data information of transfer target image data is defined for a predetermined address. Therefore, by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in this transfer data table, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data necessary for drawing the sprite can be obtained. Image data not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The pointer 233f is an address at which transfer data information of corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data should be obtained from the display data table and the transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. is for specifying The MPU 231 once initializes the pointer 233f to 0 when the display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, display setting processing for V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed (FIG. 288(b)). ), the pointer update process (see S7605 in FIG. 169) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is incremented by one.

Every time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 identifies the drawing content specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and stores the drawing content in the drawing list described later. (see FIG. 261), acquires the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer is to be started at that time from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and obtains the transfer data Add information to the created drawing list.

As a result, an effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Therefore, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, regardless of the processing capability of the display control device 341, various effects can be displayed.

In addition, when the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is displayed based on the transfer data table before the corresponding display data table starts drawing a predetermined sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can be stored in the image storage area 236a without fail. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the image necessary for display can be read from the character ROM 234 in advance without delay and transferred to the normal video RAM 236, so that the image can be displayed. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. - 特許庁Also, only the image data temporarily resident in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 by the description of the transfer data table.

The drawing list area 233g is used by the image controller to draw an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing a draw list instructing 237.

Here, with reference to FIG. 261, details of the drawing list will be described. FIG. 261 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. Symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character (character 1, character 2, ..., number of reserved balls pattern 1, number of reserved balls pattern 2, ..., error (symbol) describes detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite for each sprite. The drawing list also describes transfer data information for causing the image controller 237 to transfer predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the type of RAM (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and its type. The image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and address. The detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, magnification, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is scaled according to the enlargement ratio, rotated according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the translucency value. alpha blending information, compositing with other sprites, color tone correction according to color information, and filtering according to filter specification information. After that, an image obtained by performing various processes at the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. The drawn image is developed by the image controller 237 in either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233k.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 stores the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, the pending number of balls to be displayed). Image, warning image that notifies the occurrence of an error, etc.), generates detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used to draw the image for one frame, and provides the detailed information for each sprite. Create a draw list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the RAM type and address for storing the data of the sprite (display object) are the sprite type defined in the display data table and the sprite type specified from other image contents. generated accordingly. That is, since the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed for each sprite, the MPU 231 can store the image data according to the sprite type. , the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately identified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

In addition, the MPU 231 sets other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucency value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite as defined in the display data table. copy the information as is.

Further, in generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged in the front side from the sprites to be arranged in the rearmost side in the image for one frame, and provides detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, the detailed information corresponding to the back image is described first, followed by the third pattern (pattern 1, pattern 2, . . . ), effect (effect 1, effect 2, . . . ). , character (character 1, character 2, . . . , reserved ball pattern 1, reserved ball pattern 2, .

The image controller 237 executes the drawing process of each sprite according to the order described in the drawing list, and overwrites the drawn sprite in the frame buffer to develop it. Therefore, in the one-frame image generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the rearmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

In the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, if the transfer data information is written at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 stores the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source end address in the ROM 234, and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a where the image data to be transferred is to be stored are added to the end of the drawing list. If the transfer data information is included in the drawing list, the image controller 237 draws an image from a predetermined area of the character ROM 234 (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source end address) based on the transfer data information. The data is read, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

The clock counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. When one display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect to be displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the performance time by the image display time for one frame on the third pattern display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment).

Then, the MPU 231 executes V interrupt processing based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of one frame of image are completed (FIG. 288(b)). )) is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by one (see S3307 in FIG. 288(b)). As a result, when the value of the clock counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 judges that the presentation displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the presentation at the end of the presentation. perform various operations to

The stored image data determination flag 233j is set to indicate whether image data corresponding to all sprites whose corresponding image data are not resident in the resident video RAM 235 are stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. It is a flag indicating a storage state indicating whether or not there is.

This stored image data determination flag 233j is generated by the initial setting process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The storage image data determination flag 233j generated here is set to "OFF" indicating that the storage status for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

The storage image data determination flag 233j is updated when an instruction to transfer image data to be transferred corresponding to one sprite is set during normal image transfer setting processing (see FIG. 171) executed by the MPU 231. will be In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Also, image data of other sprites to be stored in the same sub-area of the image storage area 236a as that one sprite will always be in a non-stored state when the image data of one sprite is stored. Therefore, the stored state corresponding to the other sprites is set to "off".

Also, when transferring the image data of a sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233j and determines the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether image data has already been stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S8113 in FIG. 171). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "OFF" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, an instruction to transfer the image data is set (see S8114 in FIG. 171). , causes the image controller 237 to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer processing of that image data is stopped. As a result, unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 can be suppressed, and the processing load on each unit of the display control device 114 and the traffic on the bus line 240 can be reduced. can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k selects a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as "drawing target buffer") for developing an image drawn by the image controller 237 from among two frame buffers (the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c). ), and when the drawing buffer flag 233k is 0, it designates the first frame buffer 236b as the drawing buffer, and when it is 1, it designates the second frame buffer 236c. The information of the specified drawing target buffer is sent to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of developing an image drawn based on the drawing list on the specified drawing target buffer. In parallel with the drawing process, the image controller 237 reads the drawn image information previously developed from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer, and transmits the image to the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. By transferring the information, display processing for displaying an image on the third pattern display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233k is updated as the drawing target buffer information is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the buffer flag 233k to be drawn, that is, by setting the value to "1" if it was "0" and to "0" if it was "1". done by As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Also, the transmission of the drawing list is executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing processing and display processing of the image for one frame are completed. This is performed each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 288(b)) is executed (see S8202 in FIG. 172).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as a frame buffer for developing an image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for reading image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image of one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process of the image of one frame is completed. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the second frame buffer 236c. be.

After the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for developing the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously developed in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third pattern display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is developed in the first frame buffer 236b. be. After that, the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame are set to either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c every 20 milliseconds. By alternating designations, it is possible to continuously perform display processing of an image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing drawing processing for an image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process executed by the main controller 110 in the A1 control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 262 to 279. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this embodiment). There are interrupt processing and NMI interrupt processing that is activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. and main processing.

262 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. Timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, various winning switch reading processes are executed (S101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, 1 is added to each of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second winning random number counter C4, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment 999, 99, 239), respectively, are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, a starting winning process associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation processing and the start winning processing will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106). Details of the normal symbol variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process, the through gate passage process accompanying the passage of the ball in the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (S107). Details of the through gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the through gate passage processing, the V entrance passage processing is executed (S108), and then the V passage processing (S109) is executed. Details of the V entrance passage processing and the V passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 270 and 271. FIG.

After executing the V-passing process (S109), the firing control process is executed (S110), and further, other processes that should be periodically executed are executed (S111), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of determining whether to turn on/off the firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 263, the special symbol variation process (S104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 263 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process (S104). This special symbol variation process (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b and the third symbol This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the display device 81 and the like.

In this special symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big hit at the moment (S201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S201: Yes), this processing is finished as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is fluctuating (S202), and the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is performed. If the mode is not fluctuating (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times N2 of the fluctuation display in the special symbol is reserved) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205), and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the processing of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process is executed for starting the variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b (S213). Incidentally, the special symbol variation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (N1) (S208), and determines whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (S209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), that is, when there is no reserved ball for starting a new special symbol variation, this End the process.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (S210), and by the processing of S210 A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the processing of S211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212). After that, the process of S213 is executed, and this process ends.

Further, in the process of S202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (S202: Yes), the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (S214). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the processing of S214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (S215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing (S213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process is executed, a special symbol lottery is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. will be More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is determined. Accordingly, any one of the big hits A to D is determined, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit, one of the small hits A to E is determined according to the value of the small hit type counter C5.

In this embodiment, the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol (determination result of each type of counter) according to the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and when it is a small hit, the red LED is lit. , a red LED and a green LED are lit.

Then, when the lottery result of the special symbols is a jackpot and the jackpot A is determined, the blue LEDs in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b indicate the jackpot A (for example, the alphabet "a" ), and when the jackpot B is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot B (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "b"), and when the jackpot C is determined Lights up in a manner indicating a C (for example, a manner imitating the alphabet "c"), and when a jackpot D is determined, lights in a manner indicating a big win D (for example, a manner imitating the alphabet "d"). Let

In addition, even when the lottery result of the special pattern is a small win, the red LED is lit in a manner corresponding to each small win type (small win A to small win E), as in the case of winning the big win described above. Let The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. In addition, in this embodiment, the mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol) indicating the contents of each winning type so that the player can grasp each winning type (big winning type or small winning type) determined as described above. , The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to light up in a mode formed from a lighting mode corresponding to each hit type), but other configurations may be used. Even if the determined winning types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol of this time and the hit type to be determined. However, other configurations may be used, for example, it may be configured to display in a lighting mode classified to the extent that the player can distinguish that the lottery result of the special symbol is different. .

After the processing of S215 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is a special symbol jackpot ( S216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special symbol jackpot (S216: Yes), based on the jackpot type, V winning is performed to allow the ball to enter a specific winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 624). An opening scenario for opening and closing the door 600 is set (S217), and thereafter, setting of the start of the big win (setting of the big win such as 15 rounds) is executed in correspondence with the type of the big win determined in the current big win (S218). ).

When the process of S218 is completed, next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot flag 203i are set to ON (S219), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 0 (S220), and a stop command is set (S225 ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S216: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S221), and it is a small win. When it is determined that (S221: Yes), after executing the small hit start setting process (S222), the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process is finished. Details of the small winning start setting process (S222) will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the process of S221, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (no) (S221: No), then it is determined whether the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more (S223). . When it is determined that the value of the time saving counter 203g is not 1 or more (it is 0) (S223: No), the process of S225 described above is executed, and this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S223: Yes), that is, if the current time is in the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (S224), and S225 Execute the process and terminate this process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 264, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 264 is a flow chart showing the special symbol variation start process (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 263) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262). Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area with the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery ( It is a process for determining the performance pattern (variation performance pattern) of the variation performance performed by the first design display devices 37a, 37b and the third design display device 81.

In the special symbol variation start process, first, a first hit random number counter C1 stored in a common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage areas (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). , the values of the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the stop type counter CN1 are acquired (S231). Next, the special symbol lottery result is acquired based on the special symbol jackpot random number table (special symbol 1 random number table 202a1, special symbol 2 random number table 202a2) corresponding to the type of special symbol (special symbol 1, special symbol 2). (S232), the process proceeds to S233.

Specifically, when the special symbol variation to be executed in this process is the first special symbol, the value of the obtained first winning random number counter C1 is stored in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242(b)). are compared one by one with the four random values set in . As described above, as the random number value for the jackpot of the first special symbol, four numbers of "0 to 3" are set. When the numbers match, it is determined that the special symbol jackpot is won. Similarly, when the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the random value "4" which is a small hit set in the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 (see FIG. 242(b)) match, It is determined that it is a small hit of a special symbol.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit, but not limited to this, different random numbers may be used. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be a loss in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special pattern and the second special pattern. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player is allowed to win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In this embodiment, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined as a small hit is different. By configuring in this way, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied according to the type of the special pattern, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special pattern with the higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make a game by itself.

In the present embodiment, the first winning random number table 202a is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win the small winning, but only one of the special symbols wins the small winning. The first winning random number table 202a may be set so as to win. Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and only the special symbol 2 random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol is special. It is better to set a random value that will be a small hit for the design. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege (small winning game) that can be given to the player according to the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the predetermined range (0 to 3) of the value of the first random number counter C1 corresponds to the special symbol jackpot, and the other range (4 to 999) corresponds to the type of special symbol. However, as another configuration, for example, the value of a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small value in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number table 202a are used to perform a special symbol lottery (big win, small win, loss). As an alternative configuration, a special symbol lottery may be performed using a plurality of winning random number tables. is discriminated, and if the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big win, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special pattern is a small win using the second random number table. You can By performing the special symbol lottery using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the special symbol lottery result can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the special symbol lottery result can be suppressed. .

In this embodiment, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used when performing the lottery for the special symbols, but other configurations may be used. A special symbol lottery may be drawn using the random number table 202a. In this case, for example, based on the value of the first random number counter, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and based on the value of the second random number counter, the special symbol lottery result is small. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a win.

Returning to FIG. 264, the description continues. In the process of S233, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result obtained by the process of S232 is a special symbol jackpot (S233). When it is determined to be a special pattern jackpot (S233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on a jackpot type selection table corresponding to the type of special pattern corresponding to this special pattern lottery (S234), A display mode at the time of the big win corresponding to the special pattern and the big win type is set (S235), a big win variation pattern is determined based on the value of the variation type counter (S236), and a variation pattern corresponding to the big win variation pattern determined this time. A command is set (S243), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big win (S233: No), then it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small win (S237). If it is determined (S237: Yes), the small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection table corresponding to the special design type corresponding to this special design lottery (S238), and the special design and the small hit type set the display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to and, determine the small hit variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter, set the variation pattern command corresponding to the small hit variation pattern determined this time (S243), End this process.

Also, in the process of S237, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small hit (S237: No), that is, if it is determined that the current lottery result is a loss, the loss corresponding to the type of special symbol Set the display mode of the time (S241), determine the variation pattern at the time of loss based on the number of held balls (S242), set the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of loss determined this time (S243), End this process.

Although detailed description will be given later, in the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending balls, whereas the special symbol If the result of the lottery is lost, the variation pattern is configured to differ according to the number of held balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a shorter variation time. As a result, the greater the number of pending balls, the shorter the period until the lottery result (loss), in which the special pattern lottery result does not give a benefit to the player, is displayed. In order to increase the number of lotteries of the special symbols to be drawn, the player can be motivated to play the game to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the special symbol variation time for one time, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a state in which the special symbols are not varied during the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to play.

In this embodiment, it is configured to vary the variation pattern based on the number of held balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process (S213) is executed. On the condition that the number of held balls reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more during variation, the variation time set in the variation pattern being executed may be shortened. . By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbols are fluctuating.

In addition, in this embodiment, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is out, the variation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls, but even when the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the reserved ball The variation pattern may be varied based on the number, or it may be configured such that the larger the number of held balls, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a longer variation time. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the variation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Of the 2 special symbols, only the value of the number of held balls of the second special symbol for which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be used, or the special symbol variation start processing to be executed this time is performed. Only the value of the number of retained balls in the design may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 265, the small winning start setting process (S222) will be described. FIG. 265 is a flow chart showing the small winning start setting process (S222). In this small winning start setting process, a solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 600 when a small winning is won in a special symbol lottery, and a ball passing through the opened V winning door 600 is V A first retention member 622d (see FIG. 231), a movable guide member 622 (see FIG. 231), a second retention member 622b (see FIG. 231), and a rotation distribution member provided in a flow path flowing down toward the winning opening 624 621 (see FIG. 231) is executed to set a scenario for driving solenoids for operating each.

In the small winning start setting process (S244), first, based on the small winning scenario table 202ab (see FIG. 248(b)), a scenario (winning scenario a) corresponding to the set small winning type is set (S241). . Next, set the small winning type corresponding to the small winning type determined to the V passing time jackpot type value (S242), set the start of the small winning corresponding to the small winning type (S243), and set the small winning start flag 203j , sets the small hit middle flag 203k to ON (S244), and terminates this process.

Next, referring to FIG. 266, the starting winning process (S105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 266 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S105) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262) in this embodiment. This starting winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and determines whether or not there is a winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing the holding process of the values when there is

When the starting winning process (FIG. 266, S105) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (starting winning) (S301). Here, the ball entering the first winning hole 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first winning hole 64 (S301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (number of times N1 of holding variable display in the special symbol) is obtained (S302). . Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S303).

Then, if there is no winning to the first winning port 64 (S301: No), or even if there is a winning to the first winning port 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 If not (S303: No), the process proceeds to S307. On the other hand, if there is a prize to the first winning hole 64 (S301: Yes), and if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S303: Yes), the special symbol 1 reserved ball 1 is added to the value (N1) of the number counter 203d (S304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S305).

The pending ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the processing of S305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the small hit type counter C5 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above Each value is stored in the first area among the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 (S306). In addition, in the process of S306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from S307 to S312, the same processing as in the processing from S301 to S306 is executed for the winning of the second winning opening 640 as well. The only difference is that the pending process for the second special symbol is executed for the winning of the second winning hole 640, and the other processes are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted. Then, if it is determined in the process of S307 that the ball has not entered the second winning hole (S307: No), the prefetch process is executed after the process of S312 (S313). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 267, the prefetching process (S313) will be described. FIG. 267 is a flow chart showing the prefetching process (S313). When the look-ahead process (S313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (S321). If there is no new winning (S321: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (S321: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322).

In the processing of S322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (S322: Yes), based on the special symbol 1 random number table, the special symbol 1 big win selection table and the special symbol 1 small win selection table. The lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hit type are acquired (S323), and the process proceeds to S325.

On the other hand, in the processing of S322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (S322: No), the special symbol 2 random number table, the special symbol 2 big win selection table and the special symbol 2 small winning selection table Based on the lottery result, the jackpot type and the small hit type are acquired (S324), and the process proceeds to S325. In the process of S325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the process of S323 or S324 described above is set ( S325). Then, this processing ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 268, the normal symbol variation process (S106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 268 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), and the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a, etc. This is processing for control.

In this normal symbol variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (S401). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the moment when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the moment when the electric accessory 640a is controlled to open and close. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of winning (S401: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S401: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (S402), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (S402: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (S403). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (S404), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S404: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (S404: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S405).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (S406). In the process of S406, the data stored in the first reservation area to the fourth reservation area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is obtained (S407).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203g during working hours reduction in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (S408). In addition, the time-saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal patterns. If the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

When the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 1 or more (S408: Yes), it is determined whether or not the special symbol jackpot is currently in progress (S409). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and during the special symbol jackpot. During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S409: Yes), the process proceeds to S411.

In the process of S409, if the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (S409: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, so obtained in the process of S407. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal winning random number table for high probability, the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (S410). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 8(b)).

In the process of S408, when the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 0 (S408:No), it transfers to the process of S411. In the process of S411, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of S407 and the low A lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained based on the normal symbol winning random number table for the probability time (S411). Specifically, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal per symbol random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that it is a hit of the normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 8(b)).

Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of S410 or S411 is the normal symbol win (S412), and when it is determined that the normal symbol win is determined (S412: Yes) , set the display mode at the time of winning (S413). In the process of S413, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is set to be illuminated as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more (S414), and if the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more (S414: Yes), the present is a special symbol jackpot. (S415). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S415: Yes), the process proceeds to S417.

In the process of S415, if the special symbol jackpot is not in effect (S415: No), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so the electric accessory 640a The open period is set to 1 second and the number of open times is set to 2 (S416), and the process proceeds to S419. In the process of S414, when the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 0 (S414:No), it transfers to the process of S417. In the process of S417, since the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot of the special symbols or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbols, the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is set to 0.2 seconds, The number of opening times is set to 1 (S417), and the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S412, when it is determined that the symbol is out of the normal pattern (S412: No), the display mode at the time of out is set (S418). In the process of S418, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "x" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). After the setting of the display mode at the time of detachment is completed, the process proceeds to S419.

In the process of S419, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more (S419). The display fluctuation time is set to 3 seconds (S420), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0 (S419: No), the variation time of the variation display on the second pattern display device 83 is set to 30 seconds (S421), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of special symbols, when the probability of normal symbols is high, the time of fluctuation display is very short from "30 seconds to 3 seconds" compared to when the probability of normal symbols is low, and further, Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a becomes very long as “0.2 seconds×1 time→1 second×2 times”, the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

In the process of S402, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S402: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed. (S422). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of S420 or the process of S421 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the processing of S422, if the variation time has not elapsed (S422: No), this processing is terminated. On the other hand, in the processing of S422, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (S422: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (S423). In the process of S423, the normal symbol lottery is won, and if the display mode is set by the process of S413, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped in the second symbol display device 83. It is set to be displayed (lit display). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of S418, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of S423, when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of S413 or the process of S418.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, whether the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a normal symbol hit. is determined (S424). If the lottery result of this time is a normal symbol hit (S424: Yes), the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set (S425), and this process is finished. When the opening/closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the processing of S425, when the electric accessory opening/closing processing (see S1005) of the main processing (see FIG. 26) is executed next, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S416 or S417 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S424, if the lottery result of this time is out of the normal symbol (S424: No), the process of S425 is skipped and the process is terminated.

Next, the through gate passage processing (S107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. In this through gate passage processing, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, and if the ball has passed, the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 is acquired and reserved. This process is for

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S431). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (S431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (S432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (S433).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (S431: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S433: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S433: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) of (S434). Then, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 updated in S103 of the timer interrupt process described above is the first among the free reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. area (S435), and the process ends.

In addition, when storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty reservation areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and the value is If 0, make the first reserved area the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the V entrance passage process (S108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 270 is a flow chart showing the V entrance passing process (S108) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

In the V entrance passage process (S108), first, it is determined whether or not the first retention sensor 622f is on (S501), and if not (S501: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first retention sensor 622f is ON (S501: Yes), then during the V winning opening opening period, that is, the first round of the jackpot game in which jackpot B is set as the jackpot type It is determined whether the set scenario is the winning scenario a202aa2 (S502). In the process of S502, when it is determined that the V winning opening is open (S502: Yes), the V entrance passage command is set (S503), and this process is terminated. If it is not during the small winning (S502: No), it means that the game ball has entered the V winning device 620 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set (S504) and this process is executed. finish.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of S503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 274). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute an effect during the small winning game based on the ball entering the V winning device 620 .

Next, the V passing process (S109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 271 is a flow chart showing the V passing process (S109) executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

When the V passing process (S109) is executed, first, it is determined whether there is V passing, that is, whether a game ball has entered the V winning opening 624 (S601). ), and then it is determined whether the V valid period is currently in effect (S602). In the process of S602, when the value of the scenario counter 203aa that counts the progress of the scenario (win scenario b222aa3) set to the jackpot type B during the small win game is "1" to "501", It is determined that it is in the V valid period, and in other cases, it is determined that it is not in the V valid period.

In the process of S602, if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (S602: Yes), then it is determined whether the current small winning game is in progress (S603), and if it is in the small winning game (S603 : Yes), acquire the V-passing jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit game this time (S604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (S605), and set the time saving medium counter to 0 (S606), and the process proceeds to S607.

That is, in the processing of S604 to S606, the processing for executing the big winning game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 624 during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the process of S603, if it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (the big winning game corresponding to the big winning type B is being played) (S603: No), it is necessary to perform a new process for executing the big winning game. , the processing of S604 to S606 is skipped and the processing proceeds to S607.

In the processing of S607, a V passage command is set (S607), and this processing ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main controller 110 . When the voice ramp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when the V passing command is received during the small winning game, the V challenge executed during the small winning game succeeds, and following the small winning game , an effect is executed to indicate that a jackpot game is to be executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big winning game, the same performance as when the V passing command is received during the small winning game is executed.

On the other hand, when the V pass command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, a disappointing effect for indicating that the V challenge has failed is executed, and the V passing command is received at a predetermined timing during the big winning game. If not, the resurrection performance from the disappointing performance is executed, and the player is informed that the jackpot game will be continuously executed.

In this embodiment, only the command (V passing command) for indicating that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 624 is set. It may be configured to set a command (for example, V non-passing command) to indicate that. In this case, for example, in the present embodiment, the game ball that can enter the V winning opening 624 is only the game ball (for example, one) retained by the second retention member 622b, so the second retention member 622b A number measuring means for measuring the number of retained game balls, and a left discharge path 623a and a right discharge path 623b (see FIG. 229) in which the game balls flowing down from the rotating distribution member 621 can flow down. and a detecting means for detecting the above-described V non-passing command may be set when the detecting means detects the number of game balls counted by the number measuring means. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game balls are jammed in the V winning device 620 .

On the other hand, in the processing of S602, if it is determined that the V valid period is not currently in effect (S602: No), an error command is set (S607), and this processing ends. By performing the processing of S607, a state in which the game ball has entered the V winning opening 624 outside the V valid period, that is, when a game is illegally made to enter the V winning opening 624 with the game ball, or when the V winning It is possible to quickly notify the outside of a case where a member attached to the port 624 (for example, the second retention member 622b) is malfunctioning.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 272 is a flow chart showing the contents of NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S801). That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 273 is a flow chart showing the contents of the startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904). A payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S912). On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if not stored (S905: No). , there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). A command is transmitted (S912).

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906). If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data has been destroyed. A payout initialization command is transmitted (S912). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (S914). In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on, power failure occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (S907: Yes), the data is backed up in the RAM 203. While retaining the data, the power failure occurrence information is cleared (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (S909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Then, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (S910), and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (S911). Next, the interrupt is permitted, and the main processing, which will be described later, is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 274, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 274 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of S1001 to S1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1011 and S1012 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 274), first, during execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. External output processing for transmission to each control device (peripheral control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, it determines whether or not there is winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 262). Send a prize ball command to In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process (see Figure 263), start winning process (see Figure 266), V entrance passing process (see Figure 270) and V passing process (see Figure 271) can be sent to the voice lamp control device. 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, various commands set in the opening command, round number command, ending command and small hit control processing (see FIG. 278) set in the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 275) are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203.

When the update of the variation type counter CS1 is finished, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, in the case of the special symbol jackpot state, the execution of the jackpot production and the variable A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control processing, the specific prize winning port 65a is opened for each round in the jackpot state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the specific prize winning port 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the specific prize winning port 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 262).

Next, a small hit control process (S1005) is executed. A detailed description of this small winning control process (S1005) will be given later with reference to FIG. After that, an electric role product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric role product 640a associated with the second winning hole 640 is executed (S1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of S425 of the normal symbol variation processing (see FIG. 268), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. The opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S416 or S417 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (S1007). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S236, the process of S240 or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. It starts with the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

In addition, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of S236, the process of S240 or the process of S242 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 264) ends, the The variation display being executed in the 1-symbol display devices 37a and 37b is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol ) are stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S420 or the process of S421 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. . As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of S423 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 268), the variation being executed in the second symbol display device End the display, in the display mode set by the processing of S413 or the processing of S418 of the normal design fluctuation start processing (see Figure 268), stop design (second design) on the second design display device stop display (lighting display )do.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the next main process, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main process (S1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1010: Yes), the process proceeds to S1001, and the above-described processes after S1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (S1010: No), during the time until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing, the second The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1011, S1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the change type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S1002 (S1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the fluctuation type counter CS1 can also be randomly updated.

Further, in the process of S1009, if information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (S1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, it means that the NMI interrupt process has been executed, so the power-off process after S1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (S1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) power off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (S1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

It should be noted that the processing of S1009 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in S1001 to S1008, or at the timing of the end of one cycle of the processing of S1011 and S1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( initial value), the process can be started from S1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 275 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control processing (S1004) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 274). This is a process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot scenario is set (S1101). Specifically, the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 263) or the processing of S1406 of the small winning ending control processing (see FIG. 279) to be described later is executed to determine whether a big winning scenario is set. do. In other words, the result of the lottery of the special symbols is a big win, and the big win scenario is set based on the lottery result, or the big win scenario is set based on passing through the specific area (V winning opening 624) during the small win game. Determine if it is set. In the process of S1101, if it is determined that the jackpot scenario is not set (S1101: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, when it is determined that a jackpot scenario is set (S1101: Yes), the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF, and then the set scenario is that of jackpot B. (S1102).

In the process of S1102, when it is determined that the jackpot scenario of jackpot B is set (S1102: Yes), it is determined whether or not the specific controlled flag 203ab is ON (S1117).

In the process of S1117, when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 203ab is off (S1117: No), the process of the specific jackpot control process (S1118) is executed, and the jackpot control process ends. The specific jackpot control process (S1118) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when it is determined that a jackpot scenario other than jackpot B is set in the process of S1102 (S1102: No), or when it is determined that the specific controlled flag 233ab is turned on in the process of S1117 (S1117: If Yes), 1 is added to the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa (S1103), and it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is the opening start timing of the jackpot scenario (S1104). For example, when the jackpot scenario a is set (not shown), since the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponding to the opening start (opening start) is 1, it is checked whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 1. discriminate.

In the process of S1104, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the opening (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 1) (S1104: Yes), the jackpot opening command is issued. It sets (S1105) and terminates this processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the start of the opening (S1104: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the start of the round (if the jackpot scenario a , the counter value is 1251) (S1106).

In the processing of S1106, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the start of the round (S1106: Yes), the processing of S1107 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be opened (specific winning The special prize winning opening solenoid is set to ON so that the opening/closing door 65b of the opening 65a is opened), then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (S1108), and this process is finished.

The round number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (S1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 274) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1105 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the start of the round (S1106: No), then it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the specific winning opening 65a are satisfied. (S1109). Here, as a closing condition of the specific winning hole 65a in the present embodiment, when 29 seconds have elapsed since the specific winning hole 65a was opened, or after the specific winning hole 65a was opened, a predetermined number of balls ( For example, when 10 wins are won, it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning hole 65a is satisfied (S1109: Yes), the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is changed to the counter value corresponding to the end of the round currently being executed. is updated to a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the value (S1110), and the process ends. In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of S1109, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control processing after the next time. .

Here, the jackpot scenario is configured to update (add) the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa and execute an operation corresponding to the updated (added) counter value. Therefore, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls enter the specific winning port 65a and the closing condition is satisfied, that is, the specific winning port 65a is closed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (renewal of the counter value). In this case, the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is updated to the value immediately before the counter value at which the corresponding operation control is executed (the operation control is executed in the next jackpot control process). configured as follows).

By doing so, the operation control (for example, the operation control to close a specific winning hole when a predetermined number of balls have won) that is executed due to a factor that does not accompany the passage of time (update of the counter value) can be turned into a jackpot scenario. can be executed based on Therefore, as a closing condition of the specific winning port (first specific winning port) 65a, the operation is controlled based on the jackpot scenario when a predetermined time has passed, and the jackpot scenario is not based when a predetermined number of prizes have been won. There is no need to perform complicated control such as execution of motion control, so that the design can be facilitated and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent a situation in which both motion controls are mixed.

In the process of S1109, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning hole 65a is not satisfied (S1109: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to a value corresponding to the end of the round (whether it is the jackpot scenario a). For example, it is determined whether the counter value is 8750 (S1111).

In the processing of S1111, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the end of the round (S1111: Yes), the processing of S1112 sets the specific winning opening 65a to be closed (specific winning The special prize winning opening solenoid 65f2 is set to OFF so that the open/close door 65b of the opening 65a is closed), and this process is terminated. Incidentally, the determination process from S1106 to S1111 described above is repeatedly executed for the number of rounds of the big win set in the big win scenario.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1111 that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the end of the round (S1111: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the start of the interval (jackpot). If it is scenario a, it is determined whether the counter value is 8751) (S1113). In the process of S1113, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the start of the interval (S1113: Yes), the interval command is set (S1114), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1113, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the start of the interval (S1113: No), next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is executed. This jackpot ending control process is a process executed during the ending period of the jackpot game, that is, a predetermined period (for example, 5 seconds) from the end of the final round of the jackpot game to the start of the variation of the special symbols. .

The contents of this jackpot ending control process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the jackpot ending control process (S1115) is finished, next, an operation process based on other scenarios is executed (S1116), and this process is finished. Here, as the processing of S1116, for example, when driving and controlling the V distribution motor 620a for driving the rotation distribution member 621 based on the jackpot scenario, the operation processing of the motor is executed.

Next, the specific jackpot control process (S1118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 276 is a flow chart showing this specific jackpot control process (S1118). This specific jackpot control process (S1118) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275), and is a process executed when jackpot type B is set as the jackpot type.

In the specific jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the set scenario is the winning scenario a (S1201). In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the winning scenario a is set (S1201: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1202), and an operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after addition is performed. Execute (S1203).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the winning scenario a (S1204). In the processing of S1204, if it is determined that the end timing of the winning scenario a is not reached (S1204: No), the process returns to the jackpot control processing.

On the other hand, in the process of S1204, if it is determined that it is time to end the winning scenario a (S1204: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1205), and the second staying member 622b stays. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (staying ball) that is stuck (S1206).

In the process of S1206, when it is determined that there is a staying ball in the first staying member 622d, the winning scenario b is set (S1207), and the process proceeds to S1209. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no staying ball in the first staying member 622d, the winning scenario c is set (S1208), and the process proceeds to S1209. As a result, at the end timing of the winning scenario a, the type of the winning scenario to be set thereafter can be varied depending on whether or not there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b.

In the process of S1209, an operation is executed according to the value of the scenario counter 203aa (S1209), and then it is determined whether or not it is time to end the winning scenario b or c (S1210).

In the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is time to end the winning scenario b or c (S1210: Yes), the big winning scenario b is set (S1211), and the specific controlled flag 233ab is turned on ( S1212), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1210, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1210: No), the processes of S1211 and S1212 are skipped and the present process ends.

In the process of S1201, if it is determined that the winning scenario a is not set (S1201: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning scenario b or c is set (S1213). In the process of S1213, when it is determined that the winning scenario b or c is set (S1213: Yes), the process proceeds to S1209. Accordingly, when the winning scenario a is set, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is executed, and when the winning scenario b or c is set after that, the processing of S1202 to S1208 is skipped and the processing of S1209 is performed. You can do the following.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1213, if it is determined that neither of the winning scenarios b and c is set (S1213: No), this processing ends.

Next, the jackpot ending control process (S1115) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 277 is a flow chart showing this jackpot ending control process (S1115). This jackpot ending control process (S1115) is a process executed in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 275).

In the jackpot ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (if the jackpot scenario a, the counter value is 40751) (S1301). In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the start of the ending (S1301: Yes), a jackpot ending command is set (S1302), and this process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the start of the ending (S1301: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the end of the ending (if the jackpot scenario a , the counter value is 42000) (S1303). In the process of S1303, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1303: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the end of the ending (S1303: Yes), the setting of the jackpot scenario is cleared (S1304), then the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1305). In other words, the operation control of the jackpot game based on the jackpot scenario is ended.

Next, the big hit flag 203i is set to OFF (S1306), and the specific controlled flag 203ab is set to OFF (S1307). Then, the value of the time-saving counter 203g corresponding to the jackpot type is set (S1308), the jackpot end command is set (S1309), and this process is finished.

Next, with reference to the flow chart of Drawing 278, small hit control processing (S1005) performed by MPU201 in main control unit 110 is explained. FIG. 278 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process (S1005). This small hit control process (S1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 274), setting a command for executing various effects according to the small hit in the audio lamp control device 113, V entering ball This is processing for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600 associated with the mouth 600a and the flow path solenoid 209b. In addition, in this embodiment, since the scenario set during the small winning game is the same as the specific big winning control process (S1118) described above with reference to FIG. 276, the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the small winning control process, first, it is determined whether or not a winning scenario a is set (S1401). In the processing of S1401, if it is determined that the winning scenario a is set (S1401: Yes), 1 is added to the scenario counter 203aa (S1402), and the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter 203aa after addition is performed. Execute (S1403).

Next, based on the value of the scenario counter 203aa, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the winning scenario a (S1404). In the processing of S1404, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the winning scenario a (S1404: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S1404, if it is determined that it is time to end the winning scenario a (S1404: Yes), the value of the scenario counter 203aa is set to 0 (S1405), and the second staying member 622b stays. It is determined whether or not there is a game ball (staying ball) that is stuck (S1406).

In the process of S1406, when it is determined that there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b, the winning scenario b is set (S1407), and the process proceeds to S1409. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no staying ball in the second staying member 622b, the winning scenario c is set (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409. As a result, it is possible to set an effect according to whether or not there is a staying ball in the second staying member 622b at the end timing of the winning scenario a.

In the process of S1409, an operation is executed according to the value of the scenario counter 203aa (S1409), and then it is determined whether it is time to end the winning scenario b or c (S1410).

In the process of S1410, when it is determined that it is the end timing of the winning scenario b or c (S1410: Yes), a small winning ending control process is executed (S1411), and this process ends. The details of this small winning ending control process (S1411) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of S1410, if it is determined that the end timing of the winning scenario b or c is not reached (S1410: No), the process of S1411 is skipped and the present process ends.

In the process of S1401, if it is determined that the winning scenario a is not set (S1401: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning scenario b or c is set (S1412). In the process of S1412, when it is determined that the winning scenario b or c is set (S1412: Yes), the process proceeds to S1409. Accordingly, when the winning scenario a is set, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is executed, and when the winning scenario b or c is set after that, the processing of S1402 to S1408 is skipped and the processing of S1409 is performed. You can do the following.

On the other hand, in the process of S1412, when it is determined that neither of the winning scenarios b and c is set (S1412: No), this process ends.

Next, the small hit ending control process (S1411) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 279 is a flow chart showing this small winning ending control process (S1411). This small hit ending control process (S1411) is a process executed in the small hit control process (see FIG. 278).

In the small winning ending control process, first, it is determined whether the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is a value corresponding to the start of the ending (the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa is 751) (S1501). In the process of S1501, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the start of the ending (S1501: Yes), a small winning end command is set (S1502), and this process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the start of the ending (S1501: No), then the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the end of the ending (if the scenario counter 203aa , the counter value is 1500) (S1503). In the process of S1503, if it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa does not correspond to the end of the ending (S1503: No), this process ends.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the counter value of the scenario counter 203aa corresponds to the end of the ending (S1503: Yes), the setting of the small winning scenario is cleared and the scenario counter 203aa is reset to 0 (S1504). Then, the process proceeds to S1505.

In S1505, it is determined whether the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505). In the processing of S1505, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is not set to ON (S1505: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is set to ON (S1505: Yes), then the jackpot scenario corresponding to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the V flag 203n set in S705 of FIG. Set (S1506). Then, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot mid-jack flag 203i are set to ON (S1507), the V flag 203n is set to OFF (S1508), and the process ends.

In addition, in the present embodiment, since all small winning games are set as one round games, unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting the command related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the V winning port 624 in a small winning game, a big winning game corresponding to a preset big winning type corresponding to the small winning is executed. However, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to acquire the value of the first hit type counter C2 and determine the jackpot type based on the detection of a game ball by the V winning hole 624.

<Control Processing Executed by Audio Ramp Control Device 113 in Embodiment A1>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 280 to 285. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into startup processing that is activated upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 280, start-up processing executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 280 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S1401). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S2018 (see FIG. ) is started during execution (S1402). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 281, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S2015 in FIG. 281), it executes power-off processing in S2018. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S2018 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S1402: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S1514. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in a specific area of the RAM 223 by the process of S1406. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S1403: Yes), it will transfer to S1404 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1403: No), the process proceeds to S1408.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1403: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1404. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S1516 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started after the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so the data in the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1403: No), and the process proceeds to S1408.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S1402: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during execution of the power-off process in S2018, the sound lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process moves to S1404 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S1404, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S1404). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If it is determined that the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1405: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S1406). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1405: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S1407), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the process of S1408, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S1408). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1516 is executed (see S2017 in FIG. 281). In other words, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S2018 is executed, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the current start-up processing is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S2018 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1408: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113 (S1409), and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), an interrupt Permission is set (S1411), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the process of S1408 is reached with the power-off flag turned off because the current start-up process was started after, for example, the power supply was completely shut off. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1408: No), S1409, which is the processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process proceeds to S1410, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S1410), interrupt permission is set. Then (S1411), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S1409 is skipped is that when the process of S1408 is reached from S1404 via the process of S1406, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S1404, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, referring to FIG. 281, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 281 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 ms or more has passed since the main process was started or after the current process of S2001 was executed (S2001). If not (S2001: No), the process proceeds to S2013 without performing the processes of S2002 to S2012. In the process of S2001, it is determined whether or not 1 ms has elapsed because S2002 to S2012 are mainly processes related to display (effect), and there is no need to edit in a short cycle (within 1 ms). , S2014 and the command determination process of S2013 are preferably executed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S2013 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S2014 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

If 1 millisecond or more has elapsed in the processing of S2001 (S2001: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S2003 to S2012 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2002 ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S2008 described later (S2003), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2004). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S2005 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

In the process of S2005, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the pending number display update process is executed (S1506). In the customer waiting effect process, when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by a player for a predetermined period of time, a setting such as switching the display of the third symbol display device 81 to a title screen is performed, and the setting is used as a command for display control. It is sent to device 114 . In the pending number display update process, a process of lighting a pending lamp (not shown) according to the value of the special symbol 1 pending ball number counter 223b is performed.

After that, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S2007). This frame button input monitoring/rendering process will be described later with reference to FIG. It is a process of setting so that the corresponding effect is performed when the input of is confirmed. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 is set in the display control device 114 . The details of this frame button input monitoring/effect processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing is completed, the lamp editing processing is executed (S2008), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S2009). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S2009, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S2010). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S2008 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. It should be noted that the sound editing/output processing of S2009 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third pattern display device 81. FIG. In the various counter update processing of S2011, various counters used in the control processing of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are updated. In the effect update process of S2012, the process of updating effects and the like is executed.

After effect update processing, command determination processing is performed to perform processing according to the command received from main controller 110 (S2013). The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the process proceeds to S2014. In the process of S2014, a variable display setting process is executed (S2014). In the variable display setting process, a variable pattern command for display is generated and set based on the variable pattern command received from the main controller 110 in order to cause the third symbol display device 81 to perform a variable effect. As a result, the command is sent to display controller 114 . The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, when the variable display setting process is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S2015). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S2015 (S2015: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S2017), and the power-off processing is executed (S2018). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned off (S2019), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2015 (S2015: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2016), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2016: No), the process returns to S2001, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2016: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes. Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and the loop is infinitely looped, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S2013) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 282 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S2013). This command determination process (S2013) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. . Further, in this process, when a command for the number of reserved balls is received from the main control device 110, the start of the continuous advance notice effect by the third symbol display device 81 is also determined.

In the command determination process (FIG. 280, S2013), first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and It is determined whether or not a variation pattern command has been received (S2101). When the variation pattern command is received (S2101: Yes), the variation start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is turned on (S2102), and the variation pattern type is extracted from the received variation pattern command (S2103), Return to main processing. The variation pattern type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type.

On the other hand, if no variation pattern command has been received (S2101: No), then it is determined whether or not a stop type command has been received from main controller 110 (S2104). When the stop type command is received (S2104: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2105), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (S2106), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process (see FIG. 284) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if the stop type command has not been received (S2104: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2107). Then, when the reserved ball number command is received (S2107: Yes), the reserved ball number of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is extracted from the received reserved ball number command, and the corresponding special symbol 1 reserved ball Stored in the number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively. In addition, when the process of S2108 is executed, a display reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the updated values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is issued. set. As a result, in the display control device 114 , the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 .

In the processing of S2107, if the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S2107: No), then it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2109). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received (S2109: Yes), the winning information corresponding to the received winning information command is stored in the winning information storage area 223a (S2110). After that, this process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of S2109, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2109: No), it is determined whether a win-related command regarding a big win, a small win, etc. has been received (S2111). When it is determined that a win-related command has been received (S2111: Yes), a win-related process is executed (S2112). This winning-related process (S2112) will be described later with reference to FIG. 283, but a process based on each command output from main controller 110 is executed in a big win or a small win. After that, this process ends.

In the process of S2111, if it is determined that the win-related command has not been received (S2111: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S2115) and returns to the main process. If the other command is a command used by the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is sent to the display control device 114. It sets the command so that it will be sent to

Next, with reference to FIG. 283, the winning-related processing (S2112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 283 is a flow chart showing this win-related process (S2112). This hit-related process (S2112) is executed in the command determination process (see FIG. 282) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the hit related process (S2112), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start command is received (S2201). When the jackpot start command is received, a display jackpot start command is set (S2202). Although omitted, when the jackpot start command is received also in the sound lamp control device 113, various lamps, sounds, and other necessary processes are executed at the start of the jackpot. After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the jackpot start command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2203). If it is determined that the number-of-rounds command has been received (S2203: Yes), the number-of-rounds command for display is set based on the number of rounds indicated by the received command (S2204). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the round number command has not been received (S2203: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot end command has been received (S2205). When it is determined that the jackpot end command has been received (S2205: Yes), a display jackpot end command indicating that the jackpot end timing is set (S2206). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the big hit end command is not received (S2205: No), it is determined whether the small hit start command is received (S2207). When it is determined that the small hit start command is received (S2207: Yes), a small hit start command for display indicating that it is the start timing of the small hit game is set (S2208). After that, this process ends.

When it is determined that the small hit start command is not received (S2207: No), it is determined whether the small hit end command is received (S2209). When it is determined that the small winning end command is received (S2209: Yes), a small winning end command for display indicating that it is the end timing of the small winning game is set (S2210). After that, this process ends.

If it is determined that the small hit end command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211). If it is determined that the V entrance passage command has been received (S2211: Yes), a display V entrance passage command indicating that the first residence sensor is on is set (S2212). After that, this process ends. The fact that the first retention sensor is ON indicates that the game ball has entered the V ball entrance 600a.

If it is determined that the V entrance pass command has not been received (S2211: No), it is determined whether the V entrance command has been received (S2213). When it is determined that the V passing command has been received (S2213: Yes), the game ball passes through the V winning opening 624 and the V effect (the effect of displaying characters such as "V" on the third symbol display device 81) is set (S2214). After that, this process ends.

Next, the variable display setting process (S2014) executed by the MPU 221 in the audio lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 284 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process (S2014). This variable display setting process (S2014) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and in order to execute the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81, Based on the variation pattern command received from main controller 110, a variation pattern command for display is generated and set.

In the variable display setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S2221). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2221: No), since the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main controller 110, the process proceeds to S2226. Transition. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is on (S2221: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223d is turned off (S2222). The variation pattern type in the variation performance extracted from the command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2223).

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type, a display variation pattern command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2224). In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the processing of S2225, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 233 is ON (S2225). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (S2225: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process and return to the main process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (S2225: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (S2226). The stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (S2227). The stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (S2228), and the process proceeds to S2229. In the process of S2229, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (S2229). . In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 285, the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2007) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 285 is a flow chart showing this frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2007). This frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S2007) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 281) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is performed in the third symbol display device 81 to enhance the effect. A display command is generated and set based on the operation of the frame button 22 in order to execute an effect corresponding to the operation of the player.

In the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (FIG. 285, S2007), first, it is determined whether the SW valid time is greater than 0, that is, whether the SW valid time (SW valid time counter 223g>0) is set (S2301). . As for the SW valid time, as shown in FIG. 235, the SW valid time of the selected variation pattern is automatically set at the timing corresponding to the case where the effect of the variation pattern using the frame button 22 is selected. set. If it is determined that the SW valid time is set (S2301: Yes), the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is updated by subtracting a value corresponding to the elapsed time (S2302). It is determined whether the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303). If it is determined that the frame button 22 has been pressed (S2303; Yes), a display chance command is set based on the set variation pattern and pressing timing. This second chance command for display causes the third symbol display device 81 to perform a re-variation (see FIG. 235), or an effect in which a temporary stop display of shaking variation is performed again without re-varying. The SW valid time counter 223g is reset (set to 0) (S2305). On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S2301 that the value of the SW valid time counter 223g is 0 (S2301: No), if it is determined in the process of S2303 that the frame button 22 has not been pressed (S2303: No ), the process of S2306 is executed. In the process of S2306, other processes (background change, etc.) related to SW effects are executed.

<Regarding control processing executed by the display control device in the first control processing example>
Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIGS. 286 to 296. FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 237. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, with reference to FIG. 286, main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 286 is a flow chart showing this main process. The main processing is to execute initialization processing when the power is turned on.

Activation of this main process is specifically performed according to the following flow. When power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the command pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. FIG. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address designated on the bus line 240 is "0000H", it sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , and outputs the corresponding data (instruction code) to the MPU 231 . Then, the MPU 231 fetches the received instruction code from the character ROM 234, and starts the main process by starting the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction.

Here, if all the boot programs to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address designated to the bus line 240 is "0000H". When detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND type flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to read out and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, the time taken to start the MPU 231 becomes longer, and as a result, there arises a problem that the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the NOR ROM 234d stores a predetermined number of instructions from the boot program to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is canceled, thereby speeding up the NOR ROM. Since it is a memory from which data can be read, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 is immediately stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234 c and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 . Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after specifying the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the control of the third pattern display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S3001), and the display control device 114 is set so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed. to start.

Here, referring to FIG. 287, the boot processing (S3001) will be described. FIG. 287 is a flowchart showing boot processing (S3001) executed in the main processing in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114. FIG.

As described above, in this embodiment, the control program and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored in a dedicated program ROM as in conventional game machines. The character ROM 234 provided for storing the data of the image to be displayed is stored. The character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND-type flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity with a small area. There is no need to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and an increase in failure rate due to an increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory 234a has a slow read speed, especially when performing random access. Even if a high-performance processor is used as a processor, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may deteriorate. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a provided in the work RAM 233 constituted by DRAM and the data table. A process of transferring and storing in the storage area 233b is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the hardware operations of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234 described above, the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR-type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c after the system reset is canceled is executed. Of the control programs stored in the 2-program storage area 234a1, a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S3101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the top address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S3102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the rest of the boot program included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101.

Also, by setting the command pointer 231a to a predetermined address in the program storage area 233a by the processing of S3102, the MPU 231 can execute various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but rather reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. and execute various processing. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of a DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the process for the instruction.

After the command pointer 231a is set by the process of S3102, the remaining boot program whose execution is started by the set command pointer 231a is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a. Of the control programs stored, the remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a are transferred by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b (S3103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) of the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to the storage area 233b.

After executing other processes necessary for the boot process (S3104), the instruction pointer 231a is moved to the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot process (see S3001 in FIG. 286) is completed. By setting the top address of the program corresponding to the initializing process (see S3002 in FIG. 286) (S3105), the execution of the boot program is finished, and this boot process ends.

By executing the boot process (S3001) in this way, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the work RAM 233, which is composed entirely of DRAM. It is transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. At the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter the MPU 231 reads the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processing is executed using

Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a whose read speed is slow, the control program and fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the fixed value data after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read the control program and fixed value data from the work RAM configured by the DRAM with a high read speed and perform various controls. High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed using the auxiliary effect part.

On the other hand, without storing the entire boot program in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the rest of the boot program is stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a. , the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start up the MPU 231 in a short time simply by adding a NOR type ROM 234d with a very small capacity. can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 287, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S3101 includes all remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. may be part of As for the boot program transferred here, a predetermined amount of the control program including all remaining boot programs is transferred to the program storage area 233a. 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S3103 to S3105 may be executed by all remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

In addition, the boot program transferred by the process of S3101 transfers a part of the remaining boot program by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a, and then the beginning of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting an address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. In addition, part of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a by this processing is further transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount of part of the remaining boot program, and subsequently stored in the program storage area 233a. A process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a predetermined amount of a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a, and then the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is set in the command pointer 231a at step S3101. and the processing of S3102 may be repeated a plurality of times, and then the processing of S3103 to S3105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the rest of the boot program not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at once, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. Using the boot program, a predetermined amount can be transferred to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first program storage area 234d1 stores a part of the boot program that is first executed by the MPU 231 when the system reset is released. It may be stored in the 1-program storage area 234d1. In this case, the MPU 231 may perform the processes of S3103 to S3105 without performing the processes of S3101 and S3102 after starting the boot process. This eliminates the need to transfer the boot program to the program storage area 233a, reducing the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a, thereby reducing the boot processing time. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect section in the MPU 231, which becomes possible after the boot process, more quickly.

Now, return to the description of FIG. After the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S3002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231, and various settings are made for the registers in the MPU 231 and the I/O device. In addition, processing for clearing the memory of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set to the respective flags. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Furthermore, in the initial setting process (S3002), after initializing the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to display an image of a specific color on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81. Instructs execution of image drawing and display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, an image of a specific color is first displayed on the entire screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be a different color according to the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check at the factory or the like at the time of manufacture, immediately after turning on the power, it is inspected whether or not the image of the color corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to easily and immediately judge whether or not the activation can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 to transfer the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a of the resident video RAM 235 (S3003). This transfer instruction includes the leading and trailing addresses of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the main image when the power is turned on, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The image controller 237 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating transfer end to the MPU 231 . By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. When the transfer of all the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 stores transfer end information indicating transfer end in a register provided inside the image controller 237 or in a partial area of the built-in memory. It may be written. The MPU 231 reads information from this register or a partial area of the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of transfer end information by the image controller 237, thereby ascertaining that the transfer of the image data designated by the transfer instruction has ended. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on main image to the power-on main image area 235a is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the process of S3003, the power-on variation image is transferred to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to . This transfer instruction contains the head address of the character ROM 234 storing the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image, the data size of the image data, and information on the transfer destination (here, the resident video RAM 235). , and the head address of the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, which is the transfer destination. It is transferred to the change image area 235b when the power is turned on. The image data transferred to the power-on variation image area 235b is held so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variation image to the power-on variation image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S3004, then the simple image display flag 233c is set. is turned on (S3005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in transfer setting processing (see S3305 in FIG. 288(b)), which will be described later. Resident image transfer setting processing is executed to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer to the RAM 235 .

Further, the simple image display flag 233c indicates that all image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. Remains on until terminated. As a result, during this period, in the V interrupt processing (see FIG. 288(b)), the simple command determination processing (see FIG. 288(b) S3308) and simple display setting processing (see S3309 in FIG. 288(b)) are executed.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 uses the NAND flash memory 234a for the character ROM 234. Due to its slow read speed, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is It takes a long time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 . Therefore, as in this main processing, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on varying image are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is transferred to the third image. By displaying it on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player and the people involved in the hall can see the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 takes time to transfer the remaining image data to be resident from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 while displaying the main image on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on. be able to. On the other hand, while the main image is being displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player or the like can recognize that some initialization processing is being performed, so that the rest of the resident video RAM 235 can be resident. It is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying whether the operation is stopped while the image data to be processed is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 .

Also, in an operation check at a factory or the like during manufacturing, since the main image is immediately displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the operation of the third pattern display device 81 is started without any problem when the power is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to prevent deterioration of the operation check efficiency by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234. FIG.

In the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, after the power is turned on, the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the power-on main image is the third symbol. When the player starts the game while the display is displayed on the display device 81, the ball enters the first winning port 64 (start winning), and the command to start the variable effect is issued from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device. 113, i.e., when a display variation pattern command is received, the power-on variation image can be immediately displayed during the variation performance period, and a simple variation performance can be performed. Therefore, even while the main image is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 when the power is turned on, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation performance.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is being transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the third pattern display device 81 continues to display the main image when the power is turned on. is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed, it takes a long time to transfer the data. However, in this pachinko machine 10, since it is possible to perform a simple variation effect using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, after the power is restored, Immediately after the power is turned on, even while the main image is being displayed, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the processing of S3005, interrupt permission is set (S3006), and thereafter the main processing executes infinite loop processing until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S3006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 288(a). FIG. 288(a) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S3201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read out by command determination processing or simple command determination processing of V interrupt processing to be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 288(b). FIG. 288(b) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 261) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute drawing processing and display processing of the image.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 237 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

Here, first, an outline of the flow of V interrupt processing will be described, and then details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 288(b), first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S3301). If it is off (S3301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. In order to display on the display device 81, command determination processing (S3302) is executed, and then display setting processing (S3303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S3302), the content of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process is analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demonstration display data table or the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer corresponding to the set display data table is performed. The data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and processed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variation pattern command, a display stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands all at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode and stop type of the variable performance selected by the main control device 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and generate a performance image corresponding to the mode. Drawing of an image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 . Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS.

In the display setting process (S3303), based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S3302), etc., an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is displayed. specifically identify the content of In addition, depending on the status of processing, etc., the effect mode to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 is determined, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process are the same as those of the display setting process of the first control example (see FIGS. 167 and 168), so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After the display setting process (S3303) is executed, task processing is executed (S3304). In this task processing, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 specified by the display setting processing (S3303) or the simple display setting processing (S3309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, transfer setting processing is executed (S3305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 is caused to transfer image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. While the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. In addition to setting a transfer instruction to transfer to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 , even when a continuous notice command or a back image change command is received from the sound lamp control device 113 , the image controller 237 is continuously instructed to A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous notice images used in the notice effect and the image data of the rear image after change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.例文帳に追加Details of the transfer setting process are the same as the transfer setting process (see FIGS. 170 and 171) of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, drawing processing is executed (S3306). In this drawing process, based on the types of sprites that make up one frame determined in the task process (S3304) and the parameters necessary for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set in the transfer setting process (S3305), 261, and transmits the drawing list to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes image drawing processing according to the drawing list. Details of the drawing process are the same as the drawing process (see FIG. 172) of the first control example, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S3307). Then, the V interrupt process ends. As a counter updated by the process of S3307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of the stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and is updated each time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, in the command determination process (S3302), when the reception of the stop type command for display is detected, the stop type indicated by the stop type command for display (jackpot A to D, front and rear out reach, front and back reach other than front and rear out, complete out , Chance) are compared with the stop type counter, and the stop design after the variable effect displayed on the third design display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, in the process of S3301, if it is determined that the simple image display flag 233c is ON (S3301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third pattern display device 81, the simple command determination process (S3308) is executed, then the simple display setting process (S3309) is executed, and the process proceeds to S3304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 289 to 296, details of the command determination process (S3302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 289 is a flow chart showing this command determination processing.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 289, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S3401). After completing the command determination process, the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes), the new command flag for notifying the display setting process (S3303) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S3402). All unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area are analyzed for their command types (S3403).

Then, among the unprocessed commands, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command (S3404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S3404: Yes), the variation pattern command process is executed. (S3405) and returns to the processing of S3401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command process (S3405) will be described with reference to FIG. 290(a). FIG. 290(a) is a flow chart showing variation pattern command processing. In this variation pattern command processing, processing corresponding to the display variation pattern command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the variation pattern command process, first, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the variation pattern command for display is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. It is set in the buffer 233d (S3501).

Here, since the main controller 110 always determines the start of variation at a time interval of several seconds or more, it does not receive two or more display variation pattern commands within 20 milliseconds. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly used for display. There is a possibility that it will be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S3501, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time is displayed. is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If a variation display data table corresponding to a variation pattern with a long variation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the main control device will actually produce a variation effect with a shorter variation time than the set display data table. 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation performance according to the set variation display data table is being displayed on the third pattern display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may make the player feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern with the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d as in the present embodiment, the variation display data table actually has a longer variation than the set display data table. Even if the variable effect with time is instructed by main controller 110, after the variable effect according to display data table buffer 233d is completed, main controller 110 will send the next display for display, as will be described later. Since the display of the third pattern display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demonstration effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player can feel the third pattern display on the third pattern display device 81 without any discomfort. 3 You can continue to see the variation of the pattern.

Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S3501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each variation display data table corresponding to each variation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the variation display data table set by the processing of S3501 is turned on, and other variation The data table discrimination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S3503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S3503, it is possible to easily determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501, time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3504), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S3505). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3506), the variation pattern command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this variation pattern command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3505, the variable display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3501 , extracts the drawing contents specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the contents of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. At the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e The transfer data information specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set to 1, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is stored in advance from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. image storage area 236a.

Further, in the display setting process, the time counter 233h to which the time data is set by the process of S3504 is used to measure the time of the variable presentation defined in the variable display data table, and when the variable presentation in the variable display data table ends. When it is determined, the setting of the stop display is controlled so that the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type command for display from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third design display device 81 .

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S3404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command in the unprocessed commands (S3406), If there is a stop type command for display (S3406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S3407), and the process returns to S3401.

Details of the stop type command process (S3407) will now be described with reference to FIG. 290(b). FIG. 290(b) is a flowchart showing stop type command processing. This stop type command processing is for executing processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the stop type command processing, first, a stop type table corresponding to the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display (any of jackpot A to D, front and rear out reach, reach other than front and rear out, complete loss, and chance) is created. Determined (S3601), comparing the stop type table and the value of the stop type counter updated each time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)) is executed, the third symbol display device 81 Finally, the stop symbol after the variable effect displayed in 3602 is set.

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S3602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the other stop symbols is turned off. (S3603), the stop type command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, after a predetermined time has passed since the variation based on the data table is started, the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified as the type information. , offset information (design offset information) from the stop design set by the processing of S3602. In the above-described task processing (S3304), after a predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation, the stop design set by the processing of S3602 is specified from the stop design determination flag set by S3603, and the specified stop By adding the design offset information acquired by the display setting process to the design, the third design to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address where the image data corresponding to the specified third pattern is stored is specified. Image data corresponding to the third design is stored in the third design area 235d of the resident video RAM 235, as described above.

As described above, in this embodiment, the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a with a slow read speed. Image data required for drawing can be transferred to the RAM 236 . Therefore, even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness of drawing in the third pattern display device 81 can be kept high.

It should be noted that since the main controller 110 always determines the start of the fluctuation at a distance of several seconds or more, two or more stop type commands for display are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the processing of S3601, in preparation for such a case, if it is determined that two or more stop type commands for display are stored in the command buffer area, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of line, and the stop type Decide on a table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss is set by the processing of S3602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "special symbol jackpot" is set, the third symbol display device 81 displays the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is out". A stop pattern corresponding to the "big win" is displayed, and the player is misled into thinking that the pachinko machine 10 has "a special pattern big win", and there is a risk of degrading the reliability of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete loss, in fact, if it is a "special symbol jackpot", the third symbol display device 81 stops the complete loss. Even if the symbols are displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "jackpot of special symbols", so that the player can be pleased.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S3406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a back image change command among the unprocessed commands (S3408). If there is an image change command (S3408: Yes), back image change command processing is executed (S3409), and the process returns to S3401.

Details of the back image change command process (S3409) will be described with reference to FIG. 291(a). FIG. 291(a) is a flowchart showing back image change command processing. The back image change command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the back image change command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the back image change command processing, first, the back image change flag is set to ON ( S3701). Then, among the back image determination flags provided for each back image type (back surfaces A to C), the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the other back image is turned on. The back image determination flag corresponding to the type is set to OFF (S3702), the back image change command processing is terminated, and the command determination processing is returned to.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the back image change flag set by the process of S3701 is turned on, the back image type after change is specified from the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S3702. . Then, when the identified back image type is back B or C, part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235, as described above. Therefore, a transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the rear image of a predetermined range from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236 a of the normal video RAM 236 .

In the task processing (S3304), if it is specified to display one of the back faces A to C according to the back face type of the back face image defined in the display data table, the back face image determination flag set in S3702 is determined. , the type of the back image to be displayed at that time is specified, and further, the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored in the RAM. The type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) and its RAM address are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 for 20 milliseconds or less, two or more back image change commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, so the command determination process is executed. In this case, there should be no cases where two or more background image change commands are stored in the command buffer area. It could be interpreted as a command. In the process of S3702, if it is determined that two or more back image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the previously received back image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image determination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since the change of the back image does not directly affect the game value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set it according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3408, if it is determined that there is no back image change command (S3408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S3410). Otherwise (S3410: Yes), the error command process is executed (S3411), and the process returns to S3401.

Details of the error command processing (S3411) will now be described with reference to FIG. 291(b). FIG. 291(b) is a flowchart showing error command processing. In this error command processing, processing corresponding to the error command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the error command process, first, an error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S3801). Then, among the error determination flags provided for each error type, the error determination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error determination flags are set to off (S3802). End the processing and return to the command determination processing.

In the display setting process, when the occurrence of an error is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S3801, the type of error that has occurred is determined from the error determination flag set by the process of S3802, and the error type is handled. A process is executed to cause the third symbol display device 81 to display a warning image to be displayed.

If it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S3802, error determination flags corresponding to all error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to ON. As a result, the warning images corresponding to all the error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the people involved in the hall can correctly grasp the occurrence of the error.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3410, if it is determined that there is no error command (S3410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a win-related command among the unprocessed commands (S3412), and if there is a win-related command If (S3412: Yes), hit-related command processing is executed (S3413), and the process returns to S3401.

Next, with reference to FIG. 292, the details of the win-related command process (S3413) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. First, FIG. 292 is a flow chart showing the win-related command processing.

In this hit-related command process, as shown in FIG. 292, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot start command in the hit-related commands (S3901), and if there is a display jackpot start command, (S3901: Yes), a jackpot start command process is executed (S3902), and the process proceeds to S3903.

Here, with reference to FIG. 293(a), details of the jackpot start command process (S3902) will be described. FIG. 293(a) is a flow chart showing a jackpot start command process. In this jackpot start command process, a process corresponding to the display jackpot start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the jackpot start command process, first, a jackpot start display data table corresponding to the received display jackpot start command is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3921). Next, a transfer data table corresponding to the jackpot start display data table set in S3921 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3922).

Then, based on the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3921, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3923), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3924). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3925), the jackpot start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this jackpot start command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3924, the jackpot start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3921 , extracts the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, and specifies the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81. 233e, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred to the image storage area 236 a of the video RAM 236 .

Also, when this jackpot start command process is executed, a jackpot start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the big win start effect is being performed on the third pattern display device 81.例文帳に追加As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, due to its slow read speed, the jackpot effects (jackpot start effect, round effect, jackpot end effect) It takes a long time to transfer the image data used for rendering from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

The number-of-rounds command for display indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the big winning start effect in the third pattern display device 81 is finished, so that the first round is performed. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the command for the number of rounds for display is received, there will be a lot of time between the end of the jackpot start effect and the start of the round effect. , and there is a risk that the player may feel uneasy about whether or not the action has stopped, or feel a sense of discomfort.

In addition, since the display jackpot end command for instructing the start of the jackpot end effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third pattern display device 81 are finished, the display jackpot end command is transmitted. If the image data required for the jackpot end performance is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the end command, a long waiting time is required from the end of the round performance to the start of the jackpot end performance. This may cause the player to feel uneasy about whether the motion has stopped or to have a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the command for starting the big win for display is received, the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the end effect of the big win is started from there, and the fluctuation display of the big win on the third pattern display device 81 ends. Control is performed so that the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the jackpot end effect is completed by the end of the game. As a result, when the big win start effect is finished in the third pattern display device 81, the round effect can be started in the third pattern display device 81 immediately. In addition, when the round effect is completely completed in the third pattern display device 81, the big win end effect can be started immediately in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is worried whether the operation has stopped or not. It never makes you feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display is determined to be the stop type of the jackpot, the transfer of the image data used in the jackpot end effect is started from there. , the third symbol display device 81 is controlled so that the transfer of the image data used in the big win start effect is completed before the big win variation effect is completed. As a result, when the variation performance for the big win is completed in the third pattern display device 81, the big win start performance can be started immediately in the third pattern display device 81, so that the player is asked if the operation has stopped. It never makes me feel uneasy or uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3901, if it is determined that there is no display jackpot start command (S3901: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command in the hit-related commands (S3903), and display If there is a round number command for use (S3903: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S3904), and the process proceeds to S3906.

Details of the round number command process (S3904) will now be described with reference to FIG. 293(b). FIG. 293(b) is a flowchart showing round number command processing. The number-of-rounds command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the number-of-rounds command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the number of rounds indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read out from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data. It is set in the table buffer 233d (S3931). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3932).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3931, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3933), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3934). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3935), the round number command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3903, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S3903: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display jackpot end command in the hit-related commands (S3905), and displayed If there is a jackpot end command (S3905: Yes), the jackpot end command process is executed (S3906), and the process proceeds to S3907.

Here, with reference to FIG. 294(a), details of the jackpot end command process (S3906) will be described. FIG. 294(a) is a flow chart showing a jackpot end command process. In this jackpot end command process, a process corresponding to the display jackpot end command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the jackpot end command process, first, the jackpot end display data table corresponding to the display mode of the jackpot end effect indicated by the jackpot end command for display is determined, and the decided jackpot end display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3941). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3942). It should be noted that the jackpot end display data table set by the process of S3941 may be made distinguishable. Specifically, the data table determination flag corresponding to the jackpot end display data table set by the processing of S3941 is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other jackpot end display data table is turned off. As a result, by referring to the data table determination flag, the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in processing such as display setting processing corresponds to which jackpot end effect display mode. can be easily determined.

Next, based on the jackpot end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3941, time data representing the presentation time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3943), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3944). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3945), the jackpot end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3905, when it is determined that there is no display jackpot end command (S3905: No), then, it is determined whether or not there is a display small hit start command in the hit-related commands (S3907), If there is a small hit start command for display (S3907: Yes), small hit start command processing is executed (S3908), and then the process proceeds to S3909.

Here, with reference to Drawing 294 (b), the details of small hit start command processing (S3908) are explained. FIG. 294(b) is a flow chart showing small hit start command processing. This small winning start command process executes the processing corresponding to the display small winning start command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the small winning start command process, first, the small winning start display data table corresponding to the received small winning start command for display is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3951). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the small hit start display data table set in S3951 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S3952).

Then, based on the small hit start display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3951, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3953), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3954). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3955), the small hit start command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

By executing this small hit start command process, in the display setting process, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the process of S3954, the small hit start display set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3951 From the data table, the drawing content specified by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the third pattern display device 81 is specified. From the transfer data table set in the table buffer 233e, the transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, and the sprite image data required in the set small winning start display data table is stored in the character ROM 234 in advance. The image controller 237 is controlled so that the image is transferred from the normal video RAM 236 to the image storage area 236a.

In addition, when this small hit start command processing is executed, the small hit start display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, image data necessary for the round effect and the small win end effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the small win start effect is being performed in the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加. As described above, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234 in the pachinko machine 10, due to its slow read speed, small winning effects (small winning start effects, round effects, small winning effects) It takes a lot of time to transfer the image data used for the ending effect from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 .

Since the display round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when the small winning start effect in the third pattern display device 81 is finished, the first round is performed. If the image data necessary for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command indicating There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur in the game, and that the player will feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel a sense of incongruity.

In addition, since the display small winning end command for instructing the start of the small winning end effect is transmitted from the sound lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects in the third pattern display device 81 are completed, it is displayed. If the image data necessary for the small winning end performance is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after the small winning end command is received, the small winning ending performance is started after the round performance is completed. There is a risk that a lot of waiting time will occur in the game, and that the player will feel uneasy about whether the action has stopped or feel a sense of incongruity.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the small winning start command for display is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the small winning end effect is started from there, and the small winning fluctuation display is performed on the third pattern display device 81. is controlled so that the transfer of the data necessary for the round effect and the small win end effect is completed by the time the is completed. As a result, when the small win start performance is finished in the third pattern display device 81, the round performance can be immediately started in the third pattern display device 81, and the round performance in the third pattern display device 81 is all finished. In such a case, the third pattern display device 81 can immediately start the small winning end effect, so that the player does not feel uneasy about whether the operation has stopped or feels uncomfortable. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

As described above, in this embodiment, when the stop type information indicated by the stop type command for display is determined to be the stop type of the jackpot, the transfer of the image data used in the small hit end effect is started from there. Then, the transfer of the image data used in the small win start effect is completed by the time the third symbol display device 81 finishes the variation effect of the big win. As a result, when the small winning variation performance is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the small winning start performance can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not stop the operation. There is no such thing as anxiety or discomfort. Therefore, the player can be made to feel at ease.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3907, if it is determined that there is no small winning start command for display (S3907: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a small winning end command for display in the winning related commands (S3909) , If there is a small hit end command for display (S3909: Yes), small hit end command processing is executed (S3910), and then the process proceeds to S3911.

Here, with reference to Drawing 295 (a), the details of small hit end command processing (S3910) are explained. FIG. 295(a) is a flow chart showing a small hit end command process. This small hit end command process executes the process corresponding to the small hit end command for display received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the small winning end command process, first, a small winning ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the small winning ending production indicated by the small winning ending command for display is determined, and the determined small winning ending display data table is converted to the data table. It reads out from the storage area 233b and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S3961). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3962). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each small winning end display data table corresponding to the display mode of each small winning end effect, the data table discrimination corresponding to the small winning end display data table set by the processing of S3961 The flag is turned on, and the data table determination flag corresponding to the other small winning end display data table is set to off. In the display setting process, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the process of S2703, the small winning end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to the display mode of which small winning ending effect. You can easily determine what it is.

Next, based on the small hit end display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3961, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3963), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3964). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3965), the small hit end command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the processing of S3909, if it is determined that there is no small winning end command for display (S3909: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a V entrance passing command for display in the winning related commands (S3911) If there is a V entrance passage command for display (S3911: Yes), V entrance passage command processing is executed (S3912), and then the process proceeds to S3913.

Here, with reference to FIG. 295(b), details of the V entrance passage command process (S3912) will be described. FIG. 295(b) is a flow chart showing V entrance passage command processing. This V entrance passage command processing is to execute the processing corresponding to the display V entrance passage command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the V entrance passage command processing, first, the V entrance passage display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect indicated by the display V entrance passage command is determined, and the determined V entrance passage display data table is stored in the data table. It reads out from the storage area 233b and sets it in the display data table buffer 233d (S3971). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3972). It should be noted that the display mode of the V-entrance passage performance may be made distinguishable. Specifically, a data table determination flag corresponding to the display mode of the V entrance passage effect is provided, the data table determination flag corresponding to the V entrance passage display data table set by the processing of S3971 is turned on, and other V entrance passage display data tables are turned on. The data table determination flag corresponding to the entrance passage display data table is set to off. As a result, by referring to the data table determination flag set by the processing of S2703, the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d in processing such as the display setting processing determines which V entrance passage end rendering. It is possible to easily judge whether it corresponds to the display mode of .

Next, based on the V entrance passage display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3971, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3973), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3974). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3975), the V entrance passage command is terminated, and the process returns to the winning-related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3911, if it is determined that there is no display V entrance passing command (S3911: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display V effect command in the hit-related commands (S3913), If there is a V effect command for display (S3913: Yes), the V effect command process is executed (S3914), and then the hit-related command process is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 296, the details of the V effect command process (S3914) will be described. FIG. 296 is a flow chart showing V effect command processing. In this V effect command processing, a process corresponding to the display V effect command received from the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

In the V effect command processing, first, the V effect display data table corresponding to the display mode of the V effect indicated by the display V effect command is determined, and the determined V effect display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3981). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents are cleared (S3982).

Next, based on the V effect display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S3981, time data representing the effect time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3983), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3984). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the fixed display flag are set to OFF (S3985), the V effect command is terminated, and the process returns to the hit-related command process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3412, if it is determined that there is no hit-related command (S3412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display chance command (S3414), and if there is a display chance command (S3414) : Yes), execute the second chance command process (S3415), and return to the process of S3401.

Details of the second-chance command process (S3415) will now be described with reference to FIG. 291(c). FIG. 291(c) is a flow chart showing second chance command processing. This chance command processing is to execute processing corresponding to the display chance command received from the sound lamp control device 113 .

In the chance eye command process, first, the chance eye display data table corresponding to the display mode of the chance eye indicated by the display chance eye command is determined, and the determined chance eye display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b. , is set in the display data table buffer 233d (S3851). Next, by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e, the contents thereof are cleared (S3852).

Next, based on the chance eye display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the process of S3851, time data representing the performance time is set in the clock counter 233h (S3853), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S3854). Then, both the demonstration display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to OFF (S3855), the second chance command is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Now, return to the description of FIG. In the process of S3414, if it is determined that there is no second chance command (S3414: No), then the process corresponding to other unprocessed commands is executed (S3416), and the process returns to S3401.

In the process of S3401, which is executed again after each command has been processed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S3401: Yes ), and the processing of S3402 to S3416 is executed again. Then, the processing of S3401 to S3416 is repeatedly executed until there is no unprocessed new command in the command buffer area. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S3308) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is ON in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 288(b)) is also performed in the same manner as the command determination process. However, in the simple command determination process, commands necessary to display a power-on image (not shown), that is, a display variation pattern command and a display command, are extracted from unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Only the stop type command is extracted, and the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 290(a)) and the stop type command process (see FIG. 290(b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, are executed, and other command is discarded without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the variation pattern command process (see FIG. 290(a)) executed in this case, in the process of S3501, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the power-on variation image is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The image data of the power-on main image and the power-on varying image which are set and required in that case are stored in the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on varying image area 235b of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S3502, the process of writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

<A2 Embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 297 to 299. FIG. FIG. 297 is a front view of the game board 13 in the A2 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 297, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A2 embodiment has a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed region) compared to the above-described A1 embodiment. is different in that the configuration of Specifically, a distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed area, and among the game balls flowing down the right-handed area, the game balls that flowed down the first flow path B701a and flowed into the distribution device B700 are distributed to two flow paths ( It has a configuration for distributing to the second flow path B701b and the third flow path B701c).

Next, the distribution device B700 provided in the right-handed area of the game board 13 of the present A2 embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 298 and 299. FIG.

FIG. 298 is a schematic diagram showing an enlarged right-handed area of the game board 13. FIG. A ball that is shot to the right-handed area and flows down the first flow path B701a passes through the distribution device B700 and is distributed to the second flow path B701b or the third flow path B701c. The detailed configuration of this sorting device B700 will be described later with reference to FIG. It is configured to be distributed at a ratio of 1. By configuring in this way, it is necessary to shoot a plurality of game balls in order to surely enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open. , it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot singly, and to improve the operation of the game. In addition, since at least one ball out of four balls that flowed into the sorting device B700 can flow down the third flow path 701c, in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously shot, , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the V ball entrance 600a during the period in which the V winning door 600 is open.

The second flow path B701b is configured so that the falling ball can pass through the through gate 67, and the third flow path B701c allows the falling ball to enter the V ball entrance 600a. When the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the second flow path B701b passes through the open V winning door 600 and enters the V ball entrance 600a. To flow into (ball). On the other hand, when the V winning door 600 is closed, the through gate 67 is configured to flow down to a passable area.

In this embodiment, when the V winning door 600 is open, the ball flowing out from the third flow path B701c is always entered into the V ball entrance 600a. For example, a distributing member (nail, distributing device, etc.) for distributing the flowing direction of the balls is provided between the outlet of the third flow path B701c and the V winning door 600, and the V winning door 600 is open, only a part of the ball flowing out from the third flow path B701c may enter the V ball inlet 600a.

By configuring in this way, among game balls distributed regularly (at a ratio of 3:1) by the distribution device B700, game balls flowing into the V ball inlet 600a are generated irregularly. Therefore, in order to enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a while the V winning door 600 is open, the game ball can be continuously shot more motivated.

Next, the structure of the distribution device B700 for distributing incoming balls to two flow paths will be described with reference to FIGS. 299(a) to (d). Figures 299 (a) and (b) are schematic diagrams schematically showing the configuration of the sorting device B700, and Figures 114 (c) and (d) show the spherical flow downward and sorting of the first flow path B701a FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the relationship with the device B700;

As shown in FIG. 299(a), the sorting device B700 is a rotating body configured to be rotatable around the axis, and in four directions of the rotating body (four directions at intervals of 90 degrees) A blade member (first blade member B700a, second blade member B700b) that can come into contact with the ball is provided. The first blade member B700a is configured in a flat shape so that the balls that have flowed down to the sorting device B700 flow down to the third flow path B701c (flow down in the lateral direction of the rotating body of the sorting device B700). The second blade member B700b is arranged so that the balls that have flowed down to the sorting device 700 flow down to the second flow path B701b (so that they flow down directly below the rotating body of the sorting device B700) It is configured in the shape of a flat plate.

In this embodiment, as the sorting device B700, a rotating body having one first blade member B700a and three second blade members B700b is used. The number of balls distributed to the path B 701c is configured to have a ratio of 3:1. Furthermore, a metal piece B700c is embedded in the side surface of the rotating body of the sorting device B700, and a detection sensor (not shown) can determine whether or not the rotating body is rotating. As a result, the sorting device B700 is illegally remodeled, and the ball that has flowed into the channel unit B720 is made to flow down only to one of the channels (second channel B701b or third channel B701c). can be easily determined.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 299(c) and (d), the arrangement relationship between the first channel B701a and the sorting device B700 will be described. FIG. 299(c) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which the second blade member B700b is positioned within the flow path. In this state, when a ball flows down the first flow path B701a, the ball contacts the second blade member B700b and is distributed to the third flow path B701c. Then, the second blade member B700b in contact with the ball rotates 90 degrees (rotates downward by 90 degrees) along the flowing direction of the ball (downward direction in FIG. 299(c)), and the first blade member B700a moves toward the flow path. will be located inside.

When two balls pass through the sorting device B700 from the state shown in FIG. 299(c), the state shown in FIG. do.

In this way, by bringing the balls flowing down the sorting device B700 into contact with the blade members provided on the rotating body, the flowing direction of the balls is changed and the rotating body is rotated. Since the rotating body rotates every time the ball passes through the ball, the blade member that can come into contact with the ball can be changed, so that the ball can be distributed reliably.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the distribution device B700 is provided in the right-handed area, and the flow path (third flow path 701c) that allows the ball to enter the V-ball opening 600a and the V-ball opening 600a Since it has a configuration that distributes game balls to the flow path (second flow path 701b) that is impossible (difficult) to enter, during the period when the V winning door 600 is open, the V ball entrance Since it is necessary to shoot a plurality of game balls in order to ensure that the game ball enters the 600a, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot singly, thereby improving the operation of the game. .

In addition, since at least one ball out of four balls that flowed into the sorting device B700 can flow down the third flow path 701c, in the case of performing a normal game in which a plurality of game balls are continuously shot, , it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball cannot enter the V ball entrance 600a during the period in which the V winning door 600 is open.

As described above, in the A2 embodiment described above, the configuration having the sorting device B700 is used to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot single-shot, but other configurations may be used. A delay means is provided in the right-handed area to make the period during which the game ball flows irregularly so that the period from when the ball is shot until it reaches the V ball entrance 600a is irregular, and the game ball is shot. A configuration may be used in which a game in which a game ball is shot singly is suppressed by making it difficult to comprehend the period from when it reaches the V ball entrance 600a, or when a plurality of game balls are continuously shot. In order to prevent the game ball from reaching the V ball entrance 600a unless the game ball is flowed down, a retention means for retaining the game ball for a predetermined period is provided in the right-handed area, and when the game ball is retained in the retention means Alternatively, the subsequent game ball may collide with the stagnant game ball to enter the V ball entrance 600a.

In the present embodiment, the configuration of the sorting device B700 is configured to sort one out of four balls to the third flow path 701, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other ratios may be used. The sorting device B700 may be composed of a windmill or the like, and may be configured to distribute at random ratios.

<A3 embodiment>
Next, the configuration of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 300-301. FIG. 300 is a front view of the game board 13 in the A3 embodiment. As shown in FIG. 300, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the present A3 embodiment has a region on the right side of the variable display unit 80 (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed region) compared to the above-described A1 embodiment. The difference is that the configuration of Specifically, it differs in that a croon member 1700 for delaying the downflow of the game ball is provided above the V winning door 600 in the right-handed area, but other points are the same. The same parts are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

In this embodiment, by providing the croon member 1700, by flowing down the inside of the croon member 1700 as the path of the game ball flowing down the right hitting area, the flow of the game ball is delayed to the V winning door 600 and a normal route that flows down to the V winning door 600 by flowing down the outside (right side) of the crew member 1700 .

With this configuration, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600 even after the player stops shooting the game ball.

Here, for example, when the player determines the type of small win and a small win of a small win type disadvantageous to the player occurs, it is illegal to refrain from shooting the game ball so as not to flow down to the V winning door 600. Gaming is possible. In this case, the loss of the game parlor is increased because the V prize is not generated by the small winning game which is disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, with the above-described configuration, even if the player stops shooting the game ball after judging the type of the small hit, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the crew member 1700 (delay path) is placed in the V winning door 600 Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which a V winning due to a small winning game disadvantageous to the player does not occur.

Also, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to reliably enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open (that is, enter the game ball even if it flows down the delay path), It is necessary to launch game balls before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot in a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game.

Referring now to FIG. 301, details of the croon member 1700 will be described. The croon member 1700 is configured in a conical shape, and has a ball entering portion 1710a into which a game ball flowing down the right-handed hitting area enters. This ball entry portion 1710a is an opening that is slightly larger than one game ball (in this embodiment, the diameter is 12 mm).

Inside the croon member 1700, a spiral flow path 1710d is formed in which the game ball entering the ball entry portion 1710a spirally flows down along the inner wall of the croon member 1700. At the end of the spiral flow path 1710d is formed with a bottom portion 1710c gently inclined toward the center like a mortar. The spiral flow path 1710d is configured so that a game ball entering the ball-entering portion 1710a spirally flows down along the inner peripheral surface of the bottom portion 1710c to the outer end portion of the bottom portion 1710c. there is The bottom portion 1710c has the same shape as the bottom surface of a known krunn, and guides the game ball gradually toward the center portion while circularly moving the game ball along the inner circumference of the bottom surface. At the center of the bottom portion 1710c, a ball outlet 1710b slightly larger than one game ball (12 mm in diameter in this embodiment) protrudes downward in a cylindrical shape. Furthermore, inside the ball outlet 1710b, a spiral flow path is formed by a flow path wall protruding 0.5 mm, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 1710b to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b. configured to be ejected.

In the present embodiment, the spiral flow path 1710d is formed inside the croon member 1710, but the configuration is not limited to this. may be configured only by the spiral flow path 1710d without forming the . Alternatively, instead of the spiral flow path 1710d, a deceleration section may be formed that is made of a material having a high coefficient of friction for decelerating the flow speed of the game ball. As long as it delays the flow of the game ball, it may be selected as appropriate.

As a result, the game ball entered into the entering ball portion 1710a of the croon member 1700 slowly rolls along the inner peripheral wall of the croon member 1700 in the spiral flow path 1710d and is guided to the bottom surface portion 1710c. The game ball guided to the bottom portion 1710c is gradually guided to the ball outlet 1710b while making a circular motion on the bottom portion 1710c from the outer peripheral side to the center. In addition, the diameter of the ball outlet 1710b is slightly larger than that of the game ball, and the game ball spirally rotates inside the ball outlet 1710b protruding downward due to the spiral flow path formed inside. while being discharged to the outside of the ball outlet 1710b. With this configuration, it takes about 6 seconds for a game ball entering the ball entering portion 1710a of the crew member 1700 to be ejected from the ball exit 1710b.

Here, in the present embodiment, the time from when the small winning type is displayed to when the V winning door 600 is opened is set to 1 second. Therefore, even if you refrain from launching a new game ball after the small hit type is displayed, the game ball flowing down inside the croon member 1700 is delayed and flows down to the V prize door 600. - 特許庁As a result, the player refrains from shooting the game ball after judging the type of the small winning, and can prevent the fraudulent game in which the V winning due to the small winning game disadvantageous to the player is not generated.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured so that a lot of variation times shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crew member 1700 (delay path) are selected. there is As a result, the game ball entered into the entering ball part 1710a of the crew member 1700 before (or during the variation performance) the small winning variation performance ends and the V winning door 600 is opened. With timing, it becomes easier to discharge from the ball outlet 1710b. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a to suppress illegal games, and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V ball entrance 600a in normal games. , can improve the interest of the player. It should be noted that, of course, it may be configured such that it is difficult to select a variation time shorter than (or the same as) the time (6 seconds) in which the game ball passes through the crew member 1700 (delay path).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, it is configured to select a plurality of variation times (2 seconds, 6 seconds, 9 seconds, 12 seconds) as the variation time of the small hit. Therefore, it becomes difficult to launch the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened and enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a. In addition, in this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball reaches the V ball opening 600a changes greatly depending on whether the game ball flowing down the right-handed area flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to shoot the game ball at the timing when the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot singly, and to improve the operation of the game.

In addition, the variation time of the small hit is not limited to the above-mentioned, it may be only a variation time shorter than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the croon member 1700 (or the same), or only a long variation time Naturally good.

In addition, in the present embodiment, by providing two routes, the delay route and the normal route, it is difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the game ball reaches the V ball entrance 600a. Of course, three or more paths may be provided.

As described above, in the A3 embodiment, by providing the crew member 1700 on the upper part of the V winning door 600 (V ball entrance 600a), the game ball flowing down the right-handed area As a route to enter the ball, a delay route and a normal route with different flow times are provided.

With this delay path, the game ball flowing down the delay path can reach the V winning door 600 even after the player stops shooting the game ball. That is, even if the player stops shooting the game ball after judging the small hit type, the game ball whose flow is delayed by the crew member 1700 (delay path) enters the V ball entrance 600a. become. As a result, it is possible to suppress fraudulent games in which the player discriminates the type of the small win and does not allow the game ball to enter the V ball entrance 600a during the small win game that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in this embodiment, the timing at which the launched game ball reaches the V winning door 600 changes greatly depending on whether it flows down the delay path or the normal path. Therefore, in order to reliably enter the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a during the period when the V winning door 600 is open (that is, enter the game ball even if it flows down the delay path), It is necessary to launch game balls before the V winning door 600 is opened. As a result, it is possible to suppress the game in which the game ball is shot in a single shot, and to improve the operation of the game.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the time for the game ball to flow down the crew member 1700 (delay path) is longer than the time from when the small win type is displayed until the V winning door 600 is opened. are doing. Therefore, even if the launch of new game balls is stopped after the small hit type is displayed, the game balls flowing down inside the croon member 1700 are delayed and flow down to the V winning door 600. - 特許庁As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent game in which the game player stops shooting the game ball after judging the type of the small win and does not generate a V winning due to the small win game disadvantageous to the player.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variation time of the small hit is configured so that a lot of variation times shorter (or the same) than the time (6 seconds) for the game ball to pass through the crew member 1700 (delay path) are selected. there is As a result, the game ball entered into the entering ball part 1710a of the crew member 1700 before (or during the variation performance) the small winning variation performance ends and the V winning door 600 is opened. With timing, it becomes easier to discharge from the ball outlet 1710b. This makes it difficult for the player to control the entry of the game ball into the V ball entrance 600a to suppress illegal games, and makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V ball entrance 600a in normal games. , can improve the interest of the player.

<A4 embodiment>
Next, the A4 embodiment of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 to 319. FIG. In the A4 embodiment, in contrast to the A1 embodiment, a distribution device 720 for distributing game balls is arranged in the right channel of the variable display unit 80, and the balls flowing down the right channel are alternately distributed. After the fluctuation of the special symbols determined to be a small win or a big win is stopped and displayed in one of the distributed passages, a gate that starts the small win or big win game is arranged, and the ball is placed in the right channel. The difference is that it is possible to enter the ball into the V winning device 620 at the start of a small win or a big win by continuing to shoot. Since other configurations are the same, descriptions of other configurations are omitted.

The configuration of the game board 13 in the A4th embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 302 and 303. FIG. In this A4 embodiment, the sorting device 720 is arranged in the right side area of the variable display unit 80 at a position upstream of the V winning door 600 . The sorting device 720 has a ball entrance 720c at the top, through which a ball flowing down the right channel can enter, with a width that allows one game ball to pass through. When it flows down, it is configured to distribute the balls that turn left and right and alternately flow down to the left flow path 720d and the right flow path 720e. A starting gate 720a composed of a photosensor capable of detecting passage of a ball is arranged at the lower end of the right channel 720e. By passing the ball through the start gate 720a, the start of the small winning game or the big winning game is set. Thus, in the second embodiment, even when the variation of the special symbol for which the small hit or the big hit has been determined stops, the ball moves through the start gate 720a without shifting to the small hit game or the big hit game. Execution of the small winning game or the big winning game is on standby until it passes.

The distribution rotation member 720b receives the entering game ball in the left storage section or the right storage section arranged on the left and right. When the game ball is received by the left storage portion, the distribution rotation member 720b rotates counterclockwise due to the weight of the game ball, and guides the game ball to the left flow path 720d. Here, each of the distribution rotation members 900 is configured to be able to rotate about 90 degrees in the left-right direction, and a magnet is provided on the boundary wall between the left housing portion and the right housing portion.

On the base body provided on the back side of the sorting device 720, the magnet of the sorting rotation member 720b is arranged at a position on the center line of the passage port. The magnet of the distribution rotation member 720b and the base-side magnet are configured to have polarities that repel each other. Specifically, the base-side magnet is composed of a bar-shaped magnet fixed to the base body, and is configured to generate a magnetic pole (S pole or N pole) at the tip. The base-side magnet is arranged and fixed so that the tip thereof faces the distribution rotation member 720b.

The magnet is also a rod-shaped magnet, similar to the base-side magnet, and is fixed to the distribution rotation member 720b so that the tip thereof faces the base-side magnet. When the distribution rotation member 720b rotates and the boundary wall between the left housing part and the right housing part is directly above (on the center line of the interval where about one game ball can enter the passage opening), the base This is the position where the side magnets and the magnets of the distribution rotation member are closest to each other (tips face each other). Here, since the mutual magnets are arranged so as to have the same polarity (for example, N pole and N pole), they repel each other and stop at the position where the boundary wall of the distribution rotation member faces directly upward. , and is maintained at a position rotated to either the left or right.

As a result, when the magnet is on the center line of the passage port (upper position), the magnet repels the base-side magnet, so that the distribution rotation member 720b moves to either the left or the right. It rotates so that either the left housing part or the right housing part faces the side of receiving game balls entering the distribution device 720 (the upper side of the gaming machine). Therefore, it is possible to prevent ball clogging from occurring as a result of a game ball entering the game ball coming into contact with the boundary wall between the left housing portion and the right housing portion.

In addition, due to the repulsion between the magnet and the base side magnet, for example, the left housing part receives the game ball and rotates about 90 degrees to the left, and after guiding the game ball to the left flow path 720d, it is distributed and rotated. It is possible to prevent the member 720b from rotating to the right (the left accommodating portion faces upward). As a result, after the game ball is guided to the left flow path 720d, the right housing portion faces upward, and the game ball that enters the distribution device 720 is received by the right housing portion, and the game ball is received by the right housing portion. The distribution rotation member 720b rotates about 180 degrees to the right due to the weight of , and guides the game ball to the right flow path 720e. In this way, the distribution rotation member 720b can alternately guide game balls entering the distribution device 720 to the left channel 720d and the right channel 720e. Therefore, it is possible to evenly distribute and guide the game balls to the left channel 720d and the right channel 720e.

After being distributed to the right flow path 720e by the distribution rotation member 720b, the ball passing through the ball entrance 720c is moved to the left flow path 720d by the rotation of the distribution rotation member 720b to the left. distributed. When distributed to the left flow path 720d, it is guided to a flow path that allows a ball to enter the V-ball opening 600a. When the ball passes through the start gate 720a, a small win or big win game is started, and the V winning door 600 is changed to the open state, so the ball distributed to the left flow path after that goes to the V ball entrance 600a. and can enter the ball. Here, the V winning door 600 is opened for 3 seconds after 1 second from the start timing of the big win game in the small win or big win B (timing when the ball passes through the start gate 720a). Here, 100 balls are fired by the launcher at the same interval per minute, so one shot is fired at an interval of 0.6 seconds. Therefore, when the balls are continuously shot to the right area, after passing through the start gate 720a, the game balls are discharged from the left flow path 720d after about 0.6 seconds (distribution device The flow paths are formed so that the time for the balls to flow down the left flow path 720d and the right flow path 720e of 720 is the same).

Since the flow time from the lower end of the left flow path 720d to the V ball entrance 600a is about 0.1 second, the ball will flow down before the V winning door 600 opens. , the ball discharged from the left flow path 720d (1.2 seconds after being discharged from the left flow path 720d first) can win the V ball entrance 600a because the V winning door 600 is open. Become. Also, next, even the ball discharged from the left flow path 720d can win the V ball entrance 600a.

In this way, after passing the ball through the start gate 720a, the ball is stopped firing, the small winning type is confirmed by the first symbol display device 37, and the small winning type with a small number of times of time saving is selected. Even if an attempt is made to avoid entering the V winning hole 624, the number of balls that can be won is limited to two even if they are continuously shot, and even if they are shot after confirmation, they cannot be made to enter the V winning hole 600a. It is difficult.

In this embodiment, a game ball that has passed through the left flow path 720d is configured to be able to enter the V ball entrance 600a. Alternatively, it may be configured such that game balls that do not enter the sorting device 720 among the game balls flowing down the right channel can enter.

In addition, although the distribution device 720 in this embodiment is configured to alternately distribute incoming game balls, the distribution rotation member 720b may be constituted by a windmill or the like so as to randomly distribute left and right balls. .

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the A4th embodiment>
The A4 embodiment differs from the A1 embodiment in that the contents of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 are changed. Since other points are the same as the first control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 307(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the A4 embodiment. The RAM 203 of the MPU 221 of the audio ramp control device 113 in this A4 control differs from the A1 embodiment in that a condition device flag 203ac is added. Since other configurations are the same as those of the A1 embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device flag ac is a flag indicating that the start gate 720a has been passed. This is a flag for determining whether or not after passing through the start gate 720a by referring to when the power is restored in the event of a power failure or the like. It is set to OFF based on the end of the jackpot game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 304 to 306 and 308 to 309, description will be given of the mode of presentation displayed by the third symbol display device 81 when it is determined as a small win or a big win B in this embodiment.

FIG. 308(a) is a timing chart showing the content controlled by the main controller 110 when passing through the V winning opening 624 in the small winning game and the display mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81. is.

When the success/failure determination is executed from the state where the special symbols are stopped and displayed and a small hit is determined, the variable display of the third symbol (special symbol) is started by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. be done. At the start of the variation, the text "roulette chance start" is displayed as shown in FIG. 304(a). After 3 seconds, as shown in FIG. 304(b), the third pattern is reduced and displayed in the upper right, and the roulette display is started. An arrow pattern is displayed on the left side of the roulette display, and the roulette pattern stopped at the arrow position indicates the result of winning/failure determination (big win, miss, small win) and a "V" symbol indicating that the player has won a prize in the V winning slot 624. In the V winning slot 624, a "BIG" symbol indicating that a jackpot game has started, and a "skull" symbol indicating a failure are arranged. After that, during the fluctuation time of the special symbol, the roulette display is displayed at high speed as shown in FIG. 305(a). After that, as shown in FIG. 305(b), when the variation period has passed and the variation of the third symbol has stopped, the roulette display is scrolled (rotated display) in slow motion, and a right-handed informing symbol is displayed on the upper left. displayed to inform the player that it is time to hit right.

Next, as shown in FIG. 306(a), at the timing when the game ball enters the V winning hole 624, the position of the "V" pattern of the roulette display is stopped and displayed at the position corresponding to the arrow pattern. In addition, when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624, if the winning judgment result is out at the timing when the V valid period has passed, as shown in FIG. It is stopped and displayed at a position where the position matches the arrow pattern. Also, although not shown, if the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 624 and the result of the winning/failure determination is a big hit (jackpot B), the position of the "BIG" symbol stops at the position corresponding to the arrow symbol. It is informed that the game displayed and actually being executed is a jackpot game.

By constructing in this way, whether the result of winning/failure determination is a big win or a small win is constituted by a series of effects until the period in which the ball can be entered into the V winning opening 624 passes, and the period up to the V winning. The interest of the game can be improved by directing using .

Next, with reference to FIGS. 310 and 311, the pachinko machine 10 in the A4th embodiment will be described. In the A1 embodiment, after the special symbol fluctuation period has passed, if the success/failure determination result is a jackpot, the jackpot game is started after 0.1 seconds. It is different in that a jackpot game is started by passing. In addition, the description is abbreviate|omitted about the structure same as 1st Embodiment.

The special symbol variation process 2 (S140) in this embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 310 is a flow chart showing the contents of this special symbol variation process 2 (S140). In the special symbol variation process 2 (S140), the processes from S217 to S220 are deleted from the special symbol variation process (S104: see FIG. 263) in the A1 embodiment, and the condition device determination process (S250) is added. The difference is that Since other processing is the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The condition device determination process (S250) in the A4th embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 311 is a flow chart showing the contents of this condition device determination process (S250). In the condition device determination process (S250), first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the start gate 720a (S251). When it is determined that the game ball has passed through the starting gate 720a (S251: Yes), an opening scenario for the specific winning opening is set based on the jackpot type (S252). The jackpot start flag 203j, the jackpot middle flag 203k, and the condition device flag 203ac are set to ON (S254). The time saving counter 203g is set to 0 (S255), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S251, when it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the start gate 720a (S251: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the jackpot game is started by passing through the start gate 720a, the jackpot game can be started by the intention of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, only the start of the big winning game is started by passing the starting gate 720a, but the small winning game may also be started by passing the starting gate 720a. . By configuring in this way, the game ball that has passed through the start gate 720a can easily enter the V ball entrance 600a, and the specific small winning game type is avoided so that the game ball does not enter the game ball. Can be difficult to fire.

Further, in the present embodiment, the starting gate 720a is provided in the left channel 720e, but it is not limited to this, and may be arranged in the right channel 720d. In this configuration, the period from when the game ball passes through the start gate 720a to when the V winning door 600 is opened can be entered from the start gate 720a to the V ball entrance 600a. It may be configured to be a period of By configuring in this way, in the small winning game, it is possible to enter the game ball into the V entrance 600a, it is possible to suppress the game method of avoiding the winning of the game ball in a specific small winning type.

<A5 Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 312 to 314, the present A5 embodiment and its modification will be described. In the A1th embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 in the V winning device 620 is always constant, but in this embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed in the case of the big win B. They are different in that respect.

In FIG. 312(a), the jackpot B in the present A5 embodiment is executed, the game ball enters the V ball entrance 600a, and the game ball is guided to the rotation distribution member 621 by the movable guide member 622. It is the figure which showed the case where it is. At the timing when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the rotation distribution member 621 is configured to stop at the center position (the position that guides the game ball to the V winning opening 624).

Also, FIG. 313 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 3 (S1118) in the present A5 embodiment. The difference is that the processing of S1281 to S1282 is added to the specific jackpot control processing (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the A1 embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the processing of S1203, the processing of S1281 is executed after the operation corresponding to the value of the scenario counter is executed. In the process of S1281, it is determined whether it is time to turn off the V winning opening solenoid (solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600) (S1281). When it is determined that it is time to turn off the V winning solenoid (S1281: Yes), data to stop the V sorting motor at the center position for 3.7 seconds is set in the win scenario a (S1282). After that, the process proceeds to S1204. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the timing to turn off the V winning opening solenoid, the process proceeds to S1204.

In this way, in the present embodiment, when the big win is B, the rotating distribution member is configured to stop at the central position in accordance with the V winning timing, so the game was thought to be a small winning game. It is possible to perform a fresh production for the person. Furthermore, since the jackpot B can always be won to the V winning opening 624, it can be made to think that the 2nd round has started by winning the V winning opening 624.例文帳に追加

Next, a modification of the A5 embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 312(b). In the A5th embodiment, the control of the rotary distribution member 621 is changed in the case of the jackpot B, but this is not limiting. The fixed flow path 660 newly protrudes and the movable guide member 622 releases the retention 2 solenoid in the middle position, the game ball is dropped on the movable guide member 622, and the fixed flow path 660 moves to the V winning opening 624. The difference is that it is configured to guide the sphere. The fixed flow path 660 is configured to be protruded by a motor, and is configured to guide the game ball to the V winning opening 624 with a high probability or 100%.

FIG. 314 is a flow chart showing the contents of the specific jackpot control process 4 (S1118) in the modified example of the A5 embodiment. The difference is that the process of S1283 is added to the specific jackpot control process (S1118: see FIG. 276) in the A1 embodiment. Other processes are the same as those in the A1 embodiment, so description thereof will be omitted.

In the process of S1207, when the winning scenario B is set, that is, when the movable guide member 622 starts to rise, the fixed flow path is operated by the motor for 2 seconds, protrudes forward, and falls from the movable guide member 622. It is changed to a position where it is possible to receive the game ball to be played on the upper surface (S1283). After that, the process of S1209 is executed. Although not shown, the movable guide member 622 is also set so that the residence 2 solenoid is turned off at an intermediate position.

As a result, in the case of a big win B, it is possible to enter the V winning port 624 via a different guideway than in the case of a small win. As a result, the winning control to the V winning opening can be switched between the case of the small win and the case of the big win B, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

The wording "at the start of the jackpot (jackpot game) (execution time)" used when describing each control example and each embodiment described above is that the jackpot lottery with special symbols is won and the jackpot game is started. It is used as a concept that indicates the timing when the is confirmed, and specifically, the combination of special symbols to indicate that the lottery result of the special symbols is a big hit. It is a concept that includes the timing, the timing at which the jackpot opening period is started, the timing at which the jackpot round game is started, and the like.

The phrase "at the end of the jackpot (jackpot game)" used in describing each control example and each embodiment described above is used as a concept indicating the timing at which the jackpot game ends. Specifically, is a concept that includes the timing at which the final round of the big win ends, the timing at which the ending period for the big win ends, the timing at which the first lottery for special symbols is performed after the end of the big win, and the like.

For each term used in such a concept, if a specific timing is not specified in each control example and each embodiment described above, one of the above timings is appropriately adopted. can be

The configuration of the pachinko machine 10 described in each control example and each embodiment described above may be combined as appropriate and implemented. A small winning lottery means for executing the small winning lottery used in the above-described third control example may be provided for the pachinko machine 10 having the small winning lottery.

In addition, the falling lottery means used in the above-described second control example executes a lottery for shifting (falling) the special symbol jackpot probability from a high probability state to a low probability state, but other than that. It may be used to shift (fall) the contents set for the elements of, for example, the probability of winning the normal pattern (second pattern) is shifted (falled) from a high probability state to a low probability state. A lottery for the purpose or a lottery for shifting (falling) the time saving state to the normal state may be executed.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 that can be pressed by the player is used as the operation means that the player can operate. Lever-shaped operation means that can be operated by the player in the forward and backward direction, touch sensor type operation means that detects the player's contact (or proximity), and photographing results of the photographing means that photographs the movement of the player. A camera-type operating means or the like may be provided for determining the . Also, the number of operating means is not limited to one, and a plurality of operating means may be provided.

In each control example described above, a configuration is used in which various effects to be executed are executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, but a plurality of display means of the pachinko machine 10 are provided, Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing at least two or more of the various effects described in the above control examples , the player may select an effect to be actually executed from two or more executable effects.

<Fifth control example>
Next, a fifth control example of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. Note that the same elements as those in each control example and each embodiment described above will be repeatedly described for convenience of description. In the gaming machine of the fifth control example, as in the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 226), as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) in which the player is advantageous, a special symbol lottery wins a jackpot. The opportunity (first opportunity) to execute the jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) by winning, and the special pattern lottery wins the small hit, and the game ball is in a specific area (during the small win game (2nd opportunity ) and two opportunities.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with a jackpot game at various opportunities, so that a game with improved playability can be provided. Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the lottery for the second special symbol (special figure 2) is configured to make it easier to win a small hit than the lottery for the first special symbol (special figure 1). And, during the time saving state which is a game state that can be set after the end of the jackpot game, the lottery of the special figure 2 is easily executed. Thereby, when the time-saving state is set, it is possible to make it easier to execute the big win game than when the normal state is set. That is, the lottery of the special figure 1 is mainly executed in the normal state, whereas the lottery of the special figure 2 is mainly executed in the time saving state, so that the above-mentioned second opportunity can be easily established. . Therefore, since the time saving state can be set as a game state advantageous to the player, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting the time saving state.

In addition, in the fifth control example, in the state where the normal state is set, it is configured to be able to temporarily appear the period during which the lottery of the special figure 2 is likely to be executed. A detailed description will be given later with reference to FIG. 315, but when a specific win (long open win) is won by a normal symbol lottery in a normal state, the electric accessory 640a is held for a long period of time (1.5 seconds). It is configured to set a period in which the ball is likely to enter the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640, which is the trigger for executing the special figure 2 lottery. As a result, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed even for the player who is playing the game in the normal state, so the game can be played without executing the special figure 2 lottery (without shifting to the time saving state). It is possible to suppress getting tired of.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, as the continuation condition (end condition) of the time saving state set after the end of the jackpot game, at least the first condition (for example, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 5 times during the time saving state, or the small winning game end), and the second condition (hard to end) that is easier to continue the time saving state than the first condition times execution, or the end of the small winning game), can be set. Then, when the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the normal state and when the V jackpot game is executed based on the special figure 2 lottery executed in the time saving state, the time is reduced. The setting ratio of the state continuation condition (termination condition) is made different. Specifically, after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, than after the end of the V jackpot game executed based on the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state , It is configured so that the continuation condition (end condition) that makes it easy for the time saving state to continue (it is difficult to end) is likely to be set.

By constructing in this way, the player can be interested not only in the lottery result of the special symbol (special symbol) but also in the game state when the special symbol lottery is executed. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, in the fifth control example, as described above, the game state (normal state) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the time-saving state than the case where the game state (time-saving state) that is advantageous to the player is set. is set, it is easier to set a time-saving state that is easy to continue after the end of the V jackpot game. Therefore, both when the normal state is set and when the time saving state is set, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, in the fifth control example, up to four pieces of winning information of the second special symbol (special figure 2) are configured to be able to be held and stored, and the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state is shown. It is configured to inform the player of the result of prefetching of the winning prize information of the special figure 2 held and stored using the variable performance. In other words, as a result of the variable production performed during the time saving state, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, the special figure 2 lottery executed after the game state transitions from the time saving state to the normal state (to the normal state It is configured to inform the result of the lottery for the prize information of the special figure 2 held and stored at the time of shift). By configuring in this way, when the production result of the variable production is a production result indicating that a win (for example, a small win) has been won, whether the small win of this time has been won in a time-saving state or in a normal state It is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp whether he or she has won the lottery.

In addition, as described above, in the fifth control example, when the small winning is won in the time saving state and when the small winning is won in the normal state, the big winning game (V big winning game ) is set after the end of the time saving state is different, and specifically, if you win a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the normal state, the special figure in the time saving state 2 It is configured to facilitate setting of a continuation condition (termination condition) to facilitate the continuation of the time-saving state (difficult to end) than in the case of winning a small prize in the lottery, and furthermore, after shifting to the normal state. When the look-ahead result corresponding to the special figure 2 lottery to be executed is the determination result that the small hit that the time saving state is likely to continue is won, the variation performance showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 final variation in the time saving state , It is configured to notify the prefetch result (the prefetch result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state).

By configuring in this way, when it is notified that a small win has been won by the variable performance executed during the time saving state, the ratio of the small win that is won is a small win that makes it easy to continue the time saving state. can be enhanced. Here, in recent gaming machines (for example, pachinko machine 10), in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio of setting the game state (for example, time saving state and probability variable state) advantageous to the player after the jackpot game ends By setting the (so-called continuation rate) low (for example, 65% or less), the gambling aspect of the game may be suppressed. In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a win (for example, a big win or a small win) is won in a state in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is set again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to make players feel expectations for the winning notification effect during the advantageous game state.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, in the winning notification production (variation production) executed during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state), the winning (small winning) during the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) In addition to the notification of, in the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 lottery that is executed after the transition from the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) to the disadvantageous gaming state (normal state), if you win a small hit that is likely to continue the time saving state It is configured to notify the user when the determination is made. As a result, it is possible to increase the winning rate of small wins that tend to continue the time-saving state when the winning notification performance is executed during the advantageous game state (time-saving state), and the player's expectation for the winning notification performance during the advantageous game state. can heighten your senses.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), or the special figure 2 variation (residual feature that exists at the time of normal state transition) executed after the end of the time saving state (after normal state transition) It is configured to execute a variation performance that makes it difficult for the player to understand which of the special figures 2 variation corresponding to FIG. Although detailed description will be described later, in the fifth control example, in addition to the lottery result of the variation, by the variation effect executed corresponding to the final variation period of the time saving state, after the end of the time saving state (after normal state transition) It is configured to notify the prefetch result of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists at the time of normal state transition) executed in the normal state, and after the time saving state ends (after the normal state transition) The variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be executed (the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold existing at the time of normal state transition) is set to a short time (for example, 0.5 seconds), and the short time variation ends Until then, it is configured to display the performance result of the variable performance executed corresponding to the final variable period of the time saving state. In this way, the final variation of the time saving state, special figure 2 variation that is executed after the time saving state (after the normal state transition) (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the remaining special figure 2 hold that exists during normal state transition) and By executing a series of productions using the period during which is executed, and displaying the production results of the series of productions across multiple fluctuations, this series of productions corresponds to which special figure fluctuation It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the result of the special drawing lottery is being notified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 315 is a front view of the game board 13 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 315, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is different from the game board 13 (see FIG. 227) of the pachinko machine 10 of the above-described A1 embodiment. A game area (left game area) formed on the left side is also provided with a normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 that triggers a lottery of normal symbols (second symbol), and is formed on the right side of the variable display unit 80. V winning opening 600a, V winning door 600, and V winning opening 600a provided in the game area (right game area), and the flow path for the ball that enters the V winning opening 600a to flow down, and win in special lottery ( The difference is that the variable winning device 65 and the V winning device 650, which are opened when a jackpot or small win is won, are arranged downstream of the right game area. Other configurations are the same, and the same configurations are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, the configuration of the left side game area of the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described, focusing on the differences from the above-described A1 embodiment. As described above, in the fifth control example, the through gate 67 through which the ball can pass is formed in the midstream portion of the left game area (on the left side of the variable display unit 80). As a result, even while the player is playing a game (left-handed game) in which the ball flows down to the left side game area, the lottery for the normal pattern (normal pattern) is executed. Although detailed explanation will be described later, in this control example, while the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, if you win a specific general pattern, It is configured so that a normal game per game that can easily enter the ball into the second winning hole 640 is executed.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery is used without shifting the game state to the time saving state by configuring to be able to provide a period (state) in which the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal state. It is possible to provide a player with a game property, that is, a game property in which a big win game is executed based on winning a small win. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player who has been playing the game in the normal state for a long time from getting bored with the game without experiencing the game property using the special figure 2 lottery.

In addition, as a game in the normal state, a game aiming for a big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special figure 1) executed based on the winning of the ball to the first winning hole 64, and the ball to the through gate 67. A game aiming for a big win in the lottery of the second special symbol (special figure 2) can be executed simultaneously based on the passage of the second special symbol (special figure 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 315, the configuration of the right area of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the fifth control example, as in the above-described A1 embodiment, when the time saving state is set as the gaming state, the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute (the second winning prize that triggers the special figure 2 lottery (because it becomes easier for the ball to enter the opening 640), a game (right-handed game) aiming at the right game area where the second winning opening 640 is arranged is performed.

In this fifth control example, a through gate 67, a second prize winning port 640 (an electric accessory 640a), a variable prize winning device 65, and a V prize winning device 650 are arranged in the right game area, and a lottery of normal symbols (normal patterns) is provided. , a game for drawing a lottery for the second special pattern (special figure 2), and a game during a winning game (big winning game, small winning game) can be executed in a right-handed game. there is This eliminates the need for the player to change the shooting direction of the ball (direction of the left game area, direction of the right game area) during the period in which the game in the time saving state, the small winning game and the big winning game are repeatedly executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress complicated changes in the shooting direction of the ball and allow the player to play the game comfortably. In addition, in the fifth control example, when a game state (time-saving state, small win game state, big win game state) that is more advantageous to the player than when the normal state is set as the game state is set. In addition, since it is configured so as to play a right-handed game, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player is in an advantageous state during the right-handed game.

The V winning device 650 is a winning device that is opened when a small winning game is executed. It has a winning door 650b. This V winning door 650b is configured so that a ball path is formed on its upper surface when it is positioned in the closed state, and when the V winning device 650 is in the closed state, the ball is shot in a right-handed game. The ball is configured to flow down the upper surface of the V winning door 650b toward the variable winning device 65. - 特許庁In addition, inside the V winning opening 650a, there is a specific area (V area) not shown, and a ball that has entered the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game (including the ball handling period after the small winning game ends) passes through a specific area (V area), a jackpot game is executed.

The configuration of the specific area (V area) provided in the V winning device 650 is a well-known general technique in the industry, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted. As in, a plurality of flow paths through which balls can pass may be provided in the V winning device 650, and only the balls that have passed through a specific flow path may pass through a specific area (V area). A distribution member that distributes the flow direction of the balls flowing down in the V winning device 650, for example, a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule from the time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, or a distribution member that is preliminarily driven after the jackpot game is started. A distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule or a distribution member that is always driven according to a predetermined rule after the start of a specific number of round games of a jackpot game is provided, and distributed by the distribution member It may be configured such that a jackpot game is executed when the ball passes through a specific area (V area).

Furthermore, a plurality of types of small winning games are provided to be executed when winning a small winning game. It may be configured to be able to set the small hit type to be executed and the small hit type to execute the small hit game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area). In this case, the opening pattern of the V winning door 650b is changed according to the type of the winning small winning, and when executing a small winning game in which the ball is difficult to pass through the specific area (V area), the V winning opening 650a is executed. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b that makes it difficult for the ball to enter is set, or the ball is distributed to areas other than the specific area (V area) by a distribution member provided in the V winning device 650. The opening pattern of the V winning door 650b may be set so that the ball reaches the sorting member at the right timing. In addition, as the small winning game executed based on the winning of the small winning, the small winning game in which the variable winning device 65 is opened instead of the V winning device 650 can be set, and the small winning game is executed. In some cases, the configuration may be such that the ball cannot physically pass through a specific area (V area) within the V winning device 650 .

The variable prize winning device 65 is a prize winning device that is operated to be opened during a jackpot game, and has a prize winning door 65b that can be changed between an open state in which a ball can easily enter a specific prize winning port 65a and a closed state in which it is difficult for a ball to enter. have. This prize winning door 65b is constructed so that a ball flow path is formed on its upper surface when it is positioned in a closed state. is configured to flow down in the direction of the outlet 66 from the upper surface of the winning door 65b.

<Regarding the Game Features of the Pachinko Machine 10 in the Fifth Control Example>
Next, referring to FIG. 316, the game characteristics of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 316 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game flow of the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 316, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the normal state (special symbol low probability state, normal symbol low probability state) and the time saving state (special symbol low probability state, High probability state of the normal design) is configured to be set.

When a left-handed game is played in the normal state and a jackpot is won (jackpot probability 1/250) in the lottery of the first special pattern (special pattern 1), a time saving state is always set after the jackpot game is finished. Here, the setting contents of the time saving state which is set when winning the special figure 1 jackpot during the normal state will be described. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. Different time-saving termination conditions are stipulated. The time-saving end condition is a condition for ending the time-saving state, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts from the time-saving state to the normal state.

When the special figure 1 jackpot is won in the normal state, as shown in FIG. The jackpot type (jackpot AA) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when it reaches is set at a rate of 1%, and the time-saving end condition is The jackpot type (jackpot AB) that is established is set at a rate of 15%, and the time-saving end condition is satisfied when the second special pattern (special pattern 2) changes once. It is configured to be set at a rate of 84%. In other words, if you win the special figure 1 jackpot during the normal state, the time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends, but depending on the set jackpot type, the ease of continuing the time saving state (time saving end conditions) are different.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the fifth control example, since it is configured so that up to four pieces of winning information of special figure 2 can be reserved and stored, one time saving is set as a time saving end condition Even if it is, while the first special figure 2 variation is being executed (until the first special figure 2 variation stops), the time saving state is set, and the electric accessory 640a is easy to open. Since it is in the state, it is possible to make it easier to hold and store the winning prize information of the special figure 2. Therefore, even if the time saving end condition of one time saving is set, during the period when the special figure 2 fluctuation in the time saving state is executed once, the winning information of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 pending) is retained and stored By playing the game, it is possible to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation up to 4 times after shifting from the time saving state to the normal state. By configuring in this way, when a big win is won, a lot of special figure 2 lotteries can be executed, so that a player can easily experience a big win game via a small win.

On the other hand, when winning a special prize in the special figure 1 lottery during the normal state (small hit probability 1/500), the ball passes through the specific area (V area) during the small hit game. A time saving state is always set after the jackpot game ends. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( Small hit AA) is set at a rate of 10%, and the small hit type (small hit AB) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reaches 5 times is 40%. is set at a ratio of 50%, and the small hit type (small hit AC) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special 2) reaches 1 time is set at a rate of 50% It consists of

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the jackpot is won (when the symbol jackpot is won) and the small hit is won by the special figure 1 lottery executed in the state where the normal state is set, When the ball passes through the specific area during the small winning game and the big winning game is executed (when the V big winning occurs) or when the big winning game is executed at any of the occasions, the big winning game ends. It is configured so that the time saving state is set later, and even if it is a jackpot game executed based on the special drawing 1 lottery, the easiness of continuing the time saving state is varied depending on the execution trigger of the jackpot game. there is As described above, among the execution triggers of the jackpot game, in the case of an execution trigger that is likely to be established (jackpot winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the jackpot game ends is 2.58 times. In the case of an execution opportunity that is difficult to materialize (small hit winning by special figure 1 lottery), the average number of continuations of the time saving state set after the end of the big win game is 12.4 times.

Thus, in the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot game execution opportunities, by associating the ease of establishment of the execution opportunity with the ease of continuation of the advantageous gaming state (time saving state) that can be set after establishment, any Even if a jackpot game is executed at the execution opportunity of , the player can have a sense of expectation.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, it is configured so that the lottery of normal symbols (normal symbols) is executed even during the execution of the left-handed game in the normal state. , It is configured to be elected per normal pattern with a probability of 1/10. Then, it is configured to execute a normal pattern per game (long open per game) in which the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (1.5 seconds) at a rate of 1/100 when winning per normal pattern. there is In other words, a state (long open per game) that can execute the special figure 2 lottery is set with a probability of about 1/1000 of the normal figure lottery that is executed while the normal state is set.

When the ball is entered into the second winning port 640 during the long open winning game, the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed. Here, with reference to FIG. 316, the flow of the game in the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In the fifth control example, the probability of winning the jackpot is set to be the same (1/250) between the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery. And if you win a jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery, the number of times of fluctuation of the first special pattern (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reach 99 times. Any of the jackpot types (jackpots AD to AF) that satisfies the end condition is set (see FIG. 335). That is, in the normal state, among the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery with the same jackpot probability, the execution opportunity of the special figure lottery is difficult to establish (it is difficult to win the ball in the corresponding start winning opening) special figure 2 lottery. is configured to facilitate the setting of a time-saving state in which the time-saving end condition is difficult to be satisfied after the jackpot game ends. By configuring in this way, when winning is won by the normal drawing lottery and the long open winning game is executed (1/1000), the player can be motivated to execute the special drawing 2 lottery. can.

Next, the flow of the game when winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state will be described. In this control example, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery (about 1/7.1) is higher than the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery (1/500). (See Fig. 334). Then, the time saving state is always set after the big winning game executed by passing the ball through the specific area (V area) during the small winning game. Specifically, when the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) reach 99 times, the small hit type ( Small hit AD) is set at a rate of 40%, and the small hit type (small hit AE) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when the number of fluctuations of the second special pattern (special figure 2) reaches 5 times is 60% It is configured to be set at a ratio of In other words, in the normal state, the average number of continuations of the time saving state set via the small hit of the special figure 2 lottery is 42.6 times, and when the jackpot game is executed via the small hit of the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state It becomes easier to set the time saving state in which the time saving end condition is less likely to be established (easier to continue).

In this way, in the game in the normal state, although it is a low probability, it is possible to win the winning by the normal drawing lottery, and when the long opening winning game is executed (1/1000), it is better to win the jackpot in the special drawing. By making it easy to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, the player who is playing in the normal state is allowed to play a game aiming for a big hit or a small hit in the special figure 1 lottery. A game aiming at a big win or a small win in the special figure 2 lottery can be played with the winning of the figure lottery as an opportunity.

Also, as shown in FIG. 315, when a left-handed game is performed to win the ball into the first winning hole 64, the ball launched into the game area (the ball flowing down the left game area) can pass through Since the through gate 67 is arranged in the normal state, the game that performs the special figure 1 lottery and the game that performs the normal figure lottery without changing the shooting direction of the ball for the player who is playing in the normal state. can be performed in parallel.

In addition, in this control example, the more the jackpot game is executed with the opportunity that is difficult to be established, the easier it is to set the time saving state that is advantageous to the player. When a jackpot game is executed, it may be configured to make it easier to set a time-saving state that is advantageous to the player, or a predetermined specific opportunity (for example, a special figure 1 lottery small winning ), it may be configured such that when a jackpot game is executed, a time-saving state advantageous to the player is easily set.

In addition, when the ball does not pass through the specific area (V area) during the above-mentioned small winning game (special figure 1 lottery or small winning game executed when the small winning is won in the special figure 2 lottery) (In the case of non-V winning), the normal state is set after the end of the small winning game (corresponding to the flow indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 315). As a result, it is possible to prevent excessive benefits from being given to a player who plays an illegal game by intentionally not allowing a ball to enter a specific area (V area) while a small winning game is being executed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 316, the flow of the game when the time saving state is set will be described. In this control example, when the time saving state is set, the electric accessory 640a is easily opened, and it becomes easy to win the ball in the second winning hole 640. Therefore, a right-handed game that mainly executes the special figure 2 lottery is executed. be.

This time-saving state continues until a predetermined time-saving end condition is satisfied, and when the time-saving end condition is satisfied, it is configured to shift to a normal state. This time-saving end condition is configured so that different conditions are set according to the jackpot type set for the jackpot won in the special lottery or the small hit type set for the small hit won. there is Specifically, regardless of which hit type (big hit type, small hit type) is set, a common time-saving end condition set as a common condition and a different condition depending on the hit type are set. A time-saving end condition is defined, and common time-saving end conditions include a first end condition that is established when a jackpot is won (at the start of a jackpot game), a second end condition that is established when a small win game ends, and a time-saving end condition. The third end condition that is established when the number of special symbol (special figure) fluctuations executed during the state (accumulation of the number of special figure 1 fluctuations and the number of special figure 2 fluctuations) reaches 99 times is set, The corresponding time-saving end conditions are short end conditions that are established when the number of special figures 2 fluctuations that is executed during the time saving state is 1, and medium end that is established when the number of special figures 2 fluctuations is 5 times. Conditions are set according to the winning type.

As described above, the corresponding time-saving end conditions are set based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations that are mainly varied during the time-saving state, so, for example, when the time-saving state is set. Based on the reserved memory of the special figure 1 variation, even if the special figure 1 variation is executed during the time saving state, the corresponding time saving end condition is not satisfied. Therefore, although the time saving state advantageous to the player is set, it is possible to prevent the time saving state from ending without executing the special figure 2 lottery. In addition, since it is configured so that the corresponding time reduction end condition is established based on the number of special figure 2 fluctuations, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations executed during the time saving state can be easily defined, and the player It is possible to suppress the provision of excessive benefits (special figure 2 lottery) to.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as the time saving end condition, the common time saving end condition and the corresponding time saving end condition are configured to be settable with the above-described contents, but not limited to the setting contents of this control example, For example, in the fifth control example, as the end condition for the small winning game that is set in the common time saving end condition, the end condition is when the number of times the small winning game is executed becomes a specific number (for example, 3 times) It may be constituted so as to be established, the end condition regarding the small winning game is set as the corresponding time shortening end condition, and the number of executions of the small winning game in which the ending condition related to the small winning game is established is changed according to the winning type. may be configured. In addition, in this control example, regardless of the small winning type set at the time of winning the small winning, it is configured so that the second end condition is established when the small winning game is executed, but it is not limited to this. For example, when a small winning game corresponding to a specific small winning type is executed, the second end condition may be established. Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured so that the second end condition is satisfied when the small hit game ends, but not limited to this, the second end condition at the start of the small hit game (when the small hit is elected) may be configured so that

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing at which the time saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small prize during the time saving state, so that the player is given a sense of tension as to how long the time saving state will continue. You can play games.

Returning to FIG. 316, the game flow during the time saving state will be described. If you win a big hit in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, as in the normal state, the number of variations of the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the number of variations of the second special symbol (special figure 2) Any one of the jackpot types (jackpots AD to AF) that satisfies the time-saving end condition when reaches 99 times is set (see FIG. 335). That is, only common time-saving end conditions are set as time-saving end conditions.

On the other hand, if a small win is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, after the jackpot game executed via the small win winning is completed, in addition to the above-mentioned common time saving end condition, according to the small win type A time saving state is set in which the corresponding time saving end condition is set. Specifically, during the time saving state, a special figure 2 lottery is won, and after the jackpot game executed via the small winning is completed, the special figure 2 changes as a corresponding time saving end condition at a rate of 10%. The number of times is set to 5 times, and it is configured so that the response time reduction end condition is not set at a rate of 90% (substantially 99 times is set).

As described above, in the fifth control example, the setting ratio of the end condition of the time saving state (time saving end condition) set after the end of the jackpot game based on the small win of the special figure 2 lottery is changed to the game state at the time of the small win It is different depending on the situation, and if you win a small hit in the special 2 lottery during the normal state, it is more difficult to establish the time saving end condition than if you win a small hit in the special 2 lottery during the time saving state (correspondence The time saving end condition is not set) It is configured so that the time saving state can be easily set.

By configuring in this way, for example, the time saving state, which is an advantageous game state that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery, ends and the small winning is won by the special figure 2 lottery held and stored at the time of shifting to the normal state. By doing so, the time saving state advantageous to the player can be easily set, so that the game can be motivated to acquire many reserved memories of the special figure 2 until just before the time saving state ends.

In addition, although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the time saving end condition is satisfied) By the fluctuation production (final fluctuation production) executed in correspondence with the In addition to the variable lottery result, it is configured to notify the prefetch result of the winning prize information of the special figure 2 that is reserved and stored. By configuring in this way, it is possible to notify the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery with the effect result of the final variation effect at maximum five times. Therefore, it is possible to set the probability that winning (small winning, big winning) will be announced as the production result of the final variable production higher than the variable production that only informs the lottery result of one special 2 lottery. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the presentation with interest.

In addition, since it is configured to notify the lottery results (including prefetch results) of the special 2 lottery in the time saving state and the special 2 lottery in the normal state at once, the final variation effect of this time will win It is possible to make it difficult for a player to understand whether the winning special figure 2 lottery is the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state or the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state when is reported. By configuring in this way, as in this control example, when the time-saving end condition is set at a different rate according to the game state at the time of winning the small hit, the jackpot executed based on the small win this time It is possible to prevent a player from easily grasping what kind of time-saving end conditions a time-saving state is set after the end of a game by a performance mode (performance timing) of a variable performance.

In addition, in this control example, configured to set a short (0.5 seconds) variation time as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation to be executed after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state, the It is configured to display the effect result of the final variable effect described above as the variable effect of short-time fluctuation. As a result, even if it is configured to notify the prefetching result of the winning information of the special figure 2 that is reserved and stored in the final variation performance that is executed in correspondence with the final variation of the time saving state, the target of the prefetching result It is possible to continue to display the final variation effect until the special figure 2 variation ends. Then, when the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation in the normal state) corresponding to the special figure 2 remaining hold after the end of the time saving state ends (when the special figure 2 retention memory number becomes 0), the special figure 1 lottery A left-handed game aiming at execution is performed.

As described above, in the fifth control example, even if the normal state is set, the predetermined condition is satisfied (by winning the long open per normal drawing lottery), The special figure 2 lottery is configured to be able to be executed, and the special figure 2 lottery is configured to have a higher probability of winning a small prize than the special figure 1 lottery. Thereby, in the normal state, the player can play the game of executing the normal drawing lottery in parallel with the game of executing the special drawing 1 lottery by aiming at the first winning hole 64, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced. can be improved.

<Regarding the flow of production in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 317 to 331, the characteristic performance contents executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when the normal state is set, a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. During the execution of the special figure 1 fluctuation, if you win a long open per normal figure lottery, the general figure fluctuation production is displayed so as to interrupt the fluctuation production of the special figure 1 fluctuation. It is

Here, the normal pattern fluctuation effect is, after the normal pattern per game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period from the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation, the ball is won in the second winning port 640, and the winning ball is corresponded. It is executed as a part of a series performance using a period until a small win is won by special figure 2 fluctuation and a big win game is executed based on the small win.

Here, in recent years, during the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time (for example, 1.5 seconds). There is one that sets the lottery contents of the normal figure lottery so that it can be won, and tries to execute a temporarily advantageous special figure lottery (for example, special figure 2 lottery) in the normal state. In such a gaming machine, it is possible to execute an advantageous special figure lottery for a player who has been playing a game for a long time in a normal state, thereby improving the interest of the game. In addition, in such a gaming machine, a normal pattern fluctuation effect for indicating the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, and the result of the normal pattern lottery is executed before the winning game per long opening is executed for the player. A production that can provide the pleasure of predicting is executed using a part of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 (a display area smaller than the display area where the fluctuation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation is executed). There is also

However, in recent gaming machines that execute only normal figure fluctuation effects that can inform the player that the winning game will be executed per long opening, the fluctuation production of the special figure 2 lottery acquired by the winning game and the above-mentioned The special figure 2 lottery was executed by executing the privilege given to the player by the winning game per long opening, that is, the winning game per long opening. There is a problem that it is not possible to notify the fact in an easy-to-understand manner, and it is impossible to enhance the performance effect of the normal pattern variation performance.

On the other hand, in the fifth control example, from the start timing of the normal pattern fluctuation, after the normal pattern per game (opening of the electric accessory 640a) period, the ball is won in the second winning port 640, and the winning ball A series of performances is executed using a period until a small winning is won by the corresponding special figure 2 fluctuation and a big winning game is executed based on the small winning. Thus, by executing a series of performances, it is possible to inform the player of the flow of the game up to execution of the jackpot game in an easy-to-understand manner based on the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery, thereby enhancing the performance effect. can.

Here, in the case of executing the above-described series of effects, during the winning game per normal long open, that is, when the electric accessory 640a is opened for a long time, the ball is won in the second winning port 640 In addition, the timing at which the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning prize is started is greatly different depending on the fluctuation situation of the special figure 1 fluctuation occurs. Specifically, for example, when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640, the special figure 1 variation is being executed, and if the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation is 120 seconds , The period (waiting period) from when the ball is won to the second winning hole 640 until the special figure 2 fluctuation is started is 120 seconds. If the series of effects is continuously executed in such a situation, the effect mode of the series of effects is delayed, and the player becomes bored with the effects.

To address such a problem, in the fifth control example, when the above-described waiting period is 60 seconds or more, after the series of effects are simulated to end, the series of effects are simulated again. It is configured so that the mode is set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the production mode of the series of productions is delayed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317, the flow of the variation effect|presentation regarding special figure fluctuation|variation performed during a normal state, and the variation effect|presentation regarding normal figure fluctuation|variation is demonstrated. Figure 317 (a), the waiting period from the second winning opening 640 to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation is less than a predetermined period (less than 60 seconds) flow of production executed when 317(b) is a predetermined period or more (60 seconds or more) of the waiting period from the ball winning the second winning hole 640 to the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation. It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation performed in a case.

As shown in Figure 317 (a), the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 until the variation (long open variation) corresponding to the normal figure long open per normal figure variation is executed Variation performance (special 1 performance) corresponding to special figure 1 variation is executed using the entire surface of. Here, with reference to FIG. 319 (a), the display screen of the variation production corresponding to the special figure 1 variation will be described. FIG. 319(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of variation production (special figure 1 variation production) corresponding to special figure 1 variation. As shown in FIG. 319(a), the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is divided vertically into a main display area Dm and a sub-display area Ds. Small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are formed (on the upper right side when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). These small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 are areas where identification information (fourth pattern) for indicating the lottery status of special symbols (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) is displayed. Then, the fourth symbol (special figure 1 fourth symbol) for indicating the lottery status of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in the small display area Dm1, and the lottery situation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The fourth pattern (special figure 2 fourth pattern) for indicating is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm2.

By providing the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 in this way, it is possible to display the lottery status of the special symbols. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode using numbers, and the fourth symbol is variably displayed in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. 319). (a) is displayed with a downward arrow) to show the situation in which the special pattern is fluctuating, and by stopping and displaying the fourth pattern in the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2 (see FIG. ), it is configured to show the lottery result of the special pattern, but it is not limited to this, for example, using a display mode imitating a figure as the fourth pattern or a display mode showing a plurality of colors, a figure can be displayed. It is configured to indicate the result of lottery of the special symbols by indicating that the special symbols are changing according to the display mode to be deformed or the display mode to change the color, and by stopping and displaying the display mode showing the specific pattern or color. You can

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the fourth symbol is used to indicate the special symbol lottery situation (whether or not the lottery is in progress (during fluctuation), and the lottery result), but this is not the only option. Instead, it may be configured to notify only whether or not the special symbol is in the process of lottery (during fluctuation). Further, as shown in FIG. 319(a), in this control example, the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) in which the fourth symbol for indicating the special symbol lottery status is displayed is displayed as the main display. Although an example is shown in which the fourth pattern display area is formed on the upper right side of the area Dm, the position and size of the fourth pattern display area may be changed according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed in the central portion of the main display area Dm. can be different.

Specifically, in the variable performance executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, it is known whether the variable performance being executed corresponds to the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation. When the effect mode for making it difficult is set, it is preferable to change the fourth symbol display area (small display areas Dm1, Dm2) so that the player cannot easily see it. Further, for example, by switching the position of the display area of the fourth symbol corresponding to each special symbol, or displaying only one display area, the player can see the display mode of the fourth symbol display area. It may be configured so that the type of the special symbol being executed cannot be easily discriminated only by it. By configuring in this way, the type of the special symbol currently being executed is grasped by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area, and the effect of the variable presentation performed in the main display area Dm is lowered. The occurrence of such a situation can be suppressed.

It should be noted that, as described above, although it is notified that the special figure is fluctuating by the display mode of the fourth symbol display area corresponding to the period during which the special symbol (special figure) is fluctuating, the fluctuating special figure When it is configured to be variably displayed in a display mode in which the type is difficult to distinguish, the result of the corresponding special figure variation (lottery) and the special figure type can be notified by the stop display mode after the end of the variation display. For example, when a red stop display mode is displayed as the display mode (stop display mode) of the fourth symbol that is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol corresponding to Special Figure 1 (Special 1 4th In the symbol), when the blue stop display mode is displayed, it may be configured to notify that it is the fourth symbol (special 2 fourth symbol) corresponding to the special figure 2.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to prevent the fourth symbol display area from restricting the area in which the variable effect is executed and lowering the effect of the effect. In this case, the fourth pattern display area is deleted from the main display area Dm of the third pattern display device 81, and the variable display of the fourth pattern is performed using light emitting means (such as LEDs) provided in the variable display device unit 80. should be configured to run

Furthermore, a small display area Dm1a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm1, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 1 is displayed. In addition, a small display area Dm2a is formed in the vicinity (left side) of the small display area Dm2, and a display mode indicating the number of reserved balls of special figure 2 is displayed. In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 319 (a) described later, the number of reserved balls of each special figure in the reserved number display area (small display area Dm1a, Dm1b) in a display mode using numbers Although it is configured to display, it is not limited to this, and may be configured to display a display mode using colors or symbols that allow identification of the number of retained balls in the acquisition diagram.

A small display area Dm4 is formed in the upper left of the main display area Dm when viewed from the front (in the upper left direction from the center of the main display area Dm). In this small display area Dm4, a guidance display mode for guiding the player in the direction in which the ball is to be shot (game direction) is displayed (see FIG. 320(b)).

In the fifth control example, the small display area Dm4 is used as the guide display area. With this configuration, the player can easily grasp which area of the game board 13 the ball should be shot to by merely visually recognizing the guidance display mode displayed in the guidance display area Dm4. Therefore, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that is easy for the player to understand.

In this guidance display area (small display area Dm4), a display mode of "right-handed" for guiding the player to play a right-handed game, and a display mode of "right-handed" to guide the player to play a left-handed game. and a display mode of ``left-handed'' for guiding the player. It is displayed during the time-saving state, during the jackpot game, and during the small win game, and the display mode of ``left-handed'' is configured to be displayed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) after the right-handed game is finished. ing. Also, when it is detected that a right-handed game is being executed during a game state in which a left-handed game is advantageous to the player, that is, in a normal state, "left-handed" is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds). It is configured so that the display mode is displayed.

Returning to FIG. 319(a), the description is continued. Although detailed description is omitted, the above-described small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a are the result of pre-discrimination of the stored winning information (read-ahead result ) is displayed in a display mode that allows suggestive notification to the player. By constructing in this way, the player can play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the special symbols reserved and stored).

A small display area Dm3 is formed below the small display areas Dm1 and Dm2. This small display area Dm3 is an area where identification information for indicating the lottery status (whether or not the lottery is in progress (fluctuating) and the lottery result) of the normal pattern (normal pattern) is displayed. The fourth pattern (the fourth pattern of the general pattern) for indicating the lottery situation of the pattern (the general pattern) is configured to be displayed in the small display area Dm3.

In addition, a small display area Dm3a is formed in the vicinity of the small display area Dm3, and the number of reserved balls of normal symbols is displayed. The small display area Dm3a mentioned above can suggest and inform the player of the result (prefetch result) of preliminarily discriminating the prize information retained and stored in addition to the value for indicating the number of retained balls of the corresponding normal symbol. It is configured to display such a display mode. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to play the game while having expectations for the game to be executed in the future (lottery result of the normal symbols retained and stored).

Furthermore, a sub-display area Ds is formed below the main display area Dm. As shown in FIG. 319(b), this sub-display area Ds is configured to display comments on the content of the game being played. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand. In addition, the sub-display area Ds may be used for another purpose, for example, information for indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol shown in the small display areas Dm1a and Dm2a may be displayed in the sub-display area Ds. may be configured.

In this case, for example, it is preferable to display a reserved display mode (for example, a circular reserved symbol display mode) for individually indicating the number of reserved balls of each special symbol in the sub-display area Ds. Then, it is preferable that the player can grasp the current number of reserved balls of the special symbol according to the number of display of the reserved display mode. Further, it is preferable to determine in advance the prize winning information corresponding to each reserved and stored special symbol, and to vary the corresponding pending display mode based on the determination result.

By constructing in this way, the game is played while expecting to win a big prize in the lottery of the special symbols corresponding to the reserved symbols whose display mode is changed among the possible plurality of reserved symbols. can let Furthermore, unlike the present embodiment, since it is configured to display reserved symbols corresponding to individual reserved memory numbers, a display mode for showing a game result that can be advantageous to the player among a plurality of reserved symbols. It is possible to set the result display to easily display the variable pending symbol display.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in addition to this, the game result suggesting mode for suggesting the game result (lottery result of each symbol) to the player, and the content of the effect display executed in the main display area Dm. The effect explanation mode for explanation, the frame button related display mode for indicating the timing of operating the frame button 22 and the result of the operation, and the win related information display mode for displaying information about the big win game are displayed in the sub display area Ds. The ratio of the display area between the main display area Dm and the sub-display area Ds is set to differ depending on the content to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds.

In addition, when the combination of the third symbols stopped and displayed is a combination corresponding to a loss and there is a reserved ball, the third symbols are stopped and displayed for one second in a display mode indicating that the lottery result is lost. After that, the fixed display is performed, and then the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started. In addition, when there are a plurality of reserved balls, a lottery is executed based on the reserved ball corresponding to the oldest incoming ball in terms of time.

On the other hand, when the third pattern of the combination corresponding to the missing of the special pattern is stop-displayed for one second in the absence of the reserved ball, the stop-display of the third pattern continues thereafter. This state is maintained until a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses or until the ball wins the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 . Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed since the third symbol was stop-displayed, a demonstration effect indicating that the game is not being executed is displayed. A situation in which there is no winning (a winning ball) in either the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 despite the fact that the player continuously shoots balls for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is It is rare, and in many cases where the state where the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), the game is not played at all by the pachinko machine 10 because the player quits the game. due to that.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has passed after the third symbol is stopped and displayed, it is determined that the player is not playing a game, and the demonstration effect is started. do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily judge whether the game is being played based on the presence or absence of display of the demonstration performance. On the other hand, if a ball enters the first winning hole 64 or the second winning hole 640 before a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses, the variable display of the third symbol corresponding to the newly entered ball is executed. be done.

In FIG. 319(a), for convenience of explanation, the small display area (guidance display area) Dm4 is shown to be displayed in the main display area Dm. The small display area Dm4 itself is not displayed when the guidance display mode is not displayed. In this way, when there is no need to guide the game method (direction), by deleting the display area where the guide display area is displayed, an area for displaying other display modes (for example, variable effect display mode) can be displayed. Since it can be widened, the performance effect can be enhanced.

Returning to FIG. 317(a), the description is continued. While the special figure 1 variation is being performed, the ball passes through the through gate 67, and when the normal figure long open variation is performed, a part of the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 A normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation production for showing normal pattern (normal pattern) fluctuation is executed (see point A in FIG. 317(a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point A in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 319(b).

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation passes a predetermined time, the display area of the special pattern fluctuation effect displayed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 and the normal pattern fluctuation effect The process of switching the size is executed, the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed using the entire surface of the main display area Dm, and the special figure fluctuation effect is executed in a part of the main display area Dm (Fig. 317 (a) point B). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point B in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320(a).

In this control example, the timing of switching the size of the display area between the special figure fluctuation effect and the normal figure fluctuation effect is set to 10 seconds after the start of the normal figure fluctuation effect. Although detailed description will be described later, in this control example, in a part of the case where the result of the normal drawing lottery is out, it is configured to set a fluctuation time of 10 seconds, and the normal drawing for 10 seconds It is configured so that the normal pattern variation effect (see FIG. 319(b)) is executed even when the deviation variation is set.

By configuring in this way, when the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the display area between the special figure fluctuation production and the general figure fluctuation production is not switched, and the general figure An effect is executed in which the variable effect ends. Therefore, after the normal figure fluctuation production is executed, the display area of the special figure fluctuation production and the normal figure fluctuation production is switched and displayed (see FIG. 320 (a)), so that the normal figure fluctuation production being executed is normal. It is possible to increase the expectation that the figure is long open fluctuation.

After that, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation passes, the normal pattern per game (long open game) is executed, and the display screen during the normal pattern per game is displayed (see point C in FIG. 317 (a)) . The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 320(b).

Here, the display contents of the normal pattern variation effect executed based on the normal pattern variation will be described with reference to FIGS. 319(b) to 320(b). FIG. 319(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the normal pattern variation effect is started (see point A in FIG. 317(a)). As shown in FIG. 319(b), when the normal figure variation effect is executed, a small display area Dm5 is formed on the lower right side of the main display area Dm (the lower right direction when viewed from the center of the main display area Dm). , Normal figure fluctuation production is started.

That is, the small display area Dm5 becomes a normal figure fluctuation effect display area in which the normal figure fluctuation effect is executed. Then, as the normal pattern variation effect, the effect that the character 851 finds the treasure box 852 and approaches it is executed. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 319 (b), the special figure 1 variation and the normal figure variation are being executed, so the display mode indicating that the special figure 1 is displayed in the small display area Dm1 319(b), a “downward arrow”) is displayed, and a display mode (in FIG. 319(b), a “downward arrow) is displayed.

Then, in the sub-display area Ds, characters to the effect that the normal map variation effect has been executed and a comment indicating the content of the normal map change effect are displayed: "Treasure box found! Chance to reach!" . As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner how the normal pattern variation effect executed in a part of the main display area Dm should develop in the future.

After that, when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern variation effect, the display screen shown in FIG. 320(a) is displayed. FIG. 320(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect contents displayed immediately after the display area of the normal figure fluctuation effect is switched (see point B in FIG. 317(a)). As shown in FIG. 320 (a), when 10 seconds have passed since the start of the normal pattern fluctuation effect, the normal pattern fluctuation effect is executed using the entire main display area of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the first A variable display effect of the special symbol (special figure 1) is displayed in a small area Dm6 formed in a part (lower left part) of the main display area Dm. Then, in the sub-display area Ds, a comment of "great chance" is displayed, which indicates that the normal pattern fluctuation effect has progressed (indicating that the result of the normal pattern lottery was not a normal pattern deviation fluctuation).

As shown in Figure 319 (b) and Figure 320 (a), fluctuation production (special figure fluctuation production, normal figure fluctuation production) for showing the lottery results of a plurality of pattern lotteries (special figure lottery, general figure lottery) are executed at the same time, the size of the display area in which each variable performance is executed is varied according to the suggestive state of the lottery result of each symbol lottery, thereby providing a plurality of pattern lotteries to the player. To notify that the variable performances for showing the results are simultaneously executed and to easily inform which variable performance should be watched by the size of the display area in which each variable performance is executed. can.

Although illustration is omitted, if the executed normal pattern fluctuation effect is normal pattern deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the small display area Dm5 gradually becomes smaller from the display screen of FIG. 319 (b) and finally An effect in which the small display area Dm5 is not displayed is executed, and the player is informed that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery corresponding to the current normal pattern variation effect is lost. In this way, when the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation, only the general figure fluctuation production using a display area smaller than the special figure fluctuation display production is executed, so the normal figure for the out The figure fluctuation production does not hinder the special figure fluctuation production.

In other words, according to the above-described example, the production result of the normal figure fluctuation production (the result of the general figure lottery that triggered the execution of the general figure fluctuation production) is out (normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds)) is selected. There is a possibility period, that is, the period from the start of the normal figure fluctuation production to 10 seconds, by executing the display mode shown in FIG. The player is notified that the variable effect is being executed at the same time, and when 10 seconds have passed since the normal pattern variable effect was started, the effect result of the normal pattern variable effect (normal pattern that triggered the execution of the normal pattern variable effect) As a result of the figure lottery), there is no possibility that the off (normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds)) is selected, so the possibility that this normal figure lottery is a hit increases, so Figure 320 (a) As shown in , a display mode in which the display area of the normal figure fluctuation production is large (larger than the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed) is executed.

As a result, the lottery result that is advantageous to the player as the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation effect, that is, the electric accessory 640a is likely to be the lottery result in which the winning game is executed for long opening, the normal pattern fluctuation Since the display area in which the effect is executed can be enlarged, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the normal pattern variation effect appropriately. Also, for example, if the normal figure fluctuation production is executed based on the normal figure deviation fluctuation (10 seconds), the normal figure fluctuation executed in the display area (see FIG. 319 (b)) smaller than the special figure fluctuation production Since it ends only with the production, it does not hinder the visibility of the special figure fluctuation production. In addition, regardless of the lottery result of the general figure lottery, the size of the display area at the start of the general figure variation production is unified, so the general figure lottery lottery will be drawn according to the display mode immediately after the general figure variation production is started. It is possible to prevent the player from predicting the result.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as shown in FIGS. 319(b) and 320(a), the display area in which the normal figure variation effect is executed is more than the display area in which the special figure variation effect is performed. A small display area (small display area Dm5 (see FIG. 319(b))) and a display area larger than the display area (small display area Dm6 (see FIG. 320(a)) in which the special figure variation effect is executed (see FIG. 320 (See a)) and two sizes are provided, but not limited to this, three or more sizes of the display area of the normal figure fluctuation effect may be provided, for example, the special figure variation effect A display area of the same size as the display area in which is performed may be used.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as the normal pattern variation effect progresses, the display area in which the normal pattern variation effect is executed gradually increases. After the display area in which the variable effect is executed is reduced from the initial range (see FIG. 319(b)), it may be configured to be variable to the size of the final range (see FIG. 320(a)). . By constructing in this way, it is possible to continue the normal pattern fluctuation performance while making the player think that the normal pattern fluctuation performance will end, so that it is possible to provide an unexpected performance. can.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, when the special figure variation effect and the normal figure variation effect are executed at the same time, by varying the size of the display area in which each variation effect is executed, the player can watch. However, without being limited to this, for example, the aspect of the display area in which each variable effect is executed (for example, the color of the outline of the display area, the color of the background of the display area, etc. variable mode), output mode of sound corresponding to each variable effect (for example, output only the sound corresponding to one variable effect, or change the output level (volume) of the sound corresponding to each variable effect By setting the output mode), the player may be made to pay attention to one of the plurality of variable effects.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation effect is executed is varied according to the progress status (elapsed time) of the normal pattern fluctuation effect. Without limitation, for example, the range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation effect is executed is variable based on the operation content of the operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate, and the normal pattern fluctuation Based on the development status (elapsed time) of the production and the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery (result of judgment), it may be configured to set the variable range of the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed. .

By configuring in this way, for the player who wants to quickly grasp the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery during the normal pattern fluctuation performance, the normal pattern lottery is based on the range of the display area that can be changed based on the operation of the operating means. For players who want to quickly grasp the lottery results of the normal pattern fluctuation production and want to grasp the normal pattern lottery result with the production result of the normal pattern fluctuation production, the display area where the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed by not operating the operation means It is possible to execute the normal figure fluctuation effect without changing the range of.

Then, when the fluctuation time of the normal pattern long open fluctuation has passed and it is displayed that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is long open per, then long open per is executed, shown in Figure 320 (b) A display screen appears. FIG. 320(b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents displayed when a normal figure long open win is won and a long open win game is being executed.

As shown in FIG. 320(b), when winning the normal long open win, the character 851 opens the treasure box 852 in the main display area Dm, and from inside the treasure box 852, to show that the normal open long open win has been won. , the effect that the capsule 853 appears is executed. Then, in the small display area Dm3, a display mode (in the figure, "three circles") is displayed to indicate that the result of the normal drawing lottery is a long open hit, and in the small display area Dm4 , "Right-handed" is displayed in order to perform a game (right-handed game) to win a ball in the second winning port 640, and the small display area Dm5 visually indicates the position where the ball is won by the right-handed game. As a guide display mode for notification, a guide map schematically showing a part of the right game area of the game board 13 (in the vicinity of the second winning opening 640) is displayed.

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 320 (b), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed even while the normal figure long open per game is being executed, the special figure 1 is being varied in the small display area Dm1 The special figure 1 fourth pattern is displayed in a display mode indicating that the special figure fluctuation effect is reduced in the small display area Dm6 formed on the lower left side of the main display area Dm (display of FIG. 320 (a) displayed smaller than the screen). In this way, even without changing the size of the display area where the normal figure fluctuation production is executed, by reducing the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed, the display area where the special figure fluctuation production is executed Since the display area in which the normal pattern fluctuation performance is executed can be relatively enlarged, the performance contents of the normal pattern fluctuation performance can be made more conspicuous to the player.

Then, a comment "Challenge GET" is displayed in the secondary display area Ds to inform the player that the normal pattern variation effect will progress further. Here, in the fifth control example, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the general figure lottery is a hit, the variation time (60 seconds) set at the time of winning the general figure long open is the same variation time as the general figure lottery It is configured to set short-circuit open variation (60 seconds). When the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed corresponding to this normal pattern short open fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation production progresses until the display mode similar to the display screen shown in FIG. 320 (b) is displayed, and the treasure box An effect of displaying a loss mode for indicating that the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is out of 852 is executed.

In other words, when winning is won in the normal drawing lottery and the short opening operation is executed as a winning game, the electric accessory 640a is opened to such an extent that the ball cannot enter the second winning port 640. ing. In this case, even if a right-handed game is executed, the ball cannot (is difficult) enter the second winning hole 640, so the comment "Right-handed" is not displayed in the small display area Dm4. .

In addition, in this control example, as a winning game (a game that opens the electric accessory 640a) that is executed when winning is won in the normal drawing lottery, a long opening winning game that can win a ball in the second winning port 640 and a short-open winning game in which it is difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640, but not limited to this, three or more types of winning games can be executed. For example, as a long open winning game in which a ball can be won in the second winning hole 640, a winning game with different opening timings and opening times of the electric accessory 640a can be executed. good.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the opening timing of the electric accessory 640a during the normal long open game, so that the ball is fired only at a predetermined timing during the winning game. It is possible to suppress the game of winning the ball in the second winning hole 640 from being performed. Also, in order to achieve the same effect, for example, the execution timing of the normal pattern fluctuation effect (the timing of displaying the display mode for notifying that the normal pattern per game is started) may be configured to be different. . As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp the winning ball launch timing of the second winning opening 640 based on the presentation mode displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Returning to FIG. 317(a), the flow of production will be described. When the right-handed game is performed while the normal game is being executed, and the ball wins the second winning opening 640 (see point C in FIG. 317 (a)), the display mode indicating that is the third It is displayed on the display screen of the pattern display device 81 . The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of point C in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321(a).

Here, in the fifth control example, the special figure 1 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 variation for indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery are simultaneously (in parallel ) can not be executed, it is configured to preferentially execute the special figure 2 variation with respect to the special figure 1 variation.

Therefore, when the ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during the normal game, when the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the winning information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored, and the special figure 1 being executed Period until the end of the variation (waiting period), the execution of the special figure 2 variation is on standby. After that, when the special figure 1 variation being executed is completed, the special figure 2 variation based on the pending and stored winning information is preferentially executed, and the special figure 2 that develops the production mode of the normal figure variation production described above. A variable effect is executed (see point D in FIG. 317(a)). The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point D in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 321(b).

After that, when the special figure 2 fluctuation ends and the special figure 2 is stopped in the display mode showing the small winning election (see point E in FIG. 317 (a)), the special figure 2 for showing the small winning winning Variation production is executed. The display contents displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at the timing of the point E in FIG. 317(a) will be described later with reference to FIG. 322(a). Then, while the small winning game is being executed, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) provided in the V winning device 650 (see point F in FIG. 317 (a)), a small After the winning game ends, a display mode indicating that the big winning game will be executed is displayed (see FIG. 322(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 321 (a) to FIG. 322 (b), the normal pattern long open winning game is executed during the normal state, and the third symbol is executed before the big winning game is executed based on the winning game. The content of the effect executed on the display screen of the display device 81 will be described.

In the fifth control example, a series of games (normal pattern fluctuation, normal pattern per, special pattern 2 fluctuation, special pattern 2 small per , a game executed in the flow of a big win), a series of effects with a story is executed. Specifically, the effect content of the general pattern variation effect described with reference to FIG. 319 (b) to FIG. It is possible to suggest

By constructing in this way, as the execution opportunity of the jackpot game, the presence or absence of establishment of the execution opportunity more complicated than the execution opportunity established when the jackpot is won in the lottery of special symbols (special symbols) is determined using a series of performances. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an easy-to-understand game.

Fig. 321(a) shows the state shown in Fig. 320(b), that is, in the state in which the long open winning game executed during the special figure 1 variation is executed, the ball wins the second winning port 640 FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen for indicating that; As shown in FIG. 321(a), when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open game, the capsule 853 is broken, and the capsule 853 suggests the contents of the game to be executed in the future. A ticket 854 stating "challenge game" as a mode is displayed. Then, in the secondary display area Ds, a comment "Challenge game GET" is displayed to notify that the challenge game will be executed in the future.

Here, according to the example shown in FIG. 321 (a), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation is immediately executed based on the ball winning the second winning opening 640 Without being done, the prize information of special figure 2 will be retained and stored. Therefore, "1" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a to indicate that one piece of winning information of the special figure 2 has been acquired. Then, when the special figure 1 variation that has been executed in the state of FIG. (See FIG. 321(b)).

FIG. 321(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a display screen during the challenge game. As shown in FIG. 321(b), when the special figure 2 variation is executed during execution of a series of effects, a challenge game is started. This challenge game is an effect executed in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and as shown in FIG. .

In the fifth control example, the result display mode is a result display mode 861a with a "cross mark" to indicate that the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is "missing" and a "small win". The result display mode 861d with "V" to indicate that it is, the result display mode 861c with "777" to indicate that it is a "jackpot", and the lottery result of the special figure 2 are not notified. and a result display mode 861e with "NEXT" indicating that the challenge game will be executed again.

Here, as the effect result of the challenge game, the result display mode 861b with "?" , and an effect is executed in which the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is not notified in the challenge game. It should be noted that even when this result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, "Right shot" is displayed in the small area Dm4.

By configuring in this way, when the result display mode 861b is stop-displayed in the result display area 860 as the effect result of the challenge game, the right-handed game is played without grasping the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery. Therefore, whether the ball shot in the right-handed game wins the V winning device 650 that is opened during the small winning game, or wins the variable winning device 65 that is opened during the big winning game, Does it win the second winning port 640 that is opened during the normal game, or does not win the special prize (big hit, small hit) and the normal prize, and does not win any prizes Since it is possible to determine whether the ball is actually flowing down while watching the actual flow-down behavior of the ball, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, the player cannot grasp the effect result of the challenge game. , For example, after the result display mode 861b is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, by varying the display mode of the result display mode 861b, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery this time is notified as the effect result of the challenge game. You may make it possible.

By configuring in this way, during the execution of the challenge game, it is possible to inform the game that the result display mode 861b corresponds to which special figure 2 lottery lottery result, and the challenge game is completed. Then, the effect result of the current challenge game, that is, the lottery result of the special figure 2 can be notified to the player.

A result display mode 861e (“NEXT display”) shown in FIG. 321(b) is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860 when the challenge game is executed again. In the fifth control example, when a plurality of winning information of special figure 2 is acquired during the long open winning game, the lottery of special figure 2 continues until a big hit or a small hit is won in the lottery of special figure 2. is executed. In this case, for example, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is out, the second special figure 2 lottery will be executed continuously, so the challenge executed in response to the first special figure 2 fluctuation A result display mode 861e is stop-displayed in the result display area 860 as a result of the game effect, and the second special figure 2 variation is started. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the first special figure 2 lottery is a hit (big hit, small hit), one of the result display modes 861b to 861d for showing the lottery result is stop-displayed in the result display area 860. be.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide the player with an effect (challenge game) corresponding to the number of winning information of the special figure 2 acquired during the game per long opening without discomfort. In addition, although detailed description is omitted, as the variable time set in the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state, the variable time corresponding to one challenge game (10 seconds) and the variable time corresponding to two times (20 seconds ) can be set, and when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is out, the fluctuation time of 20 seconds is configured to be less likely to be selected than the fluctuation time of 10 seconds.

As a result, when the challenge game is executed twice in the variation performance of one special figure 2 variation, it is possible to set a high possibility of winning the special figure 2 lottery (big win, small win). . In addition, when the result display mode 861e to which "NEXT" is attached by the challenge game is stopped and displayed in the result display area 860, and the challenge game is executed again, the second challenge game is one special figure 2 It is possible to make it difficult to understand whether it was executed within the fluctuation time or whether it was executed across two special figure 2 fluctuations.

The state shown in FIG. 321 is a state in which the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so the small display area Dm1 does not include the special figure 1 variation that was changing at the time shown in FIG. 321 (a). is displayed stopped in the display mode "451" shown, and in the small display area Dm2, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in a display mode (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure) indicating that the special figure 2 fluctuation is being executed. is displayed. In addition, since the special figure 2 variation was executed using the special figure 2 winning information that was held and stored at the time shown in FIG. 321 (a), "0" is displayed in the small display area Dm2 is displayed.

Then, as a series of productions, the special figure 2 fluctuation production is executed using the display area where the normal figure fluctuation production was executed, so the special figure fluctuation production (special figure 1 fluctuation production) is executed in Figure 321 (a) The small display area Dm6 that has been displayed is erased from the main display area Dm. In addition, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "Right-handed" are continuously displayed to prompt the player to play the right-handed game. A comment "What will come out?" is displayed.

Incidentally, according to the schematic diagram shown in FIG. 321(b), the small display areas Dm1 to Dm3 and Dm1a to Dm3a are displayed in a visible size in order to explain the current game situation. Actually, it is displayed in a display mode that is difficult for the player to visually recognize. This makes it possible to further enhance the effect of the effect mode (challenge game) being executed in the continuous main display area Dm.

In addition, the state shown in FIG. 321 (b) is, as described above, the normal figure long open per game is finished, and the special figure 2 variation is being executed, so at that timing it is provided in the right game area It is in a state in which it is not easy for the ball to win any of the winning openings (the second winning opening 640, the specific winning opening 65a, and the V winning opening 650a). However, until just before the state shown in FIG. or when winning a jackpot, the ball is likely to enter the V winning opening 650a or the specific winning opening 65a.

In this way, the right-handed game is continuously performed even if the right-handed game that causes the ball to flow down to the right game area momentarily does not become an advantageous game method for the player. By displaying the characters "Right-handed" in the small display area Dm4, the player's annoyance of frequently switching between the right-handed game and the left-handed game is eliminated, and the switching operation of the game method is delayed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which a right-handed game cannot be performed in a state where a small winning game is executed and a ball cannot be entered into the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game.

In this control example, for the reason described above, when the right-handed game can be executed with a predetermined interval (the period during which the special figure 2 variation is executed), the small display area Dm4 is continued during the predetermined interval. However, it is not limited to this, and the characters "Right-handed" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 only when the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player. It may be configured to display, and the state in which the right-handed game is actually advantageous to the player (normal figure long open per period, small per game period) and the period between the states (special figure 2 fluctuation It is also possible to display the characters "right-handed" in the small display area Dm4 in different display modes depending on the time period).

By configuring in this way, a player who is not accustomed to the game is made to continuously play the right-handed game, and a game situation disadvantageous to the player It is possible to make it difficult for a skilled player to select a game method according to the display mode of "right-handed" displayed in the small display area Dm4. Therefore, the game can be played according to the skill of the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

322 ( a) will be referred to. FIG. 322(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen that is displayed when a small win is reported in the challenge game.

As shown in FIG. 322 (a), when the special figure 2 fluctuation is stopped and displayed in the display mode indicating the small hit, the special figure 2 fourth symbol is displayed in the display mode "341" indicating the small hit winning in the small display area Dm2. is displayed, and the result display mode 861 d is stopped in the result display area 860 . In the secondary display area Ds, a comment "Get a small win!!" indicating that the small win has been won is displayed, and in the small display area Dm7 of the main display area Dm, the player aims during the small win game. As a guide display mode for visually guiding the V winning device 650, a schematic diagram in which the vicinity of the V winning device 650 is displayed in an enlarged manner is displayed.

Then, when the ball passes through a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, to inform that the right to execute the big winning game has been acquired after the small winning game is finished. The display screen shown in FIG. 322(b) is displayed as the display screen of . FIG. 322(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the right of the big winning game is acquired during the small winning game.

As shown in FIG. 322(b), characters "777" indicating that a jackpot game is to be executed are displayed in the main display area Dm, and "Big win!! Congratulations!" congratulating the player in the sub-display area Ds. !” is displayed.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the normal pattern (normal pattern) long open per variation is started in the normal state normal pattern fluctuation effect (see FIG. 319 (b)) , The electric accessory 640a is opened during the normal pattern per game effect (see FIG. 320 (b)) executed during the normal pattern per game, and the second winning port 640 during the normal pattern per game to win the ball, Special figure 2 pending acquisition effect (see FIG. 321 (a)) executed when special figure 2 winning information is acquired, special figure 2 variation effect performed when special figure 2 variation (lottery) is started (See Fig. 321 (b)), Small hit winning effect (See Fig. 322 (a)) indicating that a small hit has been won in the special figure 2 fluctuation (lottery), Acquired the right to play the jackpot game during the small hit game Since the production during the small winning game (see FIG. 322 (b)) executed in the case is configured to be executed as a series of productions with a story, the big win is established when a plurality of conditions are met. In a pachinko machine 10 having a game execution opportunity, it is possible to inform a player of the game property in an easy-to-understand manner.

Returning to FIG. 317, the description continues. As mentioned above, according to the game flow shown in FIG. Depending on the game state when the ball is made to enter the second prize-winning hole 640, it may not be possible to inform the player of the progress of the game in an easy-to-understand manner in the above-described effect mode of the series of effects.

Specifically, at the timing of point C in FIG. 317 (a), since the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the start timing of the special figure 2 variation is a predetermined period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation being performed) The display screen when waiting (see FIG. 321 (a)) is used to produce a series of production modes that are displayed, for example, in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed, during the normal figure per game When the ball is won in the second winning hole 640, the special figure 2 fluctuation will be started immediately. Therefore, when the effect mode of the series of effects described above is used, the display screen of FIG. 320(b) directly shifts to the display screen of FIG. There was a problem that the relevance of the production was weakened.

Therefore, in the fifth control example, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation is being performed at the timing when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which the series of effects are being performed. Based on, it is configured to vary the effect mode after acquiring the winning prize information of the special figure 2. Here, at the timing when winning information of special figure 2 is acquired during the period in which a series of presentations are executed, the contents of presentation when special figure 1 variation is not executed will be described with reference to FIG.

Figure 323 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display screen displayed when the winning information of the special figure 2 is acquired during the special figure 1 non-fluctuation, and FIG. 323 (b) , Fig. 323(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a display screen displayed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning information acquired in Fig. 323(a) is a small hit.

As shown in Figure 323 (a), in a state in which the special figure 1 variation is not executed, when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, the special figure 2 variation is immediately started, so Figure 320 (b) 2, the character 851 uses the hammer 851aa to destroy the capsule 853 appearing from the treasure box 852. As shown in FIG. And, when reaching the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation stops, the display screen shown in FIG. 323(b) is displayed. Figure 323 (b) shows an example of the display screen displayed when the special figure 2 variation executed based on the fact that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 variation is not fluctuating It is a schematic diagram shown typically.

As shown in FIG. 323(b), when the special figure 2 fluctuation stops, the result display mode 855 showing the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation appears from within the capsule 853, and an effect is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 323(b), since the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a small hit, the result display mode 855 with "V" indicating the small hit winning is displayed. In addition, the display mode of the result display mode 855 is configured to be variable according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation, specifically, the effect result of the challenge game shown in FIG. 321 (b) Since it is the same as the display mode shown, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As described above, during a series of effects, if the ball wins in the second prize opening 640 during the special figure 1 fluctuation, the effect that the capsule 853 appears from the treasure box 852 corresponds to the normal figure winning period (first stage production), and the production of acquiring a ticket 854 from the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 reservation acquisition period (the remaining fluctuation period of the special figure 1) (second stage production), and the challenge game production is the special figure 2 fluctuation. While the presentation mode is set so as to correspond to the period (third stage presentation), when the ball wins the second prize opening 640 during the special figure 1 non-variation, the capsule 853 from the treasure box 852 Production mode is set so that the production that appears corresponds to the normal figure per period (first stage production), and the production that destroys the capsule 853 corresponds to the special figure 2 fluctuation period (second stage production). Configure.

In this way, depending on the game situation during a series of performances, different performance modes can be set depending on whether the standby period for the special figure 2 fluctuation occurs or not, thereby giving the player a sense of discomfort. An easy-to-understand series of performances can be executed without any trouble.

Returning to FIG. 317, the explanation of the flow of the effect is continued. In the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 319 to 323, the contents of effects that can be displayed when a normal game is executed in the state where the series of effects are being executed have been described. Specifically, the effect contents when the ball normally enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open winning game, and the effect contents when the ball enters the V winning hole 650a during the small winning game explained.

Here, description will be given of the content of the effect that is executed when the normal game is not executed while the series of effects are being executed. First, with reference to FIG. 324, the effect contents when the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open per game will be described. FIG. 324(a) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the second winning hole 640 when one second has passed since the normal long open per game was started. It is a schematic diagram shown, and FIG. 324 (b) is displayed when the normal long open per game ends without the ball entering the second winning opening 640 during the normal long open per game. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of a display screen typically.

As shown in FIG. 324(a), until the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open winning game, the effect that the capsule 853 rolls away from the character 851 is displayed in the main display area Dm. At the same time, the sub-display area Ds displays a comment “Hurry!! In addition, it is possible that the player does not play the right-handed game as a cause of the situation where the ball has not entered the second winning hole 640 even after the predetermined period of time has passed after the normal long open per game. The guidance display mode of "Right shot" displayed in the small display area Dm4 is displayed in a display mode that is emphasized more than usual (in FIG. 324(a), the outline of the small display area Dm4 is displayed with double lines). be done. In addition, the voice output device 226 also outputs a voice for notifying that a right-handed game will be played.

In addition, in the fifth control example, after the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second, the electric accessory 640a is opened again for 0.5 seconds after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, as a normal long open winning game. It is configured so that a winning game (opening action) is executed. Therefore, when 1 second has passed from the start of the game per normal long open, the attention calling screen shown in FIG. It is configured so that the ball can enter the second winning port 640 during the opening period (0.5 seconds). As a result, it is possible to provide an opportunity to win a ball in the second winning hole 640 to a player who has played a right-handed game after visually recognizing the display contents of the attention calling screen.

After that, when the game time (3 seconds) of the normal pattern long open per game has passed without the ball entering the second winning hole 640, as shown in FIG. A production indicating that is executed. As shown in FIG. 324(b), a character 851 who regretted not being able to acquire the capsule 853 is displayed in the main display area Dm, and "End" indicating that the series of effects has ended is displayed in the sub-display area Ds. comment is displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm4, characters of "left shot" for executing the normal game for executing the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state are displayed. By configuring in this way, if a normal game (a game in which the ball is entered in the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open per game) is not executed in the middle of the series of effects, the series of effects will be performed. Since the effect to end is executed, for example, it is possible to suppress the fact that the series of effects progresses to the end while the winning information of the special figure 2 is not obtained, and the player has excessive expectations. .

Next, as the contents of the effect executed when the normal game is not executed in the state where the continuous effect is being executed, the ball does not enter the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, or the specific The content of the effect when the area (V gate (V area)) is not passed will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 325(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed when the ball has not won the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game. FIG. 325(b) schematically shows an example of a display screen displayed when the small winning game ends without the ball entering the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game. It is a diagram.

As shown in FIG. 325(a), if the ball has not won the V winning opening 650a when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game, the small ball formed in a part of the main display area Dm In the display area Dm8, the characters "Last 5 seconds!!" are displayed as remaining period information for indicating the remaining period of the small winning game, and a countdown display is executed in which the value decreases with the passage of time. Then, in the main display area Dm, a situation in which the display mode for showing the game result of the small winning game is wrapped in smoke is displayed. In addition, similarly to the above-described FIG. 324(a), a highlighted display mode emphasizing the guidance of the right-handed game is displayed in the small display area Dm4, and the sub-display area Ds indicates that the small winning game is currently in progress. , a comment of "Hurry up!!" is displayed to indicate that the game is to be played in a hurry.

Then, when the small winning game ends without causing the ball to enter the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, the same screen as in FIG. b) see). In this manner, the data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced by using the same image data when the series of effects ends at each time point of the series of effects. In addition, since it cannot be displayed when the game is played normally, even if the same image data is used, it is difficult for the player to think that the same image data is being used repeatedly. It is.

Returning to FIG. 317, the description continues. Depending on the variation situation of the special figure 1 during the series production, the state in which the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set and the state in which it is not set occur, and the production mode of the series production in each state was described above. A new problem occurred even in the state in which the waiting period of FIG. 2 variation is set.

That is, the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set corresponding to the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed, and the winning timing of the ball to the second winning opening 640 is the special figure It is set irrespective of the fluctuation timing of 1. Furthermore, since the length of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation is various, for example, there is a possibility that the standby period of the special figure 2 variation during the series of productions will exceed 100 seconds. In such a situation, if the display screen showing the standby period of special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 321 (a)) is displayed continuously, the same display mode will continue to be displayed for 100 seconds, There is a problem that the player feels a sense of incongruity, and the series of performances is delayed, resulting in a decrease in the performance effect.

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, the presence or absence of the special figure 1 fluctuation and the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation are determined at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the series of effects. When the remaining variation time of FIG. 1 variation is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (60 seconds), it is configured to execute a special series of effects.

Here, with reference to FIG. 317(b), the flow of the game when executing the special series of effects will be described. In Figure 317 (b), the period from the ball winning the second winning hole 640 during the normal game to the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation (special figure 1 remaining fluctuation period during execution) is 60 seconds It is the timing chart which showed the flow of the production|presentation (special series production|presentation) performed in the above case. Note that detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as those in the flow shown in FIG. 317(a) will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 317 (b), when a series of production (normal figure fluctuation production) is executed based on the normal figure long open fluctuation, special figure 1 as special figure 1 fluctuation (shown as special 1 fluctuation in the figure) Long off variation (special 1 long variation (off)) is being executed, and at the time the ball enters the second winning port 640 during the normal figure long open per game, the remaining period of the special figure 1 variation being executed is determined to be 60 seconds or longer, the series of performances being executed is terminated with a pseudo failure performance (see point G in FIG. 317(b)). After that, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 long deviation fluctuation under execution reaches 10 seconds, a series of pseudo effects are executed, and the challenge game is matched to the start timing of the special figure 2 fluctuation (see FIG. 321 (b)) is set (see point H in FIG. 317(b)).

Here, with reference to FIG. 326, the effect content of the above-described special series effect will be described. FIG. 326(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 at point G in FIG. 317(b). As shown in FIG. 317(b), when it is determined that the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation being executed is 60 seconds or more at the time when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640, in the small display area Dm2a In spite of the state where "1" indicating that one winning prize information of the special figure 2 is reserved and stored is displayed, the end screen indicating that the series of effects has ended is displayed in the main display area Dm. be.

After that, as a series of special performances, once the series of performances is finished, the special figure variation performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation under execution is executed until the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds. Then, when the remaining time of the special figure 1 variation reaches 10 seconds (when the special figure 2 variation is executed after 10 seconds), the display mode shown in FIG. 326(b) is displayed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 318, the content of the effect executed during the time saving state in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example will be described. Fig. 318 (a) schematically shows the flow of production executed when a jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery in the normal state, and the time saving state (once) is set after the jackpot game ends. It is a timing chart, and FIG. 318(b) shows that a small hit is won in the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, and the time saving state (5 times) is set after the jackpot game executed based on the small hit ends. It is the timing chart which showed typically the flow of the production|presentation performed when.

As shown in FIG. 318 (a), when the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game, there is a special figure 1 suspension (hereinafter also referred to as special 1 suspension), and a special figure 2 suspension (hereinafter also referred to as special 2 suspension If there is no special figure 1 lottery, that is, if a jackpot is won by a game (left-handed game) that executes the special figure 1 lottery, the special figure 2 lottery is executed by playing the right-handed game during the time saving state. It is configured so that all the reserved and stored special figure 1 lotteries are executed before.

Specifically, it is executed in a state where the time saving state is set than the normal pattern fluctuation time (normal pattern fluctuation time set during the high probability state of the normal pattern) executed in the state where the time saving state is set It is configured so that the fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1 is shorter. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the progress of the game during the time saving state in the state of having the special figure 1 reservation. Therefore, while various performances are being executed in the time saving state, the special figure 1 variation that makes it more difficult to win a small hit than the special figure 2 variation is performed, and the problem that the performance balance of various performances is lost. can be suppressed.

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in this fifth control example, if the special figure 1 lottery is executed during the time saving state, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery, 0.2 seconds It is configured so that the variable time is set. Then, a jackpot game end screen showing the end of the jackpot game is displayed until a predetermined period (3 seconds) elapses after the jackpot game ends, or until special figure 2 variation is executed. ing.

Therefore, after the end of the jackpot game, the period in which the special figure fluctuation (special figure 1 fluctuation) based on the special figure 1 reservation that was already acquired at the start of the jackpot game is executed (when the number of special figure 1 reservations is 4, about 1 second), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 displays a display mode indicating the end of the jackpot game. By configuring in this way, it is possible to digest the special figure 1 reservation without giving the player a sense of incongruity.

Also, in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation executed immediately after the end of the jackpot game), if the jackpot is won or the small win that can pass through V is won, the jackpot game is played again from the jackpot game end screen. The game information indicating the content of the jackpot game (for example, the number of rounds information indicating the number of rounds executed during one jackpot game, or the number of rounds obtained during one jackpot game) The game information indicating the accumulated value with the game information of the previous jackpot game is set as the winning ball number information indicating the number of balls won, and the display mode corresponding to the set game information is displayed. ing.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make the player think that a plurality of jackpot games are just one jackpot game, so that the second jackpot game (the period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed) A variation display mode (short time (0.2 seconds) variation and variation of the third symbol that makes it difficult for the player to identify the special figure variation (special figure 1 variation) corresponding to the newly executed jackpot game) No display), the player does not feel uncomfortable.

In addition, since the upper limit of the value that can be displayed as the game information of one big win game can be increased, it is possible to make the player have a stronger expectation for winning the big win. Furthermore, the fifth control example is configured so that the right-handed game is appropriate for both the jackpot game and the game during the time saving state, so the jackpot game is finished internally and the time saving state is set. During the special figure 1 fluctuation period (during the special figure 1 fluctuation period in which the jackpot game end screen is displayed), the characters "Right shot" are displayed in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. be. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from determining whether the game is currently in a jackpot game or in a time-saving state, depending on the display mode of the small display area Dm4 on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81.例文帳に追加

Although the details will be described later, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is configured such that the special figure 2 reserve is preferentially digested over the special figure 1 reserve. Therefore, in the state where the time saving state is set, for example, even if the player makes a mistake in the game operation and acquires the special figure 1 reservation with the special figure 2 reservation, the special figure 1 until the special figure 2 reservation is lost Toku-zu variation based on the hold (Toku-zu 1 variation) is not executed. And, as long as the right-handed game is continuously executed during the time saving state, it is configured so that the special figure 2 reservation will not be lost. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress that the special figure 1 variation is unnecessarily executed during the time saving state.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as the corresponding time-saving end condition, which is part of the time-saving end condition for ending the time-saving state, the end condition that is established based on the number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation is set. , Even if the special figure 1 variation is executed a predetermined number of times (maximum 4 times) after the end of the jackpot game, the game situation is updated until the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied based on the number of variations of the special figure 1 variation. there is nothing to do.

In addition, as described above, in the fifth control example, special figure 2 variation is configured to be executed with priority over special figure 1 variation, and special figure 2 variation is executed in a state where the time saving state is set By changing the special figure 1 variation for a short time during the period when it is not done, it is configured so that the special figure 1 suspension is eliminated during the time saving state, but not limited to this, for example, special figure 1 variation is better It may be configured to be executed with priority over the FIG. 2 variation.

As the corresponding time saving end condition after the end of the jackpot game, when "special figure 2 fluctuation 1 time" is set, using the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed during the time saving state, the special figure 2 fluctuation The time-saving final variable performance is executed in a performance mode corresponding to the lottery result and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired during the time-saving state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 327 to 331, the content of the effect executed during the time saving state in the fifth control example will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the first time-saving variation production set in response to the special figure 2 variation other than the special figure final variation of the time-saving state as the production during the time-saving state, and the special It is configured to execute the second time-saving variation production set corresponding to the special figure 2 variation that is the final variation of the figure.

Then, the first time-saving variable performance is a variable performance for showing the lottery result of the variation, and the second time-saving variable performance is the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation. is executed. First, with reference to FIG. 327(a), the display contents of the first time reduction variation effect will be described. FIG. 327(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content in the variable effect during the time saving state. The display content shown in FIG. 327(a) is a display screen when the first special figure 2 variation is executed in the time saving state in which the time saving number of times "5 times" is set.

As shown in FIG. 327(a), in the main display area Dm of the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, the characters "time saving mode" are displayed to indicate that the current time saving state is displayed, and the rabbit is displayed. An effect is executed to get one of lottery result modes 871a to 871c showing the result of the current special figure lottery while the imitated character 851 runs. In the fifth control example, which will be described later with reference to FIG. 340, the character 851 tries to get the lottery result modes 871a to 871c according to the variation time set during the time saving state (excluding the final time saving change). The get performance is configured to be executed a plurality of times during one variation period, and the lottery result of this special figure variation increases as the number of times of the get performance executed during one variation period increases. It is configured to increase the probability that the lottery result will be advantageous to By configuring in this way, the player can be made to pay attention not only to the effect result of each get effect, but also to the number of executions of the get effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the small display area Dm4, the characters "Right shot" for guiding the game method during the time saving state are displayed, and in the right display area Dm20, "Last 4" indicating the period until the time saving state ends times” is displayed. In other words, it is notified that the time saving state ends when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed four times later. In addition, in the fifth control example, a plurality of time-saving end conditions that are established based on the number of special figure fluctuations can be set, but the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 shows, among the plurality of time-saving end conditions , is configured to display the remaining period until the time-saving end condition, which is most likely to be satisfied, is satisfied.

By configuring in this way, all of the time-saving end conditions that exist are displayed, and the period until all the displayed time-saving end conditions are satisfied (remaining period) is displayed. To easily inform a player of an easy time-saving end condition in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, when the ease of establishment of the time-saving end conditions overlaps, all the overlapping time-saving end conditions may be displayed, or only one of the overlapping time-saving end conditions is displayed. It may be configured to

In addition, in this control example, in FIG. 327(a), as the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, the first lottery result mode 871a to which "777" indicating jackpot winning and "V" indicating small win winning are added. A second lottery result mode 871b marked with a character 851 and a third lottery result mode 871c marked with a "cross mark" indicating failure are displayed. An action that acquires the result modes 871a to 871c but cannot be acquired is performed, and an effect of finally acquiring one of the lottery result modes 871a to 871c and notifying the lottery result of the variation is executed. However, without being limited to this, for example, lottery result modes 871a and 871b indicating a lottery result that is advantageous to the player in the get effect are attached with "chance" indicating that the degree of expectation for obtaining is high. Alternatively, the character 851 executes the get effect to acquire the lottery result suggesting mode and the effect number suggesting mode with "next" indicating the remaining number of times the get effect is executed. may be configured.

With this configuration, the character 851 can perform the action of acquiring any display mode a plurality of times during one variable display effect, thereby preventing the player from becoming bored with the effect. be able to. In addition, since it is possible to predict the lottery result of this special figure variation in the middle stage of the special figure variation period, the player can be made to pay attention to the performance and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the display screen shown in FIG. 327 (a), the display mode for showing the remaining number of executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation as the remaining period for which the time saving state is set is displayed in the small display area Dm20. Without limitation, for example, it may display a display mode for showing the remaining time the time saving state is set based on the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation, get production executed during this time saving state A display mode for indicating the remaining number of times may be displayed. Furthermore, the number of remaining executions of the special figure 2 fluctuation at the time the time saving state is set, that is, the time saving end condition set in this time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation number) and the special figure executed during the time saving state 2 It may be configured such that a display mode indicating the number of fluctuations is displayed on the display screen.

Next, with reference to Drawing 327 (b), the contents of a display of the time saving last change production (2nd time saving change production) performed at the final change of the time saving state are explained. FIG. 327(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed in the first half period of the time saving final variable effect. In this fifth control example, as a variable effect for the final time-saving change, the reserved ball acquisition effect for letting the player acquire the special figure 2 reserved ball, the lottery result of the variation, the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation, A second time-saving variation effect for informing the player of the , 25 seconds) to execute the second time-saving variation production.

When the reserved ball acquisition effect is executed in the first half period of the time saving final variation effect, as shown in FIG. ' is displayed, and an effect is executed in which allied characters gather around the character 851 in the main display area Dm. In FIG. 327(b), a state is displayed in which an ally character 851a imitating a "turtle" and an ally character 851b imitating an "elephant" are gathered. Then, in the small display area Dm20, characters "Last" are displayed in order to notify the player that the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state.

This friend character 851 is variably displayed in association with the number of acquired special-figure 2 reserved balls, and since "2" is displayed in the small display area Dm2a, in FIG. Since it shows a state in which two reserved special figures 2 are obtained, two ally characters 851 are gathered. In the small display area Dm7, a gathering history display is displayed in the order in which the gathered ally characters 851 were gathered, and "turtle" is displayed as the first history 872a, and "elephant" is displayed as the second history 872b. .

In this small display area Dm7, a set history display is displayed, but the order displayed here is associated with the order of digestion of the special figure 2 reservation, and the friend character used in the second time-saving variation production described later Based on the type of 851 and the display order of the set history display, for example, when winning, it is configured to be able to suggest which special figure 2 reservation has won.

Then, when the number of special 2 reservations reaches the upper limit value (4 pieces) during execution of the reservation ball acquisition effect, as shown in FIG. A presentation mode is displayed. Specifically, an ally character 851c imitating a “snake” and an ally character 851d imitating a “lion” are newly added around the character 851, for a total of four ally characters 851a to 851d. A collective performance is displayed. In addition, in the small display area Dm21, "snake" is displayed in the third history 872c, and "lion" is displayed in the fourth history 872d. A comment of "All members gathered!!" is displayed. As described above, during execution of the pending ball acquisition effect, the group number of teammate characters 851 is associated with the number of special 2 pending balls, so the number of special 2 pending balls is displayed in the small display area Dm2a. "4" indicating the upper limit (4) is displayed.

After that, when the first half period of the time saving final variable effect has passed and the second half period is reached, the second time saving change effect shown in FIG. 328(b) is started. FIG. 328(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the display content (second time saving variable effect) displayed when the second half period of the time saving final variable effect is started. As shown in FIG. 328 (b), in the second time-saving variation production, any of the ally characters acquired in the first half of the time-saving final variation production challenges the mission, and notifies the successful winning of the mission, and the mission failure. At , an effect for informing non-winning is executed. Then, the performance result of the second time-saving variable performance is configured to be set by reflecting even the foreseeing result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the time when the first half period of the time-shortening final variable performance has passed. .

According to the example shown in FIG. 328(b), the mission effect using the ally character 851a imitating the "turtle" is executed as the mission effect executed as the second time reduction variable effect. Here, the content of the mission effect to be executed (“Withstand Falling Rocks” in FIG. 328(b)) is configured so that a plurality of patterns can be set. And, depending on, mission success expectations are different. By configuring in this way, the player can be interested not only in the effect result of the second time reduction variable effect, but also in the effect process until the effect result is displayed.

Then, when the mission effect is successful, the mission success effect is executed as shown in FIG. 329(a). Incidentally, in the example shown in FIG. 329 (a), the first special figure 2 hold (special figure 2 hold to be executed next), that is, the first rotation special figure 2 fluctuation after shifting to the normal state Because the prediction result is used as the production result of the second time-saving variation production, as shown in FIG. At the change stop timing of the time saving final change being displayed, the display mode of "351" indicating that the result of this special figure 2 lottery is out is displayed in the small display area Dm2.

After that, as shown in FIG. 329(b), while the pseudo symbol "VVV" for notifying that the winning is hit in the main display area Dm is oscillatingly displayed, the special figure 2 variation to win the small hit is displayed. A notification screen for notifying the player of the effect result of the second time reduction variable effect is displayed until the end. It should be noted that, at the time of FIG. 329 (b), the normal state is set as the game state, and since it is during the special figure 2 fluctuation (during non-jackpot game, non-small hit game), a right-handed game is actually performed. Although it is in a state where it is not possible to play an advantageous game for the player, it is a state in which a small winning game is executed immediately after, so it continues from the time saving state to guide the right-handed game. A display is displayed in the small display area Dm4. As a result, the game can be played smoothly without requiring the player to change the shooting direction of the ball.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation based on the winning information stored in the first special figure 2 reservation is stopped and displayed at the time when the second time saving variation production is executed, it is shown in FIG. 330 (a) As described above, the display mode for displaying the small win to the player is displayed, and in the main display area Dm, the third symbol "777" for indicating the small win type set in the current small win. It is displayed in the display mode.

On the other hand, with reference to FIG. 328 (b), if the failure effect is set as the effect result of the mission effect described above (if the lottery result of the variation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold are both out ), the mission failure effect shown in FIG. 330 (b) is displayed, and then the time saving state end screen shown in FIG. is displayed.

Although the details will be described later, at the timing when the first half of the time saving final fluctuation production ends, the special figure 2 suspension has not reached the upper limit, and since the second time saving fluctuation production has started (second time saving After the production result of the fluctuation production is set), if you acquire a new special figure 2 reservation, after the final fluctuation of the time saving, at the first special figure 2 fluctuation start timing in the normal state, the newly acquired special Prefetching processing is executed for FIG. 2 reservation (special figure 2 reservation not reflected in the effect result of the second time-saving variation effect), and if the result of the prefetching process is winning, the display of FIG. 331 An effect is executed in which a small winning winning screen (see FIG. 330(a)) is suddenly displayed from the screen.

Next, referring to FIG. 332, the configuration of the counter buffer in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 332 is a diagram schematically showing configurations of various counters in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 332, in the fifth control example, a second winning type counter C6 and a second variation type counter CS2 are added to the counter buffer (see FIG. 240) in the fourth control example described above. And, the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b are provided with a variable type counter storage area for storing the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c. , a second winning type counter storage area for storing the value of the second winning type counter C6, a second variation type counter storage area for storing the value of the second variation type counter CS2, and each The difference is that the configurations of the special symbol reserved ball execution area and the normal symbol reserved ball execution area are changed in correspondence with the counter value stored in the reserved ball storage area. Since other elements are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The value of the second winning random number counter C4 is updated, for example, periodically (in this example of control, once per timer interrupt processing of the main controller), and the ball wins the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. It is stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 at the timing. And, the value of the random number which becomes the hit of the normal design is defined in the normal design random number 5 table 202ec provided in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 334(d)). When the value of the second winning random number counter C4 coincides with the value of the random number to be a winning normal pattern defined in the random number 5 table 202ec per normal symbol, it is determined as winning a normal symbol.

Here, with reference to FIG. 334(d), the normal random number per symbol 5 table 202ec will be described. The normal symbol random number 5 table 202ec is a table in which a random value (determined value) is set to be determined as a hit in each game state (normal symbol high probability state, normal symbol low probability state) in the normal symbol lottery. is. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 334(d), when the game state is a normal symbol low probability state (normal state), the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the normal symbol lottery is within the range of "5 to 28", and if within the range of "5 to 28", it is determined to be a hit. In addition, when the game state is a normal pattern high probability state (time saving state), in the normal pattern lottery, it is determined whether the value of the acquired second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 204". Then, if it is within the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that it is a normal figure.

In other words, in the fifth control example, in the low probability state (normal state) of the normal design, it is elected with a probability of 1/10, and in the high probability state (time saving state) of the normal design, with a probability of 5/6 It is configured to be elected by chance. And, although the detailed explanation will be described later, during the normal state, the ball enters the second winning hole 640 as a game per normal pattern with a probability of 1/100 when winning the normal pattern (per normal pattern). It is constructed so that an easy long opening winning game is executed. In addition, during the time saving state, it is constructed so that a long open winning game is always executed when winning a normal game.

By configuring in this way, even in the normal state, it is possible to execute a winning game that allows the ball to enter the second winning port 640 with a probability of 1/1000. To simultaneously execute a game for executing a special figure 1 lottery and a game for executing a special figure 2 lottery (a game aiming for a specific win in a normal figure lottery) for a player who is playing can be done.

The second variation type counter CS2 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 999, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 999). By the second variation type counter CS2, one normal pattern variation pattern is determined from the set normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef. In this normal figure fluctuation pattern, fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set, and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is also a counter that determines the fluctuation time. The value of the second variation type counter CS2 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 136) of the main controller 110 described above is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process. . In addition, from the value (random number) of the second variation type counter CS2, the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef (see FIG. is provided in the ROM 202 of the

Returning to FIG. 332, the description continues. In the fifth control example, a variation type counter storage area is provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and the winning information stored in the reserved storage is stored in advance (special symbol fluctuation (before), the actually executed variation pattern (variation time) can be read ahead. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to determine the timing at which the special figure variation corresponding to the reserved and stored special symbol winning information is executed.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the normal symbol winning information, that is, the type of each counter value acquired when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is the first winning random number counter used for the normal symbol winning lottery. C2, the second variation type counter CS2 used when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and used when setting the type of the winning game per normal symbol.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 333(a). FIG. 333 is a schematic diagram schematically showing regulation adoption of the electrical configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 333(a), in the above-described A1 control example, instead of the first winning random number table 202a (FIG. 242(a)), the first winning random number 5 table C202ea is selected as the first winning type. A first winning type selection 5 table 202eb is provided instead of the table 202b, a normal per symbol random number table 202ec is replaced with a normal per symbol random number table 202c, and a variation pattern 5 table 202ee is replaced with a variation pattern table 202d. A small winning type selection 5 table 202eg instead of the type selection table 202e, a big winning scenario 5 table 202eh replacing the big winning scenario table 202aa, and a small winning scenario 5 table 202ei replacing the small winning scenario table 202ab; Newly, it is different in the point that the type selection 5 table 202ed per normal pattern and the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef are provided.

The first winning random number 5 table 202ea differs from the above-described first winning random number table 202a (see FIG. 242) in that the prescribed value for determining a big win is different, and the rest is the same. Detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 334, the contents defined in the first winning random number 5 table 202ea will be described. FIG. 334(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning random number 5 table 202ea. As shown in FIG. 334(a), the first per random number 5 table 202ea includes the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 and the second special symbol that are referred to during the winning lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1). It has a special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 that is referred to when executing the winning lottery of (special figure 2).

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(b), the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 will be described. FIG. 334(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1. As shown in FIG. 334(b), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines a "big win" in the range of "0 to 3" and a "minor win" in the range of "10, 11". That is, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the lottery of special figure 1 is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small win is 1/500.

Next, with reference to FIG. 334(c), the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 will be described. FIG. 334(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2. As shown in FIG. 334(c), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 defines a "big win" in the range of "0 to 3" and a "minor win" in the range of "10 to 149". That is, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a big win in the special drawing 2 lottery is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small win is about 1/7.1.

That is, in the fifth control example, the same big-hit probability is set for the special-figure 1 lottery and the special-figure 2 lottery, and the small-hit probability is higher for the special-figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the fifth control example, since it is configured so that the small winning can be the execution trigger of the big winning game, the special figure 2 lottery is more likely to execute the big winning game than the special figure 1 lottery. It will be a drawing lottery.

In addition, in the fifth control example, as described above, the same jackpot probability is set in the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 lottery, but not limited to this, the special figure 1 lottery and the special figure 2 A different jackpot probability may be set for the lottery. In addition, although the big win probability and the small win probability are set to a constant value regardless of the game state, it is not limited to this, and according to the game state, the high probability state ( A special symbol high probability state) and a lower low probability state (special symbol low probability state) may be set.

The first winning type selection 5 table 202eb differs from the above-described first winning type selection table 202b (see FIG. 243) in that the jackpot type set when the jackpot is won is different. Other than that, they are identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

First, the contents of the first winning type selection 5 table 202eb will be described with reference to FIG. 335(a). FIG. 335(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the first winning type selection 5 table 202eb. As shown in FIG. 335 (a), the first hit type selection 5 table 202eb includes a special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1 and a special figure 2 lottery that are referred to when the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery. It has a special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 that is referred to when a jackpot is won in .

Here, with reference to FIG. 335(b), the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1 will be described. FIG. 335(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example is set so that three types of jackpot AA to jackpot AC are selected by the value of the first hit type counter C2 when a jackpot is won in the special drawing 1 lottery. there is Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is set to "0", "jackpot AA (15R short time 99 times jackpot)" is defined as the jackpot type, and "jackpot AB (7R time-saving 5 times jackpot)” is defined, and “jackpot AC (7R time-saving 1 time jackpot)” is defined in the range of “16 to 99”.

In other words, in the normal state in which the left-handed game is performed and the special figure 1 lottery is executed, if the jackpot is won in the special figure 1 lottery, the time saving state is always set (given) after the jackpot game ends. there is And according to the set jackpot classification, it is comprised so that the end conditions of a time saving state may be changed and set.

Specifically, when the jackpot AA is set as the jackpot type, only the common time-saving end conditions described above are set, so the special lottery wins (jackpot or small hit), or the special figure fluctuation (Total of Toku-zu 1 variation and Toku-zu 2 variation) The time saving state continues until it reaches 99 times. In the fifth control example, a right-handed game that executes the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state is performed, and in the special figure 2 lottery, the probability of winning a big hit is 1/250, and the probability of winning a small win is 1/250. Because it is set to 7.1, for example, when a time-saving state based on a jackpot AA is set, the special figure fluctuation is a predetermined number of times (99 times) without winning the special figure 2 lottery. The probability of reaching is 0.01% or less. Therefore, when the jackpot AA is selected, substantially, it becomes a game state in which the time saving state is set until the next jackpot game is executed.

Next, when the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the common time-saving end conditions described above, as the corresponding time-saving end conditions, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 5 times" is set. Therefore, the probability that the special figure fluctuation reaches a predetermined number of times (5 times) without winning the special figure 2 lottery (probability that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is about 46%. . In other words, when the jackpot AB is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number 5 times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning the winning before the time saving end condition is satisfied (continuous chance probability) about 54%.

Also, when the jackpot AC is set as the jackpot type, in addition to the common time saving end conditions described above, "the number of fluctuations of the special figure 2 fluctuation is 1 time" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition. Therefore, the probability that the special figure variation reaches a predetermined number of times (once) without winning the special figure 2 lottery (probability that the time saving end condition is satisfied and the time saving state ends) is 85%. In other words, when the jackpot AC is set, that is, when the special figure 2 fluctuation number of times is set as the time saving end condition, the probability of winning the winning before the time saving end condition is satisfied (continuous chance probability) about 15%.

As described above, according to the type of jackpot set when the jackpot is won in special figure 1, the degree of advantage of the set time saving state (consecutive chance probability) is configured to be different, and the jackpot AA is the most advantageous jackpot type, then jackpot AB is the most advantageous jackpot type, and jackpot AC is the most unfavorable jackpot type.

In addition, the number of round games to be executed as jackpot games also has different values depending on the type of jackpot. stipulated in The larger the number of round games in one jackpot game, the larger the number of balls (the number of prize balls) that the player can acquire. It becomes an advantageous jackpot type.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the jackpot type (jackpot AA) with the highest consecutive chance probability is configured to execute the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds (15R), but it is not limited to this, The jackpot type with the highest consecutive chance probability and the jackpot type in which the jackpot game with the largest number of rounds is executed may be different.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to change the most advantageous game state according to the game situation. For example, if the jackpot is won just before the game hall closes, the jackpot type that allows you to win more prize balls in one jackpot game than the jackpot type that gives (sets) a time-saving state with a high probability of consecutive chances. is a more advantageous jackpot type, and if the pachinko machine 10 has a limit value (limit) for the number of times the time saving state is set across the jackpot games, one jackpot game is played in the jackpot election immediately before reaching the limit. A jackpot type that can acquire a large number of prize balls is a more advantageous jackpot type. On the other hand, for example, when the number of consecutive chances (the number of times the jackpot game is executed without ever shifting to the normal state) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times), the player receives a privilege (for example, a valuable In the pachinko machine 10 capable of providing the image), a jackpot type in which a time-saving state with a high consecutive chance probability is given (set) is a more advantageous jackpot type for a player who wants to obtain a privilege.

In addition, the above-mentioned consecutive chance probability indicates the probability of winning a winning lottery based on the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, but in the fifth control example, the special figure 2 lottery is (4 pieces) is configured to be able to be reserved and stored. Therefore, even after the time-saving end condition is satisfied and the transition to the normal state is performed, the special figure 2 lottery can be executed by the number of special figure 2 reservations that are reserved and stored (number of remaining special figure 2 reservations). It is configured so that it is possible to aim for a small winning by special figure 2 lottery. As described above, in the fifth control example, the probability of winning a small hit by the special figure 2 lottery is set to a high probability of about 1/7.1, so the number of remaining special figures 2 pending (maximum 4) By the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the number of times, it is possible to sufficiently aim for small winning.

Specifically, when the number of remaining special figures 2 reserved is 1, the probability of winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 reservation (return probability) is about 14%, and the remaining special figure If the number of 2 holds is 2, the pull-back probability is about 28.5%, and if the number of remaining special figures 2 holds is 3, the pull-back probability is about 39.6%, and the number of remaining special figures 2 holding balls is 4, the pullback probability is about 49%.

In this way, the special figure 2 lottery can be held and stored, and the special figure 2 lottery based on the remaining special figure 2 reservation is executed even after the shift from the time saving state to the normal state, Regardless of the special figure 2 lottery result during the time saving state, it is possible to motivate the game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation until the end of the time saving state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the operation of the game.

Also, once the time saving state is set, the game period during the time saving state described above (continuous chance period) and the period during which the special figure 2 lottery is executed based on the remaining special figure 2 hold in the normal state (pull back Period) and, in two periods, it is possible to aim for a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery, so even though the time saving state is set, the special figure is never executed. It is possible to reduce the probability of shifting to the normal state aiming at one lottery, and to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, during the time saving state, the small winning is won in the special figure 2 lottery, and the big winning game (continuous big winning game) is executed based on the small winning during the normal state. It is configured to make it easier to set a time-saving state advantageous to the player when a small win is won in a special figure 2 lottery and a big win game (pull-back big win game) is executed based on the winning of the small win. . As a result, the player can play the game while expecting to win a small prize during the pull-back period even after the period of successive chances has passed, thereby preventing the player from getting tired of the game early. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 335(c), the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 will be described. FIG. 335(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, when a jackpot is won in the special figure 2 lottery, three types from jackpot AD to jackpot AF are selected by the value of the first win type counter C2. there is Specifically, the value of the acquired first hit type counter C2 is in the range of “0 to 19”, and “jackpot AD (15R short time 99 times jackpot)” is defined as the jackpot type, and the range of “20 to 69” “Jackpot AE (12R short time 99 times big hit)” is defined in “70 to 99”, and “jackpot AF (7R short time 99 times big hit)” is defined.

In other words, when a big win is won by the special figure 2 lottery, an advantageous game state is set so that the time saving state continues until the special figure fluctuation reaches 99 times without fail after the end of the big win game. As a result, in the special figure 2 lottery whose execution frequency is lower than that of the special figure 1 lottery, when a big win set at a probability three times or more lower than the probability of winning a small win is won, it is advantageous to the player. A game state can be reliably provided. Therefore, for a player who has a special experience with a low occurrence frequency of winning a jackpot in the special figure 2 lottery, a game that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, a setting of one time reduction) is set, and the motivation to play is set. It is possible to suppress a significant decrease.

In addition, each jackpot type defined in the special figure 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 is executed during one jackpot game according to the jackpot type, like the above-described special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1. The number of round games to be played is different, and it is stipulated that a round game of "15R" for the jackpot AD, "12R" for the jackpot AE, and "7R" for the jackpot AF is performed. Since the number of balls (the number of prize balls) that the player can obtain increases as the number of round games in one jackpot game increases, the jackpot AD is most advantageous to the player in terms of the jackpot game to be executed. It will be a big hit type.

Normal per symbol random number 5 table 202ec changes the value of the second per normal random number counter C4 defined corresponding to normal per symbol with respect to the normal per symbol random number table 202c (see FIG. 242 (d)). are different, and otherwise identical. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted. Here, with reference to FIG. 334(d), the contents of the normal 5-per-symbol random number table 202ec will be described. FIG. 334(d) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal 5-per-symbol random number table 202ec.

As shown in FIG. 334(d), the normal per symbol random number 5 table 202ec includes a value to be referred to when executing a lottery per normal symbol in a low probability state of normal symbols, and a normal value in a high probability state of normal symbols. A value to be referred to when executing a lottery per figure is defined, and specifically, in a low probability state of normal symbols, the value of the second random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 28". "Hit" is defined, and in the high-probability state of normal symbols, "hit" is defined in the range of "5 to 204" for the value of the second winning random number counter C4.

The normal pattern per type selection 5 table 202ed is a data table for selecting the normal per pattern type, and when the normal pattern (normal pattern) lottery is executed with reference to the normal per pattern random number 5 table 202ec and the winning is won. is referred to. In this fifth control example, as a normal pattern winning game that is executed when winning a normal pattern low probability state, the electric accessory 640a is moved so that the ball can win the second winning hole 640. A long opening winning game in which an opening operation is performed and a short opening winning game in which the electric accessory 640a is opened so as to make it more difficult for the ball to enter the second winning opening 640 than in the long opening winning game can be executed. Then, different winning games are executed according to the type of normal pattern selected at the time of winning the normal pattern.

Here, with reference to FIG. 336, the contents defined in the per normal pattern type selection 5 table 202ed will be described. FIG. 336(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the per normal figure type selection 5 table 202ed. As shown in FIG. 336 (a), per normal pattern type selection 5 table 202ed, according to the probability state of the normal pattern and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6, two types per normal pattern ( It is configured so that A per normal pattern and B per normal pattern are selected.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal pattern is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "per normal pattern A", " 1 to 99” is defined as “per normal figure B”. In addition, the probability state of the normal pattern is a high probability state (high probability of normal pattern), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "per normal pattern A" in the range of "0, 1", "B" is defined in the range of "2 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the general pattern per type selected in the general pattern per type selection 5 table 202 ed and the game state at the time when the general pattern per game is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 336 (b). do. FIG. 336(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation contents of the electric accessary 640a based on the normal figure winning type and the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the normal pattern (normal pattern) winning lottery is executed according to the game state set at the timing of executing the normal pattern (normal pattern) winning lottery (normal pattern fluctuation start timing). When winning, it is configured to set the game content per normal pattern according to the game state set at the timing of executing the game per normal pattern (timing to stop fluctuation of normal pattern). That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, since the game state is configured to shift according to the special symbol (special figure) lottery situation and fluctuation situation, the special figure lottery game is independent In the general pattern lottery game to be executed, different game states are set at the timing of executing the general pattern lottery and the timing of executing the general pattern winning game executed when winning in the general pattern lottery. I have a case.

For example, if the general drawing lottery is executed during the special figure fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, the high probability state of the normal pattern of the random number 5 table 202ec per normal pattern (normal high A winning lottery is executed using the judgment value specified in the definite). And, when it hits and is elected, after the lapse of a predetermined normal pattern fluctuation time (for example, 2 seconds), the normal pattern fluctuation is stopped, and then the normal pattern per game is executed. Here, when the time saving final variation ends during the normal figure fluctuation and the game state shifts from the time saving state to the normal state, the normal state is set as the game state at the timing when the game per normal figure is executed It will be.

In such a case, if you set the game mode of the normal figure per game according to the game state that is set at the time the normal figure lottery is executed, even though the normal state is set, There is a problem that a normal game per game (long open per game) executed during the time saving state as a normal game per game is executed, and an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery) is provided to the player. there were.

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, the game state that is set at the timing of executing the game per normal pattern is determined, and the content of the game per normal pattern is set based on the determination result, As in the above-described example, when the game state shifts to the normal state during the normal pattern fluctuation, it is possible to execute the normal pattern per game corresponding to the low probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being provided with an excessively advantageous privilege (special figure 2 lottery).

Specifically, when per normal pattern A is selected (set) as the type per normal pattern, the game state set to the execution timing of the game per normal pattern (at the time of opening operation of electric auditors 640a) Regardless, the game per normal figure long opening is executed. On the other hand, when the normal pattern per B is selected (set) as the normal pattern per type, the game state set at the execution timing of the normal pattern per game (during the opening operation of the electric auditors 640a) is the normal symbol. If it is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), normal pattern short open per game, if the normal pattern high probability state (normal pattern high probability), normal pattern long open per game is executed is defined as

Here, the per game per normal pattern long open per game and the normal pattern short open per game, which is the normal per pattern game, will be described for the contents of the per game. The normal pattern long open per game is a normal pattern per game that opens the electric accessory 640a for a long period of time so that the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640 (positioned in an open state). After a second closed state (opening period), the electric accessory 640a is opened for 1 second (first open period), and then opened again for 0.5 second after a closed state (waiting period) of 1.5 seconds. (Second open period) per normal game is executed. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when a game per normal long open is executed, two open periods are set so as to secure a period in which the ball can win the second winning opening 640 are doing. Then, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the second winning port 640 when the first opening period has passed among the two opening periods, and the determination result indicates that the ball has not won the second winning port 640.例文帳に追加When it is determined, a warning screen (see FIG. 324(a)) for calling attention to the player to play a game of winning a ball in the second winning hole 640 is displayed. there is

By configuring in this way, in the state in which the normal state is set (the state in which the left-handed game is performed), the player who does not notice that the normal figure long open per game (right-handed game) has been executed In response to this, it is possible to perform notification for executing a right-handed game again, and to suppress the game result that is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, in the fifth control example, after the warning screen (see FIG. 324(a)) is displayed and a waiting period of a predetermined period (1.5 seconds) passes, the second opening operation (0.5 seconds) is performed. configured to run.

This waiting period (1.5 seconds) is set to be longer than the time (about 0.5 seconds) required for the ball shot by the player to reach the second winning hole 640. It is As a result, it is possible for a player who executes a right-handed game after viewing the caution screen (see FIG. 324(a)) to easily win the ball into the second winning hole 640 .

In addition, in this fifth control example, when the scenario per normal pattern is updated with the passage of time and the scenario indicating the end is reached, the game per normal pattern is terminated, and the second winning during the game per normal pattern Two types of normal pattern per end conditions are set in the case of ending the normal pattern per game when the number of balls that have won into the mouth 640 reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1 piece).

Then, when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 during the first opening period and when the ball enters the second prize winning port 640 during the second opening period, the ball wins the second prize winning port 640. It is configured so that the notification modes for indicating that the event has occurred are different. Specifically, when the ball wins the second winning hole 640 during the second opening period, there is a high possibility that a proper game (right-handed game) is not being executed from the start stage of the game per normal pattern. , It is configured to display a game explanation (comment such as "Be sure to hit the right during the game per normal long open game") so that an appropriate game can be played at the time of the next normal pattern per game. As a result, it is possible to inform the player of the game content in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, since the above-mentioned game explanation is not notified to the player who has won the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the first opening period, the game content that the player has already grasped is repeatedly notified, and the game is not played. It is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation.

On the other hand, in the general pattern short opening per game, the general pattern per game that opens the electric accessory 640a for 0.1 seconds after the closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds is executed. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

Since the opening period of the electric accessory 640a is as short as 0.1 seconds, the above-mentioned normal pattern short opening winning game is a normal pattern winning game in which the ball can not be substantially won into the second winning hole 640. . In addition, this general pattern short open per game is, as shown in FIG. As the normal pattern short opening per game is started 0.2 seconds after the normal pattern per game ends, the normal pattern short opening per game is executed in a state where the player is executing the left-handed game , Even if a right-handed game is performed, the normal game will be completed before the ball fired in the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (0.5 seconds). By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter the second winning hole 640 during the game per normal short open.

In addition, the electric accessory 640a may be configured so that the ball cannot enter the second winning hole 640 during the normal short open game. In the open state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is configured so that the ball can flow down from one end side to the other end side, and only the ball flowing out from the other end side of the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a can win. The second prize winning port 640 is arranged at the position, and the period during which the ball flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is preferably 0.5 seconds at the shortest. By configuring in this way, when a game per normal short open is executed, the ball that flows down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a during the period (0.1 seconds) in which the electric accessory 640a is in the open state cannot reach the other end side, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from entering the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the winning game content of the normal pattern winning game is set according to the game state set at the timing at which the normal pattern winning game is executed. Therefore, even if you win per normal pattern in a short time state (high probability state) that wins per normal pattern with a high probability, the game per normal pattern based on winning per normal pattern is normal state (low probability normal pattern) state), it is possible to make it difficult to execute the game per normal pattern long open.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 336 (a), in this fifth control example, regardless of the game state, the ratio of selecting the normal pattern per type (normal pattern per A) in which the normal pattern long open per game is executed is different between the low probability state of normal patterns (low probability of normal patterns) and the high probability state of high probability of normal patterns (high probability of normal patterns). It is configured to be selected with a probability of 2% at the time of probability. By configuring in this way, it is elected per the general pattern at the time of the low probability, and the general pattern is elected at the time of the high probability, compared to the case where the game per the general pattern is executed at the low probability of the general pattern. When the normal pattern per game is executed at the normal pattern low probability, the probability of executing the normal pattern long open per game at the normal pattern low probability can be increased. Therefore, even when using the configuration for setting the game contents of the game per normal pattern according to the game state at the timing when the game per normal pattern is executed, it is executed when the time saving state shifts to the normal state It is possible to increase the probability that the normal pattern per game will be the normal pattern long open per game, and allow the player to pay attention to which game content the normal pattern per game is executed.

The variation pattern 5 table 202ee is a data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern (variation time) of the special symbol, and includes the acquired value of the variation type counter CS1, the type of the special symbol, and the special symbol lottery ( Various variation patterns (variation time) are configured to be selected based on the lottery result of special figure lottery) and the set game state. Since the basic technical idea of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee is the same as the various variation patterns used in the above-described control examples or the respective embodiments, detailed description thereof is omitted. The description will continue focusing on the characteristic contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee used in the control example.

Here, the contents of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee will be described with reference to FIG. 339(a). FIG. 339(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the variation pattern 5 table 202ee. As shown in FIG. 339 (a), the variation pattern 5 table 202ee is referred to when the game state is the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1 and the game state is the time saving state. A variable pattern 5 table 202ee2 for time reduction is provided, and a special symbol variation pattern is selected using a data table corresponding to a game state set when selecting a special symbol variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 339(b), the contents of the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1 included in the variation pattern 5 table 202ee will be described. FIG. 339(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1. As shown in FIG. 339(b), the variation pattern 5 table 202ee includes the symbol type of the special symbol, the number of special symbol variations after the normal state is set, the lottery result of the special symbol, and the acquired variation type counter. Different variation patterns are defined depending on the value of CS1.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the normal state is set as the game state, it is configured so that the game in which the special figure 1 lottery is mainly executed is performed, and the second special symbol ( The pattern in which the special figure 2) lottery is executed is the pattern in which the special figure 2 lottery is executed according to the special figure 2 hold stored at the end of the time saving state, and the long open in the normal figure lottery. There is a pattern in which a special figure 2 lottery is executed based on winning a ball in a second winning port 640 during a long open winning game.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state, the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 hold stored at the time of the start of the time saving final variation can be notified. It consists of Then, the performance result of the time saving final variation performance is configured to be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation executed (to the normal state) after the time saving state ends.

The variation pattern 5 table 202ee corresponds to the special figure 2 lottery performed between 1 to 4 special figure variations as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation performed during the normal state. The fluctuation pattern is configured to be a special fluctuation pattern.

Specifically, when the first special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the acquired variation type counter CS1 "Short win A (0.5 seconds)" is selected regardless of the value of , and "Short win A (2 seconds)" is selected in the case of "win (big win, small win)". Also, if the second special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "Short out A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "Hit", "Short hit B (1.5 seconds)" is selected, special symbol fluctuation after the normal state is set If the third time is the special figure 2 fluctuation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation is "off", regardless of the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 "short off A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "win", "short win C (1 second)" is selected. Then, if the fourth special symbol variation after the normal state is set is the special figure 2 variation, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation is "off", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 Regardless, "short miss A (0.5 seconds)" is selected, and in the case of "hit", "short hit D (0.5 seconds)" is selected.

By configuring in this way, when the number of special 2 reservations is the maximum number (4) when the time saving state ends, the special 2 lottery corresponding to the special 2 reservation is hit (small hit , jackpot) (the period during which the second special symbol (special figure 2) is stopped and displayed in the display mode showing the winning), and the lottery results of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the special figure 2 hold are all It is possible to unify the period until it is out and the period to two seconds.

Therefore, for example, even if there is winning information that will be a hit in the special figure 2 reservation, even if there is no winning information, just by controlling to display the result for 2 seconds after the end of the time saving final variation, the player feels uncomfortable. Special Figure 2 variation during normal state can be performed without granting. Also, no matter how many special figures 2 are held and won, it is possible to unify the timing at which the identification information indicating the winning is stopped and displayed (2 seconds after the normal state is set). Since it is possible, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand how many special figure 2 reservations have been won.

Also, as shown in Figure 339 (b), as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation in the normal state, if the number of special symbol variations is "5 times or more", the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the time saving state ends Since it exceeds, the normal figure long open per game is executed in the normal state, and since it is a special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning of the ball in the second winning port 640, the above-mentioned series of effects A variation pattern (variation (10 seconds)) for properly executing is selected, and based on the selected variation pattern, a display mode for indicating that the current is a special figure 2 variation period in a series of productions ( production mode) is set.

Next, the contents of the time-saving variation pattern 5 table 222ee2 referred to when the time-saving state is set will be described. Figure 340 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the variation pattern of the special figure lottery executed when the time saving state is set.

In the fifth control example, when the time saving state is set, the special figure 2 lottery, which tends to be a lottery result advantageous to the player for the special figure 1 lottery, is more likely to be executed than the normal state, so the time saving state is set. When set, a right-handed game for executing the special figure 2 lottery is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 315, the game board 13 is configured such that when a right-handed game is played, it is difficult for the ball to enter the first winning port 64 that triggers the execution of the special figure 1 lottery. Therefore, the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state in which the right-handed game is executed is a special figure executed based on the special figure 1 reservation already acquired at the jackpot game end timing when the time saving state is set 1 will be a lottery.

Specifically, when the jackpot is won in the state where the normal state is set, and the time-saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game (time-saving initial setting state), the ball wins in the second winning port 640. Since the easy game is not played, the special figure 2 reservation cannot be acquired, and when there is the special figure 1 reservation at that time, the special figure 1 lottery is executed.

In this case, as the variation pattern (variation time) of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the time saving initial setting state, a long time (for example, 60 seconds) variation time If it is set, there is a problem that the special figure 2 variation cannot be executed until the special figure 1 variation ends, and the game in the time saving state cannot be smoothly performed.

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, a short time (0.2 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 1 variation executed during the time saving state. As a result, even if the time saving state is set in a state where the maximum number (four) of the special figure 1 reservation is secured, the special figure 1 variation can be executed without hindering the special figure 2 variation.

Further, in the fifth control example, the end screen of the jackpot game is configured to be continuously displayed until the special figure 2 variation is executed even after the jackpot game is finished. This makes it difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 1 fluctuation is fluctuating in a short time during the time saving state. Furthermore, when the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery executed during the time saving state is a big win, the continuously displayed end screen of the big win game is shifted to the big win game screen.

Normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef is a data table referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation time) of normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation), and the game state at the time of executing normal pattern variation, Based on the lottery result of normal figure fluctuation and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 obtained, different fluctuation patterns (fluctuation time) are configured to be selected.

Here, with reference to FIG. 338, the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef will be described. FIG. 338 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal pattern variation pattern selection table 202ef. As shown in Figure 338, in this fifth control example, as the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation, a short fluctuation (2 seconds) in which a short fluctuation time is set and a long fluctuation in which a longer fluctuation time than the short fluctuation is set (30 seconds to 60 seconds) is configured to be selected.

And, when the long fluctuation is selected as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern fluctuation, the normal pattern fluctuation production is configured to be executed. In addition, in this fifth control example, only during the period in which the normal state is set that it is difficult to win per the general pattern long opening, the general pattern fluctuation effect for suggesting that the general pattern long opening is won is executed. Therefore, long variation (30 to 60 seconds) is specified only in the data table referred to during the normal state.

Specifically, if the game state at the time the normal pattern fluctuation is executed is a normal state (normal pattern low probability state), and the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern A", The value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 is "0 to 499" in the range of "Normal long fluctuation A (30 seconds)", and in the range of "500 to 999" "Normal long fluctuation B (60 seconds)" are defined respectively, and if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern B", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 999", "normal pattern short fluctuation A (2 seconds)” is defined. Also, if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "out", the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 996", "normal pattern short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" 997, 998” and “Normal long fluctuation A (30 seconds)” are defined in “999” and “Normal long fluctuation B (60 seconds)”, respectively. On the other hand, if the gaming state at the time when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed is a time saving state (normal pattern high probability state), regardless of the lottery result of normal pattern fluctuation and the value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2, "Normal figure short fluctuation A (2 seconds)" is defined.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern A", that is, the normal pattern long open per, the normal pattern long fluctuation is the normal pattern fluctuation time It is designed to be easily selected. Therefore, it is possible to make the player expect to be elected per normal pattern long opening by executing the normal pattern fluctuation effect. In addition, it is configured so that a different variation time (30 seconds or 60 seconds) can be selected as the long variation in which the normal pattern variation effect is executed. As a result, since it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the period from the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation effect to the start of the normal pattern long open game, for example, when the normal pattern fluctuation effect is started It is possible to make it difficult to play a game in which the shooting of the ball is stopped and the shooting of the ball is restarted after waiting for a specific period of time (for example, 60 seconds) to elapse.

Also, although it is slight, even if the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation is out, it is configured so that the normal pattern long fluctuation is selected, so even if the normal pattern fluctuation production is executed, the normal pattern It is possible to leave the possibility of not winning per Figure Long open. Therefore, the player can be entertained with the normal pattern variation effect to the end.

It should be noted that, in the fifth control example, when winning the "normal pattern hit A" which is a normal pattern long open per, it is configured so that long variation (30 seconds or 60 seconds) is always selected. , Not limited to this, for example, in some cases when winning "A per normal figure", "short fluctuation" or "middle fluctuation (10 to 15 second) may be configured to be selectable.And, when a variation pattern other than "long variation" is selected, it is preferable to configure so that the normal figure variation effect is not executed.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to execute the normal pattern long open per game without executing the normal pattern fluctuation effect, it is possible to provide a game with unexpectedness to the player, It is possible to predict the execution timing of the game per normal pattern long open, and make it difficult to perform the game of shooting the ball in accordance with the predicted timing.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the lottery result of normal pattern fluctuation is "per normal pattern B" in which "per normal pattern short game" is executed as a per game per normal pattern, "long fluctuation" Although it is configured not to be executed, it is not limited to this and may be configured so that "long fluctuation" is selected.

The small hit type selection 5 table 202eg is a data table that is referred to when selecting the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won in the special figure lottery. This small hit type selection 5 table 202eg differs from the small hit type selection table 202e (see FIG. 244) of the above-described A1 embodiment in that the contents of the defined small hit type are changed, Other than that, they are identical. Detailed descriptions of the same elements are omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 337, the small hit type selection 5 table 202eg will be described. Figure 337 (a) is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the small per type selection 5 table 202eg, Figure 337 (b) is a schematic representation of the contents defined in the special figure 1 small per type selection 5 table 202eg1 FIG. 337(c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the special figure 2 small per type selection 5 table 202eg2.

The 5 jackpot scenario table 202eh and the 5 small jackpot scenario table 202ei are different from the jackpot scenario table 202aa and the small jackpot scenario table 202ab in the above-described A1 embodiment. The only difference is that it corresponds to the content of the big winning game or the small winning game executed in the control example.

Next, referring to FIG. 333(b), the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the fifth control example will be described. The RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the fifth control example deletes the scenario counter 203aa and the specific control flag 203ab from the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 of the above-described A1 embodiment (see FIG. 241(b)). , The difference is that a special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea is added, and the other configurations are the same. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The special figure 2 variation counter 203ea is a counter for measuring the number of variations of the second special symbol, and a specific counter value is set when the time saving state is set. And, when the special figure 2 variation is executed during the time saving state, the counter value is subtracted, and when the counter value after the subtraction becomes 0, the time saving state ends. In other words, the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea is referred to when determining whether or not to terminate the time saving state, and constitutes a part of the time saving end conditions that are set in plurality.

In the fifth control example, it is configured to vary the counter value set in the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea according to the jackpot type that has been elected. Thereby, according to big hit classification, the ease of completion|finish of a time saving state can be varied. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested not only in the presence or absence of the winning of the jackpot, but also in the type of jackpot to be set.

Next, with reference to FIG. 341, the electrical configuration of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described. FIG. 341(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 341 (a), the ROM 222 in this control example replaces the variation pattern selection table 222a with respect to the ROM 222 (see FIG. 251 (a)) of the above-described A1 embodiment, and the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea is provided. Here, differences from the variation pattern selection table 222a described above will be mainly described, and detailed descriptions of the same elements will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 342, the contents of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea will be described. FIG. 342(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea, and FIG. 342(b) is a time-saving final variation pattern selection 5 table possessed by the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea 2 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in H.222ea3. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 342(a), the variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea has three variation pattern selection tables associated with the game state and variation status. Normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea1 that is referred to in a certain case, time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea2 that is referred to when it is in the time saving state, and time saving final use that is referred to when it is the final variation of the time saving state It has a variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea3.

Regarding the normal variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea1 and the time saving variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea2 described above, the same technical idea as the variation pattern selection table described in each control example or each embodiment It is a data table in which a display variation pattern (effect mode) corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time, lottery result, symbol type) included in the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is selected. , the detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The time saving final variation pattern selection 5 table 222ea3 is the final variation in the time saving state, that is, when the time saving end condition is satisfied by executing the variation, refer to when selecting the production mode of the variation production for the special figure fluctuation. In addition to the pattern type of the change, the lottery result, the number of special 2 reserved balls (the value of the special 2 reserved ball counter 223c), the presence or absence of a hit in the reservation (winning prize information storage area 223a Different variation patterns (effect mode) are selected based on the determination result of whether or not winning information indicating winning is included in the winning information stored in .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 342 (b), if the time saving final fluctuation is the special figure 1, that is, among the time saving end conditions, one of the common time saving end conditions "Special figure fluctuation number 99 times If the special figure fluctuation when ” is established is the special figure 1 fluctuation, regardless of the lottery result of the variation, the number of special figure 2 pending balls, “Special figure 1 short time final” is selected as the variation pattern be done.

Next, if the time-saving final variation is special figure 2, the lottery result of the variation (response judgment result) is "hit", and the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final A" is selected, the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "1, 2", and if the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special figure 2 pending, "time saving final A" is selected as the variation pattern , If the prize information indicating the hit is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final B" is selected as a variation pattern.

Then, if the lottery result of the change (result of winning or not) is "hit", the number of special 2 pending balls is "3", and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special 2 pending, the change When "time saving final C" is selected as a pattern and winning information indicating a win is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "time saving final D" is selected as a variation pattern.

On the other hand, if the time-saving final variation is special figure 2, the lottery result of the variation (response judgment result) is "off", and the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "0", the variation pattern is "time-saving final E ” is selected, and the number of special 2 pending balls is “1, 2”, and if the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special 2 pending, “time saving final B” is selected as the variation pattern, If the winning information indicating the hit is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "shortening final F" is selected as a variation pattern.

Also, if the lottery result of the change (result of judgment) is "out", the number of special 2 pending balls is "3", and the winning information indicating the hit is included in the special 2 pending, the change "Time saving final D" is selected as a pattern, and when winning information indicating a win is not included in the special figure 2 reservation, "Time saving final E" is selected as a variation pattern.

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 341(b). FIG. 341(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. As shown in FIG. 341(b), the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example has a state storage area 223ea, Series effect flag 223eb, pseudo series effect flag 223ec, time saving final variation flag 223ed, small hit attention flag 223ee, non-fluctuation win prize flag 223ef, special figure variation time counter 223eg, normal figure variation time counter 223eh, continuous series effect flag 223ej, The difference is that a series effect counter 223ek is added.

The state storage area 223ea is a storage area for temporarily storing the current game state, and stores information included in state commands output from the main controller 110. FIG. In this control example, in the state storage area 223ea, information indicating the game state (normal state, time saving state), information indicating the time saving end condition of the time saving state, and the hit type (jackpot type, Information indicating a small hit type) is configured to be stored. Based on the various information stored in the state storage area 223ea, the effect mode is variably set.

Although detailed description is omitted, the state storage area 223ea is configured to temporarily store not only the information indicating the current game state but also the game state set in the past. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute variation based on the state of transition of the game state (from which game state to which game state).

The series effect flag 223eb is a flag for indicating that a condition for executing a series of effects is satisfied, and is set to ON when the condition for executing a series of effects is satisfied. Here, in this control example, in the normal state, when a series of effects is set as the variation pattern of the special figure lottery that has been won, or when the long variation of the normal symbol is executed, the execution condition of the series of effects is configured so that

This series effect flag 223eb is set in the normal figure effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 371), when a series effect is set (C4207 in FIG. 371), or in the hit variation effect setting process (see C4112 in FIG. 373) , When a series of effects is set (C4402 in FIG. 373: Yes), it is set to ON (C4208 in FIG. 371, C4403 in FIG. 373), and in the small hit related command process (see C3504 in FIG. 366 (a)) , It is referred to when setting the effect mode during the small winning game (C3701 in FIG. 366(a)). Also, it is referred to when determining whether or not a new series of effects can be executed in the variable effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370) and the normal figure effect setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371). Then, in the series effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375), when it is determined that the continuous execution condition of the series effect is not established, it is set to OFF (see C4613 in FIG. 375).

As described above, in this control example, a series of effects are executed by a plurality of opportunities (special figure lottery, general figure lottery). Even in such a configuration, by using the series effect flag 223eb, it is possible to prevent the series of effects from being redundantly set (executed).

The pseudo series production flag 223ec is a flag for indicating that the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation is out and the execution condition of the series production is established, and the series production is set as the fluctuation production of the special figure fluctuation. It is set to ON when The pseudo series effect flag 223ec has a lower priority than the above-described series effect flag 223eb, and the same series effect flag 223eb is set to ON while the same series effect is being executed. , and when the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to ON, different effect setting processing is executed.

Specifically, when the series production flag 223eb is set to ON in the normal figure production setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371) (for example, a series production is executed as a special figure fluctuation hit variation production case), even if the normal pattern fluctuation satisfies the conditions for executing a series of effects, a new series of effects is not executed, whereas the pseudo-series effect flag 223ec is set to ON. If it is (for example, if a series of production is executed as a variation production out of the special figure fluctuation), the normal figure fluctuation meets the execution conditions for a series of production, and meets the special conditions In this case, a new series of effects (special series of effects) can be executed (see C4211 in FIG. 371).

In this way, in a state in which the same series of effects is being executed, the process of executing a new series of effects (the process of replacing the effect mode of the series of effects being executed) based on the execution trigger of the series of effects being executed. Since it is possible to change whether to perform or not, it is possible to diversify the contents of the series of effects. Further, only when it is possible to display an effect result that is more advantageous to the player than the effect result of the series of effects being executed, the effect mode of the series of effects being executed is replaced. It is possible to make the player pay attention to a series of performances while expecting that .

The time saving final variation flag 223ed is a flag for indicating that the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state, and is set to ON when the special figure variation of this time is the final variation of the time saving state. . By setting the time saving final variation flag 223ed to ON, it is possible to set the effect mode for the time saving final variation.

The small hit attention flag 223ee is a flag indicating that the ball has not passed through the specific area even after a predetermined period has passed during the small hit game, and is a predetermined period (1 second) after the small hit game is started. is set to ON when the sphere has not passed through the specified area even after the elapse of . And, by setting the small hit caution flag 223ee to ON, the guide display mode (see FIG. 325(a)) for performing the right hitting game during the small hitting game is displayed. Then, it is set to OFF at the timing when the small winning game ends.

The non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223ef is a flag for indicating that the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the normal state, and when the ball passes through the through gate 67 It is set to ON when special figure 1 variation is not executed. The pachinko machine 10 of this control example is configured to perform a left-handed game in a normal state, to enter a ball into the first winning port 64 and execute a special figure 1 lottery. Then, a normal pattern lottery is executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67 provided in the left game area, and when the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery is a normal pattern long open hit, the electric accessory 640a. Since the normal figure long open hitting game is executed in which is long open, a right-handed game is performed in order to win the ball in the second winning hole 640. - 特許庁

In other words, when the game is played normally, the special figure 1 variation is executed at the timing when the ball is passed through the through gate 67. On the other hand, for example, in a state in which the normal state is set, when a game is played in which the ball is only passed through the through gate 67 provided in the right side game area of the game board 13, the ball is passed through the through gate 67. It means that the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing when it is made. Here, as the board surface configuration of the game board 13 of the fifth control example, the rate at which the ball fired by the left-handed game passes through the through gate 67 provided in the left-hand side game area is higher. It is constructed so that the percentage of balls passing through the through gate 67 provided in the right game area is higher.

In this way, in the normal state, if you play a right-handed game and try to execute only the normal drawing lottery, even if you win the long open by the normal drawing lottery, the normal drawing It is configured so as not to execute the variable production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to understand the timing at which the normal pattern long open per game is executed for the player who performs the right hitting game in the normal state.

The special figure variation time counter 223eg and the normal figure variation time counter 223eh are counters for measuring each symbol variation time, and when the symbol variation is executed, the value corresponding to the current variation time is set. be. Then, the value is periodically subtracted in the main processing of the audio ramp control device 113 . By using the values of the special figure variation time counter 223eg and the normal figure variation time counter 223eh, it is possible to determine the remaining time of each design variation time during design variation.

The continuous series effect flag 223ej is a continuous series effect that is executed when the standby period of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a predetermined period (30 seconds) or more during the period in which the series effect is being executed (See FIG. 317 (b) ) is set, and is set to ON when a continuous series of effects is executed.

The series effect counter 223ek is a counter for updating the effect scenario of the series effect, and when the series effect is set, a value corresponding to the effect period of the series effect to be executed this time is set. , is updated in effect update processing 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) that is periodically executed in the main processing of the sound lamp control device 113. The series effect counter 223ek is set so as to indicate a period until the series effect is completed (the effect (see FIG. 322(b)) in which the jackpot game is executed is executed). A rendering mode is set according to the updated counter value. Then, during the execution of a series of effects, the condition to end the effect (for example, the condition that is established when the ball does not enter the second winning port 640 during the normal game and the special figure 2 reservation cannot be obtained) is established. On the other hand, when the series of effects is to be terminated, the effect mode for indicating the end of the series of effects is set, and the value of the series of effects counter 223ek is reset to zero.

The re-read-ahead flag 223em is a flag for indicating that it is necessary to re-execute the pre-reading process on the prize-winning information stored in the prize-winning information storage area 223a. set to on if In the fifth control example, as a variable production corresponding to the final special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, a variable production (time saving final fluctuation production) in which the production mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation is set is configured to be executed. It is configured to execute the prefetching process for the special figure 2 reservation that has been acquired at the specific timing of the final special figure fluctuation period, and to set the effect mode corresponding to the result of the prefetching.

The above-mentioned re-prefetching flag 223em is set on when the final special figure fluctuation is being executed, and when a new special figure 2 hold is acquired after the specific timing of the final special figure fluctuation period has elapsed, and is set on In the case, at the execution timing of the special figure 2 variation of the first rotation after the end of the time saving state, the prefetching process for the special figure 2 hold is executed again, and the variation effect based on the result of the prefetching process is executed.

Reservation upper limit flag 223en is a flag for determining whether the number of special 2 reservation balls has reached the upper limit (4), and when the number of special 2 reservation balls reaches the upper limit (4) set to on. And it is referred when setting the production|presentation mode of time-saving final fluctuation|variation production|presentation. Specifically, in the fifth control example, as a variation effect corresponding to the final special figure fluctuation in the time saving state, the holding ball for acquiring the special figure 2 reservation during the first period of the final special figure fluctuation period To make it possible to execute the acquisition production, and during the second period after the first period, to make it possible to execute the time-saving final fluctuation production for showing the result of the lottery of the fluctuation and the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation. It is configured, and when the holding upper limit flag 223en is set to ON at the start time of the first period, the first period and the second period are used to execute the time saving final variation effect. .

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect (holding ball acquisition effect) for acquiring a new special figure 2 hold for the player who has already acquired the special figure 2 hold to the upper limit. The execution period of the time-saving final variation performance is lengthened for the player who is able to suppress the game and continuously acquires the special figure 2 reservation to the vicinity of the upper limit value, that is, the player who is continuously executing the right-handed game. can be set. Therefore, the player can continue to play the game, and the operation of the game can be improved.

The executed flag 223eq is a flag for indicating that the time saving final variation performance is being executed as the variation performance corresponding to the final special figure variation, and is normally executed from the second period of the time saving final variation period. It is set to ON when the time saving final variation effect is executed from the first period set before the second period. In other words, at the start of the first period of the time-saving final fluctuation period, the number of special 2 reservations has reached the upper limit, and the time-saving final fluctuation production during the first period (production using the first period and the second period) is set to ON when it is determined that the second period is to be executed, and it is determined whether the execution completion flag 223eq is set to ON at the start of the second period. Since the effect mode to be executed during the period is set, the process of setting a new effect mode is skipped. And it is set to OFF when the stop command corresponding to time-saving final fluctuation|variation is received.

The special 2 winning flag 223er is a flag for indicating that the ball has won the second winning port 640 during the normal game (during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a), and during the normal game ( It is set to ON when a ball wins in the second prize winning port 640 during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. This special 2 winning flag 223er is, when it is determined that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 in the updating process (see FIG. 376 (a)) during the game per normal figure (C4701 in FIG. 376 (a): Yes), is set to ON (see C4705 in FIG. 376(a)), and is referenced in the series of effect update processing (see C4503 in FIG. 375) to determine whether to continue the series of effects (see FIG. 375) 375 C4608). In the process of C4608, if it is determined that it is not set to ON (is set to OFF) (C4608: No in FIG. 375), it becomes a state in which special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed, and the end condition of a series of effects is established Therefore, a process (C4612) for ending the series of effects is executed.

<Control processing executed by main controller 110 in fifth control example>
Next, each control process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to flowcharts of FIGS. 343 to 359. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 milliseconds in this control example). There are an interrupt process 5 and an NMI interrupt process that is activated by the input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Processing and main processing will be described. In addition, in the fifth control example, for convenience of explanation, the contents explained in each of the control examples and each embodiment described above are duplicated with different reference numerals attached. For portions where detailed descriptions of elements that are the same as the contents described in each control example and each embodiment are omitted, the contents described in each control example and each embodiment described above are applied. is. In addition, the technical ideas described in each control example and each embodiment described above are naturally applied to the fifth control example, and are described in each control example and each embodiment described above. Modified examples and additional examples are naturally applied to the fifth control example.

343 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing 5 executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110. FIG. The timer interrupt processing 5 is periodic processing that is executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process 5, first, various prize winning switches are read (C101). That is, it reads the states of various switches connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information).

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (299 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM203. Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Furthermore, the update of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second hit random number counter C4, the small hit type counter C5, and the second hit type counter C6 is executed (C103). Specifically, 1 is added to the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, the second per random number counter C4, the small per type counter C5, and the second per type counter C6. At the same time, when those counter values reach the maximum values (999, 99, 239, 239, 99, 99 respectively in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C6 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a special symbol variation process 5 for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (C104). . After that, the starting winning process 5 associated with winning (starting winning) to the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640 is executed (C105). The details of the special symbol variation process 5 and the starting winning process 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the starting winning process 5 (C105), the normal symbol variation process 5, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (C106). The details of the normal symbol variation process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG. After executing the normal symbol variation process 5, the through gate passage process 5 associated with the ball passing through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 is executed (C107). The details of the through gate passage processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 351 and 352. FIG.

After executing through gate passage processing 5, V entrance passage processing 5 is executed (C108), and then V passage processing 5 (C109) is executed. Details of V entrance passage processing 5 and V passage processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIGS.

After executing the V-passing process 5 (C109), the firing control process is executed (C110), and other processes to be periodically executed are executed (C111), and the timer interrupt process 5 is terminated. . Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the shooting stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is the process of deciding on/off of firing. Main controller 110 gives a ball launch instruction to launch controller 112 when ball launch is on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 344, special symbol variation processing 5 (C104) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 344 is a flow chart showing this special symbol variation process 5 (C104). This special symbol variation process 5 (C104) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the variable display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, This is a process for controlling the variable display of the third pattern performed in the three-pattern display device 81 .

In the special symbol variation process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is in the midst of a big win (C201). During the special symbol jackpot, the first symbol display devices 37a, 37b and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game). During the predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game of the symbol. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol jackpot is in progress (C201: Yes), the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) cannot be executed, so this process is terminated as it is.

If the special symbol jackpot is not in progress (C201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is fluctuating (during special symbol fluctuation) (C202), and the first symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the devices 37a and 37b is not fluctuating (during special figure fluctuation) (C202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e (the number of times of holding the fluctuation display in the special symbol N2) is acquired ( C203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is greater than 0 (C204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is not 0 (C204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (C205) and changed by calculation. A reserved ball number command (special figure 2 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set (C206). The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted values in the RAM 223. Stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After setting the special figure 2 reserved ball number command by the process of C206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (C207). In the process of C207, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the special symbol 2 reservation ball storage area 203b are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, a special symbol variation start process 5 for starting variation display in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (C213). In addition, special symbol variation start processing 5 will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is 0 (C204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d A value is acquired (C208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is greater than 0 (C209). When it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (C209: No), that is, when there is no reserved ball for starting a new special symbol variation, this processing is performed as it is. exit.

On the other hand, if the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is not 0 (C209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is subtracted (C210), and by the process of C210 A reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the changed (subtracted) special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set (C211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of C211, the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (C212). After that, the process of C213 is executed, and this process ends.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when executing a new special symbol variation (special symbol variation), the special symbol 2 is set before the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter (N1). It is configured to determine the value of the number of reserved balls counter (N2), and when it is determined that the value of the special symbol 2 reserved number of balls counter (N2) is greater than 0, the second special symbol (special figure 2) It is configured to execute processing for starting special symbol variation (special symbol variation) (special symbol variation start processing 5 (see C213)). Thereby, the second special symbol can be preferentially varied over the first special symbol.

Further, in the process of C202, if the display modes of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b are fluctuating (C202: Yes), the variation time of the variable display executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b has elapsed. It is determined whether or not (C214). The variation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command). If the fluctuation time has not elapsed (C214: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C214, if the variation time of the variable display being executed has passed (C214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbols of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is set (C215). . The setting of the stop symbol is performed in advance by special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213), which will be described later with reference to FIG. When this special symbol variation start process 5 is executed, a special symbol lottery is drawn based on the values of various counters stored in the execution areas of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. done. More specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1, and when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot, the value of the first winning type counter C2 is determined. According to this, any one of jackpot AA, jackpot AB, jackpot AC, jackpot AD, jackpot AE and jackpot AF is determined, and if the lottery result of the special symbol is a small win, the small win is determined according to the value of the small win type counter C5. Any one of AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit AD, small hit AE and small hit E is determined.

In this embodiment, the player is notified of the lottery result of the special symbol (determination result of each type of counter) according to the display mode (lighting mode) of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. When the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, the blue LED is lit in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, and when it is a small hit, the red LED is lit. , a red LED and a green LED are turned on.

Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot and the jackpot AA is determined, the blue LEDs in the first pattern display devices 37a and 37b indicate the jackpot AA (for example, the alphabet "a" ), and when the jackpot AB is determined, it is lit in a mode indicating the jackpot AB (for example, a mode imitating the alphabet "b"), and when the jackpot AC is determined It is lit in a manner indicating AC (for example, in a manner imitating the alphabet "c"), and when the jackpot AD is determined, it is lit in a manner indicating the jackpot AD (for example, in a manner imitating the alphabet "d"). Let

Also, even if the lottery result of the special pattern is a small hit, the red LED is displayed for each small hit type (small hit AA, small hit AB, small hit AC, small hit Lights up in a mode corresponding to AD, small hit AE and small hit E). The display of each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped. In addition, in this embodiment, the mode (color corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol) indicating the contents of each winning type so that the player can grasp each winning type (big winning type or small winning type) determined as described above. , The first pattern display devices 37a and 37b are configured to light up in a mode formed from a lighting mode corresponding to each hit type), but other configurations may be used. Even if the determined winning types are different, the same lighting mode may be used as the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, by confirming the lighting mode of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, it is configured so that it is possible to grasp the lottery result of the special symbol of this time and the hit type to be determined. However, other configurations may be used, for example, it may be configured to display in a lighting mode classified to the extent that the player can distinguish that the lottery result of the special symbol is different. .

After the process of C215 is completed, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result (current lottery result) corresponding to the variable display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is a special symbol jackpot ( C216). If the result of the lottery this time is a special pattern jackpot (C216: Yes), a jackpot scenario is set based on the jackpot type (C217), and then the jackpot is awarded in correspondence with the jackpot type determined in the jackpot this time. Start setting (setting of jackpot such as 15 rounds) is executed (C218).

When the jackpot scenario is set in the process of C217, the jackpot scenario table corresponding to the current jackpot is set among the jackpot scenario tables defined in the jackpot scenario table 202eh. Since the method of updating the jackpot scenario table is the same as the content described above with reference to FIG. 248 of the A1 control example, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the process of C218 is finished, next, the jackpot start flag 203h and the jackpot flag 203i are set to ON (C219), the value of the time saving counter 203g is set to 0 (C220), and the stop command is set (C225 ), the process ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C216, when it is determined that the lottery result of this time is not a big hit (C216: No), the time saving update process is executed (C221). The details of this time saving update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 346, but when the time saving state is set, various parameters (second special symbol (special figure 2) A process of updating the number of fluctuations and the total number of fluctuations of special symbols) is executed. After executing the process of C221, it is determined whether the current lottery result is a small hit (C222), and if it is determined to be a small hit (C222: Yes), the small hit start setting process 5 (C223) is executed. Then, the process of C225 described above is executed later, and this process ends. Details of the small winning start setting process 5 (C223) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C222, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a small win (no) (C222: No), this process is terminated.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the time saving update process is executed at the timing when the special symbol variation ends (the timing when the special symbol variation time elapses). By configuring in this way, for example, when "1 special figure 2 fluctuation number of times" is set as the corresponding time saving end condition which is part of the time saving end condition, the time saving state is set, and the special figure 2 change is executed Even if it is done, the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation stops can be made into a time saving state, so it is possible to secure the period to acquire the special figure 2 hold.

In addition, without being limited to the configuration of the fifth control example, it may be configured to execute the time saving update process at the start of the special symbol fluctuation, in this case, the period of one special figure 2 fluctuation is secured as a time saving state In order to do so, it may be configured to set "special figure 2 fluctuation number of times 2 times" as the corresponding time saving end condition.

Next, with reference to FIG. 345, special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 345 is a flowchart showing special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213). This special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 344) of the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area Based on the values of various counters stored in the common execution area of 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, "special symbol jackpot", "special symbol small win", or "special symbol loss". Lottery (whether judgment) is performed, and the production pattern (variation production pattern) of the fluctuation production performed by the first design display devices 37a, 37b and the third design display device 81 is determined.

In the special symbol variation start process 5, first, a first hit random number counter stored in a common execution area of the special symbol reserved ball storage areas (special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b). C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and small hit type counter C5, to obtain each value of the variation type counter CS1 (C231). Next, the lottery result of the special design is calculated based on the special design jackpot random number table (special design 1 random number 5 table 202ea1, special design 2 random number 5 table 202ea2) corresponding to the type of special design (special design 1, special design 2). Acquire (C232) and move to the process of C233.

Specifically, if the special symbol variation executed in this process is the first special symbol (special symbol 1), the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 is changed to the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 ( 334(b)) are compared one by one with the four random values set. As described above, as the random number value for the jackpot of the first special symbol, four numbers of "0 to 3" are set. When the numerical values match, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is obtained. Similarly, the value of the acquired first random number counter C1 and the two random numbers "10, 11" that are small hits set in the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 (see FIG. 334 (b)) If they match, it is determined to be a small hit of a special symbol.

In addition, in this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same judgment value for judging a big hit. By constructing in this way, a random number determined to be out of the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and bias in the jackpot can be suppressed.

In addition, in this control example, the number of jackpot random numbers is set to be the same for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. You may set the number of random values to be different. By constructing in this way, the probability of big win can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol with the higher probability of big win, the player can win. It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

In this control example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so that the number of determination values determined as a small hit is different. By configuring in this way, the probability that the lottery result will be a small win can be varied according to the type of the special pattern, and the player will be motivated to execute the lottery with the special pattern with the higher probability of a small win. It is possible to make a game by itself.

In addition, in this control example, the first winning random number 5 table 202ea is set so that both the first special symbol and the second special symbol win the small winning, but only one of the special symbols wins the small winning. The first winning random number 5 table 202ea may be set so as to win . Specifically, the special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 corresponding to the first special symbol is not set with a random number value that is a small hit of the special symbol, and the special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 corresponding to the second special symbol is It is better to set the random number value that will be the small hit of the special symbol only. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the privilege (small winning game) that can be given to the player according to the type of the special symbol, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this control example, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 is in a predetermined range (0 to 3), and the special symbol jackpot is made to correspond to the other range (4 to 999) according to the type of special symbol. However, as another configuration, for example, the value of a part of the range (for example, 0 to 2) that becomes a big hit in the first special symbol is set to a small value in the second special symbol. It may be set as a hit range.

Furthermore, in this control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the first winning random number 5 table 202ea are used to perform a special symbol lottery (big hit, small hit, loss). Alternatively, a plurality of winning random number tables may be used to draw a special symbol. If the lottery result using the first random number table is not a big hit, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a small hit using the second random number table. may be configured. By performing the special symbol lottery using a plurality of random number tables in this way, the special symbol lottery result can be set more randomly, and the fraudulent act of manipulating the special symbol lottery result can be suppressed. .

In this control example, the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is used when performing the lottery for the special symbols, but other configurations may be used. A random number 5 table 202ea may be used to draw a special symbol. In this case, for example, based on the value of the first random number counter, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result is a big hit, and based on the value of the second random number counter, the special symbol lottery result is small. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is a win.

Returning to FIG. 345, the description continues. In the process of C233, it is determined whether or not the special symbol lottery result acquired by the process of C232 is a special symbol jackpot (C233). If it is determined to be a special symbol jackpot (C233: Yes), the jackpot type is acquired based on the first winning type selection 5 table 202eb corresponding to the type of special symbol corresponding to this special symbol lottery ( C234), set the display mode at the time of the big win corresponding to the special symbol and the big win type (C235), determine the big win variation pattern based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 (C236), and follow the determined big win variation pattern. A corresponding variation pattern command is set (C243), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C233, if it is determined that the current lottery result is not a big hit (C233: No), then it is determined whether or not the current lottery result is a small hit (C237). If it is determined (C237: Yes), a small hit type is acquired based on the small hit type selection 5 table 202eg according to the type of special design corresponding to this special design lottery (C238), special design and small The display mode at the time of the small hit corresponding to the hit type is set (C239), the small hit fluctuation pattern is determined based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (C240), and the fluctuation corresponding to the small hit fluctuation pattern determined this time. A pattern command is set (C243), and this processing ends.

Also, in the process of C237, if it is determined that the result of the lottery this time is not a small hit (C237: No), that is, if it is determined that the result of this lottery is a loss, the loss corresponding to the type of special symbol Set the display mode of the time (C241), determine the variation pattern at the time of loss based on the number of held balls (C242), set the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern at the time of loss determined this time (C243), End this process.

Although detailed description will be given later, in this control example, if the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit or a small hit, the variation pattern is determined regardless of the number of pending balls, whereas the special symbol If the result of the lottery is lost, the variation pattern is different according to the number of held balls. Specifically, the larger the number of reserved balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start process 5 (C213) is executed, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a shorter variation time. As a result, the greater the number of pending balls, the shorter the period until the lottery result (loss), in which the special pattern lottery result does not give a benefit to the player, is displayed. In order to increase the number of lotteries of the special symbols to be drawn, the player can be motivated to play the game to always secure a large number of reserved balls. In addition, when it is not possible to secure a large number of reserved balls, it is possible to lengthen the special symbol variation time for one time, thereby suppressing the occurrence of a state in which the special symbols are not varied during the game. As a result, it is possible to prevent the players from losing their desire to play.

In this control example, it is configured to vary the variation pattern based on the number of held balls at the timing when the special symbol variation start processing 5 (C213) is executed. On the condition that the number of held balls becomes a predetermined number (for example, 3) or more while the is fluctuating, the fluctuation time set in the fluctuation pattern being executed may be shortened. good. By constructing in this way, it is possible to motivate the game to secure a large number of reserved balls even while the special symbols are fluctuating.

In addition, in this control example, only when the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, the variation pattern is changed based on the number of reserved balls. The variation pattern may be varied based on the number, or it may be configured such that the larger the number of held balls, the easier it is to determine a variation pattern with a longer variation time. Furthermore, the number of reserved balls referred to when determining the variation pattern may be a value obtained by adding the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol, or the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Of the 2 special symbols, only the value of the number of held balls of the second special symbol for which the special symbol variation start processing is preferentially executed may be used, or the special symbol variation start processing to be executed this time is performed. Only the value of the number of retained balls in the design may be used.

Next, with reference to FIG. 346, the time saving update process (C221) will be described. FIG. 346 is a flowchart showing the time saving update process (C221).

In the time saving update process (C221), first, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203g during the time saving of the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C251). Incidentally, the time-saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in a normal pattern high probability state. If the value of the time-saving counter 203g is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the low-probability state of normal symbols. In addition, in the fifth control example, two game states can be set. Specifically, it is possible to set two game states: normal state (low probability state of special patterns, low probability state of normal patterns) and time saving state (low probability state of special patterns, high probability state of normal patterns) It consists of That is, in this control example, the special symbol probability state is always constant, and only the normal symbol probability state can be variably set. Therefore, there are cases where the normal state is used as the term indicating the low probability state of the time saving state and the normal symbol as the term indicating the high probability state of the normal symbol.

When the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (C251: No), since the time saving state is not set, this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value of the time saving counter 203g is 1 or more (C251: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the current is in the time saving state, the value of the time saving counter 203g is subtracted by 1 (C252), Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure variation of this time is the variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C253). If the special figure fluctuation of this time is the special figure 2 fluctuation (C253: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation number counter 203ea is subtracted by 1 (C254), and the remaining time short number command indicating the value of various counters is set (C255), and the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C255, the value of the counter 203g during time saving and the remaining time reduction command indicating the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea are set. Remaining time reduction number command set here, by the external output process (see C1001 in Figure 357) of the main process (see Figure 357) to be described later, to the voice lamp control device 113 as part of the state command indicating the gaming state output. On the audio lamp control device 113 side, when it is determined that the state command (remaining time reduction command) is received in the command determination process 5 (see C3113 in FIG. 360) (C3212 in FIG. 360), included in the received command Information is extracted, and the current game state (remaining time reduction count) is stored in the state storage area 223ea. This makes it possible to predict (discriminate) the remaining time period of the time saving state currently set in the voice lamp control device 113, and to set the effect mode according to the remaining time of the time saving state.

In addition, in this control example, every time the time saving update process (see C221 in FIG. 346) is executed, the remaining time saving number command for indicating the remaining time saving number of times is output from the main controller 110. , Without being limited to this, for example, when the time saving state is set (when the jackpot game is finished) time saving end condition command for indicating the time saving end condition set at the time the time saving end condition is output to the voice lamp control device 113 Configured to extract the time saving end condition from the time saving end condition command received by the voice lamp control device 113 side, and then the command indicating the special figure fluctuation output from the main control device 110 side (variation pattern command) received number of times may be accumulated, and it may be determined whether or not the time saving end condition is satisfied based on the accumulated value. By configuring in this way, the processing load on the main controller 110 side can be reduced.

In the process of C253, if this special figure variation is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C253: No), the process of C254 and C255 is not performed, and the process proceeds to C256.

In the process of C256, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203g is 0 (C256). If the value of the time saving counter 203g is 0 (C256: Yes), it means that the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is satisfied, so it is determined whether the corresponding time saving end condition is satisfied among the time saving end conditions. The value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea for the purpose is reset to 0 (C257), and the process proceeds to C260.

In the process of C256, if the value of the counter 203g during time saving is not 0 (C256: No), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea is 0 (C258). If the value of the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea is 0 (C258: Yes), because it is a case where the time saving end condition (corresponding time saving end condition) is established, the establishment of the common time saving end condition among the time saving end conditions (C259), the value of the counter 203g during time saving for determining is reset to 0 (C259), and then the process proceeds to C260. On the other hand, when the value of the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea is not 0 in the process of C258 (C258: No), this process is terminated as it is.

In the processing of C260, the gaming state is set to the normal state (C260), a state command indicating the normal state is set (C261), and then the processing is terminated.

As described above, the time saving update process (C221 in FIG. 346) is, among the time saving end conditions, a plurality of time saving end conditions (a part of the common time saving end conditions, and It is configured to be able to discriminate the establishment status of corresponding time reduction end conditions), and when any one of the time reduction end conditions is established, the value of a parameter for establishing the other time reduction end conditions is also reset. Thereby, even if time saving end conditions are satisfied based on the value of which parameter, the state after ending a time saving state can be unified.

In addition, in this control example, as a time saving end condition, a common time saving end condition that is set in common regardless of the time saving state set based on which jackpot type (first end condition that is established when the jackpot is elected, The second end condition that is established after the end of the game, the third end condition that is established when the number of special figure fluctuations (total of special figure 1 and special figure 2) reaches 99 times) and the jackpot type It is configured to set the corresponding time-saving end condition (condition that is established when the number of fluctuations in the special figure 2 reaches a predetermined number), but the condition for ending the time-saving state is not limited to this For example, when the number of times of winning a small hit reaches a predetermined number of times, or when the number of times a specific small hit type is selected reaches a predetermined number of times, a small winning end condition may be set. In this case, the small winning end condition may be set as a common time saving end condition, or may be set as a corresponding time saving end condition. In addition, an end lottery means for drawing a lottery as to whether or not to end the time saving state based on the execution of the special symbol variation (special figure variation) is provided, and when the lottery result of the end lottery means is the lottery result for ending the time saving state. Alternatively, the time saving state may be terminated.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends, so that the game in the time saving state can be executed while giving the player a thrilling feeling. . In addition, when a predetermined continuation condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when a lottery result indicating a specific deviation as a lottery result of a special symbol) is established during the time saving state, various parameters related to the time saving end condition are set for a predetermined period. It may be configured not to be updated. Furthermore, only the time saving state that is set when a specific jackpot type is selected, until a predetermined period has elapsed since the time saving state was set (for example, until the special figure fluctuation number reaches 30 times), You may comprise so that the various parameters regarding time saving end conditions may not be updated. By configuring in this way, it is possible to reliably set the period during which the time saving state continues, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, a discriminating means capable of discriminating that the ball did not enter the V winning port 650a despite the execution of the small winning game is provided, and the discriminating means determines that the ball does not enter the V winning port 650a. You may comprise so that the time-saving forced termination conditions satisfied when it is discriminate|determined may be set as common time-saving termination conditions. By configuring in this way, the small hit type that is set when the small hit is won is determined, and the small hit type that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, the ball in the specific area in the V winning opening 650a) If it is determined that it is a jackpot game that is disadvantageous to the player (jackpot game with a small number of rounds or a jackpot game that does not set a game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player after the end), A penalty can be imposed on a player who plays an illegal game such as not shooting a ball during a small winning game and aiming for winning the next small winning.

Next, with reference to FIG. 347, small winning start setting processing 5 (C223) will be described. FIG. 347 is a flowchart showing small winning start setting processing 5 (C223). In this small winning start setting process 5 (C223), a scenario is set for opening and closing the solenoid (V entrance solenoid) 209 for opening the V winning door 650b when a small winning is won in the special symbol lottery. Processing is performed.

In the small winning start setting process 5 (C223), first, based on the small winning scenario 5 table 202ei, a scenario (winning scenario) corresponding to the set small winning type is set (C291). Next, set the small hit type corresponding to the small hit type determined to the V passing time jackpot type value (C292), set the start of the small hit corresponding to the small hit type (C293), and set the small hit medium flag 203k is turned on (C294), and the process ends. In addition, since the detailed updating method of the small winning scenario (winning scenario) in this process is the same as that of the above-described A1 embodiment, the detailed description thereof is omitted.

Next, with reference to FIG. 348, start winning process 5 (C105) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 348 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process 5 (C105) executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) in this embodiment. This startup winning process 5 (C105) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the winning to the first ball entrance (award winning opening) 64 or the second ball entrance (award winning opening) 640 It is a process for determining the presence or absence of (starting winning), acquiring various random number counters when there is a starting winning, and executing the holding process of the value.

When the start winning process 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has entered the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (start winning) (C301). Here, the entry of a ball into the first ball entry hole (winning hole) 64 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times N1 of holding the variable display in the special symbol) is changed. Acquire (C302). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this control example) (C303).

Then, whether there is no winning to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: No), or even if there is a winning to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter If the value (N1) of 203d is not less than 4 (C303: No), the process proceeds to C307. On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first ball entrance (winning hole) 64 (C301: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (C303: Yes), 1 is added to the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (C304). Then, a reserved ball number command (special figure 1 reserved ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (C305).

The reserved ball number command set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357), which will be described later. , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it extracts the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d from the reserved ball number command, and stores the extracted value in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the pending ball number command by the process of C305, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in C103 of the above-described timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343) , second hit random number counter C4, small hit type counter C5, and variation type counter CS1 are stored in the free reservation area (first reservation area to fourth reservation area) of the special symbol 1 reservation ball storage area 203a of the RAM 203 Store in the first area (C306). In the process of C306, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the first reserved area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in the processing from C307 to C312, the same processing as in the processing from C301 to C306 is executed for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning entrance) 640 as well. The only difference is that the second special symbol (special figure 2) is reserved for the winning of the second ball entrance (winning opening) 640, and the other processes are the same. detailed description is omitted. Then, when it is determined in the process of C307 that the ball has not entered the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 (C307: No), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is less than 4. If not (C309: No), prefetching process 5 is executed after the process of C312 (C313). After that, this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 349, prefetching process 5 (C313) will be described. FIG. 349 is a flowchart showing prefetch processing 5 (C313). When the look-ahead process 5 (C313) is executed, it is first determined whether or not there is a new winning (C321). If there is no new winning (C321: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is a new winning (C321: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C322).

In the processing of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C322: Yes), by the processing of C306 or C312 of the starting winning processing 5 (see C105 in FIG. 348) Using the acquired various counter values, special symbol 1 random number 5 table 202ea1 (see FIG. 334 (b)), special figure 1 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb1 (see FIG. 335 (b)) and special figure 1 small per type selection Based on the 5 table 202eg1 (see FIG. 337(b)), the lottery result, the big hit type and the small hit type are acquired (C323), and the process proceeds to C325.

On the other hand, in the process of C322, if it is determined that the winning is the winning of the second special symbol (special figure 2) (C322: No), special symbol 2 random number 5 table 202ea2 (see FIG. 334 (c)), special 2 jackpot type selection 5 table 202eb2 (see FIG. 335 (c)) and special figure 2 small hit type selection 5 table 202eg2 (see FIG. 337 (c)) Lottery results, jackpot type and small hit type are acquired based on (C324), the process proceeds to C325. In the process of C325, a winning information command including information for indicating each lottery result (big hit determination result, big hit type, small hit determination result, small hit type) acquired in the above-described C323 or C324 process is set ( C325). Then, the process ends.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the look-ahead process 5 (see C313 in FIG. 349) in the fifth control example, in addition to the look-ahead result described above, when the special figure variation based on the corresponding winning information is executed The variation pattern (variation time) to be set is also configured to be discriminable in advance. Specifically, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is also acquired by the processing of C306 or C312 of the starting winning process 5 (see C105 of FIG. 348), and C323 of the look-ahead process 5 (see C313 of FIG. 349) Alternatively, in the processing of C324, the variation pattern (variation time) is determined in advance based on the variation pattern 5 table 202ee (see FIG. 339), and the determination result is included in the winning information in the processing of C325. there is As a result, at the audio lamp control device 113 side, it becomes possible to predict at what timing (after how many seconds) the special figure variation corresponding to the stored winning information will be executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 350, normal symbol variation processing 5 (C106) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 350 is a flow chart showing this normal symbol variation process 5 (C106). This normal symbol variation process 5 (C106) is executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), and the variable display of the second symbol performed in the second symbol display device 83 and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a It is a process for controlling such as.

In the normal symbol variation process 5, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently hitting (C601). Winning of the normal symbol (second symbol) includes the moment when the winning is displayed on the second symbol display device 83 and the moment when the electric accessory 640a is controlled to open and close. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is in the process of hitting (C601: Yes), this process is finished as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (C601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is fluctuating (C602), and the second symbol display device is determined. If the display mode of 83 is not fluctuating (C602: No), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired (C603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is greater than 0 (C604), and if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (C604: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is not 0 (C604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal design reserved ball number counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (C605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is shifted (C606). In the process of C606, the data stored in the reservation first area to the reservation fourth area of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c are sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, the first holding area → execution area, the second holding area → the first holding area, the third holding area → the second holding area, the fourth holding area → the third holding area, etc. Shift data. After shifting the data, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c is acquired (C607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the counter 203g during time saving in the RAM 203 is 1 or more (C608). Incidentally, the time-saving medium counter 203g is a counter indicating whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal-symbol time-saving state. If the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 0, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of normal symbols.

If the value of the time-saving medium counter 203g is 1 or more (C608: Yes), the pachinko machine 10 is not in the special symbol jackpot, and the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state with normal symbols, so obtained by the process of C607. Based on the value of the second winning random number counter C4 and the normal symbol per random number table 202ec for high probability (see FIG. 334 (d)), the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol wins is acquired (C609 ). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number stored in the normal 5 per symbol random number table 202ec for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined to be a winning of normal symbols, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4,205 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 334(d)).

In the process of C608, when the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 0 (C608: No), the process proceeds to C610. In the process of C610, the pachinko machine 10 is in the special symbol jackpot, or the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second winning random number counter C4 obtained in the process of C607 and the low Based on the normal symbol random number 5 table 202ec for probability time (see FIG. 334(d)), the lottery result as to whether or not the normal symbol wins is obtained (C610). Specifically, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the normal random number 5 per symbol table 202ec for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 28", it is determined that the winning is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0 to 4, 29 to 239", It is determined that it is out of the normal pattern (see FIG. 334(d)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the normal symbol obtained by the process of C609 or C610 is a normal symbol hit (C611), and when it is determined that it is a normal symbol hit (C611: Yes), Next, per general pattern type selection 5 table 202ed per general pattern type (per normal pattern A, per general pattern B) is set (C612). Concretely, the value of the second hit type counter C6 is compared with the random value stored in the type selection 5 table 202ed per normal pattern. As described above, when the current game state is a time saving state (high probability state of normal pattern), if the value of the second per type counter C6 is in the range of "0, 1", it is per normal pattern A If it is in the range of "2 to 99", it is determined that it is a normal hit B (see FIG. 336(a)). Alternatively, if the current game state is a normal state (low probability state of normal pattern), if the value of the second per type counter C6 is in the range of "0", it is determined that it is per normal pattern A, " If it is in the range of 1 to 99", it is determined that it is a normal hit B (see FIG. 336(a)).

Next, the display mode for winning is set based on the setting result of C612 (C613), and the process proceeds to C615. In the process of C613, after the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "o" is lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). On the other hand, in the process of C611, if it is determined that it is not a normal pattern hit (C611: No), this normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is a case of loss, so the display mode at the time of loss is set. (C614), the process proceeds to C615.

In the process of C615, it is determined whether the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more (C615), and if the value of the counter 203g during time saving is 1 or more (C615: Yes), the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef Among them, the normal pattern fluctuation time (2 seconds) is set using the prescribed contents corresponding to the time saving state (normal pattern high accuracy) (C617), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C615, if the value of the counter 203g in the time saving is 0 (C615: No), out of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef, normal using the prescribed contents corresponding to the normal state (normal figure low probability) The figure fluctuation time (2 to 60 seconds) is set (C616), and then various contents set in this process (the value of the normal design holding ball number counter 203f, the lottery result of the normal design, the fluctuation time of the normal design ) is set (C623), and the process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (C602: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 has elapsed is determined (C618). The variable time here is the time set in advance by the process of C616 or C617 before the second symbol display device 83 starts the variable display.

In the process of C618, if the variable time has not elapsed (C618: No), the process proceeds to C623 and ends this process. On the other hand, in the process of C618, if the variation time of the variation display being executed has passed (C618: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set (C619). In the process of C619, if the normal symbol lottery wins and the display mode is set by the process of C613, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 displayed). On the other hand, if the lottery for the normal symbol is lost and the display mode is set by the process of C614, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83. is set to When the stop display is set by the process of C619, when the second symbol display update process (see C1008) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed next, the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 is changed. After the game ends, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set in the process of C613 or C614.

Next, when the variation display being executed in the second symbol display device 83 is started, the normal symbol lottery result (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process 5 is a normal symbol hit. (C620). If the result of the lottery this time is a win for a normal symbol (C620: Yes), the opening pattern of the electric accessory is set according to the type of the normal symbol and the game state (C621), and the opening/closing control process for the electric accessory is set. (C622), after that, it moves to C623, sets a command for showing the contents of the normal figure per game set by the process of C621, and ends this process. By the process of C621, when the start of opening and closing control of the electric accessory 640a is set, next when the electric accessory opening and closing process (see C1006) of the main process (see FIG. 357) is executed, the electric accessory 640a The opening/closing control is started, and the opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time set in the process of C616 or the process of C617 ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C620, if the lottery result of this time is normal symbol deviation (C620: No), the processing of C621 and C622 is skipped, the process of C623 is shifted, and the normal symbol deviation fluctuation is stopped. A command indicating is set, and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 351, through gate passage processing 5 (C107) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. This through gate passage processing 5 (C107) judges whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67, and when the ball has passed, the value indicated by the second hit random number counter C4 is changed. This is a process for acquiring and holding.

Specifically, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (C431). Here, the passage of the ball in the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 is detected over three times of timer interrupt processing. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 (C431: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times of suspension of variable display in normal symbols M) is acquired. (C432). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit (4 in this embodiment) (C433).

Whether the ball has not passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67 (C431: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal symbol starting port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (C433: No), the process proceeds to C437. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal symbol start opening (through gate) 67 and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (C433: Yes), the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f 1 is added to the value (M) of (C434), and the normal figure holding ball number command is set (C435). Then, the values of the second hit random number counter C4 and the second hit type counter C6 updated in C103 of the timer interrupt process 5 described above, and the second The value of the variation type counter CS2 is stored in the first area of the vacant reservation areas (reservation first area to reservation fourth area) of the normal symbol reservation ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203 (C436), and the process proceeds to C437. .

In addition, when storing the value of the second random number counter C4 in the first area of the empty reservation areas of the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and the value is If 0, make the first reserved area the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area, and if the value is 3, the reserved fourth area is set as the first area.

In the processing of C437, normal map prefetch processing is executed (C437), and then this processing is terminated. In addition, although the details of this general pattern prefetching process will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, before the normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern fluctuation) is executed, the process of determining in advance the lottery result of the normal pattern reservation and the fluctuation pattern is executed.

Next, referring to FIG. 352, the normal map prefetching process (C437) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described. FIG. 352 is a flow chart showing normal map prefetching processing (C437) executed in through gate passage processing 5 (see FIG. 351).

In general pattern look-ahead processing (C437), first, per normal pattern random number 5 table 202ec (see FIG. 334 (d)), per general pattern type selection 5 table 202ed (see FIG. 336 (a)), and general pattern fluctuation pattern A lottery result is acquired based on the selection table (C451), and a winning information command for indicating each lottery result is set (C452), after which this process is terminated. The prize information command set here (a prize information command indicating the result of prefetching of the normal map) is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the main processing described later is executed by the MPU 201 (see FIG. 357). ) is sent to the audio lamp controller 113 in the external output process (C1001). When the audio lamp control device 113 receives the winning information command, it determines whether the received winning information command is a winning information command relating to special figure fluctuation or a winning information command relating to normal figure fluctuation, and stores the corresponding winning information storage area 223a. . The winning information stored here is actually the timing before the symbol variation (special figure variation or normal figure variation) corresponding to the winning information command is executed, the lottery result of the symbol variation. It is referred to when setting the suggesting effect to suggest.

Next, V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 353 is a flow chart showing V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) executed in timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343). Note that this V entrance passage processing 5 (C108) has the same processing contents as the V entrance passage processing (see S108 in FIG. 270) of the above-described A1 embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the V entrance passage processing 5 (C108), first, it is determined whether or not the present is during a winning game (during a small winning game) (C501). : No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the present is in the winning game (during the small winning game) (C501: Yes), next, during the V winning opening opening period, that is, it is determined whether or not the small winning game is in progress. (C502). In the process of C502, when it is determined that the V winning opening is open (C502: Yes), the V entrance passing command is set (C503), and this process is terminated. If it is determined that the small winning game is not in progress (C502: No), it means that the ball has won the V winning opening 650a of the V winning device 650 even though it is not a small winning game, so an error command is set. (C504), and the process ends.

The V entrance passage command set in the process of C503 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed by the MPU 201 during the external output process (C1001) of the main process (see FIG. 357). , is sent to the audio ramp controller 113 . When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the V entrance passage command, it counts the number of game balls that have passed through the V entrance, and transmits a command for executing an effect based on the V entrance passage to the display control device 114 . As a result, it is possible to execute the effect during the small winning game based on the winning to the V winning device 650 .

Next, V passage processing 5 (C109) executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 354 is a flow chart showing V passage processing 5 (C109) executed in timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343). Note that this V passing process 5 (C109) has the same technical concept as the V passing process (see S109 in FIG. 271) of the above-described A1 embodiment, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the V passage processing 5 (C109) is executed, first, it is determined whether or not there is V passage, that is, whether or not the ball has won a prize in a specific area (V gate (V area)) in the V winning opening 650a (C601). If it is determined that the player has not won a prize (C601: No), this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won a prize (C601: Yes), then it is determined whether the V valid period is currently in effect (C602). In the process of C602, when the progress of the small winning scenario set during the small winning game is within the specific period, it is determined that it is within the V valid period, and in other cases, it is not during the V valid period. and discriminate.

In the process of C602, if it is determined that it is during the V valid period (C602: Yes), then it is determined whether the current small winning game is in progress (C603), and if it is in the small winning game (C603 : Yes), acquire the V passing time jackpot type value corresponding to the small hit type of the small hit game this time (C604), set the V flag corresponding to the jackpot type to ON (C605), and set the time saving medium counter 203g Set to 0 (C606), set the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea to 0 (C607), and proceed to the process of C608.

That is, in the processing of C604 to C607, the processing for executing the big winning game is executed based on the fact that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game. On the other hand, in the process of C603, if it is determined that it is not during the small winning game (C603: No), since there is no need to perform the process for newly executing the big winning game, the processes of C604 to C607 are skipped. , C608.

In the process of C608, a V pass command is set (C608), and this process ends. The V passage command set here is transmitted to the sound lamp controller 113 in the same manner as other commands set in the control processing of the main controller 110 . When the voice ramp control device 113 receives the V passing command, for example, when the V passing command is received during the small winning game, the V challenge executed during the small winning game succeeds, and following the small winning game , an effect is executed to indicate that a jackpot game is to be executed. Further, when the V passing command is received during the big winning game, the same performance as when the V passing command is received during the small winning game is executed. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received at a predetermined timing during the small winning game, a disappointing effect indicating that the ball did not pass through the specific area during the small winning game is executed.

In this embodiment, only a command (V passing command) for indicating that the ball has won (passed) a specific area in the V winning opening 650a is set. It may be configured to set a command (for example, V non-passing command) to indicate that the ball has not won a prize. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an appropriate effect, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, by using the above-described configuration, it is possible to quickly determine that the game balls are jammed in the V winning device 650 .

On the other hand, in the processing of C602, if it is determined that the V valid period is not currently in effect (C602: No), an error command is set (C609), and this processing ends. By performing the process of C609, the state in which the game ball has entered the V winning opening 650a outside the V valid period, that is, when a game is illegally made to enter the V winning opening 650a with the game ball, or when the V winning It is possible to quickly inform the outside of the case where a problem (ball clogging, etc.) occurs in the ball flow path in the port 650a.

Next, NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 355 is a flow chart showing the contents of NMI interrupt processing. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 (C801). That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power-off occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power-off occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt processing.

The above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, a start-up process executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 356 is a flow chart showing the contents of the startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (C901). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (C902). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (C903).

Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (C904). A payout initialization command is sent to initialize the payout control device 111 (C912). On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (C904: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905), and if not stored (C905: No). , there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case also, the payout initialization is performed to initialize the payout control device 111, which is the sub-side control device (peripheral control device). Send the command (C912).

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (C906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (C907: No), If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed up data has been destroyed. A payout initialization command is transmitted (C912). Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203 . Instead of the RAM judgment value, the effectiveness of the backup may be judged based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213 (C913), sets the initial value, and is ready to start the game ball payout control. becomes. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes initialization processing of RAM 203 .

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during execution of startup processing, RAM initialization processing is executed. Similarly, when power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 is initialized (C914). After that, the processing shifts to C910. In the RAM initialization process, the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0, and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on, power failure occurrence information is stored, and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal (C907: Yes), the data is backed up in the RAM 203. While retaining the data, clear the power failure occurrence information (C908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power shutdown is transmitted (C909). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

Then, an effect permission command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 (C910), and execution of various effects is permitted to the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 (C911). Next, the interrupt is permitted, and the main processing, which will be described later, is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 357, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the start-up processing described above will be described. FIG. 357 is a flow chart showing this main process. Main processing of the game is executed in this main processing. As an overview, each process of C1001 to C1008 is executed as a periodical process with a period of 4 ms, and counter update processes of C1011 and C1012 are executed in the remaining time.

In the main process (see FIG. 357), first, during execution of timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343), output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203 is sent to the sub side. (C1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected in the switch reading process of C101 in the timer interrupt processing 5 (see FIG. 343) is determined. Send the corresponding prize ball command. In addition, various commands set in the special symbol variation process 5 (see Figure 344), start winning process 5 (see Figure 348), V entrance passing process 5 (see Figure 353) and V passing process 5 (see Figure 354) Send to the audio ramp controller 113 . Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, etc. necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 . In addition, various commands set in the opening command, the round number command, the ending command and the small hit control processing 5 (see FIG. 359) set in the jackpot control processing 5 (see FIG. 358) are sent to the sound lamp control device 113 Send. In addition, a ball launch signal is sent to the launch control device 112 when the ball is to be launched.

Next, the values of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated (C1002). Specifically, each variation type counter (variation type counter CS1, second variation type counter CS2) is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the various fluctuation type counters are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203 . Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, the value of the variation type counter CS1 is used when referring to the variation pattern of the special symbol variation (special figure variation), and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 The value is used when referring to the variation pattern of normal pattern variation (normal pattern variation). And it is configured to be executed by the establishment of a separate and independent opportunity between the special figure fluctuation and the normal figure fluctuation. As a result, even if the timing of updating the values of the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 and the contents of updating are synchronized, the counter values used when actually executing each symbol variation will not be synchronized. None. Therefore, it is possible to simplify the processing contents of the main controller 110 without affecting the game.

In addition to this, the processing for updating the values of the various fluctuation type counters may be configured not to be synchronized. For example, each time the main processing is executed a predetermined number of times, the value of one fluctuation type counter may be updated, and only the value of the other variation type counter may be updated each time it is executed a specific number of times different from the above-described predetermined number of times. By differentiating the update contents of the various fluctuation type counters in this way, it is possible to prevent the value of one fluctuation type counter from being determined based on the acquired value of the other fluctuation type counter.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the variation type counter CS1 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation, and the second variation type counter CS2 referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, Provided separately, configured to periodically update each counter value, but not limited to this, for example, based on the value of the variation type counter CS1, the variation pattern of special figure variation and normal figure variation may be configured to select

When the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated, the winning ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (C1003). , the execution of the jackpot effect and the jackpot control processing 5 for opening or closing the specific prize winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable prize winning device 65 (C1004). In the jackpot control process 5, the winning door 65b is opened for each round in the jackpot state to open the specific winning port 65a. Determine whether or not a specified number of prizes have been won. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the specific winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process 5 (see FIG. 343). Further, the details of this jackpot control process 5 will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, small hit control processing 5 (C1005) is executed. A detailed description of this small hit control process 5 (C1005) will be given later with reference to FIG. After that, the electric accessary product opening/closing process for controlling the opening/closing of the electric accessary product 640a associated with the second ball entrance (winning hole) 640 is executed (C1006). In the electric accessary product opening/closing process, when the opening/closing control start of the electric accessary product is set by the processing of C622 of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 350), the opening/closing control of the electric accessary product is started. This opening/closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of C616 or C617 in the normal symbol variation processing 5 are completed.

Next, a first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is executed (C1007). In the first symbol display update process, when the variation pattern is set by the process of C236, the process of C240 or the process of C242 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345), the variation display corresponding to the variation pattern is displayed. , the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b. In this embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off and the green LED is turned on. If the green LED is turned on, the green LED is turned off and the blue LED is turned on. If the blue LED is turned on, the blue LED is turned on. is turned off and the red LED is turned on.

Note that the main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Also, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the process of C236, the process of C240 or the process of C242 of the special symbol variation start process 5 (see FIG. 345) has ended, The variation display being executed in the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b is ended, and the stop symbol (the first 1 symbol) is stopped (lighted up) on the first symbol display devices 37a and 37b.

Next, a second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (C1008). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of C616 or the process of C617 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device. do. As a result, in the second pattern display device, a variable display is performed in which the second pattern "O" pattern and the "X" pattern are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device is set by the process of C619 of the normal symbol variation process 5 (see FIG. 350), it is executed in the second symbol display device. Ending the variable display, in the display mode set by the processing of C613 or the processing of C619 of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see FIG. 350), the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lit up) on the second symbol display device indicate.

After that, it is determined whether power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (C1009). SG1 is not output and the power is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main processing has come, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 ms in this embodiment) has elapsed since the start of the main processing this time (C1010). If the predetermined time has already passed (C1010: Yes), the process proceeds to C1001, and the above-described processes after C1001 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet passed since the start of the main processing this time (C1010: No), the next main processing is executed until the predetermined time, that is, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main processing. The first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (C1011, C1012).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (C1011). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (299 and 239 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0. . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the second fluctuation type counter CS2 are updated by the same method as the process of C1002 (C1012).

Here, since the execution time of each process of C1001 to C1008 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1, and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, various fluctuation type counters can be updated at random.

In addition, in the configuration that updates the variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 as in the fifth control example, in order to make the update timings of the various variation type counters different, for example, in C1002 of the main processing In the process, both fluctuation type counters are updated, and in the process of C1012, only one fluctuation type counter (for example, the fluctuation type counter CS1) may be updated.

In addition, in the process of C1009, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (C1009: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, the NMI interrupt process has been executed, so the power-off process after C1013 is executed. First, to prohibit the occurrence of each interrupt processing (C1013), to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as payout control device 111 and sound lamp control device 113) a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off and transmit (C1014). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (C1015), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (C1016), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area backed up in the RAM 203 .

In addition, the process of C1009 is at the end of a series of processes corresponding to the game state change performed in C1001 to C1008, or at the time of the end of one cycle of the processes of C1011 and C1012 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main processing of the main controller 110, information on the occurrence of power failure is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. It can start from the processing of C1001. That is, the processing can be started from the processing of C1001, as in the case of initialization in the start-up processing. Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value ( initial value), the process can be started from C1001. Therefore, the control load on the main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main controller 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process 5 (C1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 358 is a flow chart showing this jackpot control process 5 (C1004). This jackpot control process 5 (C1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in a jackpot state with special symbols, execution of various effects according to the jackpot, variable winning device This is a process for opening or closing the 65 specific winning opening 65a. In addition, in the jackpot control processing 5 (C1004) executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example, the same control processing as the jackpot control processing (see FIG. 275) in the above-described A1 embodiment is executed. There is Therefore, detailed description of the content described in the above-described jackpot control processing (see FIG. 275), modification examples, and additional examples will be omitted, but regarding the content described in each control example or each embodiment described above are of course also applicable.

In the jackpot control process 5 (C1004), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot start flag 203h is on (C1201). When it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is ON (C1201: Yes), the opening command is set (C1202), the jackpot medium flag 203i is set to ON, and the jackpot start flag 203h is set to OFF (C1203). , and then terminate this process.

On the other hand, in the process of C1201, when it is determined that the jackpot start flag 203h is off (C1201: No), it is then determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203i is on (C1204).

In the processing of C1204, when it is determined that the flag 203i during the jackpot is off (C1204: No), this processing is terminated as it is. When it is determined that the jackpot flag 203i is ON (C1204: Yes), it is determined whether or not the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1215). If it is determined in the process of C1205 that the current time is the start timing of a new round (C1205: Yes), the specific winning opening corresponding to the number of rounds is set to be opened (C1206) (Opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a The specific winning opening solenoid is set to ON so that the door 65b is open), then a round number command indicating the number of rounds to be newly started is set (C1207), and then this process is terminated.

The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and in the external output processing (C1001) of the main processing (see FIG. 357) executed by the MPU 201, the sound lamp It is transmitted toward the control device 113 . When the audio ramp controller 113 receives the round number command, it extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display round number command is received by the display control device 114, the third pattern display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when a plurality of jackpot games are executed while satisfying a predetermined continuous condition, the number of rounds executed during a plurality of jackpot games is accumulated. The cumulative number of rounds obtained is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the accumulated number of rounds is determined by determining whether a continuous condition is established when a command indicating that the jackpot game has started (that a jackpot has been won) is received on the voice ramp control device 113 side, and the number of continuous rounds is determined. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the value of the cumulative round counter that accumulates the received round number commands is not cleared, and the value of the cumulative round counter is updated based on the newly received round number command. Then, the accumulated number of rounds is displayed in a display form showing the update result.

With this configuration, the player can be made to think that the consecutively executed jackpot games are one jackpot game. You can show a lot of the maximum number of rounds that can be played. Therefore, it is possible to play the game while making the player feel anticipation for the size of the privilege (the number of prize balls) provided by one jackpot game.

In this control example, the sound lamp control device 113 side is configured to perform the process of determining whether or not the continuous condition is satisfied and the process of accumulating the number of rounds. A part of the processing for executing the number display may be configured to be executed by the main controller 110 side. A continuous condition that is established when the jackpot game is executed within a predetermined number of special figure fluctuations (for example, 5 special figure 2 fluctuations) is set, and the accumulated round number of the jackpot game is measured on the main control device 110 side. A cumulative round number counter is provided, and a command indicating the value of the cumulative round number counter is set as a round number command. Then, the value of the accumulated round number counter is cleared when the special figure 2 variation is executed five times after the end of the jackpot game.

By configuring in this way, when the continuous condition is satisfied when the jackpot game is executed, the value obtained by accumulating the number of rounds of the previous jackpot game is set as the value of the cumulative round number counter. , When the sound lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, it sets the round number display mode to be displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 based on the round number (accumulated round number) information included in the command. The accumulated number of rounds can be notified to the player only by

In addition, as a continuous condition for cumulatively displaying the number of rounds executed in multiple jackpot games, other conditions may be set. is executed, the period until 10 seconds have elapsed since the end of the jackpot game) If the jackpot game is executed during the period when the jackpot game end screen that is continuously displayed is displayed ( For example, when the jackpot game is executed based on the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery) and the condition established as the game state, the jackpot game is executed during the period when the specific game state (for example, time saving state) is set It may be configured to set a condition that is established when the In addition, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, both the value of the cumulative round number counter (accumulated round number) and the round number (single round number) of the current jackpot game are displayed. may be configured.

In the process of C1205, if it is determined that the current timing is not the time to start a new round (C1205: No), then it is determined whether or not the conditions for closing the specific winning opening are satisfied (C1208). If it is determined that the closing condition of the specific winning opening is satisfied (C1208: Yes), the specific winning opening is closed (the specific winning opening solenoid 65f2 is turned off so that the opening and closing door 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is closed ) (C1209), and then the process ends. In the process of C1208, if it is determined that the condition for closing the specific winning opening is not met (C1208: No), then it is determined whether or not the current timing is the start of the ending effect (C1210). If it is determined that now is the time to start the ending effect (C1210: Yes), an ending command is set (C1211), and then this process ends.

In addition, when it is determined that the closing condition is satisfied in the process of C1208, the closing condition is cleared, and it is configured not to determine that the closing condition is satisfied again in the jackpot control process after the next time.

On the other hand, in the process of C1210, if it is determined that the current timing is not the start time of the ending effect (C1210: No), it is determined whether the current time is the end time of the ending effect (C1212). When it is determined that the current is the ending timing of the ending effect (C1212: Yes), the time saving end condition corresponding to the jackpot type is set to the time saving medium counter 203g and the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea (C1213), and the jackpot A state command corresponding to the subsequent game state is set (C1214), the end of the jackpot is set (C1215), and then this process is terminated.

Here, the values set to the values of the counters in the process of C1213 are varied according to the jackpot type corresponding to the jackpot game being executed (see FIGS. 335 and 337). When the type AD ~ AF is set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203g, and "-" is set to indicate that it is not set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea. As a result, after the end of the jackpot game based on the jackpot type AA, as the time saving end condition, the corresponding time saving end condition established based on the special figure 2 fluctuation number is not set, and the common time saving end condition (jackpot winning, small winning game End of, special figure fluctuation number reaches 99 times) only will be set.

When the jackpot AB is set as the jackpot type, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203g, "5" is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea, and when the jackpot AC is set, the time saving medium counter "99" is set to 203g, and "1" is set to the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea.

Further, when a jackpot game is executed based on the winning of a small hit, the value of the jackpot type corresponding to the set small hit type is referred to, and as shown in FIG. At the end of the big win game based on the small win winning in which the types AA and AE are set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203g, "5" is set to the special figure 2 variation counter 203ea, and the small win types AB and AD. is set, "99" is set to the time saving medium counter 203g, and "-" indicating that it is not set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea is set. On the other hand, at the end of the big win game based on the small win winning in which the small win type AC is set, "0" is set to the time saving medium counter 203g, and "0" is set to the special figure 2 fluctuation counter 203ea.

On the other hand, in the process of C1212, if it is determined that the current timing is not the end timing of the ending effect (C1212: No), the process ends.

Next, the small hit control process 5 (C1005) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 359 is a flow chart showing this small winning control process 5 (C1005). This small hit control process 5 (C1005) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 357), setting commands for executing various effects according to the small hit in the audio lamp control device 113, V winning This is processing for controlling the operation of the V winning solenoid for opening and closing the V winning door 600b attached to the mouth 650a.

In the small hit control process 5 (C1005), first, it is determined whether it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301). In the processing of C1301, it is determined whether or not the small winning scenario set in the processing of C291 of the small winning start setting processing 5 (see C223 in FIG. 347) indicates the start of the small winning game. When it is determined that it is the start timing of the small hit game (C1301: Yes), the opening command for the small hit is set (C1302), the flag 203k during the small hit is set to ON (C1303), and the operation for the small hit The start of the scenario is set (C1304), and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of C1301, if it is determined that it is not the start timing of the small winning game (C1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning medium flag 203k is ON (C1305). When it is determined that the flag 203k during the small hit is off (C1305: No), this processing is terminated as it is because it is not during the small hit game at present. When it is determined that the flag 203k during the small hit is ON in the process of C1305 (C1305: Yes), it is then determined whether or not it is the end timing of the small hit game (C1306). When it is determined that it is not the end timing of the small winning game (C1306), this processing is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of C1306, if it is determined that it is the end timing of the small winning game (C1306: Yes), the small winning medium flag 203k is set to OFF (C1307), and the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is reset to 0 (C1308), and it is determined whether the V flag 203n is set to ON (C1309). As described above, in the fifth control example, regardless of whether or not the ball has passed through the specific area during the small winning game, "0" is set as the value of the time saving medium counter 203g after the small winning game ends. It is configured as follows.

One condition of the time saving end condition (common time saving end condition) is set by the processing of this C1308. In other words, when the small winning game is executed during the time saving state, the time saving state also ends with the end of the small winning game, for example, during the time saving state, the small winning game being executed is disadvantageous to the player During the small winning game so that the big winning game based on the small winning game being executed is not executed when it is determined that it is the small winning type (for example, the small winning type in which the big winning game that is disadvantageous to the player can be executed) It is possible to prevent a game in which the ball is not shot (the ball is not passed through the specific area) from being played.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g is always set (reset) to "0" when the small winning game is completed, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, When a small winning game based on a specific small winning type is executed, the value of the time saving medium counter 203g may be set (reset) to "0" after the small winning game ends.

In the process of C1309, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is off (C1309: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the V flag 203n is ON (C1309: Yes), then the start of the jackpot corresponding to the data in the jackpot type storage area is set (C1310), and the V flag 203n is set to OFF. (C1311), and then the process ends.

In addition, in this control example, all small winning games are set as one round games, so unlike the big winning scenario that executes the operation control of the big winning game, the process of setting commands related to the number of rounds, and the interval period (round However, if a small winning game having multiple rounds is provided, a scenario similar to the big winning scenario used in the above-described big winning game may be set.

In addition, in this control example, the small winning scenario is set for the period during which the small winning game is executed. You may set a small hit scenario for between. By configuring in this way, for example, it is possible to set the V passage valid period until one second has elapsed after the end of the small winning game. Therefore, it is possible to set a period that is set across different game states by one scenario, and there is an effect that the volume of control processing can be reduced.

In this control example, when a game ball is detected by the V winning opening 650a in the small winning game, a big winning game corresponding to the preset big winning type corresponding to the small winning is executed. However, the configuration is not limited to this, and the jackpot type may be determined by acquiring the value of the first winning type counter C2 based on the detection of the game ball by the V winning opening 650a.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the fifth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 360 to 375, each control process executed by the MPU 221 within the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. Among the control processes executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the fifth control example, the details of the control processes that are the same as those in the above-described control examples or the respective embodiments are described below. detailed description and illustrations are omitted.

In the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 317, on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the special symbol variation effect corresponding to the special symbol variation (special symbol variation) and the normal symbol variation (general symbol variation ), and the normal figure fluctuation production according to ) are configured to be executable.

Then, the normal pattern fluctuation performance is configured to be executed as a series of performances in which a series of performances are executed across the normal pattern fluctuation period, the normal pattern per game period, the special pattern 2 fluctuation period, and the small per pattern game period. there is By configuring in this way, the game when winning a specific normal pattern (per normal pattern long open) by the normal pattern lottery, that is, the ball during the normal pattern long open per game Wins the second winning port 640 Then, a small win is won by a special figure 2 lottery executed based on the winning, and a big win game is executed by the ball passing through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small win game. The flow can be notified to the player in an easy-to-understand manner by the performance mode of the series of performances.

In addition, the series of effects described above, the execution period is greatly different depending on the game situation (whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time of winning the ball in the second winning port 640 during the game per normal long open, It is configured to set different performance modes according to the game situation (presence or absence of special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time when the ball is won in the second winning hole 640 during the long open per game. In other words, when the ball wins the second winning port 640 during the normal long open per game, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the special figure 2 fluctuation after the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is completed Since is executed, the effect mode according to the length of the remaining variation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 variation is set. Specifically, when the waiting period is less than the predetermined period, an effect mode corresponding to the normal series of effects is set, and when the waiting period is equal to or longer than the predetermined period, the series of effects are pseudo-finished and are being executed. When the remaining variation period (standby period) of the special figure 1 variation reaches a specific period, a continuous series performance is set to execute a series of performances in a pseudo manner again. In this way, by configuring the effect mode of the series of effects to be variably set in accordance with the length of the waiting period, it is possible to provide a series of effects that do not make the player feel uncomfortable. It is possible to suppress the player from becoming bored with the game due to the uselessly lengthening of the performance execution period.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal long open game, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed, the special figure 2 immediately after the ball enters the second winning hole 640 Since variation is executed, a shortened series of effects shorter than the normal series of effects is set.

That is, the fifth control example is configured such that when the normal state is set as the game state, the game for executing the special figure 1 lottery is executed by the left-handed game, and the above-described series of effects is It is executed when the lottery result of the normal pattern lottery (lottery executed based on the ball passing through the through gate 67) executed during the normal state is a specific lottery result (per normal pattern long open). Since it is configured as such, while a series of effects are being executed, there is a high possibility that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed. Therefore, the usual series of productions are the normal figure fluctuation period, the normal figure per game period, the waiting period (the period to wait until the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed), the special figure 2 fluctuation period, and the small per game period. It is constructed so that it is executed straddling and the content of the effect is changed according to the stage to which each period is shifted.

Here, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed at the time when the ball is won in the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, the above-mentioned series of effects are executed Among the periods, the standby period Since does not occur, after the game period per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation period will be set. While such a state can occur, regardless of the game situation (whether or not there is a special figure 1 fluctuation) at the time the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open game, the same production mode If it is set, an unnecessary effect (for example, an effect indicating that the standby period is in progress even though the standby period is not set) may be executed, resulting in a decrease in the effect of the effect. .

On the other hand, in this fifth control example, if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time when the ball enters the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, during the standby period described above It is configured to execute a series of effects skipping the effects. In addition, even if the performance of the standby period is skipped, the performance mode does not give a sense of incongruity to the player when skipping from the normal figure per game period to the special figure 2 fluctuation period so that the performance effect does not decrease. is configured to be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to easily inform the general pattern fluctuation production (series production) executed based on the lottery result of the general pattern lottery.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, as shown in FIG. 318, as a variation effect indicating the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery during the time saving state, the first suggestion effect that suggests only the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery And, in addition to the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery, the judgment result of the special figure 2 lottery corresponding to the prize information included in the special figure 2 reservation is determined in advance. Suggestive production and are configured to be executable.

Specifically, in the time saving state, it is determined whether the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) to be executed this time is the final variation in the time saving state, and the determination result is not the final variation (time saving final variation) If it is determined, the above-described first suggestion effect (see FIG. 327 (a)) is executed as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure 2 variation, and if it is determined that it is a time saving final variation, the special figure 2 The above-described second suggestive effect (see FIGS. 327(b) to 329(a)) is executed as the variable effect corresponding to the change.

By configuring in this way, in the variation performance corresponding to the final variation of the time saving, the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state and the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state (after normal state transition) , Because the second suggestion effect based on the lottery result (preliminary determination result) is executed, the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the time saving state ends for the player is executed as if it were during the time saving state. Since the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery can be reminiscent, the winning probability (big winning probability, small winning probability) in the time saving state can be made to be higher than the actual set value.

In addition, it is easy to set the production mode (success production mode shown in FIG. 329 (a)) indicating winning in the dedicated production (for example, the mission production shown in FIG. 328 (b)) executed during the time saving state Therefore, the performance effect of the dedicated performance can be enhanced.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, the variation time (normal state It is configured so that a short variation time (0.5 seconds) is set as the variation time of the special figure 2 variation executed during), and during the variation period of the special figure 2 variation, it corresponds to the short final variation It is configured to display the effect result of the second suggestive effect that is executed by doing. By configuring in this way, when the successful production is executed based on the fact that the winning information indicating the winning (small winning) winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation as the second suggestive production, the special winning small winning Until the change in FIG. 2 is stopped and displayed, the second suggestive effect can be continuously executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the effect period of the variable effect executed corresponding to the time-saving final variation is divided into a plurality of effect periods, and each effect period is used for a different purpose. Specifically, during the first period from the execution of the time-saving final variation to the elapse of a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), the player acquires a large number of special figures 2 pending before the variation ends. It is configured to execute an effect (holding acquisition effect) for making the game available, and to execute the above-described second suggestion effect during a second period set after the first period.

Then, the production mode of the second suggestive production executed during the second period of the time saving final variation is the special figure 2 at the specific timing (for example, the end timing of the first period) before the second period is set. It is configured to be set based on the number of pending and the result of prior determination.

By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends (when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out), the special figure 2 lottery can be executed the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the execution of a game disadvantageous to the player.

As described above, in the fifth control example, the holding acquisition effect and the second suggestion effect are executed in the time saving final variation. This executes the pending acquisition effect during the special figure 2 fluctuation that is executed before the time saving final variation, and acquired the upper limit number (4) of the special figure 2 suspension while the pending acquisition effect is being executed. Even so, when the special figure 2 variation is executed as the time saving final variation, the special figure 2 reservation is subtracted, so the player is allowed to execute the special figure 2 lottery the maximum number of times (4 times) during the normal state. This is to solve the problem of not being able to

In addition, in this fifth control example, as the second suggestion production that is executed in the time saving final fluctuation, a plurality of special figure 2 lotteries that are the target of production (special figure 2 lottery of time saving final fluctuation, special figure 2 reservation Although it is configured to set a production mode for suggesting to the player whether or not the winning is included in the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery), it is not limited to this, and is the object of production. It may be configured to set an effect mode for suggesting and informing the player of the number of winning lottery results included in a plurality of special figure 2 lotteries. In this case, for example, as the effect mode of the second suggestive effect, the fact that at least one win is included in a plurality of special 2 lotteries to be the target of the effect, is included in the effect mode of the normal second suggestive effect. It is also possible to set a special performance mode in which the player can be informed earlier than the above, and to execute a win number suggesting performance for suggesting and informing the player of the winning number in the special performance mode. In this way, by notifying the player that the winning is included as early as possible, the player can be given a sense of security, and at the same time, it is possible to entertain the effect of suggesting how many winnings are included. can.

First, referring to FIG. 360, command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 360 is a flow chart showing the contents of this command determination process 5 (C3113). This command determination process 5 (C3113) is a process executed in place of the command determination process (see FIG. 140) in the first control example, and is executed during the main process (see FIG. 139). This is a process for executing control according to the type of command received from.

In the command determination process 5, first, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, analyzed, and the winning information command is received from the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not it has been received (C3201). Then, when it is determined that the winning information command has been received (C3201: Yes), the winning information command process 5 is executed (C3202), and this process ends.

Winning information command processing 5 (C3202) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 361 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning information command processing 5 (C3202). Winning information command processing 5 (C3202) is executed when a winning information command is received from main controller 110 during command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113. A process for storing the information included in the received prize information command in the corresponding area (reserved storage area corresponding to the prize information command) of the prize information storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223 is executed.

The information included in the winning information command includes information on the result of win/fail judgment, information on the stop type, information on the variation pattern, and the pattern type (special figure 1, special figure 2, general figure) corresponding to the winning information this time. However, other information may be included, for example, winning information on already winning balls (for which a winning information command has been received in the past) may be included. Further, although detailed description is omitted, in this fifth control example, since the main control device 110 is configured to set the winning information command for indicating the prefetch result of the normal symbol (see FIG. 352), In the winning information storage area 223a, in addition to an area for storing special symbol winning information, an area for storing normal symbol winning information is also formed.

When the winning information command process 5 (C3202) is executed, first, the information (prefetch information) of the received winning information command is stored in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (C3401), and the winning status determination process (C3402) is executed. Execute. As described above, the winning information storage area 223a stores up to four winning information commands for the first special symbol (special figure 1), up to four winning information commands for the second special symbol (special figure 2), It is configured to be able to store up to 4 prize winning commands of normal symbols, totaling 12 prize winning information commands, and the prize winning information commands are stored in a designated storage area in accordance with the order in which the prize winning information commands are received. .

Here, the winning status determination process (C3402) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 362 is a flow chart showing the details of the prize winning status determination process (C3402). This winning status determination process (C3402) is a process executed in the winning information command process 5 (C3202) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the winning information of the normal design (general design) A game state at the time of receiving a command is discriminated, a process for setting a different performance mode based on the discrimination result, and a proper game (left-handed game) is discriminated in a normal state. process is executed.

In the winning status determination process (C3402), first, the presence or absence of the general figure winning (whether the winning information command received this time is a command corresponding to the general figure) is determined (C3451). If it is determined that it is not a normal figure winning (C3451: No), the process proceeds to C3458, which will be described later. When it is determined that it is a normal figure winning (C3451: Yes), next, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223ea provided in the RAM 223 (C3452), and it is determined whether the game state is a normal state. (C3453). If it is determined that the game state is not the normal state (C3453: No), that is, if it is determined that it is the time-saving state, this processing is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the winning information command processing 5.

On the other hand, in the processing of C3453, if it is determined that the gaming state is the normal state (C3453: Yes), then it is determined whether the current first special symbol (special figure 1) is fluctuating (C3454 ). Here, by determining whether the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is greater than 0, it is determined whether the current special figure 1 variation is in progress. If it is determined that the current is not during the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (C3454: No), it is in a state where the normal figure fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure 1 fluctuation is not executed during the normal state, so in RAM223 The provided non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223ef is set to ON (C3455), and the process proceeds to C3458.

By setting the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223ef to ON in the processing of C3455, it is possible to memorize that the winning information command of the normal figure has been received during the normal state and during the special figure 1 non-fluctuation, this time When the general pattern fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the general pattern winning information command is received, by determining the setting status of the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223ef, special figure 1 at the time of general pattern winning (passing through gate 67) It is possible to set different variable performance modes according to the variable situation.

In the fifth control example, as described above with reference to FIG. C3204) is prioritized to execute the processing (C3201, C3202 in FIG. 360) to be executed when the winning information command is received.

Here, in the external output process (C1001 in FIG. 357) of the main process (see FIG. 357) of the main control device 110, the winning information command for the normal figure winning and the variation pattern command for each symbol (special symbol, normal symbol) And, even if is output in the same process, specifically, when the normal pattern winning occurs in a state where the normal pattern fluctuation is not executed, the timer interrupt processing of the main controller 110 (Fig. 343) set the winning information command in the process of C105, and the variation pattern command is set in the process of C104 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 343) executed next (after 2 milliseconds) . Then, in the processing (external output processing) of C1001 of the main processing (see FIG. 357) of the main controller 110 executed every 4 milliseconds, a command that can be output to the sound lamp control device 113 is output. From, depending on the execution timing of the timer interrupt processing and the execution timing of the main processing, when the winning information command for the general figure winning prize and the variation pattern command are output to the audio lamp control device 113 in the same processing There is

In such a case, in the fifth control example, in the command determination processing (see C3113 in FIG. 360) of the audio ramp control device 113, winning information command processing 5 (C3202 in FIG. 363 C3204), so even if the winning information command and the variation pattern command are output at the same time from the main controller 110, when setting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, at the time of non-fluctuation The setting status of the winning flag 223ef can be used for determination without missing.

In the process of C3454, if it is determined that the current special figure 1 is fluctuating (C3454: Yes), then it is determined whether the variation time of special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456) . If it is determined that the variation time of special figure 1 is not 30 seconds or more (C3456: No), then the process proceeds to C3458.

In the process of C3456, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is 30 seconds or more (C3456: Yes), set the display command indicating the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information (C3457), then C3458 to process.

When proceeding to the process of C3458, it determines whether the winning information command received this time is the winning information command corresponding to the first special symbol (special figure 1) (C3458), and determines that it is the winning information command of special figure 1 If so (C3458: Yes), then it is determined whether the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223ef is set to ON (C3459), and if it is determined to be set to ON (C3459: Yes), non- The variable win flag 223ef is set to OFF (C3460), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C3458, if it is determined that the winning information command received this time is not the winning information command of the special figure 1 (C3458: No), whether the information indicating that the left-handed game is performed is received Determine (C3461). In the process of C3461, for example, it is determined whether winning information indicating winning of a ball to each winning hole (general winning hole 63) provided in the left game area of the game board 13 is received.

In the process of C3461, when it is determined that the left-handed game is detected (C3461: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described C3459 process, and when it is determined that the left-handed game is not detected (C3461: No), This process is terminated as it is.

As described above, this fifth control example determines whether the special figure 1 variation is being executed at the time when the normal figure winning (the ball passes through the through gate 67), and the special figure 1 variation is being performed When it is determined that there is no change, the non-fluctuation prize winning flag 223ef for indicating that is set to ON. In addition, when the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to ON and information indicating that the special figure 1 winning or the left-handed game is performed is received, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is set to OFF. It is configured to

And, although the details will be described later, when the normal pattern long fluctuation is executed in a state where the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223ef is set to ON, the fluctuation production (series production) corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation configured not to run.

By configuring in this way, in the state where the normal state is set, the game situation where the normal figure fluctuation is executed without performing the left-handed game (through-gate provided in the right-hand side game area by the right-handed game 67), and in that case, it is possible to prevent the execution of the variation production corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation (the production suggesting that the normal pattern per game is executed). .

Further, in the fifth control example, even if the left-handed game is properly executed, depending on the winning condition of the ball to the first winning opening 64, special figure 1 at the timing when the normal figure winning occurs Since there is a case where the variation is not executed, the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef set to ON at the time of the normal drawing winning can be set to OFF by the left-handed game. As a result, for example, by executing a left-handed game within a predetermined period from the normal figure winning to the start of the normal figure fluctuation, the variation production corresponding to the normal figure long fluctuation (the normal figure per game is executed It is possible to execute normally. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the setting of an effect mode that is disadvantageous to a player who is playing a proper game.

In addition, as long as it is possible to determine that a proper game (a left-handed game in a normal state) is being played, it is not limited to the configuration of the fifth control example described above. It may be possible to determine whether a left-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (fire intensity) of a variable resistor that detects the amount of rotation operation by the change in electrical resistance, or the game board 13 Detecting means for detecting passage of balls is provided in a part of the left game area (upstream area where most of the balls flowing down the left game area pass), and a left-handed game is executed based on the detection result in the detecting means. It may be configured so that it can be determined whether the

Further, in the fifth control example described above, a configuration for determining whether or not a left-handed game is being executed is used, but not limited to this, a configuration for determining whether or not a right-handed game is being executed Use, in a state where it is determined that the right-handed game is being executed, when the predetermined normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern long fluctuation) is executed, the variation production corresponding to the normal pattern long fluctuation (normal pattern per game It may be configured to limit the execution of the effect suggesting that the is executed). In this case, as a configuration for determining that the right-handed game is being executed, when it is detected that the ball has passed through a predetermined area (for example, through gate 67) provided in the right game area A configuration that determines that a right-handed game is being executed, and a variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 or the amount of rotation operation (rotation position) by changes in electrical resistance It may be configured to be able to determine whether a right-handed game is being executed based on the resistance value (firing intensity).

Furthermore, in the fifth control example, it is configured to determine whether or not the player is executing a proper game in the period from the normal pattern winning to the start of the normal pattern fluctuation. However, without being limited to this, the period used for determining whether or not a proper game is being executed (determination target period) may be set longer. In this case, for example, a game situation storage means capable of temporarily storing the game situation is provided, and the game situation (past history) indicating whether or not the player is playing a left-handed game is stored in the game situation storage means. It is preferable to configure so as to determine whether or not the regular pattern has been won during a proper game based on the game situation stored in the game situation storage means at the timing of the regular pattern winning.

Furthermore, as a winning information command (normal drawing winning information command) set when a normal drawing winning is performed, a winning information command indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 disposed in the left game area Winning information command) and the normal figure winning information command (right normal figure winning information command) indicating that the ball has passed through the through gate 67 arranged in the right game area are identified by the audio lamp control device 113 side. Based on the type of the received general pattern winning information command and the game situation, the execution limit of the variation production corresponding to the general pattern long fluctuation (the production that suggests that the game per normal pattern is executed) may be configured to be variably set.

Returning to FIG. 361, the description continues. As information (prefetch information) included in the winning information command received this time, it is determined whether or not there is special 2 winning information (C3403). In the process of C3403, if it is determined that there is no special 2 winning information (C3403: No), then the process proceeds to C3406. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is special 2 winning information (C3403: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223ed provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3404). When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is off (C3404: No), the process of C3405 is skipped and the process proceeds to C3406.

When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is ON in the process of C3404 (C3404: Yes), the information indicating the hit notification is set in the corresponding winning information storage area 223a (C3405), and then the process of C3406 is performed. do.

In the process of C3406, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C3406), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C3407), then this process is terminated and the process returns to command determination process 5.

In this control example, a specific effect set at the beginning of the variable display (for example, a specific effect C (see FIG. 101) executed 5 seconds after the start of the fluctuation display) is changed to a specific effect set in another period (for example, It is defined to be an effect indicating that the degree of expectation for a big hit is higher than a specific effect executed 20 seconds after the start of fluctuation. In other words, the variation pattern corresponding to the jackpot winning of the special symbol is stipulated so that the variation pattern capable of executing the specific effect C is more likely to be selected.

As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays, the player can be made to have a higher expectation of winning a big prize in the next and subsequent variations. Furthermore, it is possible to make the player ambitiously accumulate special symbols so that a suggestive effect across a plurality of fluctuations is executed.

In addition, in this control example, as described above, based on the winning information included in the received winning information command and the timing of receiving the winning information command (remaining period of the variable display being executed), a plurality of variable displays are displayed. , but other configurations may be used, for example, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display during execution). may be determined whether or not to be executed, and if it is determined to be executed, an omen effect is executed as a suggestive effect, and at the timing of starting the next variable display, a specific effect may be set. , a specific effect is set based on the contents of the player's operation of the frame button 22 during the period in which the portent effect is being executed (the specific effect to be the target of the suggestive effect is set from a plurality of specific effects). Also good. By configuring in this way, based on the game situation after the suggestive effect is started (the lottery result of the next change, the variation pattern, or the operation content of the operation means (frame button 22)), the suggestive effect is produced. Aspects can be set. Therefore, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom of the presentation as compared with the configuration in which the presentation mode of the suggestive presentation is determined in advance and then executed.

In addition, in this control example, as an example of executing a suggestive effect across a plurality of variable displays, the variable display being executed and the variable display to be executed next time based on the winning information won during the variable display are selected. However, the present invention is not limited to this, as long as the suggestive effect is executed across a plurality of variable displays. For example, the winning information won during the variable display is executed one after another. In the case of variable display, the suggestive effect may be executed so as to extend from the variable display being executed to the variable display that is executed one after another, or it will be executed one after another from the variable display that is executed next time. A suggestion effect may be executed so as to straddle the variable display. In this case, based on the timing of receiving the winning information command (the remaining period of the variable display being executed), it is determined whether the timing of executing the suggestive effect is set to the variable display being executed or to the next variable display. It is good to have a means to do so.

The winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is referred to when selecting the contents of various effects set by the sound lamp control device 113. For example, the number of pending balls of special symbols is displayed in the pending display area. In Dn4, in order to suggest a pending display (a pending pattern) corresponding to winning information indicating a big hit, a pending change notice effect for changing the display mode of the pending display is set, or a special pattern corresponding to winning information indicating a big win is set. It is referred to when setting a continuous advance notice effect that makes a big hit expected as a special symbol effect that starts to change before.

In addition, in the fifth control example, the prize information stored in the prize information storage area 223a is referred to at the time of winning the jackpot, during the jackpot game, or at the end of the jackpot, and the prize information indicating the jackpot is included in the hold. (whether or not there is an on-hold renso), and based on the result of the determination, an effect is set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot ends. In addition, even in the continuous effect executed during the variable probability state, the content of the effect is selected based on the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a.

Although detailed description is omitted, in this control example, when an effect (read-ahead effect) referring to the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is being executed, a flag ( For example, when the prefetching effect in progress flag) is set to ON and the prefetching effect in progress flag is set to ON, when a new prize information command is received, the winning prize included in the prize information command is displayed. It is configured so that a new look-ahead effect based on information is not executed. This suppresses the occurrence of the problem that a plurality of look-ahead effects are continuously executed without an interval, giving the player a sense of discomfort.

It should be noted that control other than the above-described contents for solving the above-described problem may be used. Comparing the priority rank of the pre-reading effect currently being given and the priority rank of the pre-reading effect that can be set based on the prize information included in the new prize information command, the pre-reading effect with the higher priority rank may be controlled to execute In this case, when it is determined that the priority rank of the new look-ahead performance is higher, the look-ahead performance switching notification is executed to notify the player that the look-ahead performance being executed will end in the middle. After that, a new look-ahead effect is executed, or a new look-ahead effect is executed after changing the effect mode of the look-ahead effect being executed to a shortened look-ahead effect mode earlier than the end timing initially set. You can

Further, as the priority rank of the look-ahead effect, the priority rank of the look-ahead effect corresponding to the winning information indicating that the jackpot has been won is the highest. should be set to be high. Thus, when the read-ahead performance being executed ends in the middle, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the big win, and can be made to pay attention to the new read-ahead performance to be executed next.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the process of C3201, if it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (C3201: No), then it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3203). If it is determined that the variation pattern command has been received (C3203: Yes), variation pattern command processing 5 is executed (C3204), and then the process returns to the main processing. The variation pattern type extracted in the variation pattern command process 5 is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to for determining the detailed display mode of the variation pattern in the variation display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) described later. . Then, it is used to set a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern type. In addition, in the fifth control example, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to set a variation pattern for special symbols (special symbols) and a variation pattern for normal symbols (general figure), this time It is determined whether the received variation pattern command is for a special figure or for a normal figure, and processing based on the determination result is also executed.

Here, variation pattern command processing 5 (C3204) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 363 is a flow chart showing the contents of variation pattern command processing 5 (C3204). This variation pattern command process 5 (C3204) is executed when a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110 in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. is.

In the variation pattern command process 5 (C3204), first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: No), skip the processes of C3302 and C3303 and proceed to the process of C3304. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is a special figure variation pattern command (C3301: Yes), the variation start flag 223d for special figures provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON ( C3302), extracts the variation pattern from the received special figure variation pattern command (C3303), and then proceeds to the process of C3304.

In the process of C3304, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is the normal figure variation pattern command (C3304). If it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 is not the normal figure variation pattern command (C3304: No), skip the processes of C3305 and C3306 and return to the command determination process 5.

On the other hand, in the process of C3304, if it is determined that the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 is the variation pattern command for the normal figure (C3304: Yes), the variation start flag 223d for the normal figure provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3305), the variation pattern is extracted from the received normal figure variation pattern command (C3306), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to command determination process 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the processing of C3203, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (C3203: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3205). When the stop type command is received (C3205: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223e of the RAM 223 is set to ON (C3206), the stop type is extracted from the received stop type command (C3207), and the main Return to processing. The stop type extracted here is stored in the RAM 223 and referred to when the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) described later is executed. Then, it is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variable effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C3205 that the stop type command has not been received (C3205: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball count command has been received from main controller 110 (C3208). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command is received (C3208: Yes), the pending ball number is extracted from the received pending ball number command, and the special symbol (special symbol 1 or special symbol 2) is generated. Store the value contained in the reserved ball number command received from the special symbol reserved ball number counter or the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (C3209), and then return to the main process. Specifically, when the reserved ball number command received this time is the reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main controller 110 from the received reserved ball number command A value (number N1 of suspension of variable display in special symbol 1) is extracted and stored in special symbol 1 suspension ball number counter 223b provided in RAM 223 of voice lamp control device 113. On the other hand, if the reserved ball number command received this time is a reserved ball number command corresponding to the special symbol 2, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 (special The holding number N2 of the variable display in the symbol 2) is extracted and stored in the special symbol 2 holding ball number counter 223c provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the process of C3208, if it is determined that the command for the number of pending balls has not been received (C3208: No), then it is determined whether a hit-related command has been received (C3210), and if a hit-related command has been received (C3210: Yes), hit-related command processing 5 (C3211) is executed, and after completion of the hit-related command processing 5 (C3211), this processing ends.

Here, the contents of the win-related command process 5 (C3211) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 364 is a flow chart showing the contents of the win-related command process 5 (C3211). Win-related command processing 5 (C3211) is processing executed in command determination processing 5 (C3113) executed by MPU 221 in sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In the hit-related command process 5, first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot-related command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3501). And when it determines with having received the jackpot related command (C3501: Yes), a jackpot related command process is performed (C3502), and after that, it transfers to the process of C3503.

Here, the contents of the jackpot related command process (C3502) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 365 is a flow chart showing the contents of the jackpot-related command process (C3502). The jackpot-related command process (C3502) is a process executed in the hit-related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the jackpot-related command process (C3502), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3601). When it is determined that an opening command has been received (C3601: Yes), the display opening command process is executed (C3602), and then the process proceeds to C3608.

The display opening command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is displayed during command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

In the processing of C3601, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C3601: No), then it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (C3603). Here, when the round number command is received (C3603: Yes), the round number is extracted from the received round number command (C3604), and then the round number command for display is set according to the round number extracted this time. (C3605), and then proceeds to the processing of C3608. The display round number command set here is stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and in the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221, It is transmitted toward the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

Here, although detailed description is omitted, in the fifth control example, when a jackpot game is executed in a state where a predetermined continuous condition is satisfied, the round game executed in the previous jackpot game The number is configured to accumulate and display the number of round games of the jackpot game to be executed this time. Specifically, the period during which the time saving state is set, and after the transition from the time saving state to the normal state, the period flag is set to ON for the period until the special figure 1 variation is executed is provided. Then, when the jackpot game is started, it is determined whether the period flag is set to ON, and when it is determined that it is set to ON, the number of round games executed in the previous jackpot game (Number of rounds) is configured to accumulate and display the number of rounds of the jackpot game this time.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the processing of C3603 that the round number command has not been received (C3603: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from main controller 110 (C3606). If it is determined that the ending command has been received (C3606: Yes), the display ending command is set (C3607), and then the process proceeds to C3608. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is executed during the command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221. It is sent towards the controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

In the process of C3606, if it is determined that the ending command has not been received (C3606: No), the process proceeds to C3608. In the process of C3608, the process corresponding to other commands is executed (C3608), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the win-related command process 5.

Returning to FIG. 364, the description continues. In the process of C3501, if it is determined that the jackpot related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3501: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit related command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3503). And, when it is determined that the small hit related command is received (C3503: Yes), the small hit related command process is executed (C3504), and then the process proceeds to C3505.

Here, the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504) will be described with reference to FIG. 366(a). FIG. 366(a) is a flow chart showing the contents of the small hit related command process (C3504). The small hit related command process (C3504) is a process executed in the hit related command process 5 (C3211) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the small hit related command process (C3504), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3701). If it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (not on) (C3701: No), the normal small winning process is executed (C3702), then this process is terminated and the process returns to the winning related command process 5. .

As described above, in the fifth control example, the effect mode when the small winning game is executed is configured to be variably set according to whether the small winning game execution timing is in the middle of a series of effects. . That is, when a small winning game is executed during a series of productions, a small winning game production (see FIG. 324) is executed as part of the series of productions. By configuring in this way, it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Here, the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702) will be described with reference to FIG. 366(b). FIG. 366(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal small winning process (C3702). The normal small hit process (C3702) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the normal small winning process (C3702), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning start command is received from the main controller 110 (C3801). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received (C3801: Yes), the display small hit start command is set (C3802), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

In the process of C3801, if it is determined that the small winning start command has not been received (C3801: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3803). . When it is determined that the small hit end command is received (C3803: Yes), the small hit end command for display is set (C3804), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

In the processing of C3803, if it is determined that the small winning end command has not been received (C3803: No), then it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3805). When it is determined that the V passing command is received (C3805: Yes), the V passing command for display is set (C3806), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 366(a), the description is continued. If it is determined that the series production flag 223eb is ON in the process of C3701 (C3701: Yes), the small winning game of this time is a small winning game executed during the series production, so the small winning process for series production is executed. Execute (C3703), then terminate this process and return to win-related command process 5.

Here, the contents of the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 367 is a flow chart showing the contents of the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703). A small hit process for a series of effects (C3703) is a process executed in the small hit related command process (C3504) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. In the small winning process for a series of effects (C3703), first, it is determined whether or not a small winning start command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3901). Then, when it is determined that the small hit start command is received (C3901: Yes), the series production hit start command is set (C3902), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

In the processing of C3901, when it is determined that the command to start the small hit has not been received (C3901: No), next, it is determined whether or not the V passing command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3903). If it is determined that the V passing command has been received (C3903: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the small hit caution flag 223ee provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C3904). When it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee is off (C3904: No), the V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3905), and then this process is terminated to return to the small hit related command process.

Here, the small winning caution flag 223ee indicates that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a even after a predetermined period of time (for example, 3 seconds) has passed, even though the small winning game is being executed. A flag that is set on if not. In the fifth control example, the game board 13 is configured so that it takes about 1 second for the ball fired to reach the V winning device 650 in a right-handed game. When performing a right-handed game based on the execution of the game, the small hit caution flag 223ee is configured not to be set to ON.

On the other hand, if a left-handed game is played without noticing that a small winning game is being executed, or an inappropriate game is performed in which the number of balls fired during the small winning game is intentionally reduced (including 0). If it is, the ball may not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a after 3 seconds from the start of the small winning game, so the small winning attention flag 223ee is turned on. Easier to set. By setting this small hit caution flag 223ee to ON, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 emphasizes guidance display (see FIG. 325(a)) for causing the player to play the game to the right. be done. Also, at the timing when the ball passes through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a, different display modes are set depending on whether the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to ON or OFF. For example, when the V passing command is received in a state where the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to ON, in the next small hit game, a guidance effect for quickly performing the right-handed game is executed.

In the process of C3904, when it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee is ON (C3904: Yes), the special V effect command for displaying a series of effects is set (C3906), then this process is terminated and the small hit Return to related command processing. The special V effect command for displaying a series of effects set here is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 223, and executed by the MPU 221 in the command output process (S3102) of the main process (see FIG. 139). Inside, it is sent to the display controller 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the special V effect command for displaying a series of effects, the third symbol display device 81, as part of the series of effects, indicates that the timing at which the ball passed through the V in the small winning game this time was late. The V effect including the effect mode shown (for example, the comment "Let's hit the right sooner next time") is started.

On the other hand, in the process of C3903, if it is determined that the V passing command has not been received (C3903: No), then it is determined whether or not the small winning end command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3907 ). If it is determined that the small hit end command is received (C3907: Yes), then it is determined whether there is V passage (C3908), and if it is determined that there is V passage (C3908: Yes), a series of effects A small hit end command for display is set (C3909), after that, the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to OFF (C3912), this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

On the other hand, in the processing of C3908, if it is determined that there is no V passage (C3908: No), a display command indicating the end of the series of effects is set (C3910), the series of effects flag 223eb is set to OFF (C3911), The small hit attention flag 223ee is set to OFF (C3912), after that, this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

That is, if the ball does not pass through the specific area in the small winning game during the series of effects, it is not possible to display the effect result indicating the occurrence of the big winning game as the effect result of the series of effects, so the end of the series of effects ( A presentation mode (see FIG. 325(b)) indicating failure is set. Also, when it is determined that the small hit end command is not received in the process of C3907 (C3907: No), then this process is terminated and the process returns to the small hit related command process.

Returning to FIG. 364, the description continues. In the process of C3503, if it is determined that the small hit related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3503: No), then whether or not the general figure per related command has been received from the main controller 110 Determine (C3505). Then, when it is determined that the per-universal figure related command is received (C3505: Yes), the display command corresponding to the per-universal figure related command is set (C3506), and then this process is terminated to determine the command Return to process 5.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the processing of C3210, if it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3210: No), then it is determined whether or not the status command has been received from the main controller 110 (C3212). If it is determined that a state command has been received (C3212: Yes), the current game state is extracted from the received command, stored in the state storage area 223ea (C3213), and a state command for display is set (C3214). , and then terminate this process.

In addition, in the process of C3213, when the state designation command set in the process of S1214 of the jackpot control process (S1104) executed by the main controller 110 described above with reference to FIG. 137 in the first control example described above is received , a process of storing the game state set after the end of the big win is executed separately from the current game state. By configuring in this way, the state command indicating the current game state is distinguished from the state designation command indicating the game state (planned game state) set when a predetermined condition is established (when the jackpot ends). can be stored as After the jackpot is completed, a state command indicating the current game state is received. At that time, the content of the state command indicating the current game state and the content of the state designation command indicating the scheduled game state are combined. It is also possible to provide determination means for determining whether or not they match, and to determine whether or not the game state is properly set based on the determination result of the determination means. As a result, for example, it is possible to suppress fraudulent behavior such as illegally changing the game state after the end of the big win to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

In the processing of C3212, if it is determined that the status command has not been received (C3212: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop command has been received (C3215), and if the stop command has been received (C3215: Yes ), the stop command process 5 (C3216) is executed, and after the stop command process 5 ends, this process ends.

Here, the contents of stop command processing 5 (C3216) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 368 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 5 (C3216). The stop command process 5 (C3216) is a process executed in the command determination process 5 (C3113) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG. In the stop command process 5, first, it is determined whether the special figure stop command is received (C3951), and if it is determined that the special figure stop command is received (C3951: Yes), then the special figure fluctuation time counter The value of 223eg is reset to 0 (C3952), and it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to ON (C3953).

In the process of C3953, when it is determined that the pseudo series production flag 223ec is set to ON (C3953: Yes), the stop command received this time is a special figure that executes a series of productions as a variation production of the special figure deviation fluctuation Since it is a fluctuation, the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to OFF (C3954), and the process proceeds to S3955. On the other hand, in the process of C3953, when it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is not set to ON (C3953: No), the process of C3954 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C3955.

In the process of C3955, it is determined whether the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is set to ON (C3955), and if it is determined that it is set to ON (C3955: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag is set to ON (C3956 ), the time saving final fluctuation flag is set to OFF (C3957), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C3955, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is not set to ON (C3955: No), this process is terminated as it is.

Returning to FIG. 360, the description continues. In the process of C3215, if it is determined that the stop command has not been received from the main controller 110 (C3215: No), the process corresponding to the received command is executed (C3217), and this process ends. . For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 .

By this processing, commands for performing various settings for the display control device 114 can be set based on commands output from the main control device 110 .

Next, with reference to FIG. 369, variable display setting processing 5 (C3114) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 369 is a flow chart showing this variable display setting process 5 (C3114). This variable display setting process 5 (C3114) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example, and is executed in the third symbol display device 81 to produce a variable effect. , a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main controller 110 .

The variable display setting process 5 (C3114) of the fifth control example sets a normal pattern display variable pattern command for each control example described above or the variable display setting process used in each embodiment. It is largely different in that it is configured as described above and that the content of the variable effect to be set is changed, and the other elements (technical concept) are the same. Detailed descriptions of the elements (technical concept) that are the same as those of the above-described control examples or the variable display setting process used in each embodiment will be omitted.

In the variable display setting process 5 (C3114), first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag 223d provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C4001). In the process of C4001, either the fluctuation start flag 223d for the special figure or the fluctuation start flag 223d for the normal figure in the process of C3302 and C3305 of the above-described fluctuation pattern command process 5 (see C3204 in FIG. 363) is set to on.

Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is not on (that is, the fluctuation start flag 223d for the special figure and the fluctuation start flag 223d for the normal figure are both off) (C4001: No), the main control Since no variation pattern command has been received from the device 110, the process proceeds to C4006. On the other hand, if it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223d is ON (C4001: Yes), the corresponding fluctuation start flag 223d is set to OFF (C4002), then C3303 of fluctuation pattern command processing 5 (see FIG. 363) And in the process of C3306, the variation pattern type in the variation effect extracted from the variation pattern command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4003), and the variation effect setting process is executed (C4004). Details of the variable effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Then, based on the obtained variation pattern type and the variation pattern set in the variation effect setting process (C4004 in FIG. 370), a display variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (C4005). After that, the processing shifts to C4006. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command, Display control of the variable effect is started.

In the process of C4006, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is ON (C4006). If it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is not ON (that is, it is OFF) (C4006: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this variable display is performed. End the setting process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223e is on (C4006: Yes), the corresponding stop type selection flag 223e is turned off (C4007), and then in command determination processing 5 (C3207 in FIG. 360) , the stop type in the variable performance extracted from the stop type command is acquired from the RAM 223 (C4008). Next, the stop type instructed by the stop type command from the main controller 110 is set as it is as the stop type of the variable effect in the third symbol display device 81 (C4009), and the process proceeds to C4010. In the processing of C4010, based on the set stop type, a display stop type command for notification to the display control device 114 is generated, and the command is set for transmission to the display control device 114 (C4010). , and then terminate this process. In the display control device 114, by receiving this stop type command for display, the stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by this stop type command for display is stopped and displayed on the third pattern display device 81. The stop display of the variable production is controlled.

Next, with reference to FIG. 370, the variation effect setting process (C4004) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 370 is a flow chart showing this variable effect setting process (C4004). This variable effect setting process (C4004) is a process executed in the variable display setting process 5 (see FIG. 369) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and the variable effect mode of the special symbol, Alternatively, a process for setting a normal pattern variation effect mode is executed.

In the fluctuation production setting process (C4004), first, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation production setting process of this time sets the fluctuation production of the special symbol fluctuation (special figure fluctuation) (C4101). In the processing of this C4101, in the processing of C4001 of the variable display setting processing 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369), when it is determined that the special figure fluctuation start flag 223d is set to ON, this time fluctuation effect setting processing Determines that is to set the variation effect of the special figure variation. Here, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation production is not set (set the normal figure fluctuation production) (C4101: No), the normal figure production setting process is executed (C4117), and then this process is terminated . Details of the general pattern effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. A process for setting the effect mode of the variable effect based on is executed.

In the process of C4101, if it is determined to set the special figure fluctuation effect (C4101: Yes), the information indicating the game state stored in the state storage area 223ea is read (C4102), and the current game state is the normal state. It is determined whether there is (C4103). When it is determined that the current game state is not the normal state (it is a time saving state) (C4103: No), a time saving effect setting process is executed (C4104), and then the process proceeds to C4116. Production setting processing for time reduction (C4104) is processing for setting the production mode of the variable production to be executed in the time reduction state. A detailed description of this time saving effect setting process (C4104) will be given later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4103, if it is determined that the game state is the normal state (C4103: Yes), it is determined whether the re-read-ahead flag 223em is set to ON (C4105), and the re-read-ahead flag 223em is set to ON. If it is determined that it is set (C4105: Yes), that is, the current variation production is a variation production corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of the first rotation after the time saving state ends, and during the time saving state If there is a special figure 2 suspension in which the look-ahead result is not reflected in the time saving final variation performance executed in the time saving final variation among the special figure 2 suspension acquired in the winning prize stored in the winning information storage area 223a Of the information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2), extract the winning information (winning information corresponding to special figure 2) that has not been prefetched (C4106), and hit the winning information in the extracted winning information It is determined whether or not there is winning information included (C4107).

In the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is winning information including winning information (C4107: yes), a display command for replacing the result display mode of the time-saving variation effect with the recovery winning display mode is set (C4108) , the re-read-ahead flag 223em is turned off (C4109), and the process proceeds to C4110. On the other hand, in the process of C4105, if it is determined that the re-read-ahead flag 223em is not set to ON (C4105: No), the variable production setting process of this time is executed at the timing of changing the result display mode of the time-saving variable production. Therefore, the processing from C4106 to C4109 is skipped, and the processing shifts to C4110. Also, in the process of C4107, if it is determined that there is no winning information including winning information in the extracted winning information (C4107: No), the variable effect setting process of this time changes the result display mode of the time-saving variable effect. However, the condition for changing the result display mode (including that the new prefetch result is a hit) is not satisfied, so the process of C4108 is skipped, the process of C4109 is executed, and the process of C4110 is performed. to

In the process of C4110, it is determined whether the current time is within the extended display period of the time-saving variable effect executed during the time-saving state (C4110), and the game result during the extended display period, that is, during the time-saving state is displayed. If it is determined that the end screen (see FIG. 331) is displayed (C4110: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the variation effect corresponding to the variation. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not within the extended display period (C4110: No), next, based on the variation pattern acquired in the process of C4003 in FIG. is discriminated (C4111).

In the process of C4111, when it is determined that the current variation pattern is the winning variation pattern (C4111: Yes), the winning variation effect setting process is executed (C4112), and then the process proceeds to C4116. In this hit variation effect setting process (C4112), the process of determining whether or not to execute a series of effects as this special figure variation effect, and when a series of effects are executed as a normal figure variation effect, the series of effects A performance result replacement process is executed. The hit variation effect setting process (C4112) will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4111, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a winning variation pattern (C4111: No), then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb is on (C4113), If it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is ON (C4113: Yes), then the process proceeds to C4116.

In the process of C4113, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4113: No), based on the extracted variation pattern, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects ( C4114). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not the variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: No), then the process proceeds to C4116.

On the other hand, in the process of C4114, if it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern of a series of effects (C4114: Yes), the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is set to ON (C4115), and then to the process of C4116 Transition.

In the process of C4116, the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is set (C4116), and then this process is terminated and the process returns to the fluctuation display setting process 5.

Next, with reference to FIG. 371, the normal figure effect setting process (C4117) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 371 is a flow chart showing this general-purpose drawing effect setting process (C4117). This general figure effect setting process (C4117) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and is a variation effect based on the normal figure variation. A process for setting (a series of effects) is executed.

In the normal figure effect setting process (C4117), first, the current game state is read from the state storage area 223ea provided in the RAM 223 (C4201), and it is determined whether or not the read current game information is in the normal state. (C4202). If it is determined that the current game information is not in the normal state (C4202: No), then this processing is terminated.

In the processing of C4202, if it is determined that the current game information is in the normal state (C4202: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variation time is 30 seconds or longer (C4203). If it is determined that the fluctuation time is not longer than 30 seconds (C4203: No), then this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more (C4203: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb is ON (C4204).

If it is determined in the process of C4204 that the series effect flag 223eb is ON (C4204: Yes), then this process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4204: No), then it is determined whether or not the non-fluctuation winning flag 223ef is on (C4205). is off (C4205: No), next, it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is on (C4206). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is off (C4206: No), the series effect is set (C4207), the series effect flag 223eb is set to ON (C4208), and then this processing is terminated.

In the process of C4206, if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is ON (C4206: Yes), set the normal figure fluctuation pattern corresponding to the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation time (C4209), then this process exit.

On the other hand, in the process of C4205, if it is determined that the non-fluctuation winning a prize flag 223ef is ON (C4205: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is greater than 0 (C4210 ), If it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is not greater than 0 (is 0) (C4210: No), the normal figure fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure fluctuation is not executed Therefore, this process is terminated as it is without setting the normal pattern fluctuation effect for showing the lottery result of the normal pattern fluctuation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when the special figure fluctuation is not executed, it is configured not to set the normal figure fluctuation effect, but not limited to this, for example, the normal figure fluctuation effect may be configured to execute a normal pattern variation effect to be executed at different timings, and based on the normal pattern variation effect to be executed, the electric accessory 640a is long open according to the lottery result of the current normal pattern lottery. It is only necessary to configure the timing to make it difficult for the player to easily determine the timing.

In the process of C4210, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is greater than 0 (C4210: Yes), set the special series effect (C4211), set the series effect flag 223eb to ON (C4212 ), and then terminate this process.

As described above, in the fifth control example, in the case where the normal figure fluctuation time is equal to or longer than the predetermined time (30 seconds), based on the execution status of the series of effects and the status of the special figure fluctuation during execution It is configured to set the normal figure fluctuation production (normal figure production). By configuring in this way, when an effect that makes it easy to inform the player of the lottery result that is advantageous to the player is executed as a special figure variation effect for displaying the lottery result of the special figure variation, the normal figure effect is that. It is possible to suppress the situation of hindering the special figure fluctuation performance, and to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, with reference to Drawing 372, production setting processing for time saving (C4104) performed by MPU221 in sound lamp control device 113 is explained. FIG. 372 is a flow chart showing this effect setting process for time saving (C4104). This time saving effect setting process (C4104) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

In the production setting process for time saving (C4104), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure fluctuation of this time is the fluctuation of the special figure 2 (C4301). If it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is not the variation of the special figure 2 (C4301: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is the variation of the special figure 2 (C4301: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the special figure variation of this time is the time saving final variation (C4302). If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the time saving final fluctuation (C4302: No), this process is terminated as it is. If it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is the final time saving fluctuation (C4302: Yes), the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is set to ON (C4303), and the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read. (C4304), based on the lottery result of the variation and the lottery result included in the winning information, the variation pattern of the final variation is set (C4305), and then this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 373, the hit variation effect setting process (C4112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 373 is a flow chart showing this winning variation effect setting process (C4112). This hit variation effect setting process (C4112) is executed in the variation effect setting process (see FIG. 370) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113.

In the hit variation effect setting process (C4112), first, it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb is ON (C4401). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4401: No), next, it is determined whether or not the current variation pattern is the variation pattern of the series effect (C4402). If it is determined that the current variation pattern is not a variation pattern for a series of effects (C4402: No), this processing is terminated. When it is determined that the current variation pattern is a variation pattern for a series of effects (C4402: Yes), the series of effects flag 223eb is set to ON (C4403), and then this process is set.

On the other hand, in the process of C4401, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is ON (C4401: Yes), the fluctuation stop timing and the series effect branch timing are analyzed (C4404), and then the result can be replaced. It is determined whether or not there is (C4405). If it is determined that the result cannot be replaced (C4405: No), this processing ends. If it is determined that the result can be replaced (C4405: Yes), a replacement command for display indicating a change pattern for replacing the effect result of the series of effects is set (C4406), and then this processing is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 374, the effect update process 5 (C3112) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 374 is a flowchart showing effect update processing 5 (C3112). This effect update process 5 (C3112) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 in the first control example, regardless of the fluctuation of the special symbol, the elapsed time It is a process for setting the effect controlled based on.

When the effect update process 5 (C3112) is executed, first, the values of various variable time counters are updated (C4501), and then it is determined whether or not the series effect flag 223eb is ON (C4502). When it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is off (C4502: No), next it is determined whether or not the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is on (C4504). When it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is off (C4504: No), the process proceeds to C4505.

In the process of C4502, if it is determined that the series effect flag 223eb is ON (C4502: Yes), and if it is determined that the pseudo series effect flag 223ec is ON in the process of C4504 (C4504: Yes), the series Effect update processing is executed (C4503), and then the process proceeds to C4505. Further, the details of the series of effect update processing will be described later with reference to the processing in FIG.

In the process of C4505, it is determined whether or not the time saving final variation flag 223ed is ON (C4505). When it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is ON (C4505: Yes), the final variation effect update process is executed (C4506), and the process proceeds to C4507.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4505, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is ON (C4505: Yes), other effect update processing is executed (C4507), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 375, a series of effects update processing (C4503) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 375 is a flow chart showing this series of effect update processing (C4503). This series of effect update processing (C4503) is executed in the effect update processing 5 (see FIG. 374) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113. FIG.

In the series effect update process (C4503), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601). If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the value of the series effect counter is updated (C4603), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the series effect counter is 0. (C4604). When it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4601: No), the process proceeds to C4605. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is not 0 (C4604: Yes), the series effect flag 223eb is set to ON (C4612), and then this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4601, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter is 0 (C4601: Yes), set the value corresponding to the current series effect to the series effect counter (C4602), and proceed to the process of C4605. Transition.

In the process of C4605, it is determined whether or not the game is currently in the normal game (C4605). When it is determined that the game is currently per normal pattern (C4605: Yes), update processing during game per normal pattern is executed (C4606), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4605, if it is determined that the game is not currently in the normal pattern (C4605: No), then it is determined whether or not the normal pattern per game has ended (C4607). It is determined whether or not the normal figure per game has ended (C4607). When it is determined that the normal pattern per game has not ended (C4607: No), the process proceeds to C4609. When it is determined that the normal figure per game has ended (C4607: Yes), next, it is determined whether or not the special 2 winning flag is ON (C4608). When it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is off (C4608: No), the series effect flag 223eb is set to on (C4612), and then this process is terminated. In the process of C4608, when it is determined that the special 2 winning flag is ON (C4608: Yes), the process proceeds to C4609.

In the process of C4609, it is determined whether or not a small winning game is currently being played (C4609). When it is determined that the game is currently playing a small hit (C4609: Yes), update processing during a small hit game is executed (C4610), and then this processing is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4609, if it is determined that the current small winning game is not in progress (C4609: No), the display command corresponding to the value of the series effect counter is set (C4611), and then this process is executed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376, the contents of the update process (C4606) during the game per normal pattern executed in the series of effect update process (see C4503 in FIG. 375) will be described. FIG. 376 is a flow chart showing the contents of the per normal game update process (C4606). In this general pattern per game update process (C4606), the player is alerted when the ball does not win the second winning hole 640 for a predetermined period of time despite being in the general pattern per game. The process to do is executed.

When the per normal game update process (C4606) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (C4701), and it is determined that the ball has not won the second winning opening 640. If it does (C4701: No), then it is determined whether 1 second has passed from the start of the game per normal pattern (C4702). Here, if it is determined that one second has passed (C4702: Yes), a display warning command is set (C4703), and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the processing of C4702, when it is determined that the timing does not have elapsed after 1 second has elapsed since the game per normal pattern was started (C4702: No), this processing is terminated as it is.

Here, in the process of C4703, when the display attention calling command is set, the attention calling screen (see FIG. 324 (a) ) is displayed. In addition, in this control example, when a normal pattern long open per game is executed as a normal pattern per game, after opening the electric accessory 640a for 1 second, after a closing period of 1.5 seconds, 0.5 again It is configured to execute a normal figure winning game that opens the electric accessory 640a for a second. Then, the attention calling screen shown in FIG. 324(a) is displayed after one second has passed since the game per normal pattern is started. By configuring in this way, when a player who sees the attention calling screen plays a right-handed game, the ball shot by the right-handed game can easily enter the second winning hole 640.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in the process of C4701, if it is determined that the ball has won the second prize winning opening 640 (the special 2 prize has been won) (C4701: Yes), a display command for indicating the special 2 prize is set ( C4704), the special 2 winning flag 223er is set to ON (C4705), and this process is terminated. Here, when the display command is set in the process of C4704, the display mode for notifying the special 2 winning is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. As a result, it is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the special 2 prize has been won.

Next, with reference to FIG. 376(b), the contents of the updating process during small winning game (C4610) will be described. FIG. 376(b) is a flow chart showing the contents of the update process during small winning game (C4610). In this small winning game update process (C4610), it is determined whether the ball has passed through a specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, and a predetermined period (3 seconds) has elapsed since the small winning game was started. If the ball has not passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a despite the passage of time, a process for calling the player's attention is executed.

When the update process during the small hit game (C4610) is executed, first, it is determined whether the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to ON (C4751), and it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee is not set to ON. If so (C4751: No), then it is determined whether 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small winning game (C4752). Here, if it is determined that 3 seconds have passed since the small winning game (C4752: Yes), it is determined whether the ball is passing through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a at the present time (C4753), and it is not passing. When it is determined (C4753: No), the small hit caution flag 223ee is set to ON (C4754), a display caution command is set (C4755), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4751, when it is determined that the small hit caution flag 223ee is already set to ON (C4751: Yes), in the process of C4752, it is determined that it is not the timing when 3 seconds have passed since the start of the small hit game If (C4752: No), in the processing of C4753, if it is determined that the ball has passed through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a (C4753: Yes), the processing of C4754 and C4755 is skipped and this processing is performed. finish.

Next, with reference to FIG. 377, the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506) will be described. FIG. 377 is a flow chart showing the contents of the final variation effect update process (C4506). In this final fluctuation production update process (C4506), a process for setting a fluctuation production corresponding to the final fluctuation of the time saving state is executed. As described above, in this control example, in addition to the first suggestion effect that suggests only the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, and the variation result (lottery result) of the variation, as the variation effect during the time saving state, the special figure A second suggesting effect suggesting the result of prefetching of 2 reservations is executable, and the second suggesting effect is executed in the final change of the time-saving state.

Furthermore, in the final variation of the time saving state of this control example, during the period when the time saving state is set, there is also a hold acquisition effect to encourage the player to acquire the special figure 2 hold up to the upper limit (4 pieces) It is constituted so as to be executable, so that the holding acquisition performance is executed in the first half of the fluctuation period of the final fluctuation, and the second suggestion performance (shortening final fluctuation performance) is executed in the second half. And it is configured so that the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation acquired at the end timing of the first half period is reflected in the effect result of the second suggestive effect.

By constructing in this way, after the player acquires a large number of special 2 reserves, the second suggestive performance (shortening final variable performance) reflecting the look-ahead result for the acquired special 2 reserves is executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily set the performance mode indicating winning as the performance mode of the time-saving final variable performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, at the timing (starting timing of the first half period) until the pending acquisition effect is executed, if the number of acquired special 2 pending balls is the upper limit (4) or more, the pending acquisition effect is executed. Instead, the second suggestive effect is executed from the first half period. As a result, a useless performance for the player, that is, a suspension acquisition performance for trying to acquire the special figure 2 suspension even though the number of special figure 2 suspension balls has already reached the upper limit is executed. can be prevented, and a situation in which the player is puzzled by the contents of the performance can be suppressed. Further, by executing the second suggestive performance from the first half period, the performance period of the second suggestive performance can be lengthened, so that the second suggestive performance can be executed with more interest. Since the player can be motivated to play the game (right-handed game) in order to execute the interesting second suggestive effect, the operation of the game can be improved.

In the final variation effect update process (C4506 in FIG. 377) described with reference to FIG. Determine the elapsed period of the final variation performance to be executed (elapsed period of special figure 2 variation), the process based on the determination result is executed. When executed in the final fluctuation performance update process (C4506), first, it is determined whether the current timing is the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801), and if it is determined that the waiting period has elapsed (C4801: Yes) Next, it is determined whether the number of special symbols 2 reserved balls (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved balls counter 223c) is the upper limit value "4" (C4802).

In the process of C4802, if it is determined that the number of special figure 2 pending balls is "4" (C4802: Yes), the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to ON (C4803), and this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of C4802, if it is determined that the special figure 2 pending ball number is not "4", that is, "3" or less (C4802: No), without setting the pending upper limit flag 223en to ON End this process.

In the processing of C4801, if it is determined that the present time is not the waiting period elapsed timing (C4801: No), then it is determined whether the present time is the first period start timing (C4804), and at the first period start timing If it is determined that the If it is determined that the predetermined number (4), which is the upper limit number, of the special figure 2 reserved balls is secured (C4805: Yes), the first period and the second period are used as the time saving final fluctuation production Time saving fluctuation production is set (C4806), the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, the executed flag 223eq is set to ON (C4808), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4805, if it is determined that the pending upper limit flag 223en is not set to ON (C4805: No), the pending ball number acquisition effect for acquiring the special figure 2 pending up to the upper limit (4) (C4809), and the present processing ends. By configuring in this way, it is possible to vary the effect mode of the effect executed during the first period according to the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the timing when the waiting period elapses, and to provide various effects to the player. can do.

In the process of C4804, if it is determined that the current timing is not the start of the first period (C4804: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the start of the second period (C4810). If it is determined that it is time to start (C4810: Yes), it is determined whether the execution completion flag 223eq is set to ON (C4811).

Here, when it is determined that the executed flag 223eq is set to ON, that is, when it is determined that the effect mode of the effect to be executed during the second period is set at the start timing of the first period, (C4811: Yes) Since there is no need to set a new effect mode, the executed flag 223eq is set to OFF (C4812), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, in the process of C4811, if it is determined that the executed flag 223eq is not set to ON (C4811: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (C4813), The lottery result (win determination result) and the look-ahead result (preliminary determination result) included in the read prize information are set (C4814) to set a display effect command indicating a time-saving variable effect (C4814), and the process ends.

Thus, not the timing of execution of the time saving final variation, at the timing after the predetermined time has elapsed since the time saving final variation is executed (timing when the second period is set), production mode based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 pending By setting , the special figure 2 reserved ball number (value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c) that is subtracted when executing the change is re-added to the special figure 2 reserved look-ahead result You can set the production mode based on. Therefore, it is possible to increase the number of special figures 2 pending to be read ahead, so that in the production executed during the second period (time-saving final fluctuation production), the production result indicating the hit can be easily displayed, It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

In the process of C4810, if it is determined that the current timing is not the start timing of the second period (C4810: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end timing of the second period (C4815). If it is determined that it is the end timing of the second period (C4815: Yes), it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4816), and whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired If so (C4816: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag 223em is set to ON (C4817), and this processing ends.

Here, to explain the contents of the processing executed in C4816, the winning information storage area 223a is formed with storage areas corresponding to each symbol reservation, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol The storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special design (special design 2), and the storage area for the normal design (general design) are the number corresponding to the upper limit reserved storage number (4) of each design. formed. Each storage area stores pre-reading information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110, and a reference indicating whether or not the pre-reading result was referred to when setting various effects in the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

That is, in the process of C4816, in addition to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referred to by the processing of C4806 or C4814, whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223a is stored in each storage area It is determined based on the presence or absence of the referenced information stored, and the prefetch information is described in the storage area (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223a, and the referenced information When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new Special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-prefetching flag 223em to ON in the process of C4817, as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation to be executed next (the first special figure fluctuation after the end of the time saving), again, the special figure 2 is reserved A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4816, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 reservation (C4816: No), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 reservation is prefetched, and the second in the effect mode based on the prefetch result Since it is the case where the time saving final variation effect during the period is being executed, the display effect result command indicating the result of the time saving change effect is set as it is (C4818), and this processing ends. In the process of C4815, if it is determined that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4815: No), next, display commands corresponding to other update contents are set (C4819), and this process ends. In the process of C4819, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation and the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

<Sixth control example>
Next, a sixth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 378 to 385. FIG. In the fifth control example described above, the number of balls held in the second special symbol can be stored at a maximum of four, and the special figure 2 hold that is held and stored at the time when the time saving state ends and shifts to the normal state (Up to 4 pieces), it was configured to execute the special figure 2 lottery with the lottery probability of the normal state.

Furthermore, the fifth control example described above is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is more likely to result in a lottery result that is advantageous to the player than the special figure 2 lottery in the time saving state. At the end of the game, the game was motivated to acquire a large number of special 2 reserves.

In the fifth control example described above, it is possible to easily acquire the maximum number of special figures 2 pending just by playing the right-handed game continuously during the final fluctuation of the time saving state, so the player can play the game with confidence. However, it was not possible to make a difference in the number of special 2 lotteries that could be executed after the end of the time saving state, and further technical improvement was required.

On the other hand, in the sixth control example, the maximum number of held balls of the second special symbol (special symbol 2) is set to "1", and a short variation is performed as the variation time of the normal symbol variation executed during the time saving state A period in which time is likely to be selected can be set according to the type of the time saving state and the number of special figure fluctuations during the time saving state, and a winning game period is set as a normal figure winning game executed during the time saving state. It is configured to be able to set multiple types of long open winning games. In addition, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed after the end of the time saving state, it is configured to be able to set a state in which short-time fluctuation (0.1 second fluctuation) is easily set.

By configuring in this way, the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed after the end of the time saving state (after setting the normal state) can be varied according to the satisfaction of various game conditions. Therefore, the player can be entertained by what kind of game conditions are satisfied when the time saving state ends.

First, referring to FIG. 378, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example will be described. FIG. 378 is a front view schematically showing the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth control example differs from the game board of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example in that the configuration of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning hole 640 is changed. are different, and otherwise identical. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 378, in this sixth control example, the second winning port 640 is in a closed state (indicated by the solid line in FIG. 378) in which it is difficult for the ball to enter, and in an open state (indicated by the dotted line in FIG. 378) in which it is easy to enter the prize. , and a variable electric accessory 640a are provided. When the electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 315) of the fifth control example described above is in an open state, the electric accessory 640a is designed to make it easier for a plurality of balls to enter the second winning opening 640. is configured to Further, although detailed description is omitted, the period from passing through the electric accessory 640a in the open state to winning the second prize winning port 640 is configured to vary depending on the flow condition of the ball. For example, the ball that flows down along the structure having the second winning port 640 and reaches the vicinity of the base of the electric role object 640a (the side of the structure having the second winning port 640), and the tip of the electric role object 640a (the second The ball that reaches the vicinity of the structure having the winning opening 640 (the side away from the structure having the winning opening 640). difference is greater than 0.1 second.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning port 640 by providing a time difference of 0.1 seconds or more during the normal game in which the electric accessory 640a is positioned in the open state. can. Details will be described later, but in this control example, as the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation in the case where the normal state is set as the game state, the minimum fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set. there is

That is, in this control example, it is configured so that the special figure 2 variation can be executed in a shorter variation time than the generation time lag of the multiple winning balls in the game per normal figure. Therefore, even if a plurality of balls enter the second winning port 640 during one normal game, the special figure 2 lottery can be easily executed for the number of times corresponding to the number of winnings.

Note that, in this control example, as shown in FIG. 378, a time lag is generated for the winning ball depending on which part of the electric accessory 640a positioned in the open state the ball reaches. However, without being limited to this, for example, a plurality of openings (first opening, second opening) communicating with the second winning opening 640 are provided, and the balls that flow into each opening enter the second winning opening 640 It is configured so that the period until reaching is different by at least 0.1 seconds or more, and further, in one normal game per game, it is configured to execute a normal game per game in which each opening is opened. Also good.

By configuring in this way, during the normal game per game, the period until the ball passing through the first opening and the ball passing through the second opening at approximately the same timing reach the second winning opening 640 can be made different, it is possible to more reliably execute the special figure 2 lottery for the number of times according to the number of winnings.

In this case, an electric accessory 640a may be provided for each opening, or one electric accessory 640a may be configured to open and close a plurality of openings. .

<Regarding the content of the effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIG. 379, the display contents of the display screen in this sixth control example will be described. In this control example, when a predetermined game condition is established at the timing of the end of the time saving state, a state (support state) that makes it easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery is set for a predetermined period even after the end of the time saving state. In the final variation of the time saving state (time saving final variation effect), it is configured to execute a suggestive effect that suggests that the support state will be set after the end of the time saving.

FIG. 379(a) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents displayed in the time saving final variation effect during the final time saving state variation. As shown in FIG. 379(a), in the sixth control example, unlike the fifth control example described above, even in the final variation of the time saving state, a variation effect (first suggestion effect) is executed, an effect screen similar to the variable effect (see FIG. 327(a)) executed corresponding to the non-final change during the time saving state of the fifth control example is displayed. The same elements as those of the display screen of the fifth control example (see FIG. 327(a)) are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the sixth control example, in addition to the lottery result modes 871a to 871c, it is suggested that the support state is set after the end of the time saving on the display screen of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 327(a)). The difference is that the state suggestion mode 871d with the characters "support" is displayed. This state suggesting mode 871d is configured to be displayed more easily as the end of the time saving state approaches. An effect mode is set in which the character 851 obtains the state suggestion mode 871d. In addition, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is hit, the effect mode to get the lottery result mode 871a to 871b indicating the win is set.

When the support state is set after the time saving state ends, the display screen shown in FIG. 379(b) is displayed. FIG. 379(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of display contents displayed during the support state. Although details will be described later, in this control example, the normal figure per game elected during the time saving state is a long open per game, and the long open per game is continuously executed even after the end of the time saving state, and during the normal state A support state is set when the ball can enter the second winning hole 640 .

During this support state, which is a normal state, since the ball can enter the second winning hole 640, "Right shot" is highlighted in the small display area Dm4. In the small display area Dm31, a guidance display mode is displayed to visually inform the player that the game of winning the ball in the second winning hole 640 will be performed, and in the sub display area Ds, the support state is set. A comment "Support time rushed" is displayed to indicate that the support time has been reached.

In addition, in the small display area Dm6, the third symbol corresponding to the special figure 2 variation being executed is displayed in a variable manner, and the information indicating the number of special figure 2 variations performed during the current support state is displayed in the small display area Dm30. will be displayed as "Number of Supports". In the example shown in FIG. 379 (b), since the support state is set, since the first special figure 2 variation is being executed, "support times x 1" is displayed. In the main display area Dm, an effect is executed in which the character 851 is about to stand up, and the comment "Do your best" is displayed. During this support state, it is configured so that a short variation (0.1 second variation) can be executed as a special figure 2 variation, and in some cases a large number of special figure 2 variations are performed. If winning is won in the special figure 2 variation in the support state, the effect that the character 851 stands up is executed.

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the sixth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 380 to 383. FIG. In this control example, with respect to the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example described above, the configuration of the ROM 202 possessed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 is changed, and the upper limit number of special figures 2 pending is set to 1 The difference is that the configurations of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the RAM 203 of the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 have been changed due to the change, and the rest is the same. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted. Further, the detailed description of the difference of the RAM 203 is also omitted.

FIG. 380 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 in the sixth control example. As shown in FIG. 380, for the fifth control example described above, instead of the random number 5 table 202ed per normal pattern, the 6 per normal pattern table 202fd, instead of the 5 variation pattern table 202ee, the 6 variation pattern table 202fe, It is different in that the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff is provided instead of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 381(a), the contents of the per normal pattern type selection 6 table 202fd will be described. FIG. 381(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the per-universal pattern type selection 6 table 202fd. In the sixth control example, as shown in FIG. It is different from the selection 5 table 202ed.

Specifically, the probability state of the normal pattern is a low probability state (normal pattern low probability), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "0" and "per normal pattern A", " "1 to 50" is defined as "B1 per normal figure", and "51 to 99" is defined as "B2 per normal figure". In addition, the probability state of the normal pattern is a high probability state (high probability of normal pattern), and the value of the acquired second per type counter C6 is defined as "per normal pattern A" in the range of "0, 1", "B1 per normal map" is defined in the range of "2 to 50", and "B2 per normal map" is defined in the range of "51 to 99".

Next, the relationship between the normal pattern per type selected in the normal pattern per type selection 6 table 202fd and the game state at the time when the normal pattern per game is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 381 (b). do. FIG. 381(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the opening operation contents of the electric accessary 640a based on the normal figure winning type and the game state.

In this sixth control example, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, instead of "normal pattern B" as the normal pattern type, "normal pattern B1" and "normal pattern B2" are provided. Although different, the contents of the opening operation of the electric accessary product 640a for the "normal pattern hit B1" in this control example are the same as the opening operation contents for the "normal pattern hit B" in the fifth control example described above. A detailed description thereof is omitted.

If the type per normal pattern is "B2 per normal pattern" and the game state at the time the game per normal pattern is released is a time-saving state (high accuracy per normal pattern), the game per normal pattern is "Long The opening operation of "Opening B" is performed. When this "long opening B" is set, a normal game per game is executed in which the electric accessary 640a is opened for 1.5 seconds after a closed state (opening period) of 0.1 seconds. The flow of this opening operation is defined in a normal pattern per scenario (not shown), and when executing a normal pattern per game, a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the normal pattern per type and game state is set, and the main control By periodically updating the scenario per normal pattern in the main processing of the device 110, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a is executed in accordance with the flow of the above-described per normal pattern game.

In other words, in the sixth control example, when winning the normal pattern during the time saving state, either the normal pattern per game of "long opening A" or "long opening B" is executed as the normal pattern long opening per game. be. Even if any general pattern per game is executed, the period in which the electric accessory 640a is open is common with 1.5 seconds, and if the general pattern per game is executed during the time saving state, any It is configured to provide a state in which the same privilege can be given to the player even if the game per normal pattern is executed.

However, in "Long opening A" and "Long opening B", after the normal game is started, the electric accessary 640a is in an open state (a state where the ball can easily enter the second winning hole 640). is different, and when "long open A" is set, after the normal figure per game is started, 2.6 seconds (including the opening period of 0.1 seconds) to 3.1 seconds later The electric accessory 640a is configured to open to the open state during the period of .

Therefore, just before the time-saving state ends, if you are elected per normal pattern in which the opening action of "long opening A" is executed, per normal pattern in which the opening action of "long opening B" is executed at the same timing After the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, the electric accessary product 640a can be made more likely to be in the open state than in the case of winning .

Next, with reference to FIG. 382, the contents of the normal variation pattern 6 table 202fe1 included in the variation pattern 6 table 202fe will be described. FIG. 382 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 6 table 202fe1, and the normal variation pattern 5 table 202ee1 of the fifth control example described above (see FIG. 339 (b) ), the difference is that the content selected as the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is different, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In this sixth control example, according to the type of time saving state (time saving A, time saving B) set after the end of the jackpot, the special figure that is executed before the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number after the end of the jackpot It is configured such that the variation pattern (variation time) of the two variations is made different.

Specifically, when the time saving A (time saving 1 time, or time saving 99 times) is set as the time saving state, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1 to 99 times" in the normal state If the special figure 2 variation in is executed, the value of the variation type counter CS1 and, regardless of the result of the special figure 2 lottery, "short variation (10 seconds)" is set, "100 to 151 times" In the range, regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "out", "ultra-short out (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (jackpot, small hit)" is set to "long hit (20 seconds)", and in the range of "after the 152nd time", "short variation (10 seconds)" is set regardless of the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the result of the special figure 2 lottery specified to be

Here, in the sixth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, a plurality of time-saving end conditions (common time-saving end conditions, corresponding time-saving end conditions) are set as time-saving end conditions for ending the time-saving state. , for example, a time-saving state in which 99 times of working hours are set , When the small winning game is executed and the ball does not pass through the specific area in the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game and the big winning game is not executed, the common time saving end condition is established and the time saving state ends. It is configured to Therefore, even if the time saving 99 times is set, there is a possibility that the special figure 2 lottery in the normal state is executed when the special figure fluctuation frequency after the end of the big hit is shifted to the second time.

As shown in Figure 382, when the time saving A is set, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "100 to 151 times" when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed 0.1 second fluctuation time is configured to be set. In other words, when the time saving state is set and the time saving 99 times is completed without winning, the variation time of 0.1 seconds is set as the variation time for the special figure 2 hold stored at that time. be done. In addition, when the normal figure per game is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal state, and the special figure 2 fluctuation with a fluctuation time of 0.1 second is executed, even if a plurality of balls wins the second winning port 640 during the game per normal figure, the special figure 2 fluctuation of the number of times according to the number of winnings is configured to be easily executed. .

On the other hand, if the time saving state of the time saving number of times is set, even if the game per normal figure is executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state, the fluctuation time of 10 seconds as a special figure 2 fluctuation Since it is set, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game, the special figure 2 variation is executed only the number of times with the upper limit of the number of memories of the special figure 2 reservation. are doing.

Also, if the time saving B (time saving state in which 5 times of working hours are set) is set, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is in the range of "1st to 5th" special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state is executed, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and regardless of the result of the special drawing 2 lottery, "short variation (10 seconds)" is set, and in the range of "6th to 20th", the variation type Regardless of the value of the counter CS1, if the result of the special figure 2 lottery is "off", "ultra short off (0.1 seconds)" is "hit (jackpot, small hit)", "long hit ( 20 seconds)” is set, and in the range of “after the 21st time”, the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the result of the special figure 2 lottery, “short variation (10 seconds)” is set. It is

As described above, in this control example, among the three time saving states (time saving 1 time, time saving 5 times, time saving 99 times) in which different time saving end conditions are set, the time saving state in which the time saving 5 times is set , Time saving state in which 99 times of working hours are set, and in two types of time saving states, when the working hours saving state ends and the normal state is set by reaching the working hours saving number of times specified by the special figure fluctuation number, 0. 1 second special figure 2 variation is configured to be executable.

And 0.1 seconds set as the special figure 2 fluctuation is, as described above, from the continuous opening period (0.5 seconds, 1 second, 1.5 seconds) of the electric accessory 640a in the normal figure long open per game Since it is also short, it is possible to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations by winning a plurality of balls in the second winning opening 640 in one normal figure long open per game.

Therefore, according to the set time saving state and the established time saving end condition, the ease of execution of the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time saving state can be changed, so that the player, the time saving state It is possible to suppress the decrease in the desire to play when the is terminated.

In addition, in this control example, when the time saving state of one time saving is set, the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed within the period when the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is "100 to 151" In the case, that is, the time-saving state of one time-saving is completed, and then, while the normal state left-handed game is being executed, the timing of winning the normal figure long open and executing the special figure 2 lottery is When the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game is ``100 to 151'', a short fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is executed when the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery is lost. Therefore, it is possible to perform multiple special figure 2 fluctuations when elected per normal figure long open in the normal state.

By configuring in this way, not only after the end of the time saving state, but also at the time of winning the normal figure long open in the normal state, it is possible to set the period during which the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed, so the player On the other hand, it is possible to play a game in a normal state while being conscious of the special figure fluctuation frequency, and to improve the amusement of the game. In addition, players who have been playing for a long time can grasp the contents of the previous time-saving state (number of times of time-saving), and furthermore, the special figure 2 lottery is advantageous in the normal state long open winning. Since it is possible to predict the number of special figure fluctuations that can be executed (the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot game), and it is possible to play more advantageous than other players, motivation to continue playing can be raised.

In addition, in the sixth control example, when a specific time saving state is set, when the time saving state ends due to establishment of a specific time saving end condition, a short time (0. 1 second) is configured to be selected, but not limited to this, a short time (0.1 second) according to the timing of winning per normal long open in the normal state It may be configured to separately provide a range in which the variation pattern is selected. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the special figure 2 lottery can be advantageously executed when winning the normal figure long opening per time, so that the interest of the game can be improved. .

Furthermore, in this control example, the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation is configured to be selected based on the type of time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game, but it is limited to this Without, for example, it may be configured to select the variation pattern of special figure 2 variation based on the type of time saving state and the number of special figure variations after the time saving state ends. By configuring in this way, even if the time saving state ends under any time saving end condition, it is possible to select the same variation pattern as the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation after the time saving state ends, and it is safe for the player You can play games with your heart.

In addition, when the same type of time saving state is set, different variation patterns may be selected. Of the time saving type, only when a specific time saving type is set, it may be configured so that the special figure 2 variation for a short time (0.1 seconds) can be executed after the time saving state ends. Thereby, when the time saving state is set (when the number of remaining time saving times is grasped), it is possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the game contents after the time saving state ends.

In addition, in this control example, as a state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed, the fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is set, but the electric power in the game per normal figure It suffices to set a variable time shorter than the opening time of the accessory 640a, and there are multiple types of variable times (for example, 0.1 second, 0.2 second, and 0.3 second). It may be configured such that one fluctuation time is selected from among. By configuring in this way, the number of special figure 2 lotteries that can be executed during the support state by the length of the special figure 2 fluctuation time set in the state (support state) in which the special figure 2 lottery is advantageously executed is variable, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the contents of the game during the support state.

Next, the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 383 (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff, Figure 383 (b) is a normal figure for time saving A that the normal figure fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff has Fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the table, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the present invention;

As shown in FIG. 383 (a), the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table 202ff includes the normal normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202ff1 that is referred to when the normal state is set as the gaming state, and the type of time saving state " There is a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A that is referred to when "time saving A" is set, and a normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B that is referred to when "time saving B" is set. are doing.

For the contents defined in the normal normal pattern fluctuation pattern table 202ff1, the normal state of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef in the fifth control example described above (normal low probability) Because it is the same as the contents referred to , the detailed description thereof will be omitted. On the other hand, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern table referred to during the time saving state (normal pattern high accuracy) is the type of time saving state set for the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef of the fifth control example described above, and the jackpot It is different in that it is configured to vary the normal figure variation pattern selected based on the special figure variation number after the end.

Here, with reference to FIG. 383(b), the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A will be described. This normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202ff2 for time saving A is a data table referred to when "time saving A" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, 1 time or 99 times of time saving, FIG. As shown in (b), various normal figure fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 98 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds)” is defined as “ultra-short variation (0.1 seconds)” in the range of “630 to 999”, and the number of special figure variations is “99 times”, and the acquired second When the value of the fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 709", "ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)" is defined, and in the range of "710 to 989", "medium fluctuation (10 seconds)" is defined. and "short fluctuation (2 seconds)" is defined in the range of "990 to 999".

In other words, in the final time-saving change when one time-saving is set, 63% is configured to select 2 seconds and 37% is 0.1 seconds as the normal figure variation pattern, and 99 times of time-saving is set. In the time-saving final fluctuation in the case, as the normal figure fluctuation pattern, 71% is configured to select 0.1 seconds, 28% is 10 seconds, and 1% is configured to select 2 seconds. Here, as the short fluctuation time is set as the normal pattern fluctuation pattern, the normal pattern per game is more likely to be executed so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. The time saving state in which the time saving 99 times is set can make it easier to set the state (support state) in which the ball can be easily won in the second winning hole 640 after the time saving state ends.

On the other hand, when the number of special figure fluctuations is "99 times", it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation time of 10 seconds is selected with a probability of 28%, and this 10 second normal figure fluctuation time was selected. In that case, it becomes difficult to execute the normal figure per game so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state. In addition, in this control example, when 99 times of working hours are set as the time saving end condition, as the normal figure fluctuation time during execution of the special figure fluctuation (99th special figure fluctuation) in which the time saving end condition is satisfied, other Since it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds is easier to select than the period of , the normal figure fluctuation of 0.1 seconds is continuously executed without executing the final fluctuation of the time saving state. It is possible to make it difficult to play a game that excessively wins a privilege (a prize ball paid out by causing a ball to enter the second prize hole 640).

In addition, the game board 13 is set so that the special figure variation set as the time saving final variation and the normal figure variation are set with different triggers, and any execution trigger can be established by the ball fired in the right-handed game. Since it is configured, it is possible to make it difficult to perform a game that executes the normal pattern fluctuation (per normal pattern fluctuation) in accordance with the end timing of the special pattern fluctuation.

Next, with reference to FIG. 383(c), the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B will be described. Normal figure fluctuation pattern table 202fe3 for time saving B is a data table referred to when "time saving B" is set as the type of time saving state, that is, the number of time saving times is set to 5 times, and shown in FIG. 383 (c) As you can see, various normal figure fluctuation patterns (variation time) are defined based on the special figure fluctuation number of times after the end of the jackpot and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2.

Specifically, the number of special figure fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is "1 to 4 times", and the value of the acquired second fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of "0 to 629", "short fluctuation ( 2 seconds)”, but in the range of “630 to 999”, “ultra-short fluctuation (0.1 seconds)” is defined, and if the number of special figure fluctuations is “5 times”, the acquired second Regardless of the value of the 2-variation type counter CS2, "ultra-short variation (0.1 seconds)" is defined. In addition, since the time saving state is set to 5 times at the maximum, the value corresponding to the special figure fluctuation number 6th or later is not set.

As described above, when the time saving state of five times of working hours is set, it is configured so that the normal figure fluctuation is always executed with a fluctuation time of 0.1 seconds during the time saving final fluctuation. Therefore, it becomes easy to execute the normal figure per game so as to straddle the end timing of the time saving state.

As described above, in this control example, according to the type of time saving state set (time saving A, B), the fluctuation time of special symbols and the fluctuation time of normal symbols can be set differently. The time-saving type (time-saving B) in which 5 times of time-saving is set makes it easy to set the state (support state) in which it is easy to execute the special figure 2 lottery after the end of the time-saving state (support state), and then 99 times of time-saving and 1 time of time-saving. It is configured to be in the order of

As a result, when the conditions for executing the jackpot game are not established during the time saving state, a privilege (support state) can be given to the player, and further, according to the type of the set time saving state, the privilege is given. The interest in the game can be improved by varying the granting probabilities.

In addition, in this control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation, or when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, it may be configured to select each variation pattern by referring only to the number of variations of the special figure 2 variation, or configured to refer to the number of variations of the normal figure variation You can Moreover, you may comprise so that each variation pattern may be selected with reference to the establishment condition of the set time saving end conditions.

Also, in this control example, when selecting the variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation, or when selecting the variation pattern of the normal figure variation, it is configured to refer to the number of special figure variations after the end of the jackpot game. However, without being limited to this, for example, based on the small hit type elected during the time saving state, the fluctuation pattern table used when selecting each fluctuation pattern may be changed, and after the small hit game ends It may be configured to select each variation pattern based on the special figure variation frequency and the normal figure variation frequency.

<Regarding control processing in the sixth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 384 and 385, the contents of control processing in this sixth control example will be described. In this control example, in contrast to the above-described fifth control example, instead of the normal symbol variation processing 5 (see C106 in FIG. 350), the normal symbol variation processing 6 (see C136 in FIG. 384) is executed, and the main control 380 to 383) to be referred to in various determination processes in the device 110, and the other points are the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, the numerical values were simply changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 384, the contents of the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) will be described. FIG. 384 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136). When the normal symbol variation process 6 (C136) is executed, the same processes of C601 to C611 as the normal symbol variation process 5 of the fifth control example (see C106 in FIG. 350) are executed, and in the process of C611, If it is determined that this normal pattern lottery is a hit (C611: Yes), refer to the normal pattern per type selection 6 table 202fd to set the normal per pattern type (C641), hit (normal The display mode (at the time of winning the drawing) is set (C613), and the process proceeds to C642. On the other hand, in the processing of C611, when it is determined that the winning lottery for the normal symbols is lost (C611: No), the display mode at the time of loss is set (C614), and the process proceeds to C642.

In the process of C642, the normal pattern fluctuation pattern of this time is set based on the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 6 table (C642), and the command corresponding to each setting content (hit lottery decision, normal pattern fluctuation pattern) is set. (C623), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C602, if it is determined that the current is normal pattern fluctuation (C602: Yes), C618 to the same as normal pattern fluctuation processing 5 of the fifth control example (see C106 in FIG. 350) The process of C623 is executed, and this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 385, the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 of the sixth control example will be described. The content of the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of this control example is the control processing of the audio ramp control device 113 of the fifth control example described above, instead of the normal figure production setting processing (see C4117 in FIG. 371) It is different in that it is configured to execute the effect setting process 6 for normal figure (see C4167 in FIG. 385). Other control processes are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

FIG. 385 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal figure effect setting process 6 (C4167). As shown in Figure 385, in the normal figure production setting process 6 (C4167), the above-mentioned normal figure production setting process (see C4117 in Figure 371) is executed during the special figure final fluctuation period of the time saving state The difference is that a process for setting the effect mode is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same control process contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the general figure production setting process 6 (C4167) is executed, the same C4201 to C4212 processes as the general figure production setting process (see C4117 in FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and this process exit. Also, in the process of C4202, if it is determined that the current gaming state is not the normal state (C4202: No), then it is determined whether the current is in the final variation of the time saving state (C4251), the final variation If it is determined that it is not in the middle (C4251: No), this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4251, if it is determined that the current is in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (C4251: Yes), the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is obtained, and the remaining period of the special figure fluctuation being executed Extract (C4252).

Then, it is determined whether the end timing of the special figure fluctuation being executed is during the normal figure long per game (C4253), and when it is determined that it is during the normal figure long open game (C4253: Yes), this time reduction Since the normal figure long open per game is executed to cross the state end timing, set a display command to suggest that the special figure 2 fluctuation zone (support state) will be set after the end of the time saving (C4254) , the process ends. When the display command is set by the process of C4254, the display command is output to the display control device 114 in the same process as other display commands, and the effect screen shown in FIG. 379(a) is the third symbol. It is displayed on the display screen of the display device 81 .

In the process of C4253, when it is determined that the long button is not released at the time saving end timing (C4253: No), this process is terminated as it is. In addition, in this control example, when it is determined that the long release is not performed at the time saving end timing in the process of C4253 (C4253: No), this process is configured to end as it is. The time-saving state that was set was a time-saving state (for example, time-saving B) that made it easy to set the support state. It is also possible to provide a means for determining whether a time-saving state (for example, time-saving A) in which it is difficult to set is set, and display a display mode that can notify (suggest) the determination result to the player. . In addition, at the end timing of this normal pattern fluctuation and the end timing of the normal pattern per game executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, a means for determining whether the final fluctuation of the time saving state has ended Provided, at the end timing of this normal pattern fluctuation and the end timing of the normal pattern per game executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, if it is determined that the final fluctuation of the time saving state has not ended, that The determination result may be suggested (notified).

As described above, in the sixth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, the second special symbol lottery (special figure 2 lottery) is used rather than the first special symbol lottery (special figure 1 lottery). It is set so that it is easier to win a small hit, and when the time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) is set as the game state, the normal state (low probability state of special symbols, It is configured so that the special figure 2 lottery is easier to execute than when the normal symbol low probability state) is set. Then, when a ball is entered into the V winning port 650a which is in an open state during the small winning game and the ball passes through a specific area (V gate), an opportunity to execute the big winning game is established. .

Then, as a time saving end condition for ending the time saving state, the first end condition (the number of special figure fluctuations (the number of special figure 2 fluctuations) reaches the specified number of times (for example, 5 times)) and When at least the second end condition (a condition that is met when a specific small hit is won a specified number of times (for example, once) by a special lottery during the time saving state), and the first end condition is met Only in this case, an advantageous state advantageous to the player can be given. Specifically, during the special figure fluctuation in which the first end condition is established, the fluctuation time of the normal pattern is extremely shortened (normal figure fluctuation time 0.1 seconds), and many within one special figure fluctuation period It is configured to be able to execute normal figure fluctuations.

As a result, when the time saving state ends based on the establishment of the first end condition, the fluctuation period of the normal figure fluctuation to be executed is shortened by the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final fluctuation) be able to. As a result, it is possible to facilitate the execution of the normal long open per game during the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure final fluctuation), and in addition, the time saving state ends during the execution of the normal long open per game, normal Even after the state is set, it is possible to facilitate the continuation of the normal pattern long open per game.

That is, in this control example, the special figure 2 lottery is executed in the state where the time saving state (1 time, 5 times, 99 times) is set, and the first privilege (small hit winning (small winning probability about 1/ 7)) While playing a game aiming to be awarded, when the special figure 2 lottery is executed a predetermined number of times without winning a small hit in the special figure 2 lottery executed during the time saving state, It is configured such that a second privilege (a period during which a short variation is executed as a normal pattern variation) different from the first privilege is granted. By configuring in this way, even if a small hit is won as a game result (special figure 2 lottery result) during the time saving state, even if it is not won, a privilege advantageous to the player can be given. It is possible to improve the game motivation of.

Furthermore, in this control example, it is configured so that the period during which the short fluctuation is executed as a normal figure fluctuation during the execution period of the special figure final fluctuation in a specific time saving state (for example, 5 times of working hours) is set , When the time saving state ends, it is possible to make it easier to acquire the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol (special figure 2) up to the upper limit (4 pieces). Furthermore, by shortening the normal pattern fluctuation time, it is possible to increase the ratio of the period in which the electric role product 1640a is open per unit time, so that the state in which the game is being executed per normal pattern (electric role The normal state can be easily set in a state where the object 1640a is open, or a state where the electric accessory 1640a remains open.

As a result, even after the normal state is set, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the second winning opening 1640. Many special figure 2 lotteries can be executed, and players can be motivated to play games.

It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth control example changes from the first state (closed state) in which it is difficult for a ball to enter during a specific game (for example, a small winning game). A specific ball entry means (V winning opening 650a) is provided that is variable to a second state (open state) that is easy to open, and a ball that enters the specific ball entering means (V winning opening 650a) enters a specific area (V gate). However, it is not limited to this, and the ball enters the V winning opening 650a that is opened when the small winning game is executed. The technique described in this control example may be applied to the pachinko machine 10 in which the player is given the privilege of paying out a predetermined number of prize balls. Even in this case, by configuring the special figure 2 lottery so that the probability of winning a small prize is higher than the special figure 1 lottery, it is advantageous to the player when the above-mentioned second privilege is granted. A game state can be provided.

Furthermore, in the sixth control example, as described with reference to FIG. 383, the period during which the above-described second privilege is granted is the period during which the final variation of the time saving state is executed (a specific time saving end condition is period to be established), but not limited to this, for example, when the time saving 99 times is set, immediately after the time saving state is set (for example, the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set period of 1 to 5 times), or after a predetermined period of time has passed since the time saving state was set (for example, the number of special figure fluctuations after the time saving state is set is 45 to 50 times). As given, the contents defined in the normal figure fluctuation pattern 6 table 202fe may be configured. In addition, a plurality of time saving types are provided for the time saving state in which the same time saving end condition is set, and the period in which the second privilege is given may be changed according to the set time saving type. good.

By configuring in this way, when the time saving state is set, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the second privilege is granted, so it is expected that the second privilege will be granted. It is possible to play a game in the time saving state while letting the player play.

<Regarding Modified Example of Sixth Control Example>
Next, a modification of the sixth control example described above will be described. In the sixth control example described above, when a predetermined condition is established in the time saving state, that is, in a state in which a specific time saving state (5 times of working time saving state) is set, when the fifth special figure variation is executed An advantageous game in which a short (0.1 second) variation time is likely to be selected as the variation time of the normal pattern (ordinary pattern) is executed, and just before the time saving state ends or immediately after the time saving state ends. It is configured to make it easier to win the ball into the second winning port 640 at the . Then, in the sixth control example described above, as shown in FIG. It is constructed so that a ball can win in the second winning port 640 but cannot win in the first winning port 64.例文帳に追加

On the other hand, in this modification, when the lower position of the second winning hole 640 provided in the right game area, specifically, the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the ball fired by the right-handed game can win a prize and the electric accessory 640a is in an open state, the game board 13 in which the first winning port 64 is arranged at a position where it is difficult for the ball fired by the right-handed game to win a prize is used. ing. Since the configuration of the game board 13 other than that is the same as that of the sixth control example described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, in this modification, the first special symbol (special figure 1) and the second special symbol (special figure 2) fluctuate in the order in which the acquisition information is acquired (the order in which the ball wins in the corresponding winning opening) It is different from the sixth control example described above in that (lottery) is configured to be executed and that the configuration for holding and storing the acquisition information of special figure 2 is deleted. Since other contents are the same as those of the sixth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In this modified example configured in this way, the second privilege (a game period in which a short time (0.1 seconds) is likely to be set as the normal figure fluctuation time) is granted during the time saving state, and the normal figure during the game per normal figure When the state is set, it becomes easier for the ball shot by the right-handed game to win the second prize winning opening 640, and it is possible to make it difficult to win the first winning opening 64.例文帳に追加Therefore, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special figure 2 variation during the normal state. On the other hand, when the normal state is set at the timing other than during the normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game becomes easier to win the first winning hole 64. And since it does not have a configuration for storing the suspension of the special figure 2, even if the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 while the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation configured not to run.

That is, in this modification, the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a serves as guiding means for guiding the ball to the second winning hole 640 and limiting means for limiting the winning of the ball to the first winning hole 64. configured to function. By configuring in this way, the second privilege is given to the player when the time saving state is terminated and the normal state is set depending on whether the second privilege is given during the time saving state or when it is not given. Benefits can vary greatly. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting the second privilege to be awarded.

<Seventh control example>
Next, a seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 397. FIG. In the fifth control example described above, a series of performances can be executed as a variable performance executed based on the lottery result of the first special symbol (special symbol 1) or the lottery result of the normal symbol, and the series of performances are executed. In the event that it is done, it is difficult to understand whether the trigger for the execution of this series of performances is a special lottery or a normal lottery, and it is configured to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting the performance result (lottery result). (See Figure 317).

However, the information mode (small display area Dm 4 display mode) is displayed, there is a risk that it will be determined which pattern lottery the current series of effects is based on.

On the other hand, in the seventh control example, in the effect (set effect) executed with the special symbol lottery (special lottery) or the normal symbol lottery (normal lottery), which pattern lottery However, a notification mode (display mode of the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm) for changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game at the same timing can be displayed. The characteristic configuration and control content of the seventh control example will be described below. It should be noted that detailed description of the same contents as those of the fifth control example described above will be omitted.

<About the game board configuration in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example>
First, the configuration of the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. FIG. The game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example differs in the configuration of the right game area from the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth control example (see FIG. 315). , are otherwise identical. Identical configurations are denoted by identical reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

FIG. 386 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the game board 13 in the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example. In this seventh control example, the ball flowing down the right side game area by the player playing the right-handed game, each winning opening that can win by each winning game (normal figure winning game, small winning game, big winning game) (Second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, specific winning opening 65a) are configured to have different times. It takes about 4 seconds to reach , about 2 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650a, and about 6 seconds to reach the specific winning opening 65a.

Here, the configuration of the right game area in this control example will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 386 to 388. FIG. As shown in FIG. 386, a distribution means 700 capable of distributing balls to a plurality of ball paths is provided above the right game area. , and the second route 702 alternately.

The first path 701 is formed by a meandering sphere path, and is configured so that it takes about 3 seconds for the sphere to pass through the first path 701 . After passing through the first path 701, the ball reaches the upper surface of the channel unit provided with the variable winning device 65 and the electric accessory 640a. The flow path unit is configured so that its upper surface slopes downward toward the outlet 66, and as part of the flow path formed on its upper surface, an electric accessory 640a and a winning door 65b are provided. is provided. When both the electric accessory 640a and the winning door 65b are closed, the ball flowing down the upper surface of the flow path unit flows out from the bottom end of the upper surface of the flow path unit (the end on the side of the out port 66), and is out. It is configured to flow into port 66 .

The time required for the ball passing through the first path 701 to reach the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 1 second. The surface forming the path) is provided with a delay member for delaying the flow of the ball, so that the time required for the ball to flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a is about 2 seconds. Configure. Here, in the seventh control example, a meandering flow path is formed on the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, which meanders in the depth direction so that the ball does not flow down in a straight line. This makes it possible to delay the flow of the ball.

On the other hand, the spheres distributed to the second path 702 by the distribution means 700 flow into the opening 704a of the straight passage channel formed in the depth direction of the first path, and are provided near the outlet of the passage channel. It is constructed so as to flow down toward the V winning opening 650a, and is constructed so that the ball launched by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a in about 2 seconds.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of this control example, each winning opening (first 2 winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a, and specific winning opening 65a) are configured to have different times. It takes about 4 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650a, about 2 seconds to reach the V winning opening 650a, and about 6 seconds to reach the specific winning opening 65a.

By constructing in this way, it is possible to sequentially confirm which winning hole the ball shot in the right-handed game will enter, so that the game can be provided to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. In addition, although details will be described later, in this control example, when a small hit is won in a special figure lottery, and when a big hit is won, different special figure fluctuation times are set, and each winning game is executed. Immediately after hitting the ball, in order to win the winning opening opened by the game, it is configured to perform notification to guide the right-handed game during the special figure fluctuation time. Then, when a small win is won or when a big win is won, a set performance is executed after the special figure variation is started, and a right-handed game is notified at the same timing after a specific time has passed. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from judging the lottery result of this time by the timing when the notification for guiding the right-handed game is performed.

In addition, in this control example, in the case of being elected per normal figure long opening by the general figure lottery, the execution timing of the set effect is set so as to notify the right-handed game at the specific timing of the set effect. Configure. By constructing in this way, even if the set effect is executed and the notification to guide the right-handed game is performed, it is difficult for the player to understand which winning game the effect result of the set effect this time indicates. It is possible to enhance the performance effect.

Next, with reference to FIG. 389, a series of effects used as a variation effect of each symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, normal symbol) in the present seventh control example, and a right-handed game that guides a right-handed game The relationship with the display timing of the notification will be explained. FIG. 389 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow of execution effect (notification) in each symbol variation.

As shown in FIG. 389, in this control example, an effect (a series of effects) is executed for a predetermined period of time (54 seconds) after the start of symbol variation, and then a guidance notification is given to guide the player to a right-handed game. (Right stroke notification) is executed. Then, when the player executes the right-handed game based on the execution of the guidance notification, the balls shot by the right-handed game are released according to the lottery result of the pattern variation being executed this time. It is configured to win a prize in a prize winning port (second winning port 640, V winning port 650a, specific winning port 65a).

Specifically, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (60 seconds) that has been won, hit the right after 54 seconds from the start of the fluctuation (during the special figure 1 fluctuation) Notification is performed. Then, the jackpot game is started at the timing (6 seconds after the right-handed game is performed) when the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the specific winning opening 65a.

Also, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the special figure 1 fluctuation (58 seconds) that is winning a small hit, right-handed notification after 54 seconds from the start of fluctuation (during special figure 1 fluctuation) is executed. Then, a small hit game is started at the timing (4 seconds after the right-handed game is performed) when the ball shot by the right-handed game reaches the V winning opening 650a. In addition, in this control example, when the ball enters the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game, it is configured to always pass through the V gate, and the ball enters the V winning opening 650a during the small winning game. In this case, the big winning game is started two seconds after the start of the small winning game. As a result, in the case of winning the jackpot in the special figure 1 fluctuation and in the case of winning the small prize, the performance mode of the variable performance (series performance) executed from the start of the variation and the guide notification for guiding the right-handed game. In addition to the execution timing of , it is possible to make the timing from the start of variation to the start of the big winning game the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, if a series of effects (54 seconds) is executed based on the winning normal pattern fluctuation (54 seconds), the right-handed notification will be executed 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation (when the normal pattern fluctuation is stopped) be done. Then, at the timing when the ball fired by the right-handed game reaches the second winning opening 640 (2 seconds after the right-handed game is performed), the normal pattern per game is started. It should be noted that even if a series of effects are executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, the start timing of the jackpot game via the normal pattern per game is the same as when the jackpot is won in the above-mentioned special figure 1 lottery, or when the small hit is won. configured to be the same. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

In addition, in this control example, after the guidance notification for guiding the right-handed game (right-handed notification) is executed, at a plurality of timings of the period (right-handed ball flowing down period) until the jackpot game is started, this time A failure effect for informing that the result of the effect is a failure (the jackpot game is not executed) can be executed. Specifically, failure notification timings are set 2 seconds, 4 seconds, and 6 seconds after the right-handed notification is executed.

In other words, although detailed description and illustrations are omitted, in some cases where the result of the special figure 1 lottery is out, the variation time is configured to set a variation pattern of 56 seconds, 58 seconds, and 60 seconds , When the variation pattern is selected, the same variation effect as the above-described content is executed, and failure notification is performed at the timing when the variation time has elapsed. Then, the failure notification timing described above is based on the timing at which it is determined that the ball could not be entered into the second winning port 640 during the normal game, and the ball was entered into the second winning port 640. It is configured to coincide with the timing of notifying the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation executed by the special figure 2 lottery, or the timing of winning the small winning and ending the small winning game as a result of the special figure 2 lottery.

By configuring in this way, the performance mode of the losing series performance executed when the result of the special figure 1 lottery is lost, and the series performance executed based on the winning of the general figure winning, In the game process after the game is played, it is possible to make the same performance mode as that set when the big win game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result of the current variable performance (set performance) indicates, thereby enhancing the performance effect.

Furthermore, in this control example, for example, even if the big hit is won with the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the special figure fluctuation of 60 seconds is executed, the above-mentioned failure notification is executed or not. It is configured to execute the inciting production of. In this case, since the special figure 1 jackpot is won internally, a success performance mode for informing the player that it will not fail is set as a result of the fanning performance and executed as a performance.

In this way, by executing the fanning production, it is possible to reduce the difference in the production mode between the series of productions in which the failure notification is actually executed and the series of productions in which the failure notification is not executed. ) makes it difficult for the player to understand which winning game the performance result indicates, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, since it is possible to make the player pay attention to the effect to be executed (the effect to be executed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81), based on the ball flow situation in the right game area, the current effect It can be difficult to determine in advance what the result will be.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the seventh control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in this control example will be described with reference to FIGS. This control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that the configuration of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 and the configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed. are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 390(a), the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the seventh control example will be described. FIG. 390(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 of the seventh control example. In this control example, a variation pattern 7 table 202ge is provided instead of the variation pattern 5 table 202ee, and a normal figure variation pattern selection 7 table 202gf is provided instead of the normal figure variation pattern selection table 202ef, in contrast to the above-described fifth control example. They are different in one respect and otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 391, the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202ge will be described. FIG. 391(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the variation pattern 7 table 202ge. As shown in FIG. 391 (a), the variation pattern 7 table 202ge has a normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 and a time saving variation pattern 5 table 202ee2. The contents of the fluctuation pattern table referred to when the state is set are made different.

Here, the contents of the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 will be described with reference to FIG. 391(b). FIG. 391(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1. As shown in FIG. 391 (b), the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 is the first special symbol ( The contents defined in the data table referred to when selecting the variation pattern of special figure 1) are different, and the data referred to when selecting the variation pattern of the second special symbol (special figure 2) The contents defined in the table are the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

In the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1, even if the lottery result of the special figure 1 lottery is "loss", "big hit", or "small hit", a dedicated variation pattern (variation time ) is selected, and specifically, if the lottery result of the special figure 1 is “out”, the value of the acquired fluctuation type counter CS1 is set to “0 to 139” in the range of “short "Out (7 seconds)" is in the range of "140 to 179", "Out (30 seconds)" is in the range of "180 to 189", "Short set effect (30 seconds)" is in the range of "190 to 194" "Various types of Super Reach (60 seconds)" are defined in the range, and "Set effects (60 seconds)" are defined in the range of "195 to 198".

Also, if the lottery result of special figure 1 is "jackpot", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is in the range of "0 to 29" and "normal reach (30 seconds)" is in the range of "30 to 39" ``Short set effect (30 seconds)'' is specified in the range of ``40 to 179'', ``Various super reach (60 seconds)'' in the range of ``180 to 198'', and ``Set effect (60 seconds)'' in the range of ``180 to 198''. , If the lottery result is "small win", the value of the acquired variation type counter CS1 is "0 to 99" in the range of "super reach (60 seconds)", "100 to 198" in the range of "small Hit set effect (56 seconds)” is defined.

As described above, in this control example, regardless of the lottery result of the special figure 1, it is configured to select a variation pattern for executing the set effect at a predetermined rate. The variation pattern (variation time) set as the set effect is different between when the small win is won and when the big win is won. Specifically, when a big win is won, a variable time of 60 seconds can be selected as a set performance, and when a small win is won, a variable time of 56 seconds can be selected as a set performance. In other words, the variation time of the set performance at the time of winning the small prize is shorter by 4 seconds than the time of variation of the set performance at the time of winning the big prize.

Here, as described later with reference to FIG. 386, in the game board 13 of this control example, when a right-handed game is executed, the ball reaches the V winning opening 650a which is opened during the small winning game. The time (about 6 seconds) required for the ball to reach the specific winning hole 65a that is open during the jackpot game is longer by 4 seconds than the time (about 2 seconds) required to complete the game. . And, as will be described later, in this control example, when the set effect (60 seconds) is executed, 54 seconds after the set effect is executed regardless of the set fluctuation time (special figure fluctuation time) It is configured to execute a notification (right-handed notification) that guides a right-handed game.

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set performance to the execution of the notification of hitting to the right can be the same for both the big winning and the small winning, so that the player can be informed of the performance result of the set performance. can be obfuscated. Furthermore, after 54 seconds from the execution of the set production, a right-handed notification is performed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, a special drawing lottery result that triggers the execution of the set production this time. No matter which one (big hit, small hit), the ball shot by the right-handed game can be won in any of the winning openings that are in the open state.

Next, the contents of the normal pattern variation pattern selection 7 table 202gf will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 392 is a schematic diagram showing the contents of the normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202gf. As shown in Figure 392, normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection 7 table 202gf, normal pattern long fluctuation B (60 seconds) is defined in normal pattern fluctuation pattern selection table 202ef (see Fig. 338) of the fifth control example described above. The difference is that the normal chart long fluctuation C (58 seconds) is specified in the range, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

As shown in the normal pattern variation pattern selection 7 table 202gf, the game state is the normal state (normal pattern low probability), the result of the general pattern lottery is per normal pattern A, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 is "500 ~ 999" range, and the value of the acquired second variation type counter CS2 fluctuates in the range of "800 to 999" when the game state is normal (normal figure low probability) and the result of the general figure lottery is out. "Normal figure long fluctuation C (58 seconds)" is defined as a pattern.

Then, when the normal pattern long variation C is selected, it is configured so that the set effect can be executed. That is, even when the set effect is executed based on the normal pattern long variation C, the right hitting notification is executed 54 seconds after the set effect is executed. Then, when the player plays the right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the shot ball is configured to win the second prize-winning opening 640.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, the timing from the execution of the set effect to the execution of the right-handed notification can be the same for the jackpot winning, the small winning winning, and the normal drawing winning, so that the player can give the set effect. It is possible to make it difficult to understand the performance result of. Further, after 54 seconds have passed since the set effect is executed, a right-handed notification is performed, and when the player plays a right-handed game based on the right-handed notification, the pattern lottery result that triggers the execution of this set effect is determined. Regardless of whether it was a jackpot, a small hit, or a normal hit, any winning opening (specific winning opening 65a, V winning opening 650a, second winning opening) that opens the ball fired by the right-handed game 640) can be awarded.

Furthermore, in this control example, the special figure reservation and the general figure reservation are foreseen, and the start timing of the special figure fluctuation is for a predetermined period (for example, 70 seconds). After a predetermined range period (for example, after 58 seconds to 62 seconds) from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, when it is determined that it is the timing at which the winning is won in the general figure lottery and the long open winning game is executed. A set performance is executed from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, and 54 seconds after the start of the set performance executed from the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, the right hitting information corresponding to the normal figure long open winning game is notified. configured to run

In this way, the contents of the special figure fluctuation and the contents of the normal figure fluctuation are read ahead, and when it is determined that the set production can be executed at any of the pattern fluctuation start timings, the set production can be executed. The frequency of performance execution can be increased, and the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, the performance result of the set performance executed at the start timing of the special figure variation can indicate winning per normal figure long open, so that the player can play a game with extra features.

It should be noted that the relationship between the start timing of the set effect and the execution timing of the right-handed notification should not deviate greatly. It may be shifted back and forth for a few seconds (2 seconds), and in fact it is the timing when the ball fired by the right-handed game enters the winning opening 58 seconds after the execution of the set effect is executed, but the set effect is After 54 seconds from the execution, the right hitting notification may be executed. By enabling execution of the set effect while allowing a slight deviation in this way, the conditions for executing the set effect are more likely to be satisfied, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in this control example, the set effect is configured to be executed at the start timing of the pattern variation, but without being limited to this, if the above-described set effect execution condition is satisfied, for example, a special figure It may be constructed such that the set effect is executed while the variation is being executed. In this case, before the set effect is executed, it is preferable to display a pseudo-stop display mode for making the player think that the special figure variation has ended. As a result, it is possible to allow the player to execute the set effect that is started from the middle of the execution of the special figure variation without a sense of incongruity.

Next, with reference to FIG. 390(b), the contents of the RAM 223 of the audio lamp control device 113 in the seventh control example will be described. This control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that an effect prohibition flag 223ga is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same configurations, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

The effect prohibition flag 223ga is a flag for prohibiting setting of a new set effect, and is set to ON when prohibiting setting of a new set effect. In this control example, in addition to the period during which the set effect is being executed, it is configured so that the set effect is not executed during the period during which a specific super reach effect (including loss) is being executed based on the special figure fluctuation. , the production prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON even during the period in which the specific super ready-to-win production is executed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the fact that the effect being executed (especially, the effect with a high degree of expectation for winning) is switched to the set effect in the middle, and the player's desire to play is lowered.

<Regarding control processing in the seventh control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 393 to 397, the contents of control processing in this seventh control example will be described. In the seventh control example, the main controller 110 performs various determination processing (hit determination processing, etc.) and various selection processing (hit type selection processing, variation pattern selection processing, etc.) in contrast to the control processing contents in the fifth control example described above. ), the processing results are different, and the specifics of various processing (processing for setting commands, processing for storing processing results, etc.) executed based on the processing results. Although the content is different, the technical idea is the same, so detailed description thereof is omitted.

In addition, in the control processing of the audio lamp control device 113, instead of the stop command processing 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368), the stop command processing 7 (see C3246 in FIG. ) instead of changing display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394), and effect update process 7 (see C3142 in FIG. 397) instead of effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374). are doing. Other than that, they are the same, and detailed descriptions of the same contents are omitted.

First, the contents of stop command processing 7 (C3246) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 393 is a flowchart showing the contents of stop command processing 7 (C3246). As shown in FIG. 393, the stop command process 7 (C3246) differs from the above-described stop command process 5 (see C3216 in FIG. are identical. The same processing contents are assigned the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof is omitted.

When the stop command process 7 (C3246) is executed, first, the same C3951 to C3956 processes as the stop command process 5 (see C3216 in FIG. 368) are executed, and then the stop command this time is the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON to determine whether it indicates the stop of the target variation (C3971), and when it is determined that it indicates the stop of the target variation (C3971: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223ga is turned off. Set (C3972) and terminate this process. On the other hand, in the process of C3971, if it is determined that it does not indicate the stop of the target variation (C3972: No), this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 394, the contents of the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) will be described. FIG. 394 is a flow chart showing the contents of variable display setting processing 7 (C3144). As shown in FIG. 394, the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) is different from the above-described variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) in that a process for setting the effect mode of the set effect is added. , and the addition of processing for setting the effect prohibition flag 223ga to ON when the acquired variation pattern is super reach, and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the variable display setting process 7 (C3144) is executed, the same processes C4001 to C4004 as the variable display setting process 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) are executed, and then the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed. Execute. This set effect setting processing (C4041) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, based on the determination result, it is determined whether or not the conditions for executing the set effects are satisfied, and when the conditions for executing the set effects are satisfied, the processing for setting the effect mode of the set effects is performed. executed.

Returning to FIG. 394, the description continues. When the processing of C4041 is finished, then it is determined whether the variation pattern acquired this time is super reach (C4042), and if it is determined that it is super reach (CS24042: Yes), the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON. Then (C4043), a display variation pattern command is set (C4044), and the same processing from C4006 to C4010 as the variation display setting processing 5 (see C3114 in FIG. 369) is executed, and this processing ends. On the other hand, in the process of C4042, if it is determined that the variation pattern acquired this time is not super reach (C4042: No), skip the process of C4043 and proceed to the process of C4044.

Next, with reference to FIG. 395, the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041) will be described. FIG. 395 is a flow chart showing the contents of the set effect setting process (C4041). In the set effect setting process (C4041), the process for setting the set effect is executed at the start timing of the special figure fluctuation or the normal figure fluctuation.

When the set effect setting process (C4041) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current game state is the normal state (C4901), and if it is determined that it is not the normal state (it is a time saving state) (C4901) , this process is terminated as it is because it is not in the game state for executing the set effect. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is in the normal state (C4901: Yes), then this time fluctuation display setting processing 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) sets the fluctuation display of the special figure fluctuation (sets the effect) It is determined whether it is a process (C4902), and if it is determined that it is a process of setting the variation display of the special figure variation (C4902: Yes), the process of C4003 of the variation display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) (C4903).

In the processing of C4903, when it is determined that the variation pattern does not correspond to the set effect (C4903: No), this processing is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern corresponds to the set effect (CS24903: Yes), then it is determined whether the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C4904), and it is determined that it is not set to ON. If it does (C4904: No), it is determined whether the present is in long fluctuation per normal pattern (C4905).

In the process of C4905, if it is determined that the current is per normal long fluctuation (C4905: Yes), the value of the normal pattern fluctuation time counter 223eh and the value of the special pattern fluctuation time counter 223eg are compared ( C4906), it is determined whether the remaining period of normal figure fluctuation is shorter than the special figure fluctuation time of this time (C4907). Then, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation time this time is longer (C4907: No), the winning information of the normal design stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read (C4908), and in the read winning information Determine whether there is winning information corresponding to the normal long fluctuation (C4909), and if it is determined that there is winning information corresponding to the normal long fluctuation (C4909: Yes), set production according to this fluctuation pattern is set (C4910), the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C4911), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4909, when it is determined that there is no normal/universal pattern long variation in the winning information read out in the process of C4908 (C4909: No), this process is terminated as it is. Also, in the process of C4907, if it is determined that the remaining period of the normal pattern fluctuation is longer (C4907: Yes), set the set production according to the normal pattern fluctuation stop timing (C4912), and turn on the production prohibition flag 223ga (C4920), and the process ends.

In addition, in the process of C4905, the state of determining that it is in the process of long fluctuation per normal pattern, that is, in the process of C4904, it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223ga is not set to ON, long fluctuation per normal pattern As the case of being in, for example, at the start timing of the long variation per normal figure being executed, it is the case where the super reach production is executed as the variation production of the special figure fluctuation.

As described above, in this control example, the processing of C4909 is provided, and when there is a normal/universal pattern long variation in the winning information, it is configured to set the set effect. By configuring in this way, when it is determined that there is a general pattern long variation in the winning information, the general pattern long variation is executed during the execution of the set effect based on the special pattern variation, so the set effect is executed During the normal figure fluctuation is executed multiple times in a short time, for example, by executing the normal figure short per game, this set production is a set production executed based on the special figure fluctuation It is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping it. In addition, although the processing of C4909 is provided in this control example, the present invention is not limited to this, and a set effect may be set.

In addition, in the set effect set in the process of C4912, the set effect is executed at the timing of the normal figure fluctuation stop timing instead of the start timing of the special figure fluctuation, so the result of the set effect is the normal figure long open You will be notified of the outcome. In addition, if the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation at the start of this special figure fluctuation is shorter than the period (15 seconds) during which the production mode of the set production can be executed, instead of setting the set production, the general figure long open It is preferable to configure so that a dedicated presentation mode indicating winning is set. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the winning per normal pattern long opening.

On the other hand, in the process of C4904, if it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C4904: Yes), or in the process of C4905, if it is determined that it is not during long fluctuation per normal figure (C4905: No) acquires the lottery result of the normal drawing lottery currently being executed (C4913), determines whether it is elected per normal drawing (per normal drawing long open) (C4914), per normal drawing (normal drawing If it is determined that the long open per) is not won (or the normal drawing lottery is not executed) (C4914: No), the process proceeds to C4910 described above.

In the process of C4914, if it is determined that it is elected per normal figure (C4914: Yes), then it is determined whether this special figure variation is a variation (C4915), and it is determined that it is a variation If (C4915: Yes), the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223eh and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg are compared (C4916), and the remaining period of the general figure fluctuation is from this special figure fluctuation time is also shorter (C4917). Then, if it is determined that the fluctuation time of this special figure fluctuation is shorter than the remaining period of the normal figure fluctuation being executed (C4917: Yes), the set production that is being executed for the general figure fluctuation is this time (C4918) is set to the set effect showing the lottery result of the special figure fluctuation, and the process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of C4915, if it is determined that this special figure variation is not per variation (C4915), or in the process of C4917, the variation of this special figure variation than the remaining period of the normal figure variation being executed If it is determined that the time is longer (C4917: Yes), this process is terminated without setting the set effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation of this time.

In addition, in the process of C4902, if it is determined that the current variable display setting process 7 (see C3144 in FIG. 394) is the process of setting the variable display of normal symbols (C4902: No), normal pattern set effect setting The process is executed (C4919) and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 396, the contents of the general pattern set effect setting process (C4919) will be described. FIG. 396 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general pattern set effect setting process (C4919). When the general pattern set effect setting process (C4919) is executed, first, it is determined whether the current variation pattern is a set effect (C5001), and if it is determined to be a set effect (C5001: Yes), the next First, it is determined whether or not the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C5002).

When it is determined that the effect prohibition flag 223ga is not set to ON in the process of C5002 (C5002: No), the set effect corresponding to the current variation pattern is set (C5003), and the effect prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON. (C5004), and the process ends. On the other hand, in the process of C5002, if it is determined that the production prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON (C5002: Yes), it is determined whether the normal pattern variation is per variation (long open per variation) ( C5005), when it is determined that it is per long open variation (C5005: Yes), the special figure lottery result being executed is acquired (C5006), and it is determined whether it is per special figure (C5007). That is, it is determined whether the production prohibition flag 223ga is set to ON based on the special figure deviation fluctuation.

In the process of C5007, if it is determined that it is not per special figure (C5007: No), then the value of the normal figure fluctuation time counter 223eh and the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg are compared (C5008), To determine whether this normal figure fluctuation time is shorter than the remaining time of the running special figure fluctuation (C5009), and if it is determined that this normal figure fluctuation time is shorter (C5009: Yes), the running A replacement effect (set effect) for notifying the general pattern lottery result (long opening hit) is set (C5010) by the special figure effect (set effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation), and this processing is finished. do. On the other hand, in the process of C5007, if it is determined that the special figure variation being executed is per variation (C5007: Yes), or in the process of C5009, the remaining special figure variation during the normal figure variation time of this time If it is determined that the time is longer than the time (C5009: No), this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 397, the content of effect update process 7 (C3142) will be described. FIG. 397 is a flow chart showing the contents of effect update processing 7 (C3142). As shown in FIG. 397, the effect update process 7 (C3142) is the right-handed notification process when the set effect is executed in contrast to the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) of the fifth control example. The difference is that the Other than that, they are the same, and detailed description of the same content is omitted.

When the effect update process 7 (C3142) is executed, first, the same processes of C4501 to C4506 as the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) of the fifth control example are executed. Then, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is not set to ON in the process of C4505 (C4505: No), or when the final variation effect update process (C4506) is finished, the set effect is executed. (C4541). In the process of C4541, when the set effect is executed, the determination is made by referring to the value of the effect time measurement counter (not shown) set to measure the effect time.

In the processing of C4541, if it is determined that the set effect is being executed (the effect time measurement counter is being measured) (C4541: Yes), is it the timing when 54 seconds have elapsed since the set effect was started? is determined (C4542), and when it is determined that 54 seconds have passed (C4542: Yes), a display guidance command indicating a right-handed game is set (C4543), the process proceeds to C4507, After that, this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of C4541, when it is determined that the set effect is not being executed (C4541: No), or in the process of C4542, when it is determined that the timing has not passed 54 seconds (C4542: No) , C4543 are not performed, the process proceeds to C4507, and then the present process ends.

In addition, in the effect update process 7 (C3142) shown in FIG. 397, only when it is determined that the set effect is being executed, the right-handed game is shown at the timing of 54 seconds from the start of the effect. However, in practice, it is configured to set a display guide command for showing a right-handed game even at other timings. Although specific illustration is omitted, for example, as shown in the normal variation pattern 7 table 202ge1 of FIG. 391 (b), when the set effect of 30 seconds is set, the set effect is executed At the timing when 24 seconds have passed since, a display guidance command for indicating a right-handed game is set. In addition, when the effect result of the set effect being executed is replaced in the middle, a display guide command for indicating a right-handed game may be set at a different timing. As a result, a right-handed game is notified at a timing different from usual, so that an unexpected performance can be provided to the player.

<Eighth control example>
Next, an eighth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 398 to 410. FIG. The eighth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that the method of setting the effect mode of the series of effects is different. First, a method for setting a series of effects in the fifth control example described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 398 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the flow of setting a series of effects in the fifth control example described above.

As shown in FIG. 398, in the fifth control example described above, when winning per normal pattern (per normal pattern long open), and when winning a jackpot or small hit in the first special pattern (special pattern 1) lottery , a series of effects can be set, and the effect data of the series of effects are classified into a plurality of scenario types and stored.

Specifically, the scenario 1 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 319 (b), FIG. 320 (a)) executed during the normal pattern fluctuation, and the production mode executed during the normal pattern per game (FIG. 320 Scenario 2 corresponding to (b)), Scenario 3 corresponding to the effect mode (see FIG. 323 (a)) executed when the ball wins the second winning hole 640 during the normal game per game, It is executed when the period (waiting period) from when the ball wins in the second winning port 640 during the normal game to when the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning ball is executed is 10 to 30 seconds. Scenario 3-1 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 321 (a)), Scenario 4 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 321 (b)) executed during the special figure 2 fluctuation, and during the small hit game Scenario 5 corresponding to the production mode (see FIG. 322(b)) executed at the end of the production mode (see FIGS. 324(b) and 325(b)). Corresponding scenario 7 and are stored.

Then, when a big win or a small win is won in the special figure 1 lottery, a series of performances using a plurality of performance data are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern command of the corresponding special figure 1 variation. there is Specifically, if you win a jackpot in the special drawing 1 lottery, a variable production (series of productions) that sets the production data from the scenarios 1 to 5 described above collectively is executed, and a small win is made in the special drawing 1 lottery. , a variable performance (a series of performances) in which the performance data of the scenarios 1 to 4 are collectively set is executed.

On the other hand, the series of productions set based on the winning per normal figure sets each scenario that constitutes the series of productions individually, and sets the next scenario based on the establishment of the scenario transition condition for one scenario. It consists of Specifically, if you win a normal long open per normal lottery, and if the execution conditions for a series of effects are met, scenario 1 is set to indicate the start of a series of effects, and a normal long open per is set. Scenario 2 is then set when the indicated stop command is received. In addition, in the fifth control example, there is a case where scenario 1 is set (so-called fake effect) in a state where no winning is made for the normal long open, and in that case, the elapsed time of scenario 1 ends , the series of performances ends.

Next, the production mode corresponding to the scenario 2 is executed during the normal long open per game, and when the ball wins the second winning hole 640, the special figure 2 (special 2) winning command indicating that A notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second winning hole 640 is displayed in a layer different from the display layer in which the series of effects is output from the main controller 110 (sub display area in FIG. 321(a) Ds). Then, when the special figure 2 winning command is received, scenario 3 is set. If the ball does not enter the second winning hole 640 during the period in which Scenario 2 is set, Scenario 7 is set in order to end the series of effects, and an end screen is displayed for a predetermined period (3 seconds). Is displayed.

In the fifth control example described above, when moving to scenario 3, that is, when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the normal game, the period until the special figure 2 lottery is executed (waiting period) However, it is determined based on the fluctuation situation of the first special symbol (special figure 1), and different scenarios are set according to the length of the waiting period. Specifically, if the waiting period is less than 10 seconds, scenario 3 (see FIG. 323(a)) is set, and if the waiting period is 4 to 30 seconds, scenario 3-1 (see FIG. 321(a) reference) is set. Here, if the waiting period is 30 seconds or longer, the series of performances being executed is artificially terminated (scenario 7 is set), and a special series of performances (continuous series of performances) is restarted after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. is executed (see FIG. 326). Further, when scenario 3-1 is set, the effect mode corresponding to scenario 3-1 is continuously displayed until the scenario transition condition is satisfied.

Then, when the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received in a state where scenario 3 or scenario 3-1 is set, the conditions for transition to the next scenario are established, and scenario 4 is set. Scenario 4 is set until the special figure 2 stop command indicating the stop of the special figure 2 fluctuation is received, and the production mode of the same length as the fluctuation time (15 seconds) of the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed . Then, when the special figure 2 stop command is received, if the special figure 2 variation of this time indicates a hit, it moves to scenario 5. On the other hand, if the special figure fluctuation indicates the deviation, the process moves to scenario 7 and ends the series of processes.

Here, in this control example, the same variation time is set even if the special figure 2 variation being executed in the state where scenario 4 is set is a small hit or a big hit, and the transition to scenario 5 However, without being limited to this, for example, when winning a jackpot with special figure 2 fluctuation in the normal state, the fluctuation time is a small hit fluctuation time (15 seconds) and a small hit game time (10 seconds ) to set a variation time of 25 seconds, and transition from scenario 4 to scenario 5 during the special figure 2 jackpot variation, and according to the timing of stopping the special figure 2 jackpot variation, the jackpot It may be configured so that a game is executed.

When the scenario 5 is set when the special figure 2 variation is a small hit, the production mode corresponding to the scenario 5 is executed until the V passing command is received during the small hit game or until the small hit game ends. When the V passing command is received, a notification mode indicating the fact is displayed in a layer different from the display layer in which a series of effects are executed, and the game shifts to a jackpot game. On the other hand, when the V passing command is not received after the small winning game period (10 seconds) has passed, the process proceeds to scenario 7 in order to end the series of effects.

As described above, in the fifth control example, when executing a series of effects based on the special figure 1 fluctuation, a series of production scenarios are collectively set in correspondence with the variation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation, and the normal When the series of effects is executed based on the figure variation, the effect mode of the series of effects is updated according to the degree of establishment of the transition condition corresponding to each scenario. Therefore, in the case of executing a series of performances in the same performance mode, when the update of the performance mode is fixed, the processing for setting the series of performances can be simplified, and the update contents of the performance mode can be changed according to the game situation. In this case, the mode of presentation can be flexibly changed according to each game situation.

In addition, in the fifth control example, when executing a series of effects based on the general pattern lottery, the scenario of the series of effects is configured to be set individually, but not limited to this, for example, the general pattern Of the series of effects to be executed based on a lottery, a plurality of scenarios may be collectively set for portions where the update of the effect mode is confirmed. This simplifies the process of setting a series of effects.

The method of setting a series of effects in the fifth control example described above with reference to FIG. In addition to simplifying the processing, if the contents of the presentation mode update are variable depending on the game situation, the presentation mode can be flexibly changed according to each game situation. Since the effect mode that can be variably set is only the effect mode corresponding to the scenario 3, the player feels a sense of incongruity when compared with the effect mode based on other scenarios in the series of effects executed in a predetermined period. I had a problem.

Here, in order to solve the above-described problem, in this eighth control example, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation situation of the special pattern (first special pattern) during the normal pattern per game is predicted, Based on the prediction result, it is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation. In other words, when the normal figure fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation to be executed this time and the general figure lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal figure are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is determined whether or not the currently executed special figure 1 fluctuation is finished during the normal figure per game, and based on the determination result, the production mode of a series of performances corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation is set. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the variation end timing of the special figure 1 variation being executed is the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period per normal figure (maximum period) After If it is, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) that can be executed by special figure 2 fluctuation at the time of executing normal figure fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the standby period as various effect modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, it is possible to lengthen the variably settable period of the effect mode of the series of effects according to the length of the standby period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the production.

<Regarding the electrical configuration in the eighth control example>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 399 and 400, the electrical configuration in this eighth control example will be described. The eighth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that a partial configuration of the ROM 222 and a partial configuration of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are changed. Specifically, the difference is that a series of production scenario table 222ha is added to the ROM 222, and that a medium hit flag 223ha, a production scenario storage area 223hb, and a constant monitoring flag 223hc are added to the RAM 223. Other elements are the same, and the same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 399(a), the configuration of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 399(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example. As shown in FIG. 399(a), the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the eighth control example differs from the fifth control example in that a series of effect scenario table 222ha is added.

The series of effect scenario table 222ha is a data table that defines the effect mode of a series of effects to be executed corresponding to the progressing game situation. Here, with reference to FIG. 400, the contents of the normal pattern scenario table 222ha1, which defines the production scenario of the series of effects set based on the normal pattern variation, out of the series pattern scenario table 222ha will be described.

FIG. 400 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the series of effect scenario table 222ha. It should be noted that FIG. 400 shows only the characteristic contents of the eighth control example (the production scenario of the series of productions set based on the normal pattern fluctuation) among the contents defined in the series of production scenario table 222ha. The description and explanation of the same content as the fifth control example described above, that is, the content of the production mode of a series of productions set in correspondence with the fluctuation period of the special figure fluctuation, is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 400, in this eighth control example, when setting the production mode of a series of productions based on the normal pattern fluctuation, it is possible to set multiple normal pattern scenarios (normal pattern per scenario 1 to 4). It is configured, and based on the result of the first prediction (prediction on the length of the waiting period that can occur during the execution of a series of productions) executed at the time of normal pattern fluctuation, different normal pattern per scenarios are set Configure.

Specifically, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation that was elected per normal pattern long open, it is determined whether the first special pattern (special pattern 1) is fluctuating, and if it is determined that the special pattern 1 is fluctuating To determine the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation in execution. Next, compare the game period of the normal figure long open per game executed based on this normal figure fluctuation and the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed, and the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed Determine whether it is later than the end time of the game per normal pattern long open to be executed based on this normal pattern fluctuation, and if it is determined that it is later, special from the end of the game per normal pattern long open The waiting period until the FIG. 1 variation ends (the period until the special figure 2 variation can be executed) is determined. Then, it is configured to set a normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the length of the waiting period determined by the above-described processing.

By configuring in this way, at the start of the normal figure fluctuation, it is possible to predict in advance the length of the waiting period in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed, so depending on the length of the waiting period It is possible to execute a series of performances in a different performance mode.

In addition, in the first prediction described above, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is not being executed at the start timing of the normal figure fluctuation, or the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is longer than the game period per normal figure long If it is before, because the standby period cannot be predicted in advance, only the production mode of the series of productions corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation time is set at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation.

As shown in FIG. 400, a series of performance scenario table 222ha defines a plurality of normal-pattern winning scenarios that are set based on the prediction result of the first prediction executed at the start of the normal-pattern fluctuation. As a result of the prediction, if the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is "less than 2 seconds", "scenario 1 per normal figure" is set, and if it is "2 seconds or more and less than 30 seconds" "Scenario 2 per normal map" is set, and if it is "30 seconds or more", it is defined so that "scenario 3 per normal map" is set. Moreover, when the prediction result of the first prediction is "unpredictable", it is defined that "scenario 4 per normal pattern" is set.

Here, I will explain the contents of each normal scenario. When "normal map per scenario 1" is set, as a production mode of a series of effects, "scenario 1" in "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" in "normal map per game", "special figure 2 fluctuation" The content of the winning scenario is defined so that the effect mode corresponding to the "scenario 3" is set to "medium". In other words, when "normal figure per scenario 1" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period is short, without setting the special figure 2 waiting period exclusive production mode, the production mode showing the normal figure per game A series of productions that shift from to the production mode showing the special figure 2 fluctuation are executed.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that is difficult for the player to understand by setting the effect mode indicating the special figure 2 waiting period for a short period of time (for example, 0.5 seconds). can be done. In addition, in this control example, when scenario 1 per normal pattern is set, special pattern 2 standby period of less than 2 seconds generated when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during normal pattern long open per game Inside, it is configured so that the production mode that can be set during the game per normal figure is continuously set, but without being limited to this, the special figure 2 fluctuation during the special figure 2 waiting period of less than 2 seconds It may be configured so as to set an effect mode that can be set inside.

When "normal map scenario 2" is set, as a production mode of a series of effects, "scenario 1" for "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" for "normal map per game", "special figure 2 fluctuation" The content of the winning scenario is defined so that the effect mode corresponding to "scenario 3" is set for "waiting" and "scenario 4" is set for "during special figure 2 fluctuation". In other words, when "per normal figure scenario 2" is set, that is, when the special figure 2 waiting period exists for a predetermined period, it is configured to set the special presentation mode for the special figure 2 waiting period.

By configuring in this way, when the special figure 2 standby period occurs for a predetermined period, it is possible to execute a series of effects that do not give the player a sense of discomfort (pause). Furthermore, in this control example, when "scenario 1 per normal map" is set, "scenario 3" set to "during special map 2 fluctuation" is set, and when "scenario 2 per normal map" is set is configured to be set in correspondence with "special figure 2 waiting". By configuring in this way, regardless of the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period, it is possible to set a production mode that shifts from "scenario 2" to "scenario 3" as a series of productions. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of performances that do not make the player feel uncomfortable.

Next, when "normal map scenario 3" is set, the series of production modes are "scenario 1" for "normal map fluctuation", "scenario 2" for "normal map game", and "special The contents of the winning scenario are defined so that the effect mode corresponding to "scenario 2", "scenario 3" in FIG. In other words, if "normal figure scenario 3" is set, that is, if the special figure 2 waiting period is greater than or equal to a predetermined period, the period during which the corresponding "scenario 2" is set during the normal figure game is It is configured to be longer than other normal scenarios.

By configuring in this way, even if the special figure 2 waiting period is long for the player, it is possible to make the player think that the one period is in the middle of the game per normal figure. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to think that the special figure 2 waiting period is long. In addition, since it is configured to display the production mode (scenario 2) corresponding to the game per normal pattern for a long time, the game per normal pattern is executed for a long time instead of the special figure 2 waiting period for the player. I can make you think that it is.

Also, if the "normal pattern scenario 4" is set, the fluctuation situation of the special pattern 1 fluctuation during the game per normal pattern long open can not be predicted at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, so "normal pattern Only "scenario 1" corresponding to "during figure fluctuation" is set, and this process is terminated. In addition, when "normal map winning scenario 4" is set, it is determined whether the scenario transition condition is satisfied at the scenario switching timing as in the fifth control example described above, and the scenario based on the determination result is set. It is configured as follows.

In addition, even when a different normal pattern winning scenario is set as the normal pattern winning scenario, the same performance mode is set during the small winning game and during the big winning game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, the flow in the case where scenario 2 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects of the eighth control example will be described. FIG. 401 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when Scenario 2 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects.

As shown in Figure 401, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed when the normal figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the waiting period is "20 seconds" as a processing result of the first prediction process, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, the production data corresponding to the "normal pattern winning scenario 2" defined in the series production scenario table 222ha. is set and stored in a production scenario storage area 223hb, which will be described later. Then, based on the lapse of time, a series of effects are executed in the effect mode corresponding to the effect data stored in the effect scenario storage area 223hb.

In this way, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, if the future game content can be predicted, by configuring to set a plurality of production data (scenario) collectively, to set the production mode of the series production processing can be simplified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 402, the flow in the case where scenario 4 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects will be described. FIG. 402 is a timing chart schematically showing the flow when Scenario 4 per normal pattern is set as a series of effects.

As shown in Figure 402, the first prediction process for determining the length of the waiting period (special figure 2 waiting period) is executed when normal figure fluctuation is executed. Then, when it is determined that the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed as a processing result of the first prediction process is before the stop timing of the fluctuation per normal figure, it is possible to predict the length of the waiting period. Since it is impossible, the processing result of the first prediction process is determined as "unpredictable", and at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, the production data corresponding to the "normal pattern winning scenario 4" defined in the series production scenario table 222ha. is set.

That is, according to the example shown in FIG. 402, after the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is stopped, during the period until the ball wins the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure long open per game, a new Since it is not possible to predict whether or not Toku-zu 1 variation will be executed, it is a situation where the length of the waiting period cannot be predicted. In such a case, at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, only the production mode (scenario 1) during the period corresponding to the normal pattern fluctuation is set as the production mode of the series of effects, and when the normal pattern fluctuation stops (at the start of the normal pattern) ), the second prediction process is performed.

The second prediction process is for determining the length of the waiting period again when the normal pattern fluctuation stops (at the start of the normal pattern), and the length of the waiting period cannot be determined in the first prediction process. This process is executed when In this second prediction process, it is determined whether special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed at the time of normal figure fluctuation stop (normal figure per start time), and if it is determined that special figure 1 fluctuation is in progress, the special being executed The remaining period of FIG. 1 fluctuation is compared with the game period of the game per normal long open, and the length of the waiting period is determined. Then, based on the determination result, the effect mode of the series of effects is set based on the contents defined in the series of effect scenario table 222ha.

As shown in Figure 402, if it is not possible to predict the waiting period even in the second prediction process (if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the timing when the second prediction process is executed), Even at the present time, the standby period cannot be determined, so the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation in the normal figure per game (normal figure long open per game), or the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation is always monitored. A constant monitoring process is executed for this purpose. And, by the constant monitoring process, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation is executed before the new special figure 1 variation is performed, the special figure 2 is made to correspond to the start of the special figure 2 variation An effect mode (scenario 3) corresponding to the fluctuation is set.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when setting the effect mode of a series of effects to be executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation, the standby period in which an irregular period is set according to the game situation It is configured to predict the length and execute a series of effects according to the prediction result. By configuring in this way, even if a long standby period is set during the period in which the series of performances is executed, it is possible to provide the player with a series of performances that does not cause a sense of incongruity.

In addition, in the eighth control example, since the waiting period is predicted at the timing when the series of effects is executed, the series of effects to be executed before the actual waiting period is set. It is possible to variably set the mode of presentation according to the length of the waiting period. Therefore, it is possible to execute a series of performances without a sense of incongruity as compared with the case where only the performance modes set corresponding to the standby period among the performance modes of the series of performances are varied according to the length of the standby period. .

Furthermore, in the present eighth control example, in a state where the waiting period is set, it is configured to be able to set an effect mode indicating that it is a period other than the waiting period (for example, a game period per normal figure), It is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand that a long waiting period is set. In addition, in the eighth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, since it is configured to perform a right-handed game during a series of effects, whether or not the present is the waiting period is determined by the game method. It is possible to make it difficult for a player to discriminate.

In addition, in this eighth control example, when the length of the standby period is difficult to predict (impossible) at the start of the normal pattern fluctuation, at a different timing (per normal pattern game start timing), the waiting period again is configured to execute processing for predicting the length of (second prediction processing). In this way, by providing a plurality of timings for predicting the length of the standby period before the standby period is set, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy of the length of the standby period.

In addition, in the process of predicting the waiting period, only when the waiting period cannot be predicted, the game situation during the game per normal pattern is constantly monitored, and the waiting period is handled based on the results of constant monitoring. Since it is configured to set the effect mode to be played, the process for setting the effect mode of the series of effects can be simplified.

In addition, in the present eighth control example, in the process for predicting the waiting period (first prediction process, second prediction process), the length of the waiting period using the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed Although it is configured to predict (determine), it is not limited to this, for example, the special figure 1 pending winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a is read in advance, and based on the result of the reading, the next It may be configured to predict the length of the standby period also using the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation executed in the second.

By configuring in this way, for example, as in the example shown in FIG. 402, the stop timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is before the start timing of the game per normal figure, that is, during execution When the special figure 1 fluctuation is completed, the start condition of the special figure 2 fluctuation (winning of the ball to the second winning opening 640) cannot be established, the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation to be executed next It is possible to look ahead and predict the length of the waiting period based on the look-ahead result. Therefore, it is possible to improve the prediction accuracy with respect to the length of the waiting period.

Furthermore, in the eighth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, it is configured so that the special figure 2 variation is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation, but not limited to this, For example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation may be configured to be executed according to the winning order of the balls to the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and priority over the special figure 2 variation It may be configured so that special figure 1 variation is executed.

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the eighth control example>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound ramp control device 113 in the eighth control example will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 403 to 410. FIG. In this control example, in place of the winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361), the winning information command processing 8 (see FIG. 403) is executed in contrast to the above-described fifth control example, and a series of effect determination processing (see FIG. 404 reference), the point of executing the hit related command processing 8 (see FIG. 405) instead of the hit related command processing 5 (see FIG. 364), and the normal figure per related command processing (see FIG. 406) Point of execution, point of executing variable production setting processing 8 (see FIG. 407) in place of variable production setting processing 5 (see FIG. 369), and execution of production setting processing during constant monitoring (see FIG. 408) , the point of executing the effect setting process 8 for the normal figure (see FIG. 409) instead of the effect setting process for the normal figure (see FIG. 371), and the point of executing the series of effect prediction setting process (see FIG. 410) , and are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, the numerical values were simply changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, with reference to FIG. 403, the contents of the winning information command process 8 (C3242) will be described. FIG. 403 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning information command process 8 (C3242) executed in the eighth control example. In this winning information command process 8 (C3242), in contrast to the above-described winning information command process 5 (see FIG. 361), a process executed when a winning information command is received during execution of a series of effects (a series of effects determination process ( C3441 in FIG. 404)) is added, and the rest is the same, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

When the prize information command process 8 (C3242) is executed, after executing the same processes of C3401 to C3405 as the prize information command process 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example, in the process of C3403, If it is determined that there is no 2 hit information (C3403: No), the process of C3441 is executed. In the processing of C3441, a series of effect determination processing is executed (C3441). The details of this series of effect determination processing (C3441) will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the process of C3441, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 404, the contents of the series of effect determination processing (C3441) will be described. FIG. 404 is a flow chart showing the contents of a series of effect determination processing (C3441) executed in winning information command processing 8 (FIG. 403) in the eighth control example. In this series of effect determination processing (C3441), it is determined whether a series of effects are currently being executed, and if it is determined that a series of effects are being executed, the type of the winning command received this time (special figure 1, special figure 2, normal map) is executed.

When the series effect determination process (C3441) is executed, first, the value of the series effect counter 223ek is obtained (C5101), and then it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223ek is 0 (C5102). The series effect counter 223ek acquired in the process of C4101 is set to a value corresponding to the effect period when a series of effects is executed, and is decremented (updated) in the effect update process that is periodically executed, and the counter value is set to "0", the series of performances is terminated. That is, in the processing of C5102, it is determined whether or not a series of effects are being executed.

In the process of C5102, when it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223ek is not greater than 0 (is 0) (C5102: No), since the series effect is not currently being executed, various display modes during execution of the series effect Skipping the processing of C5103 to C5110 for setting , the process proceeds to the processing of C5111.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223ek is greater than 0 (C5102: Yes), since the series effect is being executed, the winning information command received this time is the special figure 2 prize (special 2 prize) (C5103), and if it is determined that the special 2 prize is won (C5103: Yes), the information in the production scenario storage area 223hb is read (C5104), and then the constant monitoring flag 223hc is turned on. It is determined whether there is (C5105). If it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is off (C5105: No), the process proceeds to C5108.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is ON (C5105: Yes), that is, the waiting period in which the execution of the special figure 2 variation is waited among the production periods in which the series of productions this time is executed If the state cannot be predicted, the waiting period is calculated (C5106).

Here, the contents of calculation executed in the processing of C5106 will be described. Since the process of C5106 is a process that is executed when a winning information command indicating special figure 2 winning (special figure 2 winning) is received, the present time is the second winning opening 640 (starting winning opening of special figure 2 variation) The ball wins, and the condition that is part of the execution opportunity of the special figure 2 fluctuation is established. In this control example, the special figure 1 variation and the special figure 2 variation are configured not to be executed at the same time (overlapping), and the special figure 2 variation is given priority over the special figure 1 variation. configured to run on

That is, when the special figure 1 variation is being executed at the present time, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time is executed after the special figure 1 variation being executed is completed. Therefore, the remaining time of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed at the present time is extracted using the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg, and the extraction result is calculated as the waiting period. Also, if the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the present time, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command received this time will be immediately executed, so "0" is set as the standby period .

In addition, in this control example, the number of balls winning the second winning opening 640 is configured to be one during the execution of one series of effects (during one normal long open game). Therefore, when receiving a winning information command indicating special figure 2 winning (special 2 winning) in the process of C5103, it is configured to always execute processing for calculating the waiting period, but this Without limitation, for example, during execution of one series of effects (during one normal long open per game) When configuring so that two or more balls can win in the second winning port 640 is set to ON in the process of C5106 to indicate that the standby period has been calculated (calculated flag), and after determining that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is ON in the process of C5105 (C5105: Yes) , is configured to determine whether the above-described calculated flag is set to ON, and if the calculated flag is set to ON, skip the processes of C5106 and C5107 and proceed to the process of C5108. It should be configured as follows.

By configuring in this way, while a series of effects are being executed, even if a plurality of balls win the second winning port 640 and the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received multiple times , Since the standby period can be calculated only based on the winning information command indicating the first received special figure 2 winning, it is possible to suppress unnecessary processing from being executed. In other words, in this control example, the period from the timing of the first special figure 2 winning during the execution of a series of effects until the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed is set as a waiting period, and the effect mode according to the length of the waiting period By setting , even if the period (waiting period) in which the special figure 2 fluctuation is not executed despite winning the special figure 2 is long, the effect that is executed in the middle of the series of effects (during the waiting period A plurality of balls enter the second prize winning opening 640 while the series of performances are being executed, since the performance to be executed is slowed down and the performance effect is suppressed from being lowered. However, even if the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received multiple times, there is no need to calculate the length of the waiting period based on the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning received after the second time. processing.

It should be noted that, as in this control example, during the period in which a series of effects are being executed, every time a winning information command indicating a special figure 2 winning is received, if the standby period is calculated, first Figure 2 When receiving a prize information command indicating a prize, whether or not the special figure 1 variation is executed, and if it is being executed, it is sufficient to determine the remaining period and calculate the waiting period. When the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received, it is determined whether the special figure variation under execution is the special figure 1 variation or the special figure 2 variation, and if the special figure 1 variation is being executed , Based on the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation in execution and the winning information command indicating the previously received special figure 2 winning, the waiting period may be calculated.

In this case, the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning previously received is read in advance, and if the result of the look-ahead is out, the winning indicating the special figure 2 winning received this time The remaining period until the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the information command is executed, that is, the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed and the fluctuation time of the next executed deviation fluctuation Waiting period It is good to configure it to be set as By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the period during which the special figure 2 deviation fluctuation is executed as a waiting period, so that it is difficult for the player to understand that the special figure 2 lottery is out. can.

Returning to FIG. 404, the description continues. In the process of C5108, the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning is set (C5108), and the process proceeds to C5109. In the processing of this C5108, a display command indicating that the special figure 2 has been won is set. The display commands set here include, for example, a direct display mode that directly displays that the special figure 2 has been won, and a display that suggests the remaining period until the special figure variation corresponding to the winning is executed A mode, that is, an indirect display mode for indirectly displaying that the special figure 2 winning is displayed.

In addition, in this control example, using the display command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning, the above-described direct display mode and indirect display mode are configured to be settable, but not limited to this, for example , the effect mode may be set based on the lottery result of the variation, or may be configured based on the length of the standby period of the series of effects. In addition, the notification mode indicating that the ball has entered the second prize-winning opening 640 for the first time during the series of performances and the notification mode indicating that the ball has won the second prize-winning opening 640 for the second and subsequent times are made different. Also good.

Next, in the processing of C5109, it is determined whether or not the ball that has won the V winning opening 650a has passed through a specific area (V area) (whether there is a V winning) (C5109). When it is determined that the ball that has won the V prize opening 650a has passed through the specific area (V area) (C5109: Yes), a display command corresponding to the V prize is set (C5110), and the process proceeds to C5111. . When it is determined that the ball that has won the V winning opening 650a has not passed through the specific area (V area) (C5109: No), then the process proceeds to C5111.

In the process of C5111, an effect mode related to other winning information is set (C5111), a display command for indicating the set effect mode is set (C5112), and then this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 405, the contents of the win-related command process 8 (C3261) will be described. FIG. 405 is a flow chart showing the details of the win-related command process 8 (C3261) executed in the eighth control example. In this hit related command process 8 (C3261), the effect mode in each period of the series of effects is set based on the execution of the general pattern winning game during the period in which the series of effects is being executed.

When the hit-related command process 8 (C3261) is executed, the same C3501 to C3504 processes as the hit-related command process 5 (see FIG. 364) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and in the process of C3505, the main control If it is determined that the command per general pattern has been received from the device 110 (C3505: Yes), per general pattern per related command processing is executed (C3551), and then this processing ends. The details of this normal per figure related command process (C3551) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, with reference to FIG. 406, the contents of the normal per figure related command process (C3551) will be described. FIG. 406 is a flow chart showing the contents of the normal per figure related command process (C3551) executed in the eighth control example. This per normal per related command process (C3551) is executed when the per related command per normal per per per related command (C3505 in FIG. 405: Yes) is executed, and the start timing and end of per normal per per game At the timing, various processes for setting the effect mode of the series of effects are executed.

In the normal per figure related command process (C3551), first, it is determined whether or not an opening command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5201). When it is determined that an opening command has been received (C5201: Yes), it is determined whether the value of the series effect counter 223ek is greater than 0, that is, whether a series of effects is currently being executed (C5202). . If it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223ek is not greater than 0 (C5202: No), the opening command process for display is executed (C5203), the normal pattern per middle flag 223ha is set to ON, and C5215 Go to processing.

The display opening command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5202, if it is determined that the value of the series effect counter 223ek is greater than 0 (C5202: Yes), the information stored in the effect scenario storage area 223hb is read (C5205), then the effect scenario It is determined whether or not the information stored in the storage area 223hb is scenario 4 per normal pattern (C5206).

Here, in the production scenario storage area 223hb, information indicating the normal pattern winning scenario set in the series of production prediction setting processing (C4251 in FIG. 410) performed when executing the normal pattern variation (normal pattern lottery) is stored. In the process of C5206, when it is determined that it is a "per normal pattern scenario 4 (see FIG. 400)" which is a scenario per normal pattern in which the production mode corresponding to the period during the game per normal pattern is not set , processing for setting an effect mode during a game per normal pattern in a series of effects is executed.

In the process of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223hb is not scenario 4 for the normal pattern (scenarios 1 to 3 for the normal pattern) (C5206: No), Because the effect mode during the game is set, that is, in the series effect prediction setting process (C4251 in FIG. 410) performed when executing the normal pattern fluctuation (normal pattern lottery), Since it is a case where the effect mode corresponding to the period is set, without setting the effect mode corresponding to the period during the game per normal pattern in this process (Skip the processing of C5207 to C5210 d) Move to the process of C5204.

On the other hand, in the processing of C5206, if it is determined that the information stored in the production scenario storage area 223hb is scenario 4 per normal figure (C5206: Yes), special figure fluctuation time counter (special figure 1 fluctuation time counter) The value of 223eg and the game period per normal pattern are compared (C5207). When the processing contents of C5207 are explained in detail, first, using the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg, the remaining variation time of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is calculated. For example, when the special figure 1 variation of 60 seconds is executed, the value corresponding to the variation time 60 seconds at the start timing of the special figure 1 variation (in this control example, the value of the special figure variation time counter 223eg , 1 is subtracted in effect update process 7 (see C3142 in FIG. 397) executed every 1 millisecond in the main process (see FIG. 281), so the value corresponding to 60 seconds is "60000") is set. And, when this process is executed when 30 seconds have passed since the special figure 1 fluctuation started, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 fluctuation is "30000" Therefore, "30 seconds" is calculated as the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 variation. Then, it is calculated based on the type of game per normal figure to be executed this time. In this control example, since the opening command output from the main controller 110 includes information indicating the type of game per normal pattern to be executed this time, the game period per normal pattern is calculated based on the information. In addition, here, as the game period per normal figure, the time defined as the end condition established based on the passage of time is calculated.

Specifically, when 3 seconds have passed since the normal pattern per game is started, or when the winning number of balls to the second winning hole 640 reaches 10, the normal pattern per game ends When the end condition is set in advance, "3 seconds", which is the maximum time that the game per normal pattern can continue, is set as the game period per normal pattern. As a result, in the process of predicting the waiting period in advance (the period from the special figure 2 winning to the execution of the special figure 2 fluctuation) in order to set the production mode of the series of effects, the normal figure used for prediction Since it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the game period per normal figure actually executed is longer than the game period, the period predicted as the period in which the ball can win a prize to the second winning opening 640 After the elapse of, the ball enters the second winning hole 640, and it is possible to avoid the situation where the special figure 2 variation is executed. Therefore, even when the performance mode is set in advance based on the prediction result, the actual game content and the performance content to be executed are less likely to deviate from each other, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

It should be noted that, when the game period per normal pattern is calculated as described above, the game per normal pattern ends in a period shorter than the calculated game period per normal pattern, that is, the predetermined number within the game period per normal pattern ( 10) balls have won in the second winning hole 640, the normal pattern per game may end. In this case, it becomes a case where the ball wins in the second winning hole 640 during the normal pattern per game, and at the time when the normal pattern per game ends, the effect corresponding to the waiting period or the special figure 2 fluctuation period Since the performance is executed, it is configured so as not to make the player feel uncomfortable.

Returning to FIG. 406, the description continues. When the processing of C5207 is finished, then, based on the comparison result of C5207, the special figure 1 remaining period (the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation) is larger (longer) than the game period per normal figure, that is, the special feature being executed It is determined whether the timing when the FIG. 1 fluctuation ends is later than the end timing of the game per normal pattern to be executed this time (C5208). In the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: No), the special figure at the time the ball enters the second winning port 640 during the normal figure per game Since there is a possibility that 1 change has not been executed, the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to ON (C5209), and the process proceeds to C5210.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is longer than the normal figure per game period, that is, the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed does not end during the normal figure per game that is executed this time (C5208 : Yes), since it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation is being executed when the ball enters the second winning hole 640 during the normal figure per game, the process of setting the constant monitoring flag 223hc (C5209) is skipped and shifts to the processing of C5210.

In the process of C5210, the series production scenario during the game per corresponding normal figure is set (C5210), and then the process proceeds to the process of C5204. In the process of C5204, set the normal per figure middle flag to ON (C5204), and then proceed to the process of C5215. Here, when the processing content of C5210 described above is explained in detail, in the processing of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is longer than the game period per normal figure (C5208: Yes), the difference period, that is , Calculate the period from the end of the normal figure per game to the end of the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation. Then, using the calculation result as the special figure 2 waiting period, selects the general figure scenario to which the special figure 2 waiting period corresponds from the general figure scenario table defined in the series production scenario table 222ha, and produces set the mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5208, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining period is shorter than the game period per normal figure (C5208: No), the effect mode (series effect , the same effect mode as in the fifth control example described above is set.

Next, in the processing of C5201, if it is determined that the opening command has not been received (C5201: No), then it is determined whether or not the ending command has been received from the main controller 110 (C5211). Then, when it is determined that the ending command is received (C5211: Yes), the normal per figure medium flag 223ha is set to off (C5212), the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to off (C5213), and the display ending A command is set (C5214), and then the process proceeds to C5215. The display ending command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and command output processing (S3102) of the main processing (see FIG. 139) executed by the MPU 221 in the fifth control example. , and is transmitted to the display control device 114 . When the display control device 114 receives the display ending command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the ending effect.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C5211 that the ending command has not been received (C5211: No), the process proceeds to the process of C5215. In the processing of C5215, processing according to other commands is executed (C5215), and this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 407, the contents of the variable effect setting process 8 (C4044) will be described. FIG. 407 is a flow chart showing the contents of the variation effect setting process 8 (C4044) executed in the eighth control example. In this variable effect setting process 8 (C4044), when the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to ON (the game is per normal figure executed during a series of effects, and the length of the waiting period is not set In the case), the point of adding the process for setting the variable effect to be executed and the point of changing the contents of the process for setting the variable effect of the normal symbol, and the variable effect setting of the fifth control example described above. It is different from processing 5 (see FIG. 370), and the rest is the same. A detailed description of the same contents will be omitted.

When the fluctuation production setting process 8 (C4044) is executed, the same C4101 process as the fluctuation production setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and the special figure fluctuation production is not set (normal If it is determined (C4101: No), the normal figure effect setting process 8 is executed (C4167), and then this process ends. The details of this general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the processing of C4101, if it is determined to set the special figure fluctuation effect (C4101: Yes), then it is determined whether the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to ON (C4151). When it is determined that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is ON (C4151: Yes), the constant monitoring effect setting process is executed (C4152), and the process proceeds to C4102. The details of this constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4151 that the constant monitoring flag 223hc is not set to ON, the process of C4152 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C4102. After executing the process of C4152, the same processes of C4102 to C4116 as the variable effect setting process 5 (see FIG. 370) of the fifth control example described above are executed, and then this process ends.

Next, referring to FIG. 408, the content of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) will be described. FIG. 408 is a flow chart showing the contents of the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) executed in the eighth control example. This constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is executed in the variation effect setting process 8 (see C4044 in FIG. 407), and is executed when a variation pattern command corresponding to special symbol variation is received. It is a thing.

In the constant monitoring production setting process (C4152), first, it is determined whether the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is received (whether it is the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301), and corresponds to the special figure 1 variation (C5301: Yes), variation pattern command processing 5 (see C3204 in Figure 363) C3303 extracted in the variation pattern Based on, to extract the variation time of this special figure 1 variation (special figure 1 variation time) (C5302). Next, it is determined whether the special figure 1 fluctuation time is greater than the period per normal figure (long) (C5303).

In the process of C5303, the special figure 1 fluctuation time extracted in the process of C5302 is compared with the remaining period of the game per general figure during execution (period per general figure), and the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation time is, It is determined whether it is later than the end timing of the period per normal figure. In this control example, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is configured to be executed when the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to ON, that is, at least during normal game per game, so C5303 The processing of is to be executed during the game per normal pattern, but when the processing of C5303 is configured to be executable in a state where the game per normal pattern is not executed, the game per normal pattern is executed. As a state without, it may be configured to compare the special figure 1 fluctuation time and the period per normal pattern using the period "0" per normal pattern.

In the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: Yes) , Since the special figure 1 fluctuation does not end during the game per normal pattern, the production mode (production scenario of a series of productions) during the normal pattern per game is set based on the determination result of C5303 (C5304), and constant monitoring The flag 223hc is set to OFF (C5305), and the process proceeds to C5306.

Here, the processing of C5304 will be described in detail. First, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is longer than the game period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is later than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303: Yes), the difference Period, that is, the period from the end of the game per normal figure to the end of the special figure 1 fluctuation is calculated, and the calculated period is the second special symbol (special figure 2) variation waiting period (special figure 2 standby period), and among the scenarios 1 to 3 per normal pattern defined in the series of effect scenario table 222ha, the production mode is set based on the normal pattern per scenario corresponding to the special pattern 2 standby period calculated this time. On the other hand, in the process of C5303, if it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation time is not longer than the period per normal figure (the end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation is earlier than the end timing of the game per normal figure) (C5303 : No), even if this special figure 1 variation is executed, it is not possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period, that is, during this special figure 1 variation, the ball won the second winning opening 640 If not, even after the special figure 1 variation to be executed this time is finished, since the normal figure per game is being executed, the special figure 1 variation is performed during the remaining normal figure per game, or special Since it is not possible to predict whether the variation in FIG. In this case, since the constant monitoring flag 223hc is not set to OFF, the constant monitoring effect setting process (C4152) is subsequently executed.

In the eighth control example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 401 and 402, period effects (a series of In the case of executing production), the previous game content (length of special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted at multiple timings (ordinary figure fluctuation start timing, normal figure per game start timing), and production is performed based on the prediction result It is configured to set the mode. Then, at each prediction timing, only when it is determined to be unpredictable, the production setting processing during constant monitoring (C4152) is executed, and whether the special figure fluctuation is executed during the normal figure per game is always monitored. Configure.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to set the production mode of a series of productions collectively for the range in which the previous game content (the length of the waiting period of special figure 2) can be predicted in advance, the production of a series of productions It is possible to simplify the processing for setting the presentation mode. In addition, since the processing for predicting the content of the game to be played is configured to be executable at a plurality of timings, the prediction accuracy can be improved. Further, when the previous game content cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the production mode of the series of productions is executed based on the actual game content, so the production of the series of productions is performed. Aspects can be reliably set.

Returning to FIG. 408, the description continues. In the process of C5301, if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 1 variation is not received (it is not the start of the special figure 1 variation) (C5301: No), then the variation corresponding to the special figure 2 variation It is determined whether the pattern command is received (whether it is the start of the special 2 fluctuation) (C5306), and if it is determined that the variation pattern command corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation is received (the start of the special 2 fluctuation) (C5306: Yes), since the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the game per normal figure, as described above with reference to FIG. Scenario 3 is set as the effect mode of the corresponding series of effects (C5307), the constant monitoring flag 223hc is set to OFF (C5308), the special 2 fluctuation command for display is set (C5309), and then the processing of C5310 is performed. do.

In addition, the process of C5307 described above is a case where a series of effects are executed based on the normal pattern fluctuation, and the first prediction process executed at the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, and the normal pattern per game start timing. It is not possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period in any of the second prediction processes, and the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed during the period when the production setting process during constant monitoring is being performed during the normal figure per game. This is done when In other words, it is a case where the special figure 2 variation is executed without predicting the special figure 2 waiting period. Thus, when the special figure 2 fluctuation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 waiting period cannot be predicted, in the process of C5307, the production mode corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation period is configured to be set. Therefore, even if the previous game contents cannot be predicted at a plurality of prediction timings, the series of effects is performed based on the actual game contents, so that the series of effects can be performed. It is possible to reliably set the performance mode.

On the other hand, in the process of C5306, if it is determined that the variation of the special figure 2 has not started (C5306: No), the process proceeds to C5310. In the processing of C5310, processing according to other commands is executed (C5310), and then this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 409, the contents of the general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167) will be described. FIG. 409 is a flow chart showing the contents of the general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167) executed in the eighth control example. This general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167) is a series effect prediction setting process for setting a series of effects by predicting the contents of the game to follow when the conditions for executing a series of normal pattern fluctuation effect are established. It is different from the normal figure effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above in that (first prediction process) is executed. Since other contents are the same as those of the normal figure effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In the general pattern effect setting process 8 (C4167), first, the same C4201 to C4206 processing as the general pattern effect setting process (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and in the process of C4206, a pseudo When it is determined that the series effect flag 223ec is off (C4206: No), the series effect prediction setting process is executed (C4251), and then the process proceeds to C4208. The details of this series of effect prediction setting processing (C4251) will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after executing the same C4208 to C4212 processing as the normal figure effect setting processing (see FIG. 371) of the fifth control example described above, the non-fluctuation winning prize flag 223ef is set to OFF (C4252), then this End the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 410, the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) will be described. FIG. 410 is a flow chart showing the contents of the series effect prediction setting process (C4251) executed in the eighth control example. In this series effect prediction setting process (C4251), the future game content (special figure 2 waiting period) is predicted (first prediction) at the start of normal figure fluctuation, and a series based on the prediction result (first prediction result) Processing for setting the effect mode during the period during which the effect is executed is executed, and when the length of the special figure 2 waiting period is predicted as the first prediction result, and when it is not possible to predict , a process for setting an effect mode is executed for a different period of time during which a series of effects are executed.

In the series effect prediction setting process (C4251), first, it is determined whether or not the normal pattern variation of this time is a winning variation (C5401). If it is determined that the normal pattern variation of this time is not a winning variation (C5401: No), the conditions for executing a series of effects are not established, so this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the normal figure variation of this time is a variation (C5401: Yes), read the value of the special figure variation time counter (special figure 1 variation time counter) 223eg (C5402), special figure variation time counter It is determined whether the value of 223eg is greater than 0 (C5403).

In the process of C5403, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is 0, that is, if it is determined that the present time is not in the special figure 1 fluctuation (C5403: No), this process is terminated as it is. In other words, in this control example, the conditions for executing a series of effects when the variation per normal pattern is executed, specifically, as shown in FIG. , normal pattern low probability state), the current normal pattern fluctuation time is 30 seconds or more, the series effect counter 223ga is set to off, the non-fluctuation win prize flag 223ef is set to off, and the pseudo series In the state where the effect flag 223ec is set to OFF, and further, as shown in FIG. If the special figure 1 variation is not executed at the time this process is executed, it is configured not to execute (set) a series of effects.

By configuring in this way, the presence or absence of the execution of a series of production that can be executed based on the normal per variation, because it is possible to set according to the execution status of the special symbol variation (special figure 1 variation), the normal state It is possible to prevent a series of performances from being executed for a player who is playing a game in which a right-handed game is executed in and only normal pattern fluctuations are executed.

In the process of C5403, if it is determined that the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg is greater than 0 (C5403: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is fluctuating, the value of the special figure fluctuation time counter 223eg Calculates the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time based on (C5404), extracts and adds up the normal pattern fluctuation time of this time and the game time per normal pattern executed after the end of this normal pattern fluctuation (C5405). In the processing of this C5405, by adding the normal pattern fluctuation time and the game period per normal pattern, the period from the current time (starting time of normal pattern fluctuation) to the end of the game per normal pattern (end period per normal pattern) A process for calculating is executed.

Then, the special figure 1 residual fluctuation time calculated in the process of C5404 and the total time (calculated) in the process of C5405 (total time per normal figure) are compared (C5406), and the comparison result is special figure 1 It is determined whether or not the remaining fluctuation time is greater than the total time per normal figure (longer) (C5407). If it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is greater than the total time per normal figure (longer) (C5407: Yes), the normal figure per game ends before the special figure 1 fluctuation in execution ends Therefore, it is possible to predict the special figure 2 waiting period when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 during the normal figure per game. Therefore, with reference to the series production scenario table 223ha, set the scenario per normal pattern based on the difference time between the remaining fluctuation time of the normal pattern and the total time per normal pattern (special pattern 2 waiting period) (C5408), then this End the process.

On the other hand, in the process of C5407, if it is determined that the special figure 1 remaining fluctuation time is shorter than the total time per normal figure (C5407: No), at the present time, the presence or absence of the special figure 2 waiting period, and predict the length Since it is not possible, scenario 4 per normal pattern is set (C5409), and then this process is terminated.

As described above, in the eighth control example, when the normal pattern fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation situation of the special pattern (first special pattern) during the normal pattern per game is predicted, and based on the prediction result It is configured to set the production mode of a series of productions corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation. In other words, when the normal figure fluctuation is executed, the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation to be executed this time and the general figure lottery result, and the game time (maximum time) of the game per normal figure are calculated, and the calculation result is Based on this, it is determined whether or not the currently executed special figure 1 fluctuation is finished during the normal figure per game, and based on the determination result, the production mode of a series of performances corresponding to the normal figure fluctuation is set. are doing.

By configuring in this way, for example, the fluctuation end timing of the special figure 1 fluctuation being executed is the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640, that is, the game period per normal figure (maximum period) After If it is, it is possible to predict the timing (length of the waiting period) that can be executed by special figure 2 fluctuation at the time of executing normal figure fluctuation. As a result, it is possible to set an effect mode based on the length of the standby period as various effect modes to be executed during the standby period. Therefore, in contrast to the fifth control example described above, it is possible to lengthen the variably settable period of the effect mode of the series of effects according to the length of the standby period. It is possible to make it easier to execute the production.

In the eighth control example described above, as in the fifth control example described above, as a game per normal pattern, a game per short opening (closed period (opening period) is 0.1 seconds, open period is 0.1 seconds ) and long open per game (closed period (opening period) 0.1 seconds, first open period 1 second, closed period (waiting period) 1.5 seconds, second open period 0.5 seconds) And, since it is configured to be executable, in the first prediction process (series effect prediction setting process (see C4251 in FIG. 410)) executed at the time of normal pattern fluctuation, it was elected in this normal pattern fluctuation It may be configured to determine the type of hit per normal figure and set the prediction range of the first prediction (the period during which the ball can win in the second winning hole 640) based on the determination result. In addition, the aspect of the prediction range corresponding to the type per normal figure determined this time (the length and timing of the period in which the ball can win in the second winning opening 640), that is, the game aspect of the per game per normal figure to be executed Based on this, the ease of winning the ball into the second winning hole 640 during the normal game is determined, and in the first prediction process, the waiting period (after the ball enters the second winning hole 640, the If it is not possible to predict the period until the special figure 2 fluctuation based on the winning is executed, the winning difficulty determination means for determining the ease of winning the ball to the second winning opening 640 Based on the determination result of , it may be configured to set the production mode during the normal pattern fluctuation period.

Specifically, by the winning difficulty level determination means, the winning difficulty level is low (by performing a normal game, it is possible to win the ball in the substantially second winning hole 640) per normal game (for example, Ordinary figure long open per game) corresponding to Ordinary figure per type (for example, Ordinary figure per A (see Figure 336 (b))) is set, as a production mode set during the Ordinary figure fluctuation period , a performance mode is set in which it is easy to shift to the next performance mode set as a series of performances, and the degree of prize winning is high (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to win a ball into the second prize winning port 640). When the normal pattern per type (for example, normal pattern per B (see FIG. 336 (b))) corresponding to the normal pattern per game (for example, normal pattern short open per game) is set, normal As the effect mode set during the figure fluctuation period, it is preferable to set the effect mode that suggests the end of the series effect (the effect mode that makes it difficult to shift to the next effect mode set as the series effect). . In this way, when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing of executing the first prediction process, the production mode of the production executed during the normal pattern fluctuation period is varied based on the type of the normal pattern per game to be executed. Therefore, at the time when the normal pattern fluctuation is started, it is possible for the player to predict whether or not the jackpot game is likely to be executed with the current normal pattern fluctuation as a trigger, so the first prediction process is executed It is possible to enhance the performance effect of the performance executed when the waiting period cannot be predicted at the timing to be performed.

In addition, it corresponds to the general pattern per game (for example, general pattern short open per game) that is determined to be difficult to win (even if a normal game is played, it is difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 640) When the type per normal pattern (for example, per normal pattern B (see FIG. 336(b))) is set, it may be configured not to set the effect mode corresponding to the series effect. By configuring in this way, it is not possible to win the ball in the second winning opening 640 during the normal game, and the game for the big game (special figure 2 fluctuation, small winning, small winning game) It is possible to suppress the execution of a series of performances when it is difficult to proceed. In this case, when it is determined that the ball has won in the second winning port 640 during a normal game with a high winning difficulty, it is preferable to execute a series of effects from the winning timing. When the length of the waiting period (the period until the special figure 2 variation based on this winning is executed) at the time when the ball wins in the 2 winning opening 640 is a predetermined period or more (for example, 30 seconds or more) , Using a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds) from the time the ball wins in the second winning hole 640, it is preferable to set the effect mode normally set during the normal pattern fluctuation period.

In this way, when a normal game with a high degree of winning difficulty is executed, the start timing of a series of effects is not the normal pattern fluctuation start timing, but the timing when the ball wins the second winning hole 640. To suppress the frequency of ending a series of performances in the middle of the series of performances despite the execution of the series of performances.

Furthermore, in this control example, an example in which one type per normal pattern corresponding to the game per normal pattern with a low difficulty of winning is shown, but without being limited to this, it corresponds to a game per normal pattern with a low difficulty of winning a prize It may be configured to be able to set a plurality of types per normal pattern, and the game mode of the game per normal pattern executed corresponding to each type per normal pattern may be different, for example, it corresponds to a game per normal pattern with a low degree of winning difficulty. At least the normal per pattern type α and the normal per pattern type β can be set as the normal per pattern type, and the game mode of the normal per pattern game (normal per pattern game α) corresponding to the normal per pattern type α As, closed period 0.1 seconds, set a game mode of open period 3 seconds, as a game mode of the normal figure per game (ordinary figure per game β) corresponding to the normal figure per type β, closed period 0.1 seconds , a first open period of 0.1 seconds, a closed period (standby period) of 3 seconds, and a second open period (2.9 seconds).

In this case, when the normal pattern per game with a low winning difficulty level is executed, the period during which the ball is likely to win in the second winning opening 640 differs according to the set normal pattern per type, so the normal pattern fluctuation start In the first prediction process executed at the timing, the period during which the ball is likely to enter the second winning opening 640 is determined based on the type of normal pattern, and the first prediction process is performed based on the determination result of the determination means. It is preferable to configure the range of prediction to be made different. Specifically, when the game α per normal pattern is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is the range of 0.1 seconds to 3.1 seconds from the start of the game per normal pattern ( open period range), and when the game β per normal pattern is executed, the range of prediction executed in the first prediction process is 3.3 seconds to 6.1 from the start of the game per normal pattern It is preferable to configure the setting based on the range of seconds (the range of the second open period).

In this way, by setting the range to be predicted in association with the game mode (difficulty of winning, setting timing of winning period) of the game per normal figure to be executed, prediction to be executed in the first prediction process range can be narrowed. This makes it easier to predict the standby period in the first prediction process. Therefore, it is possible to facilitate the execution of a series of performances and enhance the performance effect.

In addition, it is configured to be able to set the type per normal pattern γ as the type per normal pattern corresponding to the game per normal pattern with low winning difficulty, and the game per normal pattern corresponding to the type per normal pattern γ (game per normal pattern γ) game As a mode, when it is configured to set a game mode of a closed period of 0.1 seconds, a first open period of 1.5 seconds, a closed period (standby period) of 3 seconds, and a second open period (1.5 seconds), That is, when the normal pattern per game is executed in which a plurality of open periods in which the ball can win in the second winning hole 640 is set, in the first prediction process, first, it corresponds to the second open period set later Compare the range and the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) during execution, and determine whether the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is later than the second open period , If it is determined that the elapsed timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is later than the end timing of the second open period, the special figure being executed from the end timing of the second open period It is configured to set up to the end timing of 1 fluctuation as a standby period, and on the other hand, it is determined that the timing of the elapse of the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) is earlier than the end timing of the second open period. If so, next, the timing of the elapse of the remaining period of special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining fluctuation period) and the range corresponding to the first open period are compared.

And, when it is determined that the elapse timing of the first open period is before the elapse timing of the remaining period of the special figure 1 fluctuation (remaining variation period), the special figure being executed from the end timing of the first open period The standby period is set to the end timing of one variation, and on the other hand, when it is determined that the timing of the first open period has passed after the timing of the first open period, that is, the first If the special figure 1 variation being executed is stopped and displayed before the 1 open period elapses, the second prediction process described above is executed assuming that the waiting period could not be predicted in the first prediction process. It should be configured as follows.

<Ninth control example>
Next, a ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 420. FIG. The ninth control example is different from the above-described fifth control example in that the control processing for the final variation performance executed in the final variation of the time saving state is different.

In the fifth control example described above, using the final variation effect that is executed in the final variation of the time saving state, the lottery result of the variation, and the special figure 2 variation that is performed after the variation (the time saving state ends, normal It was configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for special figure 2 variation) executed in the state where the state is set. By constructing in this way, when a win (big win, small win) is won by the special figure 2 variation executed after the end of the time saving state, it is possible to suggest that effect by the final variation presentation.

This ninth control example differs from the above-described fifth control example in that the processing for setting the effect mode of the final variable effect is described in detail. Specifically, when executing the final variation of the time saving state, based on the lottery result of the variation and the number of special figure 2 reserved balls (value of special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c), production of final variation production It is configured to set the mode.

Furthermore, when the final fluctuation of the time saving state is a deviation fluctuation, the production period of the final fluctuation production is set based on the special figure 2 reserved ball number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c). there is In other words, if the final variation of the time saving state is a deviation variation, the next special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation executed during the normal state) that is the target of the final variation production after the end of the variation is executed Therefore, if the final variation of the time saving state is an off variation, at the start timing of the final variation of the time saving state, in advance for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension that has already been acquired It is configured to set the production mode (final variable production).

<Regarding the electrical configuration of the ninth control example>
Next, the electrical configuration in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 411 to 415. FIG. The ninth control example differs from the fifth control example described above in that the contents of the ROM 222 and the RAM 223 of the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 are partially changed, and otherwise the same. is. The same elements are denoted by the same reference numerals, and detailed descriptions thereof are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 411(a), the contents of the ROM 222 of the sound lamp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described. FIG. 411(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example. As shown in FIG. 411(a), the ROM 222 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example stores the final variation effect table 222ia and The difference is that a final effect variable setting table 222ib is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are given to the same contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The final variation performance table 222ia is a data table referred to when setting the performance mode of the final variation performance, and is referred to when a variation pattern command corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is received. It is what is done. Here, the contents of the final variation effect table 222ia will be described with reference to FIGS. 412 and 413. FIG.

FIG. 412(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final variation effect table 222ia. As shown in FIG. 412(a), the final variation effect table 222ia is referred to when the variation lottery result is a winning final table 222ia1, and when the variation lottery result is a loss. and a final table 222ia2 for deviation.

Here, the effect period in the final variable effect will be described. In the ninth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, a "waiting period", a "first period", a "second period", and a "third period" are formed as the effect periods of the final variable effect. It is configured so that the effect mode can be set for each period. In the fifth control example described above, regardless of the lottery result of the variation (shortening final variation), the effect mode (standby effect) for notifying that the final variation effect starts in the "waiting period" is set. In the 1st period, the effect mode (acquisition effect) is set to acquire a lot of special figures 2 pending, and in the ``second period'', the lottery result of the change and the prefetching result of the special figure 2 reservation are suggested. A performance mode (mission performance) for performing is set, and a performance mode (result performance) for showing the performance result of the mission performance is set in the 'third period'.

Furthermore, it is configured to determine whether to execute the acquisition effect or the mission effect as the effect to be executed during the ``first period'' based on the number of special 2 reserved balls when the ``waiting period'' has elapsed. However, if the number of special 2 pending balls after the "waiting period" has passed is a predetermined number or more (if the upper limit number is (4)), the mission production is executed in the "first period". rice field.

On the other hand, in the ninth control example, based on the number of special figure 2 reserved balls at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed, it is configured to set the production mode of the final variation production. This is different from the fifth control example described above in that Also, based on the lottery result of the variation, the difference from the fifth control example described above in that the production mode of the final variation production set at the timing when the time saving final variation (special figure 2 variation) is executed is different are doing. Furthermore, it is different from the fifth control example described above in that a plurality of timings for setting the effect mode of the final variable effect are provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 412(b), the contents defined in the winning final table 222ia1 included in the final variation effect table 222ia will be described. FIG. 412(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents defined in the winning final table 222ia1. As shown in FIG. 412(b), in the winning final table 222ia1, according to the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c (special figure 2 reserved ball number) and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, A performance mode set in each performance period of the final variable performance is defined.

Specifically, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is "0" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", effect pattern A is used as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 189", the effect pattern B is specified as the effect pattern of the final variable effect, and in the range of "190 to 198", the effect pattern C is specified as the effect pattern of the final variable effect. ing. In addition, when the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is "1, 2" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 169", the effect pattern A is specified as the effect pattern of the final variation effect. In the range of "170 to 198", the effect pattern B is defined as the effect pattern of the final variable effect. Furthermore, the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is "3", and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 109", effect pattern A is defined as the effect pattern of the final variation effect, In the range of "110 to 198", an effect pattern B is defined as an effect pattern of the final variable effect.

Here, detailed contents of various effect patterns defined in the winning final table 222ia1 will be described. In effect pattern A, the final variable effect similar to that of the fifth control example described above is executed, and as described above with reference to FIG. In the waiting period (0th period), the effect mode "standby effect (effect a)" for indicating that the final variable effect is executed is set, and in the first period after the waiting period has passed , "Acquisition effect (effect b)", which is an effect mode for guiding a game method that allows the player to execute the subsequent game advantageously (acquire the special figure 2 reservation), is set, and the first period In the second period after the elapse, the lottery result of the pattern that is the target of the final variation production (the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation that will be the final variation in time saving, the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 hold that has been acquired at the moment) A "mission effect (effect c)", which is a effect mode for suggesting, is set, and in a third period after the second period has elapsed, the "mission effect (effect c)" executed during the second period is displayed. A “result effect (effect d)”, which is a effect mode for indicating the effect result (lottery result), is set.

The performance pattern B is a performance pattern set when the time-saving final variation wins (big win, small win), and is a performance for notifying the player of winning as the final variation performance. A mode "special effect 1 (effect e)" is set.

Production pattern C is a production mode that is set when the number of special figures 2 pending when setting the final variable production is less than or equal to a predetermined number (0), and the standby period ( "Standby effect (a)" is set in the 0th period). When this production pattern C is set, after the standby period (0th period) ends, the production mode of the final variable production (production mode executed in each of the first period to the third period) is set again. (final effect variable process) is executed.

The detailed contents of this final effect variable process will be described later, but in the final effect variable process, the number of special figures 2 reserved acquired during the waiting period (0th period), and the waiting period (0th period) at the end A process for setting a different effect mode to each of the first period to the third period is executed according to the special figure 2 reservation number.

As described above, in the ninth control example, in contrast to the setting method of the final fluctuation production in the fifth control example described above, the final fluctuation production is set at the time of setting the final fluctuation production (at the start of the time saving final fluctuation). The point that it is configured to set the production mode, and the lottery result (prefetch result) targeted for the final fluctuation production is the lottery result of the fluctuation and the time of setting the final fluctuation production (at the start of the final fluctuation of time saving ) is different in that it is limited to the prefetch result of the special figure 2 pending that has already been acquired.

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to vary the production mode of the final variation production that is executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is possible to diversify the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that, as in this control example, in the case of varying the production mode of the final variation production to be executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play the game so that the number of special figures 2 reserved becomes a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. can be done.

Since the final table for winning 222ia1 described above is a data table that is referred to when the variation (final time-saving variation) is won, the final variation effect set by referring to the final table for winning 222ia1 is executed. The period is a period corresponding to the variation pattern (variation time) of the time saving final variation. That is, after the end of the final variation effect set with reference to the final winning table 222ia1, the winning game corresponding to the lottery result of the variation is executed. In this way, if the time-saving final variation is hit and won, the final variation corresponding to the variation time of the variation without considering the variation time of the special figure 2 variation that is executed based on the special figure 2 reservation Since the effect mode of the effect can be set collectively, the processing for setting the effect mode can be simplified.

As described above, the winning final table 222ia1 used in the ninth control example is such that the smaller the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c), the more easily the effect pattern C is selected. stipulated. In other words, the smaller the number of special figures 2 pending at the time the final variation of the time saving is executed, the more the number of special figures 2 pending that can be acquired during the waiting period (0th period), so the waiting period (0th period ), it is configured to make it easier to select the production pattern C in which the production mode can be variably set according to the number of special figure 2 reservations acquired during. By configuring in this way, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state where the special figure 2 reservation number is small, it is possible to execute a different final variation performance.

In addition, it is stipulated that the greater the special figure 2 reserved number (the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c), the more easily the production pattern B is selected as the final variation production. By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it easier to execute the special performance 1 indicating that the winning is won, when the time saving final variation is executed in a state where the number of special figure 2 reservations is large. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play a game for acquiring the number of reserved special figures 2, and to improve the operation of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 413, the contents of the final table 222ia2 for loss included in the final variation effect table 222ia will be described. FIG. 413 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final table for failure 222ia2. This final table 222ia2 for the loss is a data table referred to when the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation, which is the time saving final variation, is out, and the special figure 2 that is retained and stored during the variation period of the variation It is used to set the production mode of the final variable production with the period of adding the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation corresponding to the suspension as the production period.

In the ninth control example, as in the fifth control example described above, using the final variation effect executed in the final variation of the time saving state (final time saving variation), the lottery result of the variation, and the execution after the variation It is configured to suggest the pre-discrimination result for the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation executed in the state where the time saving state is finished and the normal state is set). And if the lottery result of the time-saving final fluctuation is won (jackpot, small hit), the winning game will be executed after the end of the fluctuation, so the final fluctuation production will be in the period corresponding to the fluctuation period of the fluctuation configured to run.

On the other hand, when the lottery result of the time saving final variation is out, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 suspension stored after the end of the variation is executed. In this control example, it is configured to execute the final variation performance including the variation period of the special figure 2 variation that is retained and stored at the time when the time saving final variation ends.

As shown in FIG. 413, the final table 222ia2 for out is, the special figure 2 reservation number (value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c), the look-ahead result for the special figure 2 reservation, and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f , the effect mode of the final variable effect is defined. In addition, as the production period during which the final fluctuation production is executed, the fluctuation period of the time saving final fluctuation and the time saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols) end, normal state (low probability of special symbols The fluctuation period of the special figure 2 variation (special figure 2 variation corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) executed in the state, low probability state of the normal symbol) is defined.

Then, at the execution timing of the time-saving final variation, the effect mode of the final variation performance is set even for the variation period of the special figure 2 variation executed corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations already acquired. are doing. By configuring in this way, since it is possible to collectively set the production mode of the production (final fluctuation production) executed across a plurality of special figure fluctuations (special figure 2 fluctuation), each special figure fluctuation It is possible to simplify the processing for setting the effect mode compared to the case of setting the effect mode of the final variable effect each time is executed.

Furthermore, in this control example, if there is winning information indicating winning winning in the special figure 2 reservation that has already been acquired at the time of setting the effect mode of the final variable effect (if the look-ahead result is winning), When there is no winning information indicating winning (when the look-ahead result is lost), the execution contents (execution/non-execution, execution period) of the acquisition effect executed during the final variation effect are configured to be different. If there is winning information indicating winning in the reserved special figure 2 that has already been acquired (if the result of the look-ahead is a win), it is more difficult to execute the acquisition effect than in other cases, Alternatively, even if it is executed, the execution period is shortened.

By constructing in this way, the player can predict the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation according to the performance mode of the variable performance executed as the final variable performance, so that the performance effect can be enhanced. In addition, the state where the time saving state can end, that is, the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the time saving final variation is a deviation variation, and the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation that has been acquired at the time the time saving final variation is executed In the state of being out, the production mode (acquisition production (production b)) for increasing the number of executions of the advantageous game (special figure 2 lottery during normal state) executed after the time saving state ends can be emphasized as compared with the case of . Therefore, it is possible to easily increase the number of executions of the advantageous game executed after the time saving state ends.

Here, when the contents defined in the final table 222ia2 for the omission are specifically described with reference to FIG. , when the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 159", "effect a" is set in the waiting period, "effect b" is set in the first period, and "effect c" is set in the second period. Directive data is specified. In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number (value of special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) is 0, and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "160 to 179", the waiting period, and the Effect data is defined in which “effect b” is set in the first period and “effect c” is set in the second period. Further, when the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is in the range of "180 to 198", the effect data is defined such that "effect a" is set during the standby period.

In addition, in the final table 222ia2 for this error, the effect mode to be executed in the final effect period of the final variable effect at the present time is not set (in FIG. 413, "○" is displayed as a display mode indicating that it is not set). It consists of In other words, if the hit is not included in the special figure lottery result (prefetch result) that can be grasped at the execution timing of the final time saving variation, special figure 2 corresponding to the special figure 2 hold acquired after the execution timing of the final time saving variation Variation may be executed after the special figure 2 variation that is the target of the look-ahead process at the execution timing of the time saving final variation.

In this way, when it is necessary to vary the effect result (performance mode) of the final variable effect according to the lottery result of the special figure change that can be executed in the period from the execution of the final variable effect to the end of the final variable effect is configured to be able to variably set the presentation mode of the final variation presentation even at a timing other than the execution timing of the time saving final variation. Therefore, the final variable production can be executed in various production modes.

Returning to FIG. 413, the description is continued. If the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) is 1, and the special figure 2 reservation contains the winning information indicating the winning and is "with a reservation hit", that is, , The special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a deviation variation, and the next special figure 2 variation (the first special figure 2 variation to be performed after the normal state is set ) is a hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect a" is in the standby period, and "effect b" is in the first period. , In the second period, "production c" is the third period, and the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set. Effect data in which "effect d" is set is defined.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) is 1, and the special figure 2 reservation does not contain the winning information indicating the winning, and it is "no hit in the reservation". In the case, that is, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) is an off variation, and the special figure 2 variation to be performed next (normal state is set first special to be executed 2 variation) is also out of range, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "effect a" is in the standby period, and "effect b" is in the first period. , "Continuous effect (effect f)", which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect c" in the second period and the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period, is set. Production data to be executed is specified.

Here, the above-described "continuous effect" is a effect mode displayed after the mission effect (see FIG. 328(b)) is executed, and is a effect mode indicating the effect result of the mission effect (see FIG. 329 ( See a)), that is, the result effect (effect d) is a effect mode executed when extending the period until it is displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 .

Although the detailed display contents are omitted, for example, when the production mode shown in FIG. By reducing the speed, the period indicating the process until the effect result (success or failure) of the mission effect being executed is displayed is extended, or the mission effect continues as the effect result of the mission effect being executed ( A display mode (for example, characters “Continue!”) for indicating that the second mission production is executed) is displayed, and a plurality of mission productions are performed in one final variation production. A performance mode is set for executing a pseudo-result display performance for temporarily displaying a display mode suggesting a performance result different from the actual performance result as the performance result of the mission performance.

In this way, by configuring to execute "continuous performance" as the final variable performance, for example, after the final variable performance is executed, the special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and the execution period of the final variable performance being executed is extended, the performance period of the final variable performance can be extended without causing the player to feel uncomfortable.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) is 2, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit in the reservation "Yes") If it is, that is, the special figure 2 variation (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) to be executed this time is a deviation variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the two special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired In the case of a hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect a" is applied during the standby period, "effect b" is applied during the first period, and "effect b" is applied during the first period. "Production c" in the 2nd period, the 3rd period, and the first special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as the normal special figure 2 fluctuation 1) after the normal state is set Fluctuation period (common 1), 2 Of the fluctuation period (2) of the second special figure 2 fluctuation (hereinafter referred to as normal special figure 2 fluctuation 2), the effect data in which "production d" is set in the period until the end of the hit fluctuation is specified. ing.

On the other hand, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) is 2, and the special figure 2 reservation does not contain the winning information indicating the winning, and it is "no hit in the reservation". In the case, that is, the special figure 2 variation to be executed this time (time saving state last special figure 2 variation) is an off variation, and the special figure 2 variation to be performed next (normal state is set first special to be executed 2 variation) is also out of range, if the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 189", "effect a" is in the standby period, and "effect b" is in the first period. , "Continuous effect (effect f)", which is a display mode for delaying the display of "effect c" in the second period and the effect result of "effect c (mission effect)" in the third period, is set. Production data to be executed is specified.

Next, the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) is 3, and the winning information indicating the winning is included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit in the reservation "Yes") If it is, that is, the special figure 2 variation executed this time (the last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) is a deviation variation, and the special figure variation corresponding to at least one of the three special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired In the case of a hit variation, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), "effect a" is applied during the standby period, "effect b" is applied during the first period, and "effect b" is applied during the first period. ``Production c'' is set in the 2nd period, and ``Production d'' is set in the 3rd period and the period until the winning fluctuation ends among the 1st fluctuation period, the 2nd fluctuation period, and the 3rd fluctuation period. Data are specified.

In addition, when the special figure 2 reservation number (the value of the special symbol 2 reservation ball number counter 223c) is 3 and the winning information indicating the winning is not included in the special figure 2 reservation (hit within the reservation "none") That is, if the special figure 2 variation (last special figure 2 variation in the time saving state) executed this time is a deviation variation, and the special figure 2 variation corresponding to the three special figure 2 reservations that have already been acquired are all deviations , regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f (corresponding to the entire range of 0 to 198), effect data is defined in which "effect a" is set during the standby period.

Returning to FIG. 411(a), the description is continued. The final production variable setting table 222ib is a data table used for selecting the production mode of the final variable production executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (special figure 2 fluctuation). When setting using the final variation performance table 222ia, if there is a performance period (unset period) in which the performance mode is not set, the performance mode is set for the unset period during execution of the final variation performance. It is used for Specifically, in the final variable effect update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is determined that the waiting period (0th period) has ended (C4863 in FIG. 420: Yes), and the variable effect flag 223ic is set to ON. (C4864 of FIG. 420: Yes), that is, when there is an effect period (unset period) in which the effect mode is not set, it is referred (see C4865 of FIG. 420).

Here, the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222ib will be described with reference to FIGS. 414 and 415. FIG. FIG. 414(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the final effect variable setting table 222ib. As shown in FIG. 414 (a), the final effect variable setting table 222ib is the winning setting table 222ib1 that is referred to when the running special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) is a winning variation, and the running It has a setting table 222ib2 for deviation, which is referred to when the special figure 2 fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) is an off fluctuation, and according to the lottery result of the special figure 2 fluctuation (shortening final fluctuation) being executed , different presentation modes are set. In addition, although detailed description will be described later, if the lottery result of the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) being executed is a hit, and if it is off, the elements to be referred to when setting the production mode are different. I'm letting

By configuring in this way, the effect mode set as the final variable effect can be set in correspondence with the actual game content (special figure lottery result and increase in the number of reserved balls), so that the player It is possible to make the audience interested in the performance contents of the final variable performance to be executed.

Next, the contents of the win setting table 222ib1 will be described with reference to FIG. 414(b). FIG. 414(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the win setting table 222ib1. As shown in FIG. 414(b), the winning setting table 222ib1 has a value of the pending number increase counter 223ia, that is, during the period from the execution of the final variation effect to the end of the waiting period (0th period) Different production modes are defined based on the acquired special figure 2 reservation number and the value of the acquired production counter 223f.

Specifically, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is "0, 1" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 198", the first period is "effect b", It is stipulated that "effect c" is set in the second period and "effect d" is set in the third period. In addition, without setting a new production mode for the period in which the production mode has already been set at the time of execution of the final variable production, an unset period (Fig. This table is referred to only for the period indicated by "○" in 412(b) to set the mode of presentation.

Next, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is "2" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", "effect b" is produced in the first period, and in the second period If it is specified to set "effect c" and "effect d" in the third period, and if it is in the range of "150 to 198", in the first period, the second period, and the third period, Set "special performance 2 (performance g)", which is a high-expectation notification mode, to indicate that the performance result of the final variable performance is likely to be a performance result that indicates the winning of the special symbol (special figure 2). It is stipulated to

The above-mentioned "special effect 2 (effect g)" is an effect mode in which an effect different from the mission effect (see FIG. 328(b)) normally executed as the final variable effect is executed. Although will be described later, the selection ratio is defined so that the effect result of the final variable effect of this time is more likely to be the effect result indicating winning than the mission effect is executed.

The detailed display contents of this "special effect 2" will not be described, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will darken, and the result will be a effect indicating winning. A win display mode (display mode imitating the letter "V") and a loss display mode (display mode imitating a "cross mark"), which is the effect result indicating a lost win, are displayed, and are displayed to the end. An effect is executed in which the displayed mode is the effect result of the final variable effect. In this way, immediately after the waiting period ends, by informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that an effect different from the usual one will be executed, the player can expect the effect to be executed while expecting a win. can be watched.

The contents of the "special effect 2" are not limited to those described above. For example, according to the example shown in FIG. , a character that is not displayed in the small display area Dm21 (for example, a character that imitates a whale) may be set to execute a mission effect different from the normal one, or the same ally character (851a to 851d) may be used to execute an effect in which a special mission is executed.

By configuring in this way, image data used in normal mission effects can be diverted as part of the image data of effects executed as "special effect 2", so the image data capacity of the pachinko machine 10 can be reduced. can be reduced.

Next, when the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is "3" and the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 119", "effect b" in the first period and in the second period If it is specified to set "effect c" and "effect d" in the third period, and if it is in the range of "120 to 198", "effect g" in the first period, the second period, and the third period is specified to be set.

Finally, if the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is "4" and the value of the acquired effect counter 223f is in the range of "0 to 149", the first period, the second period, and the third period " Effect g” is defined to be set, and if it is in the range of “150 to 198”, the effect result of the final variable effect being executed is a special symbol ( It is stipulated to set "special effect 3 (effect h)" which is a fixed notification mode for notifying that the effect result indicating winning of special figure 2) will be set.

The above-mentioned "special effect 3 (effect h)" is usually executed as a final variable effect mission effect (see FIG. 328 (b)) different effect is executed, the time-saving final change ( It is executed only when the lottery result of special figure 2 fluctuation) is hit. The detailed display contents of this "special effect 3" will not be described, but for example, after the standby effect is executed, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 will darken, and the result will be a effect indicating winning. An effect is executed in which a winning display mode (a display mode imitating the letter "V") is displayed. In this way, immediately after the waiting period of the final variable performance is finished, the player is notified of winning, thereby allowing the player to mentally prepare for the winning game. In addition, the display mode at the start of the special effect 2 and the display mode at the start of the special effect 3 are set to be the same (the display screen of the third pattern display device 81 is darkened (blacked out)). On the other hand, it is possible to notify in advance that the final variable performance of this time is the special performance 2 or the special performance 3. As a result, the player watches the final variable performance while expecting that the special performance 3 will be executed, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, in the ninth control example, as a benefit given to the player when the effect corresponding to the special effect 3 is executed, the effect result of the final variable effect is notified before the final variable effect ends. Although it is configured to provide benefits, it may be configured to provide other benefits, for example, based on the prefetch result of special figure 2 pending acquired at the timing when special effect 3 is set It is also possible to provide a privilege for informing the player of the number of times the player wins the prize. Specifically, when there are two special figures 2 suspensions in which the look-ahead result is hit and won among the four special figures 2 suspensions, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is used as the performance mode of the special performance 3. becomes dark, and an effect is executed in which a plurality of winning display modes (display modes imitating the letter "V"), which are the effect results indicating winning, are displayed, and finally the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is displayed. The number of winning display modes displayed may be configured to indicate the number of winning times. In this way, as a special effect (special effect 3) that is executed when a special effect condition is established, the first privilege (notification of winning) is given to the player based on the execution of the special effect. Then, after the first privilege is granted, a second privilege (notification of the number of wins) that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege can be granted, so that even after the first privilege is granted, It is possible to make the player interested in the performance contents of the special performance (special performance 3) executed for the player, and to enhance the performance effect.

Now refer to FIG. The contents of the out setting table 222ib2 will be described. FIG. 415 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the setting table for deviation 222ib2. This setting table 222ib2 for the deviation, when setting the final variation effect to be executed corresponding to the final variation in the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), when using the final table 222ia2 for the deviation (see C4364 in FIG. 419 ), the data table used for setting the effect mode for the unset period (the period indicated by "○" in FIG. 413) in which the effect mode is not set, and the final variable effect update process 9 (FIG. 420 (see C4566 in FIG. 420), if it is determined that it is time to end the waiting period (0th period) (C4863 in FIG. 420: Yes), it is referred (see C4865 in FIG. 420).

As shown in FIG. 415, the setting table 222ib2 for the loss includes the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia (the number of special figures 2 pending acquired during the waiting period) and the presence or absence of additional hits ( acquired during the waiting period Presence or absence of winning based on the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation), the setting status of the reservation upper limit flag 223en, and the value of the obtained production counter 223f Based on the obtained production counter 223f It is set for each production period. Production modes are defined.

It should be noted that, when the final variation effect to be executed corresponding to the final variation (special figure 2 variation) in the time saving state is set using the final table 222ia2 for the loss (see C4364 in FIG. 419), the effect mode is already set It is configured such that the effect mode is set by referring to the failure setting table 222ib2 only for the non-set period without setting a new effect mode for the effect period that has been set.

Next, the contents defined in the out setting table 222ib2 will be specifically described with reference to FIG. First, if the value of the number of pending balls increase counter 223ia is "0", that is, if you do not acquire a new special figure 2 pending during the waiting period, the presence or absence of additional hits and the setting status of the pending upper limit flag 223en , Regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, various effect modes are set such that "effect b" is set in the first period, "effect c" is set in the second period, and "effect d" is set in the third period to the fourth period. is stipulated. That is, since there is no change in the number of special figures 2 pending when the final variable production is started, the final result production (production d) is performed without setting a special production mode. Result is set.

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "1", the additional hit is "Yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation production In a state where the number of reservations is 3 and the prefetch results of the acquired special figure 2 reservations (3 pieces) are all out, if the prefetch result of the special figure 2 reservation newly acquired during the waiting period is a hit , In the range of "0 to 169" of the obtained effect counter 223f, various effects are set such that "effect c" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. Aspects are defined. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is By configuring in this way, for the player, useless production (acquisition production to play a game to acquire the special figure 2 reservation even though the number of special figure 2 reservations has reached the upper limit) You can prevent what is happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the contents of the executed performance and lowering the effect of the performance. In addition, in the range where the obtained value of the effect counter 223f is "170 to 198", various effect modes are defined such that "effect g" is set in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. ing.

Also, if the value of the number of pending balls increase counter 223ia is "1" and the additional hit is "none", the first Various production modes are defined such that "production b" is set for the period, "production c" is set for the second period, and "production d" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the final variable production is started, one new special figure 2 reservation is acquired, and if the look-ahead result of the special figure 2 reservation is out, a dedicated production mode is set. There is no effect, and the effect result indicating the failure is set as the final result effect (effect d).

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "Yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 at the start of the final variation effect In a state where the number of reservations is 2 and the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 2 reservations (2 pieces) are all off, at least If the look-ahead result of any special figure 2 reservation is a win, regardless of the value of the acquired production counter 223f, the first period, the second period "production c", the third to four periods "production d” is set, various presentation modes are defined. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

By configuring in this way, for the player, useless production (acquisition production to play a game to acquire special figure 2 reservation even though the number of special figure 2 reservations has reached the upper limit) You can prevent what is happening. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrustful of the contents of the executed performance and lowering the effect of the performance.

On the other hand, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 pending at the start of the final variation effect In a state where the number is 2 and the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 2 suspension (2 pieces) are all out, the prefetching results of the two special figure 2 suspensions newly acquired during the waiting period are also out. , regardless of the value of the acquired effect counter 223f, various effect modes are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. there is That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

Also, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "2", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final variation effect In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. If the number does not reach the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to four periods Various production modes are defined so that "production d" is set to . That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, the acquisition effect (performance b) for making the player acquire the special figure 2 suspension using the first period. configured to run

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "0 to 109", various effects are defined such that "effect c" is set for the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the standby period ends, the acquisition effect (effect b) is executed even though the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to ON. In this way, when the performance result indicating winning is displayed as the performance result of the final variable performance, the state in which the retention upper limit flag 223 en is set to ON, that is, a new special figure 2 suspension is acquired any more. Even in a state in which it is not possible to do so, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the performance mode to be executed by intentionally executing the acquisition performance.

In addition, in the ninth control example, only when the effect result of the final variable effect is the effect result indicating the win winning effect (despite the above-described effect (holding upper limit flag 223 en being set to ON), Since the production b) is executed, the production is executed with a difference between the actual number of special figures 2 reserved balls and the production mode to be executed. , it is possible to notify that the effect result of the final variable effect becomes the effect result indicating winning. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

Further, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, the value of the obtained effect counter 223f is "110 to 198 , various effects are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

Next, when the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "yes", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, Various production modes are defined such that "production c" is set for the first and second periods, and "production d" is set for the third to fourth periods. That is, when the standby period ends, the acquisition effect (effect b) is not executed even though the reservation upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF. In this way, when the effect result indicating winning is displayed as the effect result of the final variable effect, the state in which the reservation upper limit flag 223 en is set to OFF, that is, it is possible to obtain a new special figure 2 reservation. Even if it is possible, it is possible to make a difference between the actual number of special-figure 2 reserved balls and the performance mode to be executed by configuring so as not to execute the acquisition performance intentionally.

Even in this case, by executing an effect with a difference between the actual number of reserved balls of special figure 2 and the effect mode to be executed, the effect result of the final variable effect becomes the effect result indicating winning. can be notified. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to whether or not there is a difference between the actual game content and the performance content to be executed, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

If the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, that is, the special figure 2 pending number at the start of the final variation effect In 2, in a state where the prefetching results of the acquired special figure 2 pending (2 pieces) are all out, if the prefetching result of the two special figure 2 pending newly acquired during the waiting period is also out , irrespective of the acquired value of the effect counter 223f, various effect modes are defined such that "effect c" is set in the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set in the third to fourth periods. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

In addition, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "3", the additional hit is "none", and the pending upper limit flag 223en is set to off, that is, the special acquired during the waiting period of the final variation effect In the state where the look-ahead results of FIG. If the number does not reach the upper limit number (4), regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, "effect b" in the first period, "effect c" in the second period, and the third to four periods Various production modes are defined so that "production d" is set to . That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223en is set to OFF, the acquisition effect (performance b) for making the player acquire the special figure 2 suspension using the first period. configured to run

Finally, if the value of the pending ball number increase counter 223ia is "4", that is, the number of special figures 2 pending at the time when the final variation effect is executed is "0", and four special figures 2 during the waiting period When a new hold is acquired, the value of the production counter 223f acquired with an additional hit of “yes” is in the range of “0 to 99” in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth periods. Various production modes are defined so as to set "production g", and in the range of "100 to 198", various types are set so as to set "production h" in the first period, the second period, and the third to fourth period. Production modes are defined. Then, if the additional hit is "none", regardless of the value of the obtained effect counter 223f, "effect c" is set for the first and second periods, and "effect d" is set for the third to fourth periods. Various presentation modes are defined as follows. That is, when the waiting period ends, since the retention upper limit flag 223en is set to ON, it is stipulated not to execute the acquisition effect (performance b) for allowing the player to acquire a new special figure 2 reservation. It is

Next, the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to FIG. 411(b). The RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example is different from the configuration of the RAM 223 of the audio ramp control device 113 in the fifth control example. The difference is that a variable effect flag 223ic is added, and the rest is the same. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same configurations, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The holding number increase counter 223ia is a special figure 2 acquired within a specific period (waiting period set as part of the production period of the final fluctuation production executed in response to the final fluctuation of the time saving state, and the first period) It is a counter for measuring the number of reservations, and the value of the counter is incremented by 1 each time a new special figure 2 reservation is acquired within a specific period. This pending number increase counter 223ia receives the winning information command corresponding to the special figure 2 winning in the final winning process (see C3461 in FIG. 418) executed in the winning information command process 9 (see C3262 in FIG. 417) (C5501: Yes), if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is set to ON (C5502: Yes), that is, in order to set the effect mode of the final variable effect, special acquired during the standby period If it is necessary to count the number of pending in FIG. 2, the counter value is incremented by 1 (see C5503 in FIG. 418).

Then, in the final variable effect update process 9 (see C4566 in FIG. 420), when it is determined that the waiting period has ended (C4863 in FIG. 420: Yes), the effect mode corresponding to the counter value is changed to the final effect variable setting table 222ib. (see C4865 in FIG. 420). Furthermore, when it is determined that the first period has ended (C4866: Yes in the figure), the variation period of the special figure 2 hold acquired during the final variation performance is performed as the performance period of the final variation performance. Therefore, the counter value is referenced (C4868), and then the counter value is reset to the initial value (0).

In this way, by providing a configuration that counts the number of specific reserved memories (for example, special figure 2 reserved) acquired during a specific period (for example, during the waiting period), a specific reserved memory at the end of the specific period Since it is possible to set a performance mode after a specific period based on not only the number but also the specific number of reserved memories acquired during the specific period, it is possible to set a wide variety of performance modes. Further, it is possible to provide the player with a new game feature of acquiring a large number of reserved memories within a predetermined period of time, thereby improving the amusement of the game.

In addition, in this control example, as a configuration for counting the number of specific pending memories (eg, special figure 2 pending) acquired during a specified period (eg, during the standby period), a dedicated counter (holding number increase counter 223ia) is used, but not limited to this, for example, a storage means is provided to temporarily store the number of pending memories at the start of the specific period, and the number of pending memories at the end of the specific period and the number stored in the storage means The number of reserved memories acquired during a specific period may be calculated by comparing with the number of reserved memories obtained.

In addition, in this control example, a specific period (for example, waiting period) to measure the acquisition number of a specific reservation storage (for example, special figure 2 reservation) within one special figure fluctuation period (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation within the period), the number of reserved memories does not decrease within a specific period, and a configuration is used that simply adds the number of reserved memories acquired. As a specific period for measuring the number of acquisitions, it may be configured to set a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific pending memory may decrease (for example, a period set across multiple special figure 2 fluctuations), In this case, as a configuration that counts the number of specific pending memories (for example, special figure 2 pending), the counter value is added by 1 each time a specific pending memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) is acquired, and a specific (For example, each time the special figure 2 variation using the special figure 2 suspension is executed) the counter value may be configured to be decremented by 1 each time the reservation storage decreases. In addition, in this case, than the start of the specific period, since it is possible that the number of specific pending memories at the end of the specific period is less, a specific pending memory (for example, special figure 2 pending) of As a configuration for counting the number, it is preferable to set the initial value of the counter to a value larger than the upper limit number that can be stored in a specific reserved memory. With this configuration, when the counter value is increased or decreased corresponding to the increase or decrease of the specific reserved storage during the specific period, the counter value can be reliably prevented from becoming smaller than 0.

Also, as a specific period to measure the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory, set a period during which the number of acquisitions of a specific reserved memory can decrease (for example, a period set across multiple Toku-zu 2 fluctuations) , it is not a configuration that counts the number of specific reserved memories actually increased within a specific period as described above, but only adds the number of specific reserved memories newly acquired within a specific period. configuration may be used.

Furthermore, in the present ninth control example, based on the number of increases in the specific retention memory (special figure 2 retention) within a predetermined specific period (within the standby period), to set the effect mode after the specific period elapses However, without being limited to this, the specific period is set according to the game content (lottery result of each symbol, game state, etc.) and the operation content of the player's operation means (for example, the frame button 22) For example, a plurality of discontinuous periods may be set as the specific period, or the length of one specific period may be variable. In this case, by not notifying the player of the timing at which the specific period is set, it is difficult for the player to understand at what timing the reserved value is counted. Therefore, it is possible to execute an unexpected production for the player.

Also, the specific period is not set based on the establishment of a predetermined deletion condition (for example, a condition that is satisfied when the player performs an operation indicating that the specific period is not to be set using the operation means). can be configured. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect in a manner suitable for each player.

The fluctuation period storage area 223ib is a storage area for temporarily storing the production mode of the final fluctuation production executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (time saving final fluctuation). In this variable period storage area 223ib, there are a waiting period (0th period), a first period, a second period, a third period associated with the final variable period of the time saving state, and after the end of the time saving state (normal state setting Later) Toku-zu 2 variation (Toku-zu 2 variation based on Toku-zu 2 hold acquired during the time saving state) Corresponding to 1 period (the first Toku-zu 2 variation after the normal state was set Period), 2nd period (2nd special 2 fluctuation period after normal state is set), 3rd period (3rd special 2 fluctuation period after normal state is set), 4th period (normal A storage area corresponding to each period is formed in order to store the effect mode set for each period of the 4th special figure 2 fluctuation period after the state is set.

Then, the information indicating the effect mode of the final variable effect set in the time saving effect setting process 9 (see C4164 in FIG. 419) is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4365 in FIG. 419), and the final variable effect update process (See C4566 in FIG. 420), if it is determined that it is the end timing of the standby period (C4863: Yes in FIG. 420), and if it is determined that it is the set effect mode (C4865) or the end timing of the first period (C4866 in FIG. 420: Yes), the set rendering mode is stored in the corresponding storage area (see C4869 in FIG. 420). Then, although illustration is omitted, when the final variable effect ends, the information indicating the effect mode stored in each storage area is cleared.

In this way, in the case of using a configuration in which the effect mode of the period effect executed using the predetermined period can be set at a plurality of timings (timing to start the period effect, predetermined timing during execution of the period effect), the period effect By providing a storage area for storing the set performance mode each time the performance mode is set, it is possible to set the subsequent performance mode based on the contents of the previously set performance mode. Become. Therefore, in the case of executing the effect for one period using the effect modes set at a plurality of timings, it is possible to set the effect mode without causing discomfort.

The production variable flag 223ic is a flag for indicating that there is a period in which the production mode is not set (unset period) as the production mode of the final variation production executed in the final fluctuation of the time saving state (final time saving fluctuation). It is set to ON when it is determined that there is an unset period. Specifically, in the production setting process 9 for time saving (see C4164 in FIG. 419), the production mode of the final variation production is set (see C4362 and C4364 in FIG. 419), and the production mode is not set. If it is determined that there is (C4366 in FIG. 419: Yes), it is set to ON (see C4367 in FIG. 419).

Then, in the final fluctuation performance update process 9 (C4566 in FIG. 420), it is the timing when the waiting period ends (C4863 in FIG. 420: Yes) and the timing when the first period ends (C4866 in FIG. 420: Yes). That is, when it is determined that it is the timing at which it is possible to set the effect mode of the final variable effect, the setting status is determined (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420), and when it is determined that it is set to ON , a new effect mode is set for the unset period (C4864, C4867 in FIG. 420). Then, it is set to OFF after setting the effect mode for the unset period (see C4871 in FIG. 420).

<Regarding control processing of the sound ramp control device in the ninth control example>
Next, the contents of each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 in the ninth control example will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 416 to 420. FIG. In this control example, command determination processing 9 (see FIG. 416) is executed instead of command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 360), and winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. (see FIG. 417) instead of executing the winning information command process 9 (see FIG. 417), the point of executing the final winning process (see FIG. 418), and the time saving production setting process (see FIG. 372) instead of the time saving The difference is that the performance setting processing 9 (see FIG. 419) is executed, and the final fluctuation performance update processing 9 (see FIG. 420) is executed instead of the final fluctuation performance update processing (see FIG. 377). are otherwise identical. The same reference numerals are assigned to the same control processing contents, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. In addition, regarding the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, and the various processing contents that are changed in response to the change in the contents of the data table to be referred to, the numerical values were simply changed, and technically speaking, are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Here, the contents of command determination processing 9 (C3163) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 416 is a flow chart showing the contents of command determination processing 9 (C3163) executed in the ninth control example.

When the command determination process 9 (C3163) is executed, after executing the same C3201 to C3209 processes as the command determination process 5 (see FIG. 360) of the fifth control example described above, the special 2 pending number (special figure 2 number of pending) is the upper limit (C3261). Here, in the process of C3261, it is determined whether or not the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c is the upper limit value "4".

In the process of C3261, if it is determined that the special 2 pending number (special figure 2 pending number) is the upper limit (C3261: Yes), set the pending upper limit flag 223 en to ON (C3262), then end this process If it is determined that the special 2 reservation number (special figure 2 reservation number) is not the upper limit (C3261: No), the process of C3262 is not executed and the process ends.

Also, after executing the same processing of C3210 to C3217 as the command determination processing 5 (see FIG. 360) of the fifth control example described above, this processing ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 417, the contents of winning information command processing 9 (C3262) will be described. FIG. 417 is a flow chart showing the contents of winning information command process 9 (C3262) executed in the ninth control example. In this winning information command process 9 (C3262), for the above-described winning information command process 5 (see FIG. 361), the content of the process executed when it is determined that the time saving final fluctuation flag 223ed is set to ON The difference is that the

When winning information command processing 9 (C3262) is executed, the same processing of C3401 to C3402 as winning information command processing 5 (see FIG. 361) of the fifth control example described above is executed, and then processing of C3403 is executed. First, in the process of C3404, if it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is ON (C3404: Yes), the final winning process is executed (C3461), and the process proceeds to C3406. The details of this final winning process (C3461) will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the process of C3404, when it is determined that the time saving final variation flag 223ed is off (C3404: No), the process of C3461 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C3406. After that, the processes of C3406 and C3407 are executed, and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 418, the contents of the final winning process (C3461) will be described. FIG. 418 is a flow chart showing the details of the final winning process (C3461) executed in the ninth control example. In this final winning process (C3461), the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 while the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) is being executed, and a new special figure 2 reservation (winning information) A process for setting an effect mode when a winning information command indicating that a prize has been won is received is executed.

When the final winning process (C3461) is executed, first, the winning information command received this time determines whether the winning information command indicates that the ball has won the second winning opening 640 (whether there was a special figure 2 winning). (C5501), when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning port 640 has not been received (not special figure 2 winning) (C5501: No), this process is terminated as it is .

On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning information command indicating that the ball has won the second winning hole 640 (the special figure 2 winning) is determined (C5501: Yes), then the effect variable flag 223ic is turned on. (C5502). When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is ON (C5502: Yes), 1 is added to the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia (C5503), and the process proceeds to C5504. When it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is off (C5502: No), the process of C5503 is skipped and the process proceeds to C5504.

In the process of C5504, the information in the variable period storage area 223ib is read (C5504), and then it is determined whether or not the acquisition effect is currently in progress (C5505). If it is determined that the acquisition effect is currently being performed (C5505: Yes), a display command indicating pending acquisition during the acquisition effect is set (C5506), and then this processing is terminated. In the process of C5505, if it is determined that the acquisition effect is not currently in progress (C5505: No), a display command indicating pending acquisition is set (C5507), and then this process ends.

As described above, in this control example, it is possible to execute the final variation effect in correspondence with the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation), and a new special figure 2 hold as part of the final variation effect It is configured to execute an acquisition effect (see FIG. 327(b)) for allowing the player to acquire. Then, when the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 reservation (the timing of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning) is during execution of the acquisition performance, it is configured to execute the exclusive performance. . By configuring in this way, it is possible to associate the content of the effect being executed with the actual game situation, so that it is possible to provide an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

In addition, in this control example, at the timing of acquiring a new special figure 2 suspension (timing of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning), it is determined that the special figure 2 suspension has been acquired based on the production contents being executed. Although it is configured to vary the production mode shown, other configurations may be used, for example, the timing of acquiring a new special figure 2 hold and the remaining period of the time saving state (remaining variation time of the time saving final variation ) may be used to set the effect mode. In this case, for example, the winning determination means indicating that the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning has been received, and the remaining time determination for determining the remaining time of the time saving state at the time of receiving the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning means, and the remaining period of the time saving state at the time when it is determined that the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received by the winning determination means (there is a special figure 2 winning), that is, the special figure 2 hold If the remaining period that can be easily acquired is a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more, a display mode indicating that the special figure 2 pending number has increased due to the special figure 2 winning (for example, "plus 1" comment ) is displayed, and if it is less than the predetermined period, a display mode (for example, a comment of "plus 1") indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased due to the special figure 2 winning, in addition to special figures 2 pending It is preferable to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "barely safe") indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased in a state where the remaining period that can be easily acquired is small.

By configuring in this way, it is possible for the player to determine whether the timing of acquiring the new special figure 2 reservation is a timing with a margin, so it can be used as a reference for future games. can be done. Also, in this case, it is preferable not to notify the player of the remaining period of the time-saving state, ie, the remaining period in which the special figure 2 reservation can be easily acquired. As a result, the player determines the remaining period of the time saving state based on the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired, so the display displayed when the special figure 2 hold is acquired Aspects can be watched. In addition, the display mode displayed when the special figure 2 reservation is acquired may be configured to be different according to the number of special figure 2 reservations, for example, the number of special figure 2 reservations that have been acquired is predetermined In the state below the number (for example, "2" or less), when the winning information command indicating the special figure 2 winning is received, the remaining period of the time saving state, that is, the remaining period that can easily acquire the special figure 2 reservation is specified If it is less than the period (for example, 3 seconds), in addition to the display mode (for example, "plus 1" comment) indicating that the number of special figures 2 pending has increased due to the special figure 2 winning, special figures 2 pending It may be configured to display a display mode (for example, a comment of "It might be severe") suggesting that it is difficult to set the number of .

Also, as a method of determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the time saving end condition is satisfied (for example, the period until the final special figure fluctuation of the time saving state ends) is set as the remaining time of the time saving state. Alternatively, the period until the end of the last normal figure per game executed in the time saving state may be set as the remaining period of the time saving state.

That is, in this control example, the number of times of variation of the special symbol during the time saving state reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, the number of times of variation of the second special symbol (special figure 2) is 1 time, 5 times) When the time saving state ends It is configured to Therefore, it becomes possible to calculate the remaining period until the time saving state ends based on the number of times of variation and the variation time of the special symbol. In addition, in the state where the time saving state is set, the fluctuation time of 2 seconds is set as the fluctuation time of the normal pattern, and the ball is easy to win in the second winning opening 640. It is structured to make it easier to win the election. In addition, the normal symbol is configured such that the game mode is set according to the game state at the time when the lottery is executed and the game state at the time when the game per normal pattern is executed, specifically. If the time saving state is set when the normal pattern lottery (normal pattern lottery) is executed, the normal pattern lottery and the normal pattern fluctuation time setting are executed as a high probability state of the normal pattern, and the normal pattern per game If the time-saving state is set when is executed, the game per normal pattern is executed as a high-probability state of the normal pattern. Therefore, even if it is elected per normal pattern by the normal pattern lottery executed during the time saving state, when the normal state is set at the time the normal pattern per game is executed based on the normal pattern, normally A normal pattern per game will be executed as a low probability state of the pattern.

In this control example configured in this way, depending on the variation timing of the special symbol and the variation timing of the normal symbol, before the last special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time saving state ends Then, the state in which the ball easily enters the second winning hole 640 may end. In this case, if the period until the end of the last special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) executed during the time saving state is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state, the second winning prize within the remaining period Since the opening 640 includes a period in which it is not easy for the ball to win a prize, there arises a problem that the player's desire to play is lowered.

Therefore, when determining the remaining period of the time saving state, the period until the state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 ends, that is, the period during which the normal game can be executed during the time saving state is determined. It should be configured as follows. By configuring in this way, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 is likely to be set) as the remaining period in the time saving state. Therefore, in the case of executing the effect of notifying the remaining period of the time saving state, the accuracy of the notification content can be improved. Also, in the case of determining the remaining period of the time saving state in this way, even after the time saving state ends and the normal state is set, a period advantageous to the player (a ball is placed in the second winning hole 640 If the period during which the winning state is likely to be set continues, the period until the end of the period may be determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. That is, when the general pattern per game (normal pattern long open per game) executed during the time saving state is executed across the time saving state and the normal state, the general pattern per game (normal pattern long open per It is preferable that the period until the end of the game is determined as the remaining period of the time saving state. As a result, it is possible to accurately determine a period advantageous to the player (a period in which a state in which the ball is likely to enter the second winning hole 640 is likely to be set). When executing, the accuracy of the content of the notification can be further improved.

Next, with reference to FIG. 419, the contents of the effect setting process 9 for time saving (C4164) will be described. FIG. 419 is a flow chart showing the contents of the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) executed in the ninth control example. This time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is the effect mode when the special figure 2 change is executed as the time saving final change with respect to the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the fifth control example described above The difference is that the processing for setting has been changed.

When the time saving effect setting process 9 (C4164) is executed, after executing the same C4301 and C4302 processes as the time saving effect setting process (see FIG. 372) of the fifth control example described above, in the process of C4302, If it is determined that the special figure variation of this time is the time saving final variation (C4302: Yes), it is determined whether the special figure 2 variation (time saving final variation) of this time is a variation (C4361). If it is determined that this special figure 2 variation (shortening final variation) is a variation (C4361: Yes), the final table 222ia1 for the winning that the final variation production table 222ia has is referenced to set the production mode (C4362 ), and the process proceeds to C4365. Also, in the process of C4301, if it is determined that the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the special figure 2 fluctuation (C4301: No), or in the process of C4302, the special figure fluctuation of this time is not the final fluctuation of the time saving state If it is determined (C4302: No), this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined that this special figure 2 fluctuation (time saving final fluctuation) is not a hit fluctuation (it is an off fluctuation) (C4361: No), the winning information stored in the winning information storage area 223a (second Winning information related to the special design (special figure 2) is read (C4363), the final table 222ia2 for loss included in the final variation presentation table 222ia is referred to, the presentation mode is set (C4364), and the process proceeds to C4365.

In the process of C4365, the effect content (effect mode) set by the above-described process of C4362 and the process of C4364 is stored in the corresponding variable period storage area 223ib (C4365). is determined (C4366). If it is determined that there is an effect unset period (C4366: Yes), the variable effect flag 223ic is set to ON (C4367), and then this processing is terminated. Also, if it is determined that there is no effect unset period (C4366: No), the process of C4367 is skipped and this process ends.

Here, with reference to FIG. 420, the contents of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) will be described. FIG. 420 is a flow chart showing the details of the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566) executed in the ninth control example. In the final variation effect update process 9 (C4566), the final variation executed corresponding to the final variation of the time saving state updated in the process of C4501 of the effect update process 5 (see C3112 in FIG. 374) in the fifth control example Elapsed period of production (elapsed period of special figure 2 fluctuation) is determined, and processing based on the determination result is executed.

When the final fluctuation effect update process 9 (C4566) is executed, first, the information of the fluctuation period storage area 223ib is read (C4861), and the information of the read fluctuation period storage area 223ib (set effect period) and the special figure Based on the value of the fluctuation time counter 223eg (the value indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation), extract the current production situation (C4862), and then determine whether the current timing is the end timing of the waiting period Then (C4863), if it is determined that it is time to end the waiting period (C4863: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223ic is ON (C4864). When it is determined that the variable effect flag 223ic is ON (C4864: Yes), the effect mode is set using the final variable effect setting table corresponding to the determination result of the variation (C4865), and then this process is executed. finish. On the other hand, if it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is off (C4864: No), the process of C4865 is skipped and the process ends.

In the process of C4863, if it is determined that the current timing is not the end of the standby period (C4863: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end of the first period (C4866). If it is determined that there is (C4866: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the effect variable flag 223ic is ON (C4867). If it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is ON (C4867: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is greater than 0 (C4868). When it is determined that the value of the number-of-holds increase counter 223ia is greater than 0 (C4868: Yes), the presentation period corresponding to the increase is stored in the variable period storage area 223ib (C4869), and the process proceeds to C4870. In the process of C4868, when it is determined that the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is 0 (C4868: No), the process of C4869 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of C4870.

In the process of C4870, the effect mode of the final effect period is set (C4870), the variable effect flag 223ic is set to OFF (C4871), and the process proceeds to C4872. Also, when it is determined that the effect variable flag 223ic is off (C4867: No), the process proceeds to C4872. In the process of C4872, the value of the pending number increase counter 223ia is cleared (C4872), and then the process ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4866 that the current timing is not the end of the first period (C4866: No), then it is determined whether the current timing is the end of the second period (C4873). If it is determined that it is time to end the second period (C4873: Yes), it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired during the second period (C4874), and it is determined whether a new Special 2 hold has been acquired. If so (C4874: Yes), the re-read-ahead flag 223em is set to ON (C4875), and this processing ends.

Here, to explain the contents of the processing executed in C4874, the winning information storage area 223a is formed with storage areas corresponding to each symbol reservation, and in this control example, the first special symbol (special symbol The storage area for 1), the storage area for the second special design (special design 2), and the storage area for the normal design (general design) are the number corresponding to the upper limit reserved storage number (4) of each design. formed. Each storage area stores pre-reading information included in the winning information command output from the main controller 110, and a reference indicating whether or not the pre-reading result was referred to when setting various effects in the sound lamp control device 113. It is configured to store information.

In other words, in the process of C4874, C4806, or C4806, or in addition to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) referred to by the processing of C4814, whether a new special 2 reservation is stored in the winning information storage area 223a is stored in each storage area It is determined based on the presence or absence of the referenced information stored, and the prefetch information is described in the storage area (4 pieces) corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation (special 2 reservation) of the winning information storage area 223a, and the referenced information When it is determined that there is a storage area in which information is not stored, it is determined that there is a new Special 2 hold.

Then, by setting the re-prefetching flag 223em to ON in the process of C4875, as a variation effect corresponding to the special figure fluctuation to be executed next (the first special figure fluctuation after the end of the time saving), again, the special figure 2 is reserved A variable effect based on the look-ahead result of is executed.

On the other hand, in the process of C4874, if it is determined that there is no new special 2 pending (C4874: No), all of the currently acquired special figure 2 pending is prefetched, and the second in the effect mode based on the prefetch result Since it is the case where the time saving final variation effect during the period is being executed, the display effect result command indicating the result of the time saving change effect is set as it is (C4876), and this processing ends.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of C4873 that it is not the end timing of the second period (C4873: No), then a display command corresponding to other update contents is set (C4877), and this process ends. In the process of C4877, the setting of the effect mode based on the elapsed period of the final variation effect, the update setting of the remaining period display mode for indicating the remaining period of the final variation, and the elapsed period display mode for indicating the elapsed period of the final variation and the setting of the operation display mode executed based on the player's operation of the operation means (frame button 22) during the final change.

As described above, in the ninth control example, when the final variation production is set (at the time of starting the time saving final variation), the final variation is configured to set the production mode of the final variation production. The lottery result (prefetch result) subject to the effect is limited to the lottery result of the change and the prefetch result of the special figure 2 hold that has already been acquired at the time of setting the final change effect (at the start of the final time-saving change). The difference is that

By configuring in this way, since it is possible to vary the production mode of the final variation production that is executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is possible to diversify the game for acquiring the special figure 2 hold executed before (during the time saving state). Therefore, the amusement of the game can be improved. It should be noted that, as in this control example, in the case of varying the production mode of the final variation production to be executed according to the acquisition status of the special figure 2 reservation at the time the time saving final variation is executed, the time saving final variation is executed It is preferable to provide an effect mode that can be set only when the number of reserved special figures 2 acquired at a certain time is a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number). By configuring in this way, the player is motivated to play the game so that the number of special figures 2 reserved becomes a specific number (for example, 3, which is the upper limit number) at the time when the time saving final variation is executed. can be done.

In addition, in the ninth control example, it is configured to start the final variation effect described above from the timing at which the final variation of the time saving state is executed, but not limited to this, the remaining period of the time saving state is a predetermined period When it becomes, for example, when the number of remaining time reduction becomes two times, it may be configured to execute the final variable effect. In addition, in this ninth control example, the period for one special figure fluctuation in the time saving state and the period for several special figure fluctuations in the normal state are used to explain the configuration for executing the final fluctuation production. As for the increase and decrease of the number of special figures 2 pending while the final fluctuation effect is being executed, the number of special figures 2 pending increases until the special figure fluctuation in the time saving state ends, and the number of special figures in the normal state increases. After the figure fluctuation has started, only the pattern in which the number of special figures 2 is reduced has been described, but as other patterns, for example, during the execution of the normal figure long open per game executed during the time saving state Time saving After the state ends (the final variation of the time saving state (special figure 2 variation) stops) and the special figure variation (special figure 2 variation) in the normal state is started, the ball wins in the second winning port 640 There are cases. In such a case, for example, at the timing of executing the final variation effect, the normal pattern lottery situation (the result of the normal pattern lottery being executed, the type of the winning game to be executed, and the reserved and stored normal Figure information (win/fail result, winning game type)) is configured to be discriminable, and based on the discrimination result, it is determined whether the ball can win in the second winning hole 640 after the transition to the normal state, and the determination It may be configured to vary the production mode of the final variable production based on the result, for example, when it is determined that the ball can (easily) win the second prize winning opening 640 after the transition to the normal state. is a production mode that makes it easy to reflect the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery based on the winning to the second winning port 640 after the transition to the normal state and the fluctuation period in the final fluctuation production (using a still image that makes it easy to extend the production period It is also possible to set a performance mode in which the performance result can be suddenly changed).

Also, when executing the final variation production using a plurality of special figure 2 fluctuation periods in the time saving state, the number of remaining time reductions when executing the final variation production (the number of remaining special figure 2 fluctuations that can be executed during the time saving state ) is determined, and based on the determination result, the maximum number of special figure 2 fluctuation times that can be executed during the final variation production is calculated, and the production mode based on the calculation result may be configured to be set. . In this case, the number of special figure 2 fluctuations actually executed during the final fluctuation production may be less than the calculated maximum number (for example, stop the game during the final fluctuation production If the special figure 2 hold becomes 0). Therefore, as the production mode based on the above-described calculation result, it is preferable to set the production mode in which the production effect does not decrease even if the special figure 2 fluctuation frequency suddenly decreases.

Furthermore, in the state where the final variation production is executed for the special figure 2 fluctuation, if the special figure 1 fluctuation is executed, the final fluctuation production is continued even for the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 fluctuation It may be executed, or the final variation performance may be suspended temporarily, and the performance corresponding to the special figure 1 variation may be executed during the suspension period.

<Tenth control example>
Next, a tenth control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 421 and 422. FIG. In the fifth control example described above, as described above with reference to FIG. 315, the game (left-handed game ) is configured to be able to execute the normal drawing lottery, and a suggestive effect (series of effects) is executed to suggest that a specific hit (normal drawing long open win) was won in the normal drawing lottery executed during the normal state. was configured to

Then, a guide display mode (right-handed display) for winning the ball in the second winning hole 640 provided in the right side game area is displayed (a series of (displayed during execution of performance), so that the player can easily win the ball in the second winning port 640 during the normal game long open winning game. In addition, while the player is playing an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game in the normal state), the above-mentioned suggestion effect and guidance display mode are displayed when the winning is won in the normal pattern long open. First, it is configured to make it difficult for the player to enter the ball into the second winning port 640 during the normal long open winning game.

On the other hand, in the tenth control example, while the normal pattern long open winning game is being performed by the normal pattern lottery, the ball fired by the left-handed game (the ball flowing down the left side game area) An electric accessory 1640a to be opened during a normal game and a second winning port 1640 are arranged at a position where a ball fired by a hitting game (a ball flowing down the right game area) can also win a prize. is different.

Furthermore, the ratio of balls that reach the electric accessory 1640a out of the balls fired in the left-handed game and the ratio of the balls that reach the electric accessory 1640a out of the balls fired in the right-handed game are made different. In the hitting game, the ball reaches the electric accessory 1640a at a higher rate than in the left-handed game.

In addition, in this 10th control example, in a part of the case of winning per normal long open during the normal state, rather than executing the game per normal long open Information that can be notified to the player before (for example, during the winning normal pattern fluctuation, or the period from the acquisition of the winning information of the normal pattern (normal pattern) to be won until the normal pattern fluctuation is executed) It is configured to execute a production.

By configuring in this way, in the case of winning per normal long open, the ease of winning the ball to the second winning hole 640 can be changed depending on whether or not the notification effect is executed. Therefore, the player can be interested in the performance to be executed, and the performance effect can be enhanced.

In addition, since the second prize winning port 1640 is arranged at a position where the ball fired by the left-handed game can also win a prize, the ball is made to win the second prize winning port 1640 even when the notification performance is not executed. becomes possible. Therefore, even if the notification effect is not executed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing a game that is extremely disadvantageous.

<Regarding the configuration of the pachinko machine in the tenth control example>
Next, referring to FIG. 421, the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example will be described. FIG. 421 is a front view schematically showing the configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth control example. In the tenth control example, the positions of the components arranged in the right game area are different from those in the fifth control example described above. 2 The positions of the winning openings 1640 are different.

As shown in FIG. 421, in the game board 13 of the tenth control example, a second winning port 1640 accompanied by an electric accessory 1640a is provided below the first winning port 64. It is configured so that both the ball that has flowed down in the area and the ball that has flowed down in the right game area due to the right-handed game can reach the second winning hole 1640 .

Specifically, the first winning port 64 and the left end side (left side in FIG. 421 front view) of the electric accessory 1640a (shown in black in FIG. 421) in the open state, and a regulating member (nail) in the area between is planted, and it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to pass through the area. As a result, of the balls flowing down the left game area, only the balls guided by the nails planted in the game board 13 and passing through the upper area of the first winning opening 64 reach the second winning opening 1640. Configured. In the tenth control example, the game board 13 is configured such that the percentage of balls reaching the second winning opening 1640 among the balls flowing down the left game area is approximately 10%.

On the other hand, the ball launched by the right-handed game and flowing down the right-hand side game area is the ball flow formed on the upper surface of the V prize door 650b positioned in the closed state and the prize door 65b positioned in the closed state. The game board 13 is configured so that it flows down the path and most of it (about 100%) reaches the second winning opening 1640 .

By configuring in this way, during the normal long open per game, that is, in the state where the ball can win the second winning hole 1640, the number of balls flowing down the right side game area is higher than the ball flowing down the left side game area. It is possible to make it easier to make the second winning port 1640 win. Therefore, it becomes possible for the player to select whether to play the left-handed game or the right-handed game, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 421, in this control example, in the normal state, more It is configured so that there are more prize winning openings (winning openings that can give benefits (prize balls, lottery) to the player) in which the balls flowing down the left side game area can win prizes. Specifically, a ball flowing down the right game area can enter (pass through) the through gate 67 or the second prize winning opening 1640, while a ball flowing down the left game area can pass through the through gate 67. , the first winning port 64, the second winning port 1640, and the general winning port 63 can be won (passed through).

By configuring in this way, in the normal state, except for the period during which the ball can be won in the second winning hole 1640 (game period per normal figure long open), the ball is fired toward the right side game area From the right-handed game Also, a left-handed game in which a ball is shot toward the left game area is a game method more advantageous to the player. As a result, during the normal state, it is possible to prevent the player from continuously playing the right-handed game, and to allow the player to play the left-handed game. Therefore, it is possible to provide the enjoyment of predicting at what timing the right-handed game will be played during the normal state.

In addition, in the tenth control example, the time required for the ball fired by the left-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640 (left-handed arrival time) is the second winning of the ball fired by the right-handed game. It is configured to be longer than the time required to reach the mouth 1640 (right hitting arrival time). Specifically, while the left-handed reaching time is about 4 seconds, the right-handed reaching time is about 3 seconds.

By configuring in this way, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game executed after the left-handed game (for example, one second after the left-handed game executed before A ball shot by a right-handed game to be executed) can be made to reach the second winning hole 1640 at the same timing.

Therefore, when the normal pattern long open per game is executed, depending on the timing of switching the game method from the left hitting game to the right hitting game, the winning of the ball to the second winning port 1640 during the normal pattern long open per game Since the easiness of playing the game can be varied, the player can be motivated to play the game.

In addition, although detailed description is omitted, in the tenth control example, the game period per normal long open per game is 3 seconds (open period 1 second, closed period 1.5 seconds) as in the fifth control example described above seconds, open period 0.5 seconds). That is, when the right-handed game is executed after the normal long open per game is executed, the ball fired by the right-handed game is difficult to win the second winning opening 1640, that is, the second winning opening 1640 It is configured so that the game may have ended when the ball reaches .

As a result, the ball is not fired until the normal long open per game is executed, and the ball is hit to the right after the normal long open per game is started. Since it is possible to make it difficult to grant the privilege (prize ball, special figure 2 lottery)) granted by winning the ball to 1640, it is possible to continuously shoot the ball to the player, and the game is improved. can improve performance.

In addition, as described above, in the tenth control example, even if the hitting game period of the normal long open per game is set to 3 seconds, and the right hitting game is executed after the normal long open per game is started, Although it is configured so that it is difficult for the ball to win the second winning hole 1640, it is not limited to this, and the winning game period of the normal long open winning game (for example, 5 seconds (open period: 1 second, closed period: 1 second, open period: 3 seconds)). As a result, the player can play the game during the game per normal figure long open without anxiety.

<Regarding the production content in the tenth control example>
Next, the content of the characteristic effect executed in the tenth control example will be described with reference to FIG. In this tenth control example using the configuration of the game board 13 explained with reference to FIG. For this reason, guidance information (e.g., right-handed information) for guiding the game method to the player is configured to be executable, and as a notification mode of the guidance information, the player can easily identify the game method. A first guidance notification mode and a second guidance notification mode in which the game method is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode can be set.

By configuring in this way, depending on whether the notification mode of the executed guidance notification is the first guidance notification mode or the second guidance notification mode, the ball is placed in the second winning opening during the normal figure long open per game. 1640 It is possible to set a state in which it is easy to win and a state in which it is difficult to win.

The first guidance notification mode is a notification mode that is set as part of the special figure variation effect that is executed in response to the special figure variation, and during the general figure variation that is elected per general figure long open, It is set when a special figure variation is executed with a specific variation pattern (for example, a variation pattern in which a variation time of 90 seconds or more is set), and on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 When the variation effect corresponding to the specific variation pattern described above is being executed, the player can use a part of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 (for example, the small display area Dm4 of the main display area Dm). A guidance display mode (for example, a comment of "Right shot") for guiding the game method is displayed (see FIG. 320(b)).

Furthermore, in the tenth control example, before the game is executed per normal long open During the period during which the symbol is displayed in a stopped state (confirmed display), or after receiving the winning information command for winning the normal symbol long opening as the normal symbol winning information command, until the normal symbol long opening winning game is executed. During the period of ), the first guidance notification mode is configured to be displayable. By configuring in this way, even if a game corresponding to the display content of the first guidance notification mode (for example, "right-handed") is executed after recognizing that the first guidance notification mode is displayed, The ball can be easily reached to the second winning port 1640 which is in the open state where the ball is easy to win by the normal figure long open hitting game.

On the other hand, the second guidance notification mode is always displayed when the game is executed per normal long open, and is displayed in a display mode that is more difficult for the player to identify than the first guidance notification mode. It is a thing. Specifically, at the end of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a guidance display mode for guiding the game method smaller than the first guidance notification mode displayed in the small display area Dm4 (for example, "Right stroke ” icon) is displayed.

As described above, in the tenth control example, the game board 13 is formed so that it takes about 3 seconds for the ball fired in the right-handed game to reach the second winning hole 1640. After recognizing the notification content of the second guidance notification mode, if a game method (for example, right-handed game) is performed according to the notification content, depending on the ball flowing down situation, the ball may be played during the normal long open per game. A state in which it is impossible to reach the 2 winning opening 1640 occurs.

Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to win per normal pattern long open in the state that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is established. In addition, in the present tenth control example, in the state in which the notification conditions of the first guidance notification mode are established, when winning per normal pattern long open, the normal pattern long open per game is executed based on the winning The first guidance notification mode is displayed 3 seconds before, and the second guidance notification mode is displayed at the time when the normal pattern long open winning game is executed. By configuring in this way, even if the first guidance notification mode is displayed before the normal long open per game is actually executed, it is possible to indicate that the normal long open per game is being executed. The player can be notified in the second guidance notification mode.

In addition, in the tenth control example, it is set as the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode that the special symbol variation is executed in the variation pattern in which the variation time of 90 seconds or more is set. Without limitation, for example, a notification condition may be set that a predetermined operation has been performed on an operation means (for example, the frame button 22) that the player can operate, or the state of transition of the game state, Specifically, it may be set as the notification condition that the time saving state has ended and the state has shifted to the normal state.

In addition, a flag indicating that the notification condition is satisfied (notification condition satisfaction flag) is provided, and when the notification condition is satisfied, the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON, and during the period in which the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to ON is configured to be able to display the above-described first guidance notification mode and second guidance notification mode, and is configured to display only the second guidance notification mode when the notification condition satisfaction flag is set to OFF. Also good. In this case, it is preferable to set a notification end condition for turning off the notification condition satisfaction flag that is set to ON, and set the notification condition satisfaction flag to OFF when the notification end condition is satisfied. .

Specifically, a predetermined period after the notification condition establishment flag is set to ON (the number of special figure fluctuations reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times, or the elapsed time reaches a predetermined time (for example, 3 minutes))) It may be set so that the notification end condition is satisfied when it has passed, or a lottery that is executed when a predetermined execution opportunity (for example, execution of a special drawing lottery, winning of a ball to each winning hole) is established It may be configured such that the notification end condition is established when a predetermined lottery result is obtained.

In addition, multiple types (e.g., per normal pattern long A, per normal pattern long B) are provided per normal pattern long opening, and notification conditions and notification end conditions are set according to the type per normal pattern long opening that was elected. By making it different, it may be configured to be able to set the general pattern long open per which the first guidance notification mode is likely to be displayed and the general pattern long open per which is difficult to be displayed.

In addition, the notification condition may be varied based on the game situation of the player, for example, the elapsed period from the previous big hit game (small hit game) (the number of special figure fluctuations, the elapsed time) satisfies the predetermined condition In the case (for example, when the number of special figure fluctuations reaches the number of times corresponding to the reciprocal of the jackpot probability), it may be configured to always display the first guidance notification mode when winning the normal figure long open per. .

In addition, a predetermined period after the player moves from an inappropriate game (for example, a right-handed game performed when a normal state is set (a game state (short-time state) in which a right-handed game is performed) to a normal state )) is being performed, a warning display for correcting the game method for the player (for example, in the small display area Dm4 of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, "Left-handed If it is determined that the inappropriate game is continued even after the comment "Please return" is displayed, the notification condition may not be established.

The techniques for displaying the first guidance notification mode and the second guidance notification mode described above are not limited to the tenth control example, and can be applied to each of the above-described embodiments and control examples. Also, for example, as in the fifth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 in which the game board 13 is formed so that the ball cannot enter the second winning hole 640 unless a right-handed game is executed may apply. In this case, since the privilege provided to the player greatly differs depending on whether or not the first guidance notification mode is displayed, the player is motivated to play a game to satisfy the notification condition. can let

In addition, a notification means for notifying the player of the game method for establishing the notification condition may be provided. It should be configured to display the necessary necessary information (for example, show super reach). Furthermore, it is preferable to share whether or not the necessary information is displayed as suggestion information for suggesting the lottery result of the special symbol. By configuring in this way, when the game corresponding to the display content displayed as the necessary information is executed, whether the notification condition for displaying the first guidance notification mode is satisfied or whether the special symbol lottery result is determined. Since it is possible to notify the player of whether or not a predetermined lottery result (for example, a lottery result indicating winning of a jackpot) has been obtained in an incomprehensible manner, the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, there may be provided notification means capable of informing the player that the first guidance notification mode can be notified at present (the notification condition is satisfied). As a result, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

In addition, in the tenth control example, the first guidance notification mode as a guidance notification mode that suggests that the game will be executed per normal pattern long open, and the player discriminates the notification content from the first guidance notification mode. However, in the state where the first guidance notification mode can be notified, a special execution condition (for example, a special operation to the operation means (frame button 22) (Condition that is established when is performed) is established, a special guidance notification mode that is more advantageous to the player than the first guidance notification mode may be set.

Here, the special guidance notification mode is a guidance notification mode for notifying the player of the timing of executing a game method (for example, a right-handed game) according to the notification content, and guidance is provided in the guidance notification mode. By executing a game method corresponding to the content of notification at the appropriate timing, it is possible to make the player play a game in which an advantageous privilege is likely to be given to the player. As described above, the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth control example is configured so that both the ball fired in the left-handed game and the ball fired in the right-handed game can reach the second winning hole 1640. The period required for the ball fired by the left-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640 is about 4 seconds, and the time required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the second winning port 1640. is about 3 seconds. By operating the operation handle 51, 100 balls can be shot per minute.

Therefore, by changing the game method from the left-handed game to the right-handed game according to the execution timing of the normal figure long open game, the ball fired by the left-handed game and the ball fired by the right-handed game can reach the second winning opening 640 at substantially the same timing. The above-mentioned special guidance notification mode is based on the timing at which the game is executed per normal figure long open, from the game method being executed to the player (for example, left-handed game) according to the information content (for example , a right-handed game), and the timing at which a plurality of balls can reach the second winning port 640 at approximately the same time as the shooting timing of the balls of the game method being executed (for example, a left-handed game). A notification mode for notifying to is set.

By configuring in this way, the player will play the game with motivation so that a more advantageous guidance notification mode is displayed, so that the interest in the game can be improved. In the example described above, when the notification conditions for the first guidance notification mode are satisfied, the special guidance notification mode described above can be set. A special execution condition for setting the special guidance notification mode may be established even when the notification condition of (1) is not satisfied, and the special execution condition is the first guidance notification It may be configured such that when the notification condition of the mode is satisfied, the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is more likely to be satisfied than when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied.

In addition, a plurality of conditions are set as notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes. may be configured to set Furthermore, the easiness of establishment of notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes may be varied based on the operation result of the operation means (frame button 22) operable by the player. Each notification condition (execution condition) is variably set so that notification conditions (execution conditions) for setting various guidance notification modes are likely to be established each time a person performs a specific operation on the operating means. can be configured to As a result, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be enhanced, and early boredom with the game can be suppressed.

As described above, in the seventh control example, the normal pattern per game (normal pattern long open per game) that allows the ball to enter the second winning hole 1640 is executed. It is configured to execute guidance notification (for example, right-handed notification) for informing the player during the execution of the normal pattern fluctuation, which is the result of the lottery to be executed, and the normal pattern per game is started. At the time before (before the normal figure fluctuation is stopped and displayed), the game method executed by the player is configured to vary from the left-handed game to the right-handed game, and the normal figure per game is started. It is configured so that the game ball fired by the right-handed game before the normal game is won during the game per the normal long game, but not limited to this, for example, the normal game long A predetermined period (for example, 4 seconds) is set as the opening period of the open game, and the above-mentioned guidance information (for example, right-handed information) is set during the opening period of the game per normal long open (after the per game is started) , until the electric accessory 1640a is opened).

By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute the guidance notification (right-handed notification) after the normal figure fluctuation to be won is stopped and displayed (confirmed display), so the guidance notification (right-handed notification) was executed In spite of this, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game per normal pattern is not executed. Also in this case, similarly to the tenth control example, it is determined whether or not the notification conditions for the first guidance notification mode are established, and only when it is determined that the notification conditions are satisfied, the first guidance notification mode is set. It is preferable to configure so as to execute guidance notification. Also, if it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not established, the normal pattern fluctuation period and the opening period of the normal pattern per game are used to produce the result of the general pattern lottery lottery. is executed, and as a result of the effect, a display mode indicating that the game has been won in a general pattern is displayed at the end timing of the opening period of the general pattern game (opening operation timing of the electric accessory 640a).

As a result, when the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, it is notified that the winning of the general pattern is performed at the timing of executing the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a as the general pattern winning game. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the ball shot by the right-handed game to enter the second prize-winning hole 1640 even if the player who has identified that he has won the normal game by the notification plays the right-handed game. In the above-described example, when it is determined that the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is not satisfied, it is elected per normal pattern at the timing when the opening operation of the electric accessory 1640a is executed as a game per normal pattern. Although an example of notifying that is shown, without being limited to this, in the opening period of the game per normal pattern, when the remaining period of the opening period is less than a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) per normal pattern It may be configured so as to notify that the winner has been selected. In other words, even if the player who recognizes that he/she has been elected per normal game performs a right-handed game, the timing when it becomes difficult to win the ball in the second winning port 1640 during the normal game per game, for example, by a right-handed game Rather than the period required for the shot ball to reach the second winning hole 1640, the normal drawing game ends after notification of winning the normal game (the ball can win the second winning hole 1640) It is preferable to configure so that the period until the end of the period is shortened.

Furthermore, based on the fact that the variation of the first special symbol (special figure 1) is executed, if the notification condition of the first guidance notification mode is satisfied, until the game per normal pattern is executed In the variable production corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation in the period, the production that suggests winning per normal pattern is executed, and the production in which the first guidance notification mode is set in the opening period of the game per normal pattern is executed. It may be configured to do so, and by combining the performance mode of the variable performance of the special figure fluctuation and the performance mode of the opening performance of the normal game, the player is notified of the timing to perform the right-handed game. It may be configured as follows.

In addition, the first notification for indicating the lottery result of the special figure lottery is performed by the special figure effect executed based on the special figure fluctuation, and the general figure lottery is performed by the general figure effect executed based on the general figure fluctuation By executing the second notification for indicating the lottery result and further executing the first notification and the second notification with a relationship (continuous execution or overlapping execution) It may be configured to execute the third notification for showing the right hitting timing to execute the right hitting game to the player for the winning game.

In addition, depending on the type of game per normal pattern to be executed, the length of the opening period to be set is changed, and the period of a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) or more is set as the opening period Per normal pattern game , A normal game in which a period of less than a predetermined period (for example, 3 seconds) is set as an opening period, and the ease of winning the ball to the second winning hole 640 during the normal game. Also, if the type of the set guidance notification mode (first guidance notification mode) and the type of the game per normal figure to be executed satisfy a predetermined combination condition, than when the combination condition is not satisfied , Guidance information for making it easier to win the ball into the second winning hole 640 during the normal game may be configured to be executed. As a result, different benefits for the player (to the second winning port 640 The ease of winning a prize of the ball) can be given, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the sixth control example, the setting method of the guide notification mode for making it easier to win the ball to the second winning opening 640 during the normal game per game was described, but a specific winning game (for example, normal game per game) is executed, a game (for example, a left-handed game) in which a ball is shot with one shooting intensity is changed to a game (for example, a right-handed shot) in which a ball is shot with a predetermined shooting intensity different from one shooting intensity. game) to make it easier for the ball to enter a specific winning hole (for example, the second winning hole 640), for example, a small hit by a special lottery executed during a left-handed game As a small winning game executed when winning, a winning opening (for example, a V winning opening) is opened during a small winning game at a position (for example, a right game area) where a ball fired by a right-handed game can win. 650a), using the special figure fluctuation period and the opening period of the small winning game, it may be configured to set the guidance notification mode of the same idea as the present control example.

<Regarding Modified Example of Seventh Control Example>
Next, a modification of the seventh control example will be described with reference to FIGS. 423 and 424. FIG. FIG. 423 is a front view schematically showing the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the modified example of the seventh control example. The board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of this modification differs from the board surface 13 of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh control example in that the configuration of the right game area is changed. Since other configurations are the same, detailed description thereof is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 423, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the flow speed of the ball is reduced in the flow path of the first flow path 701 (the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 is delayed ), delay members 701y and 701z are arranged so that the time required for the ball to pass through the first flow path 701 (ball passing time) is about 4 seconds. An operating gate 670 is provided at the downstream end of the first flow path 701 .

Operation gate 670 will now be described. In each of the control examples described above, when a jackpot is won by lottery of special symbols, the special symbols are stopped and displayed (determined display) in a display mode indicating the winning of the jackpot through a special symbol variation (special symbol variation) for a predetermined time. Then, a jackpot game is executed. On the other hand, in this modified example, after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) in a display mode indicating winning of the jackpot, the jackpot game is executed when it is determined that the ball has passed through the operating gate 670. It is configured as follows. In other words, the operation gate 670 is used as an execution means for executing a jackpot game when the jackpot execution condition is established (when the special symbols are stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating that the jackpot is won).

With this configuration, not only the lottery result of the special symbol, but also the player can actually shoot the ball toward the predetermined area (operation gate 670) to execute the jackpot game. can be made to play games willingly. In addition, the operation gate 670 used in this modification is one of the execution conditions for executing the jackpot game only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot compared to the start gate 720a of the above-described A4 embodiment. (the start gate 720a is provided as an execution condition in any of the small winning game and the big winning game), and other configurations (the structure of the gate and the main controller 110 (condition device determination processing (see S250 in FIG. 311))) are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Furthermore, this modification differs from the above-described seventh control example in that the arrangement positions of the electric accessory 640a and the V winning device 650 are changed. Another difference is that the configuration of the second winning opening 640 is changed to a gate shape through which a ball can pass. Other configurations of the game board 13 are the same, so detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example is configured so that the variation time of the special symbols to be selected and the variation time of the normal symbols are different from those of the pachinko machine of the seventh control example described above. Specifically, a special special figure with a variation time of 50 seconds as a variation pattern that can be selected when winning a big hit in the first special symbol (special figure 1) lottery in a normal state or when winning a small win. 1 variation pattern is made selectable, and a special special figure 2 variation pattern with a variation time of 1 second is selected as a variation pattern that can be selected when a small win is won in a second special symbol (special figure 2) lottery in a normal state. A special normal pattern variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds is selectable as a normal pattern variation pattern that can be selected when winning per long opening of a normal symbol.

Then, as the ending condition of the small winning game, the first ending condition established when the number of winning balls reaches one, and the period during which the V winning opening 650a is opened in the small winning game is 1.5 seconds. and a second termination condition, which is met when .

In the pachinko machine 10 of this modified example configured in this way, when the special figure variation in which the special special figure 1 variation pattern is set is stopped and displayed, or the normal figure variation in which the special figure normal figure variation pattern is set When the stop display is displayed, a guidance notification (see FIG. 320(b)) for making the player play a right-handed game as a game method is executed.

Here, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the jackpot winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the first flow path 701 and passes through the operation gate 670, resulting in a big hit. A game is started. As described above, since it takes about 5 seconds for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the operation gate 670, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is performed. become.

In addition, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on the small winning, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows down the second flow path 702 and enters the V winning opening 650a. A jackpot game is started. As described above, the time required for the ball fired by the right-handed game to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 4 seconds, and the small winning game ends when one ball wins during the small winning game. In addition, when a ball wins in the V winning opening 650a, the winning ball always passes through the V gate (V area). A jackpot game is started.

Furthermore, when the executed guidance notification (right-handed notification) is based on winning per normal game, the ball fired by the right-handed game flows into the second flow path 702, passes through the second winning opening 640, When the special figure 2 lottery executed based on the passage is a small hit, a small hit game is executed after a fluctuation time of 1 second. Since the second flow path 702 is formed so that the time it takes for the ball passing through the second winning opening 640 to reach the V winning opening 650a is about 2 seconds, a small prize is won in the special figure 2 lottery. In that case, the ball that has passed through the second winning hole 640 will win the V winning hole 650a. Therefore, the jackpot game is started about 5 seconds after the right-handed game is played.

That is, in this modification, the same variation time is set for the case of winning the big hit in the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol) in the normal state and the case of winning the small hit, and the variation time has passed. When a guidance notification (right-handed notification) for changing the game method at the timing is executed, the player performs a right-handed game based on the guidance notification, so that a jackpot game can be executed at the same timing. is configured to

By configuring in this way, it is difficult for the player to understand whether the current big winning game is executed based on the winning of the big winning or through the winning of the small winning. can. Furthermore, as in the above-described control example, in the jackpot game that is executed when the special symbol jackpot is won and the jackpot game (V jackpot game) that is executed via the small hit, the player If the size of the benefits to be granted (the number of prize balls during the jackpot game, the advantageous game state (time saving state) set after the jackpot ends) is different, what triggered the jackpot game to be executed? By making it difficult to understand, the game can be played while expecting the game state set during the jackpot game or after the jackpot game ends.

Furthermore, in this modification, as described above, even when winning a specific hit (per normal pattern long open) in the lottery of normal symbols, the jackpot game is started after the guidance notification (right-handed notification) is executed. The period until winning is the same as when winning a big win or winning a small win of a special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult for the player to understand the execution trigger of the jackpot game.

In addition, in this modification, when a lottery result (special figure lottery result, general figure lottery result) that can execute a jackpot game is obtained, the same variation time (50 seconds) is configured to be selected. Therefore, it is possible to set a special variable effect using the same effect mode as the effect using the variable time. This makes it difficult for the player to understand whether the special variation performance being executed is the special variation performance based on the special pattern variation or the special variation performance based on the normal pattern variation even while the special variation performance is being executed. be able to.

In the above example, the case of setting a special variation effect for a special variation pattern in which a variation time of 50 seconds is set has been described. Of the variable effects corresponding to the set variable patterns, the above-described special variable effect may be executed when the remaining variable time of the variable time is 50 seconds. Further, in a part of the case where the lottery result of the special symbol is lost, a special loss variation pattern with a variation time of 50 seconds can be set, and as a performance result of the special variation performance, a right-handed game is guided after the variation time has passed. An effect pattern (failure effect) in which notification is not executed may be configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, even when the special variation performance is executed, it is possible to provide a pattern (gase pattern) in which the right-handed game is not guided, so that the player pays attention to the contents of the special variation performance. be able to.

In addition, as described above in each control example, a specific hit (normal pattern long open hit) is won in the normal pattern lottery, and guidance notification to guide the right-handed game is executed, and the ball is awarded the second prize by the right-handed game. In the case of winning (passing) to the mouth 640, if the special figure 1 variation is being executed, the special figure 2 variation is not immediately executed, that is, the special figure until the special figure 1 variation being executed is completed 2 A waiting period is set during which no variation is performed. In this case, it is preferable to execute a failure effect as a failure pattern in which the jackpot game is not executed despite the guidance notification being executed. In addition, when the ball wins (passes) the second winning hole 640 by the right-handed game and the special figure 2 lottery is executed immediately, the above-mentioned failure effect is also performed when the result of the special figure 2 lottery is out. should be configured to run

By constructing in this way, it is possible to set the same performance mode in the case of winning the special figure 2 lottery and in the case of setting the standby period of the special figure 2 lottery. Then, if the waiting period is within a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) and the lottery result of the special figure 2 lottery executed after the waiting period has elapsed is a small hit, the small hit is won from the failure effect described above. It is preferable that an effect (resurrection effect) for switching to an effect mode indicating that the character has been played is executed. As a result, it is possible to execute an effect capable of making the player have expectations until the end.

In addition, the waiting period of the special figure 2 lottery may be calculated and predicted using various techniques used in each control example described above, and may be appropriately combined with various techniques used in each control example. Furthermore, when performing a right-handed game based on winning per normal, or when performing a small hitting game based on winning a small hit, similar to each control example described above, the ball is a specific winning opening (Second winning opening 640, V winning opening 650a) There are cases where winning (passing) is not possible. Also in this case, it is sufficient to display the effect mode (see, for example, FIG. 324(b)) described in the fifth control example. In addition, even if the jackpot is won in the special lottery, the predetermined timing, for example, the timing at which the ball fired by the right-handed game can pass near the second winning opening 640 (after the guidance notification mode is displayed) Approximately 1 second later) or at a timing when the ball can reach the V winning opening 650a (approximately 4 seconds after the guidance notification mode is displayed), a pseudo failure effect may be executed.

In the above-described modification, in the pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a jackpot game with a plurality of opportunities, the player is notified that the conditions for executing a jackpot game have been established ("right hit notification" in this modification). By making the period from the start to the actual execution of the big winning game the same regardless of the timing until the big winning game is executed, the player is informed in advance that the big winning game will be executed. Since it is structured so as to make it difficult to understand when the jackpot game is executed while notifying, it is possible to determine which game mode the jackpot game is actually executed, or the game state after the jackpot game is finished. It is possible to provide the player with the pleasure of predicting which game state will be set.

In addition, the notification mode for notifying that the conditions for executing the jackpot game have been established is not limited to the configuration of the present modification. A performance mode may be set to indicate that a condition for executing a jackpot game is established, and a period from execution of notification based on the notification mode to actual execution of the jackpot game is unified. can be set, the notification timing and notification mode may be appropriately set.

Further, when using the opportunity to execute the big winning game through the small winning game, even if the ball wins the V winning opening 650a at any timing during the small winning game, it is determined in advance after the small winning game is started. It is preferable that the jackpot game is executed after the time has elapsed. As a result, the period from when the notification based on the notification mode is performed to when the big win game is actually performed can be made more uniform.

Furthermore, in the pachinko machine 10 using a configuration for setting the type (jackpot type) of the jackpot game to be executed later when the ball passes through the specific area (V gate) during the small win game, A plurality of specific areas (V gates) are provided in a V winning opening 650a where a ball can win a prize, and on the upstream side of the V winning opening 650a, winning balls are distributed to any of the plurality of specific areas (V gates). By providing a distribution movable member and configuring the distribution movable member to be movable according to the elapsed time from the start of the small winning game, after the small winning game is started, the swing in the V winning opening 650a The ball passes through different specific regions (V gates) depending on the time it takes for the ball to reach the movable member. Then, when each specific area (V gate) is passed, a jackpot type in which a jackpot game in which a different opening period is set is set is set, so that each specific area (V gate) is set. Even in the case of using a configuration in which a jackpot game is executed based on the passage of the , the timing at which the specific winning opening 65 is opened may be unified in the jackpot game.

<Regarding examples of how to respond to power failures in each control example>
Next, among the various effects executed in each control example described above, different game control (special figure fluctuation game, general figure fluctuation game, small hit game, jackpot game) is performed by the main control device 110 Multiple periods The control processing contents of the sound ramp control device 113 when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during execution of period effects (series effects, final variable effects) that are executed over the period will be described. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of each control example, even if the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted, the contents of the control processing of the main controller 110 (various information stored in the RAM 203) While the information can be temporarily held (backed up), the contents of the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (various information stored in the RAM 223) are stored when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted. It is configured to be deleted when

In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted while the above-described period effect is being executed based on the control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 (power failure state). ), when the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is resumed (at the time of power restoration), it becomes impossible to read out what period of performance was being executed immediately before the power failure state. There is a problem that the period production cannot be restarted.

Therefore, in this corresponding example, the return command indicating the gaming situation at the time of power recovery is configured to be set in the start-up process (see FIG. 356) of the main controller 110 (set after C910 in FIG. 356), As a command at the time of return, the presence or absence of special figure fluctuation, the presence or absence of normal figure fluctuation, the current game state, the presence or absence of big hit game, the presence or absence of small hit game, the presence or absence of right-handed notification, the remaining period until the game state shifts It is configured to set a command including each information of information, and when the sound lamp control device 113 receives the above-described return command, the current state (at the time of power restoration) is a state in which the period effect can be executed (power failure It is configured to be able to execute determination processing (pre-power-off performance determination processing) for determining whether or not it is in a state in which there is a possibility that the period performance was executed immediately before.

Then, when it is determined in the effect determination process before power failure that the current state is such that the period effect cannot be executed (for example, during the jackpot game), the effect corresponding to the command output from the main controller 110 is executed. When it is determined that the period effect can be executed at present in the effect determination process before power failure, the period effect is restarted later based on the command output from the main controller 110. A preparatory processing state is set, and a comment indicating that the effect is being prepared is displayed to the player indicating that the effect may be restarted.

Then, in a state where the preparation processing state is set, a command including information of a small winning type indicating a small winning winning (normal long open winning game) in which a series of effects is executed as a winning related command from the main control device 110 is issued. When it is determined that it is output, the period performance is restarted from the start of the small winning game. By configuring in this way, different game control (special figure fluctuation game, general figure fluctuation game, small hit game, big hit game) is performed in the main control device 110 Period production executed over multiple periods When the power supply to the pachinko machine 10 is interrupted during the execution of (a series of performances, the final variable performance), it is possible to suppress the abandonment of all the performances during that period.

Furthermore, in this correspondence example, even if the conditions for executing a new effect (period effect) are established while the preparation processing state is set, there is a restriction means for limiting the execution of the new effect (period effect). are doing. In other words, the restart processing of the performance (period performance) executed before the power failure is executed with priority over the processing of newly executing the performance (period performance) after the power is restored. By configuring in this way, the effect (period effect) that has already been provided (partially provided) to the player can be preferentially executed, so that the player can be provided with an effect that does not cause discomfort. . In addition, when the effect mode of the effect (period effect) being executed before the power cut is combined with the effect mode of the effect (period effect) that is newly set regardless of the effect (period effect), the game Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the performance result that is advantageous to the player.

Also, in the state where the preparatory processing state is set, every time various commands are received from the main controller 110, there is a possibility that an effect (period effect) was being executed immediately before the power failure. It is configured to repeatedly execute determination processing for determining whether or not there is, and based on the determination result, if it is determined that the effect (period effect) cannot be executed immediately before the power failure, It is configured to delete the comment during preparation for the effect indicating the possibility of resuming the effect (period effect) to the player, and to execute the normal control processing of the sound lamp control device 113.例文帳に追加

Furthermore, if the state in which the preparatory processing state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the period until the number of commands received from the main controller 110 reaches 10, 20 seconds after power is restored), the power is turned off. It is determined that the effect (period effect) that may have been executed before the power failure (period effect) cannot be restarted, and a display mode (for example, , and the comment ``All of the performance contents before the power failure have been disabled'') are displayed, and the normal control processing of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

By configuring in this way, even if the effect (period effect) that was being executed before the power failure cannot be restarted, it is possible to notify the player that it could not be restarted. , Before the power cut, a mission effect such as "If a reach of 3 occurs within 10 rotations, a big win!" ” and confusing the player. In addition, in order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a predetermined period after the power is restored (for example, the maximum period in which the mission production can be set (the number of special figure fluctuations is 30 times, etc.)) can overlap the production result in the mission production. It may be configured such that the mode of presentation is not set. Specifically, in a game in which a mission can be set to establish a specific reach mode (for example, a reach of "3", "5", or "7") as a mission effect, a predetermined During the period, if the result of the special lottery is lost, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is configured not to be set, and if the result of the special lottery is a hit, the above-mentioned specific reach mode is set. It should be configured so that it can be set. By configuring in this way, it is possible to execute an effect within a limited range even within a predetermined period after power is restored. Also, if the result of the special drawing lottery is a hit, a specific reach mode can be set, so the mission effect (for example, generate a reach of "3") is executed before the power is cut off. Even if "reach of 3" happens to occur within a predetermined period after the power is restored, the result of the lottery is a win, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable.

As described above, in each of the above-described control examples, as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a jackpot is won in a special symbol lottery and a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) is played. is executed (first opportunity), and a special symbol lottery wins a small hit, and the game ball is in a specific area during the small win game (V winning device 650 (Fig. 315 reference) provided in the V area (not shown)) based on the fact that the jackpot game (V jackpot game) is executed (second opportunity), gaming machine having two opportunities However, without being limited to this, as a trigger for executing a privilege game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player, a jackpot game (symbol jackpot game) is executed by winning a jackpot in a special pattern lottery. The technique of each control example described above may be diverted to a gaming machine having only a trigger (first trigger).

In addition, in each control example described above, the normal state as the game state (low probability state of special symbols, low probability state of normal symbols), time-saving state (low probability state of special symbols, high probability state of normal symbols), can be set, but without being limited to this, it is possible to set a high probability state of special symbols in which the winning probability of special symbols is increased after the end of the jackpot game, and a variable state (high probability of special symbols Probability state, high probability state of normal design) and latent probability state (high probability state of special design, low probability state of normal design) may be configured so as to be settable.

And, when a specific game state (latency state) is set as the game state, it is easier to execute a specific special figure lottery (special figure 2 lottery) than when another game state is set (special 2 Make it easier to enter the ball into the starting port that triggers the execution of the lottery.Or shorten the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 lottery), and frequently present a small winning game based on the small winning of the special figure 2 lottery. The game to be played may be configured to be executable. By constructing in this way, the player can play a game in which many prize balls can be obtained even if the player does not win a big prize in the special lottery, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

As described above, in the fifth control example to the tenth control example described above, the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of jackpot execution triggers for executing a jackpot game is used, specifically, the first special symbol. The first jackpot execution opportunity triggered by winning the jackpot by the lottery of (Special Figure 1), and the small win by the lottery of the first special pattern (Special Figure 1), are executed based on the small winning. It has a second big hit execution opportunity triggered by winning a ball in the V winning opening 650a (see FIG. 315) that is open to the small winning game. In addition, as a special figure variation execution opportunity for executing the special symbol lottery, the first special figure variation execution opportunity triggered by winning the ball in the first winning opening 64 and the ball passing through the through gate 67 A ball is placed in the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 315), which is opened by the normal pattern winning game executed when the normal pattern (normal pattern) lottery is won by the normal pattern lottery. and a second special figure variation execution opportunity triggered by winning a prize. And according to establishment condition of each big-hit execution opportunity and each special-figure variation execution opportunity, it is comprised so that a big-hit game may be performed through various game processes. By configuring in this way, the player can be made to execute a jackpot game through various game processes, so that the amusement of the game can be improved.

In the fifth control example described above, from one game state (time saving state) where it is easy to obtain a specific lottery right (ball winning to the second winning port 640 that triggers the execution of the special figure 2 lottery), the one game When a transition condition to shift to another game state (normal state) in which it is more difficult to obtain a specific lottery right than in a state is satisfied, an acquisition guidance notification is executed for acquiring a specific lottery right during one game state. By structuring to make it easier to execute a specific lottery after shifting to another game state, it is possible to make the player willingly play the game until just before the end of the one game state. However, without being limited to this, for example, if it is easier to acquire a specific lottery right during a big win game than in a game state set after the end of the big win game, the acquisition guide notification is given during the big win game. may be executed so that a specific lottery is likely to be executed after the jackpot game ends.

In addition, the ease with which a particular lottery right can be obtained may be varied by varying the ease with which a ball enters a winning opening (starting prize opening) that is a specific lottery right, or the game state may vary. By varying the length of the set period, the easiness of obtaining a specific lottery right during the game state may be varied.

Furthermore, in the fifth control example described above, the easiness of acquiring a specific lottery right is made different between one game state and another game state. It is sufficient if the degree can be varied and the game content in another game state can be changed based on the benefits obtained during one game state. A storage member (retention member) is provided, and when one game state is set, it is easier to store balls in the storage member than when another game state is set. In other game states, playing a game with the balls stored in the storage member is more advantageous to the player than playing a game with the balls not stored in the storage member. Also good.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low probability (jackpot probability) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means It may be configured such that main controller 110 executes control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of the big win is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of special symbols may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of special symbols. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed, the probability of winning a small hit is changed, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variable time may be varied. In this case, for example, a variation pattern and a jackpot type that are likely to be selected only when a specific set value is set are provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern and a jackpot game based on the jackpot type have been executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and based on the setting command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, a setting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the currently set value. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating variation time) It may be configured such that, when received, the currently set setting value is determined from the contents of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-described set value, for each set value so that the easiness of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is variable according to the set set value Various parameters may be specified, and if a specific game state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the player can be favored in the drawing of the other special symbol different from the symbol. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easier to execute, or the privilege given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) , content of the small winning game, game state set after the end of the big winning game) are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, the variable probability state is a specification that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special symbol fluctuates is executed, and the lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift from the variable probability state to the normal game state by winning . In this case, as the probability variable state advantageous to the player and the probability variable state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probability variable state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probability variable state to the normal game state is different. You may make it so.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes a specific number of times of time-saving When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be changed to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation frequency end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the winning frequency end condition is satisfied. In that case, it is preferable to provide a game machine that is controlled to shift the game state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol, the range obtained by adding up the special symbol variation time and the time during which the small winning game is executed according to the established time saving end condition. You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during a small winning game that gives a small amount of benefits to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small winning types are provided in which the period during which the small winning game is executed is different, and even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small winning type for which the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It is preferable to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, there are cases where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started, and when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. should be configured so that This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small hit It uses a configuration that separately executes the processing to determine, but is not limited to this, centrally manages the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern, and the established time saving end condition You may use the structure which sets the timing which terminates a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

In each control example described above, the display effects displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 were used as examples of the various effects to be executed, but in the effect mode that achieves the same purpose and effect, It is sufficient if there is, display effects displayed on a display device other than the third symbol display device 81, voice effects notified to the player by sound, and various light emitting means (LED) attached to the pachinko machine 10. You may use the light emission production which notifies to.

In addition, as the various effects executed in each of the above-described control examples, a notification effect that allows the player to grasp the content with certainty, and a suggestive effect that the player indirectly informs the player of the content are used. A suggestive effect may be executed instead, or a notification effect may be executed instead of the suggestive effect.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with two types of high and low probability (jackpot probability) of winning a jackpot in a special symbol lottery (high probability state of special symbols, low probability state of special symbols). However, without being limited to this, for example, setting means (for example, a setting switch) capable of setting one setting value from among a plurality of types of setting values is provided, and each setting value set by the setting means It may be configured such that main controller 110 executes control in which different jackpot probabilities are set.

In this case, for example, six levels of setting values from 1 to 6 are prepared, and when the setting value "1" is set, the probability of the big win is the highest, and the setting value "6" is set. It is preferable to set the jackpot probability for each set value in order so that the jackpot probability becomes the lowest.

In addition, as the jackpot probability set for each setting value, only the jackpot probability corresponding to the low probability state of special symbols may be configured to be different according to the set value, or the high probability of special symbols. Only the jackpot probability corresponding to the state may be configured to vary according to the set value.

In addition, depending on the set value described above, not only the jackpot probability but also, for example, the selection ratio of each jackpot type is changed, the probability of winning a small hit is changed, the selection ratio of the variation pattern of the special symbol, The variable time may be varied. In this case, for example, a variation pattern and a jackpot type that are likely to be selected only when a specific set value is set are provided, and whether or not a special symbol variation based on the variation pattern and a jackpot game based on the jackpot type have been executed. The currently set setting value may be determined by the player's attention.

Further, a setting command for indicating the set value is set, and based on the setting command received by the audio lamp control device 113 side, a setting suggestion effect is executed to suggest the currently set value. Alternatively, a command indicating the jackpot type output from the main control device 110 (command for indicating the lottery result) or a command for indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol (command for indicating variation time) It may be configured such that, when received, the currently set setting value is determined from the contents of the received command, and the setting suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result. With this configuration, the number of commands output from main controller 110 can be reduced.

Also, unlike the control examples described above, the pachinko machine 10 capable of simultaneously executing the lottery (variation) of the first special symbol and the lottery (variation) of the second special symbol may be used. In this case, when using a configuration that can set the above-described set value, for each set value so that the easiness of variation (lottery) of each special symbol is variable according to the set set value Various parameters may be specified, and if a specific game state in which one special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player at a specific set value is a predetermined set value different from the specific set value, one special Various parameters may be defined for each set value so that the player can be favored in the drawing of the other special symbol different from the symbol. In this case, the fact that the special symbol lottery is advantageous to the player means that the special symbol lottery is easier to execute, or the privilege given when the special symbol lottery result is a specific lottery result (jackpot game content) , content of the small winning game, game state set after the end of the big winning game) are advantageous to the player.

Also, regardless of the game state, the game state transition destination and distribution rate are unified according to the type of special figure, but not limited to this, the game state transition destination and transition distribution rate according to the game state may be changed. As a result, it is possible to provide a more complicated game, and there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from becoming bored with the game early.

Furthermore, the variable probability state is a specification that continues until the variable display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times), or a lottery that shifts to the normal game state each time the special symbol fluctuates is executed, and the lottery is performed. It may be configured to shift from the variable probability state to the normal game state by winning . In this case, as the probability variable state advantageous to the player and the probability variable state disadvantageous to the player, for example, a difference is provided in the number of fluctuations of the special symbol at which the probability variable state ends, or the lottery probability of shifting from the probability variable state to the normal game state is different. You may make it so.

In addition, a plurality of time-saving end conditions, which are conditions for ending the high probability state of normal symbols, are set, and among the plurality of time-saving end conditions, when the number of times of fluctuation of special symbols becomes a specific number of times of time-saving When the end condition is satisfied, that is, when the fluctuation number end condition is satisfied, and when the time saving end condition is satisfied when a small hit is won by special symbol lottery, that is, when the winning number end condition is satisfied Then, the high probability state of the normal symbol may be changed to the low probability state at different timings.

Using this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation frequency end condition is satisfied, the game state is shifted from the time saving state to the normal state based on the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the winning frequency end condition is satisfied. In that case, it is preferable to provide a game machine that is controlled to shift the game state from the time saving state to the normal state based on the end of the small winning game.

As a result, even if the time saving state ends based on the fluctuation of the same special symbol, the range obtained by adding up the special symbol variation time and the time during which the small winning game is executed according to the established time saving end condition. You can change the timing at which the time saving state ends. Therefore, it is possible to make the player interested in the type of time-saving end condition that has been established. Furthermore, depending on the time-saving end condition that is established, even during a small winning game that gives a small amount of benefits to the player, the electric accessory 640a is operated to make it easier to enter the ball into the ball entrance. It is possible to make the small winning game a more advantageous game state for the player.

In addition, a plurality of small winning types are provided in which the period during which the small winning game is executed is different, and even if the winning number ending condition is satisfied, the game is played according to the small winning type for which the winning number ending condition is satisfied. It is preferable to make the privilege given to the person different. As a result, the player can be interested not only in the type of time saving end condition that has been established, but also in more detailed content of the time saving end condition.

Also, in this case, even if the condition for ending the number of times of winning is satisfied, there are cases where the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is started, and when the time saving state is ended at the timing when the small winning game is ended. should be configured so that This makes it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the time saving state ends. Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the process of determining whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the number of fluctuations in the special symbol, and whether or not the time-saving end condition is established based on the winning of the small hit It uses a configuration that separately executes the processing to determine, but is not limited to this, centrally manages the time saving information updated according to the lottery (fluctuation) of the special pattern, and the established time saving end condition You may use the structure which sets the timing which terminates a time saving state based on.

In each of the above control examples, each time the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 is updated (that is, each time it increases or decreases), the reserved ball number command is issued. Although the case of transmitting from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, only when the value (N) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d in the main controller 110 increases, the main controller 110 transmits the reserved number command to the sound lamp controller 113 . Further, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to decrease the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223b by one when receiving the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 . As a result, the number of times master controller 110 transmits a hold number command to audible lamp controller 113 and the number of times audible lamp controller 113 receives a hold number command can be reduced. The control load of the audio ramp control device 113 can be reduced.

In each of the above control examples, winning into the first ball entrance 64 and passing through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. Instead, it may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, the number of pending balls in the variable display based on the winning to the first ball entrance 64 is displayed numerically in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or the area divided into four is displayed by the number of pending balls. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern), and a light-emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the first pattern display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is notified by the light-emitting member. can be configured to

Further, as shown in each of the above control examples, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. The pattern may be moved and displayed in the vertical direction or along a predetermined path such as an L-shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each control example described above, the third symbol display for showing the lottery result of each symbol to the player is executed by one display means (third symbol display device 81), but other configurations may be used. For example, among the third symbols, different display means may be provided for displaying the main symbol to be displayed in an emphasized manner to the player and for displaying the sub-symbols. Also, as the configuration of the display means, a configuration other than the liquid crystal display may be used.

In each control example described above, a right-handed game aiming at the right side area of the game board 13 is executed in the case of the game state (time saving state) that is advantageous to the player, and in the case of the normal game state, the left side area of the game board 13 However, it suffices if the target area of the game board 13 is changed according to the game state, and the left-handed game is executed during the time-saving state, and during the normal state. may be caused to execute a right-handed game. Also, it may be possible to execute games in different game states while aiming at the same area.

In each of the control examples described above, the frame button 22 is used as the operating means that can be operated by the player. may be used, and an operation means configured in a lever shape that can determine whether the player has operated it by tilting it left or right or front and back, or can determine whether it has been operated by the player touching or approaching it. A touch sensor type operating means, or a wireless operating means that can determine that an operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. In addition, each of the movable valve 750, storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and third frame button (release button) 22c A part or all of the operation control may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 instead of the main control device 110 .

In each control example described above, the sound lamp control device 113 performs processing for setting the display mode in the effect executed using the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, the game (lottery) itself is the sound lamp Although it is configured to be executed by the main control device 110 different from the control device 113, the processing for executing the game (lottery) and the result of the game (lottery) are displayed as effects without being limited to this. It may be configured such that the processing for and the processing are executed by the same control device. By configuring in this way, it becomes possible to execute a plurality of different processes with one control device.

In the above-described first control example, if it is determined that the player is operating the operation means within one operation valid period, the player is determined to operate the operation means. A first discriminating means ( (determination executed during the entire operation effective period), and when it is determined that the operation means is being operated, determination of whether or not to change the performance mode (for example, the gauge amount of the spirit gauge KG). and a second determination means that is executed (determination that is executed only at a specific timing within the operation valid period). In other words, the technical idea is to overlap and set a plurality of valid operation periods. This technical idea is not limited to that used in the first control example described above. It is not necessary to set the second operation valid period in which is executed, and it may be configured so that at least a part of it overlaps.

Alternatively, one second operation valid period may be set for one first operation valid period among a plurality of types of second operation valid periods. Thus, when the first operation valid period and the second operation valid period are set to overlap, the player can predict at what timing of the first operation valid period the second operation valid period is set. It can provide fun to let you.

In the first control example described above, when the period in which the probability variation state is set continues for a predetermined period (for example, the number of special symbol variations is 100 times), the variation time of the special symbol variation is shorter than before. It has a technical idea to improve the time efficiency of the game (special symbol lottery) by making it easier to select time, but this technical idea is not limited to the contents of the first control example. It may be applied in a state in which a game state other than the state is set. In addition, only during the period from when a specific game state is set until a predetermined period elapses, in order to increase the time efficiency of the game (special symbol lottery), it may be configured such that a short fluctuation time is likely to be selected. good. In addition, when the result of the special symbol lottery is a specific result (for example, winning a small prize), the period may be set so that the short fluctuation time is likely to be selected.

In addition, the special symbol variation that is executed immediately after the time saving state ends (immediately after moving from the time saving state to the normal state) is executed when the special symbol variation continues without the time saving state ending. The fluctuation pattern scenario and the fluctuation pattern table may be configured so as to easily become the same as the fluctuation time of . By configuring in this way, instead of informing the player that the time saving state has ended immediately after the time saving state ends, a predetermined period has passed since the game state shifted from the time saving state to the normal state. After, that is, based on the selection of the variation pattern of the variation time which cannot be selected when the time saving state continues, the player can grasp the end of the time saving state.

By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand the timing when the end condition of the time saving state is established. In this case, for example, in the period of the maximum number of pending special figures 2 pending (4 pieces) acquired at the end of the time saving state, it is executed immediately after the time saving state ends (immediately after moving from the time saving state to the normal state) The contents of the variation pattern scenario and the variation pattern table are preferably defined so that the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed is likely to be the same as the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed when the time saving state continues without ending.

Further, when the above-described configuration is used, as long as the variation pattern of the same variation time as during the time saving state continues to be selected, even after the game state shifts to the normal state, the production performed during the time saving state It is preferable to configure so as to execute the same production. As a result, the player can be made to play a game during time saving for a period longer than the actual time saving state.

Furthermore, in the first control example described above, it is configured so that either the variable probability state or the time saving state is set after the end of the jackpot game. You can set it. In addition, in order to make it difficult for the player to determine whether the game state set after the jackpot game is a time saving state or a probability variable state, after the jackpot game is finished, the normal pattern high probability state (variable probability state, time saving state ) is set, at least until the period in which the time saving state can be terminated, the same variation time is easily selected, and the game state is given to the player by the variation time of the special symbol variation to be executed. is suppressed from being grasped.

Then, in the production (addition production of lucky points) executed during the normal pattern high probability state, when a specific production result is notified (when the lucky points reach 100P), the current game state is changed. It was configured to execute an effect (invincible zone (FIG. 129(a))) for informing the player of the state. The effect content of the lucky point addition effect is determined each time the special symbol lottery is executed, and the timing at which the result of the specific effect is notified is indefinite. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to grasp at what timing the variable probability state is notified, and the player continues to play while expecting that the variable probability state is set. can be made to perform.

However, when the high probability state (probability variable state, time saving state) of the normal pattern is set after the end of the jackpot game, at least until the period when the time saving state can end, the same variation time is likely to be selected. Since it is configured, even if the variable probability state is notified as soon as possible (even if the invincible zone is set), it was necessary to set the production period for executing the battle production. Therefore, in the above-described first control example, it is configured to provide the player with a sense of security by informing the player in an easy-to-understand manner that the player will not be defeated in the battle effect during the invincible zone. There is a fear that the battle performance executed in the invincible zone becomes a useless battle performance, and the player's desire to play is lowered.

In order to solve such a problem, for example, after the invincible zone is set, if a variable time (60 seconds) for executing the battle production is determined, 5 seconds Alternatively, it is configured to repeatedly execute the performance of the performance period of 10 seconds, and is configured to be able to execute a pseudo-variation performance that makes it appear that the special symbol variation is executed a plurality of times with one special symbol variation. good to do More specifically, it is preferable to configure so as to execute an effect that is executed during the shortened zone effect.

In the above-described first control example, by prohibiting the execution of new additional effects during the execution period of the additional effects (see FIGS. 121 and 122) executed during the jackpot game, a plurality of effects is redundantly executed, and the player is provided with an effect that is difficult to understand as a whole. For example, if a determination means is provided that can determine the number (type) of effects that are being executed, and the number (type) of effects that are being executed in duplicate satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, three), It may be configured to prohibit the execution of new effects. In other words, the technology is not limited to prohibiting execution of a new specific effect during a period in which the specific effect is being executed. In addition, as conditions for prohibiting the execution of a new effect, not only the condition that is satisfied only by the number (type) of the effect that is executed in duplicate, but also the content of the effect being executed and the newly executed For example, a pachinko machine 10 capable of executing a plurality of types of effects in which information about a specific element (for example, the details of a big win game) is provided to the player. If there is, if the effect being executed is an advantageous effect with a high degree of advantage for a specific element, it is executed when it is determined that the content of the effect to be newly executed has a lower degree of advantage than the effect being executed. may be configured to prohibit

In addition, in the above-described first control example, the performance executed during the jackpot game is configured so that the execution of the new additional performance is prohibited during the execution period of the performance, except during the jackpot game. The same technical concept may be applied to the performance executed during the period, for example, the same technical concept may be applied to the special symbol fluctuation period for showing the result of one special symbol lottery. Alternatively, the same technical concept may be applied to the look-ahead performance period executed across a plurality of special symbol fluctuation periods. In this case, even if the conditions for executing a new look-ahead effect are satisfied during the look-ahead effect period, the execution of the new look-ahead effect can be prohibited, so that the look-ahead effect is redundantly executed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which it is difficult for a player to determine which look-ahead performance suggests which special symbol lottery result.

In the above-described second control example, when the condition for executing a new additional effect is established during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited, the conditions (contents) of the establishment are stored, and the new additional effect is executed. When it becomes possible to execute a new effect, the execution of a new effect is prohibited by variably determining the effect mode of the additional effect based on the memorized establishment situation (content). It has a technical idea that the player is motivated to play the game even during the period in order to satisfy the execution conditions of the production, but this technical idea may be used for other productions, for example, look ahead. During the performance, a new look-ahead performance execution condition (for example, a condition that can be established when a ball is entered into the first ball entrance 63 or the second ball entrance 640 and a special symbol reservation is newly acquired) is established. It may be configured to change the effect mode of the effect to be executed after the pre-reading effect being executed is completed.

In addition, in the above-described second control example, the degree of advantage to the player in the effect to be executed later is determined according to the number of conditions for executing the new additional effect being satisfied during the period in which the execution of the new additional effect is prohibited. Specifically, in a period during which the execution of new additional effects is prohibited, it is most advantageous when the number of conditions for executing the new additional effects has reached a predetermined number. However, without being limited to this, when a condition for executing a new additional performance is established, a predetermined lottery is conducted, and if the lottery is won, it is the most advantageous. It may be configured to facilitate the execution of the effect of .

Next, the technical concept of the technique explained in each of the above control examples will be explained.

The pachinko machine 10 in each control example described above executes a lottery with at least two lottery results (e.g., win, lose), and when the lottery is a specific lottery result (e.g., win), the game It is configured so that a privilege (for example, a winning game) that is advantageous to the player is given. As the type of lottery to be executed, a special symbol (for example, a first special symbol or a second special symbol) lottery and a normal symbol lottery are configured to be executable. The lottery described above has the technical idea of determining means for determining the acquired value (random value) and the technical idea of determining means for determining which is the result of the lottery.

Here, as a technical idea of the discriminating means, in addition to the contents described above, for example, when setting various effects modes set by the sound lamp control device 113, one effect mode is selected from a plurality of effects modes. The technical idea of the discriminating means also includes a configuration for discriminating information (various random values, setting conditions of various flags, information in various storage areas, etc.) referred to for determination. Further, the technical idea of the judging means is not limited to the configuration for judging the lottery result based on the acquired value, as described above. , i.e., when certain conditions are satisfied, it is sufficient if it can be determined as a game result that is advantageous to the player. included in thought.

In addition, benefits that are advantageous to the player include, of course, those that provide the player with a game situation in which it is easy to win prize balls, such as a winning game that is executed when a specific lottery result is obtained. , To establish conditions for setting conditions that tend to result in a specific lottery result (for example, a high probability state of special symbols, or a high probability state of normal symbols), or to facilitate the establishment of conditions for executing the lottery (for example, , making it easier for the ball to enter the second ball entrance 640 accompanied by the electric accessory 640). Furthermore, by making it easier for the player to grasp the current game situation by various effects modes set by various control processes executed by the sound lamp control device 113, the player can proceed with the game in an advantageous manner. For example, the above-described various effects modes are also included in the privilege. In addition, in terms of a concept different from the game purpose of winning a prize ball, various effects modes with a low probability of being set by various control processes of the sound lamp control device 113 are set (easily set). , providing the player with an effect that cannot be normally seen (difficult to see) also corresponds to an advantageous privilege.

In this case, if the awarding of the privilege is advantageous to the player as compared to the case of not being granted the privilege, it corresponds to an advantageous privilege. That is, in the case of the pachinko machine 10 having a plurality of privilege types (for example, the first privilege and the second privilege), even if any privilege is granted, compared to the case where no privilege is granted Therefore, if there is an element that is advantageous to the player, all the benefits are advantageous to the player. In addition, if there is an element that can be relatively compared with the first privilege and the second privilege, and if there is an element to be compared that has a different degree of advantage to the player, It becomes the concept with the privilege of the other which becomes advantageous. Furthermore, each of the first privilege and the second privilege is composed of a plurality of elements (for example, the first element and the second element), and the first element is more advantageous than the second privilege with respect to the first element is high, and the second element is configured so that the second benefit is more advantageous than the first benefit, one of the benefits is defined as an advantageous benefit for each element. Alternatively, only the privilege on the side having the greater degree of advantage for the entire element may be defined as the privilege that is advantageous.

The technical concept of "being advantageous" described above is not limited to the type of privilege, and can be applied to all expressions of "advantageous" and "disadvantageous" used in each control example described above. For example, for each of a plurality of game states (normal state, time saving state, probability variable state, latent probability state) after the end of the jackpot game, the degree of advantage may be defined based on the above definition, or a plurality of types For each lottery (for example, first special symbol lottery, second special symbol lottery, normal symbol lottery), the degree of advantage may be defined based on the definition described above.

In each control example described above, there is a configuration in which special symbols and ordinary symbols are variably displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol display device 84 in order to show the lottery result, and a third symbol corresponding to the variable display. Some of the symbol display devices 81 use a configuration that variably displays the third and fourth symbols, and the various symbols that are variably displayed correspond to identification information for indicating the lottery result. In addition, the identification information may be configured so that the player can identify whether or not the variable display is being executed and the result of the lottery. ) The identification information also includes information that allows the player to identify whether or not the variable display is being executed and the result of the lottery, depending on the combination of parts.

In addition, in each of the control examples described above, a plurality of (eg, three) symbol strings composed of a plurality of identification information (eg, nine types of third symbols imitating the numbers “1” to “9”) A configuration (symbol variable display) is used in which the identification information is variably displayed by varying the position displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81 in each symbol row. indicates the period until the result of the executed lottery is notified to the player. However, by varying the display position, it is possible to indicate to the player that it is still in the period until the result of the lottery is announced, or display and non-display (lighting, extinguishing) are repeatedly executed for each piece of identification information. By doing so, it may be configured to indicate to the player that it is in the period until the lottery result is notified. That is, by setting a dynamic display mode that is different from the state in which the identification information is statically displayed, the player can be notified that the lottery result is being announced. Good luck.

Furthermore, in each of the control examples described above, the contents of various effects executed in the pachinko machine 10 (contents of effects executed by the effect executing means) are displayed on the display surface of the third symbol display device 81. is mainly explained, but other than "display" using configurations other than the third pattern display device 81 possessed by the pachinko machine 10 (for example, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227 and various decorative accessories) (sound effect, lighting effect, movable effect) are also executed in the same manner. Therefore, the effects executed by the effect executing means include at least display effects, sound effects, lighting effects, and movable effects.

The present invention may be applied to a different type of pachinko machine or the like from the above embodiments. For example, once the jackpot hits, the expected value of the jackpot is increased until the jackpot state occurs multiple times (for example, 2 times, 3 times) including the pachinko machine (commonly known as 2 times rights product, 3 times rights product) may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. In addition, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine in which a plurality of combinations of probabilities (commonly referred to as settings) relating to the jackpot lottery are provided, and the settings can be changed on the gaming parlor side. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, mammoth, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In addition, as a pachinko machine with multiple stages of settings, the combination of jackpot probability (a combination of the jackpot probability in the low probability state and the jackpot probability in the variable probability state) can be set in multiple stages (for example, 6 stages) can be set as a representative example, but is not limited to this. In place of or in addition to combinations of jackpot probabilities, for example, a pachinko machine capable of varying the ratio of each jackpot pattern (each jackpot type) determined in the event of a jackpot according to settings. may That is, depending on the setting, the rate at which a jackpot type advantageous to the player is determined may be varied, or the rate at which a jackpot type disadvantageous to the player is determined may be varied. More specifically, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of rounds (eg, 16 rounds) is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of rounds (eg, 2 rounds) is determined. A configuration may be adopted in which the degree of advantage for each setting can be varied by varying the ratio of each setting according to the setting. In addition, for example, the ratio of determining the jackpot with a large number of times of time reduction (for example, 100 times) after the end of the jackpot is varied according to the setting, or the jackpot with a small number of times of time reduction (for example, 0 times) may be varied according to the setting. Furthermore, after the end of the jackpot, the rate at which the jackpot that transitions to (or easily transitions to) an advantageous game state (eg, variable probability state) is determined can be changed according to settings, or a disadvantageous game state (eg, normal state) can be set. ) (or easily shifted) may be changed according to the setting. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which provides a big-hit classification in which the ratio determined only by specific setting increases significantly (almost never determined by other settings). Specifically, for example, six settings from 1 to 6 can be set, and setting 6 is the most advantageous setting. In setting 6, when a jackpot is won, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined at a rate of 2%, while in other settings, a jackpot of 6 rounds is determined only at a rate of 0.01%. may be configured. By constructing in this way, when the big win ends in 6 rounds, the possibility that the setting is the most advantageous setting 6 is extremely high, so that the player is made to play the game paying attention to the number of rounds of the big win. be able to. Alternatively or in addition, for example, in setting 6, the ratio of the jackpot type in which 66 times of time saving is given after the jackpot ends may be higher than other settings. By configuring in this way, it is possible to play a game while paying attention to the number of times the time saving state ends. Alternatively, or in addition to these, for example, a jackpot type in which the jackpot (or accessories inside the jackpot, etc.) operates in an operation pattern different from other jackpot types during execution of the jackpot game. It may be configured such that the jackpot type is easily determined by a specific setting (the rate of determination is increased). In addition, in the case of varying the combination of the probability of the big win according to the setting, in the low probability state, the setting is more advantageous to the player, the higher the probability of the big win, while in the variable probability state, the setting is disadvantageous to the player. It is good also as a structure which makes a jackpot probability high as it is. This configuration is particularly of the type that tends to increase the number of balls held as the number of special symbol lotteries increases (the number of prize balls paid out tends to be greater than the number of game balls fired), especially in the variable probability state. Effective in gaming machines. More specifically, for example, it is a configuration that continues until the next big hit is won in the variable probability state, and by applying it to a game machine of the type that becomes a small hit with a high probability in the variable probability state, the high setting advantage You can increase your sexuality. That is, if the probability of winning a big win in the variable probability state is low, the number of lottery times until the next big win tends to increase, so the chances of getting a small win and winning balls also increase. Therefore, when the variable probability state occurs, it becomes easier for the player to win more prize balls until the next big win, which is advantageous for the player.

In slot machines, for example, when a coin is inserted to determine a valid symbol line, the symbol is changed by operating an operation lever, and the symbol is stopped and fixed by operating a stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

Further, all or part of the configurations of the above embodiments and control examples may be combined and implemented.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the game machine of the present invention are shown.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means blinds the passed means>
A path construction means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball that has flowed down the path construction means to pass through, wherein the path construction means is configured to allow the game ball to pass through the path construction means. Displaceable means that can be arranged at a position overlapping at least a part of the first game ball on the upstream side of the passage means and in front of the first game ball flowing down the path construction means is characterized. A game machine AA1 to play.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of constructing a plurality of types of flow-down paths of game balls directed to a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured by a decorative plate 302 to make it difficult to recognize. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, since the decorative plate 302 makes it difficult to recognize the ball detection hole 431 at all times, it is possible to confirm the entry of the ball into the ball detection hole 431 and continue or stop the shooting of the game ball. There was a possibility that the player could feel dissatisfied with the game mode of playing. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the portion related to the shooting operation of the game ball.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AA1, since the means for reducing the visibility of the first game ball in the path construction means is the predetermined displaceable means, it is possible to construct a state in which the first game ball is easily visible. be done. Therefore, in a state in which the first game ball is easily visible, it is easy to determine whether the shooting operation of the game ball should be continued or stopped by confirming the flow of the first game ball. Relevant parts can be improved.

In addition, the mode of the predetermined displaceable means is not limited at all. For example, another game ball may be used, or a decorative member configured to be displaceable between the downflow path of the game ball and the glass unit may be used.

In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance (for example, a starting hole) related to a lottery of patterns, a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, or other items through which game balls can pass. means is also good.

In the game machine AA1, the displaceable means is a second game ball that flows down the upstream side of the first game ball.

According to the game machine AA2, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA1, the visibility of the first game ball can be changed by using the game ball guided toward the means to be passed. Material cost and design cost can be reduced as compared with the case of preparing other decorative members.

A gaming machine AA3 in the gaming machine AA2, characterized in that the path forming means comprises a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length capable of arranging the second game ball on the front side of the first game ball. .

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA2, the front-rear direction path is configured so that the second game ball can be arranged on the front side of the first game ball. At least part of the first game ball can be hidden by the second game ball.

In the game machine AA3, the forward-backward direction path is defined as the second game ball when the first game ball and the second game ball flow down the path construction means at a shooting interval set in the shooting device. A game machine AA4 characterized in that a game ball is configured to hide at least part of the first game ball.

According to the game machine AA4, in addition to the effects of the game machine AA3, when a plurality of game balls flow down the path construction means while maintaining the firing interval, it is difficult to recognize the first game ball as the second game ball. It is possible to achieve the effect of This makes it possible to create a situation that is difficult to recognize even in normal times.

In the game machine AA3 or AA4, the game machine AA5 is characterized in that the front-side component of the front-back direction path is arranged closer to the center of the game area than the back-side component.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA3 or AA4, the back-and-forth direction path can be configured as a path having an inclination along the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed. is hidden behind the second game ball. That is, the blindfold effect can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA5, the gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that the front side component is arranged on the line of sight of the player who sees the means to be passed.

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA5, a similar blinding effect is produced regardless of the length of the interval between the first game ball and the second game ball arranged in the forward-backward direction path. be able to.

That is, normally, it is considered that the closer the first game ball and the second game ball are, the more the blindfold effect can be improved. When the number of game balls is arranged, the influence of the length of the interval can be eliminated.

In any one of the game machines AA2 to AA6, the path construction means includes a front-rear direction path formed with a front-rear width length that allows the second game ball to be arranged on the front side of the first game ball, and a back-and-forth direction path. A gaming machine AA7 characterized by comprising a left-right direction path formed with a left-right width that allows a game ball to flow down in the left-right direction on the upstream side of the path.

According to the gaming machine AA7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines AA2 to AA6, the player's line of sight can be blocked by the game balls flowing down the left-right direction path, so that the player can use the means to be passed. On the other hand, the blindfold effect can be produced not only when the passed means is visually recognized with a line of sight that does not shift left and right, but also when the line of sight shifts left and right and looks into the means. In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the manner in which the ball enters the passed means regardless of the direction of the player's line of sight (a blinding effect can be produced in all directions).

This action is remarkably produced by sealing the left and right sides of the flow path extending in the front-rear direction with a wall portion. That is, in a configuration in which one of the left and right sides is closed by the wall, the wall serves as a blindfold on the left and right sides, so that it is easy to construct a state in which the passing means is not visible.

In any one of the gaming machines AA1 to AA7, the path constructing means includes a first flow-down path through which game balls pass through the passed means in a first mode, and a second flow path through which game balls pass in a second mode. and a flow-down route of the first game ball, regardless of which flow-down route of the route configuration means, at least a part of which is covered by the predetermined displaceable means and can be visually recognized A gaming machine AA8 characterized by being configured as follows.

According to the game machine AA8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AA1 to AA7, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the flowing state of the game ball flowing down the path construction means regardless of whether or not the passing means has passed. , it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball flowing down the path construction means.

Note that the first mode and the second mode are not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the ball flows in a different direction, or a mode in which the detection sensor through which the ball passes may be different.

In any one of the game machines AA1 to AA8, branching means for dividing the flowing direction of the game ball on the upstream side of the passing means is provided, the branching means comprises switching means for switching the flowing direction of the received game ball, The game machine AA9 is characterized in that the path constructing means is configured such that the game balls whose flowing paths are divided by the branching means, and the game balls that have reached the switching means flow down the same path for a predetermined section.

According to the game machine AA9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AA1 to AA8, the game ball that reaches the switching means flows down the same route for a predetermined section, so the game ball that reaches the switching means immediately afterward. Comprehension of the flow down of the game ball can be made more difficult than in the case of the flow mode corresponding to the flow path of . As a result, the player's attention to the game ball can be improved.

In the game machine AA9, the path construction means includes a projecting part projecting toward the flowing game ball, and the projecting part acts on the branching of the game ball in the branching means. Machine AA10.

According to the gaming machine AA10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA9, the projecting portion can act to branch the game ball. durability can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA10, the projecting portion includes a first projecting portion extending in a predetermined direction and a second projecting portion extending in a direction different from the first projecting portion. and a projection amount of the second projecting portion are different from each other.

According to the gaming machine AA11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AA10, the influence of the first projecting portion on the game ball and the influence of the second projecting portion on the game ball are determined according to the flow of the game ball. can be different. As a result, while using the fixed first projecting portion and the second projecting portion, it is possible to cause the action of branching the game ball according to a predetermined rule according to the flow-down mode of the game ball.

<Points where the sphere passing through the path constructing means appeals to the introduction to the passed means>
A path configuring means configured to allow a game ball to flow down, and a passed means configured to allow a game ball that has flowed down the path configuring means to pass through, and the path configuring means is more likely than the passed means to pass. A gaming machine AB1 comprising a predetermined portion forming an upstream side, the predetermined portion being arranged on a more conspicuous side than said means to be passed and capable of guiding a game ball to said means to be passed.

A game machine such as a pachinko machine is provided with a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths of game balls toward a ball detection hole 431, and the vicinity of the ball detection hole 431 is configured by a decorative plate 302 so that it is difficult to recognize. Depending on the state of the winning part 300, there are gaming machines in which the game ball falls off the decorative plate 302 or is hidden behind the decorative plate 302 (for example, special See Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, a game ball with good visibility that falls off the decorative plate 302 is configured to rather deviate from the ball detection hole 431 and flow down, and is hidden behind the decorative plate 302. Since part of the falling game ball is guided to the ball detection hole 431, the visibility of the game ball does not correspond to the amount of profit that the player can obtain, so the focus is on the game ball. There is a possibility that the player will feel dissatisfied because it is likely to be wasted. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of making the manner in which the game ball flows after attracting attention worthy of attention.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AB1, since the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion arranged on the conspicuous side is configured to be guided to the means to be passed, the degree of improvement in attention to the game ball and It can be associated with the game ball passing through the means to be passed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the possibility that the game ball that has flowed down the predetermined portion will pass through the means to be passed.

In addition, by configuring in this way, it is possible to easily guide the player's line of sight with the game ball flowing down the predetermined part, and the possibility of the player missing that the game ball is heading toward the means to be passed is reduced. be able to.

In addition, the aspect of the means to be passed is not limited at all. For example, it may be an opening that constitutes a specific area, a ball entrance (for example, a starting hole) related to a lottery of patterns, a prize ball hole related to the payout of prize balls, or other items through which game balls can pass. means is also good.

In addition, the aspect of the conspicuous side is not limited at all. For example, it may be on the side of the display device that is easy to catch the player's eye, the side of the winning opening, the side of the starting opening, the front side (front side) that is easy for the player to visually recognize, or the side of the specific ball entrance. The stage (mainly, the lower edge of the frame formed by the center frame where game balls temporarily stay) is a place where the probability of entering a ball is remarkably high, and it is directly connected to winning a big hit. The V winning opening side, the ball lending device side as the operation target, the effect operation button side, the range where the game ball that deviates from the entrance ball flowing down (the range where the player is frustrated and follows with his eyes) side, , the bright side or the other side may be used for switching between light and dark in the light emitting means. In addition, the inconspicuous side may be intentionally formed so as to be relatively conspicuous.

In the gaming machine AB1, the path configuration means includes a second predetermined portion that makes a game ball that has entered the path configuration means less conspicuous than when the game ball entered the path configuration means, and the predetermined portion is more conspicuous than the second predetermined portion. The gaming machine AB2 is characterized by being arranged on the conspicuous side.

According to the gaming machine AB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB1, before the game ball that entered the path configuring means flows down the predetermined portion, by reducing the attention force in the second predetermined portion, it flows down the predetermined portion. It is possible to emphasize the attention of the game ball when playing.

A gaming machine AB3, in the gaming machine AB1 or AB2, characterized in that the predetermined portion comprises sections in which game balls flow at different velocities.

According to the game machine AB3, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB1 or AB2, the effect of attracting the player's line of sight can be improved compared to the case where there is no difference in the flow speed of the game balls.

The game machine AB3 is characterized in that the second flow speed of the game ball flowing down the second predetermined portion is faster than the first flow speed of the game ball flowing down the predetermined portion. Gaming machine AB4.

According to the gaming machine AB4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AB3, it is possible to shorten the period until the game ball entering the path forming means reaches the predetermined portion.

A gaming machine AB5 in any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB4, wherein the predetermined portion includes a section in which the game ball is displaced at different speeds when viewed from a predetermined direction.

According to the game machine AB5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB4, regardless of the actual flow speed of the game ball, a section in which the apparent displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction is different. Therefore, by reducing the displacement speed of the game ball when viewed in a predetermined direction at any predetermined location, the player's line of sight can be easily focused on the predetermined location and the player's eyes can be diverted from other portions. .

It should be noted that the manner in which the displacement speed of the apparent game ball is varied is not limited at all. For example, the case of displacement on a straight line arranged on a plane perpendicular to the front-rear direction in a front view may be different from the case of displacement on a straight line having a front-back direction component. The difference may be in the case of curvilinear or meandering displacement, or other differences.

In any one of the game machines AB1 to AB5, an introducing means configured to allow game balls to be introduced into the path configuring means is provided, and the predetermined portion is arranged outside the introducing means when viewed from a predetermined direction. Characterized game machine AB6.

According to the game machine AB6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB5, the visibility of the introduction means can be ensured. Therefore, it is possible to ensure both the visibility of the introducing means and the improvement of the attention of the game ball which is highly likely to pass through the passing means.

Any one of the game machines AB1 to AB6 is characterized by comprising an avoidance means configured so that the game ball on the front side of the path construction means flows down to avoid the line of sight directed to the passed means or the predetermined part. Gaming machine AB7.

According to the gaming machine AB7, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines AB1 to AB6, the game ball is configured to flow down on the front side of the path configuring means, and the line of sight of the downflow path of the game ball directed to the passing means. Since the avoidance means is provided for avoiding the above, it is possible to ensure both the size of the game area and the visibility of the game ball toward the means to be passed.

It should be noted that the manner in which the game ball is flowed under the influence of the avoidance means is not limited at all. For example, the game ball may flow down while avoiding the front position of the means to be passed, or may flow down while avoiding the straight line connecting the means to be passed and the position of the player's eyes, or the game ball may flow toward the means to be passed. With the last position that the player can see as a reference, the ball may flow down avoiding the front position of that position, or it may flow down avoiding the straight line connecting the above-mentioned final position and the position of the player's eyes. Good, or something else.

In the gaming machine AB7, the path configuration means includes acceptance state changing means configured to be capable of changing between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received, and the receiving state changing means is a gaming machine AB8, characterized in that, in the state change from the receiving state to the non-receiving state, a game ball that has reached the receiving state changing means in the receiving state can be guided to the side of the path forming means. .

According to the game machine AB8, in addition to the effect of the game machine AB7, the game ball that flows down after reaching the receiving state changing means so as to be bridged can be prevented from blocking the line of sight directed to the passed means. can be done.

The gaming machine AB7 or AB8 is provided with partitioning means disposed above the passing means in a front view and partitioning a game area, and the partitioning means is configured to allow game balls to flow down the left and right outer sides. Characterized game machine AB9.

According to the game machine AB9, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB7 or AB8, the partitioning means can prevent the game ball from flowing down the front position of the means to be passed, so that the field of view toward the means to be passed can be improved. can be easily secured.

In addition, as a mode of a division means, it is not limited at all. For example, it may be a plate-like portion that constitutes a flow-down surface of a game ball, or it may be a ball entrance constituting means that allows a game ball to enter. Further, the dividing means may be a means having a fixed shape (appearance) or a means having a variable shape (appearance).

In the gaming machine AB9, the path configuring means includes a receiving state changing means capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the falling game balls cannot be received. The game machine AB10 is characterized in that the portion on the side of the state changing means is configured to easily guide a game ball to the side of the receiving state changing means.

According to the game machine AB10, in addition to the effects of the game machine AB9, it is possible to configure such that game balls in the process of being received by the receiving state changing means are pushed into the receiving state changing means by the dividing means. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the game ball slipping sideways while being received deviates from the receiving state changing means and falls on the front side of the passed means.

For example, as the receiving state changing means, a special prize winning device having an opening and closing plate that tilts and displaces on a lateral axis is assumed, and as the partitioning means, the first prize winning port arranged above the special prize winning port of the special prize winning device is assumed. . A game ball that reaches the special winning slot just before the opening/closing plate closes is often sandwiched between the rotating tip of the opening/closing plate and the edge of the opening covered by the opening/closing plate, and the formation direction of the edge ( sideways in the direction of the rotation axis of the opening/closing plate).

Since the game ball after skidding can reach any position in the formation range of the turning tip of the opening/closing plate, when at least a part of the opening/closing plate is arranged above the means to be passed, the game ball skids. There is a possibility that the subsequent game ball will pass the front position of the means to be passed after falling to the front side, and the game ball after skidding should not be dropped to the front side.

When it is not possible to prevent the game ball from falling to the front side after skidding, it is necessary to arrange the opening/closing plate so as to avoid the position of the passing means in the front view, so that the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate is reduced. become.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AB10, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball from falling to the front side of the opening/closing plate after skidding, thereby improving the degree of freedom in designing the opening/closing plate.

In any one of the game machines AB7 to AB10, the game balls flowing down the path constructing means and the game balls flowing down the front side of the path constructing means are configured to flow down in a similar manner. Gaming machine AB11.

According to the game machine AB11, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB7 to AB10, the game ball that may flow down the path configuration means and pass through the means to be passed, and the front side of the path configuration means By making it difficult to distinguish game balls that do not pass through the passing means, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish the number of game balls that flow down the path forming means.

In other words, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the game balls flowing down near the path construction means whether the game balls are likely to enter the path construction means or difficult to enter.

The game machine AB12 is characterized in that in any one of the game machines AB1 to AB11, the game machine AB12 is characterized by comprising light emitting means for emitting light from the rear side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion.

According to the game machine AB12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AB1 to AB11, the front side of the ball flowing down the predetermined portion is reflected by light, and it is possible to easily avoid the ball becoming difficult to see.

<Points for securing the length of the path to the V-door while saving space>
Path construction means configured to allow game balls to flow down; Passed means configured to allow game balls flowing down the path construction means to pass through; and a first state in which game balls can flow down to the passed means. state switching means configured to be switchable between the first state and a second state different from the first state, wherein the path configuration means includes delay means for delaying the vertical displacement of the game ball, and the delay means A game machine AC1 is characterized in that it is configured so that a game ball can flow down toward the passing means.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a distributing part 75 configured to be movable left and right is arranged in a flow-down path of a game ball that enters the second big prize hole 12, and the distributing part 75 arranges the game ball. There is a game machine that is configured to be able to change the flow direction of (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-155538). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the short-term operation of the distribution unit 75 is essential to prevent erroneous winning in the specific area 73 and the ball being caught by the distribution unit 75. In some cases, the behavior of the segment 75 is felt as distrust, and the game cannot be continued without anxiety.

As an example of means for solving this problem, it is assumed that the length of the flow path from the second big prize opening 12 to the distribution section 75 is lengthened. For example, by changing the arrangement of the distribution part 75 from directly below the second big winning hole 12 to a position near the left and right central part of the game area (near the first big winning hole 10), from the second big winning hole 12 It is possible to secure a long channel length up to the distribution section 75 . As a result, it is considered that the possibility of erroneous winning in the specific area 73 can be reduced.

On the other hand, when this means is executed, it becomes necessary to secure the visibility of the game ball flowing-down path over a wide range from the second big winning hole 12 to the first big winning hole 10, and the game area can be freely designed within this range. degree is limited. In other words, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the game area is restricted in a wide range in order to avoid erroneous winning in the specific area 73 .

In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of avoiding erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

On the other hand, according to the game machine AC1, since the path construction means is provided with the predetermined delay means, even when the vertical length of the path construction means in the front view is shortened to save space, the path construction means can be It is possible to secure a long time that elapses until the game ball hit passes through the means to be passed.

Therefore, the timing at which it is necessary to operate the state switching means in order to switch whether or not the game ball enters the passing means can be set to a predetermined time after the game ball enters the path forming means. False wins can be avoided without operating for a short period of time an opening/closing device for switching whether or not a ball can enter a constituent means. Therefore, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression that the opening/closing means is operating hastily. As a result, it is possible to avoid erroneous entry of a game ball while maintaining a high degree of freedom in designing the game area.

Note that the form of the delay means is not limited at all. For example, there may be a mode in which a convex portion for deceleration is configured in the flow-down path, or a mode in which a predetermined flow-down path for causing the game ball to flow down along the flow-down path having a forward-backward direction component may be provided.

In the gaming machine AC1, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and among the predetermined flow-down paths, the flow-down path toward the front side is more likely to flow down than the flow-down path toward the back side. A game machine AC2 characterized in that it is configured so that the acceleration of the game machine AC2 increases.

According to the gaming machine AC2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1, it is possible to secure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down routes, and among the predetermined flow-down routes, the flow-down route toward the front side is compared to the flow-down route that maintains the front-back position and flows down. A game machine AC3 characterized in that it is constructed so that the acceleration of a game ball flowing down is increased.

According to the gaming machine AC3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC1 or AC2, it is possible to secure a longer period of time for the player to visually recognize the game balls flowing on the near side. As a result, it is possible to easily improve the player's attention to the game ball flowing down the predetermined flow path.

It should be noted that the cause of the difference in acceleration of the game ball is not limited at all. For example, the magnitude of the slope of the predetermined flow-down path with respect to the horizontal plane may be used, or the surface shape of the predetermined flow-down path on the game ball side may be designed.

In any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, the delay means has a plurality of predetermined flow-down paths, and the predetermined flow-down paths are arranged in front of the means to be passed when viewed from a predetermined direction. A game machine AC4 characterized in that it is configured to pass through.

According to the game machine AC4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC3, when the game ball is arranged at the front position, visibility in the vicinity of the means to be passed can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to improve attention to the range in the vicinity of the means to be passed.

A game machine AC5 is characterized in that, in the game machine AC4, a plurality of the front positions can be configured.

According to the gaming machine AC5, by arranging the game balls at a plurality of front positions, at least part of the game balls on the back side can be hidden by the game balls on the front side. Since the means to be passed is arranged on the rear side rather than the game balls on the back side, the field of view toward the means to be passed can be blocked by a plurality of game balls, and the visibility of the means to be passed can be reduced. .

In this case, when the ball entry interval of the game ball into the predetermined flow-down path is short, it is possible to construct a state in which the game ball is always placed at one of the front positions, so that the passing means is invisible. It becomes possible.

In any one of game machines AC1 to AC5, game machine AC6 is characterized in that the path configuring means is formed so as to be visually recognized in a swirling manner when viewed from above.

According to the game machine AC6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC5, the vertical width required for arranging the path constructing means of the same length can be shortened.

In addition, since it is not necessary to reduce the thickness of the path wall compared to the case where the folded path is formed, the strength of the path can be improved, and compared to the folded path that is folded back at 180 degrees, the Possibility of clogging of balls or the like can be reduced.

In any one of game machines AC1 to AC6, game machine AC7 is characterized in that the path constructing means comprises a front-rear flow path portion extending in the front-rear direction.

According to the game machine AC7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC6, the left-right width of the route forming means can be suppressed, so that the pair of left-right symmetrical route forming means can be configured with a suppressed left-right width. can be done.

Game machine AC8 is characterized in that, in any one of game machines AC1 to AC7, the passing means is arranged obliquely downward and rearward with respect to the ball receiving portion of the path forming means.

According to the game machine AC8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC7, it is possible to make it easier to fit the passing means and the ball receiving portion of the path forming means within the field of view of the player viewed from the front side. .

In any one of game machines AC1 to AC8, the path configuring means includes first receiving means configured to be able to receive game balls, and means different from the first receiving means and configured to be able to receive game balls. and a second receiving means configured to change the profit obtained by the player depending on the manner in which the game balls are received by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. Machine AC9.

According to the game machine AC9, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines AC1 to AC8, the first receiving means and the second receiving means are configured to be capable of receiving game balls at all times, and the first receiving means and Since the profit obtained by the player changes depending on the receiving mode of the game ball of the second receiving means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball.

It should be noted that the manner of receiving game balls is not limited at all. For example, it may be a mode in which game balls are accepted only by the first receiving means, a mode in which game balls are accepted by being limited to the second receiving means, or a predetermined number of game balls are accepted by the first receiving means and then second receiving means. A mode in which a predetermined number of pieces can be received in the means may be used. Further, it is also possible to adopt a mode in which the frequency of ball entry to each receiving means is different, or a mode in which ball entry positions are different.

In the gaming machine AC9, the change in the profit that the player can obtain depends on whether the game ball is accepted only by one of the first receiving means or the second receiving means, or by the first receiving means and the second receiving means. A game machine AC10 characterized in that it occurs depending on whether a game ball is received in both of the.

According to the gaming machine AC10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC9, it is possible for the player to easily launch the game ball in a predetermined shooting mode by setting the size of the profit that the player can obtain. .

It should be noted that the profit that the player can obtain is not limited at all. For example, it may be the ease of recognizing the flowing game ball, or the profit related to the game obtained by the flowing game ball (payout of the prize ball, winning of the jackpot, change of the game state after the jackpot, The game state may be changed to a normal state (falling down, etc.).

A gaming machine AC11 in the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, wherein the path forming means is bilaterally symmetrical from the first receiving means and the second receiving means to the passed means.

According to the gaming machine AC11, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC9 or AC10, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the player suffers a disadvantage regardless of whether the game ball is mainly shot from the left or right.

In any one of the game machines AC9 to AC11, the path configuring means comprises a receiving state changing means capable of changing the state between a receiving state in which the falling game balls can be received and a non-receiving state in which the flowing game balls cannot be received, The gaming machine AC12 is characterized in that the receiving state changes according to the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state changing state.

According to the game machine AC12, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines AC9 to AC11, the receiving mode changes depending on the shape of the receiving state changing means or the state change mode, so that the player's skill in shooting the game ball is enhanced. It is possible to reduce the influence of the skill level on the profit that the player can obtain.

A gaming machine AC13 characterized in that, in the gaming machine AC12, the mode of state change of said acceptance state changing means is composed of a plurality of types.

According to the gaming machine AC13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine AC12, even when the game ball is shot in a fixed shooting mode, the receiving mode of the game ball to the first receiving means and the second receiving means can be changed. As a result, it is possible to adjust the profit that the player can obtain from the mode of state change of the acceptance state changing means.

<Points regarding the opening and closing member that moves parallel to the flowing direction of the sphere>
a path constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball that has flowed down the path configuring means to pass through; an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced into the path configuring means; a state switching means configured to be able to change the state between a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the path configuration means, and a state switching means configured such that the direction of displacement caused by the state change is the direction in which the game ball flows down. The gaming machine XA1 is characterized by being configured along the direction.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the downward direction of the game ball and the opening/closing direction of the opening/closing plate of the big winning part 300 are substantially perpendicular, and the opening/closing operation is completed without being involved in the rolling of the game ball. Therefore, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in the role of the opening/closing plate (state switching means).

On the other hand, according to the game machine XA1, since the direction of displacement of the state switching means is configured to be along the flowing direction of the game ball, the state can be changed while the game ball is close to or in contact with the state switching means. By causing the displacement of the switching means, it is possible to affect to change the rolling mode of the game ball. This makes it possible to improve the role of the state switching means.

For example, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, by sliding the state switching means to the right while the game ball is on top, Since a rotating load is applied, the game ball can be accelerated.

Conversely, when the game ball is flowing down to the left, the state switching means is slid to the left while the game ball is on top of it, thereby rolling and rotating the game ball. Since a load for rotating in the opposite direction is applied, the rotation of the game ball can be delayed.

Further, when the state switching means slides so as to skim the lower end of the rolling game ball, a load having not only the rolling direction of the game ball but also a component in the direction orthogonal to the rolling direction is applied to the game ball. Therefore, it is possible to cause a complicated and irregular change in the flow of the game ball.

Due to the effect on the flow of the game ball, the flow of the ball on the state switching means can be changed variously during the opening and closing operation of the state switching means, so that the player who visually recognizes the game ball gets bored. You can concentrate on the game without worrying about it.

Also, the positional relationship between the opening/closing operation of the state switching means and the game ball is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged to rub against the side of the game ball, or may be arranged to collide against the game ball in the flowing direction.

In the state switching means displaced in a manner of colliding with the game ball, the direction of the closing operation is not limited at all. For example, the closing operation may be performed in the direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball so that the game ball can be bounced back, or the closing operation may be performed in the forward direction of the flowing direction of the game ball, and the subsequent introduction of the game ball. can be regulated with less resistance.

In the game machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means can be executed while the state switching means and the game ball are in contact with each other.

According to the gaming machine XA2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XA1, the state change of the state switching means can cause the game ball to rotate.

In the game machine XA1 or XA2, the game machine XA3 is characterized in that the state switching means comprises change means for changing the direction of the load in a direction intersecting with the direction of displacement.

According to the game machine XA3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XA1 or XA2, the load applied from the game ball during the displacement of the state switching means can be released, and the load applied to the state switching means can be reduced. .

<Points regarding the opening/closing member that allows the ball to flow in the first direction when open and in the second direction when closed>
A path constructing means configured to allow the game ball to flow down; a passed means configured to allow the game ball flowing down the path configuring means to pass through; an introduction state in which the game ball can be introduced to the passed means; a state switching means configured to be able to change between a non-introduction state in which a game ball cannot be introduced into the passing means and a non-introduction state, wherein the state switching means can guide the game ball in the first direction in the introduction state. A game machine XB1 characterized in that it is configured so as to be able to guide a game ball in the second direction in the non-introduction state.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a big winning component 300 capable of forming a plurality of types of flow-down paths for game balls toward ball detection holes 431 (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185021). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the lower movable body 371 guides the game ball to the right when it protrudes forward, but when it retracts to the rear, it does not come into contact with the game ball and falls freely. I will not guide you. In other words, the lower movable body 371 does not affect the flow of the game ball. Therefore, in the state of retreating to the rear side, it is necessary to prepare a portion (frame portion, etc.) that guides the downflow of the game ball other than the lower movable body 371. There is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of reducing the number of components (members).

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine XB1, the state switching means is configured to guide the game ball in different directions depending on whether it is in the introduced state or the non-introduced state. Since members can be eliminated, the number of required configurations (members) can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to diversify the flow direction of game balls in a limited space.

Note that the relationship between the first direction and the second direction is not limited at all. For example, the angle between directions may be an acute angle, a right angle, or an obtuse angle. For example, in the case of a right angle, the first direction may be set downward and the second direction may be set laterally with respect to the game ball flowing down along the front-rear direction. In this case, when viewed from the front, only a slight displacement of the game ball is recognized before being guided by the state switching means, while maximizing the difference in the direction after the guidance by the state switching means is started. can be achieved.

The arrangement of the guiding portion that causes the guiding action of the state switching means is not limited at all. For example, the guide portion may be arranged in a movable member provided in the state switching means, or the guide portion may be arranged in a non-movable portion around the state switching means, and the game ball is moved to the guide portion by the operation of the movable member. It may be configured such that it can be switched to a state of close proximity or easy contact.

When the guide part is arranged on the movable member, it is designed not only to provide guidance after the state switching between the introduced state and the non-introduced state is completed, but also to consider the influence on the game ball during the state switching operation. preferably.

For example, when the state switching means is provided with a movable member that is displaced in a direction opposite to the flowing direction of the game ball, a surface inclined to the flowing direction (plane, curved surface, etc.) is used rather than providing a planar wall portion orthogonal to the flowing direction. ), it is possible to easily avoid the situation where the load generated when the movable member collides with the game ball increases in the direction in which the game ball flows backward. This makes it easier to avoid backflow of game balls.

In the game machine XB1, the state change of the state switching means is caused by displacement in a third direction, and the third direction is orthogonal to the first direction and the second direction. .

According to the gaming machine XB2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine XB1, it is possible to reduce the possibility of malfunction of the state switching means caused by the load given by the guided game balls.

In the gaming machine XB1 or XB2, the path construction means includes a pair of left and right paths, the state switching means includes a pair of guide portions capable of receiving game balls from the pair of left and right paths, respectively, and the pair of guides 4. A gaming machine XB3, wherein the first direction and the second direction are configured symmetrically in the part.

According to the game machine XB3, in addition to the effects of the game machine XB1 or XB2, it is possible to complicate the path along which game balls flow. In addition, since the first direction and the second direction of the pair of guide portions are symmetrical, the displacement received by the state switching means due to the load received by the pair of guide portions from the game ball is symmetrical. be able to.

As a result, for example, when substantially equal numbers of game balls enter a pair of left and right paths, it is possible to easily uniform the arrangement of the state switching means according to the load received by the guide portion from the game balls.

The gaming machine XB4 in the gaming machine XB3 is characterized in that the state switching means comprises an overhanging portion formed so as to overhang in a direction crossing the third direction.

According to the game machine XB4, in addition to the effects of the game machine XB3, the projecting portion can reduce the contact area with other members, and the displacement resistance of the state switching means can be reduced.

In the gaming machine XB3 or XB4, a contact means configured to be able to contact in the state of introduction or non-introduction of the state switching means is provided, and contact with the contact means moves the state switching means in the left-right direction. A gaming machine XB5 characterized by being configured to be able to correct displacement.

According to the game machine XB5, in addition to the effects of the game machine XB3 or XB4, the load from the game ball can be received from either the left or right direction, so that the displacement of the state switching means, which tends to be disorderly, can be reduced to the contact state. It can be returned to orderly by the action of the means.

<Separation, reversal, combination, and rotation are a series of actions>
Displacement means configured to be displaceable such that the visually recognized surface is changed, the displacement means comprises a first displacement member and a second displacement member, and in a predetermined form of displacement, the first displacement A game machine D1 characterized in that the member and the second displacement member are configured to be relatively displaced.

Among game machines such as pachinko machines, there is a game machine configured such that a rotating base 214 disposed at the tip of a base arm 220 can be rotated multiple times (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116782). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, although the rotation base 214 is rotationally displaced, the surface seen by the player is the same.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, since the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is configured to be changeable along with the displacement, it is possible to maintain attention to the displacement means.

Moreover, since the appearance of the displacement means can be changed by relatively displacing the first displacement member and the second displacement member, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

In the gaming machine D1, the displacement in the predetermined mode includes a first displacement in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are moved toward and away from each other with reference to a collective portion in which the first displacement member and the second displacement member are collectively arranged; A gaming machine D2 characterized by comprising at least a second displacement member in which a second displacement member rotates with respect to the collecting portion.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, it is possible to facilitate dynamic relative movement between the first displacement member and the second displacement member. That is, if only the first displacement is used as the displacement with respect to the gathering portion, the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member at the end portion where the distance from the gathering portion is the shortest or the longest is likely to be reduced. The 1st displacement member and the 2nd displacement member may appear to stop and the performance effect may be lowered, but by mixing the 2nd displacement, it is possible to generate displacement in the rotational direction even at the terminal end. Therefore, the production effect can be improved.

In the game machine D1 or D2, the game machine D3 is characterized in that the displacement in the predetermined mode includes at least a third displacement in which the visually recognized surface of the displacement means is reversed.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1 or D2, by reversing the surface visually recognized by the third displacement, the decoration visually recognized by the player before and after the third displacement is significantly different. can let

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be fixable by adsorption or adhesion, and the load associated with the fixation is the first displacement member and the second displacement member. A gaming machine D4 characterized by acting in a direction that limits displacement of a member.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the load related to fixing acts in a direction that limits the displacement of the first displacement member and the second displacement member, so the load related to fixing , the displacements of the first displacement member and the second displacement member can be designed.

For example, in the case of transmission of driving force by a gear, if deformation of the shape is not taken into account, mechanical displacement occurs, but if the load related to fixing is taken into account, the elastic change of the member due to the load becomes apparent. By doing so, it is possible to cause a delay in the displacement timing of the member.

Also, the degree of fixation may be different depending on the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member.

In this case, since the effect of fixation differs depending on the side viewed by the player, the strength of the fixation on the side viewed by the player can be set.

As a result, for example, with respect to the reversed surfaces of the same displacement means, one surface is tightly united to make it easier to see as one, and the other surface is loosely united to make it easier to see in a state where relative displacement is easy to occur. can be done.

Further, for example, by configuring the degree of adsorption of the first displacement member and the degree of attraction of the second displacement member to differ for each fixed position, it is possible to constitute a state in which the degree of fixation of the first displacement member and the degree of fixation of the second displacement member differ. can.

In addition, the aspect which enables adsorption|suction is not limited at all. For example, it may be adhered with an adhesive tape, or may utilize the attractive force between a magnet and a metal part. Further, the first reversing member and the second reversing member may be designed so as to use fixing screws, screws, or the like, for example, as the metal portion to be attracted to the magnet.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement means is configured to be displaceable in forward and reverse directions, and in a predetermined state, displaces in the forward direction in the first displacement mode and in the reverse direction in the first displacement mode. A game machine D5 characterized in that it is displaced in a second displacement mode different from the displacement mode, wherein the second displacement mode is configured to be displaced in the first displacement mode after being displaced in a predetermined mode.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D4, the displacement mode of the displacement means is configured to be different in the forward and reverse directions, and the second displacement mode is before the first displacement mode. Since it is configured as a displacement mode to which the predetermined mode is added, it is possible to reduce the amount of displacement required for the displacement means when retracting the displacement means. As a result, it is possible to reduce the attention to the displacing means at the time of retraction, so that it is possible to relatively increase the attention to the displacing means displaced at the performance position.

In the conventional machine, since the mode of rotation is the same in the forward and reverse directions, after the performance position (the position on the front side of the liquid crystal display area) is projected, it is necessary to retreat to the retracted position (outside the liquid crystal display area). It had to rotate multiple times again in the opposite direction. In this case, there is a possibility that the line of sight tends to be drawn to the member retreating from the rendering position, which may be regarded as a problem.

Note that the displacement mode is not limited at all. For example, rotational displacement or linear displacement may be used. Further, the displacement may be on a plane, across a plurality of planes, or three-dimensional.

In the game machine D5, the game machine D6 is characterized in that the displacement means comprises release means configured to release the load transmission when the motion resistance becomes greater than a predetermined amount.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the displacement mode of the displacement means can be changed depending on the magnitude of the movement resistance of the internal configuration of the displacement means.

In any one of game machines D1 to D6, light emitting means for irradiating light toward the displacement means is provided, the displacement means is provided with the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the The game machine D7 is characterized in that the second displacement member is configured to be able to change the visual recognition state of the light from the light emitting means depending on whether the visually recognized surface is one side or the other side.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the appearance of the displacement means with respect to the light from the light emitting means corresponds to the visually recognized surfaces of the first displacement member and the second displacement member. can be changed by

For example, a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as emitting light individually, and a case where the first displacement member and the second displacement member are visually recognized as integrally emitting light. can be changed with

Any one of the game machines D1 to D7 is provided with detection means for detecting the disposition of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be able to detect whether or not the displacement of the displacement means is in an allowable state. Characterized game machine D8.

According to the game machine D8, in any one of the game machines D1 to D7, the detection means can detect the state in which the displacement of the displacement means is permissible. can be avoided.

Further, since the displacement means can be displaced while detecting the displaceable section of the displacement means by the detection means, the displacement mode including enlargement/reduction is performed after displacing from the effect position toward the retracted position to some extent. By controlling the displacement from the performance position to the retracted position, it is possible to suppress an increase in attention to the displacement means compared to the case of displacing in a displacement mode including enlargement and reduction from the start of the displacement. .

Any one of the game machines D1 to D7 is provided with detection means for detecting the state of the displacement means, and the detection means is configured to be capable of detecting two or more types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. Game machine D9 to play.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effects of the game machines D1 to D7, it is possible to reduce the number of detection means. Various modes are exemplified as the types of numerical values for the displacement of the displacement means. For example, it may be a numerical value regarding the arrangement or posture of each of the different movable members, or a numerical value related to the change in the motion mode when the motion mode changes at a predetermined timing.

Moreover, the arrangement of the detection means is not limited at all. For example, by arranging the detection means on the displacement base end side of the displacement means, it is easy to configure a structure for detecting the arrangement and attitude of the second displacement means connected to the displacement tip side of the displacement means.

In any one of game machines D1 to D9, the displacement means comprises the first displacement member and the second displacement member, and the first displacement member and the second displacement member have one side facing the player side. When the first displacement member and the second displacement member are configured to be capable of reversing between a facing posture and a facing posture on the other side, the first displacing member and the second displacing member turn one face toward the player side. While the displacement member and the second displacement member are distinguishable, when the other side of the first displacement member and the second displacement member faces the player side, the first displacement member and the second displacement member A gaming machine D10 characterized in that it is configured such that the .

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D1 to D9, the reversal operation is performed regardless of the state of the first displacement member and the second displacement member when one side is directed toward the player side. It is possible to keep the player's expectation high for the occurrence of .

<Points for changing easily visible surfaces by arranging displacing means having a plurality of visible surfaces>
Displacement means comprising a first visible surface and a second visible surface configured to be visible is provided, and the displacement means has a first state in which the first visible surface is easily visible, and the A gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable between a second state in which the second visible surface is easily visible.

Among gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine that includes a reversible reversing operation unit 71 and is configured to change the appearance visually recognized by the player by changing the visually recognized surface (for example, , see JP-A-2016-153095). However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the reversal of the reversing operation unit 71 is performed in a fixed position, so the player's line of sight cannot be changed by changing the viewed surface. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement in terms of efficiently changing the line of sight of the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, the displacing means can switch between a state in which the first visible surface is easy to see and a state in which the second visible surface is easy to see. The line of sight of the player who wants to see the visible surface or the second visible surface can be changed in a manner along the route of the change in the arrangement of the displacement means.

The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that, in the gaming machine E1, an opening is provided for opening the displacement means so that the displacement means can be visually recognized, and the displacement means is configured so that the opening side is easily visible.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, a player who visually recognizes the inner side through the opening can easily visually recognize the first visible surface or the second visible surface of the displacement means.

A gaming machine E3 characterized in that, in the gaming machine E2, the displacing means is arranged closer to the rear side when it is arranged on the edge side of the opening than when it is arranged on the center side of the opening. .

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E2, when the displacement means is arranged on the central side of the open portion, the displacement means can be visually recognized on the front side, and the displacement means can be seen on the edge side of the open portion. The movement of the line of sight when looking at the displacing means when arranged can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to achieve both visibility of the displacement means and suppression of fatigue of the player who follows the displacement means with his/her eyes.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the displacement means includes a plurality of sets of the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and one set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface. The gaming machine E4 is characterized in that the first visible surface and the second visible surface of the other set are configured to be difficult to visually recognize when the surfaces are visible.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E3, different characters and figures are applied to the first visible surface and the second visible surface for each set, thereby displacing the displacement means. To allow a player who visually recognizes different characters and figures to be visually recognized, and to make it difficult to visually recognize a set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface that are not intended to be visually recognized. , it is possible to avoid the appearance of the displacing means from becoming unsightly.

For example, in the first set, characters and figures indicating that the lottery result is a big win and the expectation is low are displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, and in the second set, the lottery result is displayed. is displayed on the first visible surface and the second visible surface, the expectation of a big win is expressed through the displacement means regardless of the arrangement of the displacement means. You can check the height. In this case, even after the displacement means has retreated from the front side of the display area of the display device, the display of the expectation of the big win by the displacement means can be maintained. Also, it is possible to continue visually recognizing the display of the expectation of the big win.

In addition, the aspect which comprises hard to visually recognize is not limited at all. For example, it may be arranged on a side different from the player's side (rear side, left and right outer side, etc.), or it may be structured so as to reduce visibility by shielding with shielding means.

In the game machine E4, the operation of switching the set of the first visible surface and the second visible surface to be visually recognized is performed so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during operation. A gaming machine E5 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E5, in the gaming machine E4, the first visible surface displayed to the player side during the operation of switching the set of the visible first visible surface and the second visible surface (before confirmation) and the second set of visible surfaces can be easily avoided from being predicted. Thereby, attention to the displacement means can be improved.

It should be noted that there is no limitation on the aspect configured so that the first visible surface and the second visible surface are difficult to recognize during the switching operation described above. For example, the displacement means may be rotated at high speed to make it difficult to recognize, or a part of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and other parts may be configured to be detachable from each other. It may be difficult to recognize by operating the part and other parts separately, or it may be difficult to recognize by creating a relatively dark part by setting the brightness of the light emitting means.

In this case, the mode of the separated state is not limited at all. For example, during the switching operation described above, only one of the first visible surface (second visible surface) and the other portion is visible, and the other portion is turned toward the back so that it is not visible. Alternatively, it may be configured to operate in such a state that some of them and other portions can be visually recognized at the same time, but are visually recognized in a displaced arrangement.

The gaming machine E5 is characterized by comprising an opening for opening the displacement means to be visible, and wherein the switching operation is performed in a state in which the displacement means is arranged on the center side of the opening. Gaming machine E6.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5, it is possible to make it easier for the player to visually recognize the switching action, and to improve the attention to the switching action.

In the game machine E5 or E6, one of the part of the first visible face and the other part faces the front side and the other faces the side different from the front side during the switching operation. Gaming machine E7 to play.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E5 or E6, by making a part of the first visible surface visible during operation and making the whole invisible, the first visible surface is made visible during operation. Possible faces can be made difficult to perceive.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E7, a second displacement means configured to be able to block at least part of a line of sight to the second visible surface is provided, and the displacement means is configured to be capable of blocking at least a part of the line of sight to the second visible surface, and the displacement means, together with the second displacement means, A gaming machine E8 characterized in that it is configured to be switchable to a third state for making the first visible side visible.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines E1 to E7, by configuring at least a part of the second visible surface by the second displacement means to make it difficult to see, the effect position of the displacement means can be changed. Design freedom can be improved.

In any one of the game machines E1 to E8, the displacement means is configured to change a surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction between a first visible surface and a second visible surface in accordance with the displacement. A gaming machine E9 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine E9, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines E1 to E8, the surface visually recognized in a predetermined direction changes between the first visible surface and the second visible surface. It is possible to arbitrarily change the easily visible surface without depending on the amount of change in the line of sight of the person.

A game machine E10 characterized in that, in the game machine E9, the attitude of the displacement means changes between the first state and the second state.

According to the gaming machine E10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E9, the difference between the appearance of the displacement means in the first state and the appearance of the displacement means in the second state can be increased by changing the attitude of the displacement means. can.

In the gaming machine E9 or E10, an auxiliary means configured to be arranged close to the displacement means is provided, the displacement means is arranged close to the auxiliary means in the first state, and the displacement means is arranged in the second state. is arranged apart from the auxiliary means.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effects of the game machine E9 or E10, a state in which the auxiliary means is arranged close to the displacement means and visually recognized integrally, and a state in which the auxiliary means and the displacement means are separated and visually recognized are available. It is possible to configure a plurality of impressions that the displacing means gives to the player.

In addition, the aspect of an auxiliary means is not limited at all. For example, it may be means whose arrangement is fixed, or movable means.

In the game machine E11, the auxiliary means can switch between a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized integrally with the displacement means and a state in which the auxiliary means is visually recognized separately from the displacement means. .

According to the game machine E12, in addition to the effects of the game machine E11, it is possible to switch whether the displacement means and the auxiliary means are visually recognized integrally or separately, so that there is a variation in the visible mode with respect to the number of members. can be increased.

<Points where the ratio of the amount of displacement of the displacing means and the amount of displacement of the arranging means at the same point in time differs between sections>
Displacing means configured to be displaceable, disposing means for disposing the first portion on the displacing means, and supporting means for supporting the second portion of the disposing means, the supporting means A game machine F1, characterized in that the arrangement of said second portion with reference to said first portion during displacement of said displacement means can be controlled.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a base arm 220 that can be tilted and displaced, a rotating accessory 211 rotatably attached to the tilting tip side of the base arm 220, and the rotating accessory 211 are rotated. and a driving motor 222 that generates a driving force for the rotation of the base arm 220, and the rotation accessory 211 can be rotated independently of the displacement of the base arm 220. (see Gazette). However, in the above-described conventional game machine, the rotating accessory 211 tends to wobble at the tip of the base arm 220, and if the rotating accessory 211 is rotated while the base arm 220 is being tilted and displaced, there is a possibility that the mechanism will malfunction. As a result, since it is assumed that the rotational movement of the rotational accessory 211 is performed while the base arm 220 is stopped, the degree of freedom of displacement is low.

That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of increasing the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the displaceable portion.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the arrangement means is supported by the displacement means and the support means at least at two points, and the two support points are relatively displaced during the displacement of the displacement means. Since the supporting means can control the placement of the second portion with respect to the first portion, the disposing means can be displaced while the displacing means is being displaced while stably supporting the disposing means. can be done. Thereby, the degree of freedom in designing the displacement of the disposing means (displaceable portion) can be increased.

In addition, the aspect of a support means is not limited at all. For example, it may be supported by a guide groove formed in a fixed base means so as to restrict its displacement, or may be supported by being connected to a displaceable second displacement means. Control by the support means is not limited to electronic control, but includes mechanical control such as regulating (guiding) the displacement of the second portion by the wall.

In the game machine F1, the displacement means is configured to be able to displace the first section and the second section, and the support means displaces the second section when the displacement means displaces the first section. and a second range supporting the second portion when the displacement means displaces the second section, wherein the second portion is displaced in the first range A game machine F2 characterized in that the direction is different from the direction in which the second portion is displaced in the second range.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the disposing means can be varied, Since it is configured to allow a change in the direction of displacement of the second portion, even if the direction of displacement of the second portion changes irregularly, the displacement of the disposing means can be smoothed.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the game machine F3 is characterized in that the support means comprises a restricting portion for restricting the displacement of the second portion.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effects of the game machine F1 or F2, it is possible to limit the displacement of the second portion at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range. When displacing the portion from the large displacement side to the small displacement side, the second portion can be easily stopped at the boundary position (restriction portion) between the first range and the second range.

The form of the load required for the displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion is not limited at all. For example, a mode in which the second portion is pulled or a mode in which the second portion is pushed may be used.

It should be noted that the mode of the restricting section is not limited at all. For example, it may be configured to increase or decrease the displacement resistance of the second portion, or it may be configured to switch the direction of displacement of the second portion.

In the gaming machine F2 or F3, the first section is arranged closer to the terminal end of the displacement range of the displacement means than the second section, and the arrangement means is based on the displacement means in the second section. is smaller than the relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means in the first section.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effects of the game machine F2 or F3, it is possible to form a section in which the amount of relative displacement of the arrangement means with respect to the displacement means becomes small at the mid-displacement position of the displacement means. Therefore, in addition to the displacement end position of the displacing means, it is possible to provide a position where the displacing means and the arranging means can be easily visually recognized as an integral unit. Easy position can be increased.

A gaming machine F5 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines F1 to F4, the displacement speed (ratio) of the second portion with respect to the displacement speed of the first portion is variable.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F4, even when the displacement speed of the displacement means is constant, the displacement speed of the second part of the disposing means on the side of the support means can be changed, it is possible to construct an action presentation in which the displacement speed of the disposing means is made variable by simple drive control (constant speed drive) of the drive means.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the game machine F6 is characterized in that the support means is configured to reduce the displacement velocity of the second portion at the end of displacement.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F5, it is possible to prevent the second portion from rebounding, and it is possible to easily stop the arrangement means early at the end of the displacement.

Note that the technique for preventing the second portion from rebounding is not limited at all. For example, a method of reducing the displacement speed of the second portion at the end of the displacement (for example, the amount of displacement of the second portion when the first portion is displaced by a predetermined unit length) may be used. It is also possible to restrict the displacement of the second portion by designing a wall in the displacement direction of the second portion while the first portion is stationary.

Further, the method is not limited to reducing the amount of displacement of the second portion, and the method of increasing the displacement resistance of the second portion may be employed. For example, a magnetic force or the like may be applied at the end of the displacement of the second portion to improve the displacement resistance of the second portion, or an urging force such as a coil spring may be used to improve the displacement resistance. good.

In the gaming machine F6, the support means is configured to provide a displacement trajectory of the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion, and a displacement locus of the second portion when the first portion stops at the end of the displacement. A game machine F7 characterized in that the displacement trajectory of the displacement is configured to intersect.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F6, the support means having the function of guiding the displacement of the second portion accompanying the displacement of the first portion allows the first portion to stop. 2 can reduce the return displacement (bounce).

In any one of the game machines F1 to F7, supported means displaceably supported by the disposing means is provided, and the supported means is adapted to a relative displacement amount of the disposing means with respect to the displacing means. A game machine F8 characterized in that it is configured to be displaced by a corresponding displacement amount.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines F1 to F7, a complicated performance can be executed by the supported means displaced together with the arrangement means.

The mode of displacement of the supported means is not limited at all. For example, the arranging means may be displaced so as to run parallel to the arranging means on a predetermined plane on which the arranging means is displaced. , sliding displacement on a predetermined plane) may be different (for example, rotational displacement about a predetermined axis).

It should be noted that the mode of displacement of the arranging means related to the amount of displacement of the arranging means is not limited at all. For example, it may be a posture change, or a displacement while maintaining the posture.

In the game machine F8, while the first portion is displaced in a predetermined direction, the second portion includes a section capable of reciprocating displacement in a direction intersecting the displacement trajectory of the first portion. Amusement machine F9.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F8, while the first portion is being displaced, the amount of relative displacement of the second portion with respect to the first portion returns and changes (for example, after increasing Therefore, it is possible to realize a displacement mode in which the amount of displacement of the supported means is increased while the arrangement of the second portion is maintained.

In the game machine F8 or F9, the displacement speed of the (relative) rotation of the supported means with respect to the arrangement means is configured to be equal to the displacement speed of the displacement means. F10.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effects of the game machine F8 or F9, the displacement mode of the supported means can be made equivalent to the displacement means with the disposing means interposed therebetween. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that the supported means is being displaced by its own driving means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the disposing means includes attitude changing means for changing the attitude so as to switch the side facing the player between the first side and the second side according to the displacement of the disposing means. A game characterized in that the posture changing means is configured so that the first face or the second face faces the player side in a state where the second portion is arranged at the end of displacement. Machine F11.

According to the gaming machine F11, in addition to the effect of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F10, the first or second surface of the attitude changing means is directed toward the player side, so that the second portion reaches the end of the displacement. Since the player can grasp the arrival, it is possible to comprehend the final stage of the performance action by the displacement means.

In any one of the gaming machines F1 to F11, an electrical wiring is configured to be inserted through the second portion and into the disposing means, and the electrical wiring is disposed inside and fixed to the second portion. locating means, said locating means comprising an opening through which said electrical wire can pass, said opening being displaceable to avoid contact of said electrical wire with a peripheral portion formed therearound; A gaming machine F12 characterized by:

According to the game machine F12, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines F1 to F11, it is possible to avoid contact of the electric wiring with the surrounding portion.

The arranging means may be configured as a means for uniting the plurality of members when the second portion is composed of a plurality of members, or may be configured as a means for combining the plurality of members when the second portion is provided with a separate member. It may be configured as means for preventing the separate member from falling off from the second portion.

<Characteristic group A> (Production stock)
Determination means capable of executing determination, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means, and displaying a specific determination result on the display means In a gaming machine having privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information of is displayed, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition a determining means capable of deciding to execute the production by the production executing means; a regulating means capable of regulating execution of a new production; A storage means capable of storing information corresponding to execution of the performance determined by the determination means during a period in which the performance of the performance is restricted, and information stored in the storage means when a specific condition is satisfied. and an effect control means capable of executing an effect corresponding to the effect execution means by the effect execution means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, it has been proposed that a notice effect that suggests the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Patent Document: JP-A 2013-090780). However, there is a problem that if a plurality of suggestive effects are executed in duplicate, a notice effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed, and the effect of the effect is reduced. There has been a demand for an improvement in the interest of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine A1, even during the period when the execution of the performance is restricted by the regulation means, the execution of the performance determined by the determination means is stored in the storage means, so the execution of the performance is restricted by the regulation means. However, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the problem that the number of executions of the performance is reduced, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A1, the game machine A2 is characterized in that the regulating means regulates execution of the performance in correspondence with a period during which a specific performance is being executed by the performance executing means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, when a specific effect is executed by the effect executing means, no new effect is executed, so that the player can understand that the specific effect has been executed. There is an effect that the information can be easily notified.

In the gaming machine A1 or A2, acquisition means capable of acquiring information determined by the determination means, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and determination performed by the determination means and a preliminary determination means capable of executing determination based on information previously stored in the storage means, and the effect execution means determines the specific performance based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means. A game machine A3 characterized in that it is configured to be able to execute a performance.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the execution of a new performance is restricted during the period in which the specific performance based on the determination result by the preliminary determination means is being executed. can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner.

Any one of the gaming machines A1 to A3 has variable ball entry means capable of being varied to an open state in which a game ball can be entered when the privilege game is executed, and the determination means includes: A gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is constructed so as to be able to determine execution of an effect based on the fact that a game ball has entered the variable ball entering means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A3, an effect is executed based on the ball entering the variable ball entering means, so that the player is motivated to make the ball enter the variable ball entering means. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<Feature B group> (Production history control)
Determination means capable of executing determination, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means, and displaying a specific determination result on the display means In a gaming machine having a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when the identification information of is displayed, the performance execution means capable of executing a performance and executed by the performance execution means and a storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the performance determined by the determining means as history information, wherein the determining means is The game machine B1 is characterized in that it is constructed so that the performance can be determined based on the history information.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, as a production for suggesting the result of the lottery, it is proposed to enhance the production effect by making it possible to execute multiple types of advance notice production that suggests the result of the lottery in advance before the result of the lottery is notified. (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2013-090780). However, there is a problem that when suggestive performances of the same content are continuously executed, a notice performance that is difficult for a player to understand is executed, and the performance effect is lowered. There has been a demand for further enhancement of interest in games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine B1, since the performance is determined based on the history information, it is possible to prevent bias in the performance to be executed and the like, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The game machine B1 is characterized by having mode display means capable of displaying a mode for showing an effect corresponding to at least part of the history information stored in the storage means on the display means. Gaming machine B2.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the player can identify the history of the executed effects and can easily predict the effects that are likely to be executed next.

A game machine B3 characterized in that, in the game machine B1 or B2, a specific effect can be executed by the effect executing means when the history information becomes specific history information.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine B1 or B2, when the specific history information is obtained, the specific performance is executed, so that the type of the performance to be executed can be made interesting. There is an effect that it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine B4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines B1 to B3 has regulation means for regulating execution of a new performance during a period in which the performance execution means executes the performance.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines B1 to B3, the execution of a new effect is restricted during the period when the effect is being executed, thereby preventing the excessive execution of the effect. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

<Characteristic group C> (Production content management)
In a gaming machine having first control means capable of executing game control and second control means capable of executing game control based on a control signal from the first control means, The first control means has a first counter means capable of updating a first counter based on the establishment of the first condition, and the second control means outputs based on the establishment of the first condition. second counter means capable of updating a second counter based on the establishment of a second condition that is satisfied when a first control signal is received, and based on the counter value of the second counter means display means for displaying information; identification means capable of identifying numerical information corresponding to the information displayed on the display means; and when the identification result by the identification means is a specific identification result, the first counter and update means capable of updating information displayed on the display means based on the counter value of the means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, it is proposed to execute an effect of providing the player with information indicating the lottery result in stages (for example, Patent Document: JP 2013-090780 A). . However, if there is a difference in stage information managed between the control means for setting the content of the effect and the control means for displaying the result of the effect, an unintended effect may be executed, causing the player to lose control. There is a problem that the desire to play is reduced. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine C1, when the information displayed based on the second counter value becomes a state corresponding to the specific identification result, the information is updated based on the counter value of the first counter means. Even if there is a discrepancy between the counter values counted by the counter means and the second counter means, the information displayed on the display means can be corrected to the value counted by the first counter means. .

In the game machine C1, when the information is updated based on the specific identification result, the counter value of the second counter means is updated so as to correspond to the counter value of the first counter means. A gaming machine C2 characterized by:

According to the game machine C2, there is an effect that even if there is a discrepancy between the counter values of the first counter means and the second counter means, it can be corrected so as to be synchronized.

In the gaming machine C1 or C2, the information displayed based on the counter value of the second counter means can display information corresponding to the counter value determined with the value of the counter value as the upper limit, The second control means includes frequency information determination means capable of determining frequency information to be added to the information displayed on the display means based on a predetermined lottery, and frequency information determined by the frequency information determination means. and variable means capable of varying the information corresponding to the value obtained by adding the count information.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effects of the game machine C1 or C2, the information is varied by making it difficult to understand the actual counter value of the second counter means, so that the interest of the game machine is enhanced. There is an effect that it can be improved.

<Characteristic group D> (check period set within operation valid period)
A game machine having an operating means operable by a player and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operating means, effective period setting means capable of setting an effective period, specific period setting means for setting a specific period within the valid period set by the valid period setting means; and operation determining means for determining whether the operating means is operated within the specified period. , wherein the effect executing means is configured to be capable of executing the effect based on the determination of the operation by the operation determining means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the result of the lottery, it is proposed that an advance notice effect suggesting the result of the lottery is executed before the result of the lottery is notified by operating the operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-090780). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine D1, it is possible to limit the period during which the operation of the operating means is determined to a specific period, and to reduce the control load.

In the gaming machine D1, the gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the specific period setting means is configured to be capable of setting a plurality of the specific periods.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, a plurality of specific periods are set, so that the chances of the player to operate the machine can be increased, and the effect of suppressing the problem that the effect is not executed is obtained. be.

In the gaming machine D2, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the specific period setting means sets a plurality of intervals for setting the specific period in the first period.

According to the gaming machine D3, by setting specific periods at even intervals, it is possible to increase the execution frequency of the presentation by operating the operation means at even intervals after the presentation is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to provide a game that is easy for the player to understand.

In the gaming machine D3, the first period is longer than the shortest period during which the player can operate the operating means twice and shorter than the shortest period during which the player can operate the operating means three times. Game machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D3, a plurality of effects can be easily executed by operating the operating means while maintaining the operated state, and the operating means can be operated in the first period or less. There is an effect that the performance can be maintained even when the state of releasing and operating again is maintained.

<Feature group E> (point number control)
In a gaming machine having effect execution means capable of executing effects and notifying means capable of notifying specific information when a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, numerical information is used as the effects. display means capable of being displayed; determination means capable of determining numerical information to be displayed on said display means; and a regulation means capable of regulating the total value from becoming predetermined information.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a method in which an effect value is variably displayed a plurality of times, and an advance notice effect is executed in which information regarding the lottery result is notified by the finally displayed effect value (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780. publication). However, in the process of changing the effect value, there is a problem that a specific value (for example, "77" that reminds the player of winning a prize) is displayed, giving the player a misunderstanding. . There has been a demand for further enhancement of interest in games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine E1, since the regulation means regulates that the total value becomes the predetermined information, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being notified to the player, and the information to be notified to the player. has the effect of limiting

In the gaming machine E1, the determining means is configured to be able to determine a plurality of numerical information, and the gaming machine determines whether the combination of the plurality of numerical information determined by the determining means is a specific combination. It has discriminative combination discriminating means, and when a specific combination is determined by the combination discriminating means, the restriction means determines the predetermined information by totaling the determined plurality of numerical information. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it is configured to be able to determine whether it becomes.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1, when a specific combination of numerical information is determined, the control load can be reduced by restricting to determine whether or not the regulation means will regulate. has the effect of being able to

The game machine E1 or E2 is characterized in that it has privilege giving means capable of giving an advantageous privilege to the player when specific information is displayed on the display means by the total information display means. Gaming machine E3.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effects of the game machine E1 or E2, specific information is displayed on the display means, so that the displayed numerical information can be expected. There is an effect that the interest of the person can be improved.

<Feature group F> (special fluctuation period control)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and the identification information being moved by the dynamic display means. A dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period to be displayed, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. In a gaming machine having a privilege game executing means, when a specific condition is established, the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means is determined from a predetermined dynamic display period. a first information providing means capable of providing first information to a player when the predetermined dynamic display period is determined; and the first information and a first information type determining means capable of determining the type of the first information to be given by the giving means, and when the first information satisfies a predetermined condition, it becomes information advantageous to the player. A gaming machine F1 characterized by being configured as follows.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In addition, there is a configuration in which the lottery result can be indicated to the player by varying the length of time that the symbols indicating the lottery result fluctuate (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39398). In such a conventional gaming machine, it is necessary to execute a process of determining the content of the effect to be executed from a plurality of times for the determined variable time, and there is a problem that the interest in the game is reduced. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine F1, when the specific condition is satisfied, the first information is given in response to the dynamic display of the identification information. 1 information satisfies a predetermined condition can also make the player interested, and there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

The game machine F1 has a setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state that is more advantageous than the first game state when the privilege game is executed, and the second game state is provided. is set, the first information satisfies a predetermined condition.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the first information satisfies a predetermined condition, so that the player can identify that the second gaming state is set, and the interest in the game is improved. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the determination control means causes the dynamic display period determination means to determine the predetermined dynamic display period until an end condition is satisfied. Machine F3.

According to the gaming machine F3, the predetermined dynamic display period can be continuously determined until the termination condition is satisfied in the gaming machine F1 or F2, and the opportunity to provide the first information can be shortened. There is an effect that a large amount can be imparted in between.

In any one of the game machines F1 to F3, a plurality of dynamic display modes are set corresponding to the dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determining means, and the first information providing means A gaming machine F4, wherein the first information is provided when a specific dynamic display mode corresponding to a predetermined dynamic display period is executed.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect produced by one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the first information is provided by executing a specific dynamic display mode, so the specific dynamic display mode is executed. There is an effect that it is possible to make the player expect that the game will be played, and that it is possible to suppress the problem of early boredom with the game.

<Characteristic group G> (Short fluctuation at a predetermined number of times or more)
discrimination means capable of executing discrimination; dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on a display means; and the identification information being moved by the dynamic display means. A dynamic display period determination means capable of determining a dynamic display period to be displayed, and a privilege game advantageous to the player is executed when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed. a first dynamic display period group in which a plurality of dynamic display periods are set as dynamic display periods determined by the dynamic display period determination means; and a second dynamic display period group configured to facilitate determination of a dynamic display period shorter than the first dynamic display period group; counting means capable of counting information corresponding to the number of times the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; In the case of the above, the game machine G1 is characterized by comprising determination control means capable of determining the dynamic display period from the second dynamic display period group. .

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. In addition, there is a configuration in which the lottery result can be indicated to the player by varying the length of time that the symbols indicating the lottery result fluctuate (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-39398). Since such a conventional game machine is configured to execute various effects according to the length of the variable time, it is configured to increase the effect of the effect by determining the variable time longer than a predetermined time. It had been. However, if the period during which no winning is not won continues for a long period of time, the number of times of winning lotteries per unit period decreases each time a long variation time is determined, and the player's motivation to play decreases, leading to an early start in the game. There was a problem of getting tired of. An object of the present invention is to solve the problems exemplified above.

According to the game machine G1, counting the first count value or more by the counting means makes it easy to determine a short dynamic display period, and increases and varies the game efficiency for players who play games for a long period of time. This has the effect of suppressing the problem of early boredom with the game.

In the game machine G1, when the privilege game is executed, a setting means capable of setting a first game state and a second game state which is more advantageous than the first game state, and a game ball can be entered. When the second game state is set by the variable ball entry means capable of changing between the first state and the second state in which the game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and the setting means setting means capable of setting the variable ball entry means to be more easily changed from the second state to the first state than when the first game state is set; and the counting means. is a gaming machine G2, characterized in that counting is started based on the setting of the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G2, after the period during which it is easy to enter the ball into the variable ball-entering means reaches a certain period or longer, the gaming machine G1 is switched so as to increase the gaming efficiency. There is an effect that it can be suppressed that it is advantageous to

In the gaming machine G1 or G2, when the second game state is set, a high probability can be set with a high probability of being discriminated as a specific discrimination result by the discriminating means, and the counting means is a gaming machine G3, wherein when the second game state is set and the high probability is not set, the counting is terminated when the first count value is reached.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effect exerted on the gaming machine G1 or G2, since the gaming efficiency is highly variable in a state where the high probability is set, the period in which the privilege game is executed after the first count value is extended. There is an effect that it can be shortened.

determination control means capable of controlling to determine a dynamic display period determined by the dynamic display period determination means from a predetermined dynamic display period when a specific condition is satisfied; When the dynamic display period is determined, it is possible to determine the first information providing means capable of providing the first information to the player and the type of the first information provided by the first information providing means. and a first information type determining means, wherein the first information is configured to become information advantageous to the player when the first information satisfies a predetermined condition. Machine G1.

<Characteristic group H> (Direction stock derivative)
Determination means capable of executing determination, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means, and displaying a specific determination result on the display means In a gaming machine having privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to a player when identification information is displayed, a performance execution means capable of executing a performance and a new performance are executed. A game machine H1, characterized in that it has regulation means capable of regulation, and period determination means capable of determining a regulation period for regulating execution of the new performance by the regulation means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, it has been proposed that a notice effect that suggests the lottery result in advance is executed before the lottery result is notified (for example, Patent Document: JP-A 2013-090780). However, there is a problem that if a plurality of suggestive effects are executed in duplicate, a notice effect that is difficult for the player to understand is executed, and the effect of the effect is reduced. There has been a demand for an improvement in the interest of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine H1, the period during which the execution of the performance is restricted by the regulation means can be varied, so that it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand at what timing the performance of the performance is restricted. There is an effect of being able to improve the interest of

<Feature I group> (Production history control)
Determination means capable of executing determination, dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the determination result by the determination means on a display means, and displaying a specific determination result on the display means a special game executing means capable of executing a special game advantageous to a player when the identification information is displayed; , a determining means capable of determining the one performance to be executed by the performance executing means, and a privilege advantageous to the player based on the order of the one performance determined by the determining means. A game machine B1 characterized by comprising: a possible privilege granting means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, as a production for suggesting the result of the lottery, it is proposed to enhance the production effect by making it possible to execute multiple types of advance notice production that suggests the result of the lottery in advance before the result of the lottery is notified. (For example, Patent Document: JP-A-2013-090780). However, there is a problem that when suggestive performances of the same content are continuously executed, a notice performance that is difficult for a player to understand is executed, and the performance effect is lowered. There has been a demand for further enhancement of interest in games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine I1, since the privilege to be given can be changed according to the order of the performances to be executed, the process of the performances to be executed can also be made interesting to the player, and the amusement of the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature J Group> (Direction content management derivation)
and a second control means capable of executing game control based on a control signal from the first control means, wherein the first control means, based on the establishment of a first condition, a first counter means capable of updating a first counter; and a period determining means capable of determining the remaining period of the first period; a second counter means capable of updating a second counter based on the establishment of a second condition which is satisfied when a first control signal capable of being output as a first control signal is received; and a counter of the second counter means. display means for displaying information based on values; identification means for identifying numerical information corresponding to the information displayed on the display means; and identification results by the identification means are specific identification results, and determining means capable of determining an update mode of information displayed on the display means based on the determination result of the period determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, as an effect for suggesting the lottery result, it is proposed to execute an effect of providing the player with information indicating the lottery result in stages (for example, Patent Document: JP 2013-090780 A). . However, if there is a difference in stage information managed between the control means for setting the content of the effect and the control means for displaying the result of the effect, an unintended effect may be executed, causing the player to lose control. There is a problem that the desire to play is reduced. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine J1, the information is updated based on the remaining period of the first period. It is possible to properly correct the information displayed in the remaining period.

<Feature K Group> (Derivation of check period setting within operation valid period)
A game machine having an operating means operable by a player and an effect executing means capable of executing an effect based on the operation of the operating means, effective period setting means capable of setting an effective period, Operation content notification means for indicating the operation content of the operation means within the effective period set by the effective period setting means, and it is possible to determine whether the operation means is operated within the specific period. and an operation determination means, wherein the operation content notification means can notify the operation content different from the operation content being notified when the first condition is satisfied in the state where the valid period is set. A gaming machine K1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. As an effect for notifying the result of the lottery, it is proposed that an advance notice effect suggesting the result of the lottery is executed before the result of the lottery is notified by operating the operation means that the player can operate. (For example, Patent Document: Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2013-090780). However, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the game machine K1, since the operation contents notified by the operation content notification means can be changed in the middle, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected performance, thereby improving the interest of the game. It has the effect of being able to

<Characteristic group L> (Derivation of point number control)
In a gaming machine having effect execution means capable of executing effects and notifying means capable of notifying specific information when a specific effect is executed by the effect execution means, numerical information is used as the effects. display means capable of being displayed; determination means capable of determining numerical information to be displayed on said display means; total information display means capable of displaying the total information, and regulation means capable of regulating the execution of an effect for displaying the numerical information determined by the determination means when a first condition is satisfied. A gaming machine L1 characterized by having:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Furthermore, there has been proposed a method in which an effect value is variably displayed a plurality of times, and an advance notice effect is executed in which information regarding the lottery result is notified by the finally displayed effect value (for example, Patent Document: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-090780. publication). However, in the process of changing the effect value, there is a problem that a specific value (for example, "77" that reminds the player of winning a prize) is displayed, giving the player a misunderstanding. . There has been a demand for further enhancement of interest in games. SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine capable of improving the enjoyment of a game.

According to the gaming machine L1, since the regulating means regulates that the total value becomes the predetermined information, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information from being notified to the player, and the information to be notified to the player. has the effect of limiting

<Feature M group> (Discrimination measures when a small hit is confirmed)
A shooting means capable of shooting a game ball based on a player's operation, a ball entering means capable of entering the game ball shot by the shooting means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. judgment means capable of judging the case, display means for displaying identification information for indicating the judgment result by the judgment means, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means and dynamic display mode determination means for determining a dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and the identification information for indicating the specific determination result on the display means is stopped. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game that is advantageous to the player when displayed, and a game ball enters during the period in which the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. A specific ball entry means that allows a ball to enter, a specific area in which the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter, and a privilege advantageous to the player when the game ball enters the specific area. privilege granting means for giving; privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege to be granted by the privilege granting means; and the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed. and a notification means for notifying notification information that allows a player to identify the type of the specific input when the firing by the firing means is stopped for a predetermined period or longer after the notification information is notified by the notification means. and means for making it difficult to enter a ball into the ball means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols or the like, it is notified in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the winning game, so that the winning game is further executed, and the game set after that If the state is determined by the type of winning game executed first, it is determined whether it is a winning type that gives a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific ball entrance or specific area is determined. There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game parlor may increase due to the game method in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game.

The gaming machine M1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing disadvantages on the gaming parlor side.

According to the gaming machine M1, by confirming the notification information indicating the type of privilege determined by the privilege type determining means, if the player tries to avoid being granted a specific privilege type, the other privilege type is displayed. Even in the case of , it becomes difficult to enter the ball into the specific ball-entering means, so there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the disadvantage of the game parlor.

In the gaming machine M1, the dynamic display mode determining means determines one dynamic display mode among different dynamic display modes combining a pseudo-stop mode in which the identification information is dynamically displayed and then temporarily stopped. A gaming machine M2 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine M2, the temporary stop in the pseudo stop mode makes it difficult to understand the final stop timing of the identification information, and when the specific privilege game is executed, the game ball is sent to the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the execution of a game method that avoids entering a ball.

A gaming machine M3, wherein the gaming machine M1 or M2 has variable control means for varying a ball-entering rate of balls entering the specific area according to the type of the privilege game executed by the privilege game execution means.

According to the gaming machine M3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine M1 or M2, it is possible to vary the rate of entering a ball into the specific area depending on the type of privilege game to be executed, so the probability of entering a ball into the specific area is increased. can be easily controlled.

<Characteristics N group> (Direct hit production 2)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the time the ball enters the specific ball-entering means. A gaming machine N1 characterized by having:

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the effect is only performed up to the winning game, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

The game machine N1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only the identification information indicates a specific determination result, but also the performance can make the player expect that the ball will enter the specific area, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the game machine N1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game provided from a plurality of effects.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine N1 or N2, the effect executing means is characterized in that, when a game ball does not enter the specific area even after a period set in advance has passed, the effect is switched to a specific effect and executed. Gaming machine N3.

According to the gaming machine N3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine N1 or N2, when the ball does not enter the specific area, the specific effect is switched to, so that it is possible to effectively notify the player that the ball did not enter the specific area. There is an effect that it can be notified to

<Feature P group> (A delay device is provided at the top of the V attacker to prevent Choro strikes)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the game, a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game ball during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the special game execution means, and a specification that the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter. an area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means; a notifying means for notifying information about the type of the privilege determined by the privilege type determining means when the identification information is stopped and displayed; and adjusting means for reducing the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period of time.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. As for the type of winning game, it is known that when the lottery result is displayed and notified by symbols or the like, it is notified in a predetermined notification mode so that the fairness of the game can be maintained. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional gaming machine, the game ball enters a specific ball entrance or a specific area during the winning game, so that the winning game is further executed, and the game set after that If the state is determined by the type of winning game executed first, it is determined whether it is a winning type that gives a game state that is disadvantageous to the player, and a specific ball entrance or specific area is determined. There is a possibility that the disadvantage of the game parlor may increase due to the game method in which the game is played so that the game ball does not enter the game.

The game machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the disadvantages of the game parlor.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of flowing down for a predetermined period of time guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjustment means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated to enter the game ball into the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine P1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by the player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 flow path and a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means adjusts the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the specific entering ball A game machine P2, characterized in that the game machine P2 is characterized in that it allocates at a predetermined ratio to a specific channel that allows a ball to enter the means and a channel that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball-entering means.

According to the game machine P2, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine P1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by the player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 channel and a second channel in which the game ball that has flowed down the first channel is difficult to flow down, and the adjustment means prevents the game ball that has flowed down the second channel from rolling for a predetermined period or more. A game machine P3, characterized in that it has a rolling means capable of moving and discharging a game ball to a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P1, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more is rolled by the adjustment means. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means by passing a predetermined period.

In any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed to when the specific ball-entering means becomes capable of entering a ball is transferred to the second channel. A gaming machine P4 characterized in that it is configured to be shorter than the period from when a game ball is shot until it reaches the specific ball entering means through the adjusting means.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, it is necessary to continuously shoot the game ball in order to enter the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the ball to be entered into the specific ball entry means in the privilege game.

<Feature Q group> (Choro strike countermeasure 2)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means. In the game, a specific ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter the game ball during the period in which the privilege game is executed by the special game execution means, and a specification that the game ball entering the specific ball entry means can enter. an area, a privilege granting means for granting a privilege advantageous to a player when a game ball enters the specific region, and a privilege type determining means for determining the type of the privilege granted by the privilege granting means; and adjusting means for reducing the amount of game balls that are guided to the specific ball entering means for a predetermined period of time to a position where the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means. Game machine Q1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, a gaming method is performed in which a game ball is not entered into a specific ball entrance or a specific area, so there is a risk of increasing the disadvantages of the game parlor. was there.

The game machine Q1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine capable of suppressing the disadvantages of the game parlor.

According to the gaming machine P1, since the amount of flowing down for a predetermined period of time guided to the specific ball entry means is reduced by the adjustment means, the information notified by the notification means is discriminated to enter the game ball into the specific ball entry means. There is an effect that it is possible to make it difficult to decide whether to hit the ball or not.

In the gaming machine Q1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by a player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 flow path and a second flow path in which a game ball flowing down the first flow path is difficult to flow down, and the adjusting means adjusts the game ball flowing down the second flow path to the specific entering ball A gaming machine Q2 characterized in that the game machine Q2 is characterized in that it distributes at a predetermined ratio to a specific channel that allows a ball to enter the means and a channel that makes it difficult to enter the specific ball-entering means.

According to the game machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Q1, it is possible to easily reduce the amount of game balls guided to the specific ball entry means among the game balls flowing down the second flow path. effective.

In the gaming machine Q1, there are shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area, shooting intensity variable means capable of varying the shooting intensity of the shooting means by a player's operation, and a third stage through which game balls can flow down. 1 channel and a second channel in which the game ball that has flowed down the first channel is difficult to flow down, and the adjustment means prevents the game ball that has flowed down the second channel from rolling for a predetermined period or more. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by having a rolling means capable of moving and discharging a game ball to a flow path guided to the specific ball entering means.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the game ball that has flowed down the second flow path for a predetermined period or more is rolled by the adjusting means. Also, there is an effect that the game ball can be guided to the specific ball entering means by passing a predetermined period.

In any of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the period from when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed to when the specific ball-entering means becomes capable of entering a ball is transferred to the second channel. A gaming machine Q4 characterized in that the period from when a game ball is shot until it reaches the specific ball-entering means through the adjusting means is shorter than the period.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, it is necessary to continuously shoot the game ball in order to enter the specific ball entering means. There is an effect that it is possible to regulate the game method that does not allow the ball to be entered into the specific ball entry means in the privilege game.

<Feature R group> (Production up to V passage in small hits and direct hits)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and an effect execution means capable of executing an effect over a period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information for indicating the specific determination result to the time the ball enters the specific ball-entering means. , wherein the effect executing means executes a suggestive effect suggesting stepwise switching of the game ball shooting method before the identification information indicating the specific determination result is stop-displayed. A game machine R1 characterized by being a thing.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. It has been proposed that a game is executed, and depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to a state that is advantageous to the player or a state that is disadvantageous to the player. (For example, JP-A-2012-147965).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machine, the effect is only performed up to the winning game, and there is a problem that the game becomes monotonous and the player quickly becomes bored with the game.

The game machine N1 was created to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a game machine that can prevent the player from quickly becoming bored with the game.

According to the gaming machine N1, when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed, an effect is executed during the period from the start of the dynamic display of the identification information until the ball enters the specific area. Therefore, not only the identification information indicates a specific determination result, but also the performance can make the player expect that the ball will enter the specific area, thereby suppressing the problem that the player gets bored with the game early.

In the game machine R1, the effect executing means executes one effect based on the type of privilege game given from a plurality of effects.

According to the game machine R2, in addition to the effects of the game machine R1, there is an effect that various effects can be executed.

In the gaming machine R1 or R2, the effect execution means is characterized in that, when a game ball does not enter the specific area after a period set in advance has elapsed, the effect is switched to a specific effect and executed. Gaming machine R3.

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1 or R2, when the ball does not enter the specific area, the specific effect is switched to. There is an effect that it can be notified to

<Feature S group> (Two types of control switching between small hit and pattern hit)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and a first state in which the guidance path for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. A switching means for switching, and first switching information for switching the guideway by the switching means when the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the above and setting means for setting second switching information different from the first switching information.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. After the game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous to the player or set to be disadvantageous to the player. There has been proposed a system in which a game ball enters an area to further give a privilege such as a winning game. (For example, JP-A-2013-9795).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

The gaming machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guideway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, it is possible to show the player different guidance modes up to the specific area, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of

The gaming machine S2 is characterized in that the gaming machine S1 is switched to the first state by switching the guideway according to the second switching information.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, the guideway is switched to the first state by the second switching information, so that in the second privilege game, the game ball can easily enter the specific area, There is an effect that the player can be made to think that the second privilege is granted by hitting the ball in the specific area even in the second privilege game.

A gaming machine S3, wherein in the gaming machine S1 or S2, a plurality of different information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, the first switching information can be diversified, and the guidance state of the taxiway can be diversified.

<Feature T group> (Two types of switching 2 for small hits and pattern hits)
A ball entering means capable of entering a game ball, a determining means capable of executing a determination when a game ball enters the entering means, and identification information for indicating a determination result by the determining means. display means for displaying; dynamic display means for dynamically displaying the identification information on the display means; and dynamic display for determining the dynamic display mode of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the identification information for indicating the specific determination result is stopped and displayed on the display means; and a second privilege game different from the first privilege game. and a privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game, wherein a game ball can be entered during a period in which the first privilege game or the second privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means. a specific ball entry means, a specific area where the game ball that entered the specific ball entry means can enter, and the first privilege game is executed, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game privilege giving means for giving a first privilege advantageous to the player and, when the second privilege game is being executed, giving a second privilege advantageous to the player regardless of the ball entering the specific area. and a first state in which the guidance path for guiding the game ball that has entered the specific ball entering means to the specific area can be guided to the specific area, and a second state in which it is difficult to guide the game ball to the specific area. A switching means for switching, and first switching information for switching the guideway by the switching means when the first privilege game is executed, and when the second privilege game is executed, the above and setting means for setting second switching information for switching the guideway to the first state.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a lottery is executed by entering a game ball into a starting hole provided on a game board, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. After the game is executed, depending on the type of the winning game, the state after the winning game is set to be advantageous to the player or set to be disadvantageous to the player. There has been proposed a system in which a game ball enters an area to further give a privilege such as a winning game. (For example, JP-A-2013-9795).

However, in the above-described conventional type gaming machines, there has been a demand for further enhancement of the amusement of games.

The gaming machine P1 is designed to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the enjoyment of games.

According to the gaming machine S1, since the control method of the guideway is switched between the first privilege game and the second privilege game, it is possible to show the player different guidance modes up to the specific area, thereby enhancing the interest of the game. has the effect of

In the game machine T1, the game ball is guided to the specific area by different guide paths depending on whether the second state is switched to the first state by the second switching information or the first state is switched to the first state by the first switching information. A game machine T2 characterized in that the is induced.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effect of the game machine T1, there is an effect that the player can be prevented from becoming bored early because the player is guided to the specific area by a different guidance.

A gaming machine T3 characterized in that in the gaming machine T1 or T2, a plurality of different pieces of information are set as the first switching information, and one piece of information is determined based on a predetermined rule.

According to the gaming machine T3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine T1 or T2, the first switching information can be diversified, and there is an effect that the guidance state of the taxiway can be diversified.

<Feature group U> (Set the production mode based on the length of the period from special 2 winning to special 2 fluctuation)
a first determination means for executing the first determination when the first determination condition is satisfied; an acquisition means for acquiring the acquired information based on the establishment of the acquisition condition; storage means capable of storing up to a maximum number; second determination means for performing a second determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when a second determination condition is satisfied; and the first determination dynamic display means for dynamically displaying, on a display means, the first identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the means or the second identification information for indicating the result of discrimination by the second discrimination means on the display means for a predetermined period of time; In the gaming machine, dynamic display of the second identification information is not started while the first identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, and when a predetermined performance condition is satisfied, and a period effect execution means for executing a period effect based on the dynamic display of the second identification information, and when the first identification information is dynamically displayed, the dynamic display of the second identification information is started after a predetermined start condition is established. and an effect mode setting means for setting an effect mode in the period effect executed by the period effect execution means based on the determination result of the period determiner. A gaming machine U1 characterized by:

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Further, there is a game machine in which a plurality of starting ports are provided and different lotteries are executed depending on the starting port into which the game ball enters. Then, there is one that executes a suggestive effect that suggests the result of a winning lottery that is executed based on the entry of a game ball into each starting port (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-13075). In such a gaming machine, when a game ball enters the other starting opening while a winning lottery is being executed based on the entry of a game ball into one starting opening, By preventing the execution of a new lottery until the lottery is completed, it is possible to prevent the player from executing the lottery excessively.

However, the period from when a game ball enters one of the starting ports until the winning lottery (suggestion effect) based on the entering ball is executed is based on the entry of the game ball into the other starting port. Since it differs according to the status of the winning lottery to be executed, for example, after the game ball enters the starting hole, a suggestive effect for indicating the lottery result of the winning lottery executed based on the entering ball is executed. If the period until the game is extended, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestive effect is being executed based on which ball entry, and the effect of the suggestive effect is reduced, resulting in a decrease in the player's willingness to play. there were. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine U1, the effect of the period effect executed by the period effect executing means based on the length of the period from the establishment of the predetermined start condition to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information. Since the mode can be set, even if the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is different, it is possible to execute the period performance that does not give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player's desire to play when the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started is long.

The game machine U1 has a remaining period determining means for determining a remaining dynamic display period of the dynamic display period of the first identification information, and the period determining means determines the remaining period determined by the remaining period determining means. A gaming machine U2 characterized in that the period is discriminated based on.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1, the second identification information is displayed after the predetermined start condition is satisfied based on the residual dynamic display period of the first identification information being executed by the period determination means. Since it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of is started, the accuracy of the determination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period effect in line with the actual game contents, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U1 or U2, the predetermined start condition is satisfied when the obtaining means obtains the obtained information, and the period determination means determines whether the predetermined start condition is satisfied and then the relevant start condition is satisfied. The game machine U3 is characterized in that it determines the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information for which a start condition is established is started.

According to the game machine U3, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1 or U2, the period from the acquisition of the acquired information to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is the period determination. Since it is discriminated by means, the accuracy of the discrimination result can be improved. Therefore, it is possible to execute a period effect in line with the actual game contents, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U3, the period effect executing means includes at least a period from when the obtaining means obtains the obtained information until dynamic display of the second identification information based on the obtained information is started. The game machine U4 is characterized in that the period effect is executed in the effect period.

According to the gaming machine U4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine U3, as the effect period in which the period effect is executed, at least after the acquisition means acquires the acquired information, the second identification information is dynamically generated based on the acquired information. Since the period until the display is started can be set, it is possible to set the effect mode corresponding to the actual game situation in the period corresponding to the actual game situation. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

The game machine U1 or U2 has specific game execution means capable of executing a specific game in which the acquisition condition is likely to be satisfied when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and the period determining means is determined by the specific game execution means. It determines the period from the execution of the specific game to the start of the dynamic display of the second identification information, and the period effect execution means at least, after the predetermined execution condition is established , the game machine U5, characterized in that the period effect is executed in the effect period including the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information based on the obtained information is started.

According to the gaming machine U5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U1 or U2, it is possible to determine the period until the dynamic display of the second identification information starts before the acquisition condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to set an effect mode for a longer period based on the determination result of the period determining means. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect of the period production can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine U5, dynamic display determination means capable of determining whether the first identification information is dynamically displayed when the specific game is executed by the specific game execution means; and the dynamic display determination means. a second period determining means for performing determination of a second period different from the period determining means when determining that the first identification information is not dynamically displayed by The means determines a period from when the acquired information is acquired in a state where the first identification information is dynamically displayed until dynamic display of the second identification information based on the acquired information is started. A gaming machine U6 characterized in that it

According to the gaming machine U6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U5, when the first identification information is not dynamically displayed at the timing at which the period determination means can perform determination, the second identification information is displayed at a timing different from that timing. Determination by the period determining means can be executed. Therefore, since the period from when the predetermined start condition is established until the dynamic display of the second identification information is started can be determined at a plurality of timings, the period effect in line with the actual game content can be executed. There is an effect that it can be made easier.

In any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the period effect executing means may provide, as the period effects, a first period effect executed during a predetermined first period and a second period effect executed after the first period. and a second period effect executed in the period effect, and the effect mode setting means sets the effect mode of the second period effect.

According to the gaming machine U7, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines U1 to U6, the common first period effect can be executed regardless of the determination result of the period determining means, so that the player feels uncomfortable. There is an effect that the period performance can be executed without giving.

In the gaming machine U7, the effect mode setting means selects part of the effect mode of the first period effect as the effect mode of the second period effect when the determination result by the period determining means is a specific determination result. A gaming machine U8 characterized in that it sets the

According to the gaming machine U8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine U7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the effect mode of the first period effect can be set as the effect mode of the second period effect, whether the first period effect is being executed or the second period effect is being executed for the player. can make it difficult to understand Therefore, even when the period determining means determines that the second period is long, there is an effect that the period effect can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

<Feature group V> (When a predetermined condition is satisfied, execute a general pattern long opening suggestion effect)
A variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which a game ball can enter and a second state in which a game ball is more difficult to enter than in the first state, and a game ball enters the variable ball entry means. Determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied based on the fact that the ball is hit, and privilege giving means for giving a privilege to a player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. a game machine comprising: determination means for executing determination when a determination condition is satisfied; an effect executing means capable of executing a predetermined effect during a period in which the identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means; a specific game executing means capable of executing a specific game for a predetermined period of time that changes the variable ball entry means from the second state to the first state for a predetermined period of time, and the effect executing means satisfies a predetermined effect condition. The gaming machine V1 is characterized in that, when the identification information is stopped and displayed in the specific display mode, an effect is executed.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved to allow the game ball to enter the starting port. There are things that make it easier. In addition, there is one configured to execute a suggestion effect for suggesting the lottery result of the second lottery to the player. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In such a game machine, the lottery result of the second lottery can be suggested by the suggestive performance, so that the player can play the game while expecting that the game ball will be easily entered into the starting hole. It was possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, when the suggestive effect is executed, the player stops shooting the game ball and restarts the game based on the effect result of the suggestive effect. In that case, the game is stopped until the suggestive effect is completed, and the game is restarted in accordance with the timing when the movable member moves, or if the effect mode of the suggestive effect is highly likely to be off. , play the game until the suggestive effect is completed. During the period from when the game ball enters one of the starting ports until the winning lottery (suggestive effect) based on the entering ball is executed, the game is played to the other starting port. Because it differs depending on the situation of the winning lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball, for example, after the game ball enters the starting hole, the lottery result of the winning lottery executed based on the entering ball If the period until the suggestive effect for indicating is executed becomes longer, it becomes difficult for the player to understand which suggestive effect is being executed based on which ball entry, and the effect of the suggestive effect is reduced. , there is a problem that the desire to play is reduced. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances interest in the game by providing an effect capable of suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine V1, when a predetermined effect condition is satisfied, it is possible to inform that the specific game is executed by the specific game executing means in the effect executed by the effect executing means. Therefore, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game in order to satisfy the performance condition, thereby improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine V1, as the types of the specific game executed by the specific game execution means, a first type corresponding to a first specific game that is advantageous to the player and a second type that is more disadvantageous than the first specific game. It has a game type setting means capable of setting a second type corresponding to 2 specific games, and the effect executing means executes the effect when the first type is set by the game type setting means. A gaming machine V2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, when the first specific game that is advantageous to the player is executed, the presentation by the presentation executing means is performed, so that the presentation effect can be enhanced. It has the effect of being able to

In a gaming machine V1 or V2, a condition determining means capable of determining whether or not the performance condition is established and specific identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determining means are dynamically displayed for a predetermined period of time. and display means, wherein the condition determination means determines that the performance condition is established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means. Gaming machine V3.

According to the gaming machine V3, since the performance condition can be established when the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the player can be motivated to play a game in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed. has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine V3, information holding means capable of holding execution information indicating that the judgment has been executed by the judgment means, and judging whether the execution information held by the information holding means satisfies a valid condition. The condition determining means determines that the effect condition is established even when the effective condition determining means determines that the effective condition is satisfied. A gaming machine V4 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3, even if the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed, the effect condition can be established while the execution information satisfies the valid condition. Therefore, even if there occurs a timing when the specific identification information is not dynamically displayed in spite of the fact that a game is being played in which the specific identification information is dynamically displayed, the effect can be executed by the effect executing means. . Therefore, it is possible to stably execute an effect for a player who is actively playing a game, and to improve the interest of the game.

In either game machine V3 or V4, acquisition means capable of acquiring acquisition information when an acquisition condition is satisfied, and storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of acquisition information acquired by the acquisition means. , wherein the determination means performs the determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means when the determination condition is satisfied, and the condition determination means is the acquisition means performs a first condition determination based on the acquisition of the acquired information, and performs a second condition determination based on the determination being performed by the determination means, and the effect execution means, A game machine characterized in that the performance is executed when it is determined that the performance condition is satisfied in either the result of the first condition determination or the result of the second condition determination. V5.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V3 or V4, the condition determining means can determine whether the performance condition is established at a plurality of timings. Therefore, it is possible to stably execute the performance and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine V1 or V5, the effect executing means can execute, as the effect, a timing notification effect for notifying the timing at which the variable ball-entering means is in the first state. Machine V6.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine V1 or V5, not only the determination result of the determination means but also the timing at which the variable ball entry means is in the first state is determined by the effect executed by the effect execution means. Since the game is notified to the player, it is possible to motivate the player to play the game so that the effect by the effect executing means is executed, and the effect is that the interest in the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine V6, the effect executing means can execute a pseudo-timing notification effect for notifying a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball-entering means enters the first state when the effect condition is not satisfied. A gaming machine V7 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the effect condition is not established, a timing different from the timing at which the variable ball-entering means is in the first state is notified, so that a game in which only the determination condition is established without establishing the effect condition is performed. There is an effect that the player can be made to play a disadvantageous game.

A game machine V8 characterized in that, in any one of the game machines V1 to V7, the determination condition is more likely to be satisfied than the performance condition.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V7, since the determination condition is easier to satisfy than the performance condition, the player is motivated to play the game in order to satisfy the performance condition. It has the effect of being able to

<Feature group W> (Information of advantageous small winnings with a higher probability than the distribution ratio during time saving in the small winning performance during time saving)
Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on satisfaction of an acquisition condition; Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means; determining means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means; and executing a first privilege game advantageous to the player when the determination result of the determining means is the first determination result; and a privilege game executing means capable of executing a second privilege game that is more advantageous to the player than the first privilege game when the second discrimination result is different from the first discrimination result, game state setting means capable of setting a first game state after the first bonus game or the second bonus game executed by the bonus game execution means; Pre-determining means for pre-determining before the determination based on the acquired information is executed; and, the game state setting means, based on the establishment of a predetermined end condition in the state in which the first game state is set, the first game state and is to set a different second game state, and the effect execution means is based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is performed after the predetermined end condition is satisfied. A game machine W1 characterized by being capable of executing a suggestive effect.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, there is a configuration in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage can be executed, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of privilege games is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In addition, in recent gaming machines, in order to improve the soundness of the game, the ratio (so-called continuation rate) at which the game state advantageous to the player (for example, the time saving state and the probability variable state) is set after the end of the jackpot game is lowered. (For example, 65% or less) may be set to suppress the gambling aspect of the game.

In such a gaming machine, for example, even if a win (for example, a big win or a small win) is won in a state in which an advantageous game state that is advantageous to the player is set, the advantageous game state is set again after the winning game ends. Since the ratio to be set is suppressed, there is a problem that it is difficult to make the player feel anticipation for the win notification effect during the advantageous game state, and the willingness to play is lowered. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decrease in the player's desire to play the game.

According to the gaming machine W1, a first privilege game or a second privilege game more advantageous than the first privilege game is carried out based on the result of the preliminary determination by the suggestive effect executed during the first game state. is suggested. Since the suggestion performance can be executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set, the privilege game is executed during the first game state. can make it easier to suggest Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine W1, the effect execution means is configured such that the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the predetermined end condition is established is a pre-determination result indicating the second determination result. The game machine W1 is characterized in that it is easier to execute the suggestive effect when the article pre-discrimination result is obtained than when the pre-discrimination result for indicating the first discrimination result is obtained.

According to the gaming machine W2, the pre-determination result corresponding to the acquired information in which the determination is executed after the second game state is set based on the establishment of the termination condition of the first game state indicates the second determination result. In this case, the suggestive effect by the effect executing means is more likely to be executed than in the case where the first determination result is indicated. As a result, when the suggestive effect is executed during the first game state, in addition to the determination result of the determination means executed during the first game state, the determination result of the determination means executed after the second game state is set. In the configuration in which the suggestive effect is executed based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the determined result, it is possible to increase the ratio of execution of the second privilege game when the first suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The game machine W2 has a ratio setting means capable of setting a ratio of the first judgment result and a ratio of the second judgment result of the judgment result by the judgment means, wherein the ratio setting means is , wherein the ratio of the second determination result is set to be higher when the second game state is set than when the first game state is set. Gaming machine W3.

According to the game machine W3, in addition to the effects of the game machine W1, it is possible to make it easier to obtain the second determination result during the second game state than during the first game state. As a result, it is possible to increase the rate at which the second privilege game is executed when the first suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to make the player feel a sense of anticipation for execution of the suggestive effect, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the effect executing means defines a period until the determination corresponding to the acquired information for which the preliminary determination is performed by the preliminary determination means as the effect period. A game machine W4 characterized by being capable of executing a suggestive effect.

According to W4, in addition to the effects produced by any one of the gaming machines W1 to W3, the suggestive effect is executed with the period until the determination corresponding to the pre-determined acquired information is executed as the effect period. has the effect of increasing

<Feature X group> (When the conditions for shifting from the time saving state to the normal state are met, the notification is executed during the time saving state to execute many special figure 2 fluctuations in the normal state)
Acquisition means for acquiring acquisition information based on satisfaction of an acquisition condition; Storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined number of pieces of information acquired by the acquisition means; Determination means for performing determination based on the acquired information stored in the storage means, and a privilege game for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. A game having execution means, a first game state in which the acquisition means can easily acquire the acquisition information, a second game state in which acquisition is more difficult than the first game state, and a settable game state setting means. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state at least when a predetermined transition condition is established in the state where the first game state is set, and the storage means stores the A memory number determination means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored, and a notification mode setting capable of setting a notification mode based on the determination result of the memory number determination means in a state where the first game state is set. means, and notification execution means capable of executing a notification operation in the notification mode set by the notification mode setting means, wherein the notification mode setting means performs at least the memory at a specific timing of the first game state. The game machine X1 is characterized in that the notification mode is set based on the determination result of the number determination means.

Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a start hole provided on the game board surface, a lottery is drawn to determine whether the game is successful or not, and if the lottery result is a win, it is advantageous to the player. There was a case where a privilege game was executed. Further, there is a configuration in which a plurality of privilege games with different degrees of advantage can be executed, a plurality of game states can be set, and the selection ratio of privilege games is changed according to the set game state. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). Further, in such a game machine, when a specific game state is set, a specific start opening is provided to make it easier to enter a ball than when another game state is set, and a game is played at the specific start opening. When a lottery based on the entry of a ball is executed, a privilege game with a high degree of advantage is more likely to be executed than when a game ball enters another start opening, and a specified There is a configuration in which the right of a lottery to be executed based on the entry of a game ball into a start hole can be retained and stored up to a predetermined number as an upper limit. In the gaming machine configured as described above, when a specific game state is set, it is possible for the player to efficiently execute a lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific start hole. Therefore, the player can be motivated to play the game with the aim of setting a specific game state.

However, when the end condition of a specific game state is satisfied, it becomes difficult to perform the lottery executed based on the entry of the game ball into the specific start hole. However, there is a problem that the desire to play the game is reduced. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine X1, it is possible to set the mode of notification executed by the notification executing means according to the number of acquired information stored in the storage means during the specific period of the first game state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to play a game for varying the number of acquired information stored so that various types of notification operations are executed by the notification execution means, and the interest in the game can be improved. effective.

In the game machine X1, the notification execution means executes acquisition suggestion notification for suggesting acquisition of the acquisition information during the first game state, and the notification mode setting means is the stored number determination means. A gaming machine X2, characterized in that, when it is determined that the acquisition information stored in the storage means is equal to or less than a predetermined number, a notification mode corresponding to the acquisition suggestion notification is set.

According to the gaming machine X2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1, when the number of acquisition information stored in the storage means in the specific period in the first gaming state is equal to or less than the predetermined number, the acquisition suggestion notification is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that a game that is easy for the player to understand can be provided. Further, when the number of acquisition information stored in the storage means in the specific period in the first game state is larger than a predetermined number, for example, when the storage means stores the upper limit number of acquisition information, an acquisition suggestion is made. Since it is possible to configure such that the notification is not executed, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being puzzled by the contents of the notification executed by the notification execution means.

In the game machine X1 or X2, a discrimination number measuring means for measuring the number of discriminations executed by the discrimination means in a state in which the first game state is set, and based on the measurement result by the discrimination number measuring means and transition condition determination means for determining whether the transition condition is satisfied, and the notification execution means is configured until the transition condition is satisfied after it is determined by the transition condition determination means that the transition condition is satisfied. A game machine X3 characterized in that the notification effect is executed within a specified period of time.

According to the game machine X3, in addition to the effects of the game machine X2, the following effects are produced. That is, since the notification effect is executed after it is determined that the transition condition is established, the player is made to play a game for acquiring the acquisition information within a limited period of time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically play the game until the last period in which the first game state is set.

The gaming machine X3 has period setting means capable of setting at least a first period and a second period set after the first period as the specific period, and the notification executing means has at least , the notification effect is executed during the first period, and the second period effect is executed during the second period based on the determination result of the memory number determination means at the end timing of the first period. and a second period effect execution means for executing the second period effect in the effect mode set by the period effect mode setting means. Characteristic game machine X4.

According to the game machine X4, in addition to the effects of the game machine X3, the effect mode of the second period effect is set based on the number of acquired information stored in the storage means after the notification effect is executed. can be done. Therefore, there is an effect that the production effect can be enhanced.

In the gaming machine X4, the number of acquired information stored in the storage means at the time the first period is set and the acquired information stored in the storage means at the end of the first period and an increase number determination means capable of determining the number of the acquired information stored in the storage means during the first period based on the number of A gaming machine X5 characterized in that the performance mode is set based on the determination result of means.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X4, the presentation mode of the second period presentation is set based on the number of acquired information stored during the first period, so the first period is set. By adjusting the number of acquired information stored at the point in time when the player changes the number of acquired information stored during the first period, it is possible to vary the presentation mode of the second period presentation. . Therefore, since different effects can be executed according to the game content executed by the player, there is an effect that the interest in the game can be improved.

The game machine X4 or X5 has pre-determination means for determining in advance the acquired information stored in the storage means before the determination based on the acquired information is executed, and the period effect mode setting means. is a gaming machine X6, wherein the performance mode is set based on the determination result of the prior determination means.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X5, it is possible to set the presentation mode of the second period presentation based on the preliminary determination result of the acquired information stored in the storage means. On the other hand, there is an effect that it is possible to make the player interested by the second period presentation.

In the game machine X6, the second period effect executing means is provided when the determination result of the determination means during execution is other than the specific determination result, and the determination result of the preliminary determination means is the specific determination result. In the case of indicating, the second period effect is executed until the determination result of the determination means based on the acquired information, which is the specific determination result, is notified. Game machine X7.

According to the gaming machine X7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X6, when the determination result of the prior determination means is a specific determination result, the effect execution means continues until the identification information corresponding to the prior determination is stopped and displayed. A performance is performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to pay attention to the effect executed during the second period.

In the gaming machine X7, the effect mode setting means sets a suggestive effect mode that suggests that the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific determination result before the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. A gaming machine X8 characterized by being a setting.

According to the gaming machine X8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X7, the suggestive effect mode suggests that the determination result of the preliminary determination means is a specific determination result before the dynamic display being executed is stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to understand which determination resulted in a specific determination result. Therefore, there is an effect that the amusement of the game can be improved.

<Characteristic Y group> (Set multiple time-saving end conditions and grant different benefits according to the time-saving end conditions that are met)
Determination means for executing determination when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, and privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when the result of the determination by the determination means is a specific determination result. , a game state setting means capable of setting a first game state in which the discrimination by the discrimination means is likely to be executed, and a second game state in which the discrimination is more difficult to execute than the first game state. In the machine, the game state setting means sets the second game state based on at least the establishment of a predetermined transition condition in a state in which the first game state is set; a transition condition setting means capable of setting a first transition condition and a second transition condition different from the first transition condition as conditions; and when the transition condition set by the transition condition setting means is satisfied and a privilege granting means capable of granting a predetermined privilege that is advantageous to the player based on the above, wherein the privilege granting means grants the first privilege when the first transition condition is satisfied, and the second privilege. A gaming machine Y1 is characterized in that a second privilege different from the first privilege is provided when a transition condition is satisfied.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, when a game ball enters a starting hole provided on a game board surface, a first lottery is conducted to determine whether the game is successful or not, and when the lottery result is a win, a player receives the game. There was a case in which a privilege game that is advantageous to the player is executed. Further, a movable member is provided in the starting port, and when the game ball is won in the second lottery executed when the game ball passes through the starting gate, the movable member is moved to allow the game ball to enter the starting port. There are things that make it easier. (For example, JP-A-2015-13075). In addition, in the gaming machine, when a specific game state is set, the specific game state is set by setting the fluctuation period of the second lottery to be shorter than when another game state is set. is set so that the second lottery is executed more frequently.

However, since the fluctuation period of the second lottery set during the specific game state is constant, the game becomes monotonous during the specific game state, and the player's motivation to play decreases. there were. It is an object of the above-described gaming machine to provide a game that enhances the enjoyment of the game by suppressing a decline in the player's desire to play.

According to the gaming machine Y1, when the first game state in which the acquisition information is easily acquired is set, it differs depending on the established transition condition among the plurality of transition conditions for transitioning from the first game state to the second game state. Benefits can be given. Therefore, even though the first game state has been set, it is possible to make it difficult for the first game state to end without obtaining a privilege. It is possible to motivate the player to play the game for making the setting, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine Y1, the transition condition setting means sets the condition to be established based on the fact that the number of determinations by the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set reaches a predetermined number of times. A game machine Y2 characterized in that it is set as a transition condition.

According to the gaming machine Y2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Y1, it is possible to set a limit to the number of determinations performed by the determination means during the period in which the first game state is set, so that the player is not overwhelmed. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress that the privilege is granted.

In gaming machine Y1 or Y2, variable ball entry means capable of changing between a first state in which game balls can enter and a second state in which game balls are more difficult to enter than in the first state, and predetermined execution specific game execution means for executing a specific game in which the variable ball entry means can be changed to the first state for a predetermined period when a condition is satisfied, and The determination is executed based on the entry of a game ball, and the first game state set by the game state setting means is a game in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the second game state. The game machine Y3 is characterized by being in a state.

In the gaming machine Y3, the privilege granting means imparts a game state in which the specific game is more likely to be executed than the first game state as the first privilege granted when the first transition condition is established. A gaming machine Y4 characterized by:

In the game machine Y4, determination means capable of executing a determination when a determination condition is satisfied, and dynamic display means for dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination executed by the determination means for a predetermined period of time. and dynamic display period setting means capable of setting a dynamic display period of the identification information dynamically displayed by the dynamic display means, wherein the predetermined execution condition is that the identification information is displayed in a specific manner. and the dynamic display period setting means displays a shorter dynamic display when the first privilege is granted than when the first privilege is not granted. A gaming machine Y5 characterized in that it facilitates the setting of the target display period.

In the game machine Y1 or Y5, the transition condition setting means causes the determination result of the determination means executed in the state where the first game state is set to be a special determination result different from the specific determination result. A gaming machine Y6 characterized in that a condition that is established based on the number of times reaching a predetermined number is set as the second transition condition.

According to the game machine Y6, in addition to the effects of the game machine Y1 or Y2, the first game state changes to the second game state according to the determination result of the determination means executed during the period in which the first game state is set. , the period during which the first game state continues can be made indefinite. Therefore, the player can play the game while expecting that the first game state will continue for a long period of time, thereby improving the interest of the game.

A gaming machine Z1 characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

A gaming machine Z2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines described above. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable prize winning device (specific prize winning port) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win prizes, and a value corresponding to the number of prizes won Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

A gaming machine Z3 characterized in that, in any one of the gaming machines described above, the gaming machine is a combination of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.
<Others>
2. Description of the Related Art Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines are provided with a display device such as a liquid crystal display device. In this conventional gaming machine, symbols are variably displayed on the display device, and the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined combination, thereby providing a winning game advantageous to the player. In addition, various images such as characters and scenery are displayed on the display device in addition to the patterns, and various entertainment effects are performed to improve the interest of the game (for example, Patent Document 1: 2003-325886).
However, further enhancement of interest is required.
The present technical idea was made in order to solve the above-described problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest of the player in the game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this object, the game machine of technical idea 1 includes a discrimination means capable of executing discrimination and a dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means. and a bonus game execution means capable of executing a bonus game advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, and performs an effect. Possible effect execution means, determination means capable of deciding to execute the effect by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and regulation means capable of regulating execution of a new effect. and a storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the execution of the performance determined by the determination means during the period in which the execution of the new performance is restricted by the regulation means, and a specific condition is established. and an effect control means capable of causing the effect executing means to execute an effect corresponding to the information stored in the storage means when the game is executed.
The gaming machine according to technical idea 2 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1, wherein the regulation means regulates execution of the production corresponding to a period during which a specific production is executed by the production execution means. is.
A gaming machine according to technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to technical idea 1 or 2, further comprising an acquiring means capable of acquiring information determined by the determining means and a memory storing the information acquired by the acquiring means. means, and pre-discrimination means capable of executing discrimination based on information stored in the storage means before discrimination is executed by the discrimination means, and the effect execution means is , the specific effect can be executed based on the result of determination by the preliminary determination means.
<effect>
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, there are discrimination means capable of executing discrimination, and dynamic display means capable of dynamically displaying identification information for indicating the discrimination result by the discrimination means on the display means. and privilege game execution means capable of executing a privilege game advantageous to the player when identification information for indicating a specific determination result is displayed on the display means, and effect execution capable of executing a performance. means, determination means capable of deciding to execute the effect by the effect execution means based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, regulation means capable of regulating execution of a new effect, and the regulation storage means capable of storing information corresponding to the execution of the performance determined by the determining means during the period in which the execution of the new performance restricted by the means is restricted; and when a specific condition is established, and an effect control means capable of causing the effect execution means to execute an effect corresponding to the information stored in the storage means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1, the following effects are achieved. That is, the regulating means regulates execution of the effect corresponding to a period during which the specific effect is being executed by the effect executing means.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in technical idea 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in technical idea 1 or 2, the following effects are achieved. That is, acquisition means capable of acquiring information determined by the determination means, storage means for storing the information acquired by the acquisition means, and storage means before determination is executed by the determination means and a preliminary determination means capable of executing determination based on information stored in the performance execution means, wherein the performance execution means is capable of executing the specific performance based on the determination result of the preliminary determination means. It is configured.
As a result, there is an effect that the player's interest in the game can be improved.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)

Claims (1)

a shooting means capable of shooting game balls into a game area;
a first ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means;
Acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a first condition that can be established based on the game ball entering the first ball entering means is satisfied;
a storage means capable of storing the predetermined information acquired by the acquisition means;
A game machine having a determination means capable of performing determination based on the predetermined information stored in the storage means when a first execution condition is satisfied,
means capable of generating a specific game state based on the result of the determination by the determination means being a specific determination result;
a second ball-entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means and different from the first ball-entering means;
A first position that allows a game ball to enter the second ball entering means, and a second position that makes it more difficult for a game ball to enter the second ball entering means than the first position. a displacement means displaceable between
a first displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the second position to the first position; and a second displacement control for displacing the displacement means positioned at the first position to the second position. displacement control, and displacement control means capable of at least
The displacement control means executes the first displacement control based on the establishment of a first condition that can be established in the specific game state, and the displacement means is positioned at the first position by the first displacement control. configured to execute the second displacement control based on the establishment of a second condition that can be established in a situation where the
The game machine is
A predetermined value is awarded to a player when a game ball enters at least the first ball entering means,
A first mode based on the execution of the determination by the determination means, a second mode based on the occurrence of the specific game state, and a third mode based on the predetermined ball entering the second ball entry means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured so that at least

Images